SECTION 25 10 10 ADVANCED UTILITY METERING ...

SECTION 25 10 10

ADVANCED UTILITY METERING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section includes the following for the advanced metering of the systems of the facility. The metered

systems include the electrical power, natural gas distribution, fuel gas and fuel oil, steam, steam

condensate, domestic water, recovered water and makeup water systems. The metering systems in each

facility are part of a Corporate-Wide utility metering system, rendering the VA accurate and automated

metering of its facilities’ energy and water flows. Metering systems are comprised of:

1. Server(s) and software

2. Communication network and interface modules for RS-232, RS-485 or Modbus TCP/IP, IEEE 802.3

data transmission protocols.

3. Electric meters

4. Volumetric flowmeters, temperature sensors and pressure transducers

5. Mass flowmeters

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL

COMPONENTS: Requirements for seismic restraint of nonstructural components.

B. Section 22 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING: meters and gages.

C. Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION: General

mechanical requirements, common to more than one section in mechanical.

D. Section 23 09 11, INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR BOILER PLANT: Flowmeters

E. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General electrical

requirements and items that are common to more than one section of Division 26.

F. Section 26 05 19, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600

VOLTS AND BELOW): Low voltage cable.

G. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for

personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.

H. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduits.

I. Section 26 24 13, DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS: Secondary distribution switchboards.

J. Section 26 24 19, MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS: Motor control assemblies.

25 10 10 – 1 SEISMICALLY UPGRADE BUILDING 7 (N017.01) OCTOBER 2014

25 10 10 VARHS 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AMR: Automatic meter reading is the technology of automatically collecting consumption, diagnostic, and

status data from water and energy metering devices (water, gas, electric, steam) and transferring that data to

a central database for billing, troubleshooting, and analyzing.

B. AUMS: Advanced Utility Metering System: the system described by this Section.

C. BACnet: BACnet is a Data Communications Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks. It is

defined by ASHRAE/ANSI Standard 135 (ISO 16484-5) standard protocol.

D. Data Over Cable Service Interface Specification (DOCSIS): an international standard defining

communications and operation support interface requirements for a data over cable system, by the Cable

Television Laboratories, Inc. consortium

E. Data Head (on meters): converts analog and pulse signals to digital signals for transmission to the Site Data

Aggregation Device. Also provides for limited storage of the digital signals.

F. Device Accuracy: accuracy in this section is based on actual flow, not full scale or full range. Device

accuracy measures the conversion of flow information to analog or pulse signals.

G. Ethernet: Local area network, based on IEEE 802.3 standards.

H. Firmware: Software (programs or data) that has been written onto read-only memory (ROM). Firmware is

a combination of software and hardware. Storage media with ROMs that have data or programs recorded

on them are firmware.

I. Gateway: Bi-directional protocol translator connecting control systems that use different communication

protocols.

J. GB: gigabyte. When used to describe data storage, "GB" represents 1024 megabytes.

K. HTML: Hypertext markup language.

L. I/O: Input/output.

M. KB: Short for kilobyte. When used to describe data storage, "KB" represents 1024 bytes.

N. KY Pulse: A term used by the metering industry to describe a method of measuring consumption of

electricity that is based on a relay changing status in response to the rotation of the disk in the meter.

O. LAN: Local area network. Sometimes plural as "LANs."

P. LCD: Liquid crystal display.

Q. LonMark: An association comprising of suppliers and installers of LonTalk products. The Association

provides guidelines for the implementation of the LonTalk protocol to ensure interoperability through

Standard implementation.


25 10 10 VARHS

R. LonTalk: An open standard protocol developed by the Echelon Corporation that uses a “Neuron Chip” for

communication.

S. LonWorks: Network technology developed by the Echelon Corporation.

T. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or remote-

control, signaling and power-limited circuits.

U. MB: megabyte. When used to describe data storage, "MB" represents 1024 kilobytes.

V. Mbps: Megabytes per second, equal to 8 megabits per second

W. Modbus TCP/IP: An open protocol for exchange of process data.

X. Monitoring: Acquisition, processing, communication, and display of equipment status data, metered

electrical parameter values, power quality evaluation data, event and alarm signals, tabulated reports, and

event logs.

Y. OTDR: Optical Time Domain Reflectometer. A test instrument that analyzes the light loss in an optical

fiber. Used to find faults, splices and bends in the line, it works by sending out a light pulse and measuring

its reflection. Such devices can measure fiber lines that are longer than 150 miles

Z. PC: Personal computer

AA. PICS, Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement: A written document that identifies the particular

options specified by BACnet that are implemented in a device.

BB. REO: Resident Engineer Office: the VA office administering the construction contract.

CC. Reporting Accuracy: this is the root-mean-square sum of all of the metering devices’ inaccuracies:

measurement inaccuracy, mechanical inaccuracy, analog-to-digital or pulse integration inaccuracy, etc., up

to the meter’s data head.

DD. rms: Root-mean-square value of alternating voltage, which is the square root of the mean value of the

square of the voltage values during a complete cycle.

EE. Router: A device that connects two or more networks at the network layer.

FF. RS-232: A Telecommunications Industry Association standard for asynchronous serial data

communications between terminal devices.

GG. RS-485: A Telecommunications Industry Association standard for multipoint communications using two

twisted-pairs.

HH. TB: terrabyte. When used to describe data storage, "TB" represents 1024 gigabytes.

II. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/internet protocol.


25 10 10 VARHS

JJ. Turn-down: the maximum flow divided by the minimum flow through a meter; used along with accuracy

requirements. For example, a meter shall be accurate to within 2% of actual flow with throughout a 20:1

turndown

KK. THD: Total harmonic distortion.

LL. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply; used both in singular and plural context.

MM. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair cabling, used to limit crosstalk and electromagnetic interference from the

environment

NN. WAN: Wide area network.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for

installation of units required for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced at least three years in manufacturing and installing power

monitoring and control equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful

in-service performance.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,

by a testing agency, and marked for intended use.

D. System Modifications: Make recommendations for system modification in writing to the VA. No system

modifications shall be made without prior written approval of the VA. Any modifications made to the

system shall be incorporated into the Operations and Maintenance Instructions, and other documentation

affected. Provide to the VA software updates for all software furnished under this specification during this

contract’s construction and verification periods and for the first two years after government acceptance. All

updated software shall be verified as part of this contract.

1.5 PERFORMANCE

A. The advanced utility metering system shall conform to the following:

1. Site Data Aggregation Device Graphic Display: The system shall display up to 4 graphics on a single

screen with a minimum of (20) dynamic points per graphic. All current data shall be displayed within

(10) seconds of the request.

2. Site Data Aggregation Device Graphic Refresh: The system shall update all dynamic points with

current data within ten seconds. Data refresh shall be automatic, without operator intervention.

3. Meter Scan: All changes of metered values shall be transmitted over the high-speed network such that

any data used or displayed at a controller or Site Data Aggregation Device will be current, within the

prior ten seconds.


25 10 10 VARHS

4. Alarm Response Time: The maximum time from when meter goes into alarm to when it is annunciated

at the workstation shall not exceed ten seconds.

5. Reporting Accuracy: Listed below are minimum acceptable reporting accuracies for all values within

the below minimum turn-down envelope reported by the meters:

Measured Variable Units

Measured

Minimum

Turn-Down of

Meter

Reporting Accuracy

(Note 1)

Electricity V, A, W, etc. n/a ±0.5% of measured

value

Natural Gas l/s (CFH) 10:1 ±2%

Steam kW (MBH) 20:1 ±2%

Condensate kW (MBH) 20:1 ±2%

Domestic Water flow l/s (GPH) 20:1 ±2%

Reclaimed Water flow l/s (GPH) 20:1 ±2%

Make-up Water to Boilers flow l/s (GPH) 10:1 ±2%

No. 2 Heating Oil l/s (GPH) 10:1 ±2%

Outside Air Temperature °C (°F) n/a ±2%

Outside Air Relative Humidity % rh n/a ±2.5%

Table 1.5: Meter Performance Criteria

Table Notes:

1. This table shows reporting accuracy, not merely the meter’s accuracy. Reporting accuracy

includes meter accuracy and data conversion accuracy. See Article 1.3 in this Section for

definition. Accuracy is shown against the measured value, not against the full range of the

meter.

2. l/s: liter per second

CFH: cubic feet per hour

kW: kilowatt

MBH: 1000’s British Thermal Units per hour

GPH: gallons per hour


25 10 10 VARHS 1.6 WARRANTY

A. Labor and materials for advanced utility metering systems shall be warranted for a period as specified

under Warranty in FAR clause 52.246-21.

B. Advance utility metering system failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced

at no cost or reduction in service to the owner. The system includes all computer equipment, transmission

equipment, and all sensors and metering devices.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: for each type of product indicated, Attach copies of approved Product Data submittals for

products (such as flowmeters, temperature sensors and pressure transmitters, switchboards and switchgear)

that describe advance utility metering features to illustrate coordination among related equipment and

utility metering and control.

B. Shop Drawings: include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Outline Drawings: Indicate arrangement of meters, components and clearance and access

requirements. Clearly identify system components, internal connections, and all field connections.

2. Block Diagram: Show interconnections between components specified in this Section and devices

furnished with power distribution system components. Indicate data communication paths and identify

networks, data buses, data gateways, concentrators, and other devices to be used. Describe

characteristics of network and other data communication lines.

3. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of

field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and communications wiring. Coordinate nomenclature and

presentation with a block diagram. Show all communications network components and include a

communications single-line diagram indicating device interconnection and addressing information for

all system devices. Identify terminal blocks used for interconnections and wire type to be used.

5. UPS sizing calculations for workstation.

C. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Self-study guide describing the process for setting equipment's network address; setting Owner's

options; procedures to ensure data access from any PC on the network, using a standard Web browser;

and recommended firewall setup.

2. Software operating and upgrade manuals.

3. Software Backup: On a compact disc, complete with Owner-selected options.

4. Device address list and the set point of each device and operator option, as set in applications software.

5. Graphic file and printout of graphic screens and related icons, with legend.


25 10 10 VARHS

6. "Quick-Start" guide to describe a simple, three-step commissioning process for setting the equipment’s

Ethernet address, and ensuring trouble-free data access from any PC on the network, using a standard

web browser.

D. Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future utility metering system

revisions.

E. Firmware Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying firmware to suit future power system revisions or

advanced utility metering system revisions. Firmware updates, and necessary software tools for firmware

updates, shall be downloadable from the internet. VA shall be able to update firmware, in equipment,

without removing device from the equipment. VA shall be capable of updating firmware over the utility

metering communication network or through local communication ports on the device.

F. Software licenses and upgrades required by and installed for operating and programming digital and analog

devices.

G. Qualification Data: For installer and manufacturer

H. Other Informational Submittals:

1. System installation and setup guides, with data forms to plan and record options and setup decisions.

I. Revise and update the Contract Drawings to include details of the system design. Drawings shall be on 17

by 11 inches sheets. Details to be shown on the Design Drawing include:

1. Details on logical structure of the network. This includes logical location of all network hardware.

2. Manufacturer and model number for each piece of computer and network hardware.

3. Physical location for each piece of network or computer hardware.

4. Physical routing of LAN cabling.

5. Physical and qualitative descriptions of connectivities.

1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For advanced utility metering system components and meters, to include

in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Operating and applications software documentation.

2. Software licenses.

3. Software service agreement.

4. PC installation and operating documentation, manuals, and software for the PC and all installed

peripherals. Software shall include system restore, emergency boot compact disks, and drivers for all

installed hardware. Provide separately for each PC.


25 10 10 VARHS

5. Hard copies of manufacturer's specification sheets, operating specifications, design guides, user's

guides for software and hardware, and PDF files on CD-ROM of the hard-copy submittal.

6. In addition to the copies required by 01 00 00, provide 5 bound paper copies of the Operation and

Maintenance Data and two compact disks (CD), with all Instructions as Acrobat PDF files. The pdf

files shall identical to the paper copies and shall Acrobat navigation tools including Bookmarks for

each Chapter.

7. The advanced utility metering system Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall include:

a. Procedures for the AUMS system start-up, operation and shut-down.

b. Final As-Built drawings, including actual LAN cabling routing shown on architectural

backgrounds.

1) IP address(es) as applicable for each piece of network hardware.

2) IP address for each computer server, workstation and networked printer.

3) Network identifier (name) for each printer, computer server and computer workstation.

4) CEA-709.1B address (domain, subnet, node address) for each CEA-709.1B TP/FT-10 to IP

Router.

c. Routine maintenance checklist, rendered in a Microsoft Excel format. The routine maintenance

checklist shall be arranged in a columnar format. The first column shall list all installed devices,

the second column shall list each device’s node identifier/address, the third column shall describe

each device’s physical location, the fourth column shall state the maintenance activity or state no

maintenance required, the fifth column shall state the frequency of the maintenance activity,

frequency of calibration and the sixth column for additional comments or reference.

d. Qualified service organization list.

e. In addition to the requirements in Section 01 33 23, the submittal shall include manufacturer

Installation Requirements.

f. Include complete instructions for calibration of each meter type and model.

g. Start-Up and Start-Up Testing Report.

h. Performance verification test procedures and reports.

i. Preventive Maintenance Work Plan.

j. In addition to factory-trained manufacturers' representatives requirements in 01 00 00, provide

signed letter by factory-trained manufacturers' representatives stating that the system and

components are installed in strict accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations.

B. Field quality-control test reports.


25 10 10 VARHS 1.9 LICENSING AGREEMENT

A. Licenses procured as part of this work become the property of the government upon acceptance of the

work. Licenses shall have no expiration.

B. Technical Support: Beginning with Government Acceptance, provide software support for five years.

C. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software

upgrades that become available within two years from date of Government Acceptance. Upgrading

software shall include the operating systems. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of

software.

1. Provide 30-day notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to

upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

1.10 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

A. Preventive Maintenance Requirements: provide a preventative maintenance plan with attached procedures

indicated by meter and component manufacturers. Perform maintenance procedures for a period of 1 year

after government acceptance, at frequencies and using procedures required by the meter and component

manufacturers. At a minimum and if the manufacturer is silent on its preventative maintenance

requirements, frequencies, deliverables and activities shall comply with the following:

1. Preventive Maintenance Work Plan: prepare a Preventive Maintenance Work Plan to schedule all

required preventive maintenance. VA approval of the Work Plan shall be obtained. Adhere to the

approved work plan to facilitate VA verification of work. If the Contractor finds it necessary to

reschedule maintenance, a written request shall be made to the VA detailing the reasons for the

proposed change at least five days prior to the originally scheduled date. Scheduled dates shall be

changed only with the prior written approval of the REO.

2. Semiannual Maintenance: perform the following Semiannual Maintenance as specified:

a. Perform data backups on all Server Hardware.

b. Run system diagnostics and correct diagnosed problems.

c. Perform fan checks and filter changes for AUMS hardware.

d. Perform all necessary adjustments on printers.

e. Resolve all outstanding problems.

f. Install new ribbons, ink cartridges and toner cartridges into printers, and ensure that there is at

least one spare ribbon or cartridge located at each printer.

3. Maintenance Procedures

a. Maintenance Coordination: Any scheduled maintenance event by Contractor that will result in

component downtime shall be coordinated with the VA as follows. Time periods shall be


25 10 10 VARHS

measured as actual elapsed time from beginning of equipment off-line period, including working

and non-working hours.

1) For non-redundant computer server hardware, provide 14 days notice, components shall be

off-line for no more than 8 hours.

2) For redundant computer server hardware, provide 7 days notice, components shall be off-line

for no more than 36 hours.

3) For active (powered) network hardware, provide 14 days notice, components shall be off-line

for no more than 6 hours.

4) For cabling and other passive network hardware, provide 21 days notice, components shall be

off-line for no more than 12 hours.

b. Software/Firmware: Software/firmware maintenance shall include operating systems, application

programs, and files required for the proper operation of the advanced utility metering system

regardless of storage medium. User- (project site-) developed software is not covered by this

contract, except that the advanced utility metering system software/firmware shall be maintained

to allow user creation, modification, deletion, and proper execution of such user-developed

software as specified. Perform diagnostics and corrective reprogramming as required to maintain

total advanced utility metering system operations as specified. Back up software before

performing any computer hardware and software maintenance. Do not modify any parameters

without approval from the VA. Any approved changes and additions shall be properly

documented, and the appropriate manuals shall be updated.

c. Network: Network maintenance shall include testing transmission media and equipment to verify

signal levels, system data rates, errors and overall system performance.

B. Service Call Reception

1. A VA representative will advise the Contractor by phone or in person of all maintenance and service

requests, as well as the classification of each based on the definitions specified. A description of the

problem or requested work, date and time notified, location, classification, and other appropriate

information will be placed on a Service Call Work Authorization Form by the VA.

2. The Contractor shall have procedures for receiving and responding to service calls during regular

working hours. A single telephone number shall be provided for receipt of service calls during regular

working hours. Service calls shall be considered received by the Contractor at the time and date the

telephone call is placed by the VA.

3. Separately record each service call request, as received on the Service Call Work Authorization form.

Complete the Service Call Work Authorization form for each service call. The completed form shall

include the serial number identifying the component involved, its location, date and time the call was

received, nature of trouble, names of the service personnel assigned to the task, instructions describing


25 10 10 VARHS

what has to be done, the amount and nature of the materials to be used, the time and date work started,

and the time and date of completion.

4. Respond to each service call request within two working hours. The status of any item of work must be

provided within four hours of the inquiry during regular working hours, and within sixteen hours after

regular working hours or as needed to repair equipment.

1.11 SPARE PARTS

A. Furnish spare parts described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Addressable Relays: One for every ten installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

2. Data Line Surge Suppressors: One for every ten of each type installed. Furnish at least one of each

type.

B. Furnish spare parts shall not be used for any warranty-required remediation.

1.12 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) form a part

of this specification to the extent referenced, unless otherwise noted. Publications are referenced in the text

by the basic designation only.

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

B16.1-1998 ......................................Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

B31.1-2007 ......................................Power Piping

B31.8-2007 ......................................Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems

B31.9-2008 ......................................Building Services Piping

B40.100-1998 ..................................Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments

C. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers

ASHRAE 135-2008 .........................A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control

Networks (ANSI)

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

A53-2006 .........................................Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

A106-2006 .......................................Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High Temperature Service

E. Consumer Electronics Association (CEA)

709.1B-2002 ....................................Control Network Protocol Specification


25 10 10 VARHS

709.3-1999 ......................................Free-Topology Twisted-Pair Channel Specification

852-A-2004 .....................................Tunneling Component Network Protocols Over Internet Protocol

Channels

F. Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

EMC-2002 .......................................FCC Electromagnetic Compliance Requirements

G. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE)

81-1983 ...........................................IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and

Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System

100-2000 .........................................The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms

802.1D-2004 ....................................Media Access Control Bridges

802.2-2003 ......................................Standards for Local Area Networks: Logical Link Control

802.3-2005 ......................................Information Technology - Telecommunications and Information

Exchange between Systems. Local and Metropolitan Area Networks -

Specific Requirements - Part 3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with

Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer

Specifications (ANSI)

1100-2005 .......................................Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic

Equipment (ANSI)

C37.90.1-2002 .................................Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Relays and Relay

Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus

C57.13-2008 ....................................Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers

C62.41.1-2002 .................................Guide on the Surges Environment in Low-Voltage(1000 V and Less)

AC Power Circuits

C62.41.2-2002 .................................Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage

(1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits

H. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

IEC 61000-2005 ..............................Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)- Part 4-5: Testing and

Measurement Techniques; Surge Immunity Test

I. National Electrical Contractors Association

NECA 1-2006 ..................................Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction

J. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)


25 10 10 VARHS

250-2008 .........................................Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

C12.1-2008 ......................................Electric Meters; Code for Electricity Metering

C12.20-2002 ....................................Electricity Meter - 0.2 and 0.5 Accuracy Classes

C62.61-1993 ....................................Gas Tube Surge Arresters on Wire Line Telephone Circuits

ICS 1-2008 ......................................Standard for Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements

K. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)

800, Part 39-2008 ............................Managing Risk from Information Systems: An Organizational

Perspective

800, Part 46-2009 ............................Guide to Enterprise Telework and Remote Access Security

800, Part 52-2009 ............................Recommended Security Controls for Federal Information Systems and

Organizations

(FIPS) 200-2006 ..............................Minimum Security Requirements for Federal Information and

Information Systems

L. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

30-08 ...............................................Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code

70-2008 ...........................................National Electrical Code (NEC)

54-06 ...............................................National Fuel Gas Code

85-07 ...............................................Boiler and Combustion Systems Hazard Code

101-06 .............................................Life Safety Code

262-2007 .........................................Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-

Handling Spaces

M. NSF International

14-03 ...............................................Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials

61-02 ...............................................Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects (Sections 1-9)

N. Telecommunications Industry Association, (TIA/EIA)

H-088C3 ..........................................Pathway Design Handbook

232-F-2002 ......................................Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit-

Terminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange

485-A-2003 .....................................Electrical Characteristics of Generators and Receivers for Use in

Balanced Digital Multipoint System


25 10 10 VARHS

568-C.1-2009...................................Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard

606-A-2002 .....................................Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure

607-A-2002 .....................................Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding

Requirements for Telecommunications

O. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

916-2007 .........................................Energy Management Equipment

5085-3-2007 ....................................UL Standard for Safety Standard Low Voltage

1244-2000 .......................................Electrical and Electronic Measuring and Testing Equipment

1581-2006 .......................................Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ADVANCED UTILITY METERING SYSTEM

A. Functional Description

1. Meter and record load profiles. Chart energy and water consumption patterns.

a. Calculate and record the following:

1) Load factor

2) Peak demand periods

3) Consumption correlated with facility activities

b. Measure and record metering data for the following:

1) Electricity

2) Steam and condensate

3) Domestic water

4) Natural gas

5) Oil

6) Used, Boiled/Evaporated, Reclaimed water

c. Software: calculate allocation of utility costs.

1) Automatically import energy and water usage records to allocate energy and water

2) Verify utility bills and analyze alternate energy rates.

d. Electric Power Quality Monitoring: Identify power system anomalies and measure, display,

capture waveforms, and record trends and alarms of the following power quality parameters:


25 10 10 VARHS

1) Voltage regulation and unbalance

2) Continuous three-phase rms voltage

3) Periodic max./min./avg. samples.

4) Harmonics

5) Voltage excursions

e. Emergency Load Shedding. Preserve critical loads or avoid total shutdown due to unforeseen loss

of power sources according to the following logic:

1) Determine system topology

2) Evaluate remaining loads and sources

3) Shed loads in less than 100 ms

f. Demand Management:

1) Peaking or co-generator control

2) Load interlocking

3) Load shedding

4) Load trimming

g. System: Report equipment status and power system control.

B. Communications Components and Networks

1. Site Data Aggregation Device and its networked meters shall communicate using BACNet protocol.

Backbone shall communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol and

BACnet/IP addressing as specified in ASHRAE/ANSI 135-2008, BACnet Annex J.

a. Control products, communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers shall comprise a

BACnet internetwork. Controller and operator interface communication shall conform to

ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2008, BACnet.

b. Each controller shall have a communication port for connection to an operator interface.

2. Network Configuration: High-speed, multi-access, open nonproprietary, industry standard LAN and

WAN and Internetworked LAN.

3. Communication protocol; LANs complying with RS-485 or RS-485 accessed through Ethernet,

100 Base-TX Ethernet, and Modbus TCP/IP.

4. Network Hardware

a. Building Point of Connection Hardware


25 10 10 VARHS

1) Active equipment and communication interfaces.

2) Switches, hubs, bridges, routers and servers.

b. IP Network Hardware

1) Wire and Cables, copper connectivity devices.

2) Fiber Optic Patch Panel.

3) Fiber Optic Media Converter

4) Ethernet Switch

5) IP Router

5. Communication Security

a. Remote teleworking and remote access of the network shall be through a firewall, at the Site Data

Aggregation Device, complying with the requirements associated with Level 1 security in the

Federal Information Processing Standard 140-2 (2002), Security Requirements for Cryptographic

Modules.

b. Direct access to network shall be restricted as described in

2.2 SITE DATA AGGREGATION DEVICE – PERSONAL COMPUTER WORKSTATION

A. Hardware

1. Rack-Mounted Server Hardware

a. Environmental Conditions: System components shall be capable of withstanding Indoor

installation in spaces that have environmental controls to maintain ambient conditions of 36 to 140

deg F dry bulb temperature and 20 to 95% relative humidity, noncondensing environmental

conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability.

b. Computer: Commercial rack-mounted with supporting 32- or 64-bit hardware (as limited by the

advanced utility metering system software) and software enterprise server. Internet Explorer v6.0

SP1 or higher, Windows Script Hosting version 5.6 or higher, Windows Message Queuing,

Windows Internet Information Services (IIS) v5.0 or higher, minimum 2.8 GHz processor,

minimum 4GB DDR3 SDRAM (minimum 1333 Mhz) memory, minimum 1 TB 7200 rpm SATA

hard drive with 16 MB cache, and 16 speed high density DVD-RW+/- optical drive.

c. Real-Time Clock:

1) Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 minute per month.

2) Time Keeping Format: 24-hour time format including seconds, minutes, hours, date, day, and

month; automatic reset by software.


25 10 10 VARHS

3) Clock shall function for one year without power.

4) Provide automatic time correction once every 24 hours by synchronizing clock with the Time

Service Department of the U.S. Naval Observatory.

d. Serial Ports: Four USB ports and two RS-232-F serial ports for general use, with additional ports

as required. Data transmission rates shall be selectable under program control.

e. Parallel Port: Enhanced.

f. Removable Disk Storage: Include minimum 1 TB removable hard disk, maximum average access

time of 10 ms, with appropriate controller:

g. Network Interface Card (NIC): integrated 10-100-1000 Base-TX Ethernet NIC with an RJ45

connector or a 100Base-FX Ethernet NIC with an SC/ST connector.

h. Cable Modem: 42.88 Mbps, DOCSIS 2.0 Certified, also backwards compatible with DOCSIS 2.0

and DOCSIS 1.1/1.0 standards. Provide Ethernet or USB connectivity.

i. Optical Modem: full duplex link, for use on 10 GBase-R single-mode and multi-mode fiber with a

XENPAK module.

j. Modem: 56,600 bits per second, full duplex for asynchronous communications. With error

detection, auto answer/autodial, and call-in-progress detection. Modem shall comply with

requirements in ITU-T v.34, ITU-T v.42, ITU-T v.42 Appendix VI for error correction, and ITU-

T v.42 BIS for data compression standards; and shall be suitable for operating on unconditioned

voice-grade telephone lines complying with 47 CFR 68.

k. Audible Alarm: Manufacturer's standard.

5. RS-232 ASCII Interface

a. ASCII interface shall allow RS-232 connections to be made between a meter or circuit monitor

operating as the host PC and any equipment that will accept RS-232 ASCII command strings, such

as local display panels, dial-up modems, and alarm transmitters.

b. Pager System Interface: Alarms shall be able to activate a pager system with customized message

for each input alarm.

c. RS-232 output shall be capable of connection to a pager interface that can be used to call a paging

system or service and send a signal to a portable pager. System shall allow an individual

alphanumeric message per alarm input to be sent to paging system. This interface shall support

both numeric and alphanumeric pagers.

d. Alarm System Interface: RS-232 output shall be capable of transmitting alarms from other

monitoring and alarm systems to workstation software.


25 10 10 VARHS

e. Cables: provide Plenum-Type, RS-232 Cable: Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30)

tinned copper conductors, plastic insulation, and individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded

pairs with 100 percent shield coverage; plastic jacket. Pairs are cabled on common axis with

No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned copper drain wire.

1) NFPA 70, Type CMP.

2) Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.

B. Software

1. Operating System (OS)

a. For a Site Data Aggregation Device connected to multiple utility meters, software shall reside on

the Server PC connected to a network able to poll and support over 1000 utility metering devices;

software shall be web-enabled with the option to add custom graphics displays and additional

web-enabled clients. BACNet, Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, RS-232, and RS-485 digital

communications.

b. Operating System Software: Based on 32- or 64-bit, Microsoft Windows operating system, as

required by the metering and database software. Software shall have the following features:

1) Multiuser and multitasking to allow independent activities and monitoring to occur

simultaneously at different workstations.

2) Graphical user interface to show pull-down menus and a menu tree format.

3) Capability for future additions within the indicated system size limits.

2. Office Automation Software shall consist of the e-mail, spreadsheet and word processing portions of

the project site's standard office automation software.

3. Virus Protection Software shall consist of the project site's standard virus protection software complete

with a virus definition update subscription.

4. Configuration server shall meet the requirements of CEA-852-A.

5. Network configuration tool shall meet the following minimum requirements:

a. It shall allow configuration of the network while off-line such that an operator may set up changes

to the network while disconnected from the network, and then execute all of them once connected.

b. It shall have a graphics-based user interface, and be able to display and print a graphical

representation of the control network.

c. It shall be capable of generating and printing a table containing domain/subnet/node address and

node identifier for the entire network or any subset thereof, selected by the User.

d. It shall be capable of merging two existing standard databases into a single standard database.


25 10 10 VARHS

6. Metering Software

a. Basic Requirements:

1) Fully compatible with and based on the approved operating system.

2) Password-protected operator login and access; three levels, minimum.

3) Password-protected setup functions.

4) Context sensitive on-line help.

5) Capability of creating, deleting, and copying files; and automatically maintaining a directory

of all files, including size and location of each sequential and random-ordered record.

6) Capability for importing custom icons into graphic views to represent alarms and I/O devices.

7) Automatic and encrypted backups for database and history; automatically stored at the Site

Data Aggregation Device and encrypted with a nine-character alphanumeric password, which

must be used to restore or read data contained in backup.

8) Operator audit trail for recording and reporting all changes made to user-defined system

options.

b. Server Functions:

1) Support other client PCs on the LAN and WAN.

2) Maintain recorded data in databases accessible from other PCs on the LAN and WAN.

c. Data Formats:

1) User-programmable export and import of data to and from commonly used Microsoft

Windows spreadsheet, database, billing, and other applications; using dynamic data exchange

technology.

2) Option to convert reports and graphics to HTML format.

3) Interactive graphics.

4) Option to send preprogrammed or operator designed e-mail reports.

5) Option to serve information to third-party applications via Object Linking and Embedding for

Process Control using open standards.

d. Metered data: Display metered values in real time with a rigid time-stamp. Couple all metered

data with measured outside air conditions at the relevant facility.

e. Metered Data alarms: Provide generic alarm modules to notify Users and highlight metered data

gaps, data spikes outside of range, and data timestamp errors.

1) Customize the generic alarm modules to the application.


25 10 10 VARHS

2) Modules shall allow for user adjustment of alarm criteria.

3) Alarm notices shall be shown via hyperlinks on the graphical User interface, and shall also be

shown by flags within the data set.

f. Automatic Data Scrubbing: Provide tools for User-programming of rules to scrub the data of the

followings errors: data gaps, data spikes outside of range, and data timestamp errors. Use these

rules to scrub the raw metered data. Flag all data which has been so scrubbed.

g. Remote control:

1) (for electrical load control) Display circuit-breaker status and allow breaker control.

2) User defined with load-shedding automatically initiated and executed schemes responding to

programmed time schedules, set points of metered demands, utility contracted load shedding,

or combinations of these.

h. Equipment Documentation: Database for recording of equipment ratings and characteristics; with

capability for graphic display on monitors.

i. User-Defined Events: Display and record with date and time stamps accurate to 0.1 second, and

including the following:

1) Operator log on/off

2) Attempted operator log on/off

3) All alarms

4) Equipment operation counters

5) Out-of-limit, pickup, trip, and no-response events.

j. Waveform Data (for electrical power monitoring): Display and record waveforms on demand or

automatically on an alarm or programmed event; include the graphic displays of the following,

based on user-specified criteria:

1) Phase voltages, phase currents, and residual current.

2) Overlay of three-phase currents, and overlay each phase voltage and current.

3) Disturbance and steady-state waveforms up to 512 points per cycle.

4) Transient waveforms up to 83,333 points per cycle on 60-Hz base.

5) Calculated waveform on a minimum of four cycles of data of the following:

a) THD

b) rms magnitudes

c) Peak values


25 10 10 VARHS

d) Crest factors

e) Magnitude of individual harmonics

k. Data Sharing: Allow export of recorded displays and tabular data to third-party applications

software on the local server.

l. Activity Tracking Software:

1) Automatically compute and prepare activity demand and energy-use statements based on

metering of energy use and peak demand integrated over user-defined interval.

2) Intervals shall be same as used by electric utilities, including current vendor.

3) Import metered data from saved records that were generated by metering and monitoring

software.

4) Maintain separate directory for each activity's historical billing information.

5) Prepare summary reports in user-defined formats and time intervals.

m. Passwords

n. Protocol Drivers

o. System Graphic Displays: provide interactive color-graphics platform with pull-down menus and

mouse-driven generation of power system graphics, in formats widely used for such drafting; to

include the following:

1) Site plan

2) Floor plans

3) Equipment elevations

4) Single-line diagrams

5) Custom graphic screens configured, not programmed, using drag-and-drop tools available

within the software.

p. Alarms: display and record alarm messages from discrete input and controls outputs, according to

user programmable protocol.

1) Functions requiring user acknowledgment shall run in background during computer use for

other applications and override other presentations when they occur.

q. Trending: display and record data acquired in real-time from different meters or devices, in

historical format over user-defined time; unlimited as to interval, duration, or quantity of trends.

1) Spreadsheet functions of sum, delta, percent, average, mean, standard deviation, and related

functions applied to recorded data.


25 10 10 VARHS

2) Charting, statistical, and display functions of standard Windows-based spreadsheet.

r. Report Generation: User commands initiate the reporting of a list of current alarm, supervisory,

and trouble conditions in system or a log of past events.

1) Print a record of user-defined alarm, supervisory, and trouble events on workstation printer.

a) Sort and report by device name and by function.

b) Report type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble), description, date, and time of

occurrence.

c) Differentiate alarm signals from other indications.

d) When system is reset, report reset event with same information concerning device,

location, date, and time.

7. BACnet: Site Data Aggregation Device shall have demonstrated interoperability during at least one

BMA Interoperability Workshop and shall substantially conform to BACnet Operator Workstation (B-

OWS) device profile as specified in ASHRAE/ANSI 135-2001, BACnet Annex L

8. Site Data Aggregation Device shall periodically upload metered data to the VA Corporate-wide server:

a. The metering software shall provide periodic upload (adjustable interval, initially set on 15-minute

intervals) of the scrubbed and collected data.

b. The VA’s Corporate wide server accepts the following data structures:

1) Information structured using the 2005 and 2008 SQL server database engine.

2) The following data stores are acceptable:

a) Databases: SQL Server, DB2, Oracle, Access, Sybase, MySQL.

b) Flat files: .CSV, .XLS, .TXT, .XML, .PQDIF

c. The minimum data to be uploaded (per meter) includes:

1) A time stamp

2) A device identifier

3) A flow (power or water flow) value

4) A flow order of magnitude

5) Description of the flow’s units

6) The outside air drybulb temperature at the time stamp

7) The outside air wetbulb temperature at the time stamp

8) A “scrubbed data” flag


25 10 10 VARHS

9) An irregular data alarm stamp

2.3 CABLE SYSTEMS - TWISTED PAIR AND FIBER OPTIC

A. General:

1. All metallic cable sheaths, etc. (i.e.: risers, underground, station wiring, etc. shall be grounded.

2. Install temporary cable and wire pairs so as to not present a pedestrian safety hazard. Provide for all

associated work for any temporary installation and for removal when no longer necessary. Temporary

cable installations are not required to meet Industry Standards; but, must be reviewed and approved by

the VA prior to installation.

3. Cable conductors to provide protection against induction in circuits. Crosstalk attenuation within the

System shall be in excess of -80 dB throughout the frequency ranges specified.

4. Minimize the radiation of RF noise generated by the System equipment so as not to interfere with

audio, video, data, computer main distribution frame (MDF), telephone customer service unit (CSU),

and electronic private branch exchange (EPBX) equipment the System may service.

5. The as-installed drawings shall identify each cable as labeled, used cable, and bad cable pairs.

6. Label system’s cables on each end. Test and certify cables in writing to the VA before conducting

proof-of-performance testing. Minimum cable test requirements are for impedance compliance,

inductance, capacitance, signal level compliance, opens, shorts, cross talk, noise, and distortion, and

split pairs on all cables in the frequency ranges specified. The cable tests shall demonstrate the

operation of this cable at not less than 10 mega (m) Hertz (Hz) full bandwidth, fully channel loaded

and a Bit Error Rate of a minimum of 10-6 at the maximum rate of speed. Make available all cable

installation and test records at acceptance testing by the VA and shall thereafter be maintained in the

Facility’s Telephone Switch Room. All changes (used pair, failed pair, etc.) shall be posted in these

records as the change occurs.

7. Coordinate with the Electrical Contractor to install the telephone entrance cable to the nearest point of

entry into the Facility and as shown on the drawings. Coordinate with the VA and the Electrical

Contractor to provide all cable pairs/circuits from the Facility point of entry to the Telephone Switch

Room all telephone, FTS, DHCP, ATM, Frame Relay, data, pay stations, patient phones, and any low

voltage circuits as described herein.

8. Provide all cable pairs/circuits from the Server Room and establish circuits throughout the Facility for

all cabling as described herein.

9. Provide proper test equipment to demonstrate that cable pairs meet each OEM’s standard transmission

requirements, and guarantee the cable will carry data transmissions at the required speeds, frequencies,

and fully loaded bandwidth.

B. LAN COPPER CABLES


25 10 10 VARHS

1. Comply with Section 27 15 00 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."

2. RS-485 Cable:

a. PVC-Jacketed, RS-485 Cable: Paired, 2 pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned

copper conductors, PVC insulation, unshielded, PVC jacket, and NFPA 70, Type CMG.

3. Unshielded Twisted Pair Cables: Category 5e or 6 as specified for horizontal cable for data service in

Section 27 15 00 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."

4. Cabling products shall be tested and certified for use at data speeds up to at least 100 Mbps. Other

types of media commonly used within IEEE Std 802.3 LANs (e.g., 10Base-T and 10Base-2) shall be

used only in cases to interconnect with existing media. Short lengths of media and transceivers may be

used in these applications. Provide separately orderable media, taps and connectors.

5. Ethernet Switch shall be IEEE Std 802.3 bridges which shall function as the center of a distributed-star

architecture and shall be "learning" bridges with spanning tree algorithms in accordance with IEEE Std

802.1D. The switch shall support the connected media types and shall have a minimum of 150% the

required ports and no fewer than 4 ports. One port shall be switch selectable as an uplink port.

6. Provide IP router network equipment. The routers shall be fully configurable for protocol types,

security, and routing selection of sub-networks. The router shall meet all requirements of RFC 1812.

C. LAN FIBER OPTICAL CABLES

1. Interior Fiber Optic Cable: Interior Fiber Optic Cable shall be Multimode or Singlemode fiber,

62.5/125 micron for multimode or 10/125 micron for singlemode micron with SC or ST connectors as

specified in TIA-568-C.1. Terminations, patch panels, and other hardware shall be compatible with

the specified fiber and shall be as specified in Section 27 15 00 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."

The data communications equipment shall use the 850-nm range of multimode or 1310-nm range of

singlemode fiber-optic cable. Fiber-optic cable shall be suitable for use with the 100Base-FX standard

as defined in IEEE Std 802.3.

2. Exterior Fiber Optic Cable: Exterior Fiber Optic Cable shall be Multimode or Singlemode Fiber,

62.5/125 micron for multimode or 10/125 micron for singlemode micron with SC or ST connectors as

specified in TIA-568-C.1. Terminations, patch panels, and other hardware shall be compatible with the

specified fiber and shall be as specified in Section 27 15 00 "Communications Horizontal Cabling.".

The data communications equipment shall use the 850-nm range of multimode or 1310-nm range of

singlemode fiber-optic cable. Fiber-optic cable shall be suitable for use with the 100Base-FX standard

as defined in IEEE Std 802.3.

3. Fiber Optic Patch Panels shall be wall or rack mountable and designed to provide termination facilities

for up to 24 fibers. Unit shall also have capability to be equipped with spliced trays, six packs (for

adapters), and blank panels for easy termination of the fiber bundles and tube cables. Fiber-optic

terminating equipment shall provide for mounting of ST or SC connectors on an optical patch panel.


25 10 10 VARHS

Provide fiber-cable management and cable-routing hardware to assure conformance to minimum fiber

and cable bend radii. Connectors on the patch panel shall be ST or SC feed through. Provide access to

both sides of the panel. The patch panel for the connectors shall be mounted to facilitate rearrangement

and identification. Each apparatus shall have cabling and connection instructions associated with it.

4. Fiber Optic media converter shall provide media conversion between layer 1 copper and fiber media to

support data rates equal to the greater of the physical layer or 100 Mbps as specified in IEEE Std

802.3.

D. LOW-VOLTAGE WIRING

1. Low-Voltage Control Cable: Multiple conductor, color-coded, No. 20 AWG copper, minimum.

a. Sheath: PVC; except in plenum-type spaces, use sheath listed for plenums.

b. Ordinary Switching Circuits: Three conductors, unless otherwise indicated.

c. Switching Circuits with Pilot Lights or Locator Feature: Five conductors, unless otherwise

indicated.

E. WIRELESS MODEMS

Provide wireless modems for high speed, point-to-point Ethernet communications between sites.

Transceivers shall be single integral units and may be mounted within the building in a NEMA 1 enclosure

or weatherproof with integral antenna and pole mounted. System shall have the following features as a

minimum:

1. 2.4GHz Industrial/Scientific/Medical (ISM).

2. Security protocol shall utilize a minimum of 128-bit data encryption. Transceiver shall have status

indicators for power, ethernet link status and RF link status.

3. Operating Conditions: 0 degrees C to 55 degrees C, 85% relative humidity (32 degrees F to 131

degrees F, 85% relative humidity).

4. Transmitter/Receiver/Antenna combination shall provide less than 0.005% frame error rate at 10Mbps

data rate between sites.

5. Antennas may be omni-directional or directional as required for system gain. Antennas and supports

shall withstand a combined load of ½” ice and 125mph wind loading.

6. Provide heavy-duty antenna masks and roof mask mount to support antennas. All hardware shall be

stainless steel. Ground antenna mast per NFPA 780.

7. Coaxial cable shall be 0.200 diameter minimum for lengths below 50’ and 0.400 diameter or greater

for length greater than 50’.


25 10 10 VARHS

8. Surge suppressors for coaxial cables shall be rated for the frequency of operation, utilize gas tube

technology and have a maximum let thru of 1mJ. Provide UL1449 listed, Type 1, 50kA, 120V, surge

protective device for each power circuit.

2.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground cable shields, drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground

loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Comply with VA 27 05 26

Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems and with VA 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for

Electrical Systems.

2.5 METER COMMUNICATION

A. Provide a BACNet network allowing communication from the meters’ data heads to the Site Data

Aggregation Device.

B. Provide data heads at each meter, converting analog and pulsed information to digital information. Data

heads shall allow for up to 24 hours of data storage (including time stamp, measured value, and scaling

factor).

1. Each data head shall reside on a BACnet network using the MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.

Each data head shall have a communication port for connection to an operator interface.

2. Environment: Data Head hardware shall be suitable for the conditions ranging from -29°C to 60°C (-

20°F to 140°F). Data Heads used outdoors and/or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted within

waterproof enclosures and shall be rated for operation at conditions ranging from -29°C to 60°C (-20°F

to 140°F).

3. Provide a local keypad and display for interrogating and editing data. An optional system security

password shall be available to prevent unauthorized use of the keypad and display.

4. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. All wiring

connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card

connected by a ribbon cable.

5. Memory. The building controller shall maintain all BIOS and data in the event of a power loss for at

least 72 hours.

6. Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage

rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage. Operation shall be

protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).

2.6 ELECTRICAL POWER METERS AND SUB-METERS

A. ELECTRICAL METER APPLICATIONS


25 10 10 VARHS

1. Energy meters in the advanced utility metering system shall have models available for amperage

ranges of 100-2400 amperes.

a. The RS-485 communications shall provide communications links up to 10,000 feet long.

2. Power meters shall be installed as part of the advanced utility metering system.

a. All setup parameters required by the power meter shall be stored in nonvolatile memory and

retained in the event of a control power interruption.

b. The power meter may be applied in three-phase, three- or four- wire systems.

c. The power meter shall be capable of being applied without modification at nominal frequencies of

50, 60, or 400 Hz.

d. The power meter shall provide for onboard data logging, able to log data, alarms, waveforms and

events.

B. Physical and Common Requirements

1. Electrical power meters shall be separately mounted, and enclosed in a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.

Environmental Conditions: System components shall be capable of withstanding the following

environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating

capability:

a. Ambient conditions of 0 to 140 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 95 percent relative humidity,

noncondensing.

C. Current and voltage ratings:

1. Designed for use with current inputs from standard instrument current transformers with 5-A

secondary and shall have a metering range of 0-10 A.

2. Withstand ratings shall be not less than 15 A, continuous; 50 A, lasting over 10 seconds, no more

frequently than once per hour; 500 A, lasting 1 second, no more frequently than once per hour.

3. Voltage inputs from standard instrument potential transformers with 120 volt secondary output. The

power meter shall support PT primaries through 3.2 MV.

4. The power meter shall operate properly over a wide range of control power including 90-457 VAC or

100-300 VDC.

D. Electrical measurements and calculated values

1. Power meters shall include the following rms Real-Time Measurements:

a. Current: Each phase, neutral, average of three phases, percent unbalance.

b. Voltage: Line-to-line each phase, line-to-line average of three phases, line-to-neutral each phase,

line-to-neutral average of three phases, line-to-neutral percent unbalance.


25 10 10 VARHS

c. Power: Per phase and three-phase total.

d. Reactive Power: Per phase and three-phase total.

e. Apparent Power: Per phase and three-phase total.

f. True Power Factor: Per phase and three-phase total.

g. Displacement Power Factor: Per phase and three-phase total.

h. Frequency

i. THD: Current and voltage.

j. Accumulated Energy: Real kWh, reactive kVARh, apparent kVAh (signed/absolute).

k. Incremental Energy: Real kWh, reactive kVARh, apparent kVAh (signed/absolute).

l. Conditional Energy: Real kWh, reactive kVARh, apparent kVAh (signed/absolute).

2. Power meters shall perform the following demand current calculations, per phase, three-phase average

and neutral:

a. Present

b. Running average

c. Last completed interval

d. Peak

3. Power meters shall perform the following demand real power calculations, three-phase total:

a. Present

b. Running average


d. Predicted

e. Peak

f. Coincident with peak kVA demand

g. Coincident with kVAR demand

4. Power meters shall perform the following demand reactive power calculations, three-phase total:

a. Present

b. Running average


d. Predicted


25 10 10 VARHS

e. Peak



5. Power meters shall perform the following demand apparent power calculations, three-phase total:

a. Present

b. Running average


d. Predicted

e. Peak



6. Power meters shall perform the following average true power factor calculations, demand coincident,

three-phase total:

a. Last completed interval

b. Coincident with kW peak

c. Coincident with kVAR peak

d. Coincident with kVA peak

7. Power Analysis Values:

a. THD, Voltage and Current: Per phase, three phase, and neutral

b. Displacement Power Factor: Per phase, three phase

c. Fundamental Voltage, Magnitude and Angle: Per phase

d. Fundamental Currents, Magnitude and Angle: Per phase

e. Fundamental Real Power: Per phase, three phase

f. Fundamental Reactive Power: Per phase

g. Harmonic Power: Per phase, three phase

h. Phase rotation

i Unbalance: Current and voltage

j. Harmonic Magnitudes and Angles for Current and Voltages: Per phase, up to 31st harmonic


25 10 10 VARHS

8. Power meters shall perform one of the following demand calculations, selectable by the User; meters

shall be capable of performance of all of the following demand calculations.

a. Block interval with optional subintervals: Adjustable for 1-minute intervals, from 1 to 60 minutes.

User-defined parameters for the following block intervals:

1) Sliding block that calculates demand every second, with intervals less than 15 minutes, and

every 15 seconds with an interval between 15 and 60 minutes.

2) Fixed block that calculates demand at end of the interval.

3) Rolling block subinterval that calculates demand at end of each subinterval and displays it at

end of the interval.

b. Demand calculations initiated by a Utility-furnished synchronization signal:

1) Signal is a pulse from an external source. Demand period begins with every pulse.

Calculation shall be configurable as either a block or rolling block calculation.

2) Signal is a communication signal. Calculation shall be configurable as either a block or

rolling block calculation.

3) Demand can be synchronized with clock in the power meter.

c. Minimum and maximum values: Record monthly minimum and maximum values, including date

and time of record. For three-phase measurements, identify phase of recorded value. Record the

following parameters:

1) Line-to-line voltage

2) Line-to-neutral voltage

3) Current per phase

4) Line-to-line voltage unbalance

5) Line-to-neutral voltage unbalance

6) Power factor

7) Displacement power factor

8) Total power

9) Total reactive power

10) Total apparent power

11) THD voltage L-L

12) THD voltage L-N


25 10 10 VARHS

13) THD current

14) Frequency

d. Harmonic calculation: display and record the following:

1) Harmonic magnitudes and angles for each phase voltage and current through 31st harmonic.

Calculate for all three phases, current and voltage, and residual current. Current and voltage

information for all phases shall be obtained simultaneously from same cycle.

2) Harmonic magnitude reported as a percentage of the fundamental or as a percentage of rms

values, as selected by the VA.

E. Waveform Capture:

1. Capture and store steady-state waveforms of voltage and current channels; initiated manually. Each

capture shall be for 3 cycles, 128 data points for each cycle, allowing resolution of harmonics to 31st

harmonic of basic 60 Hz.

2. Capture and store disturbance waveform captures of voltage and current channels, initiated

automatically based on an alarm event. Each capture shall be fully configurable for duration with

resolution of at least 128 data points per cycle, for all channels simultaneously. Waveform shall be

configurable to capture pre-event cycles for analysis.

3. Store captured waveforms in internal nonvolatile memory; available for PC display, archiving, and

analysis.

F. Meter accuracy:

1. Comply with ANSI C12.20, Class 0.5; and IEC 60687, Class 0.5 for revenue meters.

2. Accuracy from Light to Full Rating:

a. Power: Accurate to 0.5 percent of reading.

b. Voltage and Current: Accurate to 0.5 percent of reading.

c. Power Factor: Plus or minus 0.005, from 0.5 leading to 0.5 lagging.

d. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.01 Hz at 45 to 67 Hz.

G. Meter input, sampling, display, output, recording and reading Capabilities

1. Input: One digital input signal.

a. Normal mode for on/off signal.

b. Demand interval synchronization pulse, accepting a demand synchronization pulse from a utility

demand meter.

c. Conditional energy signal to control conditional energy accumulation.


25 10 10 VARHS

d. GPS time synchronization.

2. Sampling:

a. Current and voltage shall be digitally sampled at a rate high enough to provide accuracy to 63rd

harmonic of 60-Hz fundamental.

b. Power monitor shall provide continuous sampling at a rate of 128 samples per cycle on all voltage

and current channels in the meter.

3. Display Monitor:

a. Backlighted LCD to display metered data with touch-screen or touch-pad selecting device.

b. Touch-screen display shall be a minimum 12-inch diagonal, resolution of 800 by 600 RGB pixels,

256 colors; NEMA 250, Type 1 display enclosure.

c. Display four values on one screen at same time.

1) Coordinate list below with meter capabilities specified in subparagraphs above.

2) Current, per phase rms, three-phase average and neutral.

3) Voltage, phase to phase, phase to neutral, and three-phase averages of phase to phase and

phase to neutral.

4) Real power, per phase and three-phase total.

5) Reactive power, per phase and three-phase total.

6) Apparent power, per phase and three-phase total.

7) Power factor, per phase and three-phase total.

8) Frequency.

9) Demand current, per phase and three-phase average.

10) Demand real power, three-phase total.

11) Demand apparent power, three-phase total.

12) Accumulated energy (MWh and MVARh).

13) THD, current and voltage, per phase.

d. Reset: Allow reset of the following parameters at the display:

1) Peak demand current.

2) Peak demand power (kW) and peak demand apparent power (kVA).

3) Energy (MWh) and reactive energy (MVARh).


25 10 10 VARHS

4. Outputs:

a. Operated either by user command sent via communication link, or set to operate in response to

user-defined alarm or event.

b. Closed in either a momentary or latched mode as defined by user.

c. Each output relay used in a momentary contact mode shall have an independent timer that can be

set by user.

d. One digital KY pulse to a user-definable increment of energy measurement. Output ratings shall

be up to 120-V ac, 300-V dc, 50 mA, and provide 3500-V rms isolation.

e. One relay output module, providing a load voltage range from 20- to 240-V ac or from 20- to 30-

V dc, supporting a load current of 2 A.

f. Output Relay Control:

1) Relay outputs shall operate either by user command sent via communication link or in

response to user-defined alarm or event.

2) Normally open and normally closed contacts, field configured to operate as follows:

a) Normal contact closure where contacts change state for as long as signal exists.

b) Latched mode when contacts change state on receipts of a pickup signal; changed state is

held until a dropout signal is received.

c) Timed mode when contacts change state on receipt of a pickup signal; changed state is

held for a preprogrammed duration.

d) End of power demand interval when relay operates as synchronization pulse for other

devices.

e) Energy Pulse Output: Relay pulses quantities used for absolute kWh, absolute kVARh,

kVAh, kWh In, kVARh In, kWh Out, and kVARh Out.

f) Output controlled by multiple alarms using Boolean-type logic.

5. Onboard Data Logging:

a. Store logged data, alarms, events, and waveforms in 2 MB of onboard nonvolatile memory.

b. Stored Data:

1) Billing Log: User configurable; data shall be recorded every 15 minutes, identified by month,

day, and 15-minute interval. Accumulate 24 months of monthly data, 32 days of daily data,

and between 2 to 52 days of 15-minute interval data, depending on number of quantities

selected.


25 10 10 VARHS

2) Custom Data Logs: three user-defined log(s) holding up to 96 parameters. Date and time

stamp each entry to the second and include the following user definitions:

a) Schedule interval.

b) Event definition.

c) Configured as "fill-and-hold" or "circular, first-in first-out."

3) Alarm Log: Include time, date, event information, and coincident information for each

defined alarm or event.

4) Waveform Log: Store captured waveforms configured as "fill-and-hold" or "circular, first-in

first-out."

c. Default values for all logs shall be initially set at factory, with logging to begin on device power

up.

6. Alarms:

a. User Options:

1) Define pickup, dropout, and delay.

2) Assign one of four severity levels to make it easier for user to respond to the most important

events first.

3) Allow for combining up to four alarms using Boolean-type logic statements for outputting a

single alarm.

b. Alarm Events:

1) Over/undercurrent

2) Over/undervoltage

3) Current imbalance

4) Phase loss, current

5) Phase loss, voltage

6) Voltage imbalance

7) Over kW demand

8) Phase reversal

9) Digital input off/on

10) End of incremental energy interval

11) End of demand interval


25 10 10 VARHS 2.7 STEAM, WATER, OIL, GAS METER DEVICES

A. Steam, Water, oil and gas meter applications: Volume flow, mass flow and energy flow devices provided

for boiler plant control and monitoring will be uses for data input to advance metering system. Data

communication to Advanced metering system service will performed using boiler plant RS485 Modbus

communications. Refer to SECTION 23 09 11, INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR BOILER

PLANT.

1. Steam Meters: Vortex-shedding flowmeters. Refer to SECTION 23 09 11, INSTRUMENTATION

AND CONTROL FOR BOILER PLANT

2. Boiler Feedwater, Steam Condensate, and Make-up Water Meters Boiler Systems: Refer to SECTION

23 09 11, INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR BOILER PLANT

3. Natural Gas Meters: Refer to SECTION 23 09 11, INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR

BOILER PLANT

4. Fuel Oil Meters: Refer to SECTION 23 09 11, INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR

BOILER PLANT

5. Potable Water, Non-potable Water, and Reclaimed Water Meters: Refer to SECTION 23 09 11,

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR BOILER PLANT

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Cabling

1. Install Category 5e UTP, Category 6 UTP, and optical fiber cabling system as detailed in TIA-568-C.1,

TIA/EIA-568-B.2, or TIA-568-C.3.

2. Screw terminals shall not be used except where specifically indicated on plans.

3. Use an approved insulation displacement connection (IDC) tool kit for copper cable terminations.

4. Do not untwist Category 5e, Category 6 UTP cables more than 12 mm (1/2 inch) from the point of

termination to maintain cable geometry.

5. Provide service loop on each end of the cable, 3 m (10 feet) at the server rack and 304 mm (12 inches)

at the meter.

6. Do not exceed manufacturers' cable pull tensions for copper and optical fiber cables.

7. Provide a device to monitor cable pull tensions. Do not exceed 110 N (25 pounds) pull tension for four

pair copper cables.

8. Do not chafe or damage outer jacket materials.

9. Use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer.


25 10 10 VARHS

10. Do not over cinch cables, or crush cables with staples.

11. For UTP cable, bend radii shall not be less than four times the cable diameter.

12. Cables shall be terminated; no cable shall contain unterminated elements.

13. Cables shall not be spliced.

14. Label cabling in accordance with paragraph Labeling in this section.

B. Labeling

1. Labels: Provide labeling in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. Handwritten labeling is unacceptable.

Stenciled lettering for all circuits shall be provided using laser printer.

2. Cables: Cables shall be labeled using color labels on both ends with identifiers in accordance with

TIA/EIA-606-A.

C. Grounding: ground exposed, non-current-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway

systems, grounding conductor in metallic and nonmetallic raceways, telecommunications system grounds,

and grounding conductor of nonmetallic sheathed cables, as well as equipment to eliminate shock hazard

and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

Comply with VA 27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS and

with VA 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

D. Surge Protection

1. Provide surge protective devices on all metallic cables entering and leaving an interior environment to

an exterior environment or vice versa, i.e. surge protective device at each interior location of a

penetration to the exterior environment.

E. Network Hardware

1. System components and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions and as shown. Necessary interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a

complete and operable wired or wireless data transmission system shall be provided and shall be fully

integrated with the configured network chosen for the project.

F. Computer Hardware

1. Provide the server where shown on the plans or indicated diagrammatically.

G. Computer Software

1. User friendly software shall be suitable for operation on server which serve as site data aggregation

devices by monitoring the meters in the system, recording events, indicating alarm conditions, and

logging and displaying system reports.


25 10 10 VARHS

2. The software shall be developed by the manufacturer of the monitoring devices, and shall be designed

specifically for energy, power monitoring and control. Additional utilities, i.e. water, air gas, electric

and steam shall also be easily integrated.

3. The software shall be configured, not programmed. All software shall be configured by the vendor and

delivered ready to use. This configuration shall include preparation of all graphics, displays, and

interactive one-line diagrams required as a part of this project.

a. Configuration shall be to the point that when monitoring devices are required to be added, the user

shall only convey to the software the communications address and type of device.

4. The software shall be a standard product offering with no customization required and clients shall

interface with the server or computer workstation via Internet Explorer browser.

a. The web-enabled interactive graphics client shall only reside on the server PC, client PC not

required to host any application software other than Internet Explorer 6.0 SP1 or higher browser to

become a fully functional system.

H. Electrical Meters

1. Power monitoring and control components shall all be factory installed, wired and tested prior to

shipment to the job site.

2. All control power, CT, PT and data communications wire shall be factory wired and harnessed within

the equipment enclosure.

3. Where external circuit connections are required, terminal blocks shall be provided and the

manufacturer’s drawings must clearly identify the interconnection requirements including wire type to

be used.

4. All wiring required to externally connect separate equipment lineups shall be furnished and installed at

the site as part of the contractor’s responsibility.

5. Contractor interconnection wiring requirements shall be clearly identified on the power monitoring and

control system shop drawings.

I. Water, Oil and Gas Meters: Refer to SECTION 23 09 11, INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR

BOILER PLANT

3.2 ADJUSTING AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Install a permanent wire marker on each wire at each termination.

B. Identifying numbers and letters on the wire markers shall correspond to those on the wiring diagrams used

for installing the systems.

C. Wire markers shall retain their markings after cleaning.


25 10 10 VARHS 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. The power monitoring and control system vendor must be able to provide development, integration and

installation services required to complete and turn over a fully functional system including:

1. Project management to coordinate personnel, information and on-site supervision for the various levels

and functions of suppliers required for completion of the project.

2. All technical coordination, installation, integration, and testing of all components.

3. Detailed system design and system drawings.

B. Cabling, equipment and hardware manufacturers shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the

manufacturing, assembly, and factory testing of components which comply with EIA TIA/EIA-568-B.1,

EIA TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and EIA TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

C. The network cabling contractor shall be a firm which is regularly and professionally engaged in the

business of the applications, installation, and testing of the specified network cabling systems and

equipment. The contractor shall demonstrate experience in providing successful systems within the past 3

years. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful network cabling

system installations.

1. Supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall be

Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Registered Cabling Installers, Technician

Level. Submit documentation of current BICSI certification for each of the key personnel.

3.4 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. Develop testing procedures to address all specified functions and components of the Advanced Utility

Metering System (AUMS). Testing shall demonstrate proper and anticipated responses to normal and

abnormal operating conditions.

1. Provide skilled technicians to start and operate equipment.

2. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain the validity

of the warranty.

3. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-built drawings for

issues identified in testing.

4. Provide all tools to start, check-out and functionally test equipment and systems.

5. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-built drawings for

issues identified in any testing

6. Review test procedures, testing and results with Government.

B. Testing checklists: Develop project-specific checklists to document the systems and all components are

installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendation and the Contract Documents.


25 10 10 VARHS

C. Before testing, the following prerequisite items must be completed.

1. All related equipment has been started and start-up reports and checklists submitted and approved as

ready for testing:

2. All associated system functions for all interlocking systems are programmed and operable per contract

documents.

3. All punchlist items for the AUMS and equipment are corrected.

4. The test procedures reviewed and approved.

5. Safeties and operating ranges reviewed.

D. The following testing shall be included:

1. Demonstrate reporting of data and alarm conditions for each point and ensure that alarms are received

at the assigned location, including Site Data Collection Device.

2. Demonstrate ability of software program to function for the intended application.

3. Demonstrate via graphed trends to show the reports are executed in correct manner.

4. Demonstrate that the meter readings are accurate using portable NIST traceable portable devices and

calibrated valves in the piping system

5. Demonstrate that the systems perform during power loss and resumption of power.

E. Copper cables: Contractor shall provide all necessary testing equipment to test all copper network circuit

cables. Tests shall conform to EIA/TIA 568B Permanent Link testing criteria. All testers are to be

EIA/TIA 568B, Level IIe compliant. The primary field test parameters are:

1. Wire map: The wire map test is intended to verify pair to pin termination at each end and check for

installation connectivity errors. For each of the conductors in the cable, the wire map indicates:

a. Continuity to the remote end

b. Shorts between any two or more conductors

c. Crossed pairs

d. Reversed pairs

e. Split pairs

f. Any other mis-wiring

2. Length requirements: The maximum physical length of the basic link shall be 94 meters (including test

equipment cords).

3. Insertion Loss: Worst case insertion loss relative to the maximum insertion loss allowed shall be

reported.


25 10 10 VARHS

4. Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss: Field tests of NEXT shall be performed at both ends of the test

configuration.

5. Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss

6. Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT: Field tests of ELFEXT shall be performed at both ends of the

test configuration

7. Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT): Must be determined from both ends of the

cable. Power sum Near End Crosstalk is not a category 3 parameter. For all frequencies from 1 to 100

MHz, the category 5e PSELFEXT of the cabling shall be measured in accordance with annex E of

ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and shall meet the values determined using equations (12) and (13) for the

permanent link. PSELFEXT is not a required category 3 measurement parameter.

8. Return loss: Includes all the components of the link. The limits are based on the category of

components and cable lengths. Return loss must be tested at both ends of the cable. Cabling return loss

is not a required measurement for category 3 cabling.

9. Propagation delay and delay skew: Propagation delay is the time it takes for a signal to propagate from

one end to the other. Propagation delay shall be measured in accordance with annex D of

ANSI/TIA/EIA-568 B.2. The maximum propagation delay for all category permanent link

configurations shall not exceed 498 ns measured at 10 MHz. Delay skew is a measurement of the

signaling delay difference from the fastest pair to the slowest. Delay skew shall be measured in

accordance with annex D of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2. The maximum delay skew for all category

permanent link configurations shall not exceed 44 ns.

10. Administration: In addition to Pass/Fail indications, measured values of test parameters should be

recorded in the administration system. Any reconfiguration of link components after testing may

change the performance of the link and thus invalidates previous test results. Such links shall require

retesting to regain conformance.

11. Test equipment connectors and cords: Adapter cords that are qualified and determined by the test

equipment manufacturer to be suitable for permanent link measurements shall be used to attach the

field tester to the permanent link under consideration.

12. Test setup: The permanent link test configuration is to be used by installers and users of data

telecommunications systems to verify the performance of permanently installed cabling. A schematic

representation of the permanent link is illustrated in figure 1. The permanent link consists of up to 90

m (295 ft) of horizontal cabling and one connection at each end and may also include an optional

transition/consolidation point connection. The permanent link excludes both the cable portion of the

field test instrument cord and the connection to the field test instrument.

13. Replace or repair and cables, connectors, and/or terminations found to be defective.


25 10 10 VARHS

14. Repair, replace, and/or re-work any or all defective components to achieve cabling tests which meet or

exceed 568B permanent link requirements prior to acceptance of the installation or payment for

services.

F. Optical Fiber cables: Contractor shall provide all necessary testing equipment to test all optical fiber cables.

1. Attenuation Testing:

a. Singlemode testing shall conform to TIA/EIA 526-7 Method A.1 single jumper reference and

TIA/EIA 568-B-1 requirements for link segment testing.

b. Multimode testing shall conform to TIA/EIA 526-14-A Method B single jumper reference and

TIA/EIA 568-B-1 requirements for link segment testing.

c. Attenuation testing shall be performed in one direction at each operating wavelength.

d. Testing of backbone fiber optic cabling shall be performed from main telecommunications room

to each telecommunications room.

e. Testing of horizontal fiber optic cabling shall be performed from telecommunications room to

station outlet location.

f. Tester shall be capable of recording and reporting test reading in an electronic format.

2. OTDR Testing:

a. OTDR testing is required on all backbone fiber optic cables

b. The test shall be performed as per the EIA/TIA 455-61.

c. Multimode testing shall be performed with a minimum 80 meter launch cable.

d. Singlemode testing shall be performed with a minimum of 500 meter launch cable.

e. Tests shall be performed on each fiber in each direction at both operating wavelengths.

3. Test report data shall reference cables by cable labeling standards. Tests shall be submitted on a

1.5mb, 3.5" DOS formatted floppy disk. Contractor shall provide tests in the native file format of the

tester. Contractor shall provide all software needed to view, print, and edit tests.

4. Replace or repair and defective cables, connectors, terminations, etc.

5. Mated connector pairs shall have no more than 0.5dB loss. Fusion splices shall have no more than

.15dB loss per splice. Cable attenuation shall be no more than 2% more than the attenuation of the

cable on the reel as certified at the factory. Repair, replace, and/or rework any or all defective

components to achieve specified test results prior to acceptance of the installation or payment for

services.

G. Wireless Modems: Test system by sending 100,000 commands. Frame error rate shall not be greater than 5

out 100,000 commands.


25 10 10 VARHS 3.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION

A. Furnish the services of a factory-trained engineer or technician for a total of two four-hour classes to

instruct designated Facility Information Technologies personnel. Instruction shall include cross connection,

corrective, and preventive maintenance of the wired network system and connectivity equipment.

B. Before the System can be accepted by the VA, this training must be provided and executed. Training will

be scheduled at the convenience of the Facilities Contracting Officer and Chief of Engineering Service.

C. On-site start-up and training of the advanced utility metering system shall include a complete working

demonstration of the system with simulation of possible operating conditions that may be encountered.

1. Include any documentation and hands-on exercises necessary to enable electrical and mechanical

operations personnel to assume full operating responsibility for the advanced utility monitoring system

after completion of the training period.

D. Include 6 days on-site start-up assistance and 3 days on-site training in two sessions separated by minimum

1 month.

E. Regularly schedule and make available factory training for VA staff training on all aspects of advanced

utility metering system including:

1. Comprehensive software and hardware setup, configuration, and operation.

2. Advanced monitoring and data reporting.

3. Advanced power quality and disturbance monitoring.

F. Before the system is accepted by the VA, the contractor shall walk-through the installation with the VA's

representative and the design engineer to verify proper installation. The contractor may be requested to

open enclosures and terminal compartments to verify cable labeling and/or installation compliance.

G. As-built drawings shall be provided noting the exact cable path and cable labeling information. Drawings

in .DWG format will be available to the contractor. As-builts shall be submitted to the VA on disk saved as

.DXF or .DWG files. Redline hardcopies shall be provided as well. CAD generated as-built information

shall be shown on a new layer named AS_BUILT.

----- END -----


26 05 11 VARHS


SECTION 26 05 11 REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section applies to all sections of Division 26.

B. Furnish and install electrical systems, materials, equipment, and accessories in accordance with the specifications and drawings. Capacities and ratings of motors, transformers, conductors and cable, switchboards, switchgear, panelboards, motor control centers, generators, automatic transfer switches, and other items and arrangements for the specified items are shown on the drawings.

C. Electrical service entrance equipment and arrangements for temporary and permanent connections to the electric utility company’s system shall conform to the electric utility company's requirements. Coordinate fuses, circuit breakers and relays with the electric utility company’s system, and obtain electric utility company approval for sizes and settings of these devices.

D. Conductor ampacities specified or shown on the drawings are based on copper conductors, with the conduit and raceways sized per NEC. Aluminum conductors are prohibited.

1.2 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

A. The International Building Code (IBC), National Electrical Code (NEC), Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) codes and standards are the minimum requirements for materials and installation.

B. The drawings and specifications shall govern in those instances where requirements are greater than those stated in the above codes and standards.

1.3 TEST STANDARDS

A. All materials and equipment shall be listed, labeled, or certified by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) to meet Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), standards where test standards have been established. Materials and equipment which are not covered by UL standards will be accepted, providing that materials and equipment are listed, labeled, certified or otherwise determined to meet the safety requirements of a NRTL. Materials and equipment which no NRTL accepts, certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe, will be considered if inspected or tested in accordance with national industrial standards, such as ANSI, NEMA, and NETA. Evidence of compliance shall include certified test reports and definitive shop drawings.

B. Definitions:

1. Listed: Materials and equipment included in a list published by an organization that is acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction and concerned with evaluation of products or services, that maintains periodic inspection of production or listed materials and equipment or periodic evaluation of services, and whose listing states that the materials and equipment either meets appropriate designated standards or has been tested and found suitable for a specified purpose.

2. Labeled: Materials and equipment to which has been attached a label, symbol, or other identifying mark of an organization that is acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction and concerned with product evaluation, that maintains periodic inspection of production of labeled materials and equipment, and by whose labeling the manufacturer indicates compliance with appropriate standards or performance in a specified manner.

3. Certified: Materials and equipment which:

26 05 11 VARHS


a. Have been tested and found by a NRTL to meet nationally recognized standards or to be safe for use in a specified manner.

b. Are periodically inspected by a NRTL.

c. Bear a label, tag, or other record of certification.

4. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory: Testing laboratory which is recognized and approved by the Secretary of Labor in accordance with OSHA regulations.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES)

A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: The manufacturer shall regularly and currently produce, as one of the manufacturer's principal products, the materials and equipment specified for this project, and shall have manufactured the materials and equipment for at least three years.

B. Product Qualification:

1. Manufacturer's materials and equipment shall have been in satisfactory operation, on three installations of similar size and type as this project, for at least three years.

2. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a list of installations where the materials and equipment have been in operation before approval.

C. Service Qualifications: There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or trained by the manufacturer which will render satisfactory service to this installation within four hours of receipt of notification that service is needed. Submit name and address of service organizations.


A. Applicable publications listed in all Sections of Division 26 are the latest issue, unless otherwise noted.

B. Products specified in all sections of Division 26 shall comply with the applicable publications listed in each section.

1.6 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS

A. Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items, and for which replacement parts shall be available.

B. When more than one unit of the same class or type of materials and equipment is required, such units shall be the product of a single manufacturer.

C. Equipment Assemblies and Components:

1. Components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer.

2. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which include components made by others, shall assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit.

3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the intended service.

4. Constituent parts which are similar shall be the product of a single manufacturer.

D. Factory wiring and terminals shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on all wiring diagrams.

26 05 11 VARHS


E. When Factory Testing Is Specified:

1. The Government shall have the option of witnessing factory tests. The Contractor shall notify the Government through the Resident Engineer a minimum of 15 working days prior to the manufacturer’s performing the factory tests.

2. Four copies of certified test reports shall be furnished to the Resident Engineer two weeks prior to final inspection and not more than 90 days after completion of the tests.

3. When materials and equipment fail factory tests, and re-testing and re-inspection is required, the Contractor shall be liable for all additional expenses for the Government to witness re-testing.

1.7 VARIATIONS FROM CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

A. Where the Government or the Contractor requests variations from the contract requirements, the connecting work and related components shall include, but not be limited to additions or changes to branch circuits, circuit protective devices, conduits, wire, feeders, controls, panels and installation methods.

1.8 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PROTECTION

A. Materials and equipment shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical damage, vermin, dirt, corrosive substances, fumes, moisture, cold and rain.

1. Store materials and equipment indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.

2. During installation, equipment shall be protected against entry of foreign matter, and be vacuum-cleaned both inside and outside before testing and operating. Compressed air shall not be used to clean equipment. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside equipment.

3. Damaged equipment shall be repaired or replaced, as determined by the Resident Engineer.

4. Painted surfaces shall be protected with factory installed removable heavy kraft paper, sheet vinyl or equal.

5. Damaged paint on equipment shall be refinished with the same quality of paint and workmanship as used by the manufacturer so repaired areas are not obvious.

1.9 WORK PERFORMANCE

A. All electrical work shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC), NFPA 70B, NFPA 70E, OSHA Part 1910 subpart J – General Environmental Controls, OSHA Part 1910 subpart K – Medical and First Aid, and OSHA Part 1910 subpart S – Electrical, in addition to other references required by contract.

B. Job site safety and worker safety is the responsibility of the Contractor.

C. Electrical work shall be accomplished with all affected circuits or equipment de-energized. When an electrical outage cannot be accomplished in this manner for the required work, the following requirements are mandatory:

1. Electricians must use full protective equipment (i.e., certified and tested insulating material to cover exposed energized electrical components, certified and tested insulated tools, etc.) while working on energized systems in accordance with NFPA 70E.

2. Before initiating any work, a job specific work plan must be developed by the Contractor with a peer review conducted and documented by the Resident Engineer and Medical Center staff. The work plan

26 05 11 VARHS


must include procedures to be used on and near the live electrical equipment, barriers to be installed, safety equipment to be used, and exit pathways.

3. Work on energized circuits or equipment cannot begin until prior written approval is obtained from the Resident Engineer.

D. For work that affects existing electrical systems, arrange, phase and perform work to assure minimal interference with normal functioning of the facility. Refer to Article OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS under Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

E. New work shall be installed and connected to existing work neatly, safely and professionally. Disturbed or damaged work shall be replaced or repaired to its prior conditions, as required by Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

F. Coordinate location of equipment and conduit with other trades to minimize interference.

1.10 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Equipment location shall be as close as practical to locations shown on the drawings.

B. Working clearances shall not be less than specified in the NEC.

C. Inaccessible Equipment:

1. Where the Government determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not readily accessible for operation and maintenance, the equipment shall be removed and reinstalled as directed at no additional cost to the Government.

2. "Readily accessible” is defined as being capable of being reached quickly for operation, maintenance, or inspections without the use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as, but not limited to, motors, pumps, belt guards, transformers, piping, ductwork, conduit and raceways.

D. Electrical service entrance equipment and arrangements for temporary and permanent connections to the electric utility company’s system shall conform to the electric utility company's requirements. Coordinate fuses, circuit breakers and relays with the electric utility company’s system, and obtain electric utility company approval for sizes and settings of these devices.

1.11 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. In addition to the requirements of the NEC, install an identification sign which clearly indicates information required for use and maintenance of items such as switchboards and switchgear, panelboards, cabinets, motor controllers, fused and non-fused safety switches, generators, automatic transfer switches, separately enclosed circuit breakers, individual breakers and controllers in switchboards, switchgear and motor control assemblies, control devices and other significant equipment.

B. Identification signs for Normal Power System equipment shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core with engraved lettering. Identification signs for Essential Electrical System (EES) equipment, as defined in the NEC, shall be laminated red phenolic resin with a white core with engraved lettering. Lettering shall be a minimum of 12 mm (1/2 inch) high. Identification signs shall indicate equipment designation, rated bus amperage, voltage, number of phases, number of wires, and type of EES power branch as applicable. Secure nameplates with screws.

C. Install adhesive arc flash warning labels on all equipment as required by NFPA 70E. Label shall indicate the arc hazard boundary (inches), working distance (inches), arc flash incident energy at the working distance (calories/cm2), required PPE category and description including the glove rating, voltage rating of

26 05 11 VARHS


the equipment, limited approach distance (inches), restricted approach distance (inches), prohibited approach distance (inches), equipment/bus name, date prepared, and manufacturer name and address.

1.12 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the Resident Engineer in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.

B. The Government's approval shall be obtained for all materials and equipment before delivery to the job site. Delivery, storage or installation of materials and equipment which has not had prior approval will not be permitted.

C. All submittals shall include six copies of adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings, test reports, certifications, samples, and other data necessary for the Government to ascertain that the proposed materials and equipment comply with drawing and specification requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for approval shall be legible and clearly identify specific materials and equipment being submitted.

D. Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies which consist of more than one item or component shall be made for the system or assembly as a whole. Partial submittals will not be considered for approval.

1. Mark the submittals, "SUBMITTED UNDER SECTION__________________".

2. Submittals shall be marked to show specification reference including the section and paragraph numbers.

3. Submit each section separately.

E. The submittals shall include the following:

1. Information that confirms compliance with contract requirements. Include the manufacturer's name, model or catalog numbers, catalog information, technical data sheets, shop drawings, manuals, pictures, nameplate data, and test reports as required.

2. Elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams for communication and signal systems, control systems, and equipment assemblies. All terminal points and wiring shall be identified on wiring diagrams.

3. Parts list which shall include information for replacement parts and ordering instructions, as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

F. Maintenance and Operation Manuals:

1. Submit as required for systems and equipment specified in the technical sections. Furnish in hardcover binders or an approved equivalent.

2. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words "MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUAL," the name and location of the system, material, equipment, building, name of Contractor, and contract name and number. Include in the manual the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing the system or equipment and the local representatives for the material or equipment.

3. Provide a table of contents and assemble the manual to conform to the table of contents, with tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.

4. The manuals shall include:

26 05 11 VARHS


a. Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of the equipment.

b. A control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown.

c. Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.

d. Installation instructions.

e. Safety precautions for operation and maintenance.

f. Diagrams and illustrations.

g. Periodic maintenance and testing procedures and frequencies, including replacement parts numbers.

h. Performance data.

i. Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers. Emphasis shall be placed on the use of special tools and instruments. The list shall indicate sources of supply, recommended spare and replacement parts, and name of servicing organization.

j. List of factory approved or qualified permanent servicing organizations for equipment repair and periodic testing and maintenance, including addresses and factory certification qualifications.

G. Approvals will be based on complete submission of shop drawings, manuals, test reports, certifications, and samples as applicable.

H. After approval and prior to installation, furnish the Resident Engineer with one sample of each of the following:

1. A minimum 300 mm (12 inches) length of each type and size of wire and cable along with the tag from the coils or reels from which the sample was taken. The length of the sample shall be sufficient to show all markings provided by the manufacturer.

2. Each type of conduit coupling, bushing, and termination fitting.

3. Conduit hangers, clamps, and supports.

4. Each type of receptacle, toggle switch, lighting control sensor, outlet box, manual motor starter, device wall plate, engraved nameplate, wire and cable splicing and terminating material, and branch circuit single pole molded case circuit breaker.

1.13 SINGULAR NUMBER

A. Where any device or part of equipment is referred to in these specifications in the singular number (e.g., "the switch"), this reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation as shown on the drawings.

1.14 ACCEPTANCE CHECKS AND TESTS

A. The Contractor shall furnish the instruments, materials, and labor for tests.

B. Where systems are comprised of components specified in more than one section of Division 26, the Contractor shall coordinate the installation, testing, and adjustment of all components between various manufacturer’s representatives and technicians so that a complete, functional, and operational system is delivered to the Government.

26 05 11 VARHS


C. When test results indicate any defects, the Contractor shall repair or replace the defective materials or equipment, and repeat the tests. Repair, replacement, and retesting shall be accomplished at no additional cost to the Government.

1.15 WARRANTY

A. All work performed and all equipment and material furnished under this Division shall be free from defects and shall remain so for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the entire installation by the Contracting Officer for the Government.

1.16 INSTRUCTION

A. Instruction to designated Government personnel shall be provided for the particular equipment or system as required in each associated technical specification section.

B. Furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the specified equipment and system, including pertinent safety requirements. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the installation, and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance procedures.

C. A training schedule shall be developed and submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Resident Engineer at least 30 days prior to the planned training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)

---END---

SECTION 26 05 13 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of medium-voltage cables, indicated as cable or cables in this section, and medium-voltage cable splices and terminations.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: Requirements that apply to all sections of Division 26.

B. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.

C. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduits for medium-voltage cables.


A. Refer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES) in Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.

1.4 FACTORY TESTS

A. Medium-voltage cables shall be thoroughly tested at the factory per NEMA WC 74 to ensure that there are no electrical defects. Factory tests shall be certified.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit six copies of the following in accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.

1. Shop Drawings:

a. Submit sufficient information to demonstrate compliance with drawings and specifications.

b. Submit the following data for approval:

1) Complete electrical ratings.

2) Installation instructions.

2. Samples:

a. After approval and prior to installation, furnish the Resident Engineer with a sample of each type and size of cable per the requirements of Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.

3. Certifications:

a. Factory Test Reports: Submit certified factory production test reports for approval.


26 05 13 VARHS

b. Field Test Reports: Submit field test reports for approval.

c. Compatibility: Submit a certificate from the cable manufacturer that the splices and terminations are approved for use with the cable.

d. Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit the following.

1) Certification by the manufacturer that the cables, splices, and terminations conform to the requirements of the drawings and specifications.

2) Certification by the Contractor that the cables, splices, and terminations have been properly installed and tested.

3) Certification by the Contractor that each splice and each termination were completely installed in a single continuous work period by a single qualified worker without any overnight interruption.

4. Qualified Worker Approval:

a. Qualified workers who install and test cables, splices, and terminations shall have not fewer than five years of experience splicing and terminating cables equivalent to those being spliced and terminated, including experience with the materials in the approved splices and terminations.

b. Furnish satisfactory proof of such experience for each qualified worker who splices or terminates the cables.


A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by designation only.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

B3-01 (2007) ...................................Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):

48-09 ...............................................Test Procedures and Requirements for Alternating-Current Cable Terminations Used on Shielded Cables Having Laminated Insulation Rated 2.5 kV through 765 kV or Extruded Insulation Rated 2.5 kV through 500 kV

386-95 .............................................Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems above 600 V

400-01 .............................................Guide for Field Testing and Evaluation of the Insulation of Shielded Power Cable Systems

400.2-04 ..........................................Guide for Field Testing of Shielded Power Cable Systems Using Very Low Frequency (VLF)

400.3-06 ..........................................Guide for Partial Discharge Testing of Shielded Power Cable Systems in a Field Environment

404-00 .............................................Extruded and Laminated Dielectric Shielded Cable Joints Rated 2500 V to 500,000 V


26 05 13 VARHS

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

WC 71-99 ........................................Non-Shielded Cables Rated 2001-5000 Volts for Use in the Distribution of Electric Energy

WC 74-06 ........................................5-46 KV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

70-11 ...............................................National Electrical Code (NEC)

F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1072-06 ..........................................Medium-Voltage Power Cables

1.7 SHIPMENT AND STORAGE

A. Cable shall be shipped on reels such that it is protected from mechanical injury. Each end of each length of cable shall be hermetically sealed with manufacturer’s end caps and securely attached to the reel.

B. Cable stored and/or cut on site shall have the ends turned down, and sealed with cable manufacturer’s standard cable end seals, or field-installed heat-shrink cable end seals.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 CABLE

A. Cable shall be in accordance with the NEC and NEMA WC 71, WC 74, and UL 1072.

B. Single conductor stranded copper conforming to ASTM B3.

C. Voltage Rating:

1. 25,000 V cable shall be used on 20,800 V and 25,000 V distribution systems.

D. Insulation:

1. Insulation level shall be 133%.

2. Types of insulation:

a. Cable type abbreviation, EPR: Ethylene propylene rubber insulation shall be thermosetting, light and heat stabilized.

b. Cable type abbreviation, XLP or XLPE: cross-linked polyethylene insulation shall be thermosetting, light and heat stabilized, and chemically cross-linked.

E. Insulation shield shall be semi-conducting. Conductor shield shall be semi-conducting.

F. Insulation shall be wrapped with copper shielding tape, helically-applied over semi-conducting insulation shield.

G. Heavy duty, overall protective polyvinyl chloride jacket shall enclose every cable. The manufacturer's name, cable type and size, and other pertinent information shall be marked or molded clearly on the overall protective jacket.


26 05 13 VARHS

H. Cable temperature ratings for continuous operation, emergency overload operation, and short circuit operation shall be not less than the NEC, NEMA WC 71, or NEMA WC 74 standard for the respective cable.

2.2 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS

A. Materials shall be compatible with the cables being spliced and terminated, and shall be suitable for the prevailing environmental conditions.

B. In locations where moisture might be present, the splices shall be watertight. In manholes and pullboxes, the splices shall be submersible.

C. Splices:

1. Shall comply with IEEE 404. Include all components required for complete splice, with detailed instructions.

D. Terminations:

1. Shall comply with IEEE 48. Include shield ground strap for shielded cable terminations.

2. Class 3 terminations for outdoor use: Kit with stress cone and compression-type connector.

3. Load-break terminations for indoor and outdoor use: 200 A loadbreak premolded rubber elbow connectors with bushing inserts, suitable for submersible applications. Separable connectors shall comply with the requirements of IEEE 386, and shall be interchangeable between suppliers. Allow sufficient slack in medium-voltage cable, ground, and drain wires to permit elbow connectors to be moved to their respective parking stands.

4. Ground metallic cable shields with a device designed for that purpose, consisting of a solderless connector enclosed in watertight rubber housing covering the entire assembly.

5. Provide insulated cable supports to relieve any strain imposed by cable weight or movement. Ground cable supports to the grounding system.

2.3 FIREPROOFING TAPE

A. Fireproofing tape shall be flexible, non-corrosive, self-extinguishing, arcproof, and fireproof intumescent elastomer. Securing tape shall be glass cloth electrical tape not less than 0.18 mm (7 mils) thick, and 19 mm (0.75 inch) wide.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and per manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Cable shall be installed in conduit above grade and duct conduit or bank below grade.

C. All cables of a feeder shall be pulled simultaneously.

D. Conductors of different systems (e.g., 5kV and 15kV) shall not be installed in the same raceway.

E. Splice the cables only in manholes and pullboxes.


26 05 13 VARHS

F. Ground shields in accordance with Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

G. Cable maximum pull length, maximum pulling tension, and minimum bend radius shall conform with the recommendations of the manufacturer.

H. Use suitable lubricating compounds on the cables to prevent pulling damage. Provide compounds that are not injurious to the cable jacket and do not harden or become adhesive.

I. Seal the cable ends prior to pulling, to prevent the entry of moisture or lubricant.

3.2 PROTECTION DURING SPLICING OPERATIONS

A. Blowers shall be provided to force fresh air into manholes where free movement or circulation of air is obstructed. Waterproof protective coverings shall be available on the work site to provide protection against moisture while a splice is being made. Pumps shall be used to keep manholes dry during splicing operations. Under no conditions shall a splice or termination be made that exposes the interior of a cable to moisture. A manhole ring at least 150 mm (6 inches) above ground shall be used around the manhole entrance to keep surface water from entering the manhole. Unused ducts shall be plugged and water seepage through ducts in use shall be stopped before splicing.

3.3 PULLING CABLES IN DUCTS AND MANHOLES

A. Cables shall be pulled into ducts with equipment designed for this purpose, including power-driven winches, cable-feeding flexible tube guides, cable grips, pulling eyes, and lubricants. A sufficient number of qualified workers and equipment shall be employed to ensure the careful and proper installation of the cable.

B. Cable reels shall be set up at the side of the manhole opening and above the duct or hatch level, allowing cables to enter through the opening without reverse bending. Flexible tube guides shall be installed through the opening in a manner that will prevent cables from rubbing on the edges of any structural member.

C. Cable shall be unreeled from the top of the reel. Pay-out shall be carefully controlled. Cables to be pulled shall be attached through a swivel to the main pulling wire by means of a suitable cable grip and pulling eye.

D. Woven-wire cable grips shall be used to grip the cable end when pulling small cables and short straight lengths of heavier cables.

E. Pulling eyes shall be attached to the cable conductors to prevent damage to the cable structure.

F. Cables shall be liberally coated with a suitable lubricant as they enter the tube guide or duct. Rollers, sheaves, or tube guides around which the cable is pulled shall conform to the minimum bending radius of the cable.

G. Cables shall be pulled into ducts at a reasonable speed. Cable pulling using a vehicle shall not be permitted. Pulling operations shall be stopped immediately at any indication of binding or obstruction, and shall not be resumed until the potential for damage to the cable is corrected. Sufficient slack shall be provided for free movement of cable due to expansion or contraction.

H. Splices in manholes shall be firmly supported on cable racks. Cable ends shall overlap at the ends of a section to provide sufficient undamaged cable for splicing.

I. Cables cut in the field shall have the cut ends immediately sealed to prevent entrance of moisture.


26 05 13 VARHS

3.4 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS

A. Install the materials as recommended by the manufacturer, including precautions pertaining to air temperature and humidity during installation.

B. Installation shall be accomplished by qualified workers trained to perform medium-voltage equipment installations. Use tools as recommended or provided by the manufacturer. All manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed.

C. Splices in manholes shall be located midway between cable racks on walls of manholes, and supported with cable arms at approximately the same elevation as the enclosing duct.

D. Where the Government determines that unsatisfactory splices and terminations have been installed, the Contractor shall replace the unsatisfactory splices and terminations with approved material at no additional cost to the Government.

3.5 FIREPROOFING

A. Cover all cable segments exposed in manholes and pullboxes with fireproofing tape.

B. Apply the tape in a single layer, wrapped in a half-lap manner, or as recommended by the manufacturer. Extend the tape not less than 25 mm (1 inch) into each duct.

C. At each end of a taped cable section, secure the fireproof tape in place with glass cloth tape.

3.6 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION OF FEEDERS

A. In each manhole and pullbox, install permanent identification tags on each circuit's cables to clearly designate the circuit identification and voltage. The tags shall be the embossed brass type, 40 mm (1.5 inches) in diameter and 40 mils thick. Attach tags with plastic ties. Position the tags so they will be easy to read after the fireproofing tape is installed.


A. Perform tests in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Include the following visual and electrical inspections.

B. Test equipment, labor, and technical personnel shall be provided as necessary to perform the acceptance tests. Arrangements shall be made to have tests witnessed by the Resident Engineer.

C. Visual Inspection:

1. Inspect exposed sections of cables for physical damage.

2. Inspect shield grounding, cable supports, splices, and terminations.

3. Verify that visible cable bends meet manufacturer’s minimum bending radius requirement.

4. Verify installation of fireproofing tape and identification tags.

D. Electrical Tests:

1. Acceptance tests shall be performed on new and service-aged cables as specified herein.

2. Test new cable after installation, splices, and terminations have been made, but before connection to equipment and existing cable.


26 05 13 VARHS

E. Service-Aged Cable Tests:

1. Maintenance tests shall be performed on service-aged cable interconnected to new cable.

2. After new cable test and connection to an existing cable, test the interconnected cable. Disconnect cable from all equipment that could be damaged by the test.

F. Insulation-Resistance Test: Test all new and service-aged cables with respect to ground and adjacent conductors.

1. Test data shall include megohm readings and leakage current readings. Cables shall not be energized until insulation-resistance test results have been approved by the Resident Engineer. Test voltages and minimum acceptable resistance values shall be:

Voltage Class Test Voltage Min. Insulation Resistance

5kV 2,500 VDC 1,000 megohms



35kV 15,000 VDC 100,000 megohms

2. Submit a field test report to the Resident Engineer that describes the identification and location of cables tested, the test equipment used, and the date tests were performed; identifies the persons who performed the tests; and identifies the insulation resistance and leakage current results for each cable section tested. The report shall provide conclusions and recommendations for corrective action.

G. Online Partial Discharge Test: Comply with IEEE 400 and 400.3. Test all new and service-aged cables. Perform tests after cables have passed the insulation-resistance test, and after successful energization.

1. Testing shall use a time or frequency domain detection process, incorporating radio frequency current transformer sensors with a partial discharge detection range of 10 kHz to 300 MHz.

2. Submit a field test report to the Resident Engineer that describes the identification and location of cables tested, the test equipment used, and the date tests were performed; identifies the persons who performed the tests; and numerically and graphically identifies the magnitude of partial discharge detected for each cable section tested. The report shall provide conclusions and recommendations for corrective action.

H. Final Acceptance: Final acceptance shall depend upon the satisfactory performance of the cables under test. No cable shall be put into service until all tests are successfully passed, and field test reports have been approved by the Resident Engineer.

---END---


SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, connection, and testing of the electrical conductors and cables for use in electrical systems rated 600 V and below, indicated as cable(s), conductor(s), wire, or wiring in this section.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING: Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of fire-resistant rated construction.

B. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: Requirements that apply to all sections of Division 26.

C. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.

D. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduits for conductors and cables.

E. Section 26 05 41, UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION: Installation of conductors and cables in manholes and ducts.


A. Refer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES), in Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.

1.4 FACTORY TESTS

A. Conductors and cables shall be thoroughly tested at the factory per NEMA to ensure that there are no electrical defects. Factory tests shall be certified.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings:


b. Submit the following data for approval:

1) Electrical ratings and insulation type for each conductor and cable.

2) Splicing materials and pulling lubricant.

2. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit the following.


26 05 19 VARHS

a. Certification by the manufacturer that the conductors and cables conform to the requirements of the drawings and specifications.

b. Certification by the Contractor that the conductors and cables have been properly installed, adjusted, and tested.


A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are reference in the text by designation only.

B. American Society of Testing Material (ASTM):

D2301-10 .........................................Standard Specification for Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape

D2304-10 .........................................Test Method for Thermal Endurance of Rigid Electrical Insulating Materials

D3005-10 .........................................Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

WC 70-09 ........................................Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):


E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

44-10 ...............................................Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables

83-08 ...............................................Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

467-07 .............................................Grounding and Bonding Equipment

486A-486B-03 .................................Wire Connectors

486C-04 ...........................................Splicing Wire Connectors

486D-05 ...........................................Sealed Wire Connector Systems

486E-09 ...........................................Equipment Wiring Terminals for Use with Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors

493-07 .............................................Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch Circuit Cables

514B-04 ...........................................Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings


26 05 19 VARHS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conductors and cables shall be in accordance with NEMA, UL, as specified herein, and as shown on the drawings.

B. All conductors shall be copper.

C. Single Conductor and Cable:

1. No. 12 AWG: Minimum size, except where smaller sizes are specified herein or shown on the drawings.

2. No. 8 AWG and larger: Stranded.

3. No. 10 AWG and smaller: Solid; except shall be stranded for final connection to motors, transformers, and vibrating equipment.

4. Insulation: THHN-THWN and XHHW-2. XHHW-2 shall be used for isolated power systems.

D. Color Code:

1. No. 10 AWG and smaller: Solid color insulation or solid color coating.

2. No. 8 AWG and larger: Color-coded using one of the following methods:

a. Solid color insulation or solid color coating.

b. Stripes, bands, or hash marks of color specified.

c. Color using 19 mm (0.75 inches) wide tape.

3. For modifications and additions to existing wiring systems, color coding shall conform to the existing wiring system.

4. Conductors shall be color-coded as follows:

208/120 V Phase 480/277 V

Black A Brown

Red B Orange

Blue C Yellow

White Neutral Gray *

* or white with colored (other than green) tracer.

5. Lighting circuit “switch legs”, and 3-way and 4-way switch “traveling wires,” shall have color coding that is unique and distinct (e.g., pink and purple) from the color coding indicated above. The unique


26 05 19 VARHS

color codes shall be solid and in accordance with the NEC. Coordinate color coding in the field with the Resident Engineer.

6. Color code for isolated power system wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC.

2.2 SPLICES

A. Splices shall be in accordance with NEC and UL.

B. Above Ground Splices for No. 10 AWG and Smaller:

1. Solderless, screw-on, reusable pressure cable type, with integral insulation, approved for copper and aluminum conductors.

2. The integral insulator shall have a skirt to completely cover the stripped conductors.

3. The number, size, and combination of conductors used with the connector, as listed on the manufacturer's packaging, shall be strictly followed.

C. Above Ground Splices for No. 8 AWG to No. 4/0 AWG:

1. Compression, hex screw, or bolt clamp-type of high conductivity and corrosion-resistant material, listed for use with copper and aluminum conductors.

2. Insulate with materials approved for the particular use, location, voltage, and temperature. Insulation level shall be not less than the insulation level of the conductors being joined.

3. Splice and insulation shall be product of the same manufacturer.

4. All bolts, nuts, and washers used with splices shall be zinc-plated steel.

D. Above Ground Splices for 250 kcmil and Larger:

1. Long barrel “butt-splice” or “sleeve” type compression connectors, with minimum of two compression indents per wire, listed for use with copper and aluminum conductors.

2. Insulate with materials approved for the particular use, location, voltage, and temperature. Insulation level shall be not less than the insulation level of the conductors being joined.

3. Splice and insulation shall be product of the same manufacturer.

E. Plastic electrical insulating tape: Per ASTM D2304, flame-retardant, cold and weather resistant.

2.3 CONNECTORS AND TERMINATIONS

A. Mechanical type of high conductivity and corrosion-resistant material, listed for use with copper and aluminum conductors.

B. Long barrel compression type of high conductivity and corrosion-resistant material, with minimum of two compression indents per wire, listed for use with copper and aluminum conductors.

C. All bolts, nuts, and washers used to connect connections and terminations to bus bars or other termination points shall be zinc-plated steel.


26 05 19 VARHS

2.4 CONTROL WIRING

A. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in these specifications, control wiring shall be as specified herein, except that the minimum size shall be not less than No. 14 AWG.

B. Control wiring shall be sized such that the voltage drop under in-rush conditions does not adversely affect operation of the controls.

2.5 WIRE LUBRICATING COMPOUND

A. Lubricating compound shall be suitable for the wire insulation and conduit, and shall not harden or become adhesive.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install conductors in accordance with the NEC, as specified, and as shown on the drawings.

B. Install all conductors in raceway systems.

C. Splice conductors only in outlet boxes, junction boxes, pullboxes, manholes, or handholes.

D. Conductors of different systems (e.g., 120 V and 277 V) shall not be installed in the same raceway.

E. Install cable supports for all vertical feeders in accordance with the NEC. Provide split wedge type which firmly clamps each individual cable and tightens due to cable weight.

F. In panelboards, cabinets, wireways, switches, enclosures, and equipment assemblies, neatly form, train, and tie the conductors with non-metallic ties.

G. For connections to motors, transformers, and vibrating equipment, stranded conductors shall be used only from the last fixed point of connection to the motors, transformers, or vibrating equipment.

H. Use expanding foam or non-hardening duct-seal to seal conduits entering a building, after installation of conductors.

I. Conductor and Cable Pulling:

1. Provide installation equipment that will prevent the cutting or abrasion of insulation during pulling. Use lubricants approved for the cable.

2. Use nonmetallic pull ropes.

3. Attach pull ropes by means of either woven basket grips or pulling eyes attached directly to the conductors.

4. All conductors in a single conduit shall be pulled simultaneously.

5. Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

J. No more than three branch circuits shall be installed in any one conduit.

K. When stripping stranded conductors, use a tool that does not damage the conductor or remove conductor strands.


26 05 19 VARHS

3.2 INSTALLATION IN MANHOLES

A. Train the cables around the manhole walls, but do not bend to a radius less than six times the overall cable diameter.

3.3 SPLICE AND TERMINATION INSTALLATION

A. Splices and terminations shall be mechanically and electrically secure, and tightened to manufacturer’s published torque values using a torque screwdriver or wrench.

B. Where the Government determines that unsatisfactory splices or terminations have been installed, replace the splices or terminations at no additional cost to the Government.

3.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION

A. When using colored tape to identify phase, neutral, and ground conductors larger than No. 8 AWG, apply tape in half-overlapping turns for a minimum of 75 mm (3 inches) from terminal points, and in junction boxes, pullboxes, and manholes. Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Where cable markings are covered by tape, apply tags to cable, stating size and insulation type.

3.5 FEEDER CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION

A. In each interior pullbox and each underground manhole and handhole, install brass tags on all feeder conductors to clearly designate their circuit identification and voltage. The tags shall be the embossed type, 40 mm (1-1/2 inches) in diameter and 40 mils thick. Attach tags with plastic ties.

3.6 EXISTING CONDUCTORS

A. Unless specifically indicated on the plans, existing conductors shall not be reused.

3.7 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Unless otherwise specified in other sections, install control wiring and connect to equipment to perform the required functions as specified or as shown on the drawings.

3.8 CONTROL WIRING IDENTIFICATION


B. Identifying numbers and letters on the wire markers shall correspond to those on the wiring diagrams used for installing the systems.


D. In each manhole and handhole, install embossed brass tags to identify the system served and function.


A. Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. In addition, include the following:

1. Visual Inspection and Tests: Inspect physical condition.

2. Electrical tests:


26 05 19 VARHS

a. After installation but before connection to utilization devices, such as fixtures, motors, or appliances, test conductors phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground resistance with an insulation resistance tester. Existing conductors to be reused shall also be tested.

b. Applied voltage shall be 500 V DC for 300 V rated cable, and 1000 V DC for 600 V rated cable. Apply test for one minute or until reading is constant for 15 seconds, whichever is longer. Minimum insulation resistance values shall not be less than 25 megohms for 300 V rated cable and 100 megohms for 600 V rated cable.

c. Perform phase rotation test on all three-phase circuits.

---END---


26 05 26 VARHS


SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, connection, and testing of grounding and bonding equipment, indicated as grounding equipment in this section.

B. “Grounding electrode system” refers to grounding electrode conductors and all electrodes required or allowed by NEC, as well as made, supplementary, and lightning protection system grounding electrodes.

C. The terms “connect” and “bond” is used interchangeably in this section and have the same meaning.

1.2 RELATED WORK


B. Section 26 05 19, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: Low-voltage conductors.

C. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduit and boxes.

D. Section 26 12 19, PAD-MOUNTED, LIQUID-FILLED, MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS: pad-mounted, liquid-filled, medium-voltage transformers.

E. Section 26 22 00, LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS: Low-voltage transformers.

F. Section 26 24 13, DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS: Low-voltage distribution switchboards.

G. Section 26 24 16, PANELBOARDS: Low-voltage panelboards.

H. Section 26 24 19, MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS: Motor control centers.

I. Section 26 32 13, ENGINE GENERATORS: Engine generators.

J. Section 26 36 23, AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES: Automatic transfer switches.



1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings:


b. Submit plans showing the location of system grounding electrodes and connections, and the routing of aboveground and underground grounding electrode conductors.

26 05 26 VARHS


2. Test Reports:

a. Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit ground resistance field test reports to the Resident Engineer.

3. Certifications:

a. Certification by the Contractor that the grounding equipment has been properly installed and tested.




B1-07 ...............................................Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire

B3-07 ...............................................Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire

B8-11 ...............................................Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft


81-83 ...............................................IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System Part 1: Normal Measurements



70E-12 .............................................National Electrical Safety Code

99-12 ...............................................Health Care Facilities


44-10 ..............................................Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables

83-08 ..............................................Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

467-07 ............................................Grounding and Bonding Equipment

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS

A. Equipment grounding conductors shall be insulated stranded copper, except that sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid copper. Insulation color shall be continuous green for all equipment grounding conductors, except that wire sizes No. 4 AWG and larger shall be identified per NEC.

26 05 26 VARHS


B. Bonding conductors shall be bare stranded copper, except that sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be bare solid copper. Bonding conductors shall be stranded for final connection to motors, transformers, and vibrating equipment.

C. Conductor sizes shall not be less than shown on the drawings, or not less than required by the NEC, whichever is greater.

D. Insulation: THHN-THWN and XHHW-2. XHHW-2 shall be used for isolated power systems.

2.2 GROUND RODS

A. Steel or copper clad steel, 19 mm (0.75 inch) diameter by 3 M (10 feet) long.

B. Quantity of rods shall be as shown on the drawings, and as required to obtain the specified ground resistance.

2.3 CONCRETE ENCASED ELECTRODE

A. Concrete encased electrode shall be No. 4 AWG bare copper wire, installed per NEC.

2.4 GROUND CONNECTIONS

A. Below Grade and Inaccessible Locations: Exothermic-welded type connectors.

B. Above Grade:

1. Bonding Jumpers: Listed for use with aluminum and copper conductors. For wire sizes No. 8 AWG and larger, use compression-type connectors. For wire sizes smaller than No. 8 AWG, use mechanical type lugs. Connectors or lugs shall use zinc-plated steel bolts, nuts, and washers. Bolts shall be torqued to the values recommended by the manufacturer.

2. Connection to Building Steel: Exothermic-welded type connectors.

3. Connection to Grounding Bus Bars: Listed for use with aluminum and copper conductors. Use mechanical type lugs, with zinc-plated steel bolts, nuts, and washers. Bolts shall be torqued to the values recommended by the manufacturer.

4. Connection to Equipment Rack and Cabinet Ground Bars: Listed for use with aluminum and copper conductors. Use mechanical type lugs, with zinc-plated steel bolts, nuts, and washers. Bolts shall be torqued to the values recommended by the manufacturer.

2.5 EQUIPMENT RACK AND CABINET GROUND BARS

A. Provide solid copper ground bars designed for mounting on the framework of open or cabinet-enclosed equipment racks. Ground bars shall have minimum dimensions of 6.3 mm (0.25 inch) thick x 19 mm (0.75 inch) wide, with length as required or as shown on the drawings. Provide insulators and mounting brackets.

2.6 GROUND TERMINAL BLOCKS

A. At any equipment mounting location (e.g., backboards and hinged cover enclosures) where rack-type ground bars cannot be mounted, provide mechanical type lugs, with zinc-plated steel bolts, nuts, and washers. Bolts shall be torqued to the values recommended by the manufacturer.

26 05 26 VARHS


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install grounding equipment in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as specified herein.

B. System Grounding:

1. Secondary service neutrals: Ground at the supply side of the secondary disconnecting means and at the related transformer.

2. Separately derived systems (transformers downstream from the service entrance): Ground the secondary neutral.

C. Equipment Grounding: Metallic piping, building structural steel, electrical enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, and other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits, shall be bonded and grounded.

3.2 INACCESSIBLE GROUNDING CONNECTIONS

A. Make grounding connections, which are normally buried or otherwise inaccessible, by exothermic weld.

3.3 SECONDARY VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUITS

A. Main Bonding Jumper: Bond the secondary service neutral to the ground bus in the service equipment.

B. Metallic Piping, Building Structural Steel, and Supplemental Electrode(s):

1. Provide a grounding electrode conductor sized per NEC between the service equipment ground bus and all metallic water pipe systems, building structural steel, and supplemental or made electrodes. Provide jumpers across insulating joints in the metallic piping.

2. Provide a supplemental ground electrode as shown on the drawings and bond to the grounding electrode system.

C. Switchgear, Switchboards, Unit Substations, Panelboards, Motor Control Centers, Engine-Generators, Automatic Transfer Switches, and other electrical equipment:

1. Connect the equipment grounding conductors to the ground bus.

2. Connect metallic conduits by grounding bushings and equipment grounding conductor to the equipment ground bus.

D. Transformers:

1. Exterior: Exterior transformers supplying interior service equipment shall have the neutral grounded at the transformer secondary. Provide a grounding electrode at the transformer.

2. Separately derived systems (transformers downstream from service equipment): Ground the secondary neutral at the transformer. Provide a grounding electrode conductor from the transformer to the ground bar at the service equipment.

26 05 26 VARHS


3.4 RACEWAY

A. Conduit Systems:

1. Ground all metallic conduit systems. All metallic conduit systems shall contain an equipment grounding conductor.

2. Non-metallic conduit systems, except non-metallic feeder conduits that carry a grounded conductor from exterior transformers to interior or building-mounted service entrance equipment, shall contain an equipment grounding conductor.

3. Metallic conduit that only contains a grounding conductor, and is provided for its mechanical protection, shall be bonded to that conductor at the entrance and exit from the conduit.

4. Metallic conduits which terminate without mechanical connection to an electrical equipment housing by means of locknut and bushings or adapters, shall be provided with grounding bushings. Connect bushings with a equipment grounding conductor to the equipment ground bus.

B. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Install equipment grounding conductors with all feeders, and power and lighting branch circuits.

C. Boxes, Cabinets, Enclosures, and Panelboards:

1. Bond the equipment grounding conductor to each pullbox, junction box, outlet box, device box, cabinets, and other enclosures through which the conductor passes (except for special grounding systems for intensive care units and other critical units shown).

2. Provide lugs in each box and enclosure for equipment grounding conductor termination.

D. Wireway Systems:

1. Bond the metallic structures of wireway to provide electrical continuity throughout the wireway system, by connecting a No. 6 AWG bonding jumper at all intermediate metallic enclosures and across all section junctions.

2. Install insulated No. 6 AWG bonding jumpers between the wireway system, bonded as required above, and the closest building ground at each end and approximately every 16 M (50 feet).

3. Use insulated No. 6 AWG bonding jumpers to ground or bond metallic wireway at each end for all intermediate metallic enclosures and across all section junctions.

4. Use insulated No. 6 AWG bonding jumpers to ground cable tray to column-mounted building ground plates (pads) at each end and approximately every 15 M (49 feet).

E. Receptacles shall not be grounded through their mounting screws. Ground receptacles with a jumper from the receptacle green ground terminal to the device box ground screw and a jumper to the branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

F. Ground lighting fixtures to the equipment grounding conductor of the wiring system. Fixtures connected with flexible conduit shall have a green ground wire included with the power wires from the fixture through the flexible conduit to the first outlet box.

G. Fixed electrical appliances and equipment shall be provided with a ground lug for termination of the equipment grounding conductor.

H. Raised Floors: Provide bonding for all raised floor components as shown on the drawings.

26 05 26 VARHS


I. Panelboard Bonding in Patient Care Areas: The equipment grounding terminal buses of the normal and essential branch circuit panel boards serving the same individual patient vicinity shall be bonded together with an insulated continuous copper conductor not less than No. 10 AWG, installed in rigid metal conduit.

3.5 OUTDOOR METALLIC FENCES AROUND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Drive ground rods until the top is 300 mm (12 inches) below grade. Attach a No. 4 AWG copper conductor by exothermic weld to the ground rods, and extend underground to the immediate vicinity of fence post. Lace the conductor vertically into 300 mm (12 inches) of fence mesh and fasten by two approved bronze compression fittings, one to bond the wire to post and the other to bond the wire to fence. Each gate section shall be bonded to its gatepost by a 3 mm x 25 mm (0.375 inch x 1 inch) flexible, braided copper strap and ground post clamps. Clamps shall be of the anti-electrolysis type.

3.6 CORROSION INHIBITORS

A. When making grounding and bonding connections, apply a corrosion inhibitor to all contact surfaces. Use corrosion inhibitor appropriate for protecting a connection between the metals used.

3.7 CONDUCTIVE PIPING

A. Bond all conductive piping systems, interior and exterior, to the grounding electrode system. Bonding connections shall be made as close as practical to the equipment ground bus.

B. In operating rooms and at intensive care and coronary care type beds, bond the medical gas piping and medical vacuum piping at the outlets directly to the patient ground bus.

3.8 MAIN ELECTRICAL ROOM GROUNDING

A. Provide ground bus bar and mounting hardware at each main electrical room where incoming feeders are terminated, as shown on the drawings. Connect to pigtail extensions of the building grounding ring, as shown on the drawings.

3.9 EXTERIOR LIGHT POLES

A. Provide 6.1 M (20 feet) of No. 4 AWG bare copper coiled at bottom of pole base excavation prior to pour, plus additional unspliced length in and above foundation as required to reach pole ground stud.

3.10 GROUND RESISTANCE

A. Grounding system resistance to ground shall not exceed 5 ohms. Make any modifications or additions to the grounding electrode system necessary for compliance without additional cost to the Government. Final tests shall ensure that this requirement is met.

B. Grounding system resistance shall comply with the electric utility company ground resistance requirements.

3.11 GROUND ROD INSTALLATION

A. For outdoor installations, drive each rod vertically in the earth, until top of rod is 610 mm (24 inches) below final grade.

B. For indoor installations, leave 100 mm (4 inches) of each rod exposed.

C. Where buried or permanently concealed ground connections are required, make the connections by the exothermic process, to form solid metal joints. Make accessible ground connections with mechanical pressure-type ground connectors.

26 05 26 VARHS


D. Where rock or impenetrable soil prevents the driving of vertical ground rods, install angled ground rods or grounding electrodes in horizontal trenches to achieve the specified ground resistance.


A. Resistance of the grounding electrode system shall be measured using a four-terminal fall-of-potential method as defined in IEEE 81. Ground resistance measurements shall be made before the electrical distribution system is energized or connected to the electric utility company ground system, and shall be made in normally dry conditions not fewer than 48 hours after the last rainfall.

B. Resistance measurements of separate grounding electrode systems shall be made before the systems are bonded together. The combined resistance of separate systems may be used to meet the required resistance, but the specified number of electrodes must still be provided.

---END---

SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of conduit, fittings, and boxes, to form complete, coordinated, grounded raceway systems. Raceways are required for all wiring unless shown or specified otherwise.

B. Definitions: The term conduit, as used in this specification, shall mean any or all of the raceway types specified.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 06 10 00, ROUGH CARPENTRY: Mounting board for telephone closets.

B. Section 07 60 00, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL: Fabrications for the deflection of water away from the building envelope at penetrations.

C. Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING: Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of fire rated construction.

D. Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS: Sealing around conduit penetrations through the building envelope to prevent moisture migration into the building.

E. Section 09 91 00, PAINTING: Identification and painting of conduit and other devices.

F. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one section of Division 26.

G. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.

H. Section 26 05 41, UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION: Underground conduits.

I. Section 31 20 00, EARTHWORK: Bedding of conduits.


Refer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS, in Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

In accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS, submit the following:

A. Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Showing each cable type and rating. The specific item proposed and its area of application shall be identified on the catalog cuts.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Size and location of main feeders.


26 05 33 VARHS

2. Size and location of panels and pull-boxes.

3. Layout of required conduit penetrations through structural elements.

C. Certifications:

1. Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the following certifications to the Resident Engineer:

a. Certification by the manufacturer that the material conforms to the requirements of the drawings and specifications.

b. Certification by the contractor that the material has been properly installed.



B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

C80.1-05 ..........................................Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit

C80.3-05 ..........................................Steel Electrical Metal Tubing

C80.6-05 ..........................................Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):


D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1-05 .................................................Flexible Metal Conduit

5-04 .................................................Surface Metal Raceway and Fittings

6-07 .................................................Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel

50-95 ...............................................Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

360-093 ...........................................Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit


514A-04 ...........................................Metallic Outlet Boxes

514B-04 ...........................................Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings

514C-96 ...........................................Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes and Covers

651-05 .............................................Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings

651A-00 ...........................................Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit


26 05 33 VARHS

797-07 .............................................Electrical Metallic Tubing

1242-06 ...........................................Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit - Steel

E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

TC-2-03 ...........................................Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit

TC-3-04 ...........................................PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing

FB1-07.............................................Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing and Cable

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

A. Conduit Size: In accordance with the NEC, but not less than 0.5 in [13 mm] unless otherwise shown. Where permitted by the NEC, 0.5 in [13 mm] flexible conduit may be used for tap connections to recessed lighting fixtures.

B. Conduit:

1. Rigid steel: Shall conform to UL 6 and ANSI C80.1.

2. Rigid intermediate steel conduit (IMC): Shall conform to UL 1242 and ANSI C80.6.

3. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Shall conform to UL 797 and ANSI C80.3. Maximum size not to exceed 4 in [105 mm] and shall be permitted only with cable rated 600 V or less.

4. Flexible galvanized steel conduit: Shall conform to UL 1.

5. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit: Shall conform to UL 360.

6. Direct burial plastic conduit: Shall conform to UL 651 and UL 651A, heavy wall PVC or high density polyethylene (PE).

7. Surface metal raceway: Shall conform to UL 5.

C. Conduit Fittings:

1. Rigid steel and IMC conduit fittings:

a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and NEMA FB1.

b. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, conduit bodies, and elbows: Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable. Integral retractable type IMC couplings are also acceptable.

c. Locknuts: Bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of an enclosure.

d. Bushings: Metallic insulating type, consisting of an insulating insert, molded or locked into the metallic body of the fitting. Bushings made entirely of metal or nonmetallic material are not permitted.


26 05 33 VARHS

e. Erickson (union-type) and set screw type couplings: Approved for use in concrete are permitted for use to complete a conduit run where conduit is installed in concrete. Use set screws of case-hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in conduit wall for positive ground. Tightening of set screws with pliers is prohibited.

f. Sealing fittings: Threaded cast iron type. Use continuous drain-type sealing fittings to prevent passage of water vapor. In concealed work, install fittings in flush steel boxes with blank cover plates having the same finishes as that of other electrical plates in the room.

2. Electrical metallic tubing fittings:

a. Fittings and conduit bodies shall meet the requirements of UL 514B, ANSI C80.3, and NEMA FB1.

b. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.

c. Setscrew couplings and connectors: Use setscrews of case-hardened steel with hex head and cup point, to firmly seat in wall of conduit for positive grounding.

d. Indent-type connectors or couplings are prohibited.

e. Die-cast or pressure-cast zinc-alloy fittings or fittings made of "pot metal" are prohibited.

3. Flexible steel conduit fittings:

a. Conform to UL 514B. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.

b. Clamp-type, with insulated throat.

4. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings:

a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and NEMA FB1.


c. Fittings must incorporate a threaded grounding cone, a steel or plastic compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Connectors shall have insulated throats.

5. Direct burial plastic conduit fittings:

a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514C and NEMA TC3.

6. Surface metal raceway fittings: As recommended by the raceway manufacturer. Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, conduit entry fittings, accessories, and other fittings as required for complete system.

7. Expansion and deflection couplings:

a. Conform to UL 467 and UL 514B.

b. Accommodate a 0.75 in [19 mm] deflection, expansion, or contraction in any direction, and allow 30 degree angular deflections.

c. Include internal flexible metal braid, sized to guarantee conduit ground continuity and a low-impedance path for fault currents, in accordance with UL 467 and the NEC tables for equipment grounding conductors.


26 05 33 VARHS

d. Jacket: Flexible, corrosion-resistant, watertight, moisture and heat-resistant molded rubber material with stainless steel jacket clamps.

D. Conduit Supports:

1. Parts and hardware: Zinc-coat or provide equivalent corrosion protection.

2. Individual Conduit Hangers: Designed for the purpose, having a pre-assembled closure bolt and nut, and provisions for receiving a hanger rod.

3. Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers: Not less than 1.5 x 1.5 in [38 mm x 38 mm], 12-gauge steel, cold-formed, lipped channels; with not less than 0.375 in [9 mm] diameter steel hanger rods.

4. Solid Masonry and Concrete Anchors: Self-drilling expansion shields, or machine bolt expansion.

E. Outlet, Junction, and Pull Boxes:

1. UL-50 and UL-514A.

2. Cast metal where required by the NEC or shown, and equipped with rustproof boxes.

3. Sheet metal boxes: Galvanized steel, except where otherwise shown.

4. Flush-mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with raised covers so that the front face of raised cover is flush with the wall. Surface-mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with surface-style flat or raised covers.

F. Wireways: Equip with hinged covers, except where removable covers are shown. Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for a complete system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PENETRATIONS

A. Cutting or Holes:

1. Cut holes in advance where they should be placed in the structural elements, such as ribs or beams. Obtain the approval of the Resident Engineer prior to drilling through structural elements.

2. Cut holes through concrete and masonry in new and existing structures with a diamond core drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammers, impact electric, hand, or manual hammer-type drills are not allowed, except where permitted by the Resident Engineer as required by limited working space.

B. Firestop: Where conduits, wireways, and other electrical raceways pass through fire partitions, fire walls, smoke partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases as specified in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. In accordance with UL, NEC, as shown, and as specified herein.

B. Install conduit as follows:


26 05 33 VARHS

1. In complete mechanically and electrically continuous runs before pulling in cables or wires.

2. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein, installation of all conduits shall be concealed within finished walls, floors, and ceilings.

3. Flattened, dented, or deformed conduit is not permitted. Remove and replace the damaged conduits with new undamaged material.

4. Assure conduit installation does not encroach into the ceiling height head room, walkways, or doorways.

5. Cut square, ream, remove burrs, and draw up tight.

6. Independently support conduit at 8 ft [2.4 M] on centers. Do not use other supports, i.e., suspended ceilings, suspended ceiling supporting members, lighting fixtures, conduits, mechanical piping, or mechanical ducts.

7. Support within 12 in [300 mm] of changes of direction, and within 12 in [300 mm] of each enclosure to which connected.

8. Close ends of empty conduit with plugs or caps at the rough-in stage until wires are pulled in, to prevent entry of debris.

9. Conduit installations under fume and vent hoods are prohibited.

10. Secure conduits to cabinets, junction boxes, pull-boxes, and outlet boxes with bonding type locknuts. For rigid and IMC conduit installations, provide a locknut on the inside of the enclosure, made up wrench tight. Do not make conduit connections to junction box covers.

11. Flashing of penetrations of the roof membrane is specified in Section 07 60 00, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL.

12. Conduit bodies shall only be used for changes in direction, and shall not contain splices.

C. Conduit Bends:

1. Make bends with standard conduit bending machines.

2. Conduit hickey may be used for slight offsets and for straightening stubbed out conduits.

3. Bending of conduits with a pipe tee or vise is prohibited.

D. Layout and Homeruns:

1. Install conduit with wiring, including homeruns, as shown on drawings.

2. Deviations: Make only where necessary to avoid interferences and only after drawings showing the proposed deviations have been submitted approved by the Resident Engineer.

3.3 CONCEALED WORK INSTALLATION

A. In Concrete:

1. Conduit: Rigid steel, IMC, or EMT. Do not install EMT in concrete slabs that are in contact with soil, gravel, or vapor barriers.


26 05 33 VARHS

2. Align and run conduit in direct lines.

3. Install conduit through concrete beams only:

a. Where shown on the structural drawings.

b. As approved by the Resident Engineer prior to construction, and after submittal of drawing showing location, size, and position of each penetration.

4. Installation of conduit in concrete that is less than 3 in [75 mm] thick is prohibited.

a. Conduit outside diameter larger than one-third of the slab thickness is prohibited.

b. Space between conduits in slabs: Approximately six conduit diameters apart, and one conduit diameter at conduit crossings.

c. Install conduits approximately in the center of the slab so that there will be a minimum of 0.75 in [19 mm] of concrete around the conduits.

5. Make couplings and connections watertight. Use thread compounds that are UL approved conductive type to ensure low resistance ground continuity through the conduits. Tightening setscrews with pliers is prohibited.

B. Above Furred or Suspended Ceilings and in Walls:

1. Conduit for conductors 600 V and below: Rigid steel, IMC or EMT. Mixing different types of conduits indiscriminately in the same system is prohibited.

2. Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.

3. Connect recessed lighting fixtures to conduit runs with maximum 6 ft [1.8 M] of flexible metal conduit extending from a junction box to the fixture.

4. Tightening setscrews with pliers is prohibited.

3.4 EXPOSED WORK INSTALLATION

A. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, exposed conduit is only permitted in mechanical and electrical rooms.

B. Conduit for Conductors 600 V and Below: Rigid steel, IMC, or EMT. Mixing different types of conduits indiscriminately in the system is prohibited.

C. Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.

D. Install horizontal runs close to the ceiling or beams and secure with conduit straps.

E. Support horizontal or vertical runs at not over 8 ft [2.4 M] intervals.

F. Surface metal raceways: Use only where shown.

G. Painting:

1. Paint exposed conduit as specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.


26 05 33 VARHS

2. Paint all conduits containing cables rated over 600 V safety orange. Refer to Section 09 91 00, PAINTING for preparation, paint type, and exact color. In addition, paint legends, using 2 in [50 mm] high black numerals and letters, showing the cable voltage rating. Provide legends where conduits pass through walls and floors and at maximum 20 ft [6 M] intervals in between.

3.5 DIRECT BURIAL INSTALLATION

Refer to Section 26 05 41, UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION.

3.6 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

A. Use rigid steel conduit only, notwithstanding requirements otherwise specified in this or other sections of these specifications.

B. Install UL approved sealing fittings that prevent passage of explosive vapors in hazardous areas equipped with explosion-proof lighting fixtures, switches, and receptacles, as required by the NEC.

3.7 WET OR DAMP LOCATIONS

A. Unless otherwise shown, use conduits of rigid steel or IMC.

B. Provide sealing fittings to prevent passage of water vapor where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, i.e., refrigerated spaces, constant-temperature rooms, air-conditioned spaces, building exterior walls, roofs, or similar spaces.

C. Unless otherwise shown, use rigid steel or IMC conduit within 5 ft [1.5 M] of the exterior and below concrete building slabs in contact with soil, gravel, or vapor barriers. Conduit shall be half-lapped with 10 mil PVC tape before installation. After installation, completely recoat or retape any damaged areas of coating.

3.8 MOTORS AND VIBRATING EQUIPMENT

A. Use flexible metal conduit for connections to motors and other electrical equipment subject to movement, vibration, misalignment, cramped quarters, or noise transmission.

B. Use liquid-tight flexible metal conduit for installation in exterior locations, moisture or humidity laden atmosphere, corrosive atmosphere, water or spray wash-down operations, inside airstream of HVAC units, and locations subject to seepage or dripping of oil, grease, or water. Provide a green equipment grounding conductor with flexible metal conduit.

3.9 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Conduits 3 in [75 mm] and larger that are secured to the building structure on opposite sides of a building expansion joint require expansion and deflection couplings. Install the couplings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Provide conduits smaller than 3 in [75 mm] with junction boxes on both sides of the expansion joint. Connect conduits to junction boxes with sufficient slack of flexible conduit to produce 5 in [125 mm] vertical drop midway between the ends. Flexible conduit shall have a bonding jumper installed. In lieu of this flexible conduit, expansion and deflection couplings as specified above for conduits 15 in [375 mm] and larger are acceptable.

C. Install expansion and deflection couplings where shown.


26 05 33 VARHS

3.10 CONDUIT SUPPORTS, INSTALLATION

A. Safe working load shall not exceed one-quarter of proof test load of fastening devices.

B. Use pipe straps or individual conduit hangers for supporting individual conduits.

C. Support multiple conduit runs with trapeze hangers. Use trapeze hangers that are designed to support a load equal to or greater than the sum of the weights of the conduits, wires, hanger itself, and 200 lbs [90 kg]. Attach each conduit with U-bolts or other approved fasteners.

D. Support conduit independently of junction boxes, pull-boxes, fixtures, suspended ceiling T-bars, angle supports, and similar items.

E. Fasteners and Supports in Solid Masonry and Concrete:

1. New Construction: Use steel or malleable iron concrete inserts set in place prior to placing the concrete.

2. Existing Construction:

a. Steel expansion anchors not less than 0.25 in [6 mm] bolt size and not less than 1.125 in [28 mm] embedment.

b. Power set fasteners not less than 0.25 in [6 mm] diameter with depth of penetration not less than 3 in [75 mm].

c. Use vibration and shock-resistant anchors and fasteners for attaching to concrete ceilings.

F. Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts.

G. Bolts supported only by plaster or gypsum wallboard are not acceptable.

H. Metal Structures: Use machine screw fasteners or other devices specifically designed and approved for the application.

I. Attachment by wood plugs, rawl plug, plastic, lead or soft metal anchors, or wood blocking and bolts supported only by plaster is prohibited.

J. Chain, wire, or perforated strap shall not be used to support or fasten conduit.

K. Spring steel type supports or fasteners are prohibited for all uses except horizontal and vertical supports/fasteners within walls.

L. Vertical Supports: Vertical conduit runs shall have riser clamps and supports in accordance with the NEC and as shown. Provide supports for cable and wire with fittings that include internal wedges and retaining collars.

3.11 BOX INSTALLATION

A. Boxes for Concealed Conduits:

1. Flush-mounted.

2. Provide raised covers for boxes to suit the wall or ceiling, construction, and finish.


26 05 33 VARHS

B. In addition to boxes shown, install additional boxes where needed to prevent damage to cables and wires during pulling-in operations.

C. Remove only knockouts as required and plug unused openings. Use threaded plugs for cast metal boxes and snap-in metal covers for sheet metal boxes.

D. Outlet boxes mounted back-to-back in the same wall are prohibited. A minimum 24 in [600 mm] center-to-center lateral spacing shall be maintained between boxes.

E. Minimum size of outlet boxes for ground fault interrupter (GFI) receptacles is 4 in [100 mm] square x 2.125 in [55 mm] deep, with device covers for the wall material and thickness involved.

F. Stencil or install phenolic nameplates on covers of the boxes identified on riser diagrams; for example "SIG-FA JB No. 1."

G. On all branch circuit junction box covers, identify the circuits with black marker.

- - - E N D - - -


SECTION 26 05 41 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of underground ducts and raceways, and precast manholes and pullboxes to form a complete underground electrical raceway system.

B. The terms “duct” and “conduit” are used interchangeably in this section. 1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS: Sealing of conduit penetrations.

B. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: Requirements that apply to

all sections of Division 26.




B. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, and pullboxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit six copies of the following in accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS. 1. Shop Drawings:


b. Submit information on manholes, pullboxes, ducts, and hardware. Submit manhole plan and

elevation drawings, showing openings, pulling irons, cable supports, cover, ladder, sump, and other accessories.

c. Proposed deviations from the drawings shall be clearly marked on the submittals. If it is necessary

to locate manholes, pullboxes, or duct banks at locations other than shown on the drawings, show the proposed locations accurately on scaled site drawings, and submit to the Resident Engineer for approval prior to construction.

2. Certifications: Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit the following.

a. Certification by the manufacturer that the materials conform to the requirements of the drawings and specifications.

b. Certification by the Contractor that the materials have been properly installed, connected, and tested.


26 05 41 VARHS



of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by designation only. B. American Concrete Institute (ACI): Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete

318-11/318M-11 ..............................Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete & Commentary SP-66-04 ..........................................ACI Detailing Manual

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 77-10 ...............................................Underground Enclosure Integrity

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): C478-12 ...........................................Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole

Sections C858-10e1 .......................................Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures C990-09 ...........................................Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes and Precast Box Sections Using

Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants. E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

TC 2-03 ...........................................Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit TC 3-04 ...........................................Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC Conduit

And Tubing TC 6 & 8-03 ....................................Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct For Underground

Installations TC 9-04 ...........................................Fittings For Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct For

Underground Installation

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-11 ...............................................National Electrical Code (NEC) 70E-12 .............................................National Electrical Safety Code

G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 6-07 .................................................Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel 467-07 .............................................Grounding and Bonding Equipment 651-11 .............................................Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings 651A-11 ...........................................Schedule 40 and 80 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Conduit 651B-07 ...........................................Continuous Length HDPE Conduit

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRE-CAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND HARDWARE

A. Structure: Factory-fabricated, reinforced-concrete, monolithically-poured walls and bottom. Frame and cover shall form top of manhole.

B. Cable Supports:

1. Cable stanchions shall be hot-rolled, heavy duty, hot-dipped galvanized "T" section steel, 56 mm (2.25 inches) x 6 mm (0.25 inch) in size, and punched with 14 holes on 38 mm (1.5 inches) centers for attaching cable arms.

2. Cable arms shall be 5 mm (0.1875 inch) gauge, hot-rolled, hot-dipped galvanized sheet steel, pressed to channel shape. Arms shall be approximately 63 mm (2.5 inches) wide x 350 mm (14 inches) long.


26 05 41 VARHS

3. Insulators for cable supports shall be porcelain, and shall be saddle type or type that completely encircles the cable.

4. Equip each cable stanchion with one spare cable arm, with three spare insulators for future use.

C. Ladder: Fiberglass/ with 400 mm (16 inches) rung spacing. Provide securely-mounted ladder for every

manhole over 1.2 M (4 feet) deep.

D. Ground Rod Sleeve: Provide a 75 mm (3 inches) PVC sleeve in manhole floors so that a driven ground rod may be installed.

E. Sump: Provide 305 mm x 305 mm (12 inches x 12 inches) covered sump frame and grated cover.

2.2 PULLBOXES

A. General: Size as indicated on the drawings. Provide pullboxes with weatherproof, non-skid covers with

recessed hook eyes, secured with corrosion- and tamper-resistant hardware. Cover material shall be identical to pullbox material. Covers shall have molded lettering, ELECTRIC or SIGNAL as applicable. Pullboxes shall comply with the requirements of ANSI 77 Tier 5 loading. Provide pulling irons, 22 mm (0.875 inch) diameter galvanized steel bar with exposed triangular-shaped opening.

B. Concrete Pullboxes: Shall be monolithically-poured reinforced concrete. 2.3 DUCTS

A. Number and sizes shall be as shown on the drawings.

B. Ducts (concrete-encased):

1. Plastic Duct: a. NEMA TC6 & 8 and TC9 plastic utilities duct UL 651 and 651A Schedule 40 PVC conduit.

b. Duct shall be suitable for use with 90˚ C (194˚ F) rated conductors.

2. Conduit Spacers: Prefabricated plastic.

C. Ducts (direct-burial): 1. Plastic duct:

a. NEMA TC2 and TC3 UL 651, 651A, and 651B, Schedule 40 PVC conduit.

c. Duct shall be suitable for use with 75˚ C (167˚ F) rated conductors.

3. Rigid metal conduit: UL6 and NEMA RN1 galvanized rigid metal, half-lap wrapped with 10 mil PVC tape.

2.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground Rods and Ground Wire: Per Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

2.5 WARNING TAPE

A. 4-mil polyethylene 75 mm (3 inches) wide detectable tape, red with black letters, imprinted with “CAUTION - BURIED ELECTRIC CABLE BELOW” or similar.


26 05 41 VARHS

2.6 PULL ROPE FOR SPARE DUCTS

A. Plastic with 890 N (200 lb) minimum tensile strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANHOLE AND PULLBOX INSTALLATION

A. Assembly and installation shall be per the requirements of the manufacturer.

1. Install manholes and pullboxes level and plumb. 2. Units shall be installed on a 300 mm (12 inches) thick level bed of 90% compacted granular fill,

well-graded from the 25 mm (1 inches) sieve to the No. 4 sieve. Granular fill shall be compacted with a minimum of four passes with a plate compactor.

B. Access: Ensure the top of frames and covers are flush with finished grade.

C. Grounding in Manholes:

1. Ground Rods in Manholes: Drive a ground rod into the earth, through the floor sleeve, after the

manhole is set in place. Fill the sleeve with sealant to make a watertight seal. Rods shall protrude approximately 100 mm (4 inches) above the manhole floor.

2. Install a No. 3/0 AWG bare copper ring grounding conductor around the inside perimeter of the manhole and anchor to the walls with metallic cable clips.

3. Connect the ring grounding conductor to the ground rod by an exothermic welding process.

4. Bond the ring grounding conductor to the duct bank equipment grounding conductors, the exposed

non-current carrying metal parts of racks, sump covers, and like items in the manholes with a minimum No. 6 AWG bare copper jumper using an exothermic welding process.

3.2 TRENCHING

A. Before performing trenching work at existing facilities, a Ground Penetrating Radar Survey shall be

carefully performed by a certified technician to reveal all existing underground ducts, conduits, cables, and other utility systems.

B. Work with extreme care near existing ducts, conduits, and other utilities to avoid damaging them.

C. Cut the trenches neatly and uniformly.

D. For Concrete-Encased Ducts: 1. After excavation of the trench, stakes shall be driven in the bottom of the trench at 1.2 M (4 foot)

intervals to establish the grade and route of the duct bank.

2. Pitch the trenches uniformly toward manholes or both ways from high points between manholes for the required duct line drainage. Avoid pitching the ducts toward buildings wherever possible.

3. The walls of the trench may be used to form the side walls of the duct bank, provided that the soil is

self-supporting and that the concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions. Forms are required where the soil is not self-supporting.


26 05 41 VARHS

4. After the concrete-encased duct has sufficiently cured, the trench shall be backfilled to grade with earth, and appropriate warning tape installed.

E. Individual conduits to be installed under existing paved areas and roads that cannot be disturbed shall be jacked into place using rigid metal conduit, or bored using plastic utilities duct or PVC conduit, as approved by the Resident Engineer.

3.3 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements: 1. Ducts shall be in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as specified.

2. Join and terminate ducts with fittings recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Slope ducts to drain towards manholes and pullboxes, and away from building and equipment

entrances. Pitch not less than 100 mm (4 inch) in 30 M (100 feet). 4. Underground conduit stub-ups and sweeps to equipment inside of buildings shall be galvanized rigid

metal conduit half-lap wrapped with PVC tape, and shall extend a minimum of 1.5 M (5 feet) outside the building foundation. Tops of conduits below building slab shall be minimum 610 mm (24 inches) below bottom of slab.

5. Stub-ups and sweeps to equipment mounted on outdoor concrete slabs shall be galvanized rigid metal

conduit half-lap wrapped with PVC tape, and shall extend a minimum of 1.5 M (5 feet) away from the edge of slab.

6. Install insulated grounding bushings on the conduit terminations. 7. Radius for sweeps shall be sufficient to accomplish pulls without damage. Minimum radius shall be six

times conduit diameter.

8. All multiple conduit runs shall have conduit spacers. Spacers shall securely support and maintain uniform spacing of the duct assembly a minimum of 75 mm (3 inches) above the bottom of the trench during the concrete pour. Spacer spacing shall not exceed 1.5 M (5 feet). Secure spacers to ducts and earth to prevent floating during concrete pour. Provide nonferrous tie wires to prevent displacement of the ducts during concrete pour. Tie wires shall not act as substitute for spacers.

9. Duct lines shall be installed no less than 300 mm (12 inches) from other utility systems, such as water, sewer, chilled water.

10. Clearances between individual ducts:

a. For similar services, not less than 75 mm (3 inches).

b. For power and signal services, not less than 150 mm (6 inches).

11. Duct lines shall terminate at window openings in manhole walls as shown on the drawings. All ducts shall be fitted with end bells.

12. Couple the ducts with proper couplings. Stagger couplings in rows and layers to ensure maximum

strength and rigidity of the duct bank. 13. Keep ducts clean of earth, sand, or gravel, and seal with tapered plugs upon completion of each portion

of the work. 14. Spare Ducts: Where spare ducts are shown, they shall have a nylon pull rope installed. They shall be

capped at each end and labeled as to location of the other end.


26 05 41 VARHS

15. Duct Identification: Place continuous strip of warning tape approximately 300 mm (12 inches) above

ducts before backfilling trenches. Warning tape shall be preprinted with proper identification. 16. Duct Sealing: Seal ducts, including spare ducts, at building entrances and at outdoor terminations for

equipment, with a suitable non-hardening compound to prevent the entrance of foreign objects and material, moisture, and gases.

17. Use plastic ties to secure cables to insulators on cable arms. Use minimum two ties per cable per

insulator.

B. Concrete-Encased Ducts: 1. Install concrete-encased ducts for medium-voltage systems, low-voltage systems, and signal systems,

unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 2. Duct banks shall be single or multiple duct assemblies encased in concrete. Ducts shall be uniform in

size and material throughout the installation. 3. Tops of concrete-encased ducts shall be:

a. Not less than 600 mm (24 inches) and not less than shown on the drawings, below finished grade.

b. Not less than 750 mm (30 inches) and not less than shown on the drawings, below roads and other

paved surfaces.

c. Additional burial depth shall be required in order to accomplish NEC-required minimum bend radius of ducts.

d. Conduits crossing under grade slab construction joints shall be installed a minimum of 1.2 M (4 feet) below slab.

4. Extend the concrete envelope encasing the ducts not less than 75 mm (3 inches) beyond the outside

walls of the outer ducts.

5. Within 3 M (10 feet} of building and manhole wall penetrations, install reinforcing steel bars at the top and bottom of each concrete envelope to provide protection against vertical shearing.

6. Install reinforcing steel bars at the top and bottom of each concrete envelope of all ducts underneath

roadways and parking areas.

7. Where new ducts and concrete envelopes are to be joined to existing manholes, pullboxes, ducts, and concrete envelopes, make the joints with the proper fittings and fabricate the concrete envelopes to ensure smooth durable transitions.

8. Duct joints in concrete may be placed side by side horizontally, but shall be staggered at least 150 mm

(6 inches) vertically. 9. Pour each run of concrete envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous pour. If

more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 19 mm (0.75 inch) reinforcing rod dowels extending 450 mm (18 inches) into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope.

10. Pour concrete so that open spaces are uniformly filled. Do not agitate with power equipment unless

approved by Resident Engineer.


26 05 41 VARHS

C. Direct-Burial Ducts:

1. Install direct-burial ducts only where shown on the drawings. Provide direct-burial ducts only for low-

voltage power and lighting branch circuits.

2. Tops of ducts shall be:

a. Not less than 600 mm (24 inches) and not less than shown on the drawings, below finished grade.

b. Not less than 750 mm (30 inches) and not less than shown on the drawings, below roads and other paved surfaces.

c. Additional burial depth shall be required in order to accomplish NEC-required minimum bend

radius of ducts. 3. Do not kink the ducts. Compaction shall not deform the ducts.

D. Connections to Manholes: Ducts connecting to manholes shall be flared to have an enlarged cross-section

to provide additional shear strength. Dimensions of the flared cross-section shall be larger than the corresponding manhole opening dimensions by no less than 300 mm (12 inches) in each direction. Perimeter of the duct bank opening in the manhole shall be flared toward the inside or keyed to provide a positive interlock between the duct and the wall of the manhole. Use vibrators when this portion of the encasement is poured to ensure a seal between the envelope and the wall of the structure.

E. Connections to Existing Manholes: For duct connections to existing manholes, break the structure wall out to the dimensions required and preserve the steel in the structure wall. Cut steel and extend into the duct bank envelope. Chip the perimeter surface of the duct bank opening to form a key or flared surface, providing a positive connection with the duct bank envelope.

F. Connections to Existing Ducts: Where connections to existing ducts are indicated, excavate around the ducts as necessary. Cut off the ducts and remove loose concrete from inside before installing new ducts. Provide a reinforced-concrete collar, poured monolithically with the new ducts, to take the shear at the joint of the duct banks.

G. Partially-Completed Ducts: During construction, wherever a construction joint is necessary in a duct bank, prevent debris such as mud and dirt from entering ducts by providing suitable plugs. Fit concrete envelope of a partially completed ducts with reinforcing steel extending a minimum of 600 mm (2 feet) back into the envelope and a minimum of 600 mm (2 feet) beyond the end of the envelope. Provide one No. 4 bar in each corner, 75 mm (3 inches) from the edge of the envelope. Secure corner bars with two No. 3 ties, spaced approximately 300 mm (12 inches) apart. Restrain reinforcing assembly from moving during pouring of concrete.


A. Duct Testing and Cleaning: 1. Upon completion of the duct installation, a standard flexible mandrel shall be pulled through each duct

to loosen particles of earth, sand, or foreign material left in the duct, and to test for out-of-round conditions.

2. The mandrel shall be not less than 300 mm (12 inches) long, and shall have a diameter not less than 13

mm (0.5 inch) less than the inside diameter of the duct. A brush with stiff bristles shall then be pulled through each duct to remove the loosened particles. The diameter of the brush shall be the same as, or slightly larger than, the diameter of the duct.


26 05 41 VARHS

3. If testing reveals obstructions or out-of-round conditions, the Contractor shall replace affected section(s) of duct and retest to the satisfaction of the Resident Engineer at no cost to the Government.

4. Mandrel pulls shall be witnessed by the Resident Engineer.

---END---


SECTION 26 05 73 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the overcurrent protective device coordination study, indicated as the study in this section.

B. A short-circuit and selective coordination study shall be prepared for the electrical overcurrent devices to be installed under this project.

C. The study shall present a well-coordinated time-current analysis of each overcurrent protective device from the individual device up to the utility source and the on-site generator sources.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 26 24 13, DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS: Low-voltage distribution switchboards.

B. Section 26 24 16, PANELBOARDS: Low-voltage panelboards.

C. Section 26 24 19, MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS: Motor control centers.

D. Section 26 32 13, ENGINE GENERATORS: Engine generators.

E. Section 26 36 23, AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES: Automatic transfer switches.



B. The study shall be prepared by the equipment manufacturer.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Product data on the software program to be used for the study. Software shall be in mainstream use in the industry, shall provide device settings and ratings, and shall show selective coordination by time-current drawings.

2. Complete study as described in paragraph 1.6. Submittal of the study shall be well-coordinated with submittals of the shop drawings for equipment in related specification sections.


a. Certification by the Contractor that the overcurrent protective devices have been set in accordance with the approved study.




26 05 73 VARHS

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

242-01 .............................................Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems

399-97 .............................................Industrial and Commercial Power Systems Analysis

1584a-04 ..........................................Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations

1.6 STUDY REQUIREMENTS

A. The study shall include one line diagram, short-circuit and ground fault analysis, and protective coordination plots for all overcurrent protective devices.

B. One Line Diagram:

1. Show all electrical equipment and wiring to be protected by the overcurrent devices.

2. Show the following specific information:

a. Calculated fault impedance, X/R ratios, and short-circuit values at each feeder and branch circuit bus.

b. Relay, circuit breaker, and fuse ratings.

c. Generator kW/kVA and transformer kVA and voltage ratings, percent impedance, X/R ratios, and wiring connections.

d. Voltage at each bus.

e. Identification of each bus, matching the identification on the drawings.

f. Conduit, conductor, and busway material, size, length, and X/R ratios.

C. Short-Circuit Study:

1. The study shall be performed using computer software designed for this purpose. Pertinent data and the rationale employed in developing the calculations shall be described in the introductory remarks of the study.

2. Calculate the fault impedance to determine the available short-circuit and ground fault currents at each bus. Incorporate applicable motor and/or generator contribution in determining the momentary and interrupting ratings of the overcurrent protective devices.

3. Present the results of the short-circuit study in a table. Include the following:

a. Device identification.

b. Operating voltage.

c. Overcurrent protective device type and rating.

d. Calculated short-circuit current.

26 05 73 – 2 SEISMICALLY UPGRADE BUILDING 7 OCTOBER 2014

26 05 73 VARHS

D. Coordination Curves:

1. Prepare the coordination curves to determine the required settings of overcurrent protective devices to demonstrate selective coordination. Graphically illustrate on log-log paper that adequate time separation exists between devices, including the utility company upstream device if applicable. Plot the specific time-current characteristics of each overcurrent protective device in such a manner that all devices are clearly depicted.

2. The following specific information shall also be shown on the coordination curves:


b. Potential transformer and current transformer ratios.

c. Three-phase and single-phase ANSI damage points or curves for each cable, transformer, or generator.

d. Applicable circuit breaker or protective relay characteristic curves.

e. No-damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses.

f. Transformer in-rush points.

3. Develop a table to summarize the settings selected for the overcurrent protective devices. Include the following in the table:


b. Protective relay or circuit breaker potential and current transformer ratios, sensor rating, and available and suggested pickup and delay settings for each available trip characteristic.

c. Fuse rating and type.

1.7 ANALYSIS

A. Analyze the short-circuit calculations, and highlight any equipment determined to be underrated as specified. Propose solutions to effectively protect the underrated equipment.

1.8 ADJUSTMENTS, SETTINGS, AND MODIFICATIONS

A. Final field settings and minor modifications of the overcurrent protective devices shall be made to conform with the study, without additional cost to the Government.


PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)

---END---


SECTION 26 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The requirements of this Section apply to all sections of Division 26.

B. This project will have selected building systems commissioned. The complete list of equipment and systems to be commissioned is specified in Section 01 91 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS. The commissioning process, which the Contractor is responsible to execute, is defined in Section 01 91 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIRMENTS. A Commissioning Agent (CxA) appointed by the VA will manage the commissioning process.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

B. Section 01 91 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS.

C. Section 01 33 23 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.

1.3 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for commissioning the Facility electrical systems, related subsystems and related equipment. This Section supplements the general requirements specified in Section 01 91 00 General Commissioning Requirements.

B. Refer to Section 01 91 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for more details regarding processes and procedures as well as roles and responsibilities for all Commissioning Team members.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Refer to Section 01 91 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for definitions.

1.5 COMMISSIONED SYSTEMS

A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in Division 26 is part of the construction process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the VA’s Operation and Maintenance personnel in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 91 00 and of Division 26, is required in cooperation with the VA and the Commissioning Agent.

B. The Facility electrical systems commissioning will include the systems listed in Section 01 19 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS:

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. The commissioning process requires review of selected Submittals that pertain to the systems to be commissioned. The Commissioning Agent will provide a list of submittals that will be reviewed by the Commissioning Agent. This list will be reviewed and approved by the VA prior to forwarding to the Contractor. Refer to Section 01 33 23 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES for further details.


26 08 00 VARHS

B. The commissioning process requires Submittal review simultaneously with engineering review. Specific submittal requirements related to the commissioning process are specified in Section 01 91 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTIONS

A. Commissioning of Electrical systems will require inspection of individual elements of the electrical systems construction throughout the construction period. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Commissioning Agent in accordance with Section 01 91 00 and the Commissioning plan to schedule electrical systems inspections as required to support the Commissioning Process.

3.2 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS

A. The Contractor shall complete Pre-Functional Checklists to verify systems, subsystems, and equipment installation is complete and systems are ready for Systems Functional Performance Testing. The Commissioning Agent will prepare Pre-Functional Checklists to be used to document equipment installation. The Contractor shall complete the checklists. Completed checklists shall be submitted to the VA and to the Commissioning Agent for review. The Commissioning Agent may spot check a sample of completed checklists. If the Commissioning Agent determines that the information provided on the checklist is not accurate, the Commissioning Agent will return the marked-up checklist to the Contractor for correction and resubmission. If the Commissioning Agent determines that a significant number of completed checklists for similar equipment are not accurate, the Commissioning Agent will select a broader sample of checklists for review. If the Commissioning Agent determines that a significant number of the broader sample of checklists is also inaccurate, all the checklists for the type of equipment will be returned to the Contractor for correction and resubmission. Refer to SECTION 01 91 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for submittal requirements for Pre-Functional Checklists, Equipment Startup Reports, and other commissioning documents.

3.3 CONTRACTORS TESTS

A. Contractor tests as required by other sections of Division 26 shall be scheduled and documented in accordance with Section 01 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. All testing shall be incorporated into the project schedule. Contractor shall provide no less than 7 calendar days’ notice of testing. The Commissioning Agent will witness selected Contractor tests at the sole discretion of the Commissioning Agent. Contractor tests shall be completed prior to scheduling Systems Functional Performance Testing.

3.4 SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. The Commissioning Process includes Systems Functional Performance Testing that is intended to test systems functional performance under steady state conditions, to test system reaction to changes in operating conditions, and system performance under emergency conditions. The Commissioning Agent will prepare detailed Systems Functional Performance Test procedures for review and approval by the Resident Engineer. The Contractor shall review and comment on the tests prior to approval. The Contractor shall provide the required labor, materials, and test equipment identified in the test procedure to perform the tests. The Commissioning Agent will witness and document the testing. The Contractor shall sign the test reports to verify tests were performed. See Section 01 91 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS, for additional details.


26 08 00 VARHS

3.5 TRAINING OF VA PERSONNEL

A. Training of the VA operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Resident Engineer and Commissioning Agent. Provide competent, factory authorized personnel to provide instruction to operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location, operation, and troubleshooting of the installed systems. Contractor shall submit training agendas and trainer resumes in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 19 00. The instruction shall be scheduled in coordination with the VA Resident Engineer after submission and approval of formal training plans. Refer to Section 01 91 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS and Division 26 Sections for additional Contractor training requirements.

----- END -----


SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of the lighting controls.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General requirements that are common to more than one section of Division 26.

B. Section 26 05 19, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and wiring.

C. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground fault currents.

D. Section 26 24 16, PANELBOARDS: panelboard enclosure and interior bussing used for lighting control panels.

E. Section 26 27 26, WIRING DEVICES: Wiring devices used for control of the lighting systems.


Refer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS, in Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS, submit the following:

B. Product Data: For each type of lighting control, submit the following information.

1. Manufacturer’s catalog data.

2. Wiring schematic and connection diagram.

3. Installation details.

C. Manuals:

1. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings companion copies of complete maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets, and information for ordering replacement parts.

2. Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the final updated maintenance and operating manuals, including any changes, to the Resident Engineer.


26 09 23 VARHS

D. Certifications:

1. Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following certifications to the Resident Engineer:

a. Certification by the Contractor that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested.



B. Green Seal (GS):

GC-12 ..............................................Occupancy Sensors

C. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA):

IESNA LM-48 .................................... Guide for Calibration of Photoelectric Control Devices

D. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)

C136.10 ...........................................American National Standard for Roadway Lighting Equipment-Locking-Type Photocontrol Devices and Mating Receptacles - Physical and Electrical Interchangeability and Testing

ICS-1 ...............................................Standard for Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements

ICS-2.................. .............................Standard for Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contractors, and Overload Relays Rated Not More than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC: Part 8 - Disconnect Devices for Use in Industrial Control Equipment

ICS-6 ...............................................Standard for Industrial Controls and Systems Enclosures


20 .....................................................Standard for General-Use Snap Switches

773 ...................................................Standard for Plug-In Locking Type Photocontrols for Use with Area Lighting

773A ................................................Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control

98 .....................................................Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches

917............................................................... Clock Operated Switches

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES

A. Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA tungsten or 1000 VA inductive, complying with UL 773A.


26 09 23 VARHS

1. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc [16.14 to 108 lx], with adjustable turn-on and turn-off levels.

2. Time Delay: 15-second minimum.

3. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor.

4. Mounting: Twist lock, with base-and-stem mounting or stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required.

2.2 TIMER SWITCHES

A. Digital switches with backlit LCD display, 120/277 volt rated, fitting as a replacement for standard wall switches.

1. Compatibility: Compatible with all ballasts.

2. Warning: Audible warning to sound during the last minute of “on” operation.

3. Time-out: Adjustable from 5 minutes to 12 hours.

4. Faceplate: Refer to wall plate material and color requirements for toggle switches, as specified in Section 26 27 26, WIRING DEVICES.

2.3 CEILING-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES

A. Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with separate relay unit.

1. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the associated relay. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.

2. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20A ballast load at 120V and 277V, for 13A tungsten at 120V, and for 1 hp at 120V.

3. Monitoring Range: 10 to 200 fc [108 to 2152 lx], with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels.

4. Time Delay: Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds, with deadband adjustment.

5. Indicator: Two LEDs to indicate the beginning of on-off cycles.

2.4 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a power supply and relay unit, suitable for the environmental conditions in which installed.

1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied; with a 1 to 15 minute adjustable time delay for turning lights off.

2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.



26 09 23 VARHS

4. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.

b. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.

5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation of the sensor.

6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.

7. Manual/automatic selector switch.

8. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc [21.5 to 2152 lx]; keep lighting off when selected lighting level is present.

9. Faceplate for Wall-Switch Replacement Type: Refer to wall plate material and color requirements for toggle switches, as specified in Section 26 27 26, WIRING DEVICES.

B. Dual-technology Type: Ceiling mounting; combination PIR and ultrasonic detection methods, field-selectable.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.

2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch [150mm] minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. [232 sq. cm], and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches [305 mm] in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s [305 mm/s].

3. Detection Coverage: as scheduled on drawings.

2.5 OUTDOOR MOTION SENSOR (PIR)

A. Suitable for operation in ambient temperatures ranging from minus 40 to plus 130 deg F (minus 40 to plus 54 deg C).

1. Operation: Turn lights on when sensing infrared energy changes between background and moving body in area of coverage; with a 1 to 15 minute adjustable time delay for turning lights off.

2. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outdoor junction box.

b. Relay: Internally mounted in a standard weatherproof electrical enclosure.

c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.

3. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.

4. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 1 to 20 fc [11 to 215 lx]; keep lighting off during daylight hours.

B. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch [150mm] minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. [232 sq. cm].


26 09 23 VARHS

C. Detection Coverage: as scheduled on drawings.

D. Individually Mounted Sensor: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.


2. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation of the sensor.

2.6 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL – RELAY TYPE

A. Relay Panels:

1. NEMA rated enclosure with hinged door. Rain tight or oil tight and other NEMA rated versions available.

2. 16 AWG steel barrier shall separate the high voltage and low voltage compartments of the pane and separate 120V and 277V.

3. LCP input power shall be capable of accepting 120V or 277V without rewiring.

4. Control electronics in the low voltage section shall be capable of driving 2 to 48 relays, control any individual group of relays, provide individual relay overrides, provide a master override for each panel, store all programming in non-volatile memory, after power is restored return system to current state, provide programmable blink warn timers for each relay and every zone, and be able to control Normally Open (NO) or Normally Closed (NC) relays.

5. Lighting control system shall be digital and consist of a Master LCP, Slave LCPs, Micro LCPs with up to 4 individual relays, digital switches, digital interface cards and if required, SmartBreaker panelboards. All system components shall connect and be controlled via a single Category 5, 4 twisted pair cable with RJ45 connectors, providing real time two-way communication with each system component. Analog systems are not acceptable.

6. The lighting control system is a networked system that communicates via RS485 and includes centralized relay panels, micro relay panels, digital switches, photocells, various interfaces and operational software. The intent of the specification is to integrate all lighting control into one system. Lighting control system shall include all hardware and software. Software to be resident within the lighting control system. System shall provide local access to all programming functions at the DTC and remote access to all programming functions via dial up modem and through any standard computer workstation running an industry standard internet browser. Lighting control system shall have server built into the master LCP that “serves” HTML pages to any authorized workstation. Desktop computers are not part of this section and will be provided by others. Non-networked, non-digital system not acceptable.

B. Standard Output Relay:

1. Electrically held, electronically latched SPST relay.

2. Relays shall be individually replaceable. Relay terminal blocks shall be capable of accepting two (2) #10AWG wires on both the line and the load side. Systems that do not allow for individual relay replacement or additions are not acceptable.

3. Rated at 20 Amp, 277VAC Ballast, Tungsten, HID, 1HP at 120VAC, 2HP at 240VAC.


26 09 23 VARHS

4. Relays to be rated for 250,000 operations minimum at a full 20A lighting load, use zero-cross circuitry and be normally closed.

C. Low Voltage Switches

1. All switches shall be digital and communicate via RS 485. Contact closure style switches, except as specified for connection to the micro relay panel matrixed contact closure inputs, shall not be acceptable. The programming for a digital switch will reside in the switch itself, via double EPROM memory. Any digital switch button function shall be able to be changed locally (at the DTC or a PC) or remotely, via modem, Internet or Ethernet.

2. Digital low voltage switch shall be a device that sits on the lighting control system bus. Digital switch shall connect to the system bus using the same cable and connection method required for relay panels. System shall provide capability to locally and remotely program each individual switch button, monitor and change function of each button locally and remotely. Each button shall be capable of being programmed for On only, Off only, On/Off (toggle), Raise (Dim up) and Lower (Dim down). Switches requiring low voltage control wires to be moved from one input terminal to another to accomplish these functions are not acceptable.

3. Keyed switches shall be programmable and connect to the lighting controls system bus.

4. Digital switches for high abuse areas (common areas, gymnasiums, etc.) shall be vandal resistant, contain no moving parts, and be touch sensitive and available with up to three buttons in a single gang. Multi gang versions shall also be available. Touch pads shall be Stainless Steel and capable of handling both high abuse and wash down locations. High abuse switches shall connect to the lighting control system digital bus. Each high abuse switch touch button shall be able to be control any relay or any group in any panel or panels that is part of the lighting control system. Each touch button shall be able to be programmed for On, Off, Toggle or Maintain operation. All programming shall be done locally or remotely via dial up modem or web interface as described in other paragraphs of this section. High abuse switches shall be able to be enabled or disabled digitally. Each touch pad is to be identified as to function by an engraved label. Switches must be capable of handling electrostatic discharges of at least 30,000 volts (1cmspark) without any interruption or failure in operation.

D. DTC – Digital Electronic Time Clock

1. A Digital Time Clock (DTC) shall control and program the entire lighting control system and supply all time functions and accept interface inputs.

2. DTC shall be capable of up to 32 schedules. Each schedule shall consist of one set of ON and OFF times per day for each day of the week and for each of two holiday lists. The schedules shall apply to any individual relay or group of relays.

3. The DTC shall be capable of controlling up to 126 digital devices on a single bus and capable of interfacing digitally with other individual busses using manufacturer supplied interface cards.

4. The DTC shall accept control locally using built in button prompts and use of a 8 line 21-letter display or from a computer or modem via an on-board RS 232 port. All commands shall be in plain English. Help pages shall display on the DTC screen.

5. The DTC shall be run from non-volatile memory so that all system programming and real time clock functions are maintained for a minimum of 15 years with loss of power.

6. Pre-installed lighting control software shall provide via local or remote PC a visual representation of each device on the bus, show real time status and the ability to change the status of any individual device, relay or zone. System shall be capable of running optional Unity GX lighting control software, which shall provide for directly importing vector based graphics. No exceptions.


26 09 23 VARHS

7. Pre-Installed modem that allows for remote programming from any location using a PC. Modem to include all necessary software for local or remote control.

8. DTC shall provide system wide timed overrides. Any relay, group or zone that is overridden On, before or after hours, shall automatically be swept Off by the DTC a maximum of 2 hours later.

E. Interfaces: For future expansion capability, system to have available all of the following interfaces. Verify and install only those interfaces indicated on the plans.

1. A dry contact input interface card that provides 14 programmable dry contact closure inputs. Use shielded cable to connect input devices to interface card.

2. Interface card providing digital communication from one system bus to another system bus, allowing up to 12,000 devices to communicate.

3. An interface card that allows the DTC to control up to 32 digital XCI brand thermostats. Programming of thermostats to be able to done locally (at the DTC or a PC) or remotely, via modem, Internet or Ethernet.

4. A voice prompted telephone override interface module. Interface module shall accept up to 3 phone lines and allow up to 3 simultaneous phone calls. Voice prompted menu and up to 999 unique pass codes shall be standard with each interface module.

5. Software pre-installed to run Unity GX Graphical Interface Software. Unity GX software shall provide via local or remote PC a visual representation of a specific area or the total area of the project. GX full graphic pages shall be designed to the owner’s specifications. Owner to provide to manufacturer all necessary files and criteria.

6. Direct digital interface to SmartBreaker panelboards. Relay panel and SmartBreaker panelboard circuits shall appear on the system software as similar, yet distinct, items and maintain all functions and features of the system software.

7. Direct digital interface to DMX 512 based systems. DMX interface shall provide 14 global commands, each of which can be modified locally or remotely using lighting controls manufacturer supplied software. DMX interface shall be integral to the system bus and shall connect and be controlled via a single Category 5, 4 twisted pair cable, providing real time response from the lighting control system to DMX commands.

8. Direct digital interface to building automation systems using DDC protocols such as BACnet and Metasys (N2) that accept on/off commands, time schedules and report status of all relays in all panels in real time. Interface cards shall “self populate” each individual relay and each group to the BAS.

F. Directory: Identifies each relay as to load controlled.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer's instructions and as shown on the drawings or specified.

B. Aim outdoor photocell switch according to manufacturer's recommendations. Set adjustable window slide for 1 footcandle photocell turn-on.

C. Aiming for wall-mounted and ceiling-mounted motion sensor switches shall be per manufacturer’s recommendations.


26 09 23 VARHS

D. Set occupancy sensor "on" duration to 15 minutes.

E. Locate light level sensors as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Adjust sensor for the scheduled light level at the typical work plane for that area.

F. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.


A. Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Upon completion of installation, conduct an operating test to show that equipment operates in accordance with requirements of this section.

C. Test for full range of dimming ballast and dimming controls capability. Observe for visually detectable flicker over full dimming range.

D. Test occupancy sensors for proper operation. Observe for light control over entire area being covered.

E. Program lighting control panel per schedule on drawings.

F. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be commissioned by the manufacturer’s factory-authorized technician who will verify all adjustments and sensor placements.

3.3 FOLLOW-UP VERIFICATION

Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, the Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that the lighting control devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function.

- - - E N D - - -


SECTION 26 12 19 PAD-MOUNTED, LIQUID-FILLED, MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, connection, and testing of the pad-mounted, liquid-filled, medium-voltage transformers, indicated as transformers in this section.

1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 03 30 00, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE: Requirements for concrete equipment pads.

B. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: Requirements that apply to


C. Section 26 05 13, MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES: Medium-voltage cables.

D. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground currents.

E. Section 26 05 73, OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY: Short circuit

and coordination study, and requirements for a coordinated electrical system. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES), in Section 26 05 11,

REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.

1.4 FACTORY TESTS A. Transformers shall be thoroughly tested at the factory to ensure that there are no electrical or mechanical

defects. Tests shall be conducted as per IEEE Standards. Factory tests shall be certified. The following tests shall be performed: 1. Perform insulation-resistance tests, winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground. 2. Perform turns-ratio tests at all tap positions.

B. Furnish four (4) copies of certified manufacturer's factory test reports to the Resident Engineer prior to

shipment of the transformers to ensure that the transformers have been successfully tested as specified.

1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit six copies of the following in accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS. 1. Shop Drawings:


b. Include electrical ratings, nameplate data, impedance, outline drawing with dimensions and front,

top, and side views, weight, mounting details, decibel rating, termination information, temperature rise, no-load and full-load losses, regulation, overcurrent protection, connection diagrams, and accessories.

c. Complete nameplate data, including manufacturer’s name and catalog number.


26 12 19 VARHS

2. Manuals: a. When submitting the shop drawings, submit companion copies of complete maintenance and

operating manuals, including technical data sheets, wiring diagrams, and information for ordering replacement parts. 1) Identify terminals on wiring diagrams to facilitate installation, maintenance, and operation.

2) Indicate on wiring diagrams the internal wiring for each piece of equipment and

interconnections between the pieces of equipment.

3) Approvals will be based on complete submissions of manuals, together with shop drawings.

b. If changes have been made to the maintenance and operating manuals originally submitted, submit updated maintenance and operating manuals two weeks prior to the final inspection. 1) Update the manual to include any information necessitated by shop drawing approval. 2) Show all terminal identification. 3) Include information for testing, repair, troubleshooting, assembly, disassembly, and

recommended maintenance intervals. 4) Provide a replacement parts list with current prices. Include a list of recommended spare

parts, tools, and instruments for testing and maintenance purposes.

B. Certifications: 1. Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit the following certifications.

a. Certification by the manufacturer that the transformers conform to the requirements of the

drawings and specifications.

b. Certification by the Contractor that the transformers have been properly installed, connected, and tested.



of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by designation only.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): C37.47-00 ........................................High Voltage Current-Limiting Type Distribution Class Fuses and Fuse

Disconnecting Switches C57.12.00-00 ...................................Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power and Regulating Transformers C57.12.25-90 ...................................Pad-Mounted, Compartmental-Type, Self-Cooled, Single-Phase

Distribution-Transformers with Separable Insulated High Voltage Connectors; High Voltage, 34500 Grd Y/19920 Volts and Below; Low-Voltage 240/120 Volts; 167 kVA and Smaller Requirements

C57.12.26-92 ...................................Pad-Mounted, Compartmental-Type, Self-Cooled, Three-Phase Distribution Transformers for Use with Separable Insulated High-Voltage Connectors (34500 Grd Y/19920 V and Below, 2500 kVA and Smaller)

C57.12.28-05 ...................................Pad-Mounted Equipment - Enclosure Integrity C57.12.29-05 ...................................Pad-Mounted Equipment – Enclosure Integrity for Coastal

Environments C57.12.34-10 ...................................Pad-Mounted, Compartmental-Type, Self-Cooled, Three-Phase

Distribution Transformers, 5 MVA and Smaller; High Voltage, 34.5 kV Nominal System Voltage and Below; Low Voltage, 15kV Nominal System Voltage and Below


26 12 19 VARHS

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): D3487-08 .........................................Standard Specification for Mineral Insulating Oil Used in Electrical

Apparatus

D. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): C2-07 ...............................................National Electrical Safety Code C57.12.10-11 ...................................Liquid-Immersed Power Transformers C57.12.90-10 ...................................Test Code for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating

Transformers C62.11-06 ........................................Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for AC Power Circuits 48-09 ...............................................Test Procedures and Requirements for Alternating-Current Cable

Terminations Used on Shielded Cables Having Laminated Insulation Rated 2.5kV Through 765kV or Extruded Insulation Rated 2.5kV Through 500kV

386-06 .............................................Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems Above 600 V

592-07 .............................................Exposed Semiconducting Shields on High-Voltage Cable Joints and Separable Connectors

E. International Code Council (ICC):

IBC-12 .............................................International Building Code

F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): LA 1-09 ...........................................Surge Arresters TP 1-02 ............................................Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution

Transformers TR 1-00 ...........................................Transformers, Regulators, and Reactors

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-11 ...............................................National Electrical Code (NEC)

H. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 467-07 .............................................Grounding and Bonding Equipment

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Transformers shall be in accordance with ANSI, ASTM, IEEE, NEMA, NFPA, UL, as shown on the drawings, and as specified herein. Each transformer shall be assembled as an integral unit by a single manufacturer.

B. Transformers shall be complete, outdoor type, continuous duty, integral assembly, grounded, tamper-resistant, and with liquid-immersed windings.

C. Ratings shall not be less than shown on the drawings.

D. Completely fabricate transformers at the factory so that only the external cable connections are required at the project site.

E. Thoroughly clean, phosphatize, and finish all the metal surfaces at the factory with a rust-resistant primer and dark green enamel finish coat. All surfaces of the transformer that will be in contact with the concrete pad shall be treated with corrosion-resistant compounds and epoxy resin or a rubberized sealing compound.


26 12 19 VARHS 2.2 COMPARTMENTS

A. Construction: 1. Enclosures shall be weatherproof and in accordance with ANSI C57.12.28.

2. The medium- and low-voltage compartments shall be separated with a steel barrier that extends the full

height and depth of the compartments.

3. The compartments shall be constructed of sheet steel (gauge to meet ANSI requirements) with bracing and with reinforcing gussets using jig welds to assure rectangular rigidity.

4. All bolts, nuts, and washers shall be cadmium-plated steel.

5. Sufficient space shall be provided for equipment, cabling, and terminations within the compartments.

6. Affix transformer nameplate permanently within the low-voltage compartment. Voltage and kVA rating, connection configuration, impedance, date of manufacture, and serial number shall be shown on the nameplate.

B. Doors:

1. Provide a separate door for each compartment with provisions for a single padlock to secure all doors.

Provide each compartment door with open-position doorstops and corrosion-resistant tamperproof hinges welded in place. The medium-voltage compartment door shall be mechanically prevented from opening unless the low-voltage compartment door is open.

2. The secondary compartment door shall have a one-piece steel handle and incorporate three-point locking mechanisms.

2.3 BIL RATING

A. 25 kV class equipment shall have a minimum 125 kV BIL rating.

2.4 TRANSFORMER FUSE ASSEMBLY

A. The primary fuse assembly shall be a combination of externally replaceable Bay-O-Net liquid-immersed fuses in series with liquid-immersed current-limiting fuses.

2.5 PRIMARY CONNECTIONS

A. Primary connections shall be 200 A dead-front loadbreak wells and inserts for cable sizes shown on the drawings.

2.6 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCH

A. The transformer primary disconnect switch shall be an oil-immersed, internal, gang-operated, load-interrupter type, rated at ampacity and system voltage as shown on the drawings, with a minimum momentary withstand rating of not less than the calculated available fault current shown on the drawings.

B. For A-B feeds, switch shall be a four-position, T-blade manual switch located in the medium-voltage

compartment and hot-stick-operated.


26 12 19 VARHS 2.7 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TERMINATIONS

A. Terminate the medium-voltage cables in the primary compartment with 200 A loadbreak premolded rubber elbow connectors, suitable for submersible applications. Elbow connectors shall have a semi-conductive shield material covering the housing. The separable connector system shall include the loadbreak elbow, the bushing insert, and the bushing well. Separable connectors shall comply with the requirements of IEEE 386, and shall be interchangeable between suppliers. Allow sufficient slack in medium-voltage cable, ground, and drain wires to permit elbow connectors to be moved to their respective parking stands.

B. Ground metallic cable shield with a cable shield grounding adapter, consisting of a solderless connector enclosed in watertight rubber housing covering the entire assembly, bleeder wire, and ground braid.

2.8 LOW-VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT

A. The low-voltage leads shall be brought out of the tank by epoxy pressure tight bushings, and shall be standard arrangement.

B. Tin-plate the low-voltage neutral terminal and isolate from the transformer tank. Provide a removable ground strap sized in accordance with the NEC and connect between the secondary neutral and ground pad.

2.9 TRANSFORMERS

A. Transformer ratings shall be as shown on drawings. kVA ratings shown on the drawings are for continuous duty without the use of cooling fans.

B. Temperature rises shall not exceed the NEMA TR 1 standards of 65˚ C (149˚ F) by resistance.

C. Transformer insulating material shall be less flammable, dielectric, and UL listed as complying with

NFPA 70 requirements for fire point of not less than 300˚ C (600˚ F) when tested according to ASTM D 92. Liquid shall be biodegradable and nontoxic.

D. Transformer impedance shall be not less than 4-1/2% for sizes 150 kVA and larger. Impedance shall be as

shown on the drawings.

E. Sound levels shall conform to NEMA TR 1 standards.

F. Primary and Secondary Windings for Three-Phase Transformers:

1. Primary windings shall be delta-connected. 2. Secondary windings shall be wye-connected, except where otherwise indicated on the drawings.

Provide isolated neutral bushings for secondary wye-connected transformers.

3. Secondary leads shall be brought out through pressure-tight epoxy bushings.

G. Primary windings shall have four 2-1/2% full-capacity voltage taps; two taps above and two taps below rated voltage.

H. Core and Coil Assemblies:

1. Cores shall be grain-oriented, non-aging, and silicon steel to minimize losses.

2. Core and coil assemblies shall be rigidly braced to withstand the stresses caused by rough handling

during shipment, and stresses caused by any possible short-circuit currents.

3. Coils shall be continuous-winding type without splices except for taps. Material shall be copper.

4. Coil and core losses shall be optimum for efficient operation.


26 12 19 VARHS

5. Primary, secondary, and tap connections shall be brazed or pressure type.

6. Provide end fillers or tiedowns for coil windings.

I. The transformer tank, cover, and radiator gauge thickness shall not be less than that required by ANSI.

J. Accessories: 1. Provide standard NEMA features, accessories, and the following:

a. No-load tap changer. Provide warning sign. b. Lifting, pulling, and jacking facilities. c. Globe-type valve for oil filtering and draining, including sampling device. d. Pressure relief valve. e. Liquid level gauge and filling plug. f. A grounding pad in the medium- and low-voltage compartments. g. A diagrammatic nameplate. h. Dial-type liquid thermometer with a maximum reading pointer and an external reset. i. Hot stick. Securely fasten hot stick within low-voltage compartment.

2. The accessories shall be made accessible within the compartments without disassembling trims and

covers.

K. Transformers shall meet the minimum energy efficiency values per NEMA TP 1:

KVA (%) 75 98.7

112.5 98.8 150 98.9 225 99.0 300 99.0 500 99.1 750 99.2 1000 99.2 1500 99.3 2000 99.4 2500 99.4

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install transformers outdoors, as shown on the drawings, in accordance with the NEC, and as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Anchor transformers with rustproof bolts, nuts, and washers not less than 12 mm (1/2 inch) diameter, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and as shown on drawings.

C. Mount transformers on concrete slab. Unless otherwise indicated, the slab shall be at least 200 mm (8

inches) thick, reinforced with a 150 by 150 mm (6 by 6 inches) No. 6 mesh placed uniformly 100 mm (4 inches) from the top of the slab. Slab shall be placed on a 150 mm (6 inches) thick, well-compacted gravel base. The top of the concrete slab shall be approximately 100 mm (4 inches) above the finished grade. Edges above grade shall have 12-1/2 mm (1/2 inch) chamfer. The slab shall be of adequate size to project at least 200 mm (8 inches) beyond the equipment. Provide conduit turnups and cable entrance space required by the equipment to be mounted. Seal voids around conduit openings in slab with water- and oil-resistant


26 12 19 VARHS

caulking or sealant. Cut off and bush conduits 75 mm (3 inches) above slab surface. Concrete work shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

D. Grounding:

1. Ground each transformer in accordance with the requirements of the NEC. Install ground rods per the requirements of Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS, to maintain a maximum resistance of 5 ohms to ground.

2. Connect the ground rod to the ground pads in the medium- and low-voltage compartments.

3. Install and connect the cable shield grounding adapter per the manufacturer’s instructions. Connect the bleeder wire of the cable shield grounding adapter to the loadbreak or deadbreak elbow grounding point with minimum No. 14 AWG wire, and connect the ground braid to the grounding system with minimum No. 6 AWG bare copper wire. Use soldered or mechanical grounding connectors listed for this purpose.


A. Perform manufacturer’s required field tests in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. In addition, include the following: 1. Visual Inspection and Tests:

a. Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Check for damaged or cracked bushings and liquid

leaks.

c. Verify that control and alarm settings on temperature indicators are as specified. d. Inspect all field-installed bolted electrical connections, using the calibrated torque-wrench method

to verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections, and perform thermographic survey after energization under load.

e. Vacuum-clean transformer interior. Clean transformer enclosure exterior.

f. Verify correct liquid level in transformer tank.

g. Verify correct equipment grounding per the requirements of Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING

AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

h. Verify the presence and connection of transformer surge arresters, if provided.

i. Verify that the tap-changer is set at rated system voltage. 3.3 FOLLOW-UP VERIFICATION

A. Upon completion of acceptance checks, settings, and tests, the Contractor shall demonstrate that the transformers are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function.

3.4 SPARE PARTS

A. Deliver the following spare parts for the project to the Resident Engineer two weeks prior to final inspection: 1. Six insulated protective caps.

2. One spare set of medium-voltage fuses for each size and type of fuse used in the project.


26 12 19 VARHS

3.5 INSTRUCTION

A. The Contractor shall instruct maintenance personnel, for not less than one 2-hour period, on the maintenance and operation of the equipment on the date requested by the Resident Engineer.

---END---


SECTION 26 22 00 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, connection, and testing of low-voltage dry-type general-purpose transformers, indicated as transformers in this section.

1.2 RELATED WORK




D. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduit.


Refer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES), in Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings:


b. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, required clearances, terminations, weight, temperature rise, wiring and connection diagrams, plan, front, side, and rear elevations, accessories, and device nameplate data.

2. Manuals:

a. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets and wiring diagrams.

1) Schematic signal and control diagrams, with all terminals identified, matching terminal identification in the transformers.

2) Include information for testing, repair, troubleshooting, assembly, disassembly, and factory recommended/required periodic maintenance procedures and frequency.

b. If changes have been made to the maintenance and operating manuals originally submitted, submit updated maintenance and operating manuals two weeks prior to the final inspection.



26 22 00 VARHS

a. Certification by the manufacturer that the transformers conform to the requirements of the drawings and specifications.

b. Certification by the Contractor that the transformers have been properly installed, adjusted, and tested.



B. International Code Council (ICC):





TP1-02 .............................................Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers

TR1-00 ............................................Transformers, Regulators, and Reactors


UL 506-08 .......................................Standard for Specialty Transformers

UL 1561-11 .....................................Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers

F. United States Department of Energy

10 CFR Part 431 ..............................Energy Efficiency Program for Certain Commercial and Industrial Equipment

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TRANSFORMERS

A. Unless otherwise specified, transformers shall be in accordance with NEMA, NEC, UL and as shown on the drawings.

B. Transformers shall have the following features:

1. Self-cooled by natural convection, isolating windings, indoor dry-type. Autotransformers will not be accepted, except as specifically allowed for buck-boost applications.

2. Rating and winding connections shall be as shown on the drawings.

3. Ratings shown on the drawings are for continuous duty without the use of cooling fans.

4. Copper windings.

5. Insulation systems:


26 22 00 VARHS

a. Transformers 30 kVA and larger: UL rated 220 °C (428 °F) system with an average maximum rise by resistance of 150 °C (302 °F) in a maximum ambient of 40 °C (104 °F).

b. Transformers below 30 kVA: Same as for 30 kVA and larger or UL rated 185 °C (365 °F) system with an average maximum rise by resistance of 115 °C (239 °F) in a maximum ambient of 40 °C (104 °F).

6. Core and coil assemblies:

a. Rigidly braced to withstand the stresses caused by short-circuit currents and rough handling during shipment.

b. Cores shall be grain-oriented, non-aging, and silicon steel.

c. Coils shall be continuous windings without splices except for taps.

d. Coil loss and core loss shall be minimized for efficient operation.

e. Primary and secondary tap connections shall be brazed or pressure type.

f. Coil windings shall have end filters or tie-downs for maximum strength.

7. Certified sound levels, determined in accordance with NEMA, shall not exceed the following:

Transformer Rating Sound Level Rating

0 - 9 KVA 40 dB

10 - 50 KVA 45 dB

51 - 150 KVA 50 dB

151 - 300 KVA 55 dB

301 - 500 KVA 60 dB

8. If not shown on drawings, nominal impedance shall be as permitted by NEMA.

9. Single phase transformers rated 15 kVA through 25 kVA shall have two 5% full capacity taps below normal rated primary voltage. All transformers rated 30 kVA and larger shall have two 2.5% full capacity taps above, and four 2.5% full capacity taps below normal rated primary voltage.

10. Core assemblies shall be grounded to their enclosures with adequate flexible ground straps.

11. Enclosures:

a. Comprised of not less than code gauge steel.

b. Outdoor enclosures shall be NEMA 3R.

c. Temperature rise at hottest spot shall conform to NEMA Standards, and shall not bake and peel off the enclosure paint after the transformer has been placed in service.


26 22 00 VARHS

d. Ventilation openings shall prevent accidental access to live components.

e. The enclosure at the factory shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with manufacturer's prime coat and standard finish.

12. Standard NEMA features and accessories, including ground pad, lifting provisions, and nameplate with the wiring diagram and sound level indicated.

13. Dimensions and configurations shall conform to the spaces designated for their installations.

14. Transformers shall meet the minimum energy efficiency values per NEMA TP1 as listed below:

kVA Rating

Output efficiency (%)

15 97

30 97.5

45 97.7

75 98

112.5 98.2

150 98.3

225 98.5

300 98.6

500 98.7

750 98.8

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation of transformers shall be in accordance with the NEC, as recommended by the equipment manufacturer and as shown on the drawings.

B. Anchor transformers with rustproof bolts, nuts, and washers, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and as shown on drawings.

C. Install transformers with manufacturer's recommended clearance from wall and adjacent equipment for air circulation. Minimum clearance shall be 150 mm (6 inches).

D. Install transformers on vibration pads designed to suppress transformer noise and vibrations.


26 22 00 VARHS


A. Perform tests in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. In addition, include the following:

1. Visual Inspection and Tests:

a. Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings.

b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

c. Inspect all field-installed bolted electrical connections, using the calibrated torque-wrench method to verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections.

d. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests as recommended by manufacturer.

e. Verify correct equipment grounding.

f. Verify proper secondary phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral voltage after energization and prior to connection to loads.


A. Upon completion of acceptance checks, settings, and tests, the contractor shall demonstrate that the transformers are in good operating condition, and properly performing the intended function.

---END---


SECTION 26 24 13 DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, connection, and testing of the low-voltage circuit-breaker distribution switchboards, indicated as switchboard(s) in this section.

1.2 RELATED WORK



C. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible fault currents.

D. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduit.

E. Section 26 05 73, OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY: Short circuit and coordination study, and requirements for a coordinated electrical system.

F. Section 25 10 10, ADVANCED UTILITY METERING SYSTEM: Requirements for electrical power meters and sub-meters.



1.4 FACTORY TESTS

A. Switchboards shall be thoroughly tested at the factory to assure that there are no electrical or mechanical defects. Tests shall be conducted as per NEMA PB 2. Factory tests shall be certified.

B. The following additional tests shall be performed:

1. Verify that circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to drawings, and the Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study.

2. Verify tightness of bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer’s published data.

3. Exercise all active components.

4. Perform an insulation-resistance test, phase to ground, on each bus section, with phases not under test grounded, in accordance with manufacturer’s published data.

5. Perform insulation-resistance tests on control wiring with respect to ground. Applied potential shall be 500 V DC for 300-volt rated cable and 1000 V DC for 600-volt rated cable, or as required if solid-state components or control devices cannot tolerate the applied voltage.


26 24 13 VARHS

6. If applicable, verify correct function of control transfer relays located in the switchboard with multiple control power sources.

7. Perform phasing checks on double-ended or dual-source switchboards to insure correct bus phasing from each source.

C. Furnish four (4) copies of certified manufacturer's factory test reports prior to shipment of the switchboards to ensure that the switchboards have been successfully tested as specified.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings:

a. Switchboard shop drawings shall be submitted simultaneously with or after the Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study.

b. Submit sufficient information to demonstrate compliance with drawings and specifications.

c. Prior to fabrication of switchboards, submit the following data for approval:

1) Complete electrical ratings.

2) Circuit breaker sizes.

3) Interrupting ratings.

4) Safety features.

5) Accessories and nameplate data.

6) Switchboard one line diagram, showing ampere rating, number of bars per phase and neutral in each bus run (horizontal and vertical), bus spacing, equipment ground bus, and bus material.

7) Elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams.

8) Technical data for each component.

9) Dimensioned exterior views of the switchboard.

10) Dimensioned section views of the switchboard.

11) Floor plan of the switchboard.

12) Foundation plan for the switchboard.

13) Provisions and required locations for external conduit and wiring entrances.

14) Approximate design weights.

2. Manuals:


26 24 13 VARHS

a. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance and operating manuals, including technical data sheets, wiring diagrams, and information for ordering replacement parts.

1) Schematic signal and control diagrams, with all terminals identified, matching terminal identification in the switchboard.

2) Include information for testing, repair, trouble shooting, assembly, disassembly, and factory recommended/required periodic maintenance procedures and frequency.

3) Provide a replacement and spare parts list. Include a list of tools and instruments for testing and maintenance purposes.



a. Certification by the manufacturer that the switchboards conform to the requirements of the drawings and specifications.

b. Certification by the Contractor that the switchboards have been properly installed, adjusted, and tested.


A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.

B. Institute of Engineering and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

C37.13-08 ........................................Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures

C57.13-08 ........................................Instrument Transformers

C62.41.1-03 .....................................Surge Environment in Low-voltage (1000V and less) AC Power Circuits

C62.45-92 ........................................Surge Testing for Equipment connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits

C. International Code Council (ICC):


D. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):

PB-2-06 ...........................................Deadfront Distribution Switchboards

PB-2.1-07 ........................................Proper Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less




26 24 13 VARHS

F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

67-09 ...............................................Panelboards

489-09 .............................................Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

891-05 .............................................Switchboards

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Shall be in accordance with ANSI, IEEE, NEMA, NFPA, UL, as shown on the drawings, and have the following features:

1. Switchboard shall be a complete, grounded, continuous-duty, integral assembly, dead-front, dead-rear, self-supporting, indoor type switchboard assembly. Incorporate devices shown on the drawings and all related components required to fulfill operational and functional requirements.

2. Ratings shall not be less than shown on the drawings. Short circuit ratings shall not be less than the available fault current shown in the Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study.

3. Switchboard shall conform to the arrangements and details shown on the drawings.

4. Switchboards shall be assembled, connected, and wired at the factory so that only external circuit connections are required at the construction site. Split the structure only as required for shipping and installation. Packaging shall provide adequate protection against rough handling during shipment.

5. All non-current-carrying parts shall be grounded per Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS for additional requirements.

6. Series rated switchboards are not allowed.

2.2 BASIC ARRANGEMENT

A. Type 1: Switchboard shall be front accessible with the following features:

1. Device mounting:

a. Main breaker: Individually mounted and compartmented or group mounted with feeder breakers.

b. Feeder breakers: Group mounted.

2. Section alignment: As shown on the drawings.

3. Accessibility:

a. Main section line and load terminals: Front and side.

b. Distribution section line and load terminals: Front.

c. Through bus connections: Front and end.

4. Bolted line and load connections.


26 24 13 VARHS

5. Full height wiring gutter covers for access to wiring terminals.

2.3 HOUSING

A. Shall have the following features:

1. Frames and enclosures:

a. The assembly shall be braced with reinforcing gussets using bolted connections to assure rectangular rigidity.

b. The enclosure shall be steel, leveled, and not less than the gauge required by applicable publications.

c. Die-pierce the holes for connecting adjacent structures to insure proper alignment, and to allow for future additions.

d. All bolts, nuts, and washers shall be cadmium-plated steel.

B. Finish:

1. All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, phosphatized and factory primed prior to applying baked enamel or lacquer finish.

2. Provide a light gray finish for indoor switchboard.

2.4 BUSES

A. Bus Bars and Interconnections:

1. Provide copper phase and neutral buses, fully rated for the amperage as shown on the drawings for the entire length of the switchboard. Bus laminations shall have a minimum of 6 mm (1/4 inch) spacing.

2. Mount the buses on appropriately spaced insulators and brace to withstand the available short circuit currents.

3. The bus and bus compartment shall be designed so that the acceptable NEMA standard temperature rises are not exceeded.

4. Install a copper ground bus the full length of the switchboard assembly.

5. Main Bonding Jumper: An un-insulated copper bus, size as shown on drawings, shall interconnect the neutral and ground buses, when the switchboard is used to establish the system common ground point.

6. All bolts, nuts, and washers shall be zinc-plated steel. Bolts shall be torqued to the values recommended by the manufacturer.

7. Make provisions for future bus extensions by means of bolt holes or other approved method.

2.5 MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Type I or Type II Switchboards: Provide molded case main circuit breakers as shown on the drawings. Circuit breakers shall be the solid state adjustable trip type.

1. Trip units shall have field adjustable tripping characteristics as follows:


26 24 13 VARHS

a. Long time pickup.

b. Long time delay.

c. Short time pickup.

d. Short time delay.

e. Instantaneous.

f. Ground fault pickup.

g. Ground fault delay.

2. Breakers with same frame size shall be interchangeable with each other.

3. Breakers shall be fully rated.

2.6 FEEDER CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Provide molded case circuit breakers as shown on the drawings.

B. Non-adjustable Trip Molded Case Circuit Breakers:

1. Molded case circuit breakers shall have automatic, trip free, non-adjustable, inverse time characteristics, and instantaneous magnetic trip.

2. Breaker features shall be as follows:

a. A rugged, integral housing of molded insulating material.

b. Silver alloy contacts.

c. Arc quenchers and phase barriers for each pole.

d. Quick-make, quick-break, operating mechanisms.

e. A trip element for each pole, thermal magnetic type with long time delay and instantaneous characteristics, a common trip bar for all poles and a single operator.

f. Electrically and mechanically trip free.

g. An operating handle which indicates ON, TRIPPED, and OFF positions.

h. Line and load connections shall be bolted.

i. An overload on one pole of a multipole breaker shall automatically cause all the poles of the breaker to open.

C. Adjustable Trip Molded Case Circuit Breakers:

1. Provide molded case, solid state adjustable trip type circuit breakers.

2. Trip units shall have field adjustable tripping characteristics as follows:

a. Long time pickup.


26 24 13 VARHS

b. Long time delay.

c. Short time pickup.

d. Short time delay.

e. Instantaneous.

2.7 METERING EQUIPMENT

A. Provide metering and sub-metering as indicated on drawings. Reference Section 25 10 10, ADVANCED UTILITY METERING SYSTEM for meter requirements.

2.8 OTHER EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish tools and accessories required for circuit breaker and switchboard test, inspection, maintenance, and proper operation.

2.9 CONTROL WIRING

A. Switchboard control wires shall not be less than No. 14 AWG copper 600 volt rated. Install wiring complete at the factory, adequately bundled and protected. Provide separate control circuit fuses in each breaker compartment and locate for ease of access and maintenance.

2.10 NAMEPLATES AND MIMIC BUS

A. Nameplates: For Normal Power system, provide laminated black phenolic resin with white core with 12 mm (1/2 inch) engraved lettered nameplates next to each circuit breaker. For Essential Electrical System, provide laminated red phenolic resin with white core with 12 mm (1/2 inch) engraved lettered nameplates next to each circuit breaker. Nameplates shall indicate equipment served, spaces, or spares in accordance with one line diagram shown on drawings. Nameplates shall be mounted with plated screws on front of breakers or on equipment enclosure next to breakers. Mounting nameplates only with adhesive is not acceptable.

B. Mimic Bus: Provide an approved mimic bus on front of each switchboard assembly. Color shall be black for the Normal Power system and red for the Essential Electrical System, either factory-painted plastic or metal strips. Plastic tape shall not be used. Use symbols similar to one line diagram shown on drawings. Plastic or metal strips shall be mounted with plated screws.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install switchboards in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Anchor switchboards with rustproof bolts, nuts, and washers not less than 13 mm (1/2 inch) diameter, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and as shown on drawings.

C. Interior Location. Mount switchboard on concrete slab. Unless otherwise indicated, the slab shall be at least 100 mm (4 inches) thick. The top of the concrete slab shall be approximately 100 mm (4 inches) above finished floor. Edges above floor shall have 12.5 mm (1/2 inch) chamfer. The slab shall be of adequate size to project at least 200 mm (8 inches) beyond the equipment. Provide conduit turnups and cable entrance space required by the equipment to be mounted. Seal voids around conduit openings in slab with water- and oil-resistant caulking or sealant. Cut off and bush conduits 75 mm (3 inches) above slab surface. Concrete work shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.


26 24 13 VARHS





b. Inspect physical, electrical, and mechanical condition.

c. Verify appropriate anchorage, required area clearances, and correct alignment.

d. Verify that circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to approved shop drawings.

e. Verifying tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method, or performing thermographic survey after energization.

f. Vacuum-clean switchboard enclosure interior. Clean switchboard enclosure exterior.

g. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces.

h. Verify correct shutter installation and operation.

i. Exercise all active components.

j. Verify the correct operation of all sensing devices, alarms, and indicating devices.

k. Verify that vents are clear.


a. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each bus section.

b. Perform insulation-resistance test on control wiring; do not perform this test on wiring connected to solid-state components.

c. Perform phasing check on double-ended switchboards to ensure correct bus phasing from each source.


A. Upon completion of acceptance checks, settings, and tests, the Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that the switchboard is in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function.

3.4 WARNING SIGN

A. Mount on each entrance door of the switchboard room, approximately 1500 mm (5 feet) above grade or floor, a clearly lettered warning sign for warning personnel. The sign shall be attached with rustproof metal screws.

3.5 ONE LINE DIAGRAM AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

A. At final inspection, an as-built one line diagram shall be laminated or mounted under acrylic glass, and installed in a frame mounted in the switchboard room or in the outdoor switchboard enclosure.


26 24 13 VARHS

3.6 AS-LEFT TRIP UNIT SETTINGS

A. The trip unit settings shall be set in the field by an authorized representative of the switchboard manufacturer per the approved Electrical System Protective Device Study in accordance with Section 26 05 73, OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY.

B. The trip unit settings of the main breaker(s) shall be reviewed by the electric utility company to assure coordination with the electric utility company primary fusing. Prior to switchboard activation, provide written verification of this review to the Resident Engineer.

C. Post a durable copy of the "as-left" trip unit settings in a convenient location in the switchboard room. Deliver four additional copies of the settings to the Resident Engineer. Furnish this information prior to the activation of the switchboard.

3.7 INSTRUCTION

A. Furnish the services of a factory-trained technician for one, 4-hour training period for instructing personnel in the maintenance and operation of the switchboards, on the dates requested by the Resident Engineer.

---END---


SECTION 26 24 16

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of panelboards.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 09 91 00, PAINTING: Painting of panelboards.

B. Section 25 10 10, ADVANCED UTILITY METERING SYSTEM: Requirements for electrical metering.

C. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: Requirements that apply to


D. Section 26 05 19, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: Low-

voltage conductors.

E. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for


F. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduits.

G. Section 26 09 23, LIGHTING CONTROLS: Lighting controls integral to panelboards.




1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit six copies of the following in accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.

1. Shop Drawings:


b. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, required clearances,

terminations, weight, circuit breakers, wiring and connection diagrams, accessories, and nameplate

data.

2. Manuals:

a. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete maintenance and operating manuals

including technical data sheets, wiring diagrams, and information for ordering circuit breakers and

replacement parts.


26 24 16 VARHS

1) Include schematic diagrams, with all terminals identified, matching terminal identification in

the panelboards.

2) Include information for testing, repair, troubleshooting, assembly, and disassembly.

b. If changes have been made to the maintenance and operating manuals originally submitted, submit

updated maintenance and operating manuals two weeks prior to the final inspection.


a. Certification by the manufacturer that the panelboards conform to the requirements of the


b. Certification by the Contractor that the panelboards have been properly installed, adjusted, and

tested.



of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by designation only.




PB 1-11............................................Panelboards

250-08 .............................................Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000V Maximum)



70E-12 .............................................Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace



67-09 ...............................................Panelboards

489-09 .............................................Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures


26 24 16 VARHS

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Panelboards shall be in accordance with NEC, NEMA, UL, as specified, and as shown on the drawings.

B. Panelboards shall have main breaker or main lugs, bus size, voltage, phases, number of circuit breaker

mounting spaces, top or bottom feed, flush or surface mounting, branch circuit breakers, and accessories as


C. Panelboards shall be completely factory-assembled with molded case circuit breakers and integral

accessories as shown on the drawings or specified herein.

D. Non-reduced size copper bus bars, rigidly supported on molded insulators, and fabricated for bolt-on type

circuit breakers.

E. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the “distributed phase” or “phase sequence”

type.

F. Mechanical lugs furnished with panelboards shall be cast, stamped, or machined metal alloys listed for use

with the conductors to which they will be connected.

G. Neutral bus shall be 100% rated, mounted on insulated supports.

H. Grounding bus bar shall be equipped with screws or lugs for the connection of equipment grounding

conductors.

I. Bus bars shall be braced for the available short-circuit current as shown on the drawings, but not be less

than 10,000 A symmetrical for 120/208 V and 120/240 V panelboards, and 14,000 A symmetrical for

277/480 V panelboards.

J. In two-section panelboards, the main bus in each section shall be full size. The first section shall be

furnished with subfeed lugs on the line side of main lugs only, or through-feed lugs for main breaker type

panelboards, and have field-installed cable connections to the second section as shown on the drawings.

Panelboard sections with tapped bus or crossover bus are not acceptable.

K. Series-rated panelboards are not permitted.

2.2 ENCLOSURES AND TRIMS

A. Enclosures:

1. Provide galvanized steel enclosures, with NEMA rating as shown on the drawings or as required for

the environmental conditions in which installed.

2. Enclosures shall not have ventilating openings.

3. Enclosures may be of one-piece formed steel or of formed sheet steel with end and side panels welded,

riveted, or bolted as required.


26 24 16 VARHS

4. Provide manufacturer’s standard option for prepunched knockouts on top and bottom endwalls.

5. Include removable inner dead front cover, independent of the panelboard cover.

B. Trims:

1. Hinged “door-in-door” type.

2. Interior hinged door with hand-operated latch or latches, as required to provide access only to circuit

breaker operating handles, not to energized parts.

3. Outer hinged door shall be securely mounted to the panelboard enclosure with factory bolts, screws,

clips, or other fasteners, requiring a key or tool for entry. Hand-operated latches are not acceptable.

4. Inner and outer doors shall open left to right.

5. Trims shall be flush or surface type as shown on the drawings.

2.3 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Circuit breakers shall be per UL, NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as specified.

B. Circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type.

C. Circuit breakers shall have minimum interrupting rating as required to withstand the available fault current,

but not less than:

1. 120/208 V Panelboard: 10,000 A symmetrical.



D. Circuit breakers shall have automatic, trip free, non-adjustable, inverse time, and instantaneous magnetic

trips for less than 400 A frame. Circuit breakers with 400 A frames and above shall have magnetic trip,

adjustable from 5x to 10x. Breaker trip setting shall be set in the field, based on the approved protective

device study as specified in Section 26 05 73, OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE

COORDINATION STUDY.

E. Circuit breaker features shall be as follows:

1. A rugged, integral housing of molded insulating material.

2. Silver alloy contacts.

3. Arc quenchers and phase barriers for each pole.

4. Quick-make, quick-break, operating mechanisms.

5. A trip element for each pole, thermal magnetic type with long time delay and instantaneous

characteristics, a common trip bar for all poles and a single operator.

6. Electrically and mechanically trip free.


26 24 16 VARHS

7. An operating handle which indicates closed, tripped, and open positions.

8. An overload on one pole of a multi-pole breaker shall automatically cause all the poles of the breaker

to open.

9. Ground fault current interrupting breakers, shunt trip breakers, lighting control breakers (including

accessories to switch line currents), or other accessory devices or functions shall be provided where


10. For circuit breakers being added to existing panelboards, coordinate the breaker type with existing

panelboards. Modify the panel directory accordingly.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, the NEC, as shown on the

drawings, and as specified.

B. Locate panelboards so that the present and future conduits can be conveniently connected.

C. Install a printed schedule of circuits in each panelboard after approval by the Resident Engineer. Schedules

shall reflect final load descriptions, room numbers, and room names connected to each circuit breaker.

Schedules shall be printed on the panelboard directory cards and be installed in the appropriate panelboards

D. Mount panelboards such that the maximum height of the top circuit breaker above the finished floor shall

not exceed 1980 mm (78 inches).

E. Provide blank cover for each unused circuit breaker mounting space.

F. Provide “handle-ties” for all multiple circuits that share neutrals.






c. Verify appropriate anchorage and required area clearances.

d. Verify that circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to approved shop drawings.

e. To verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections, use the calibrated torque-wrench

method or perform thermographic survey after energization.

f. Vacuum-clean enclosure interior. Clean enclosure exterior.


26 24 16 VARHS


A. Upon completion of acceptance checks, settings, and tests, the Contractor shall demonstrate that the

panelboards are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function.

---END---


SECTION 26 24 19 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, connection, and testing of the motor control centers.

1.2 RELATED WORK




D. Section 26 05 73, OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY. Short circuit and coordination study, and requirements for a coordinated electrical system.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit six copies of the following in accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS:

1. Shop Drawings:


b. Prior to fabrication of motor control centers, submit the following data for approval:

1) Single line diagram showing each bus, instrument and control power transformer, relay, motor starter, circuit breaker, fuse, motor circuit protector, overload, and other components.

2) Control wiring diagram for each motor starter.

3) Complete electrical ratings for all components.

4) Interrupting ratings.

5) Safety features.

6) Accessories and nameplate data.

7) Dimensioned exterior views of the motor control centers.

8) Dimensioned section views of the motor control centers.


26 24 19 VARHS

9) Floor plan of the motor control centers.

10) Approximate design weights.

2. Manuals:


1) Schematic control diagrams, with all terminals identified, matching terminal identification in the motor control centers.

2) Include information for testing, repair, troubleshooting, assembly, disassembly, and factory recommended periodic maintenance procedures and their frequency.

3) Provide a replacement and spare parts list. Include a list of tools, and instruments for testing and maintenance purposes.


3. Test Reports:

a. Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit certified field test reports and data sheets to the Resident Engineer.


a. Certification by the manufacturer that the motor control centers conform to the requirements of the drawings and specifications.

b. Certification by the Contractor that the motor control centers have been properly installed, adjusted, and tested.






ICS 1-08 ..........................................Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements

ICS 2-05 ..........................................Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors and Overhead Relays Rated 600 volts

ICS 6-06 ..........................................Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures

FU 1-07 ...........................................Low-Voltage Cartridge Fuses

250-08 .............................................Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)


26 24 19 VARHS




845-05 .............................................Motor Control Centers

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Motor control centers shall comply with NFPA, NEMA, UL, and as shown on drawings.

B. Motor control centers shall be complete, free-standing, floor-mounted, dead-front, and metal-enclosed.

C. Ratings shall be not less than shown on drawings. Interrupting ratings shall be not less than the maximum short circuit currents available at the motor control center location, as shown on drawings or as calculated as specified in Section 26 05 73, OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY.

D. Enclosure shall be NEMA-type rated 1, 3R, or 12 as indicated on drawings or as required per the installed environment.

E. Motor control centers shall conform to the arrangements and details of drawings and to the spaces designated for installation.

F. Wiring: The motor control centers shall be NEMA Standard, Class 1, Type B.

G. Finish:

1. All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, phosphatized and factory primed prior to applying baked enamel or lacquer finish.

2. Provide a light gray finish for indoor motor control centers.

H. All steel parts shall be factory-phosphatized, painted with primer, and baked enamel or lacquer finishes, except for ground connections.

I. Vertical Sections:

1. Approximately 2-1/4 M (90 inches) high.

2. Shall be designed to permit connection of future additional vertical sections, and installation of future motor controller units in available space in each vertical section.

3. Spaces within the vertical sections shall be suitable and adequately sized for motor controller units and accessories as indicated on drawings.

4. End panels shall be removable to facilitate future additions.

5. All vertical section parts shall be accessible from the front for maintenance rearrangement.

6. Screws in the removable panels shall remain in the panels when the panels are removed. Self-aligning, self-retaining nuts, which are parts of the screw assembly, shall remain intact.


26 24 19 VARHS

7. Each vertical section shall have a minimum 300 mm (12 inches) high horizontal wireway at the top, section and a minimum 150 mm (6 inches) high horizontal wireway at the bottom.

8. Each vertical section shall have minimum 100 mm (4 inches) wide vertical full height wireways. Vertical wireways shall connect with both the top and bottom horizontal wireways.

9. Each vertical section for motor controller units shall be equipped with all necessary hardware and busing for the units to be added or relocated. All unused space shall be covered by hinged doors and equipped to accept future units.

2.2 BUS BARS AND INTERCONNECTIONS

A. Horizontal and vertical bus ratings shall be as shown on drawings. Horizontal bus bars shall be fully rated for the entire length of the motor control centers.

B. Bus bars shall be tin-plated copper.

C. All bolts, nuts, and washers shall be zinc-plated steel, torqued to the values recommended by the manufacturer.

D. A ground bus shall extend across the entire length of the motor control centers.

E. Bus bars and interconnections shall include provisions to extend the motor control center horizontal bus into additional future vertical sections.

F. Provide shutter mechanism to isolate vertical bus when the motor controller unit is withdrawn.

2.3 MOTOR CONTROLLERS

A. Product of the same manufacturer as the motor control centers.

B. Plug-in, draw-out type up through NEMA size 4. NEMA size 5 and above require bolted connections.

C. Doors for each space shall be interlocked to prevent their opening unless disconnect is open. A "defeater" mechanism shall be incorporated for inspection by qualified personnel.

2.4 FEEDER UNITS

A. Circuit breaker: shall conform to the applicable portions of Section 26 24 16, PANELBOARDS.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install motor control centers in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Anchor motor control centers with rustproof bolts, nuts, and washers not less than 13 mm (1/2 inch) diameter, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and as shown on drawings.

C. Interior Location. Mount motor control centers on concrete slab. Unless otherwise indicated, the slab shall be at least 100 mm (4 inches) thick. The top of the concrete slab shall be approximately 100 mm (4 inches) above finished floor. Edges above floor shall have 15 mm (1/2 inch) chamfer. The slab shall be of adequate size to project at least 100 mm (8 inches) beyond the equipment. Provide conduit turnups and cable entrance space required by the equipment to be mounted. Seal voids around conduit openings in slab with water- and oil-resistant caulking or sealant. Cut off and bush conduits 75 mm (3 inches) above slab surface. Concrete work shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.


26 24 19 VARHS






c. Verify appropriate anchorage and required area clearances.

d. Verify that circuit breaker, fuse, motor circuit protector, and motor controller sizes and types correspond to approved shop drawings.

e. Use calibrated torque-wrench method to verify the tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections, or perform a thermographic survey after energization.

f. Vacuum-clean motor control center enclosure interior. Clean motor control center enclosure exterior.

g. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces.

h. Exercise all active components.

i. Verify the correct operation of all indicating devices.

j. If applicable, inspect control power transformers.

2. Electrical Tests:

a. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each bus section.

b. Perform insulation-resistance test on control wiring. Do not perform this test on wiring connected to electronic components.


A. Upon completion of acceptance checks, settings, and tests, the Contractor shall demonstrate that the motor control centers are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function.

3.4 TRAINING

A. Furnish the services of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician for a 2-hour period to instruct VA personnel in operation and maintenance of the equipment, including review of the operation and maintenance manual, on a date requested by the Resident Engineer.

---END---


26 27 26 – 1

SEISMICALLY UPGRADE BUILDING 7 (N017.01) OCTOBER 2014

SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, connection, and testing of wiring devices.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General electrical

requirements that are common to more than one section of Division 26.

B. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduit and boxes.

C. Section 26 05 19, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: Cables and

wiring.

D. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for

personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground fault currents.

E. Section 26 51 00, INTERIOR LIGHTING: Fluorescent ballasts and LED drivers for use with manual

dimming controls.




1.4 SUBMITTALS



1. Shop Drawings:


b. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, construction materials, grade, and

termination information.

2. Manuals:

a. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance and

operating manuals, including technical data sheets and information for ordering replacement parts.




a. Certification by the manufacturer that the wiring devices conform to the requirements of the


26 27 26 VARHS

26 27 26 – 2


b. Certification by the Contractor that the wiring devices have been properly installed and adjusted.


A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part

of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation

only.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):




WD 1-10 ..........................................General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices

WD 6-08 .........................................Wiring Devices – Dimensional Specifications

D. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

5-11 .................................................Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings

20-10 ...............................................General-Use Snap Switches

231-07 .............................................Power Outlets


498-07 .............................................Attachment Plugs and Receptacles

943-11 .............................................Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters

1449-07 ...........................................Surge Protective Devices

1472-96 ...........................................Solid State Dimming Controls

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECEPTACLES

A. General: All receptacles shall comply with NEMA, NFPA, UL, and as shown on the drawings.

1. Mounting straps shall be plated steel, with break-off plaster ears and shall include a self-grounding

feature. Terminal screws shall be brass, brass plated or a copper alloy metal.

2. Receptacles shall have provisions for back wiring with separate metal clamp type terminals (four

minimum) and side wiring from four captively held binding screws.

B. Duplex Receptacles: Hospital-grade, single phase, 20 ampere, 120 volts, 2-pole, 3-wire, NEMA 5-20R,

with break-off feature for two-circuit operation.

1. Bodies shall be ivory in color.

26 27 26 VARHS

26 27 26 – 3


2. Switched duplex receptacles shall be wired so that only the top receptacle is switched. The lower

receptacle shall be unswitched.

3. Duplex Receptacles on Emergency Circuit:

a. In rooms without emergency powered general lighting, the emergency receptacles shall be of the

self-illuminated type.

4. Ground Fault Interrupter Duplex Receptacles: Shall be an integral unit, hospital-grade, suitable for

mounting in a standard outlet box, with end-of-life indication and provisions to isolate the face due to

improper wiring.

a. Ground fault interrupter shall be consist of a differential current transformer, solid state sensing

circuitry and a circuit interrupter switch. Device shall have nominal sensitivity to ground leakage

current of 4-6 milliamperes and shall function to interrupt the current supply for any value of

ground leakage current above five milliamperes (+ or – 1 milliampere) on the load side of the

device. Device shall have a minimum nominal tripping time of 0.025 second.

b. Ground Fault Interrupter Duplex Receptacles (not hospital-grade) shall be the same as ground

fault interrupter hospital-grade receptacles except for the hospital-grade listing.

5. Duplex Receptacles (not hospital grade): Shall be the same as hospital grade duplex receptacles except

for the hospital grade listing and as follows.

a. Bodies shall be brown nylon.

C. Receptacles; 20, 30, and 50 ampere, 250 Volts: Shall be complete with appropriate cord grip plug.

D. Weatherproof Receptacles: Shall consist of a duplex receptacle, mounted in box with a gasketed,

weatherproof, cast metal cover plate and cap over each receptacle opening. The cap shall be permanently

attached to the cover plate by a spring-hinged flap. The weatherproof integrity shall not be affected when

heavy duty specification or hospital grade attachment plug caps are inserted. Cover plates on outlet boxes

mounted flush in the wall shall be gasketed to the wall in a watertight manner.

2.2 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Toggle switches shall be totally enclosed tumbler type with nylon bodies. Handles shall be ivory in color

unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings.

1. Switches installed in hazardous areas shall be explosion-proof type in accordance with the NEC and as


2. Shall be single unit toggle, butt contact, quiet AC type, heavy-duty general-purpose use with an

integral self grounding mounting strap with break-off plasters ears and provisions for back wiring with

separate metal wiring clamps and side wiring with captively held binding screws.

3. Switches shall be rated 20 amperes at 120-277 Volts AC.

2.3 MANUAL DIMMING CONTROL

A. Electronic full-wave manual slide dimmer with on/off switch and audible frequency and EMI/RFI

suppression filters.

B. Manual dimming controls shall be fully compatible with LED dimming driver and be approved by the

driver manufacturer, shall operate over full specified dimming range, and shall not degrade the

performance or rated life of the electronic dimming ballast and lamp.

26 27 26 VARHS

26 27 26 – 4


C. Provide single-pole or three-way, as shown on the drawings.

D. Manual dimming control and faceplates shall be ivory in color unless otherwise specified.

2.4 WALL PLATES

A. Wall plates for switches and receptacles shall be type 302 stainless steel. Oversize plates are not acceptable.

B. For receptacles or switches mounted adjacent to each other, wall plates shall be common for each group of

receptacles or switches.

C. In areas requiring tamperproof wiring devices, wall plates shall be type 302 stainless steel, and shall have

tamperproof screws and beveled edges.

D. Duplex Receptacles on Emergency Circuit: Wall plates shall be red nylon with the word "EMERGENCY"

engraved in 6 mm (1/4 inch) white letters. Wall plates shall be type 302 stainless steel, with the word

“EMERGENCY” engraved in 6 mm (1/4 inch) red letters.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC and as shown as on the drawings.

B. Install wiring devices after wall construction and painting is complete.

C. The ground terminal of each wiring device shall be bonded to the outlet box with an approved green

bonding jumper, and also connected to the branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

D. Outlet boxes for toggle switches and manual dimming controls shall be mounted on the strike side of doors.

E. Provide barriers in multigang outlet boxes to comply with the NEC.

F. Coordinate the electrical work with the work of other trades to ensure that wiring device flush outlets are

positioned with box openings aligned with the face of the surrounding finish material. Pay special attention to

installations in cabinet work, and in connection with laboratory equipment.

G. Exact field locations of floors, walls, partitions, doors, windows, and equipment may vary from locations

shown on the drawings. Prior to locating sleeves, boxes and chases for roughing-in of conduit and

equipment, the Contractor shall coordinate exact field location of the above items with other trades.

H. Install wall switches 1.2 M (48 inches) above floor, with the toggle OFF position down.

I. Install wall dimmers 1.2 M (48 inches) above floor.

J. Install receptacles 450 mm (18 inches) above floor, and 152 mm (6 inches) above counter backsplash or

workbenches. Install specific-use receptacles at heights shown on the drawings.

K. Install vertically mounted receptacles with the ground pin up. Install horizontally mounted receptacles with

the ground pin to the right.

L. When required or recommended by the manufacturer, use a torque screwdriver. Tighten unused terminal

screws.

M. Label device plates with a permanent adhesive label listing panel and circuit feeding the wiring device.

26 27 26 VARHS

26 27 26 – 5



A. Perform manufacturer’s required field checks in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. In

addition, include the following:


a. Inspect physical and electrical condition.

b. Vacuum-clean surface metal raceway interior. Clean metal raceway exterior.

c. Test wiring devices for damaged conductors, high circuit resistance, poor connections, inadequate

fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems using a portable receptacle tester.

Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new, and retest as

specified above.

d. Test GFCI receptacles.

2. Healthcare Occupancy Tests:

a. Test hospital grade receptacles for retention force per NFPA 99.

---END---

26 29 11 – 1


SECTION 26 29 11

MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, connection, and testing of motor controllers, including all

low- and medium-voltage motor controllers and manual motor controllers, indicated as motor controllers in

this section, and low-voltage variable speed motor controllers.

B. Motor controllers, whether furnished with the equipment specified in other sections or otherwise (with the

exception of elevator motor controllers specified in Division 14 and fire pump controllers specified in

Division 21), shall meet this specification and all related specifications.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL

COMPONENTS: Requirements for seismic restraint for nonstructural components.

B. Section 25 10 10, ADVANCED UTILITY METERING SYSTEM: For electricity metering installed in

motor controllers.

C. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: Requirements that apply to


D. Section 26 05 13, MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES: Medium-voltage cables and terminations.

E. Section 26 05 19, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: Low-

voltage conductors.

F. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for


G. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduits.

H. Section 26 24 19, MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS: For multiple motor control assemblies which include

motor controllers.




1.4 SUBMITTALS



1. Shop Drawings:


26 29 11 VARHS

26 29 11 – 2


b. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, weights, mounting details, materials, overcurrent protection

devices, overload relays, sizes of enclosures, wiring diagrams, starting characteristics,

interlocking, and accessories.

c. Certification from the manufacturer that representative motor controllers have been seismically

tested to International Building Code requirements. Certification shall be based upon simulated

seismic forces on a shake table or by analytical methods, but not by experience data or other

methods.

2. Manuals:

a. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance and

operating manuals, including technical data sheets, wiring diagrams, and information for ordering

replacement parts.

1) Wiring diagrams shall have their terminals identified to facilitate installation, maintenance,

and operation.

2) Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment and

interconnections between the items of equipment.

3) Elementary schematic diagrams shall be provided for clarity of operation.

4) Include the catalog numbers for the correct sizes of overload relays for the motor controllers.




a. Certification by the manufacturer that the motor controllers conform to the requirements of the


b. Certification by the Contractor that the motor controllers have been properly installed, adjusted,

and tested.



of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation

only.

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

519-92 .............................................Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in

Electrical Power Systems

C37.90.1-02 .....................................Standard Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Relays and

Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus




26 29 11 VARHS

26 29 11 – 3


ICS 1-08 ..........................................Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements

ICS 1.1-09 .......................................Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of

Solid State Control

ICS 2-05 ..........................................Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors, and Overload

Relays Rated 600 Volts

ICS 4-05 ..........................................Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks

ICS 6-06 ..........................................Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures

ICS 7-06 ..........................................Industrial Control and Systems: Adjustable-Speed Drives

ICS 7.1-06 .......................................Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation,

and Operation of Adjustable-Speed Drive Systems

MG 1 Part 31 ...................................Inverter Fed Polyphase Motor Standards



F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):

508A-07 ...........................................Industrial Control Panels

508C-07 ...........................................Power Conversion Equipment

UL 1449-06 .....................................Surge Protective Devices

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MOTOR CONTROLLERS

A. Motor controllers shall comply with IEEE, NEMA, NFPA, UL, and as shown on the drawings.

B. Motor controllers shall be separately enclosed, unless part of another assembly. For installation in motor

control centers, provide plug-in, draw-out type motor controllers up through NEMA size 4. NEMA size 5

and above require bolted connections.

C. Motor controllers shall be combination type, with magnetic controller per Paragraph 2.3 below and with

fused switch or motor circuit protector disconnecting means, with external operating handle with lock-open

padlocking positions and ON-OFF position indicator.

1. Fused Switches:

a. Quick-make, quick-break type.

b. Minimum duty rating shall be NEMA classification General Duty (GD) for 240 Volts and NEMA

classification Heavy Duty (HD) for 480 Volts.

c. Horsepower rated, and shall have the following features:

1) Copper blades, visible in the OFF position.

26 29 11 VARHS

26 29 11 – 4


2) An arc chute for each pole.

3) Fuse holders for the sizes and types of fuses specified or as shown on the drawings.

2. Motor Circuit Protectors:

a. Magnetic trip only.

b. Bolt-on type with a minimum interrupting rating as indicated on the drawings.

c. Equipped with automatic, adjustable magnetic trip. Magnetic trip shall be adjustable up to 1300%

of the motor full load amperes.

D. Enclosures:

1. Enclosures shall be NEMA-type rated 1, 3R, or 12 as indicated on the drawings or as required per the

installed environment.

2. Enclosure doors shall be interlocked to prevent opening unless the disconnecting means is open. A

"defeater" mechanism shall allow for inspection by qualified personnel with the disconnect means

closed. Provide padlocking provisions.

3. All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, phosphatized, and factory primed prior to applying

light gray baked enamel finish.

E. Motor control circuits:

1. Shall operate at not more than 120 Volts.

2. Shall be grounded, except where the equipment manufacturer recommends that the control circuits be

isolated.

3. For each motor operating over 120 Volts, incorporate a separate, heavy duty, control transformer

within each motor controller enclosure.

4. Incorporate primary and secondary overcurrent protection for the control power transformers.

F. Overload relays:

1. Thermal type. Devices shall be NEMA type.

2. One for each pole.

3. External overload relay reset pushbutton on the door of each motor controller enclosure.

4. Overload relays shall be matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and with

appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.

5. Thermal overload relays shall be tamperproof, not affected by vibration, manual reset, sensitive to

single-phasing, and shall have selectable trip classes of 10, 20 and 30.

G. Hand-Off-Automatic (H-O-A) switch is required unless specifically stated on the drawings as not required

for a particular controller. H-O-A switch shall be operable without opening enclosure door. H-O-A switch

is not required for manual motor controllers.

26 29 11 VARHS

26 29 11 – 5


H. Incorporate into each control circuit a 120 Volt, electronic time-delay relay (ON delay), minimum

adjustable range from 0.3 to 10 minutes, with transient protection. Time-delay relay is not required where

H-O-A switch is not required.

I. Unless noted otherwise, equip each motor controller with not less than two normally open (N.O.) and two

normally closed (N.C.) auxiliary contacts.

J. Provide green (RUN) and red (STOP) pilot lights.

K. Motor controllers incorporated within equipment assemblies shall also be designed for the specific

requirements of the assemblies.

L. Additional requirements for specific motor controllers, as indicated in other specification sections, shall

also apply.

2.2 MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS

A. Shall be in accordance with applicable requirements of 2.1 above.

B. Manual motor controllers shall have the following features:

1. Controllers shall be general-purpose Class A, manually operated type with full voltage controller for

induction motors, rated in horsepower.

2. Units shall include thermal overload relays, on-off operator, green pilot light, normally open and

normally closed auxiliary contacts.

C. Fractional horsepower manual motor controllers shall have the following features:

1. Controllers shall be general-purpose Class A, manually operated type with full voltage controller for

fractional horsepower induction motors.

2. Units shall include thermal overload relays, red pilot light, and toggle operator.

2.3 MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS

A. Shall be in accordance with applicable requirements of 2.1 above.

B. Controllers shall be general-purpose, Class A magnetic controllers for induction motors rated in

horsepower. Minimum NEMA size 0.

C. Where combination motor controllers are used, combine controller with protective or disconnect device in a

common enclosure.

D. Provide phase loss protection for each controller, with contacts to de-energize the controller upon loss of

any phase.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide full voltage non-reversing across-the-line mechanisms for motors less

than 75 HP, closed by coil action and opened by gravity. For motors 75 HP and larger, provide reduced-

voltage or variable speed controllers as shown on the drawings. Equip controllers with 120 VAC coils and

individual control transformer unless otherwise noted.

2.4 LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE SPEED MOTOR CONTROLLERS (VSMC)

A. VSMC shall be in accordance with applicable portions of 2.1 above.

26 29 11 VARHS

26 29 11 – 6


B. VSMC shall be electronic, with adjustable frequency and voltage, three phase output, capable of driving

standard NEMA B three-phase induction motors at full rated speed. The control technique shall be pulse

width modulation (PWM), where the VSMC utilizes a full wave bridge design incorporating diode rectifier

circuitry. Silicon controlled rectifiers or other control techniques are not acceptable.

C. VSMC shall be suitable for variable torque loads, and shall be capable of providing sufficient torque to

allow the motor to break away from rest upon first application of power.

D. VSMC shall be capable of operating within voltage parameters of plus 10 to minus 15 percent of line

voltage, and be suitably rated for the full load amps of the maximum watts (HP) within its class.

E. Minimum efficiency shall be 95 percent at 100 percent speed and 85 percent at 50 percent speed.

F. The displacement power factor of the VSMC shall not be less than 95 percent under any speed or load

condition.

G. VSMC current and voltage harmonic distortion shall not exceed the values allowed by IEEE 519.

H. Operating and Design Conditions:

1. Elevation: 500 feet Above Mean Sea Level (AMSL)

2. Temperatures: Maximum +100oF / Minimum -10

oF

3. Relative Humidity: 95%

4. VSMC Location: Air conditioned space

I. VSMC shall have the following features:

1. Isolated power for control circuits.

2. Manually resettable overload protection for each phase.

3. Adjustable current limiting circuitry to provide soft motor starting. Maximum starting current shall not

exceed 200 percent of motor full load current.

4. Independent acceleration and deceleration time adjustment, manually adjustable from 2 to 2000

seconds. Set timers to the equipment manufacturer's recommended time in the above range.

5. Control input circuitry that will accept 4 to 20 mA current or 0-10 VDC voltage control signals from

an external source.

6. Automatic frequency adjustment from 1 Hz to 300 Hz.

7. Circuitry to initiate an orderly shutdown when any of the conditions listed below occur. The VSMC

shall not be damaged by any of these electrical disturbances and shall automatically restart when the

conditions are corrected. The VSMC shall be able to restart into a rotating motor operating in either

the forward or reverse direction and matching that frequency.

a. Incorrect phase sequence.

b. Single phasing.

c. Overvoltage in excess of 10 percent.

26 29 11 VARHS

26 29 11 – 7


d. Undervoltage in excess of 15 percent.

e. Running overcurrent above 110 percent (VSMC shall not automatically reset for this condition.)

f. Instantaneous overcurrent above 150 percent (VSMC shall not automatically reset for this

condition).

g. Short duration power outages of 12 cycles or less (i.e., distribution line switching, generator

testing, and automatic transfer switch operations.)

8. Provide automatic shutdown upon receiving a power transfer warning signal from an automatic

transfer switch. VSMC shall automatically restart motor after the power transfer.

9. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt three restarts after VSMC fault or on return of power after an

interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction, with adjustable delay time

between restart attempts.

11. Bidirectional Autospeed Search: Capable of starting VSMC into rotating loads spinning in either

direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without causing damage to VSMC,

motor, or load.

J. VSMC shall include an input circuit breaker which will disconnect all input power, interlocked with the

door so that the door cannot be opened with the circuit breaker in the closed position.

K. VSMC shall include a 5% line reactor and a RFI/EMI filter.

L. Surge Suppression: Provide three-phase protection against damage from supply voltage surges in

accordance with UL 1449.

M. VSMC shall include front-accessible operator station, with sealed keypad and digital display, which allows

complete programming, operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capabilities.

1. Typical control functions shall include but not be limited to:

a. HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC-RESET, with manual speed control in HAND mode.

b. NORMAL-BYPASS.

c. NORMAL-TEST, which allows testing and adjusting of the VSMC while in bypass mode.

2. Typical monitoring functions shall include but not be limited to:

a. Output frequency (Hz).

b. Motor speed and status (run, stop, fault).

c. Output voltage and current.

3. Typical fault and alarm functions shall include but not be limited to:

a. Loss of input signal, under- and over-voltage, inverter overcurrent, motor overload, critical

frequency rejection with selectable and adjustable deadbands, instantaneous line-to-line and line-

to-ground overcurrent, loss-of-phase, reverse-phase, and short circuit.

26 29 11 VARHS

26 29 11 – 8


b. System protection indicators indicating that the system has shutdown and will not automatically

restart.

N. VSMC shall include two N.O. and two N.C. dry contacts rated 120 Volts, 10 amperes, 60 Hz.

O. Hardware, software, network interfaces, gateways, and programming to control and monitor the VSMC by

control systems specified in other specification sections, including but not limited to Divisions 22 and 23.

P. Network communications ports: As required for connectivity to control systems specified in other

specification sections, including but not limited to Divisions 22 and 23.

Q. Communications protocols: As required for communications with control systems specified in other

specification sections, including but not limited to Divisions 22 and 23.

R. Bypass controller: Provide contactor-style bypass, arranged to bypass the inverter.

1. Inverter Output Contactor and Bypass Contactor: Load-break NEMA-rated contactor.

2. Motor overload relays.

3. HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC bypass control.

S. Bypass operation: Transfers motor between inverter output and bypass circuit, manually, automatically, or

both. VSMC shall be capable of stable operation (starting, stopping, and running), and control by fire

alarm and detection systems, with motor completely disconnected from the inverter output. Transfer

between inverter and bypass contactor and retransfer shall only be allowed with the motor at zero speed.

T. Inverter Isolating Switch: Provide non-load-break switch arranged to isolate inverter and permit safe

troubleshooting and testing of the inverter, both energized and de-energized, while motor is operating in

bypass mode. Include padlockable, door-mounted handle mechanism.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install motor controllers in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by

the manufacturer.

B. In seismic areas, motor controllers shall be adequately anchored and braced per details on structural

contract drawings to withstand the seismic forces at the location where installed.

C. Install manual motor controllers in flush enclosures in finished areas.

D. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and electronic overload relay

pickup and trip ranges.

E. Program variable speed motor controllers per the manufacturer’s instructions and in coordination with other

trades so that a complete and functional system is delivered.

F. Adjust trip settings of circuit breakers and motor circuit protectors with adjustable instantaneous trip

elements. Initially adjust at six times the motor nameplate full-load ampere ratings and attempt to start

motors several times, allowing for motor cooldown between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush,

adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-

load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficiency motors if required). Where these maximum

settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Resident Engineer before increasing settings.

26 29 11 VARHS

26 29 11 – 9


G. Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers at 80 percent of line voltage.


A. Perform manufacturer’s required field tests in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. In

addition, include the following:





d. Verify that circuit breaker, motor circuit protector, and fuse sizes and types correspond to

approved shop drawings.

e. Verify overload relay ratings are correct.


g. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method in

accordance with manufacturer’s published data.

h. Test all control and safety features of the motor controllers.

i. For low-voltage variable speed motor controllers, final programming and connections shall be by

a factory-trained technician. Set all programmable functions of the variable speed motor

controllers to meet the requirements and conditions of use.


A. Upon completion of acceptance checks, settings, and tests, the Contractor shall show by demonstration in

service that the motor controllers are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended

functions.

3.4 SPARE PARTS

A. Two weeks prior to the final inspection, provide one complete set of spare fuses for each motor controller.

3.5 INSTRUCTION

A. Furnish the services of a factory-trained technician for two 4-hour training periods for instructing personnel

in the maintenance and operation of the motor controllers, on the dates requested by the Resident Engineer.

---END---

SECTION 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, connection, and testing of the low-voltage engine generators.

1.2 RELATED WORK


B. Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS: Seismic requirements for non-structural equipment.

C. Section 26 05 13, MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES: Medium-voltage cables.

D. Section 26 05 19, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: Low-voltage conductors.

E. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.

F. Section 26 05 73, OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY: Short circuit and coordination study, and requirements for a coordinated electrical system.

G. Section 23 07 11, HVAC AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION: Requirements for hot piping and equipment insulation.

H. Section 25 10 10, ADVANCED UTILITY METERING SYSTEM: Requirements for electrical metering.

I. Section 26 24 13, DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS: Requirements for secondary distribution switchboards.

J. Section 26 36 23, AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES: Requirements for automatic transfer switches for use with engine generators.



1.4 FACTORY TESTS

A. Load Test: Shall include two hours while the engine generator is delivering 100% of the specified kW, and four hours while the engine generator is delivering 80% of the specified kW. During this test, record the following data at 20-minute intervals:

Time Engine RPM Oil Temperature Out

kW Water Temperature In Fuel Pressure

Voltage Water Temperature Out Oil Pressure


26 32 13 VARHS

Amperes Oil Temperature In Ambient Temperature

B. Cold Start Test: Record time required for the engine generator to develop specified voltage, frequency, and kW load from a standstill condition with engine at ambient temperature.

C. Furnish four (4) copies of certified manufacturer's factory test reports to the Resident Engineer prior to shipment of the engine generators to ensure that the engine generator has been successfully tested as specified.

D. The manufacturer shall furnish fuel, load banks, testing instruments, and all other equipment necessary to perform these tests.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings:


b. Scaled drawings, showing plan views, side views, elevations, and cross-sections.

2. Diagrams:

a. Control system diagrams, control sequence diagrams or tables, wiring diagrams, interconnections diagrams (between engine generators, automatic transfer switches, paralleling switchgear, local control cubicles, remote annunciator panels, and fuel storage tanks, as applicable), and other like items.

3. Technical Data:

a. Published ratings, catalog cuts, pictures, and manufacturer’s specifications for engine generator, governor, voltage regulator, radiator, muffler, dampers, day tank, pumps, fuel tank, batteries and charger, jacket heaters, torsional vibration, and control and supervisory equipment.

b. Description of operation.

c. Short-circuit current capacity and subtransient reactance.

d. Sound power level data.

e. Vibration isolation system performance data from no-load to full-load. This must include seismic qualification of the engine generator mounting, base, and vibration isolation.

4. Calculations:

a. Calculated performance derations appropriate to installed environment.

5. Manuals:

a. When submitting the shop drawings, submit complete maintenance and operating manuals, to include the following:

1) Technical data sheets.


26 32 13 VARHS

2) Wiring diagrams.

3) Include information for testing, repair, troubleshooting, and factory recommended periodic maintenance procedures and frequency.



6. Test Reports:

a. Submit certified factory test reports for approval.

b. Submit field test reports two weeks prior to the final inspection.

7. Certifications:

a. Prior to fabrication of the engine generator, submit the following for approval:

1) A certification in writing that an engine generator of the same model and configuration, with the same bore, stroke, number of cylinders, and equal or higher kW/kVA ratings as the proposed engine generator, has been operating satisfactorily with connected loads of not less than 75% of the specified kW/kVA rating, for not fewer than 2,000 hours without any failure of a crankshaft, camshaft, piston, valve, injector, or governor system.

2) A certification in writing that devices and circuits will be incorporated to protect the voltage regulator and other components of the engine generator during operation at speeds other than the rated RPM while performing maintenance. Submit thorough descriptions of any precautions necessary to protect the voltage regulator and other components of the system during operation of the engine generator at speeds other than the rated RPM.

3) A certification from the engine manufacturer stating that the engine exhaust emissions meet the applicable federal, state, and local regulations and restrictions. At a minimum, this certification shall include emission factors for criteria pollutants including nitrogen oxides, carbon monoxide, particulate matter, sulfur dioxide, non-methane hydrocarbon, and hazardous air pollutants (HPAs).

b. Prior to installation of the engine generator at the job site, submit certified factory test data.

c. Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit the following.

1) Certification by the manufacturer that the engine generators conform to the requirements of the drawings and specifications.

2) Certification by the Contractor that the engine generators have been properly installed, adjusted, and tested.

1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Engine generators shall withstand shipping and handling stresses in addition to the electrical and mechanical stresses which occur during operation of the system. Protect radiator core with wood sheet.

B. Store the engine generators in a location approved by the Resident Engineer.


26 32 13 VARHS

1.7 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Job conditions shall conform to the arrangements and details shown on the drawings. The dimensions, enclosures, and arrangements of the engine generator system shall permit the operating personnel to safely and conveniently operate and maintain the system in the space designated for installation.




C37.50-07 ........................................Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used In Enclosures-Test Procedures

C39.1-81 (R1992) ...........................Requirements for Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments

C. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM):

A53/A53M-10 .................................Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black, and Hot–Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless

B88-09 .............................................Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube

B88M-11 .........................................Specification for Seamless Copper water Tube (Metric)

D975-11b .........................................Diesel Fuel Oils

D. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

C37.13-08 ........................................Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used In Enclosures

C37.90.1-02 .....................................Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus

E. International Code Council (ICC):


F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

ICS 6-06 ..........................................Enclosures

ICS 4-10 ..........................................Application Guideline for Terminal Blocks

MG 1-11 ..........................................Motor and Generators

MG 2-07 ..........................................Safety Standard and Guide for Selection, Installation and Use of Electric Motors and Generators

PB 2-11............................................Dead-Front Distribution Switchboards



26 32 13 VARHS

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

30-12 ...............................................Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code

37-10 ...............................................Installations and Use of Stationary Combustion Engine and Gas Turbines



110-10 .............................................Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems

H. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):


142-06 .............................................Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids


489-09 .............................................Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

508-99 .............................................Industrial Control Equipment

891-05 .............................................Switchboards

1236-06 ...........................................Battery Chargers for Charging Engine-Starter Batteries

2085-97 ...........................................Insulated Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids

2200-98 ...........................................Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. The engine generator system shall be in accordance with NFPA, UL, NEMA and ANSI, and as specified herein.

B. Provide a factory-assembled, wired (except for field connections), complete, fully automatic engine generator system.

C. Engine Generator Parameter Schedule:

1. Power Rating: Emergency Standby.

2. Voltage: 277/480V.

3. Rated Power: 350 kW / 438Kva.

4. Power Factor: 0.8 lagging

5. Engine Generator Application: stand-alone


26 32 13 VARHS

6. Fuel: diesel

7. Voltage Regulation: + 2% (maximum) (No Load to Full Load) (standalone applications)

8. Phases: 3 Phase, Wye.

9. Each component of the engine generator system shall be capable of operating at 300 meters (1000 feet) above sea level in a ventilated room which will have average ambient air temperature ranging from a minimum of 5°C (41°F) in winter to maximum of 30°C (86°F) in summer.

D. Assemble, connect, and wire the engine generator at the factory so that only the external connections need to be made at the construction site.

E. Engine Generator Unit shall be factory-painted with manufacturer's primer and standard finishes.

F. Connections between components of the system shall conform to the recommendations of the manufacturer.

G. Couplings, shafts, and other moving parts shall be enclosed and guarded. Guards shall be metal, ruggedly constructed, rigidly fastened, and readily removable for convenient servicing of the equipment without disassembling any pipes and fittings.

H. The generating set shall be equipped with vibration isolators and mounted on a welded steel base which shall provide suitable mounting to any level surface.

I. Engine generator shall have the following features:

1. Factory-mounted on a common, rigid, welded, structural steel base.

2. Engine generator shall be statically and dynamically balanced so that the maximum vibration in the horizontal, vertical, and axial directions shall be limited to 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch), with an overall velocity limit of 24 mm/sec (0.866 inch per second) RMS, for all speeds.

3. The isolators shall be constrained with restraints capable of withstanding static forces in any direction equal to twice the weight of the supported equipment.

4. Shall be capable of operating satisfactorily as specified for not fewer than 10,000 hours between major overhauls.

2.2 ENGINE

A. The engine shall be coupled directly to a generator.

B. Minimum four cylinders.

C. The engine shall be able to start in a 4.5 ˚C (40 ˚F) ambient temperature while using No. 2 diesel fuel oil without the use of starting aids such as glow plugs and ether injections.

D. The engine shall be equipped with electric heater for maintaining the coolant temperature between 32-38 °C (90-100 °F), or as recommended by the manufacturer.

1. Install thermostatic controls, contactors, and circuit breaker-protected circuits for the heaters.

2. The heaters shall operate continuously except while the engine is operating or the water temperature is at the predetermined level.


26 32 13 VARHS

2.3 GOVERNOR

A. Isochronous, electronic type.

B. Steady-state speed band at 60 Hz shall not exceed plus or minus 0.33%.

2.4 LUBRICATION OIL SYSTEM

A. Pressurized type.

B. Positive-displacement pump driven by engine crankshaft.

C. Full-flow strainer and full-flow or by-pass filters.

D. Filters shall be cleanable or replaceable type and shall remove particles as small as 3 microns without removing the additives in the oil. For by-pass filters, flow shall be diverted without flow interruption.

E. Extend lube oil sump drain line out through the skid base and terminate it with a drain valve and plug.

2.5 FUEL SYSTEM

A. Main fuel storage tank(s) shall comply with the requirements of Section 23 10 00, FACILITY FUEL SYSTEMS.

B. Shall comply with NFPA 37 and NFPA 30, and have the following features:

1. Injection pump(s) and nozzles.

2. Plungers shall be carefully lapped for precision fit and shall not require any packing.

3. Filters or screens that require periodic cleaning or replacement shall not be permitted in the injection system assemblies.

4. Return surplus oil from the injectors to the main storage tank by gravity or a pump.

5. Filter System:

a. Dual primary filters shall be located between the main fuel oil storage and day tank.

b. Secondary filters (engine-mounted) shall be located such that the oil will be thoroughly filtered before it reaches the injection system assemblies.

c. Filters shall be cleanable or replaceable type and shall entrap and remove water from oil as recommended by the engine manufacturer.

C. Day Tank:

1. A welded steel separate self-supporting day tank with double-wall fuel containment shall be provided to supply fuel to the generator.

2. The day tank shall have capacity to supply fuel to the new and future engines for a 4-hour period at 100% rated load without being refilled, including fuel that is returned to the main fuel storage tank. The calculation of the capacity of each day tank shall incorporate the requirement to stop the supply of fuel into the day tank at 90% of the ultimate volume of the tank.


26 32 13 VARHS

3. Secure, pipe, and connect the tank adequately for maximum protection from fire hazards, including oil leaks.

4. The tank shall include at a minimum the following features:

a. 1" NPT fittings for fuel oil supply and return. provide with shutoff cocks.

b. 2" NPT normal vent. terminate the vent piping outdoors with screened mushroom cap.

c. 4" NPT emergency vent for main day tank and secondary containment tank. Provide each with emergency relief pressure vent.

d. 1" NPT basin drain. Provide with shutoff cock.

e. Inspection port.

f. 3/4" NPT fittings for engine supply and return lines from generator. Provide with shutoff cock.

g. Control module with Fuel level sensor, motor control relay, high and low level fuel level warnings, critical low fuel level warning, fuel in basin switch, fuel in secondary containment warning,

h. Fuel transfer pumps.

i. 1" NPT solenoid valve.

5. Incorporate a leak detection switch in the secondary containment vessel to shut down the supply pump, and actuate an alarm if a leak is detected.

6. Incorporate a float switch on the day tank to control the fuel oil transfer pumps and to actuate an alarm in the engine generator control cubicle when the oil level in the tank drops below the level at which the transfer pump should start to refill the tank.

a. The float switch contacts controlling the fuel oil transfer pumps shall be set to energize the supply pump and open solenoid valve when the liquid level in the tank reaches one-third of the total volume of the tank.

b. The float switch contacts that actuate the low fuel oil day tank alarm device shall be set to alarm and energize the second fuel transfer pump when the liquid level in the tank reaches one-quarter of the total volume of the tank.

c. The float switch contacts that actuate the high fuel oil day tank alarm device shall be set to alarm and energize the return fuel transfer pump when the liquid level in the tank reaches 110% of its normal capacity.

d. Provide high and low level signals to annunciator system specified in Section 23 09 11, INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR BOILER PLANT.

6. Day tank and engine supply line elevations shall be below the elevation of the injector return outlet on the engine.

D. Fuel Transfer Pumps - Main Storage Tank to Day Tank(s):

1. Electric motor-driven, duplex arrangement, close-coupled, single-stage, positive-displacement type with built-in pressure relief valves. When the fuel is used for cooling components of the fuel injection system, the engine's fuel return line shall be returned to the main storage tank, rather than the day tank.


26 32 13 VARHS

2. Include a heavy-duty automatic alternator and H-O-A switch to alternate sequence of pumps. Pumps shall be controlled with the float switch on the day tank and H-O-A selector switch such that the day tank will be refilled automatically when the oil level lowers to the low limit for the float switch. The H-O-A selector switches shall enable the pumps to be operated manually at any time.

3. For all engines, the related supply transfer pump and its electrical and plumbing connections shall be sized to provide a flow rate of at least four times the engine's fuel pumping rate.

4. For all engines, the related return transfer pump and its electrical and plumbing connections shall be sized to provide a flow rate of at least eight times the engine's fuel pumping rate.

5. Provide a manually-operated, rotary-type transfer pump connected in parallel with the electric motor-driven transfer pumps so that oil can be pumped to the day tank while the electric motor-driven pumps are inoperative.

E. Piping System: Black steel standard weight ASTM A-53 pipe and necessary valves and pressure gauges between:

1. The engine and the day tank as shown on the drawings.

2. The day tank and the supply and return connections at the above ground storage tank as shown on the drawings. Connections at the engine shall be made with flexible piping suitable for the fuel furnished.

2.6 COOLING SYSTEM

A. Liquid-cooled, closed loop, with fin-tube radiator mounted on the engine generator and integral engine driven circulating pump, as shown on the drawings.

B. Cooling capacity shall not be less than the cooling requirements of the engine generator and its lubricating oil while operating continuously at 100% of its specified rating.

C. Coolant shall be extended-life antifreeze solution, 50% ethylene glycol and 50% soft water, with corrosion inhibitor additive as recommended by the manufacturer.

D. Fan shall be driven by multiple belts from engine shaft.

E. Coolant hoses shall be flexible, per manufacturer's recommendation.

F. Self-contained thermostatic-control valve shall modulate coolant flow to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature, as recommended by the engine manufacturer.

2.7 AIR INTAKE AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS

A. Air Intake:

1. Provide an engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry filter and dirty filter indicator.

B. Exhaust System:

1. Exhaust Muffler:

Shall be critical grade type and capable of the following noise attenuation:


26 32 13 VARHS

Octave Band Hertz (Mid Frequency)

Minimum db Attenuation (.0002 Microbar Reference)

31 5

63 10

125 27

500 37

1000 31

2000 26

4000 25

8000 26

2. Pressure drop in the complete exhaust system shall be small enough for satisfactory operation of the engine generator while it is delivering 100% of its specified rating.

3. Exhaust pipe size from the engine to the muffler shall be as recommended by the engine manufacturer. Pipe size from muffler to air discharge shall be two pipe sizes larger than engine exhaust pipe.

4. Connections at the engine exhaust outlet shall be made with a flexible exhaust pipe. Provide bolted type pipe flanges welded to each end of the flexible section.

C. Condensate drain at muffler shall be made with schedule 40 black steel pipe through a petcock.

D. Exhaust Piping and Supports: Black steel pipe, ASTM A-53 standard weight with welded fittings. Spring type hangers, as specified in Section 23 05 51, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR BOILER PLANT, shall support the pipe.

E. Insulation for Exhaust Pipe and Muffler:

1. Calcium silicate minimum 75 mm (3 inches) thick.

2. Insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION.

3. The installed insulation shall be covered with aluminum jacket 0.4 mm (0.016 inch) thick. The jacket is to be held in place by bands of 0.38 mm (0.015 inch) thick by 15 mm (0.5 inch) wide aluminum.

4. Insulation and jacket are not required on flexible exhaust sections.

F. Roof Sleeves: Pipe sleeves (thimble) shall be factory assembled insulated exhaust roof thimble manufactured to prevent heat from transmitting from exhaust pipe to combustible material, triple wall 304 stainless steel construction, ventilation holes on each end to provide cooling, and bird screen on outlet end. G. Vertical exhaust piping shall be provided with a hinged, gravity-operated, self-closing rain cover.


26 32 13 VARHS

2.8 ENGINE STARTING SYSTEM

A. The engine starting system shall start the engine at any position of the flywheel.

B. Electric cranking motor:

1. Shall be engine-mounted.

2. Shall crank the engine via a gear drive.

3. Rating shall be adequate for cranking the cold engine at the voltage provided by the battery system, and at the required RPM during five consecutive starting attempts of 10 seconds cranking each at 10-second intervals, for a total of 50 seconds of actual cranking without damage (the fifth starting attempt will be manually initiated upon failure of a complete engine cranking cycle).

C. Batteries shall be lead-acid high discharge rate type.

1. Each battery cell shall have minimum and maximum electrolyte level indicators and a flip-top flame arrestor vent cap.

2. Batteries shall have connector covers for protection against external short circuits.

3. With the charger disconnected, the batteries shall have sufficient capacity so that the total system voltage does not fall below 85% of the nominal system voltage with the following demands:

Five consecutive starting attempts of 10 seconds cranking at 10 second intervals for a total of 50 seconds of actual cranking (the fifth starting attempt will be manually initiated upon failure of a complete engine cranking cycle).

4. Battery racks shall be metal with an alkali-resistant finish and thermal insulation, and secured to the floor.

D. Battery Charger:

1. A current-limiting battery charger, conforming to UL 1236, shall be provided and shall automatically recharge the batteries. The charger shall be capable of an equalize-charging rate for recharging fully depleted batteries within 24 hours and a floating charge rate for maintaining the batteries at fully charged condition.

2. An ammeter shall be provided to indicate charging rate. A voltmeter shall be provided to indicate charging voltage.

2.9 LUBRICATING OIL HEATER

A. Provide a thermostatically-controlled electric heater to automatically maintain the oil temperature within plus or minus 1.7 °C (3 °F) of the control temperature.

2.10 JACKET COOLANT HEATER

A. Provide a thermostatically-controlled electric heater mounted in the engine coolant jacketing to automatically maintain the coolant within plus or minus 1.7 °C (3 °F) of the temperature recommended by the engine manufacturer to meet the starting time specified at the minimum winter outdoor temperature.

2.11 GENERATOR

A. Synchronous, amortisseur windings, bracket-bearing, self-venting, rotating-field type connected directly to the engine.


26 32 13 VARHS

B. Lifting lugs designed for convenient connection to and removal from the engine.

C. Integral poles and spider, or individual poles dove-tailed to the spider.

D. Designed for sustained short-circuit currents in conformance with NEMA Standards.

E. Designed for sustained operation at 100% of the RPM specified for the engine generator without damage.

F. Telephone influence factor shall conform to NEMA MG 1.

G. Furnished with brushless excitation system or static-exciter-regulator assembly.

H. Nameplates attached to the generator shall show the manufacturer's name, equipment identification, serial number, voltage ratings, field current ratings, kW/kVA output ratings, power factor rating, time rating, temperature rise ratings, RPM ratings, full load current rating, number of phases and frequency, and date of manufacture.

I. The grounded (neutral) conductor shall be electrically isolated from equipment ground and terminated in the same junction box as the phase conductors.

2.12 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION

A. Generator circuit breaker shall be molded-case, electronic-trip type, and 100% rated, complying with UL 489. Tripping characteristics shall be adjustable long-time and short-time delay and instantaneous. Provide shunt trip to trip breaker when engine generator is shut down by other protective devices.

B. Overcurrent protective device cubicle shall contain terminations for neutral and equipment grounding conductors as necessary.

2.13 CONTROLS

A. Shall include Engine Generator Control Cubicle(s) and Remote Annunciator Panel.

B. General:

1. Control equipment shall be in accordance with UL 508, NEMA ICS-4, ICS-6, and ANSI C37.90.1.

2. Panels shall be in accordance with UL 50.

3. Cubicles shall be in accordance with UL 891.

4. Coordinate controls with the automatic transfer switches shown on the drawings so that the systems will operate as specified.

5. Cubicles:

a. Code gauge steel: manufacturer's recommended heavy gauge steel with factory primer and light gray finish.

b. Doors shall be gasketed, attached with concealed or semi-concealed hinges, and shall have a permanent means of latching in closed position.

c. Panels shall be wall-mounted or incorporated in other equipment as indicated on the drawings or as specified.

d. Door locks for panels and cubicles shall be keyed identically to operate from a single key.


26 32 13 VARHS

6. Wiring: Insulated, rated at 600 V.

a. Install the wiring in vertical and horizontal runs, neatly harnessed.

b. Terminate all external wiring at heavy duty, pressure-type, terminal blocks.

7. The equipment, wiring terminals, and wires shall be clearly and permanently labeled.

8. The appropriate wiring diagrams shall be laminated or mounted under plexiglass within the frame on the inside of the cubicles and panels.

9. All indicating lamps and switches shall be accessible and mounted on the cubicle doors.

10. Meters shall be per the requirements of Section 25 10 10, ADVANCED UTILITY METERING SYSTEM.

11. The manufacturer shall coordinate the interconnection and programming of the generator controls with all related equipment, including automatic transfer switches and generator paralleling controls as applicable, specified in other sections.

C. Engine generator Control Cubicle:

1. Starting and Stopping Controls:

a. A three-position, maintained-contact type selector switch with positions marked "AUTOMATIC," "OFF," and "MANUAL." Provide flashing amber light for OFF and MANUAL positions.

b. A momentary contact push-button switch with positions marked "MANUAL START" and "MANUAL STOP."

c. Selector switch in AUTOMATIC position shall cause the engine to start automatically when a single pole contact in a remote device closes. When the generator's output voltage increases to not less than 90% of its rated voltage, and its frequency increases to not less than 58 Hz, the remote devices shall transfer the load to the generator. An adjustable time delay relay, in the 0 to 15 minute range, shall cause the engine generator to continue operating without any load after completion of the period of operation with load. Upon completion of the additional 0 to 15 minute (adjustable) period, the engine generator shall stop.

d. Selector switch in OFF position shall prevent the engine from starting either automatically or manually. Selector switch in MANUAL position shall also cause the engine to start when the manual start push-button is depressed momentarily.

e. With selector switch is in MANUAL position, depressing the MANUAL STOP push-button momentarily shall stop the engine after a cool-down period.

f. A maintained-contact, red mushroom-head push-button switch marked "EMERGENCY STOP" will cause the engine to stop without a cool-down period, independent of the position of the selector switch.

2. Engine Cranking Controls:

a. The cranking cycles shall be controlled by a timer that will be independent of the battery voltage fluctuations.

b. The controls shall crank the engine through one complete cranking cycle, consisting of four starting attempts of 10 seconds each with 10 seconds between each attempt.


26 32 13 VARHS

c. Total actual cranking time for the complete cranking cycle shall be 40 seconds during a 70-second interval.

d. Cranking shall terminate when the engine starts so that the starting system will not be damaged. Termination of the cranking shall be controlled by self-contained, speed-sensitive switch. The switch shall prevent re-cranking of the engine until after the engine stops.

e. After the engine has stopped, the cranking control shall reset.

3. Supervisory Controls:

a. Overcrank:

1) When the cranking control system completes one cranking cycle (four starting attempts), without starting the engine, the OVERCRANK signal light and the audible alarm shall be energized.

2) The cranking control system shall lock-out, and shall require a manual reset.

b. Coolant Temperature:

1) When the temperature rises to the predetermined first stage level, the HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE - FIRST STAGE signal light and the audible alarm shall be energized.

2) When the temperature rises to the predetermined second stage level, which shall be low enough to prevent any damage to the engine and high enough to avoid unnecessary engine shutdowns, the HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE - SECOND STAGE signal light and the audible alarm shall be energized and the engine shall stop.

3) The difference between the first and second stage temperature settings shall be approximately -12 ˚C (10 ˚F).

4) Permanently indicate the temperature settings near the associated signal light.

5) When the coolant temperature drops to below 21 ˚C (70 ˚F), the "LOW COOLANT TEMPERATURE" signal light and the audible alarm shall be energized.

c. Low Coolant Level: When the coolant level falls below the minimum level recommended by the manufacturer, the LOW COOLANT LEVEL signal light and audible alarm shall be energized.

d. Lubricating Oil Pressure:

1) When the pressure falls to the predetermined first stage level, the OIL PRESSURE - FIRST STAGE signal light and the audible alarm shall be energized.

2) When the pressure falls to the predetermined second stage level, which shall be high enough to prevent damage to the engine and low enough to avoid unnecessary engine shutdowns, the OIL PRESSURE - SECOND STAGE signal light and the audible alarm shall be energized and the engine shall stop.

3) The difference between the first and second stage pressure settings shall be approximately 15% of the oil pressure.

4) The pressure settings near the associated signal light shall be permanently displayed so that the running oil pressure can be compared to the target (setpoint) value.

e. Overspeed:


26 32 13 VARHS

1) When the engine RPM exceeds the maximum RPM recommended by the manufacturer of the engine, the engine shall stop.

2) Simultaneously, the OVERSPEED signal light and the audible alarm shall be energized.

f. Low Fuel - Day Tank:

When the fuel oil level in the day tank decreases to less than the level at which the fuel oil transfer pump should start to refill the tank, the LOW FUEL DAY TANK light and the audible alarm shall be energized.

g. High Fuel - Day Tank:

When the fuel oil level in the day tank increases to 110% of its normal capacity the HIGH FUEL DAY TANK light and the audible alarm shall be energized.

h. Fuel Leak - Day Tank

If fuel is detected in the secondary containment tank the Day Tank Leak light and audible alarm shall be energized.

i. Low Fuel - Main Storage Tank:

When the fuel oil level in the storage tank decreases to less than one-third of total tank capacity, the LOW FUEL-MAIN STORAGE TANK signal light and audible alarm shall be energized.

j. Reset Alarms and Signals:

Overcrank, Coolant Temperature, Coolant Level, Oil Pressure, Overspeed, and Low Fuel signal lights and the associated audible alarms shall require manual reset. A momentary-contact silencing switch and push-button shall silence the audible alarm by using relays or solid state devices to seal in the audible alarm in the de-energized condition. Elimination of the alarm condition shall automatically release the sealed-in circuit for the audible alarm so that it will be automatically energized again when the next alarm condition occurs. The signal lights shall require manual reset after elimination of the condition which caused them to be energized. Install the audible alarm just outside the engine generator room in a location as directed by the Resident Engineer. The audible alarm shall be rated for 85 dB at 3 M (10 feet).

k. Generator Breaker Signal Light:

1) A flashing green light shall be energized when the engine generator circuit breaker is in the OPEN or TRIPPED position.

2) Simultaneously, the audible alarm shall be energized.

4. Monitoring Devices:

a. Electric type gauges for the cooling water temperatures and lubricating oil pressures. These gauges may be engine mounted with proper vibration isolation.

b. A running time indicator, totalizing not fewer than 9,999 hours, and an electric type tachometer.

c. A voltmeter, ammeter, frequency meter, kilowatt meter, manual adjusting knob for the output voltage, and the other items shown on the drawings shall be mounted on the front of the generator control panels.

d. Install potential and current transformers as required.


26 32 13 VARHS

e. Visual Indications:

1) OVERCRANK

2) HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE - FIRST STAGE

3) HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE - SECOND STAGE

4) LOW COOLANT TEMPERATURE

5) OIL PRESSURE - FIRST STAGE

6) OIL PRESSURE - SECOND STAGE

7) LOW COOLANT LEVEL

8) GENERATOR BREAKER

9) OVERSPEED

10) LOW FUEL - DAY TANK

11) HIGH FUEL - DAY TANK

12) FUEL LEAK - DAY TANK

13) LOW FUEL – MAIN STORAGE TANK

f. Lamp Test: The LAMP TEST momentary contact switch shall momentarily actuate the alarm buzzer and all the indicating lamps.

5. Automatic Voltage Regulator:

a. Shall correct voltage fluctuations rapidly and restore the output voltage to the predetermined level with a minimum amount of hunting.

b. Shall include voltage level rheostat located inside the control cubicle.

c. Provide a 3-phase automatic voltage regulator immune to waveform distortion.

2.14 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL

A. A remote annunciator panel shall be installed at the location as shown on the drawings.

B. The annunciator shall indicate alarm conditions as required by NFPA 99 and 110.

C. In addition to the alarm indication required by NFPA 99 and 110, provide visual indications for the following:

1. Low Fuel – Day Tank.

2. High Fuel – Day Tank.

3. Fuel Leak – Day Tank.


26 32 13 VARHS

D. Unit shall include a communications module capable of interfacing with local access, windows based monitoring software and Owner’s network facilities.

E. Include control wiring between the remote annunciator panel and the engine generator. Wiring shall be as required by the manufacturer.

2.15 SPARE PARTS

A. For each engine generator:

1. Six lubricating oil filters.

2. Six primary fuel oil filters.

3. Six secondary fuel oil filters.

4. Six intake air filters.

B. For each battery charger:

1. Three complete sets of fuses.

C. For each control panel:

1. Three complete sets of fuses, if applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install concrete bases of dimensions shown on the drawings.

B. Installation of the engine generator shall comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with NFPA 110.

C. Mounting:

1. Support the base of engine generator on vibration isolators, each isolator bolted to the floor (pad), and the generator base bolted to isolator.

2. Install sufficient isolators so that the floor (pad) bearing pressure under each isolator is within the floor (pad) loading specification.

3. Install equal number of isolators on each side of the engine generator's base.

4. Locate isolators for approximately equal load distribution and deflection per isolator. The base of the engine generator shall be drilled at the factory for the isolator bolts.

5. Isolators shall be shipped loose with the engine generator.

6. All connections between the engine generator and exterior systems, such as fuel lines, electrical connections, and engine exhaust system and air exhaust shroud, shall be flexible.

D. Balance:


26 32 13 VARHS

1. The vibration velocity in the horizontal, vertical, and axial directions shall not exceed 16.25 mm (0.65 inch) per second peak at any specific frequency. These limits apply to main structural components such as the engine block and the generator frame at the bearings.

E. Connect all components of the generator system so that they will continue to be energized during failure of the normal electrical power supply system.

F. Install piping between engine generator and remote components of cooling, fuel, and exhaust systems.

G. Flexible connection between radiator and exhaust shroud at the wall damper:

1. Install noncombustible flexible connections made of 20-oz neoprene-coated fiberglass fabric approximately 150 mm (6 inches) wide.

2. Crimp and fasten the fabric to the sheet metal with screws 50 mm (2 inches) on center. The fabric shall not be stressed, except by the air pressure.

H. Exhaust System Insulation:

1. Adhesive and insulation materials shall be applied on clean, dry surfaces from which loose scale and construction debris has been removed by wire brushing.

2. Fill all cracks, voids, and joints of applied insulation material with high temperature 1093 °C (2000 °F) insulating cement before applying the outer covering.

3. The installation shall be clean and free of debris, thermally and structurally tight without sag, neatly finished at all hangers or other penetrations, and shall provide a smooth finished surface.

4. Insulation and jacket shall terminate hard and tight at all anchor points.

5. Insulate completely from engine exhaust flexible connection through roof or wall construction, including muffler.


A. Provide the services of a factory-authorized, factory-trained representative of the engine generator manufacturer to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, and to supervise the field tests.

B. When the complete engine generator system has been installed and prior to the final inspection, test all components of the system in the presence of the Resident Engineer for proper operation of the individual components and the complete system and to eliminate electrical and mechanical defects.

C. Furnish fuel oil, lubricating oil, anti-freeze liquid, water treatment, rust-inhibitor, and load bank for testing of the engine generator.

D. Visual Inspection: Visually verify proper installation of engine generator and all components per manufacturer’s pre-functional installation checklist.

E. Set engine generator circuit breaker protective functions per Section 26 05 73, OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY.

F. Field Tests:


26 32 13 VARHS

1. Perform manufacturer’s after-starting checks and inspections.

2. Test the engine generator for six hours of continuous operation as follows:

a. Two hours while delivering 100% of the specified kW.

b. Four hours while the engine generator is delivering 80% of its specified kW rating.

c. If during the 6-hour continuous test, an engine generator failure occurs or the engine generator cannot maintain specified power output, the test(s) are null and void. After repair and/or adjustments, the test(s) shall be repeated at no additional cost to the Government until satisfactory results are attained.

3. Record the following test data at 30-minute intervals:

a. Time of day, as well as reading of running time indicator.

b. kW.

c. Voltage on each phase.

d. Amperes on each phase.

e. Engine RPM.

f. Frequency.

g. Coolant water temperature.

h. Fuel pressure.

i. Oil pressure.

j. Outdoor temperature.

k. Average ambient temperature in the vicinity of the engine generator.

4. Demonstrate that the engine generator will attain proper voltage and frequency within the specified time limit from a cold start after the closing of a single contact.

5. Furnish a resistance-type load for the testing of the engine generator. Test loads shall always include adequate resistance to assure stability of the loads and equipment during all of the testing operations. The test load kW rating shall not be less than 100% of the specified kW rating of the engine generator.

G. Starting System Test:

1. Demonstrate that the batteries and cranking motor are capable of five starting attempts of 10 seconds cranking each at 10-second intervals with the battery charger turned off.


26 32 13 VARHS

H. Remote Annunciator Panel Tests:

Simulate conditions to verify proper operation of each visual or audible indication, interconnecting hardware and software, and reset button.

I. Fuel systems shall be flushed and tested per Section 23 10 00, FACILITY FUEL SYSTEMS: Fuel supply and storage requirements.

J. Automatic Operation Tests:

Test the engine generator and associated automatic transfer switches to demonstrate automatic starting, loading and unloading. The load for this test shall be the actual connected loads. Initiate loss of normal source and verify the specified sequence of operation. Restore the normal power source and verify the specified sequence of operation. Verify resetting of controls to normal.

K. At the completion of the field tests, fill the main storage tank and day tank with fuel of grade and quality as recommended by the manufacturer of the engine. Fill all engine fluids to levels as recommended by manufacturer.

L. When any defects are detected during the tests, correct all the deficiencies and repeat all or part of the 6-hour continuous test as requested by the Resident Engineer, at no additional cost to the Government.

M. Provide test and inspection results in writing to the Resident Engineer.


A. After completion of acceptance checks, settings, and tests, the Contractor shall demonstrate that the engine generator(s) and control and annunciation components are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function.

3.4 INSTRUCTIONS AND FINAL INSPECTIONS

A. Laminate or mount under acrylic resin a set of operating instructions for the system and install instructions within a frame mounted on the wall near the engine generator at a location per the Resident Engineer.

B. Furnish the services of a competent, factory-trained technician for one 4-hour period for instructions to VA personnel in operation and maintenance of the equipment, on the date requested by the Resident Engineer.

---END---


SECTION 26 33 53

STATIC UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, connection, and testing of the static uninterruptible power supply, indicated in this section as UPS.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS: Requirement for seismic restraint for nonstructural components.


C. Section 26 05 19, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: Low-voltage conductors.

D. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible fault currents.

E. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduits.

F. Section 26 24 13, DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS: For low-voltage switchboard required for maintenance bypass of multiple module UPS.



1.4 FACTORY TESTS

A. Uninterruptible power supplies shall be thoroughly tested at the factory to assure that there are no electrical or mechanical defects.

B. UPS shall be factory full-load tested to meet the requirements specified using a test battery (not the battery to be supplied with the system) with AC input power and with battery power for a minimum of 8 hours, with meter readings taken every 30 minutes. Should a malfunction occur, the problem shall be corrected and the test shall be repeated. The tests shall encompass all aspects of operation, such as module failure, static bypass operation, battery failure, input power failure and overload ratings.

C. Furnish four (4) copies of certified manufacturer's factory test reports to the Resident Engineer prior to shipment of the UPS to ensure that the UPS has been successfully tested as specified.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings:



26 33 53 VARHS

b. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, required clearances, terminations, weight, plan, front, side, and rear elevations, accessories, and device nameplate data.

c. Provide detailed and project-specific system diagram, showing maintenance bypass, UPS module(s), battery cabinet(s) and batteries, major circuit protective devices, interconnecting power and control wiring, key-type mechanical interlocks, and connections to power sources and loads, as applicable. Indicate whether interconnections are factory-provided/factory-installed, factory-provided/field-installed, or field-provided/field installed.

2. Manuals:

a. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets, wiring diagrams, and information for ordering replacement parts. 1) Wiring diagrams shall have their terminals identified to facilitate installation, maintenance, and

operation. 2) Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment and the

interconnection between the items of equipment. 3) Provide a clear and concise description of operation, which gives, in detail, the information

required to properly operate the UPS, including but not limited to bypass switchboard, UPS, key-type mechanical interlocks, remote devices, emergency power off buttons, fire alarm interface, and other components as applicable.

b. If changes have been made to the maintenance and operating manuals originally submitted, submit updated maintenance and operating manuals two weeks prior to the final inspection. 1) Include complete "As Installed" diagrams that indicate all pieces of equipment and their

interconnecting wiring. 2) Include complete diagrams of the internal wiring for each piece of equipment, including "As

Installed" revisions of the diagrams. 3) The wiring diagrams shall identify the terminals to facilitate installation, maintenance,

operation, and testing.

3. Test Reports:

a. Submit certified factory design and production test reports for approval.

b. Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit certified field test reports and data sheets to the Resident Engineer.


A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata), form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.

B. Institute of Engineering and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

C57.110-08 ......................................1998; R 2004) Recommended Practice for Establishing Transformer

Capability When Supplying Nonsinusoidal Load Currents

C62.41.1-02 .....................................Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power

Circuits


26 33 53 VARHS

C62.41.2-02 .....................................Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC

Power Circuits

450-10 .............................................Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Vented Lead-Acid Batteries

for Stationary Applications

485-10 .............................................Sizing Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications




PE 1-03 ............................................Uninterruptible Power Systems - Specification and Performance Verification



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. System Capacity: Unless stated otherwise, the parameters listed are under full rated output load at 0.9 power factor, with batteries fully charged and floating on the DC bus and with nominal input voltage. Overall 20kVA, 18kW, non-redundant, at 40 °C.

B. Battery Capacity: Discharge time to end voltage: 18 minutes, at 25 °C (77 °F). Battery shall be capable of delivering 125 percent of full rated output load at initial start-up.

C. System Bus Bracing: Braced for amperes symmetrical interrupting capacity as shown on drawings.

D. AC Input:

1. Voltage 208 volts line-to-line.

2. Number of phases: 3-phase, 3-wire, plus ground.

3. Voltage Range: Plus 10 percent, minus 15 percent, without affecting battery float voltage or output voltage.

4. Frequency: 60 Hz, plus or minus 5 percent.

5. Total harmonic current distortion (THD) reflected into the primary line: 5 percent maximum.

E. AC Output:

1. Voltage 208 volts line-to-line, 120 volts line-to-neutral.

2. Number of phases: 3-phase, 4-wire, plus ground.

3. Voltage regulation:


26 33 53 VARHS

a. Balanced load: Plus or minus 1.0 percent.

b. 100 percent load imbalance, phase-to-phase: Plus or minus 3 percent.

4. Frequency: 60 Hz.

5. Frequency regulation: Plus or minus 0.05 percent.

6. Harmonic content (RMS voltage): 5 percent maximum total harmonic distortion with 100% nonlinear load.

7. Load power factor operating range: 1.0 to 0.8 lagging.

8. Phase displacement:

a. Balanced load: Plus or minus 1 degree of bypass input.

9. Overload capability (at full voltage) (excluding battery):

a. 125 percent load for 10 minutes.

b. 150 percent load for 1 minute.

F. Voltage Transient Response:

1. 100 percent load step: Plus or minus 5 percent.

2.2 UPS

A. General Description: UPS module shall consist of a rectifier/charger unit and a 3-phase inverter module unit with their associated transformers, synchronizing equipment, input and output circuit breakers, and accessories as required for operation.

B. Rectifier/Charger Unit: Rectifier/charger unit shall be solid state and shall provide direct current to the DC bus.

1. Input Circuit Breaker: Rectifier/charger unit shall be provided with an input circuit breaker. The circuit breaker shall be sized to accept simultaneously the full-rated load and the battery recharge current.

2. Sizing: Rectifier/charger unit shall be sized for the following two simultaneous operating conditions:

a. Supplying the full rated load current to the inverter.

b. Recharging a fully-discharged battery to 95 percent of rated ampere-hour capacity within ten times the discharge time after normal AC power is restored, with the input protective device closed.

C. Inverter Unit: Inverter unit shall be a solid-state device capable of accepting power from the DC bus and providing AC power within specified limits.

1. Output Overload: The inverter shall be able to sustain an overload as specified across its output terminals.

2. Synchronism: The inverter shall normally operate in phase-lock and synchronism with the bypass source.


26 33 53 VARHS

3. Modular Construction: Each control logic printed circuit board shall be electrically and physically packaged on an individual plug-in module with separate indication and adjustments.

4. Output Circuit Breaker: The output circuit breaker shall be capable of shunt tripping and shall have interrupting capacity as specified. Circuit breaker shall have provision for locking in the "off" position.

5. Output Transformer: The inverter output transformer shall be similar to the input transformer and shall be capable of handling up to K-13 nonlinear loads as described in IEEE C57.110.

D. External Protection: UPS module shall have built-in self-protection against undervoltage, overvoltage, overcurrent and surges introduced on the AC input source and/or the bypass source. The UPS system shall sustain input surges without damage in accordance with IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. The UPS shall also have built-in self-protection against overvoltage and voltage surges introduced at the output terminals by paralleled sources, load switching, or circuit breaker operation in the critical load distribution system.

E. Internal Protection: UPS module shall be self-protected against overcurrent, sudden changes in output load and short circuits at the output terminals. UPS module shall be provided with output reverse power detection which shall cause that module to be disconnected from the critical load bus when output reverse power is present. UPS module shall have built-in protection against permanent damage to itself and the connected load for predictable types of failure within itself and the connected load. At the end of battery discharge limit, the module shall shut down without damage to internal components.

2.3 STATIC BYPASS TRANSFER SWITCH

A. A static bypass transfer switch shall be provided as an integral part of the UPS and shall consist of a static switch and a bypass protective device or bypass switch. The control logic shall contain an automatic transfer circuit that senses the status of the inverter logic signals and alarm conditions and provides an uninterrupted transfer of the load to the bypass AC power source, without exceeding the transient limits specified herein, when a malfunction occurs in the UPS or when an external overload condition occurs.

1. Static Bypass Transfer Switch Disconnect: A disconnect shall be incorporated to isolate the static bypass transfer switch assembly so it can be removed for servicing. The disconnect shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts and provision for padlocking in either the "on" or "off" position.

2.4 MAINTENANCE BYPASS – SINGLE MODULE UPS

A. A maintenance bypass switch shall be provided as an integral part of the UPS and located within the UPS module. The maintenance bypass switch shall provide the capability to continuously support the load from the bypass AC power source while the UPS is isolated for maintenance. The maintenance bypass switch shall be housed in an isolated compartment inside the UPS cabinet. Switch shall contain a maintenance bypass protective device and a module isolation protective device.

B. The maintenance bypass switch shall provide the capability of transferring the load from the UPS static bypass transfer switch to maintenance bypass and then back to the UPS static bypass transfer switch with no interruption to the load.

2.5 MODULE CONTROL PANEL – SINGLE-MODULE UPS

A. The UPS module shall be provided with a LCD control/indicator panel. Meters, controls, alarms, system diagnostics, mimic screen showing one-line diagram of the system, and indicators for operation of the UPS shall be on this panel.

1. Module Meters:

a. Meters shall have 1 percent accuracy.

b. The following functions shall be monitored and displayed:


26 33 53 VARHS

1) Input voltage, phase-to-phase (all three phases). 2) Input current, all three phases. 3) Input frequency. 4) Battery voltage. 5) Battery current (charge/discharge). 6) Output voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral (all three phases). 7) Output current, all three phases. 8) Output frequency. 9) Output kilowatts. 10) Elapsed time meter to indicate hours of operation, 6 digits. 11) Bypass voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral (all three phases). 12) Output kilovars. 13) Output kilowatt hours, with 15-minute interval.

2. Module Controls:

a. Module shall have the following controls: 1) Alarm test/reset function. 2) Module input protective device trip function. 3) Module output protective device trip function. 4) Battery protective device trip function. 5) Emergency Power Off (EPO) pushbutton, with guard. 6) Control power off switch. 7) Static bypass transfer switch enable/disable selector switch.

3. Module Alarm Indicators:

a. Module shall have indicators for the following alarm items. Any one of these conditions shall turn on an audible alarm and the appropriate summary indicator. Each new alarm shall register without affecting any previous alarm. 1) Input AC power source failure. 2) Input protective device open. 3) Output protective device open. 4) Overload. 5) Overload shutdown. 6) DC overvoltage. 7) DC ground fault. 8) Low battery. 9) Battery discharge. 10) Battery protective device open. 11) Cooling fan failure. 12) Equipment overtemperature. 13) Control power failure. 14) Charger off. 15) Inverter off. 16) Emergency off. 17) UPS on battery. 18) Load on static bypass. 19) Static bypass transfer switch disabled. 20) Inverter output overvoltage, undervoltage, overfrequency, and underfrequency. 21) Bypass source overvoltage, undervoltage, overfrequency, and underfrequency. 22) Bypass source to inverter out of synchronization.


26 33 53 VARHS

2.6 BATTERY SYSTEM

A. General: A storage battery with sufficient ampere-hour rating to maintain UPS output at full capacity for the specified duration shall be provided for each UPS module.

B. Battery Type: Lead calcium.

C. Battery Construction: The battery shall be of the valve-regulated, sealed, non-gassing, recombinant type.

D. Battery Cabinet: The batteries shall be furnished in a battery cabinet matching the UPS. The battery cabinet shall be provided with smoke and high temperature alarms.

E. Battery Cables: Battery-to-battery connections shall be stranded cable with proper cable supports.

F. Battery Disconnect: Each battery cabinet or rack shall have a fused disconnect switch or circuit breaker, lockable in the “off” position, provided in a NEMA 1 enclosure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. The UPS shall be set in place, wired, and connected in accordance with the approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions.

B. In seismic areas, UPS shall be adequately anchored and braced per details on structural contract drawings to withstand the seismic forces at the location where installed.


A. An authorized representative of the UPS manufacturer shall technically supervise and participate during all of the field adjustments and tests. Major adjustments and field tests shall be witnessed by the Resident Engineer. The manufacturer’s representative shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, and tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Perform manufacturer’s required field tests in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. In addition, include the following:





d. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method, or performing thermographic survey after energization.

e. Verify grounding connections.


g. Verify the correct operation of all alarms and indicating devices.

h. Attach a phase rotation meter to the UPS input, output, and bypass buses, and observe proper phase sequences.


26 33 53 VARHS

i. Check and test controls for proper operation.

j. Check doors for proper alignment and operation.

k. Check and test each protective device for proper mechanical and electrical operation.

2. Load Test: The UPS shall be load tested for a continuous 24 hour period by means of resistive load banks, sized for full rated output load and provided by the UPS manufacturer. The UPS shall be continuously tested at 1/2 load for 8 hours, 3/4 load for 8 hours and full load for 8 hours. If a failure occurs during the burn-in period, the tests shall be repeated. Instrument readings shall be recorded every half hour for the following:

a. Input voltage and current (all three phases, for each module).

b. Input and output frequency.

c. Battery voltage for each module.

d. Output voltage and current (all three phases, for each module).

e. Output kilowatts for each module.

f. Output voltage and current (all three phases).

g. Output kilowatts.

3. Battery Discharge and Recharge Test: With the battery fully charged, the UPS shall undergo a complete battery discharge test to full depletion followed by a full recharge. Instrument readings shall be recorded every minute during discharge for the following:

a. Battery voltage and current.

b. Output voltage and current (all three phases).

c. Output kilowatts.

d. Output voltage and current (all three phases).

e. Output kilowatts (system).

f. Output frequency.


A. After completion of acceptance checks and tests, the Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that the UPS is in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function.

3.4 ONE LINE DIAGRAM AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

A. At final inspection, an as built one line diagram shall be laminated or mounted under acrylic glass, and installed in a frame mounted near the UPS.

B. Furnish a written sequence of operation for the UPS and connected line side/load side electrical distribution equipment. The sequence of operation shall be laminated or mounted under acrylic glass, and installed in a frame mounted near the UPS.


26 33 53 VARHS

C. Deliver an additional four copies of the as-built one line diagram and sequence of operation to the Resident Engineer.

3.5 INSTRUCTION

A. Furnish the services of a factory trained technician for one 4 hour training period for instructing personnel in the maintenance and operation of the UPS, on the dates requested by the Resident Engineer.

---END---


SECTION 26 36 23 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, connection, and testing of open-transition automatic transfer switches with bypass isolation, indicated as automatic transfer switches or ATS in this section.

1.2 RELATED WORK



C. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for personal safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.

D. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduits.

E. Section 26 05 73, OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY: Short circuit and coordination study, and requirements for a coordinated electrical system.

F. Section 26 32 13, ENGINE GENERATORS: Requirements for normal and emergency power generation.

G. Section 27 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS: General communications requirements that are common to more than one section in Division 27.

H. Section 27 05 33, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS: Raceways for communications cabling.


A. QUALITY ASSURANCE

Refer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES), in Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS.

B. A factory-authorized representative shall be capable of providing emergency maintenance and repairs at the project site within 4 hours maximum of notification.

C. Automatic transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch, and annunciation control panels shall be products of the same manufacturer.

1.4 FACTORY TESTS

A. Automatic transfer switches shall be thoroughly tested at the factory to ensure that there are no electrical or mechanical defects. Tests shall be conducted per UL standards. Factory tests shall be certified, and shall include the following tests:

1. Visual inspection to verify that each ATS is as specified.

2. Mechanical test to verify that ATS sections are free of mechanical hindrances.


26 36 23 VARHS

3. Insulation resistance test to ensure electrical integrity and continuity of entire system.

4. Main switch contact resistance test.

5. Electrical tests to verify complete system electrical operation.

B. Furnish four (4) copies of certified manufacturer's factory test reports to the Resident Engineer prior to shipment of the ATS to ensure that the ATS has been successfully tested as specified.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit six copies of the following in accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS.

1. Shop Drawings:


b. Include voltage rating, continuous current rating, number of phases, withstand and closing rating, dimensions, weights, mounting details, conduit entry provisions, front view, side view, equipment and device arrangement, elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams, factory relay settings, and accessories.

c. For automatic transfer switches that are networked together to a common means of annunciation and/or control, submit interconnection diagrams as well as site and building plans, showing connections for normal and emergency sources of power, load, control and annunciation components, and interconnecting communications paths. Equipment locations on the diagrams and plans shall match the site, building, and room designations on the drawings.

d. Complete nameplate data, including manufacturer's name and catalog number.

e. A copy of the markings that are to appear on the automatic transfer switches when installed.

2. Manuals:


1) Schematic signal and control diagrams, with all terminals identified, matching terminal identification in the automatic transfer switches.

2) Include information for testing, repair, troubleshooting, assembly, disassembly, and factory recommended/required periodic maintenance procedures and frequency.



1) Include complete "As Installed" diagrams that indicate all pieces of equipment and their interconnecting wiring.

2) Include complete diagrams of the internal wiring for each piece of equipment, including "As Installed" revisions of the diagrams.


26 36 23 VARHS

3) The wiring diagrams shall identify the terminals to facilitate installation, maintenance, operation, and testing.

3. Certifications:

a. When submitting the shop drawings, submit a certified test report from a recognized independent testing laboratory that a representative sample has passed UL 1008 prototype testing.

b. Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit the following.

1) Certification by the manufacturer that the ATS conform to the requirements of the drawings and specifications.

2) Certification by the Contractor that transfer switches have been properly installed, adjusted, and tested.



B. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

446-95 .............................................Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Industrial and Commercial ApplicationsC37.90.1-02 Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus

C62.41.1-02 .....................................Guide on the Surges Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits

C62.41.2-02 .....................................Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits





ICS 6-06 ..........................................Enclosures

ICS 4-10 ..........................................Application Guideline for Terminal Blocks

MG 1-11 ..........................................Motors and Generators


70–11 ...............................................National Electrical Code (NEC)


110-10 .............................................Emergency and Standby Power Systems


26 36 23 VARHS

F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):


508-99 .............................................Industrial Control Equipment

891-07 .............................................Switchboards

1008-07 ...........................................Transfer Switch Equipment

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Automatic transfer switches shall comply with UL, NEMA, NEC, ANSI, IEEE, and NFPA, and have the following features:

1. Automatic transfer switches shall be open transition switches, 4- pole, draw-out construction, electrically operated, mechanically held open contact type, without integral overcurrent protection. Automatic transfer switches utilizing automatic or non-automatic molded case circuit breakers, insulated case circuit breakers, or power circuit breakers as switching mechanisms are not acceptable.

2. Automatic transfer switches shall be completely factory-assembled and wired such that only external circuit connections are required in the field.

3. Each automatic transfer switch shall be equipped with an integral bypass/isolation switch.

4. Ratings:

a. Phases, voltage, continuous current, poles, and withstand and closing ratings shall be as shown on the drawings.

b. Transfer switches are to be rated for continuous duty at specified continuous current rating on 60Hz systems.

c. Maximum automatic transfer switch rating: 800 A.

5. Markings:

a. Markings shall be in accordance with UL 1008.

6. Tests:

a. Automatic transfer switches shall be tested in accordance with UL 1008. The contacts of the transfer switch shall not weld during the performance of withstand and closing tests when used with the upstream overcurrent device and available fault current specified.

7. Surge Withstand Test:

a. Automatic transfer switches utilizing solid-state devices in sensing, relaying, operating, or communication equipment or circuits shall comply with IEEE C37.90.1.


26 36 23 VARHS

8. Housing:

a. Enclose automatic transfer switches in wall- or floor-mounted steel cabinets, with metal gauge not less than No. 14, in accordance with UL 508, or in a switchboard assembly in accordance with UL 891, as shown on the drawings.

b. Enclosure shall be constructed so that personnel are protected from energized bypass-isolation components during automatic transfer switch maintenance.

c. Automatic transfer switch components shall be removable without disconnecting external source or load power conductors.

d. Finish: Cabinets shall be given a phosphate treatment, painted with rust-inhibiting primer, and finish-painted with the manufacturer's standard enamel or lacquer finish.

e. Viewing Ports: Provide viewing ports so that contacts may be inspected without disassembly.

9. Operating Mechanism:

a. Actuated by an electrical operator.

b. Electrically and mechanically interlocked so that the main contact cannot be closed simultaneously in either normal and emergency position.

c. Normal and emergency main contacts shall be mechanically locked in position by the operating linkage upon completion of transfer. Release of the locking mechanism shall be possible only by normal operating action.

d. Contact transfer time shall not exceed six cycles.

e. Operating mechanism components and mechanical interlocks shall be insulated or grounded.

10. Contacts:

a. Main contacts: Silver alloy.

b. Neutral contacts: Silver alloy, with same current rating as phase contacts.

c. Current carrying capacity of arcing contacts shall not be used in the determination of the automatic transfer switch rating, and shall be separate from the main contacts.

d. Main and arcing contacts shall be visible for inspection with cabinet door open and barrier covers removed.

11. Manual Operator:

a. Capable of operation by one person in either direction under no load.

12. Replaceable Parts:

a. Include the main and arcing contacts individually or as units, as well as relays, and control devices.

b. Automatic transfer switch contacts and accessories shall be replaceable from the front without removing the switch from the cabinet and without removing main conductors.


26 36 23 VARHS

13. Sensing Features:

a. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100% of nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98% of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90% and dropout at 85%.

b. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second.

c. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to the engine-generator. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100% of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90%. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100% of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95%.

d. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and factory set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.

e. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure.

f. Switch-Position Indication: Indicate source to which load is connected.

g. Source-Available Indication: Supervise sources via transfer switch normal- and emergency-source sensing circuits.

h. Normal Power Indication: Indicate "Normal Source Available."

i. Emergency Power Indication: Indicate "Emergency Source Available."

j. Transfer Override Control: Overrides automatic retransfer control so that automatic transfer switch shall remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source. Control panel shall indicate override status.

k. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed and one isolated and normally open; rated 5 A at 30 V DC minimum.

l. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to 15 minutes, and factory set for 5 minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

m. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Programmable exerciser starts engine-generator(s) and transfers load to them from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers and shuts down engine-generator(s) after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory settings shall be for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-minute cool-down period.

14. Controls:

a. Controls shall provide indication of switch status and be equipped with alarm diagnostics.

b. Controls shall control operation of the automatic transfer switches.

15. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label either by color-code or by numbered/lettered wire markers. Labels shall match those on the shop drawings.

16. Annunciation, Control, and Programming Interface Components: Devices for communicating with remote programming devices, annunciators, or control panels shall have open-protocol communication capability matched with remote device.


26 36 23 VARHS

2.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

A. The specified voltage decrease in one or more phases of the normal power source shall initiate the transfer sequence. The automatic transfer switch shall start the engine-generator(s) after a specified time delay to permit override of momentary dips in the normal power source.

B. The automatic transfer switch shall transfer the load from normal to emergency source when the frequency and voltage of the engine-generator(s) have attained the specified percent of rated value.

C. Engine Start: A voltage decrease, at any automatic transfer switch, in one or more phases of the normal power source to less than the specified value of normal shall start the engine-generator(s) after a specified time delay.

D. Transfer to Emergency System Loads: Automatic transfer switches for Emergency System loads shall transfer their loads from normal to emergency source when frequency and voltage of the engine-generator(s) have attained the specified percent of rated value. Only those switches with deficient normal source voltage shall transfer.

E. Transfer to Equipment Branch Loads: Automatic transfer switches for Equipment Branch loads shall transfer their loads to the engine-generator on a time-delayed, staggered basis, after the Emergency System switches have transferred. Only those switches with deficient normal source voltage shall transfer.

F. Retransfer to Normal (All Loads): Automatic transfer switches shall retransfer the load from emergency to normal source upon restoration of normal supply in all phases to the specified percent or more of normal voltage, and after a specified time delay. Should the emergency source fail during this time, the automatic transfer switches shall immediately transfer to the normal source whenever it becomes available. After restoring to normal source, the engine-generator(s) shall continue to run unloaded for a specified interval before shut-down.

2.3 BYPASS-ISOLATION SWITCH

A. Provide each automatic transfer switch with two-way bypass-isolation manual type switch. The bypass-isolation switch shall permit load by-pass to either normal or emergency power source and complete isolation of the automatic transfer switch, independent of transfer switch position. Bypass and isolation shall be possible under all conditions including when the automatic transfer switch is removed from service.

B. Operation: The bypass-isolation switch shall have provisions for operation by one person through the movement of a maximum of two handles at a common dead front panel in no more than 15 seconds. Provide a lock, which must energize to unlock the bypass switch, to prevent bypassing to a dead source. Provide means to prevent simultaneous connection between normal and emergency sources.

1. Bypass to normal (or emergency): Operation of bypass handle shall allow direct connection of the load to the normal (or emergency) source, without load interruption or by using a break-before-make design, or provide separate load interrupter contacts to momentarily interrupt the load.

a. Ensure continuity of auxiliary circuits necessary for proper operation of the system.

b. A red indicating lamp shall light when the automatic transfer switch is bypassed.

c. Bypassing source to source: If the power source is lost while in the bypass position, bypass to the alternate source shall be achievable without re-energization of the automatic transfer switch service and load connections.

2. Isolation: Operation of the isolating handle shall isolate all live power conductors to the automatic transfer switch without interruption of the load.


26 36 23 VARHS

a. Interlocking: Provide interlocking as part of the bypass- isolation switch to eliminate personnel-controlled sequence of operation, and to prevent operation to the isolation position until the bypass function has been completed.

b. Padlocking: Include provisions to padlock the isolating handle in the isolated position.

c. Visual verification: The isolation blades shall be visible in the isolated position.

3. Testing: It shall be possible to test (normal electrical operation) the automatic transfer switch and engine–generator(s) with the isolation contacts closed and the load bypassed without interruption of power to the load.

C. Ratings: The electrical capabilities and ratings of the bypass-isolation switch shall be compatible with those of the associated automatic transfer switch, including any required additional withstand tests.

2.4 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM

A. Remote annunciator panel shall annunciate conditions for indicated automatic transfer switches. Annunciation shall include the following:

1. Sources available, as defined by actual pickup and dropout settings of automatic transfer switch controls.

2. Switch position.

3. Switch in test mode.

4. Failure of communication link.

B. Remote annunciator panel shall be visual and audible type with LED display panel, audible signal, and silencing switch.

1. Panel shall indicate each automatic transfer switch monitored, the location of automatic transfer switch, and the identity of load it serves.

2. Mounting: Steel cabinet, flush or surface mounted, as shown on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install automatic transfer switches in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Anchor automatic transfer switches with rustproof bolts, nuts, and washers not less than 12 mm (1/2 inch) diameter, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and as shown on drawings.


A. An authorized representative of the automatic transfer switch manufacturer shall technically supervise and participate during all of the field adjustments and tests. Major adjustments and field tests shall be witnessed by the Resident Engineer. The manufacturer’s representative shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted and tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Perform manufacturer’s required field tests in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. In addition, include the following:


26 36 23 VARHS




c. Confirm correct application of manufacturer's recommended lubricants.

d. Verify appropriate anchorage, required area clearances, and correct alignment.

e. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method, or performing thermographic survey after energization.

f. Verify grounding connections.

g. Verify ratings of sensors.

h. Vacuum-clean enclosure interior. Clean enclosure exterior.

i. Exercise all active components.

j. Verify that manual transfer warning signs are properly placed.

k. Verify the correct operation of all sensing devices, alarms, and indicating devices.


a. Perform insulation-resistance tests.

b. After energizing circuits, demonstrate the interlocking sequence and operational function for each automatic transfer switch at least three times.

1) Test bypass-isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer switch operations.

2) Power failure of normal source shall be simulated by opening upstream protective device. This test shall be performed a minimum of five times.

3) Power failure of emergency source with normal source available shall be simulated by opening upstream protective device for emergency source. This test shall be performed a minimum of five times.

4) Low phase-to-ground voltage shall be simulated for each phase of normal source.

5) Operation and settings shall be verified for specified automatic transfer switch operational feature, such as override time delay, transfer time delay, return time delay, engine shutdown time delay, exerciser, auxiliary contacts, and supplemental features.

6) Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings.

7) Verify that bypass and isolation functions perform correctly, including the physical removal of the automatic transfer switch while in bypass mode.

C. The automatic transfer switch settings shall be verified in the field by an authorized representative of the manufacturer.


26 36 23 VARHS


A. Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, the Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that the automatic transfer switches are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function.

3.4 INSTRUCTION

A. Furnish the services of a factory-trained technician for one 4-hour training period for instructing personnel in the maintenance and operation of the automatic transfer switches, on the dates requested by the Resident Engineer.

---END---


SECTION 26 51 00

INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of the interior lighting systems. The terms “lighting fixture,” “fixture,” and “luminaire” are used interchangeably.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01 74 19, CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT: Disposal of lamps.


C. Section 26 05 19, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: Low-voltage conductors.

D. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground fault currents.

E. Section 26 27 26, WIRING DEVICES: Wiring devices used for control of the lighting systems.



1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings:

a. Submit the following information for each type of lighting fixture designated on the LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE, arranged in order of lighting fixture designation.

b. Material and construction details, include information on housing and optics system.

c. Physical dimensions and description.

d. Wiring schematic and connection diagram.

e. Installation details.

f. Energy efficiency data.

g. Photometric data based on laboratory tests complying with IES Lighting Measurements testing and calculation guides.

h. Lamp data including lumen output (initial and mean), color rendition index (CRI), rated life (hours), and color temperature (degrees Kelvin).


26 51 00 VARHS

i. Ballast data including ballast type, starting method, ambient temperature, ballast factor, sound rating, system watts, and total harmonic distortion (THD).

j. For LED lighting fixtures, submit US DOE LED Lighting Facts label, and IES L70 rated life.

2. Manuals:

a. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete maintenance and operating manuals, including technical data sheets, wiring diagrams, and information for ordering replacement parts.



a. Certification by the Contractor that the interior lighting systems have been properly installed and tested.




C78.1-91 ..........................................Fluorescent Lamps - Rapid-Start Types - Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics

C78.376-01 ......................................Chromaticity of Fluorescent Lamps

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

C635-07 ...........................................Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings

D. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):

40 CFR 261 .....................................Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste

E. Federal Communications Commission (FCC):

CFR Title 47, Part 15 ......................Radio Frequency Devices

CFR Title 47, Part 18 ......................Industrial, Scientific, and Medical Equipment

F. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES):

LM-79-08 ........................................Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products

LM-80-08 ........................................Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources

LM-82-12 ........................................Characterization of LED Light Engines and LED Lamps for Electrical and Photometric Properties as a Function of Temperature


26 51 00 VARHS

G. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

C62.41-91 ........................................Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits

H. International Code Council (ICC):


I. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):


101-12 .............................................Life Safety Code

J. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):

C82.1-04 ..........................................Lamp Ballasts – Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

C82.2-02 ..........................................Method of Measurement of Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

C82.4-02 ..........................................Lamp Ballasts - Ballasts for High-Intensity Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium (LPS) Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type)

C82.11-11 ........................................Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

LL-9-09 ...........................................Dimming of T8 Fluorescent Lighting Systems

SSL-1-10 .........................................Electronic Drivers for LED Devices, Arrays, or Systems

K. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

496-08 .............................................Lampholders

542-0599 .........................................Fluorescent Lamp Starters

844-12 .............................................Luminaires for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations

924-12 .............................................Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment

935-01 .............................................Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts

1029-94 ...........................................High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts

1029A-06................ .........................Ignitors and Related Auxiliaries for HID Lamp Ballasts

1598-08 ...........................................Luminaires

1574-04................. ...........................Track Lighting Systems

2108-04................ .............................Low-Voltage Lighting Systems

8750-09................ ............................Light Emitting Diode (LED) Light Sources for Use in Lighting Products


26 51 00 VARHS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Shall be in accordance with NFPA, UL, as shown on drawings, and as specified.

B. Sheet Metal:

1. Shall be formed to prevent warping and sagging. Housing, trim and lens frame shall be true, straight (unless intentionally curved), and parallel to each other as designed.

2. Wireways and fittings shall be free of burrs and sharp edges, and shall accommodate internal and branch circuit wiring without damage to the wiring.

3. When installed, any exposed fixture housing surface, trim frame, door frame, and lens frame shall be free of light leaks.

4. Hinged door frames shall operate smoothly without binding. Latches shall function easily by finger action without the use of tools.

C. Ballasts and lamps shall be serviceable while the fixture is in its normally installed position. Ballasts shall not be mounted to removable reflectors or wireway covers unless so specified.

D. Lamp Sockets:

1. Fluorescent: Single slot entry type, requiring a one-quarter turn of the lamp after insertion. Lampholder contacts shall be the biting edge type.

2. Compact Fluorescent: 4-pin.

3. High Intensity Discharge (HID): Porcelain.

E. Recessed fixtures mounted in an insulated ceiling shall be listed for use in insulated ceilings.

F. Mechanical Safety: Lighting fixture closures (lens doors, trim frame, hinged housings, etc.) shall be retained in a secure manner by captive screws, chains, aircraft cable, captive hinges, or fasteners such that they cannot be accidentally dislodged during normal operation or routine maintenance.

G. Metal Finishes:

1. The manufacturer shall apply standard finish (unless otherwise specified) over a corrosion-resistant primer, after cleaning to free the metal surfaces of rust, grease, dirt and other deposits. Edges of pre-finished sheet metal exposed during forming, stamping or shearing processes shall be finished in a similar corrosion resistant manner to match the adjacent surface(s). Fixture finish shall be free of stains or evidence of rusting, blistering, or flaking, and shall be applied after fabrication.

2. Interior light reflecting finishes shall be white with not less than 85 percent reflectances, except where otherwise shown on the drawing.

3. Exterior finishes shall be as shown on the drawings.

H. Lighting fixtures shall have a specific means for grounding metallic wireways and housings to an equipment grounding conductor.

I. Light Transmitting Components for Fluorescent Fixtures:

1. Shall be 100 percent virgin acrylic.


26 51 00 VARHS

2. Flat lens panels shall have not less than 3 mm (1/8 inch) of average thickness.

3. Unless otherwise specified, lenses, reflectors, diffusers, and louvers shall be retained firmly in a metal frame by clips or clamping ring in such a manner as to allow expansion and contraction without distortion or cracking.

J. Lighting fixtures in hazardous areas shall be suitable for installation in Class and Division areas as defined in NFPA 70.

K. Compact fluorescent fixtures shall be manufactured specifically for compact fluorescent lamps with ballast integral to the fixture. Assemblies designed to retrofit incandescent fixtures are prohibited except when specifically indicated for renovation of existing fixtures.

2.2 BALLASTS

A. Linear Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: Multi-voltage (120 – 277V), electronic programmed-start type, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated. Ballasts shall include the following features:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit (T5 lamps only).

2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.

3. Sound Rating: Class A.

4. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): 10 percent or less.

5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.

6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.

7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.

8. Ballast Factor: 0.87 or higher unless otherwise indicated.

9. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.

10. EMR/RFI Interference: Comply with CFR Title 47 Part 18 for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment.

11. To facilitate multi-level lamp switching, lamps within fixture shall be wired with the outermost lamp at both sides of the fixture on the same ballast, the next inward pair on another ballast and so on to the innermost lamp (or pair of lamps). Within a given room, each switch shall uniformly control the same corresponding lamp (or lamp pairs) in all fixture units that are being controlled.

12. Where three-lamp fixtures are indicated, unless switching arrangements dictate otherwise, utilize a common two-lamp ballast to operate the center lamp in pairs of adjacent units that are mounted in a continuous row. The ballast fixture and slave-lamp fixture shall be factory wired with leads or plug devices to facilitate this circuiting. Individually mounted fixtures and the odd fixture in a row shall utilize a single-lamp ballast for operation of the center lamp.

13. Dimming ballasts shall be as per above, except dimmable from 100% to 5% of rated lamp lumens. Dimming ballasts shall be fully compatible with the dimming controls.

B. Compact Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: Multi-voltage (120 – 277V), electronic programmed rapid-start type, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated. Ballasts shall include the following features:


26 51 00 VARHS

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.

2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.




6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.


8. Ballast Factor: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated.


10. Interference: Comply with CFR Title 47 Part 18 for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment.

C. Ballasts for HID fixtures: Multi-tap voltage (120 – 480V) electromagnetic ballast for high intensity discharge lamps. Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type.

2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F (Minus 30 deg C) for single-lamp ballasts.

3. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F (40 deg C).

4. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life.

5. Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models designed to minimize audible fixture noise.

D. Electronic ballast for HID metal-halide lamps shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

1. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 20 deg F (Minus 29 deg C) for single-lamp ballasts.

2. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 130 deg F (54 deg C).

3. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.






9. Interference: Comply with CFR Title 47 Part 18 for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment.


26 51 00 VARHS

10. Protection: Resettable thermal.

2.3 LAMPS

A. Linear and U-shaped T5 and T8 Fluorescent Lamps:

1. Except as indicated below, lamps shall be low-mercury energy saving type, have a color temperature between 3500° and 4100°K, a Color Rendering Index (CRI) equal or greater than 80, average rated life equal to or greater than 24,000 hours when used with an instant start ballast and 30,000 hours when used with a programmed or rapid start ballast (based on 3 hour starts), and be suitable for use with dimming ballasts, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Over the beds in Intensive Care, Coronary Care, Recovery, Life Support, and Observation and Treatment areas; Electromyographic, Autopsy (Necropsy), Surgery, and certain dental rooms (Examination, Oral Hygiene, Oral Surgery, Recovery, Labs, Treatment, and X-Ray) use color corrected lamps having a CRI of 85 or above and a correlated color temperature between 5000 and 6000°K, as shown on the drawings.

b. Other areas as shown on the drawings.

2. Lamps shall comply with EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leachate Procedure (TCLP) requirements.

B. Compact Fluorescent Lamps:

1. T4, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500°K, average rated life equal to or greater than 12,000 hours (based on 3 hour starts), and suitable for use with dimming ballasts, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Lamps shall comply with EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leachate Procedure (TCLP) requirements.

C. High Intensity Discharge Lamps:

1. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65 (minimum), color temperature 4000°K, and average rated life of 15,000 hours (based on 10 hour starts).

2. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 4000°K, and average rated life of 12,000 hours (based on 10 hour starts).

2.4 LED EXIT LIGHT FIXTURES

A. Exit light fixtures shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA and UL.

B. Housing and door shall be die-cast aluminum.

C. For general purpose exit light fixtures, door frame shall be hinged, with latch. For vandal-resistant exit light fixtures, door frame shall be secured with tamper-resistant screws.

D. Finish shall be satin or fine-grain brushed aluminum.

E. There shall be no radioactive material used in the fixtures.

F. Fixtures:

1. Inscription panels shall be cast or stamped aluminum a minimum of 2.25 mm (0.090 inch) thick, stenciled with 150 mm (6 inch) high letters, baked with red color stable plastic or fiberglass. Lamps shall be luminous Light Emitting Diodes (LED) mounted in center of letters on red color stable plastic or fiberglass.


26 51 00 VARHS

2. Double-Faced Fixtures: Provide double-faced fixtures where required or as shown on drawings.

3. Directional Arrows: Provide directional arrows as part of the inscription panel where required or as shown on drawings. Directional arrows shall be the "chevron-type" of similar size and width as the letters and meet the requirements of NFPA 101.

G. Voltage: Multi-voltage (120 – 277V).

2.5 LED LIGHT FIXTURES

A. General:

1. LED light fixtures shall be in accordance with IES, NFPA, UL, as shown on the drawings, and as specified.

2. LED light fixtures shall be Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)-compliant.

3. LED drivers shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

a. Minimum efficiency: 85% at full load.

b. Minimum Operating Ambient Temperature: -20˚ C. (-4˚ F.)

c. Input Voltage: 120 - 277V (±10%) at 60 Hz.

d. Integral short circuit, open circuit, and overload protection.

e. Power Factor: ≥ 0.95.

f. Total Harmonic Distortion: ≤ 20%.

g. Comply with FCC 47 CFR Part 15.

4. LED modules shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

a. Comply with IES LM-79 and LM-80 requirements.

b. Minimum CRI 80 and color temperature 3000˚ K unless otherwise specified in LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE.

c. Minimum Rated Life: 50,000 hours per IES L70.

d. No audible noise allowed

e. Light output lumens as indicated in the LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE.

B. LED Downlights:

1. Housing, LED driver, and LED module shall be products of the same manufacturer.

C. LED Troffers:

1. LED drivers, modules, and reflector shall be accessible, serviceable, and replaceable from below the ceiling.

2. Housing, LED driver, and LED module shall be products of the same manufacturer.


26 51 00 VARHS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer's instructions, and as shown on the drawings or specified.

B. Align, mount, and level the lighting fixtures uniformly.

C. Wall-mounted fixtures shall be attached to the studs in the walls, or to a 20 gauge metal backing plate that is attached to the studs in the walls. Lighting fixtures shall not be attached directly to gypsum board.

D. Lighting Fixture Supports:

1. Shall provide support for all of the fixtures. Supports may be anchored to channels of the ceiling construction, to the structural slab or to structural members within a partition, or above a suspended ceiling.

2. Shall maintain the fixture positions after cleaning and relamping.

3. Shall support the lighting fixtures without causing the ceiling or partition to deflect.

4. Single or double pendant mounted lighting fixtures:

a. Each stem shall be supported by an approved outlet box mounted swivel joint and canopy which holds the stem captive and provides spring load (or approved equivalent) dampening of fixture oscillations. Outlet box shall be supported vertically from the building structure.

E. Furnish and install the new lamps as specified for all lighting fixtures installed under this project, and for all existing lighting fixtures reused under this project.

F. The electrical and ceiling trades shall coordinate to ascertain that approved lighting fixtures are furnished in the proper sizes and installed with the proper devices (hangers, clips, trim frames, flanges, etc.), to match the ceiling system being installed.

G. Bond lighting fixtures to the grounding system as specified in Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

H. At completion of project, replace all defective components of the lighting fixtures at no cost to the Government.

I. Dispose of lamps per requirements of Section 01 74 19, CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT, and Section 02 41 00, SELECTIVE DEMOLITION.


A. Perform the following:

1. Visual Inspection:

a. Verify proper operation by operating the lighting controls.

b. Visually inspect for damage to fixtures, lenses, reflectors, diffusers, and louvers. Clean fixtures, lenses, reflectors, diffusers, and louvers that have accumulated dust, dirt, or fingerprints during construction.


26 51 00 VARHS


a. Exercise dimming components of the lighting fixtures over full range of dimming capability by operating the control devices(s) in the presence of the Resident Engineer. Observe for visually detectable flicker over full dimming range, and replace defective components at no cost to the Government.

b. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Government. Burn-in period to be 40 hours minimum, unless specifically recommended otherwise by the lamp manufacturer. Burn-in dimmed fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps for at least 100 hours at full voltage, unless specifically recommended otherwise by the lamp manufacturer. Replace any lamps and ballasts which fail during burn-in.


A. Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, the Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that the lighting systems are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function.

---END---


SECTION 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of exterior luminaires, poles, and supports.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES: Finishes for exterior light poles and luminaires.

B. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General electrical requirements and items that is common to more than one section of Division 26.

C. Section 26 05 19, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Low voltage power and lighting wiring.

D. Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.

E. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduits, fittings, and boxes for raceway systems.

F. Section 26 05 41, UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION: Underground handholes and conduits.

G. Section 26 09 23, LIGHTING CONTROLS: Controls for exterior lighting.


A. Refer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS, in Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Clearly present sufficient information to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.

2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting, details, materials, required clearances, terminations, wiring and connection diagrams, photometric data, ballasts, poles, luminaires, lamps, and accessories.

C. Manuals: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of operating and maintenance manuals to the Resident Engineer. Include technical data sheets, wiring and connection diagrams, and information for ordering replacement lamps, ballasts, and parts.

D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the Resident Engineer:


26 56 00 VARHS

1. Certification by the manufacturer that the materials are in accordance with the drawings and specifications.

2. Certification by the contractor that the complete installation has been properly installed and tested.



B. Aluminum Association Inc. (AA):

AAH35.1-06 ....................................Alloy and Temper Designation Systems for Aluminum

C. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

LTS-5-09 ........................................Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals

D. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

318-05 ............................................Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete

E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

C81.61-09 .......................................Electrical Lamp Bases – Specifications for Bases (Caps) for Electric Lamps

F. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

A123/A123M-09 ............................Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

A153/A153M-09 .............................Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

B108-03a-08 ...................................Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings

C1089-06 ........................................Spun Cast Prestressed Concrete Poles

G. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA):

AC 70/7460-IK-07 ..........................Obstruction Lighting and Marking

AC 150/5345-43F-06 ......................Obstruction Lighting Equipment

H. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)

HB-9-00 ...........................................Lighting Handbook

RP-8-05 ...........................................Roadway Lighting

RP-20-98 .........................................Lighting for Parking Facilities

RP-33-99 .........................................Lighting for Exterior Environments


26 56 00 VARHS

LM-5-96 ..........................................Photometric Measurements of Area and Sports Lighting Installations

LM-50-99 ........................................Photometric Measurements of Roadway Lighting Installations

LM-52-99 ........................................Photometric Measurements of Roadway Sign Installations

LM-64-01 ........................................Photometric Measurements of Parking Areas

LM-72-97 ........................................Directional Positioning of Photometric Data

LM-79-08 ........................................Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric Measurements of

Solid-Sate Lighting Products

LM-80-08 ........................................Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources

Model Lighting Ordinance June, 2011

I. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

C78.41-06 ........................................Electric Lamps – Guidelines for Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps

C78.42-07 .......................................Electric Lamps – Guidelines for High-Pressure Sodium Lamps

C78.43-07 .......................................Electric Lamps – Single-Ended Metal-Halide Lamps

C78.1381-98 ....................................Electric Lamps – 70-Watt M85 Double-Ended Metal-Halide Lamps

C82.4-02 .........................................Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium

Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type)

C136.3-05 .......................................For Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment – Luminaire Attachments

C136.17-05 ....................................Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment – Enclosed Side-Mounted

Luminaires for Horizontal-Burning High-Intensity-Discharge Lamps –

Mechanical Interchangeability of Refractors

ICS 2-00 (R2005) ...........................Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts

ICS 6-93 (R2006) ...........................Enclosures

SSL-1-10 .........................................Electronic Drivers for LED Devices, Arrays, or Systems

J. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

70-08 ..............................................National Electrical Code (NEC)

K. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):


26 56 00 VARHS

496-08 ............................................Lampholders

773-95 .............................................Plug-In, Locking Type Photocontrols for Use with Area Lighting

773A-06 ..........................................Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control

1029-94 ...........................................High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts

1598-08 ..........................................Luminaires

8750-08................. ...........................Light Emitting Diode (LED) Light Sources for Use in Lighting Products

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Provide manufacturer’s standard provisions for protecting pole finishes during transport, storage, and installation. Do not store poles on ground. Store poles so they are at least 12 in [305 mm] above ground level and growing vegetation. Do not remove factory-applied pole wrappings until just before installing pole.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and equipment shall be in accordance with NEC, UL, ANSI, and as shown on the drawings and specified.

B. All exterior fixtures to meet the criteria as stated in the IES Model Lighting Ordinance Table C for Backlight, Uplift and Glare

2.2 POLES

A. General:

1. Poles shall be as shown on the drawings, and as specified. Finish shall be as specified on the drawings.

2. The pole and arm assembly shall be designed for wind loading of 100 mph [161 km/hr], with an additional 30% gust factor, supporting luminaire(s) and accessories such as shields, banner arms, and banners that have the effective projected areas indicated. The effective projected area of the pole shall be applied at the height of the pole base, as shown on the drawings.

3. Poles shall be anchor-bolt type designed for use with underground supply conductors. Poles shall have handhole having a minimum clear opening of 2.5 x 5 in [65 x 125 mm]. Handhole covers shall be secured by stainless steel captive screws.

4. Provide a steel-grounding stud opposite handhole openings, designed to prevent electrolysis when used with copper wire.

5. Provide a base cover that matches the pole in material and color to conceal the mounting hardware pole-base welds and anchor bolts.

6. Hardware and Accessories: All necessary hardware and specified accessories shall be the product of the pole manufacturer.


26 56 00 VARHS

7. Provide manufacturer's standard finish, as scheduled on the drawings. Where indicated on drawings, provide finishes as indicated in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.


26 56 00 VARHS

B. Types:

1. Aluminum: Provide round aluminum poles manufactured of corrosion-resistant AA AAH35.1 aluminum alloys conforming to AASHTO LTS-4. Poles shall be seamless extruded or spun seamless type.

2. Steel: Provide round steel poles having minimum 11-gauge steel with minimum yield/strength of 48,000 psi and factory finish.

3. Concrete: Provide round concrete poles conforming to ASTM C1089 with integral cast bases. Poles shall have hollow core suitable as a raceway.

2.3 FOUNDATION FOR POLES

A. Foundations shall be cast-in-place concrete, having 3000 psi minimum 28-day compressive strength.

B. Foundations shall support the effective projected area of the specified pole, arm(s), luminaire(s), and accessories, such as shields, banner arms, and banners, under wind conditions previously specified in this section.

C. Place concrete in spirally-wrapped treated paper forms for round foundations, and construct forms for square foundations.

D. Rub-finish and round all above-grade concrete edges to approximately 0.25 in [6 mm] radius.

E. Anchor bolt assemblies and reinforcing of concrete foundations shall be as shown on the drawings. Anchor bolts shall be in a welded cage or properly positioned by the tiewire to stirrups.

F. Prior to concrete pour, install electrode per Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

2.4 LUMINAIRES

A. Per UL 1598 and NEMA C136.17. Luminaires shall be weatherproof, heavy duty, outdoor types designed for efficient light utilization, adequate dissipation of lamp and ballast heat, and safe cleaning and relamping.

B. Light distribution pattern types shall be as shown on the drawings.

C. Incorporate ballasts in the luminaire housing, except where otherwise shown on the drawings.

D. Lenses shall be frame-mounted, heat-resistant, borosilicate glass, with prismatic refractors, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Attach the frame to the luminaire housing by hinges or chain. Use heat and aging-resistant, resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

E. Lamp sockets for high intensity discharge (H.I.D) fixture shall have locking-type porcelain enclosures in conformance to the applicable requirements of ANSI C81.61 and UL 496.

F. Pre-wire internal components to terminal strips at the factory.

G. Bracket-mounted luminaires shall have leveling provisions and clamp-type adjustable slip-fitters with locking screws.

H. Materials shall be rustproof. Latches and fittings shall be non-ferrous metal.


26 56 00 VARHS

I. Provide manufacturer's standard finish, as scheduled on the drawings. Where indicated on drawings, match finish process and color of pole or support materials. Where indicated on drawings, provide finishes as indicated in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.

J. Luminaires shall carry factory labels, showing complete, specific lamp and ballast information.

2.5 LAMPS

A. Install the proper lamps in every luminaire installed.

B. Lamps shall be general-service, outdoor lighting types.

C. High-Pressure Sodium (HPS) Lamps: NEMA C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), wattage as indicated. Lamps shall have minimum average rated life of 24,000 hours.

D. Low-Pressure Sodium (LPS) Lamps: NEMA C78.43.

E. Metal-Halide Lamps: NEMA C78.43 or NEMA C78.1381.

F. LED sources shall meet the following requirements:

1. Operating temperature rating shall be between -40˚ F [-40˚ C] and 120˚ F [50˚ C].

2. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): as scheduled on Drawings.

3. Color Rendering Index (CRI): greater than 65.

4. The manufacturer shall have performed JEDEC (Joint Electron Devices Engineering Council) reliability tests on the LEDs as follows: High Temperature Operating Life (HTOL), Room Temperature Operating Life (RTOL), Low Temperature Operating Life (LTOL), Powered Temperature Cycle (PTMCL), Non-Operating Thermal Shock (TMSK), Mechanical Shock Variable Vibration Frequency, and Solder Heat Resistance (SHR).

5. Mercury vapor lamps shall not be used.

2.6 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE BALLASTS

A. Per NEMA C82.4 and UL 1029. Ballasts shall be encapsulated single-lamp, copper-wound, constant-wattage autotransformer type, designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected, and capable of open-circuit operation without reducing lamp life.

B. Ballasts shall have individual overcurrent protection in each ungrounded supply conductor.

C. Ballast shall have an allowable line voltage variation of +/-10%, with a maximum 20% lamp wattage regulation spread.

D. Power factor shall be not less than 90%.

E. Ballast shall have a minimum starting temperature of -22˚ F [-30˚ C], and a normal ambient operating temperature of 104˚ F [40˚ C].

F. Lamp current crest factor shall be 1.8 or less, in accordance with lamp manufacturer recommendations.


26 56 00 VARHS

2.7 METAL HALIDE CORE AND COIL BALLASTS

A. Shall be pulse start, linear reactor type for 277 volt luminaires and constant-wattage autotransformer (CWA) type for other voltage luminaires (if not otherwise specified).

B. Ballasts shall have individual overcurrent protection in each ungrounded supply conductor.

C. Power factor shall be not less than 90%.

D. Ballast shall have an allowable line voltage variation of +/-5% for linear reactor type and 10% for CWA, with a maximum 20% lamp wattage regulation spread.

E. Ballast shall have a minimum starting temperature of –40˚ F [-40˚ C].

F. Lamp current crest factor shall be 1.8 or less, in accordance with lamp manufacturer recommendations.

2.8 METAL HALIDE ELECTRONIC BALLASTS

A. Ballast shall be low-frequency electronic type, and shall operate pulse start and ceramic metal halide lamps at a frequency of 90 to 200 Hz square wave.

B. Ballast shall be labeled Type ‘1’ outdoor, suitable for recessed use, Class ‘P’.

C. Ballast shall have auto-resetting thermal protector to shut off ballast when operating temperatures reach unacceptable levels.

D. Ballast shall have an end of lamp life detection and shut-down circuit.

E. Lamp current crest factor shall be 1.5 or less.

F. Ballasts shall comply with FCC Title 47 CFR Part 18 Non-consumer RFI/EMI Standards.

G. Ballast shall have a minimum ballast factor of 1.0.

H. Input current THD shall not exceed 20% for the primary lamp.

I. Ballasts shall have ANSI C62.41, category ‘A’ transient protection.

J. Ballasts shall have power factor greater than 90%.

K. Ballast shall have a Class ‘A’ sound rating.

2.9 LED DRIVERS

A. LED drivers shall meet the following requirements:

1. Drivers shall have a minimum efficiency of 85%.

2. Starting Temperature: -40˚ F [-40˚ C].

3. Input Voltage: 120 to 480 (±10%) V.

4. Power Supplies: Class I or II output.

5. Surge Protection: The system must survive 250 repetitive strikes of “C Low” (C Low: 6kV/1.2 x 50 μs, 10kA/8 x 20 μs) waveforms at 1-minute intervals with less than 10% degradation in clamping


26 56 00 VARHS

voltage. “C Low” waveforms are as defined in IEEE/ASNI C62.41.2-2002, Scenario 1 Location Category C.

6. Power Factor (PF): ≥ 0.90.

7. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): ≤ 20%.

8. Comply with FCC Title 47 CFR Part 18 Non-consumer RFI/EMI Standards.

9. Drivers shall be reduction of hazardous substances (ROHS)-compliant.

2.10 EXISTING LIGHTING SYSTEMS

A. For modifications or additions to existing lighting systems, the new components shall be compatible with the existing systems.

B. New poles and luminaires shall have approximately the same configurations and dimensions as the existing poles and luminaires, except where otherwise shown on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install lighting in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Pole Foundations:

1. Excavate only as necessary to provide sufficient working clearance for installation of forms and proper use of tamper to the full depth of the excavation. Prevent surface water from flowing into the excavation. Thoroughly compact backfill with compacting arranged to prevent pressure between conductor, jacket, or sheath, and the end of conduit.

2. Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by the pole manufacturer.

3. Install poles as necessary to provide a permanent vertical position with the bracket arm in proper position for luminaire location.

4. After the poles have been installed, shimmed, and plumbed, grout the spaces between the pole bases and the concrete base with non-shrink concrete grout material. Provide a plastic or copper tube, of not less than 0.375 in [9 mm] inside diameter through the grout, tight to the top of the concrete base to prevent moisture weeping from the interior of the pole.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming.

3.2 GROUNDING

A. Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment, including metal poles, luminaires, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures, as specified in Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. Where copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide specially-treated or lined connectors suitable and listed for this purpose.

3.3 ACCPTANCE CHECKS AND TESTS

A. Verify operation after installing luminaires and energizing circuits.


26 56 00 VARHS

---END---


SECTION 27 05 11 REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section, Requirements for Communications Installations, applies to all sections of Division 27.

B. Furnish and install communications cabling, systems, equipment, and accessories in accordance with the specifications and drawings. Capacities and ratings of transformers, cable, and other items and arrangements for the specified items are shown on drawings.


A. References to industry and trade association standards and codes are minimum installation requirement standards.

B. Drawings and other specification sections shall govern in those instances where requirements are greater than those specified in the above standards.


A. Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer shall regularly and presently produce, as one of the manufacturer's principal products, the equipment and material specified for this project, and shall have manufactured the item for at least three years.


1. Manufacturer's product shall have been in satisfactory operation, on three installations of similar size and type as this project, for approximately three years.

2. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a list of installations where the products have been in operation before approval.

C. Service Qualifications: There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or trained by the manufacturer which will render satisfactory service to this installation within four hours of receipt of notification that service is needed. Submit name and address of service organizations.


A. Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items, for which replacement parts shall be available.

B. When more than one unit of the same class of equipment is required, such units shall be the product of a single manufacturer.




27 05 11 VARHS



4. Constituent parts which are similar shall be the product of a single manufacturer.

D. Factory wiring shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on all wiring diagrams.


1. The Government shall have the option of witnessing factory tests. The contractor shall notify the VA through the Resident Engineer a minimum of 15 working days prior to the manufacturers making the factory tests.

2. Four copies of certified test reports containing all test data shall be furnished to the Resident Engineer prior to final inspection and not more than 90 days after completion of the tests.

3. When equipment fails to meet factory test and re-inspection is required, the contractor shall be liable for all additional expenses, including expenses of the Government.

1.5 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

Where variations from the contract requirements are requested in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS and Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, the connecting work and related components shall include, but not be limited to additions or changes to branch circuits, circuit protective devices, conduits, wire, feeders, controls, panels and installation methods.

1.6 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION

A. Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical damage, dirt, moisture, cold and rain:

1. During installation, enclosures, equipment, controls, controllers, circuit protective devices, and other like items, shall be protected against entry of foreign matter; and be vacuum cleaned both inside and outside before testing and operating and repainting if required.

2. Damaged equipment shall be, as determined by the Resident Engineer, placed in first class operating condition or be returned to the source of supply for repair or replacement.


4. Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be refinished with the same quality of paint and workmanship as used by the manufacturer so repaired areas are not obvious.


A. Job site safety and worker safety is the responsibility of the contractor.

B. For work on existing stations, arrange, phase and perform work to assure communications service for other buildings at all times. Refer to Article OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS under Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.


27 05 11 VARHS

C. New work shall be installed and connected to existing work neatly and carefully. Disturbed or damaged work shall be replaced or repaired to its prior conditions, as required by Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

D. Coordinate location of equipment and pathways with other trades to minimize interferences. See the GENERAL CONDITIONS.



B. Inaccessible Equipment:

1. Where the Government determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, the equipment shall be removed and reinstalled as directed at no additional cost to the Government.

2. "Conveniently accessible" is defined as being capable of being reached without the use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as, but not limited to, motors, pumps, belt guards, transformers, piping, ductwork, conduit and raceways.


A. Install an identification sign which clearly indicates information required for use and maintenance of equipment.

B. Nameplates shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core with engraved lettering, a minimum of 6 mm (1/4 inch) high. Secure nameplates with screws. Nameplates that are furnished by manufacturer as a standard catalog item, or where other method of identification is herein specified, are exceptions.

1.10 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.

B. The Government's approval shall be obtained for all equipment and material before delivery to the job site. Delivery, storage, or installation of equipment or material which has not had prior approval will not be permitted at the job site.

C. All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings, and other data necessary for the Government to ascertain that the proposed equipment and materials comply with specification requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for approval shall be legible and clearly identify equipment being submitted.






27 05 11 VARHS


1. Information that confirms compliance with contract requirements. Include the manufacturer's name, model or catalog numbers, catalog information, technical data sheets, shop drawings, pictures, nameplate data and test reports as required.

2. Submittals are required for all equipment anchors and supports. Submittals shall include weights, dimensions, center of gravity, standard connections, manufacturer's recommendations and behavior problems (e.g., vibration, thermal expansion,) associated with equipment or piping so that the proposed installation can be properly reviewed.

3. Elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams for communication and signal systems, control system and equipment assemblies. All terminal points and wiring shall be identified on wiring diagrams.

4. Parts list which shall include those replacement parts recommended by the equipment manufacturer, quantity of parts, current price and availability of each part.

F. Manuals: Submit in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

1. Maintenance and Operation Manuals: Submit as required for systems and equipment specified in the technical sections. Furnish four copies, bound in hardback binders, (manufacturer's standard binders) or an approved equivalent. Furnish one complete manual as specified in the technical section but in no case later than prior to performance of systems or equipment test, and furnish the remaining manuals prior to contract completion.

2. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words "MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUAL," the name and location of the system, equipment, building, name of Contractor, and contract number. Include in the manual the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing the system or equipment and the local representatives for the system or equipment.

3. Provide a "Table of Contents" and assemble the manual to conform to the table of contents, with tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.





d. Installation and maintenance instructions.

e. Safety precautions.


g. Testing methods.



27 05 11 VARHS

i. Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers. Emphasis shall be placed on the use of special tools and instruments. The list shall indicate sources of supply, recommended spare parts, and name of servicing organization.

j. Appendix; list qualified permanent servicing organizations for support of the equipment, including addresses and certified qualifications.

G. Approvals will be based on complete submission of manuals together with shop drawings.


1. A 300 mm (12 inch) length of each type and size of wire and cable along with the tag from the coils of reels from which the samples were taken.

2. Each type of conduit and pathway coupling, bushing and termination fitting.

3. Raceway and pathway hangers, clamps and supports.

4. Duct sealing compound.


Where any device or part of equipment is referred to in these specifications in the singular number (e.g., "the switch"), this reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation as shown on the drawings.

1.12 TRAINING

A. Training shall be provided in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, of Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

B. Training shall be provided for the particular equipment or system as required in each associated specification.

C. A training schedule shall be developed and submitted by the contractor and approved by the Resident Engineer at least 30 days prior to the planned training.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS– NOT USED

PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED

- - - E N D - - -


SECTION 27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies general grounding and bonding requirements of telecommunication installations for equipment operations.

B. “Grounding electrode system” refers to all electrodes required by NEC, as well as including made, supplementary, telecommunications system grounding electrodes.

C. The terms “connect” and “bond” are used interchangeably in this specification and have the same meaning.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 27 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS: General electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one section of Division 27.

B. Section 27 10 00, STRUCTURED CABLING: Low Voltage power and lighting wiring.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 27 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.

2. Include the location of system grounding electrode connections and the routing of aboveground and underground grounding electrode conductors.

C. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports of ground resistance.


1. Certification that the materials and installation is in accordance with the drawings and specifications.

2. Certification, by the Contractor, that the complete installation has been properly installed and tested.


Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.


27 05 26 VARHS

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

B1-2001 ...........................................Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire

B8-2004 ...........................................Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):

81-1983 ...........................................IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System


70-2005 ...........................................National Electrical Code (NEC)

D. Telecommunications Industry Association, (TIA)

J-STO-607-A-2002 ..........................Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications


44-2005 ..........................................Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables

83-2003 ..........................................Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

467-2004 ........................................Grounding and Bonding Equipment

486A-486B-2003 ............................Wire Connectors

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Equipment grounding conductors shall be UL 83 insulated stranded copper, except that sizes 6 mm² (10 AWG) and smaller shall be solid copper. Insulation color shall be continuous green for all equipment grounding conductors, except that wire sizes 25 mm² (4 AWG) and larger shall be permitted to be identified per NEC.

B. Bonding conductors shall be ASTM B8 bare stranded copper, except that sizes 6 mm² (10 AWG) and smaller shall be ASTM B1 solid bare copper wire.

C. Isolated Power System: Type XHHW-2 insulation with a dielectric constant of 3.5 or less.

D. Telecom System Grounding Riser Conductor: Telecommunications Grounding Riser shall be in accordance with J STO-607A. Use a minimum 50mm² (1/0 AWG) insulated stranded copper grounding conductor unless indicated otherwise.

2.2 GROUND RODS

A. Copper clad steel, 19 mm (3/4-inch) diameter by 3000 mm (10 feet) long, conforming to UL 467.

B. Quantity of rods shall be as required to obtain the specified ground resistance.


27 05 26 VARHS

2.3 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS

Components shall meet or exceed UL 467 and be clearly marked with the manufacturer, catalog number, and permitted conductor size(s).

2.4 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM GROUND BUSBARS

A. Provide solid copper busbar, pre-drilled from two-hole lug connections with a minimum thickness of 6 mm (1/4 inch) for wall and backboard mounting using standard insulators sized as follows:

1. Room Signal Grounding: 300 mm x 100 mm (12 inches x 4 inch).

2. Master Signal Ground: 600 mm x 100 mm (24 inches x 4 inch).

2.5 GROUND CONNECTIONS

A. Below Grade: Exothermic-welded type connectors.

B. Above Grade:

1. Bonding Jumpers: compression type connectors, using zinc-plated fasteners and external tooth lockwashers.

2. Ground Busbars: Two-hole compression type lugs using tin-plated copper or copper alloy bolts and nuts.

3. Rack and Cabinet Ground Bars: one-hole compression-type lugs using zinc-plated or copper alloy fasteners.

C. Cable Shields: Make ground connections to multipair communications cables with metallic shields using shield bonding connectors with screw stud connection.


Provide solid copper ground bars designed for mounting on the framework of open or cabinet-enclosed equipment racks with minimum dimensions of 4 mm thick by 19 mm wide (3/8 inch x ¾ inch).


At any equipment mounting location (e.g. backboards and hinged cover enclosures) where rack-type ground bars cannot be mounted, provide screw lug-type terminal blocks.

2.8 SPLICE CASE GROUND ACCESSORIES

Splice case grounding and bonding accessories shall be supplied by the splice case manufacturer when available. Otherwise, use 16 mm² (6 AWG) insulated ground wire with shield bonding connectors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Ground in accordance with the NEC, as shown on drawings, and as hereinafter specified.


27 05 26 VARHS


1. Secondary service neutrals: Ground at the supply side of the secondary disconnecting means and at the related transformers.


3. Isolation transformers and isolated power systems shall not be system grounded.

C. Equipment Grounding: Metallic structures (including ductwork and building steel), enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, and other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits shall be bonded and grounded.


Make grounding connections, which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible (except connections for which periodic testing access is required) by exothermic weld.

3.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

A. Bond telecommunications system grounding equipment to the electrical grounding electrode system.

B. Furnish and install all wire and hardware required to properly ground, bond and connect communications raceway, cable tray, metallic cable shields, and equipment to a ground source.

C. Ground bonding jumpers shall be continuous with no splices. Use the shortest length of bonding jumper possible.

D. Provide ground paths that are permanent and continuous with a resistance of 1 ohm or less from raceway, cable tray, and equipment connections to the building grounding electrode. The resistance across individual bonding connections shall be 10 milli ohms or less.

E. Below-Grade Grounding Connections: When making exothermic welds, wire brush or file the point of contact to a bare metal surface. Use exothermic welding cartridges and molds in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. After welds have been made and cooled, brush slag from the weld area and thoroughly cleaned the joint area. Notify the Resident Engineer prior to backfilling any ground connections.

F. Above-Grade Grounding Connections: When making bolted or screwed connections to attach bonding jumpers, remove paint to expose the entire contact surface by grinding where necessary; thoroughly clean all connector, plate and other contact surfaces; and apply an appropriate corrosion inhibitor to all surfaces before joining.

G. Bonding Jumpers:

1. Use insulated ground wire of the size and type shown on the Drawings or use a minimum of 16 mm² (6 AWG) insulated copper wire.

2. Assemble bonding jumpers using insulated ground wire terminated with compression connectors.

3. Use compression connectors of proper size for conductors specified. Use connector manufacturer’s compression tool.


27 05 26 VARHS

H. Bonding Jumper Fasteners:

1. Conduit: Fasten bonding jumpers using screw lugs on grounding bushings or conduit strut clamps, or the clamp pads on push-type conduit fasteners. When screw lug connection to a conduit strut clamp is not possible, fasten the plain end of a bonding jumper wire by slipping the plain end under the conduit strut clamp pad; tighten the clamp screw firmly. Where appropriate, use zinc-plated external tooth lockwashers.

2. Wireway and Cable Tray: Fasten bonding jumpers using zinc-plated bolts, external tooth lockwashers, and nuts. Install protective cover, e.g., zinc-plated acorn nuts on any bolts extending into wireway or cable tray to prevent cable damage.

3. Ground Plates and Busbars: Fasten bonding jumpers using two-hole compression lugs. Use tin-plated copper or copper alloy bolts, external tooth lockwashers, and nuts.

4. Unistrut and Raised Floor Stringers: Fasten bonding jumpers using zinc-plated, self-drill screws and external tooth lockwashers.

3.4 COMMUNICATION ROOM GROUNDING

A. Telecommunications Ground Busbars:

1. Provide communications room telecommunications ground busbar hardware at 950 mm (18 inches) at locations indicated on the Drawings.

2. Connect the telecommunications room ground busbars to other room grounding busbars as indicated on the Grounding Riser diagram.

B. Telephone-Type Cable Rack Systems: aluminum pan installed on telephone-type cable rack serves as the primary ground conductor within the communications room. Make ground connections by installing the following bonding jumpers:

1. Install a 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding between the telecommunications ground busbar and the nearest access to the aluminum pan installed on the cable rack.

2. Use 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumpers across aluminum pan junctions.

C. Self-Supporting and Cabinet-Mounted Equipment Rack Ground Bars:

1. When ground bars are provided at the rear of lineup of bolted together equipment racks, bond the copper ground bars together using solid copper splice plates supplied by the ground bar manufacturer.

2. Bond together nonadjacent ground bars on equipment racks and cabinets with 16 mm² (6 AWG) insulated copper wire bonding jumpers attached at each end with compression-type connectors and mounting bolts.

3. Provide a 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumper between the rack and/or cabinet ground busbar and the aluminum pan of an overhead cable tray or the raised floor stringer as appropriate.

D. Backboards: Provide a screw lug-type terminal block or drilled and tapped copper strip near the top of backboards used for communications cross-connect systems. Connect backboard ground terminals to the aluminum pan in the telephone-type cable tray using an insulated 16 mm² (16 AWG) bonding jumper.


27 05 26 VARHS

E. Other Communication Room Ground Systems: Ground all metallic conduit, wireways, and other metallic equipment located away from equipment racks or cabinets to the cable tray pan or the telecommunications ground busbar, whichever is closer, using insulated 16 mm² (6 AWG) ground wire bonding jumpers.

3.5 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE GROUNDING

A. Bond all metallic cable sheaths in multipair communications cables together at each splicing and/or terminating location to provide 100 percent metallic sheath continuity throughout the communications distribution system.

1. At terminal points, install a cable shield bonding connector provide a screw stud connection for ground wire. Use a bonding jumper to connect the cable shield connector to an appropriate ground source like the rack or cabinet ground bar.

2. Bond all metallic cable shields together within splice closures using cable shield bonding connectors or the splice case grounding and bonding accessories provided by the splice case manufacturer. When an external ground connection is provided as part of splice closure, connect to an approved ground source and all other metallic components and equipment at that location.

3.6 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS:

A. Bond the metallic structures of one cable tray in each tray run following the same path to provide 100 percent electrical continuity throughout this cable tray systems as follows:

1. Splice plates provided by the cable tray manufacturer can be used for providing a ground bonding connection between cable tray sections when the resistance across a bolted connection is 10 milliohms or less. The Subcontractor shall verify this loss by testing across one slice plate connection in the presence of the Contractor.

2. Install a 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumper across each cable tray splice or junction where splice plates cannot be used.

3. When cable tray terminations to cable rack, install 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumper between cable tray and cable rank pan.

3.7 COMMUNCIATIONS RACEWAY GROUNDING

A. Conduit: Use insulated 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumpers to ground metallic conduit at each end and to bond at all intermediate metallic enclosures.

B. Wireway: use insulated 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumpers to ground or bond metallic wireway at each end at all intermediate metallic enclosures and across all section junctions.

C. Cable Tray Systems: Use insulated 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumpers to ground cable tray to column-mounted building ground plates (pads) at each end and approximately every 16 meters (50 feet).


A. Grounding system resistance to ground shall not exceed 5 ohms. Make necessary modifications or additions to the grounding electrode system for compliance without additional cost to the Government. Final tests shall assure that this requirement is met.

B. Resistance of the grounding electrode system shall be measured using a four-terminal fall-of-potential method as defined in IEEE 81. Ground resistance measurements shall be made before the electrical distribution system is energized and shall be made in normally dry conditions not less than 48 hours after


27 05 26 VARHS

the last rainfall. Resistance measurements of separate grounding electrode systems shall be made before the systems are bonded together below grade. The combined resistance of separate systems may be used to meet the required resistance, but the specified number of electrodes must still be provided.

C. Services at power company interface points shall comply with the power company ground resistance requirements.

D. Below-grade connections shall be visually inspected by the Resident Engineer prior to backfilling. The Contractor shall notify the Resident Engineer 24 hours before the connections are ready for inspection.


A. Drive each rod vertically in the earth, not less than 3000 mm (10 feet) in depth.

B. Where permanently concealed ground connections are required, make the connections by the exothermic process to form solid metal joints. Make accessible ground connections with mechanical pressure type ground connectors.

C. Where rock prevents the driving of vertical ground rods, install angled ground rods or grounding electrodes in horizontal trenches to achieve the specified resistance.

- - - E N D - - -


27 05 33 VARHS


SECTION 27 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of conduit, fittings, and boxes to form complete, coordinated, raceway systems. Raceways are required for all communications cabling unless shown or specified otherwise.

B. Definitions: The term conduit, as used in this specification, shall mean any or all of the raceway types specified.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Bedding of conduits: Section 31 20 11, EARTHWORK.

B. Mounting board for communication closets: Section 06 10 00, ROUGH CARPENTRY.

C. Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of fire rated construction: Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

D. Fabrications for the deflection of water away from the building envelope at penetrations: Section 07 60 00, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL.

E. Sealing around conduit penetrations through the building envelope to prevent moisture migration into the building: Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.

F. Identification and painting of conduit and other devices: Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.

G. General electrical requirements and items that is common to more than one section of Division 27: Section 27 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS.

H. Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents: Section 27 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

In accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, furnish the following:

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Size and location of panels and pull boxes

2. Layout of required conduit penetrations through structural elements.

3. The specific item proposed and its area of application shall be identified on the catalog cuts.

B. Certification: Prior to final inspection, deliver to the Resident Engineer four copies of the certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications and has been properly installed.

27 05 33 VARHS



A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.



C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1-03 .................................................Flexible Metal Conduit

5-01 .................................................Surface Metal Raceway and Fittings

6-03 .................................................Rigid Metal Conduit


360-03 .............................................Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit


514A-01 ..........................................Metallic Outlet Boxes

514B-02 ...........................................Fittings for Cable and Conduit

514C-05 ...........................................Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes and Covers

651-02 .............................................Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit

651A-03 ..........................................Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit

797-03 .............................................Electrical Metallic Tubing

1242-00 ...........................................Intermediate Metal Conduit


TC-3-04 ...........................................PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing

FB1-03 ............................................Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing and Cable

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

A. Conduit Size: In accordance with the NEC, but not less than 13 mm (1/2 inch) unless otherwise shown. Where permitted by the NEC, 13 mm (1/2 inch) flexible conduit may be used for tap connections to recessed lighting fixtures.

27 05 33 VARHS


B. Conduit:

1. Rigid galvanized steel: Shall Conform to UL 6, ANSI C80.1.

2. Rigid intermediate steel conduit (IMC): Shall Conform to UL 1242, ANSI C80.6.

3. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Shall Conform to UL 797, ANSI C80.3. Maximum size not to exceed 105 mm (4 inch) and shall be permitted only with cable rated 600 volts or less.

4. Flexible galvanized steel conduit: Shall Conform to UL 1.

5. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit: Shall Conform to UL 360.

6. Direct burial plastic conduit: Shall conform to UL 651 and UL 651A, heavy wall PVC or high density polyethylene (PE).

7. Surface metal raceway: Shall Conform to UL 5.

C. Conduit Fittings:

1. Rigid steel and IMC conduit fittings:

a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and ANSI/ NEMA FB1.

b. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows: Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable. Integral retractable type IMC couplings are also acceptable.

c. Locknuts: Bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of an enclosure.

d. Bushings: Metallic insulating type, consisting of an insulating insert molded or locked into the metallic body of the fitting. Bushings made entirely of metal or nonmetallic material are not permitted.

e. Erickson (union-type) and set screw type couplings: Approved for use in concrete are permitted for use to complete a conduit run where conduit is installed in concrete. Use set screws of case hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in conduit wall for positive ground. Tightening of set screws with pliers is prohibited.

f. Sealing fittings: Threaded cast iron type. Use continuous drain type sealing fittings to prevent passage of water vapor. In concealed work, install fittings in flush steel boxes with blank cover plates having the same finishes as that of other electrical plates in the room.

2. Electrical metallic tubing fittings:



c. Couplings and connectors: Concrete tight and rain tight, with connectors having insulated throats. Use gland and ring compression type couplings and connectors for conduit sizes 50 mm (2 inches) and smaller. Use set screw type couplings with four set screws each for conduit sizes over 50 mm (2 inches). Use set screws of case-hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in wall of conduit for positive grounding.

d. Indent type connectors or couplings are prohibited.

27 05 33 VARHS


e. Die-cast or pressure-cast zinc-alloy fittings or fittings made of "pot metal" are prohibited.

3. Flexible steel conduit fittings:

a. Conform to UL 514B. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.

b. Clamp type, with insulated throat.

4. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings:



c. Fittings must incorporate a threaded grounding cone, a steel or plastic compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Connectors shall have insulated throats.

5. Direct burial plastic conduit fittings:

a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514C and NEMA TC3.

b. As recommended by the conduit manufacturer.

6. Surface metal raceway fittings: As recommended by the raceway manufacturer.

7. Expansion and deflection couplings:

a. Conform to UL 467 and UL 514B.

b. Accommodate, 19 mm (0.75 inch) deflection, expansion, or contraction in any direction, and allow 30 degree angular deflections.

c. Include internal flexible metal braid sized to guarantee conduit ground continuity and fault currents in accordance with UL 467, and the NEC code tables for ground conductors.

d. Jacket: Flexible, corrosion-resistant, watertight, moisture and heat resistant molded rubber material with stainless steel jacket clamps.

D. Conduit Supports:

1. Parts and hardware: Zinc-coat or provide equivalent corrosion protection.

2. Individual Conduit Hangers: Designed for the purpose, having a pre-assembled closure bolt and nut, and provisions for receiving a hanger rod.

3. Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers: Not less than 38 mm by 38 mm (1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch), 12 gage steel, cold formed, lipped channels; with not less than 9 mm (3/8 inch) diameter steel hanger rods.

4. Solid Masonry and Concrete Anchors: Self-drilling expansion shields, or machine bolt expansion.

E. Outlet, Junction, and Pull Boxes:

1. UL-50 and UL-514A.

2. Cast metal where required by the NEC or shown, and equipped with rustproof boxes.

27 05 33 VARHS


3. Sheet metal boxes: Galvanized steel, except where otherwise shown.

4. Flush mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with raised covers so that front face of raised cover is flush with the wall. Surface mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with surface style flat or raised covers.

F. Wireways: Equip with hinged covers, except where removable covers are shown.

G. Warning Tape: Standard, 4-Mil polyethylene 76 mm (3 inch) wide tape detectable type, red with black letters, and imprinted with “CAUTION BURIED COMMUNICATIONS CABLE BELOW”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PENETRATIONS

A. Cutting or Holes:

1. Locate holes in advance where they are proposed in the structural sections such as ribs or beams. Obtain the approval of the Resident Engineer prior to drilling through structural sections.

2. Cut holes through concrete and masonry in new and existing structures with a diamond core drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, hand or manual hammer type drills are not allowed, except where permitted by the Resident Engineer as required by limited working space.

B. Fire Stop: Where conduits, wireways, and other communications raceways pass through fire partitions, fire walls, smoke partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases as specified in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING, with rock wool fiber or silicone foam sealant only. Completely fill and seal clearances between raceways and openings with the fire stop material.

C. Waterproofing: At floor, exterior wall, and roof conduit penetrations, completely seal clearances around the conduit and make watertight as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.


A. Install conduit as follows:

1. In complete runs before pulling in cables or wires.

2. Flattened, dented, or deformed conduit is not permitted. Remove and replace the damaged conduits with new undamaged material.

3. Assure conduit installation does not encroach into the ceiling height head room, walkways, or doorways.

4. Cut square with a hacksaw, ream, remove burrs, and draw up tight.

5. Mechanically continuous.

6. Independently support conduit at 8’0” on center. Do not use other supports i.e., (suspended ceilings, suspended ceiling supporting members, lighting fixtures, conduits, mechanical piping, or mechanical ducts).

27 05 33 VARHS


7. Support within 300 mm (1 foot) of changes of direction, and within 300 mm (1 foot) of each enclosure to which connected.

8. Close ends of empty conduit with plugs or caps at the rough-in stage to prevent entry of debris, until wires are pulled in.

9. Conduit installations under fume and vent hoods are prohibited.

10. Secure conduits to cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes and outlet boxes with bonding type locknuts. For rigid and IMC conduit installations, provide a locknut on the inside of the enclosure, made up wrench tight. Do not make conduit connections to junction box covers.

11. Flashing of penetrations of the roof membrane is specified in Section 07 60 00, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL.

12. Do not use aluminum conduits in wet locations.

13. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein, all conduits shall be installed concealed within finished walls, floors and ceilings.

B. Conduit Bends:

1. Make bends with standard conduit bending machines.

2. Conduit hickey may be used for slight offsets, and for straightening stubbed out conduits.

3. Bending of conduits with a pipe tee or vise is prohibited.

C. Layout and Homeruns:

1. Deviations: Make only where necessary to avoid interferences and only after drawings showing the proposed deviations have been submitted approved by the Resident Engineer.

3.3 CONCEALED WORK INSTALLATION

A. In Concrete:

1. Conduit: Rigid steel, IMC or EMT. Do not install EMT in concrete slabs that are in contact with soil, gravel or vapor barriers.

2. Align and run conduit in direct lines.

3. Install conduit through concrete beams only when the following occurs:

a. Where shown on the structural drawings.

b. As approved by the Resident Engineer prior to construction, and after submittal of drawing showing location, size, and position of each penetration.

4. Installation of conduit in concrete that is less than 75 mm (3 inches) thick is prohibited.

a. Conduit outside diameter larger than 1/3 of the slab thickness is prohibited.

b. Space between conduits in slabs: Approximately six conduit diameters apart, except one conduit diameter at conduit crossings.

27 05 33 VARHS


c. Install conduits approximately in the center of the slab so that there will be a minimum of 19 mm (3/4 inch) of concrete around the conduits.

5. Make couplings and connections watertight. Use thread compounds that are UL approved conductive type to insure low resistance ground continuity through the conduits. Tightening set screws with pliers is prohibited.

B. Furred or Suspended Ceilings and in Walls:

1. Conduit for conductors above 600 volts:

a. Rigid steel or rigid aluminum.

b. Aluminum conduit mixed indiscriminately with other types in the same system is prohibited.

2. Conduit for conductors 600 volts and below:

a. Rigid steel, IMC, or EMT. Different type conduits mixed indiscriminately in the same system is prohibited.

3. Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.

4. Connect recessed lighting fixtures to conduit runs with maximum 1800 mm (six feet) of flexible metal conduit extending from a junction box to the fixture.

5. Tightening set screws with pliers is prohibited.

3.4 EXPOSED WORK INSTALLATION

A. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, exposed conduit is only permitted in mechanical and electrical rooms.

B. Conduit for conductors above 600 volts:

1. Rigid steel

C. Conduit for Conductors 600 volts and below:

1. Rigid steel, IMC, or EMT. Different type of conduits mixed indiscriminately in the system is prohibited.

D. Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.

E. Install horizontal runs close to the ceiling or beams and secure with conduit straps.

F. Support horizontal or vertical runs at not over 2400 mm (eight foot) intervals.

G. Surface metal raceways: Use only where shown.

H. Painting:

1. Paint exposed conduit as specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.

2. Paint all conduits containing cables rated over 600 volts safety orange. Refer to Section 09 91 00, PAINTING for preparation, paint type, and exact color. In addition, paint legends, using 50 mm (two

27 05 33 VARHS


inch) high black numerals and letters, showing the cable voltage rating. Provide legends where conduits pass through walls and floors and at maximum 6000 mm (20 foot) intervals in between.

3.5 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Conduits 75 mm (3 inches) and larger, that are secured to the building structure on opposite sides of a building expansion joint, require expansion and deflection couplings. Install the couplings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Provide conduits smaller than 75 mm (3 inches) with junction boxes on both sides of the expansion joint. Connect conduits to junction boxes with sufficient slack of flexible conduit to produce 125 mm (5 inch) vertical drop midway between the ends. Flexible conduit shall have a copper green ground bonding jumper installed. In lieu of this flexible conduit, expansion and deflection couplings as specified above for 375 mm (15 inches) and larger conduits are acceptable.

C. Install expansion and deflection couplings where shown.

3.6 CONDUIT SUPPORTS, INSTALLATION

A. Safe working load shall not exceed 1/4 of proof test load of fastening devices.

B. Use pipe straps or individual conduit hangers for supporting individual conduits. Maximum distance between supports is 2.5 m (8 foot) on center.

C. Support multiple conduit runs with trapeze hangers. Use trapeze hangers that are designed to support a load equal to or greater than the sum of the weights of the conduits, wires, hanger itself, and 90 kg (200 pounds). Attach each conduit with U-bolts or other approved fasteners.

D. Support conduit independently of junction boxes, pull boxes, fixtures, suspended ceiling T-bars, angle supports, and similar items.

E. Fasteners and Supports in Solid Masonry and Concrete:

1. New Construction: Use steel or malleable iron concrete inserts set in place prior to placing the concrete.

2. Existing Construction:

a. Steel expansion anchors not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) bolt size and not less than 28 mm (1-1/8 inch) embedment.

b. Power set fasteners not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) diameter with depth of penetration not less than 75 mm (3 inches).

c. Use vibration and shock resistant anchors and fasteners for attaching to concrete ceilings.

F. Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts are permitted.

G. Bolts supported only by plaster or gypsum wallboard are not acceptable.

H. Metal Structures: Use machine screw fasteners or other devices specifically designed and approved for the application.

I. Attachment by wood plugs, rawl plug, plastic, lead or soft metal anchors, or wood blocking and bolts supported only by plaster is prohibited.

27 05 33 VARHS


J. Chain, wire, or perforated strap shall not be used to support or fasten conduit.

K. Spring steel type supports or fasteners are prohibited for all uses except: Horizontal and vertical supports/fasteners within walls.

L. Vertical Supports: Vertical conduit runs shall have riser clamps and supports in accordance with the NEC and as shown. Provide supports for cable and wire with fittings that include internal wedges and retaining collars.

3.7 BOX INSTALLATION

A. Boxes for Concealed Conduits:

1. Flush mounted.

2. Provide raised covers for boxes to suit the wall or ceiling, construction and finish.

B. In addition to boxes shown, install additional boxes where needed to prevent damage to cables and wires during pulling in operations.

C. Remove only knockouts as required and plug unused openings. Use threaded plugs for cast metal boxes and snap-in metal covers for sheet metal boxes.

D. Stencil or install phenolic nameplates on covers of the boxes identified on riser diagrams; for example "SIG-FA JB No. 1".

3.8 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CONDUIT

A. Install the communication raceway system as shown on drawings.

B. Minimum conduit size of 19 mm (3/4 inch), but not less than the size shown on the drawings.

C. All conduit ends shall be equipped with insulated bushings.

D. All 100 mm (four inch) conduits within buildings shall include pull boxes after every two 90 degree bends. Size boxes per the NEC.

E. Vertical conduits/sleeves through closets floors shall terminate not less than 75 mm (3 inches) below the floor and not less than 75 mm (3 inches) below the ceiling of the floor below.

F. Terminate conduit runs to/from a backboard in a closet or interstitial space at the top or bottom of the backboard. Conduits shall enter communication closets next to the wall and be flush with the backboard.

G. Were drilling is necessary for vertical conduits, locate holes so as not to affect structural sections such as ribs or beams.

H. All empty conduits located in communication closets or on backboards shall be sealed with a standard non-hardening duct seal compound to prevent the entrance of moisture and gases and to meet fire resistance requirements.

27 05 33 VARHS


I. Conduit runs shall contain no more than four quarter turns (90 degree bends) between pull boxes/backboards. Minimum radius of communication conduit bends shall be as follows (special long radius):

Sizes of Conduit

Trade Size

Radius of Conduit Bends

mm, Inches

3/4 150 (6)

1 230 (9)

1-1/4 350 (14)

1-1/2 430 (17)

2 525 (21)

2-1/2 635 (25)

3 775 (31)

3-1/2 900 (36)

4 1125 (45)

J. Furnish and install 19 mm (3/4 inch) thick fire retardant plywood specified in Section 06 10 00, ROUGH CARPENTRY on the wall of communication closets where shown on drawings . Mount the plywood with the bottom edge 300 mm (one foot) above the finished floor.

K. Furnish and pull wire in all empty conduits. (Sleeves through floor are exceptions).

- - - E N D - - -

27 08 00 VARHS


SECTION 27 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION



1.2 RELATED WORK




1.3 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for commissioning the Facility communications systems, related subsystems and related equipment. This Section supplements the general requirements specified in Section 01 91 00 General Commissioning Requirements.


1.4 DEFINITIONS




B. The Facility exterior closure systems commissioning will include the systems listed in Section 01 91 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS:

1.6 SUBMITTALS


27 08 00 VARHS




PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Commissioning of Communications systems will require inspection of individual elements of the communications system construction throughout the construction period. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Commissioning Agent in accordance with Section 01 91 00 and the Commissioning plan to schedule communications systems inspections as required to support the Commissioning Process.





3.4 SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING:


27 08 00 VARHS




----- END -----

27 10 00 VARHS


SECTION 27 10 00 STRUCTURED CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of the structured cabling system to provide a comprehensive telecommunications infrastructure.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Excavation and backfill for cables that are installed in conduit: Section 31 20 11, EARTHWORK.

B. Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of time rated construction: Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

C. General electrical requirements that are common to more than one section in Division 27: Section 27 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS.

D. Conduits for cables and wiring: Section 27 05 33, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

E. Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents: Section 27 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, furnish the following:

1. Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Showing each cable type and rating.

2. Certificates: Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver to the Resident Engineer four copies of the certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications and has been properly installed.


A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are reference in the text by the basic designation only.


D2301-04 ........................................Standard Specification for Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape

C. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):

A-A-59544-00 .................................Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation)

27 10 00 VARHS







467-01 .............................................Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment

486A-01 ..........................................Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors


486D-02 ..........................................Insulated Wire Connector Systems for Underground Use or in Damp or Wet Locations


493-01 .............................................Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch Circuit Cable


1479-03 ...........................................Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTROL WIRING

A. Unless otherwise specified in other sections of these specifications, control wiring shall be as specified for power and lighting wiring, except the minimum size shall be not less than No. 14 AWG.

B. Control wiring shall be large enough so that the voltage drop under inrush conditions does not adversely affect operation of the controls.

2.2 COMMUNICATION AND SIGNAL WIRING

A. Shall conform to the recommendations of the manufacturers of the communication and signal systems; however, not less than what is shown.

B. Wiring shown is for typical systems. Provide wiring as required for the systems being furnished.

C. Multi conductor cables shall have the conductors color coded.


A. Suitable for the wire insulation and conduit it is used with, and shall not harden or become adhesive.

B. Shall not be used on wire for isolated type electrical power systems.

27 10 00 VARHS



A. The tape shall consist of a flexible, conformable fabric of organic composition coated one side with flame retardant elastomer.

B. The tape shall be self extinguishing and shall not support combustion. It shall be arc-proof and fireproof.

C. The tape shall not deteriorate when subjected to water, gases, salt water, sewage, or fungus and be resistant to sunlight and ultraviolet light.

D. The finished application shall withstand a 200-ampere arc for not less than 30 seconds.

E. Securing tape: Glass cloth electrical tape not less than 0.18 mm (7 mils) thick, and 19 mm (3/4 inch) wide.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Install all wiring in raceway systems.

B. Seal cable and wire entering a building from underground, between the wire and conduit where the cable exits the conduit, with a non-hardening approved compound.

C. Wire Pulling:

1. Provide installation equipment that will prevent the cutting or abrasion of insulation during pulling of cables.

2. Use ropes made of nonmetallic material for pulling feeders.

3. Attach pulling lines for feeders by means of either woven basket grips or pulling eyes attached directly to the conductors, as approved by the Resident Engineer.

4. Pull in multiple cables together in a single conduit.

3.2 INSTALLATION IN MANHOLES

A. Install and support cables in manholes on the steel racks with porcelain or equal insulators. Train the cables around the manhole walls, but do not bend to a radius less than six times the overall cable diameter.

3.3 CONTROL, COMMUNICATION AND SIGNAL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Unless otherwise specified in other sections, install wiring and connect to equipment/devices to perform the required functions as shown and specified.

B. Except where otherwise required, install a separate power supply circuit for each system so that malfunctions in any system will not affect other systems.

C. Where separate power supply circuits are not shown, connect the systems to the nearest panelboards of suitable voltages, which are intended to supply such systems and have suitable spare circuit breakers or space for installation.

27 10 00 VARHS


D. Install a red warning indicator on the handle of the branch circuit breaker for the power supply circuit for each system to prevent accidental de energizing of the systems.

E. System voltages shall be 120 volts or lower where shown on the drawings or as required by the NEC.

3.4 CONTROL, COMMUNICATION AND SIGNAL SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION


B. Identifying numbers and letters on the wire markers shall correspond to those on the wiring diagrams used for installing the systems.


D. In each manhole and handhole, install embossed brass tags to identify the system served and function.

3.5 EXISTING WIRING

A. Unless specifically indicated on the plans, existing wiring shall not be reused for the new installation. Only wiring that conforms to the specifications and applicable codes may be reused. If existing wiring does not meet these requirements, existing wiring may not be reused and new wires shall be installed.

- - - E N D - - -

28 05 11 VARHS


SECTION 28 05 11 REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY INSTALLATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section, Requirements for Electronic Safety and Security Installations, applies to all sections of Division 28.

B. Furnish and install electronic safety and security cabling, systems, equipment and accessories in accordance with the specifications and drawings. Capacities and ratings of, cable and other items and arrangements for the specified items are shown on drawings.


A. References to industry and trade association standards and codes are minimum installation requirement standards.

B. Drawings and other specification sections shall govern in those instances where requirements are greater than those specified in the above standards.


A. Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer shall regularly and presently produce, as one of the manufacturer's principal products, the equipment and material specified for this project, and shall have manufactured the item for at least three years.


1. Manufacturer's product shall have been in satisfactory operation, on three installations of similar size and type as this project, for approximately three years.

2. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a list of installations where the products have been in operation before approval.

C. Service Qualifications: There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or trained by the manufacturer which will render satisfactory service to this installation within eight hours of receipt of notification that service is needed. Submit name and address of service organizations.


A. Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items, for which replacement parts shall be available.

B. When more than one unit of the same class of equipment is required, such units shall be the product of a single manufacturer.




28 05 11 VARHS



4. Constituent parts which are similar shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.

D. Factory wiring shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on all wiring diagrams.


1. The Government shall have the option of witnessing factory tests. The contractor shall notify the VA through the Resident Engineer a minimum of 15 working days prior to the manufacturers making the factory tests.

2. Four copies of certified test reports containing all test data shall be furnished to the Resident Engineer prior to final inspection and not more than 90 days after completion of the tests.

3. When equipment fails to meet factory test and re-inspection is required, the contractor shall be liable for all additional expenses, including expenses of the Government.

1.5 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Where variations from the contract requirements are requested the connecting work and related components shall include, but not be limited to additions or changes to branch circuits, circuit protective devices, conduits, wire, feeders, controls, panels and installation methods.

1.6 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION

A. Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical damage, dirt, moisture, cold and rain:

1. During installation, enclosures, equipment, controls, controllers, circuit protective devices, and other like items, shall be protected against entry of foreign matter; and be vacuum cleaned both inside and outside before testing and operating and repainting if required.

2. Damaged equipment shall be, as determined by the Resident Engineer, placed in first class operating condition or be returned to the source of supply for repair or replacement.


4. Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be refinished with the same quality of paint and workmanship as used by the manufacturer so repaired areas are not obvious.


A. Job site safety and worker safety is the responsibility of the contractor.

B. For work on existing stations, arrange, phase and perform work to assure electronic safety and security service for other buildings at all times. Refer to Article OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS under Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

C. New work shall be installed and connected to existing work neatly and carefully. Disturbed or damaged work shall be replaced or repaired to its prior conditions, as required by Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

D. Coordinate location of equipment and conduit with other trades to minimize interferences.

28 05 11 VARHS




B. Inaccessible Equipment:

1. Where the Government determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, the equipment shall be removed and reinstalled as directed at no additional cost to the Government.

2. "Conveniently accessible" is defined as being capable of being reached without the use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as, but not limited to, motors, pumps, belt guards, transformers, piping, ductwork, conduit and raceways.


A. Install an identification sign which clearly indicates information required for use and maintenance of equipment.

B. Nameplates shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core with engraved lettering, a minimum of 6 mm (1/4 inch) high. Secure nameplates with screws. Nameplates that are furnished by manufacturer as a standard catalog item, or where other method of identification is herein specified, are exceptions.

1.10 SUBMITTALS


B. The Government's approval shall be obtained for all equipment and material before delivery to the job site. Delivery, storage or installation of equipment or material which has not had prior approval will not be permitted at the job site.

C. All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings and other data necessary for the Government to ascertain that the proposed equipment and materials comply with specification requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for approval shall be legible and clearly identify equipment being submitted.






1. Information that confirms compliance with contract requirements. Include the manufacturer's name, model or catalog numbers, catalog information, technical data sheets, shop drawings, pictures, nameplate data and test reports as required.

2. Submittals are required for all equipment anchors and supports. Submittals shall include weights, dimensions, center of gravity, standard connections, manufacturer's recommendations and behavior

28 05 11 VARHS


problems (e.g., vibration, thermal expansion,) associated with equipment or piping so that the proposed installation can be properly reviewed.

3. Elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams for communication and signal systems, control system and equipment assemblies. All terminal points and wiring shall be identified on wiring diagrams.

4. Parts list which shall include those replacement parts recommended by the equipment manufacturer, quantity of parts, current price and availability of each part.

F. Manuals: Submit in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

1. Maintenance and Operation Manuals: Submit as required for systems and equipment specified in the technical sections. Furnish four copies, bound in hardback binders, (manufacturer's standard binders) or an approved equivalent. Furnish one complete manual as specified in the technical section but in no case later than prior to performance of systems or equipment test, and furnish the remaining manuals prior to contract completion.

2. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words "MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUAL," the name and location of the system, equipment, building, name of Contractor, and contract number. Include in the manual the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing the system or equipment and the local representatives for the system or equipment.

3. Provide a "Table of Contents" and assemble the manual to conform to the table of contents, with tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.





d. Installation and maintenance instructions.

e. Safety precautions.


g. Testing methods.


i. Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers. Emphasis shall be placed on the use of special tools and instruments. The list shall indicate sources of supply, recommended spare parts, and name of servicing organization.

j. Appendix; list qualified permanent servicing organizations for support of the equipment, including addresses and certified qualifications.

G. Approvals will be based on complete submission of manuals together with shop drawings.

28 05 11 VARHS



1. A 300 mm (12 inch) length of each type and size of wire and cable along with the tag from the coils of reels from which the samples were taken.

2. Each type of conduit and pathway coupling, bushing and termination fitting.

3. Conduit hangers, clamps and supports.

4. Duct sealing compound.


A. Where any device or part of equipment is referred to in these specifications in the singular number (e.g., "the switch"), this reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation as shown on the drawings.

1.12 TRAINING

A. Training shall be provided in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, of Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

B. Training shall be provided for the particular equipment or system as required in each associated specification.

C. A training schedule shall be developed and submitted by the contractor and approved by the Resident Engineer at least 30 days prior to the planned training.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS– NOT USED

PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED

- - - E N D - - -

SECTION 28 05 13 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the finishing, installation, connection, testing and certification the conductors and cables required for a fully functional for electronic safety and security (ESS) system.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01 00 00 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. For General Requirements.

B. Section 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING. Requirements for firestopping application and use.

C. Section 28 05 11 – REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY INSTALLATIONS. Requirements for general requirements that are common to more than one section in Division 28.

D. Section 28 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY. Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.

E. Section 28 08 00 - COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEMS. Requirements for commissioning.

F. Section 31 20 11 - EARTHWORK. For excavation and backfill for cables that are installed in conduit.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

C. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

D. Ladder Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of two longitudinal side rails connected by individual transverse members (rungs).

E. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.

F. Open Cabling: Passing telecommunications cabling through open space (e.g., between the studs of a wall cavity).

G. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

H. Solid-Bottom or Nonventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of integral or separate longitudinal side rails, and a bottom without ventilation openings.

I. Trough or Ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of integral or separate longitudinal rails and a bottom having openings sufficient for the passage of air and using 75 percent or less of the plan area of the surface to support cables.

J. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.


28 05 13 VARHS

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Showing each cable type and rating.

2. Certificates: Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver to the Resident Engineer/COTR four copies of the certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications and diagrams for cable management system.

3. Shop Drawings: Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following:

a. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.

b. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays.

c. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure.

d. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding manufacturer's rating for tray and its support elements.

e. System labeling schedules, including electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cable and asset identification system of the software specified in Parts 2 and 3.

4. Wiring Diagrams. Show typical wiring schematics including the following:

a. Workstation outlets, jacks, and jack assemblies.

b. Patch cords.

c. Patch panels.

5. Cable Administration Drawings: As specified in Part 3 "Identification" Article.

6. Project planning documents as specified in Part 3.

7. Maintenance Data: For wire and cable to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are reference in the text by the basic designation only.


D2301-04.........................................Standard Specification for Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape


A-A-59544-08 .................................Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation)


28 05 13 VARHS






467-07 .............................................Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment

486A-03 ...........................................Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors


486D-05...........................................Insulated Wire Connector Systems for Underground Use or in Damp or Wet Locations


493-07 .............................................Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch Circuit Cable


1479-03 ...........................................Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops


A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.

1. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use optical loss test set.

2. Test optical fiber cable on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector; include the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.

3. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. General: All cabling locations shall be in conduit systems as outlined in Division 28 unless a waiver is granted in writing or an exception is noted on the construction drawings.


28 05 13 VARHS

B. Cable Trays:

1. Cable Tray Materials: Metal, suitable for indoors, and protected against corrosion by hot-dip galvanizing, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M Grade 0.55, not less than 0.002165 inch (0.055 mm) thick.

2. Basket Cable Trays: 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 2 inches (50 mm) deep. Wire mesh spacing shall not exceed 2 by 4 inches (50 by 100 mm).

C. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Conduits and Backboxes for Electrical Systems." Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.

1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 3 inches (75 mm) high, and 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) deep.

2.2 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, [fire-retardant treated,] 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches (19 by 1220 by 2440 mm). Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry".

2.3 UTP CABLE

A. Description: 100-ohm, 4-pair UTP, formed into 25-pair binder groups covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket.

1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties.

2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications.

3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, [Category 5e] [Category 6].

4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or CMG.

b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262.

c. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR, complying with UL 1666.

d. Communications, Limited Purpose: Type CMX.

e. Multipurpose: Type MP or MPG.

f. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262.

g. Multipurpose, Riser Rated: Type MPR, complying with UL 1666.

2.4 UTP CABLE HARDWARE

A. UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of the same category or higher.

B. Connecting Blocks: 110-style for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.


28 05 13 VARHS

2.5 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

A. Description: Multimode, 50/125-micrometer, 12-fiber, nonconductive, tight buffer, optical fiber cable.

1. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties.

2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications.

3. Comply with TIA/EIA-492AAAA-B for detailed specifications.

4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. General Purpose, Nonconductive: Type OFN or OFNG.

b. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262.

c. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNR, complying with UL 1666.

d. General Purpose, Conductive: Type OFC or OFCG.

e. Plenum Rated, Conductive: Type OFCP, complying with NFPA 262.

f. Riser Rated, Conductive: Type OFCR, complying with UL 1666.

5. Conductive cable shall be steel armored type.

6. Maximum Attenuation: 3.50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm.

7. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.

B. Jacket:

1. Jacket Color: Aqua for 50/125-micrometer cable.

2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA/EIA-598-B.

3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches (1000 mm).

2.6 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE

A. Cable Connecting Hardware: Meet the Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications of TIA/EIA-604-2, TIA/EIA-604-3-A, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

1. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type SC connectors. Insertion loss shall be not more than 0.75 dB.

2. Type SFF connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment packages.

2.7 COAXIAL CABLE

A. General Coaxial Cable Requirements: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer specifically for broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall have 75-ohm nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB maximum from 7 to 806 MHz.


28 05 13 VARHS

B. RG-11/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV.

1. No. 14 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor.

2. Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.

3. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 60 percent aluminum braid.

4. Jacketed with sunlight-resistant, black PVC or PE.

5. Suitable for outdoor installations in ambient temperatures ranging from minus 40 to plus 85 deg C.

C. RG59/U: NFPA 70, Type CATVR.

1. No. 20 AWG, solid, silver-plated, copper-covered steel conductor.

2. Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.

3. Triple shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 95 percent aluminum braid; covered by aluminum foil with grounding strip.

4. Color-coded PVC jacket.

D. RG-6/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV or CM.

1. No. 16 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.

2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 60 percent aluminum braid.

3. Jacketed with black PVC or PE.

4. Suitable for indoor installations.

E. RG59/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV.

1. No. 20 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.

2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 40 percent aluminum braid.

3. PVC jacket.

F. RG59/U (Plenum Rated): NFPA 70, Type CMP.

1. No. 20 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; foam fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.

2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 65 percent aluminum braid.

3. Copolymer jacket.

G. NFPA and UL compliance, listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 1655, and with NFPA 70 "Radio and Television Equipment" and "Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution" Articles. Types are as follows:

1. CATV Cable: Type CATV.

2. CATV Plenum Rated: Type CATVP, complying with NFPA 262.


28 05 13 VARHS

3. CATV Riser Rated: Type CATVR, complying with UL 1666.

4. CATV Limited Rating: Type CATVX.

2.8 COAXIAL CABLE HARDWARE

A. Coaxial-Cable Connectors: Type BNC, 75 ohms.

2.9 RS-232 CABLE

A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM.

1. Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors.

2. Polypropylene insulation.

3. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage.

4. PVC jacket.

5. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned copper drain wire.

6. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.

B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.


2. Plastic insulation.

3. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage.

4. Plastic jacket.

5. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned copper drain wire.

6. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.

2.10 RS-485 CABLE

A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM.

1. Paired, 2 pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors.

2. PVC insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. PVC jacket.


B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.



28 05 13 VARHS

2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket.

5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.

2.11 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE

A. Paired Lock Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.

1. 1 pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned copper conductors.

2. PVC insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. PVC jacket.


B. Plenum-Rated, Paired Lock Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.


2. PVC insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. PVC jacket.

5. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.

C. Paired Lock Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.


2. PVC insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. PVC jacket.


D. Plenum-Rated, Paired Lock Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.


2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. Plastic jacket.


28 05 13 VARHS

5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.

2.12 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway complying with UL 83.

B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway complying with UL 83.

C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or TF, complying with UL 83.

2.13 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE

A. General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760.

B. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, not less than No. 18 AWG].

1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70, Article 760, Classification CI, for power-limited fire alarm signal service Type FPL. NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL 1424 and UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

C. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation.

1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum.

2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.

3. Multiconductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70, Type MC, copper conductors, Type TFN/THHN conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor[ with outer jacket] with red identifier stripe, NTRL listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

2.14 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

2.15 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

D. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

E. Factory sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results.

F. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.


28 05 13 VARHS


A. Suitable for the wire insulation and conduit it is used with, and shall not harden or become adhesive.

B. Shall not be used on wire for isolated type electrical power systems.


A. The tape shall consist of a flexible, conformable fabric of organic composition coated one side with flame-retardant elastomer.

B. The tape shall be self-extinguishing and shall not support combustion. It shall be arc-proof and fireproof.

C. The tape shall not deteriorate when subjected to water, gases, salt water, sewage, or fungus and be resistant to sunlight and ultraviolet light.

D. The finished application shall withstand a 200-ampere arc for not less than 30 seconds.

E. Securing tape: Glass cloth electrical tape not less than 0.18 mm (7 mils) thick, and 19 mm (3/4 inch) wide.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."

3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.

4. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain un-terminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels.

5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

6. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

7. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

8. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.

9. Pulling Cable:

a. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.


28 05 13 VARHS

b. Provide installation equipment that will prevent the cutting or abrasion of insulation during pulling of cables.

c. Use ropes made of nonmetallic material for pulling feeders.

d. Attach pulling lines for feeders by means of either woven basket grips or pulling eyes attached directly to the conductors, as approved by the Resident Engineer/COTR.

e. Pull in multiple cables together in a single conduit.

C. Splice cables and wires where necessary only in outlet boxes, junction boxes, or pull boxes.

1. Splices and terminations shall be mechanically and electrically secure.

2. Where the Government determines that unsatisfactory splices or terminations have been installed, remove the devices and install approved devices at no additional cost to the Government.

D. Seal cable and wire entering a building from underground, between the wire and conduit where the cable exits the conduit, with a non-hardening approved compound.

E. Unless otherwise specified in other sections install wiring and connect to equipment/devices to perform the required functions as shown and specified.

F. Except where otherwise required, install a separate power supply circuit for each system so that malfunctions in any system will not affect other systems.

G. Where separate power supply circuits are not shown, connect the systems to the nearest panel boards of suitable voltages, which are intended to supply such systems and have suitable spare circuit breakers or space for installation.

H. Install a red warning indicator on the handle of the branch circuit breaker for the power supply circuit for each system to prevent accidental de-energizing of the systems.

I. System voltages shall be 120 volts or lower where shown on the drawings or as required by the NEC.

J. UTP Cable Installation:


2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.

K. Optical Fiber Cable Installation:


2. Cable shall be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.

L. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above ceilings by cable supports not more than [60 inches (1525 mm)] <Insert dimension> apart.


28 05 13 VARHS

3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.

M. Installation of Cable Routed Exposed under Raised Floors:

1. Install plenum-rated cable only.

2. Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas.

3. Coil cable 72 inches (1830 mm) long shall be neatly coiled not less than 12 inches (300 mm) in diameter below each feed point.

N. Outdoor Coaxial Cable Installation:

1. Install outdoor connections in enclosures complying with NEMA 250, Type 4X. Install corrosion-resistant connectors with properly designed O-rings to keep out moisture.

2. Attach antenna lead-in cable to support structure at intervals not exceeding 36 inches (915 mm).

O. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).

b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm).

c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches (600 mm).

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).



4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.



5. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm).

6. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).


28 05 13 VARHS

3.2 FIRE ALARM WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway accordance as follows:

1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.

2. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable.

C. Wiring Method:

1. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.

2. Fire-Rated Cables: Use of 2-hour, fire-rated fire alarm cables, NFPA 70, Types MI and CI, is not permitted.

3. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables shall not be installed in the same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

E. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

F. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

G. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum one-hour-rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signals from other floors or zones.

H. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch (25-mm) conduit between the fire alarm control panel and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.

3.3 CONTROL CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Minimum Conductor Sizes:

1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG.

2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG.

3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 12 AWG.


28 05 13 VARHS

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 28 13 00, PHYSICAL ACCESS AND CONTROL SYSTEM for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 28 23 00, VIDEO SURVEILLANCE for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 28 31 00, FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING."

B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, "Firestopping" Annex A.

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. For communications wiring, comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

B. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 28 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A.

B. Install a permanent wire marker on each wire at each termination.

C. Identifying numbers and letters on the wire markers shall correspond to those on the wiring diagrams used for installing the systems.

D. Wire markers shall retain their markings after cleaning.

E. In each handhole, install embossed brass tags to identify the system served and function.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for UL or third-party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.


28 05 13 VARHS

3. Test UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross connection.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

4. Optical Fiber Cable Tests:

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:

1) Multimode Link Measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in 1 direction according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper.

2) Attenuation test results for links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

5. Coaxial Cable Tests: Comply with requirements in Division 27 Section "Master Antenna Television System."

D. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.

E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 EXISITNG WIRING

A. Unless specifically indicated on the plans, existing wiring shall not be reused for the new installation. Only wiring that conforms to the specifications and applicable codes may be reused. If existing wiring does not meet these requirements, existing wiring may not be reused and new wires shall be installed.

- - - E N D - - -


SECTION 28 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the finishing, installation, connection, testing and certification of the grounding and bonding required for a fully functional Electronic Safety and Security (ESS) system.

B. “Grounding electrode system” refers to all electrodes required by NEC, as well as including made, supplementary, grounding electrodes.

C. The terms “connect” and “bond” are used interchangeably in this specification and have the same meaning

1.2 RELATED WORK


B. Section 28 05 13 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY. Requirements for low voltage power and lighting wiring.

C. Section 28 08 00 - COMMISIONING OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY. Requirements for commissioning.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 28 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY INSTALLATIONS.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Clearly present enough information to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.

2. Include the location of system grounding electrode connections and the routing of aboveground and underground grounding electrode conductors.

C. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports of ground resistance.


1. Certification that the materials and installation are in accordance with the drawings and specifications.

2. Certification by the contractor that the complete installation has been properly installed and tested.




B1-07 ...............................................Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire


28 05 26 VARHS

B3-07 ...............................................Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire

B8-04 ...............................................Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft


81-1983 ...........................................IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System

C2-07 ...............................................National Electrical Safety Code



99-2005 ...........................................Health Care Facilities


44-05 ..............................................Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables

83-08 ..............................................Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

467-07 ............................................Grounding and Bonding Equipment

486A-486B-03 ................................Wire Connectors

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Equipment grounding conductors shall be UL 83 insulated stranded copper, except that sizes 6 mm² (10 AWG) and smaller shall be solid copper. Insulation color shall be continuous green for all equipment grounding conductors, except that wire sizes 25 mm² (4 AWG) and larger shall be permitted to be identified per NEC.

B. Bonding conductors shall be ASTM B8 bare stranded copper, except that sizes 6 mm² (10 AWG) and smaller shall be ASTM B1 solid bare copper wire.

2.2 GROUND RODS

A. Copper clad steel, 19 mm (3/4-inch) diameter by 3000 mm (10 feet) long, conforming to UL 467.

B. Quantity of rods shall be as required to obtain the specified ground resistance.

2.3 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS

A. Components shall meet or exceed UL 467 and be clearly marked with the manufacturer, catalog number, and permitted conductor size(s).2.4 ground connections

B. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

C. Below Grade: Exothermic-welded type connectors.


28 05 26 VARHS

D. Above Grade:

1. Bonding Jumpers: Compression-type connectors, using zinc-plated fasteners and external tooth lockwashers.

2. Connection to Building Steel: Exothermic-welded type connectors.

3. Ground Busbars: Two-hole compression type lugs, using tin-plated copper or copper alloy bolts and nuts.

4. Rack and Cabinet Ground Bars: One-hole compression-type lugs, using zinc-plated or copper alloy fasteners.

5. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two bolts.

a) Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

6. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.


A. Provide solid copper ground bars designed for mounting on the framework of open or cabinet-enclosed equipment racks with minimum dimensions of 4 mm thick by 19 mm wide (3/8 inch x ¾ inch).


A. At any equipment mounting location (e.g., backboards and hinged cover enclosures) where rack-type ground bars cannot be mounted, provide screw lug-type terminal blocks.

2.6 SPLICE CASE GROUND ACCESSORIES

A. Splice case grounding and bonding accessories shall be supplied by the splice case manufacturer when available. Otherwise, use 16 mm² (6 AWG) insulated ground wire with shield bonding connectors.

2.7 SECURITY CONTROL ROOM GROUND

A. Provide 50mm2 (1/0 AWG) stranded copper grounding conductor(s) color coded with a green jacket, bolted at the Room’s Communications System Grounding Electrode Cooper Plate and circulate to each equipment rack ground buss bar through the wire management system. Connect each equipment rack, wire management system’s cable tray, ladder, etc. to the circulating ground wire with a minimum 25mm2 (4AWG) stranded Cooper Wire, color coded with a green jacket.

1. Connect each equipment rack ground buss bar to the circulating ground wire a indicated in 2.9.A, and

2. Connect each additional room item to the circulating ground wire as indicated in 2.9.A.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Ground in accordance with the NEC, as shown on drawings, and as specified herein.



28 05 26 VARHS

1. Secondary service neutrals: Ground at the supply side of the secondary disconnecting means and at the related transformers.


C. Equipment Grounding: Metallic structures, including ductwork and building steel, enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, and other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits, shall be bonded and grounded.


A. Make grounding connections, which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible (except connections for which periodic testing access is required) by exothermic weld.

3.3 CORROSION INHIBITORS

A. When making ground and ground bonding connections, apply a corrosion inhibitor to all contact surfaces. Use corrosion inhibitor appropriate for protecting a connection between the metals used.

3.4 CONDUCTIVE PIPING

A. Bond all conductive piping systems, interior and exterior, to the building to the grounding electrode system. Bonding connections shall be made as close as practical to the equipment ground bus.

3.5 SECURITY EQUIPMENT ROOM GROUNDING

A. Conduit: Ground and bond metallic conduit systems as follows:

1. Ground metallic service conduit and any pipes entering or being routed within the computer room at each end using 16 mm² (6AWG) bonding jumpers.

2. Bond at all intermediate metallic enclosures and across all joints using 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumpers.

3.6 WIREWAY GROUNDING

A. Ground and Bond Metallic Wireway Systems as follows:

1. Bond the metallic structures of wireway to provide 100 percent electrical continuity throughout the wireway system by connecting a 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumper at all intermediate metallic enclosures and across all section junctions.

2. Install insulated 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumpers between the wireway system bonded as required in paragraph 1 above, and the closest building ground at each end and approximately every 16 meters (50 feet).

3. Use insulated 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumpers to ground or bond metallic wireway at each end at all intermediate metallic enclosures and cross all section junctions.

4. Use insulated 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumpers to ground cable tray to column-mounted building ground plates (pads) at each end and approximately every 15 meters.


28 05 26 VARHS


A. Grounding system resistance to ground shall not exceed 5 ohms. Make any modifications or additions to the grounding electrode system necessary for compliance without additional cost to the Government. Final tests shall ensure that this requirement is met.

B. Resistance of the grounding electrode system shall be measured using a four-terminal fall-of-potential method as defined in IEEE 81. Ground resistance measurements shall be made before the electrical distribution system is energized and shall be made in normally dry conditions not fewer than 48 hours after the last rainfall. Resistance measurements of separate grounding electrode systems shall be made before the systems are bonded together below grade. The combined resistance of separate systems may be used to meet the required resistance, but the specified number of electrodes must still be provided.

C. Services at power company interface points shall comply with the power company ground resistance requirements.

D. Below-grade connections shall be visually inspected by the Resident Engineer prior to backfilling. The contractor shall notify the Resident Engineer 24 hours before the connections are ready for inspection.


A. Drive each rod vertically in the earth, not less than 3000 mm (10 feet) in depth.

B. Where permanently concealed ground connections are required, make the connections by the exothermic process to form solid metal joints. Make accessible ground connections with mechanical pressure type ground connectors.

C. Where rock prevents the driving of vertical ground rods, install angled ground rods or grounding electrodes in horizontal trenches to achieve the specified resistance.

3.9 LABELING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION" Article for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green.

B. Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer.

1. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason, notify the facility manager."


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.


28 05 26 VARHS

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power Distribution Units or Panel boards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 ohm(s).

F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

- - - E N D - - -


SECTION 28 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION



1.2 RELATED WORK




1.3 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for commissioning the Facility electronic safety and security systems, related subsystems and related equipment. This Section supplements the general requirements specified in Section 01 91 00 General Commissioning Requirements.


1.4 DEFINITIONS




B. The Facility exterior closure systems commissioning will include the systems listed in Section 01 19 00 General Commissioning Requirements:

1.6 SUBMITTALS



28 08 00 VARHS



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Commissioning of Electronic Safety and Security systems will require inspection of individual elements of the electronic safety and security systems throughout the construction period. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Commissioning Agent in accordance with Section 01 19 00 and the Commissioning plan to schedule electronic safety and security systems inspections as required to support the Commissioning Process.





3.4 SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING



28 08 00 VARHS



----- END -----


SECTION 28 13 00 PHYSICAL ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (PACS)

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the finishing, installation, connection, testing and certification of a complete and fully operating Physical Access Control System, hereinafter referred to as the PACS.

1.2 RELATED WORK



C. Section 28 05 11 - REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY INSTALLATIONS. Requirements for connection of high voltage.

D. Section 26 05 19 - LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW). Requirements for power cables.

E. Section 28 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY. Requirements for grounding of equipment.

F. Section 28 05 13 – CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURTIY. Requirements for conductors and cables.

G. Section 26 05 33 – RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. Requirements for infrastructure.

H. Section 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE. Requirements for door installation.

I. Section 28 08 00 - COMMISIONING OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY. For requirements for commissioning, systems readiness checklists, and training.

J. Section 28 23 00 - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE. Requirements for security camera systems.


A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing, installing, and the operation of the PACS as shown. The Contractor shall also provide certification as required.

B. The security system will be installed and tested to ensure all components are fully compatible as a system and can be integrated with all associated security subsystems, whether the security system is stand-alone or a part of a complete Information Technology (IT) computer network.

C. The Contractor or security sub-contractor shall be a licensed security Contractor as required within the state or jurisdiction of where the installation work is being conducted.

1.4 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide and install Andover Continuum as an extension to the existing campus wide Andover security system utilizing the existing Continuum database. No substitutions.


28 13 00 VARHS

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit below items in accordance with Specification Sections 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, and Section 02 41 00, DEMOLITION.

B. Provide certificates of compliance with Section 1.3, Quality Assurance.

C. Provide a complete and thorough pre-installation and as-built design package in both electronic format and on paper, minimum size 11 x 17 inches (279 x 432 millimeters); drawing submittals shall be per the established project schedule.

D. Pre-installation design and as-built packages shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Index Sheet that shall:

a. Define each page of the design package to include facility name, building name, floor, and sheet number.

b. Provide a complete list of all security abbreviations and symbols.

c. Reference all general notes that are utilized within the design package.

d. Specification and scope of work pages for all individual security systems that are applicable to the design package that will:

1) Outline all general and job specific work required within the design package.

2) Provide a detailed device identification table outlining device Identification (ID) and use for all security systems equipment utilized in the design package.

2. Drawing sheets that will be plotted on the individual floor plans or site plans shall:

a. Include a title block as defined above.

b. Clearly define the drawings scale in both standard and metric measurements.

c. Provide device identification and location.

d. Address all signal and power conduit runs and sizes that are associated with the design of the electronic security system and other security elements (e.g., barriers, etc.).

e. Identify all pull box and conduit locations, sizes, and fill capacities.

f. Address all general and drawing specific notes for a particular drawing sheet.

3. A detailed riser drawing for each applicable security subsystem shall:

a. Indicate the sequence of operation.

b. Relationship of integrated components on one diagram.

c. Include the number, size, identification, and maximum lengths of interconnecting wires.

d. Wire/cable types shall be defined by a wire and cable schedule. The schedule shall utilize a lettering system that will correspond to the wire/cable it represents (example: A = 18 AWG/1 Pair


28 13 00 VARHS

Twisted, Unshielded). This schedule shall also provide the manufacturer’s name and part number for the wire/cable being installed.

4. A detailed system drawing for each applicable security system shall:

a. Clearly identify how all equipment within the system, from main panel to device, shall be laid out and connected.

b. Provide full detail of all system components wiring from point-to-point.

c. Identify wire types utilized for connection, interconnection with associate security subsystems.

d. Show device locations that correspond to the floor plans.

e. All general and drawing specific notes shall be included with the system drawings.

5. A detailed schedule for all of the applicable security subsystems shall be included. All schedules shall provide the following information:

a. Device ID.

b. Device Location (e.g. site, building, floor, room number, location, and description).

c. Mounting type (e.g. flush, wall, surface, etc.).

d. Power supply or circuit breaker and power panel number.

e. In addition, for the PACS, provide the door ID, door type (e.g. wood or metal), locking mechanism (e.g. strike or electromagnetic lock) and control device (e.g. card reader or biometrics).

6. Detail and elevation drawings for all devices that define how they were installed and mounted.

E. Pre-installation design packages shall go through a full review process conducted by the Contractor along with a VA representative to ensure all work has been clearly defined and completed. All reviews shall be conducted in accordance with the project schedule. There shall be four (4) stages to the review process:

1. 35 percent

2. 65 percent

3. 90 percent

4. 100 percent

F. Provide manufacturer security system product cut-sheets. Submit for approval at least 30 days prior to commencement of formal testing, a Security System Operational Test Plan. Include procedures for operational testing of each component and security subsystem, to include performance of an integrated system test.

G. Submit manufacture’s certification of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) listing as specified. Provide all maintenance and operating manuals per Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, and Section 28 05 11 REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY INSTALLATIONS.

H. Completed System Readiness Checklist provided by the Commissioning Agent and completed by the contractor, signed by a qualified technician and dated on the date of completion, in accordance with the


28 13 00 VARHS

requirements of Section 28 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEMS.


A. The publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplement, and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ Security Industry Association (SIA):

AC-01 ..............................................Access Control: Wiegand Card Reader Interface Standard

AC-03 ..............................................Access Control: Access Control Guideline Dye Sublimation Printing Practices for PVC Access Control Cards

TVAC-01 .........................................CCTV to Access Control Standard - Message Set for System Integration

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ International Code Council (ICC):

A117.1 .............................................Standard on Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities

D. Department of Justice American Disability Act (ADA)

28 CFR Part 36-90 ...........................ADA Standards for Accessible Design 2010

E. Department of Veterans Affairs (VA):

PACS-R: ..........................................Physical Access Control System (PACS) Requirements

VA Handbook 0730 ........................Security and Law Enforcement

F. Government Accountability Office (GAO):

GAO-03-8-02 ..................................Security Responsibilities for Federally Owned and Leased Facilities

G. National Electrical Contractors Association

303-2005 .........................................Installing Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Systems

H. National Electrical Manufactures Association (NEMA):


I. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

70-11 ............................................... National Electrical Code

J. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

294-99 .............................................The Standard of Safety for Access Control System Units

305-08 .............................................Standard for Panic Hardware

639-97 .............................................Standard for Intrusion-Detection Units


28 13 00 VARHS

752-05 .............................................Standard for Bullet-Resisting Equipment

827-08 .............................................Central Station Alarm Services

1076-95 ...........................................Standards for Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems

1981-03 ...........................................Central Station Automation System

2058-05 ...........................................High Security Electronic Locks

K. Homeland Security Presidential Directive (HSPD):

HSPD-12 .........................................Policy for a Common Identification Standard for Federal Employees and Contractors

L. Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS):

FIPS-201-1 ......................................Personal Identity Verification (PIV) of Federal Employees and Contractors

M. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST):

IR 6887 V2.1 ...................................Government Smart Card Interoperability Specification (GSC-IS)

Special Pub 800-96 ..........................PIV Card Reader Interoperability Guidelines

N. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

C62.41 .............................................IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits

O. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):

7810 .................................................Identification cards – Physical characteristics

7811 .................................................Physical Characteristics for Magnetic Stripe Cards

7816-1 .............................................Identification cards - Integrated circuit(s) cards with contacts - Part 1: Physical characteristics

7816-2 .............................................Identification cards - Integrated circuit cards - Part 2: Cards with contacts -Dimensions and location of the contacts

7816-3 .............................................Identification cards - Integrated circuit cards - Part 3: Cards with contacts - Electrical interface and transmission protocols

7816-4 .............................................Identification cards - Integrated circuit cards - Part 4: Organization, security and commands for interchange

14443 ...............................................Identification cards - Contactless integrated circuit cards; Contactless Proximity Cards Operating at 13.56 MHz in up to 5 inches distance

15693 ...............................................Identification cards -- Contactless integrated circuit cards - Vicinity cards; Contactless Vicinity Cards Operating at 13.56 MHz in up to 50 inches distance


28 13 00 VARHS

P. Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS) 1984

Q. ADA Standards for Accessible Design 2010

R. Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973

1.7 WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION.

A. Warrant PACS work subject to the Article “Warranty of Construction” of Section 00 72 00, GENERAL CONDITIONS.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. All equipment associated within the PACS shall be UL 294 compliant and rated for continuous operation. Environmental conditions (i.e. temperature, humidity, wind, and seismic activity) shall be taken under consideration at each facility and site location prior to installation of the equipment.

B. All equipment shall operate on a 120 or 240 volts alternating current (VAC); 50 Hz or 60 Hz AC power system unless documented otherwise in subsequent sections listed within this specification. All equipment shall have a back-up source of power that will provide a minimum of 4 hours of run time in the event of a loss of primary power to the facility.

C. The system shall be designed, installed, and programmed in a manner that will allow for easy of operation, programming, servicing, maintenance, testing, and upgrading of the system.

D. All PACS components located in designated “HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENT” areas where fire or explosion could occur due to the presence of natural gases or vapors, flammable liquids, combustible residue, or ignitable fibers or debris, shall be rated Class II, Division I, Group F, and installed in accordance with NFPA 70, Chapter 5.

E. All equipment and materials for the system will be compatible to ensure correct operation as outlined in FIPS 201, March 2006 and HSPD-12.

2.2 EQUIPMENT ITEMS

A. The security system characteristics listed in this section will serve as a guide in selection of equipment and materials for the PACS. If updated or more suitable versions are available then the Contracting Officer will approve the acceptance of prior to an installation.

B. PACS equipment shall meet or exceed all requirements listed below.

C. A PACS shall be comprised of, but not limited to, the following components:

1. Control/Communications Panels

2. Electronic Security Management System

3. Card Reader and Credential Cards

4. Picture ID and Badging Station (To be provided in accordance with the VA PIV enrollment and issuance system.)

5. Portal Control Devices


28 13 00 VARHS

6. Door Status Indicators

7. Entry Control Device

8. Power Supplies

9. Wires and Cables

D. Control/Communication Panels:

1. Shall be a central point provided for monitoring, controlling, and programming the PACS.

2. Shall provide a means of controlling up to 8 doors per panel.

3. Shall be expandable and provide a means of networking multiple panels to provide overall control of all doors on the PACS via a primary panel.

4. Shall be system specific addressable, Internet Protocol (IP) addressable, and programmable via a computer.

5. Shall be able to be interfaced directly from a computer or via the Internet or Intranet. Access to the panels shall be password protected. All individuals with access to the panels shall have a user specific password.

6. Shall be of the same manufacturer and part number to ensure full compatibility within the system.

7. The operating system for the panel must utilize a single seamlessly integrated relational database for all functionality. This integration shall be provided with one operating environment. The operating environment shall be the fully multi-tasking multi-threading Microsoft Windows 2003/2007/Windows XP Operating System.

8. The panel’s web enabled client applications shall be capable of running on independent client operating systems including Windows 2003/2007, Windows XP, Windows NT, Macintosh, UNIX, Linux, and Solaris. The web-enabled applications shall utilize the same common database as the other system modules.

9. The panel programming shall be written so that all system modules (e.g. access control, alarm monitoring, credential management, digital video, visitor management, intrusion detection, asset management, etc.) are developed and built from a unified 32-bit source code set. There absolutely shall not be separate source code bases for the individual modules of the PACS.

10. Shall allow for the operation and control of up to 8 doors.

11. Shall consist of or have the equivalent of, at a minimum, a General Control Module and an Access Control Module. Both modules shall be programmable via a computer.

12. The General Control Module shall:

a. Provide for full distributed processing of access control and alarm monitoring operations.

b. Store the following information and function using a high speed, local 32-bit microprocessor:

1) access levels

2) hardware configurations


28 13 00 VARHS

3) programmed alarm outputs assigned at a administration client workstation

c. Process all access granted/denied decisions to provide fast responses to card reader transactions. A fully configured general control module with 64 card readers shall require less than one-half (0.5) seconds to grant access to an authorized cardholder or deny access to an unauthorized cardholder.

d. Meet the following minimum requirements:

1) A minimum host communications speed of 115,200 bps.

2) Support direct connect connections.

3) Minimum on-board memory of eight (8) MB.

4) Local Area Network (LAN) Support RJ45 (10/100baseT) Ethernet Interface Token Ring four (4) MB connectivity.

5) Minimum memory storage of up to 5,000 cardholders and 100,000 events.

6) Downstream ports for connecting card readers and data gathering panels via RS-485 multi-drop wiring configuration.

7) Support of multiple card technologies.

8) Supervised Communications with PACS system software.

9) Support of up to eight card formats and facility codes.

10) RS-485 Full Duplex, UL 1076 Grade AA communication channel to the system head-end.

11) Integration with all manufacturers’ card readers.

12) Biometric Interface Support.

13) 12 VAC or 12 volts direct current (VDC) input power via a UL certified step-down transformer or power supply.

14) Issue Code Support for both Magnetic and Wiegand Card Formats.

15) Individual Shunt Times

16) Up to Nine Digit PIN Codes.

17) Downstream serial RS-232 device support.

18) Status LED’s to identify normal component and communication status.

13. The access control module shall:

a. Control up to 8 doors utilizing input and output relays that are fully programmable via network software.

b. Input relays shall meet the following minimum requirements:

1) Provide up to 16 UL 1076 analog unsupervised alarm input zones to monitor and report alarm conditions, power faults, and tampers.


28 13 00 VARHS

2) Operate independently and in conjunction with output relays, which will send an output signal to a corresponding output device upon alarm input activation. Once an alarm has been received, the input relay shall activate any or all alarm outputs.

3) Contain the following features:

a) UL 924 Certified.

b) Alarm contact status scanning at up to 120 times per second for each zone.

c) A low power Complementary-symmetry/metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) microprocessor.

d) Filtered data for noise rejection to prevent false alarms.

e) Up to 16 supervised inputs.

f) 12VAC or 12VDC Input Power.

g) Two (2) dedicated inputs for tamper and power status.

14. Output relays shall meet the following minimum requirements:

a. Shall be capable of controlling a corresponding output device upon any input activation or on command from the PACS.

b. Shall be capable of responding to:

1) Input alarms.

2) Commands from a System Operator.

3) Time zone control commands for automatic operation.

c. Shall be capable of:

1) Pulsing for a predetermined duration. Duration shall be programmable for each relay individually.

2) Responding on command from the System Operator to pulse, command on, command off, or reset to normal state.

3) Operating outputs rated at 5 amps (A) at 30VDC.

E. Electronic Security Management System (SMS):

1. Shall allow the configuration of an enrollment and badging, alarm monitoring, administrative, asset management, digital video management, intrusion detection, visitor enrollment, remote access level management, and integrated client workstations or any combination of all or some.

2. Shall be expandable to support an unlimited number of individual module or integrated client workstations. All access control field hardware, including Intelligent System Controllers (ISC), shall be connected to all Windows 2003/2000/XP based access control system workstation on the network.

3. Shall have the ability to compose, file, maintain, update, and print reports for either individuals or the system as follows.


28 13 00 VARHS

a. Individual reports that consist of an employee’s name, office location, phone number or direct extension, and normal hours of operation. The report shall provide a detail listing of the employee’s daily events in relation to accessing points within a facility.

b. System reports shall be able to produce information on a daily/weekly/monthly basis for all events, alarms, and any other activity associated with a system user.

c. All reports shall be in a date/time format and all information shall be clearly presented.

4. Shall be designed to allow it to work with any industry standard network protocol and topology listed below:

a. Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)/IP

b. Novell Netware (IPX/SPX)

c. Banyan VINES

d. IBM LAN Server (NetBEUI)

e. Microsoft LAN Manager (NetBEUI)

f. Network File System (NFS) Networks

g. Remote Access Service (RAS) via ISDN, x.25, and standard phone lines.

5. Shall provide full interface and control of the PACS to include the following subsystems within the PACS:

a. Public Key Infrastructure

b. Card Management

c. Identity and Access Management

d. Personal Identity Verification

6. Shall have the following features or compatibilities:

a. The ability to be operated locally or remotely via a LAN, WAN, internet, or intranet.

b. Event and Alarm Monitoring

c. Database Partitioning

d. Ability to fully integrate with all other security subsystems

e. Enhanced Monitoring Station with Split Screen Views

f. Alternate and Extended Shunt by Door

g. Escort Management

h. Enhanced IT-based Password Protection

i. N-man Rule and Occupancy Restrictions


28 13 00 VARHS

j. Open Journal Data Format for Enhanced Reporting

k. Automated Personnel Import

l. ODBC Support

m. Windows 2000 Professional, Windows Server 2003, Windows XP Professionals for Servers

n. Field-Level Audit Trail

o. Cardholder Access Events

7. For the SMS network a server and client workstation may be required and must meet the following minimum technical characteristics:

a. Server: Processor 1.8 GHz Intel Pentium IV

Free Hard Disk Space 3.0 GB

Memory 1.0 GB

Network Card 10/100 Base-T

CD-ROM Drive 10X

Monitor/Video Adapter board 17” SVGA (1024 x 768)

Operating System Windows 2007 Professional, Windows Server 2003, Windows XP Professional

Ports 2 serial, 1 parallel, USB

Backup Tape or CDRW

Modem 56.7 Kbps

b. Client Workstation:

Processor 1.5 GHz Intel Pentium III

Free Hard Disk Space 2.0 GB

Memory 512 MB RAM

Network Card 10 Base-T

CD-ROM Drive 10X

Monitor/Video Adapter board 17” SVGA (1024 x 768), 64 MB RAM

Operating Systems Windows 2000 Professional or XP Professional

F. Card Readers and Credential Cards:

1. Shall be utilized for controlling the locking hardware on a door and allows for reporting back to the main control panel with the time/date the door was accessed, the name of the person accessing the point of entry, and its location.

2. Will be fully programmable and addressable, locally and remotely, and hardwired to the system.


28 13 00 VARHS

3. Shall be individually home run to the main panel.

4. Shall be installed in a manner that they comply with:

a. The Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS)

b. The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

c. The ADA Standards for Accessible Design

5. Shall support a variety of card readers that must encompass a wide functional range. The PACS may combine any of the card readers described below for installations requiring multiple types of card reader capability (i.e., card only, card and/or PIN, card and/or biometrics, card and/or pin and/or biometrics, supervised inputs, etc.). These card readers shall be available in the approved technology to meet FIPS 201 and is ISO 14443 A or B compliant. The reader output can be Wiegand, RS-22, 485 or TCP/IP.

6. Are to be housed in an aluminum bezel with a wide lead-in for easy card entry.

7. Shall contain read head electronics, and a sender to encode digital door control signals.

8. LED’s shall be utilized to indicate card reader status and access status.

9. Shall be able to support a user defined downloadable off-line mode of operation (e.g. locked, unlocked, or facility code), which will go in effect during loss of communication with the main control panel.

10. Shall provide audible feedback to indicate access granted/denied decisions. Upon a card swipe, two audible tones or beeps shall indicate access granted and three tones or beeps shall indicate access denied. All keypad buttons shall provide (tactile?? What does this mean) audible feedback.

11. All card readers that utilize keypad controls along with a reader and shall meet the following specifications:

a. Entry control keypads shall use a unique combination of alphanumeric and other symbols as an identifier. Keypads shall contain an integral alphanumeric/special symbols keyboard with symbols arranged in ascending ASCII code ordinal sequence. Communications protocol shall be compatible with the local processor.

b. Shall include a Light Emitting Diode (LED) or other type of visual indicator display and provide visual or visual and audible status indications and user prompts. The display shall indicate power on/off, and whether user passage requests have been accepted or rejected. The design of the keypad display or keypad enclosure shall limit the maximum horizontal and vertical viewing angles of the keypad. The maximum horizontal viewing angle shall be plus and minus five (5) degrees or less off a vertical plane perpendicular to the plane of the face of the keypad display. The maximum vertical viewing angle shall be plus and minus 15 degrees or less off a horizontal plane perpendicular to the plane of the face of the keypad display.

c. Shall respond to passage requests by generating a signal to the local processor. The response time shall be 800 milliseconds or less from the time the last alphanumeric symbol is entered until a response signal is generated.

d. Shall be powered from the source as designed and shall not dissipate more than 150 Watts.

e. Shall be suitable for surface, semi-flush, pedestal, or weatherproof mounting as required.

f. Shall provide a means for users to indicate a duress situation by entering a special code.


28 13 00 VARHS

12. Card readers shall come in the following formats:

a. Wiegand Card Reader:

1) Shall be utilized during the transition from the existing technology to the contactless smart card technology as defined in FIPS-201.

2) Shall read credential cards which are encoded using Wiegand effect ferromagnetic wires laminated into the credential card.

3) Shall create a magnetic field and output a coded representation of the unique pattern of magnetic flux changes produced by moving the credential card through the card reader.

4) The output shall be a series of electrical signals and shall constitute a unique identification code number.

5) Wiegand credential cards shall use at least 24 binary digits to generate a unique credential card identification code.

6) The card reader shall meet or exceed the following technical characteristics: Card Speed 5 to 30 inches (203 to 1270mm) per second

Data Rate 1ms per bit

Connections RJ-45 Jack or multiconductor quick disconnect

Output Formats 26 or 34-bit

Power Per Manufacturers Specifications

Lifetime 600,000 pass read head

Error Rate false accept

Static Discharge Withstands 20,000 volts

LED If required per the design package

Card Output Format EMPI 26 or 34-bit ANSI/ABA All bits Clock-and-Data up to 37 characters 10 Digit ANSI/ABA 26 or 34-bit

b. Wiegand Card Reader:

1) Smart card readers shall read credential cards whose characteristics of size and technology meet those defined by ISO/IEC 7816, 14443, 15693.

2) The readers shall have "flash" download capability to accommodate card format changes.

3) The card reader shall have the capability of reading the card data and transmitting the data to the main monitoring panel.

4) The card reader shall be contactless and meet or exceed the following technical characteristics:

a) Data Output Formats: FIPS 201 low outputs the FASC-N in an assortment of Wiegand bit formats from 40 – 200 bits. FIPS 201 medium outputs a combination FASC-N and HMAC in an assortment of Wiegand bit formats from 32 – 232 bits. All Wiegand formats


28 13 00 VARHS

or the upgradeability from Low to Medium Levels can be field configured with the use of a command card.

b) FIPS 201 readers shall be able to read, but not be limited to, DESfire and iCLASS cards.

c) Reader range shall comply with ISO standards 7816, 14443, and 15693, and also take into consideration conditions, are at a minimum 1” to 2” (2.5 – 5 cm).

c. Proximity (PROX) Card Reader:

1) Shall be utilized during the transition from the existing technology to the contactless smart card technology as defined in FIPS-201.

2) Shall use active/passive proximity detection and shall not require contact with the proximity credential card for operation.

a) Active detection proximity card readers shall provide power to compatible credential cards through magnetic induction and receive and decode a unique identification code number transmitted from the credential card.

b) Passive detection proximity card readers shall use a swept-frequency, radio frequency field generator to read the resonant frequencies of tuned circuits laminated into compatible credential cards. The resonant frequencies read shall constitute a unique identification code number.

3) Shall read proximity cards in a range from 0 to at least four (4) inches (0 to at least 15 cm) from the reader. The credential card design shall allow for a minimum of 32,000 unique identification codes per facility.

4) Shall be able to read cards from two (2) inches (3cm) to 4 inches (10cm).

5) For exterior parking lots or garages shall be 16 inches (40 cm).

6) The operating frequency shall be determined by the type of access control system being utilized.

d. Credential Cards: Shall be in accordance with FIPS 201 and controlled by the PIV enrollment and issuance system.

G. Picture ID and Badging Station if applicable:

1. Shall be FIPS 201 compliant and will be controlled by the PIV enrollment and issuance system.

2. Shall provide a form-based interface for the entry of badge holder data and access information. All data, including images, shall be stored on the system server.

3. Shall allow image and signature capture for use in badge production, and provides tools for badge design. Both video and digital cameras may be utilized.

4. Shall meet the following minimum characteristics:

a. Windows 2000/XP

b. Support for all ID Cards, Reader and Printer Technologies

c. Centralized User Enrollment


28 13 00 VARHS

d. Password Protected

e. High Speed Photo Capture

f. Signature and/or Biometric Data Capture

g. Digital Certificate Management

h. Report Generator

i. Intelli-Check ID Check Integration or Equivalent

j. Photo Capture via Digital or Video Camera

k. In-line Encoding of Magnetic Stripe and Barcode

l. ZD (PDF-417) Barcode Support

m. Image Compression Control

n. Image FX Gallery

o. Program Badge

p. Chromakey and Ghosting

H. Portal Control Devices:

1. Shall be used to assist the PACS.

2. Such devices shall:

a. Provide a means of monitoring the doors status.

b. Allow for exiting a space via either a push button, request to exit, or panic/crash bar.

c. Provide a means of override to the PACS via a keypad or key bypass.

d. Assist door operations utilizing automatic openers and closures.

e. Provide a secondary means of access to a space via a keypad.

3. Shall be connected to and monitored by the main PACS panel.

4. Shall be installed in a manner that they comply with:

a. The Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS)

b. The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

c. The ADA Standards for Accessible Design

5. Shall provide a secondary means of access control within a secure area.

6. Push-Button Switches:


28 13 00 VARHS

a. Shall be momentary contact; back lighted push buttons, and stainless steel switch enclosures for each push button as shown. Buttons are to be utilized for secondary means of releasing a locking mechanism.

b. In an area where a push button is being utilized for remote access of the locking device then no more than two (2) buttons shall operate one door from within one secure space. Buttons will not be wired in series with one other.

c. In an area where locally stationed guards control entry to multiple secure points via remote switches. An interface board shall be designed and constructed for only the amount of buttons it shall house. These buttons shall be flush mounted and clearly labeled for ease of use. All buttons shall be connected to the PACS and SMS system for monitoring purposes.

d. Shall have double-break silver contacts that will make 720 VA at 60 amperes and break 720 VA at 10 amperes.

7. Crash Bar:

a. Emergency Exit with Alarm (Panic):

1) Entry control portals shall include panic bar emergency exit hardware as designed.

2) Panic bar emergency exit hardware shall provide an alarm shunt signal to the PACS and SMS.

3) The panic bar shall include a conspicuous warning sign with one (1) inch (2.5 cm) high, red lettering notifying personnel that an alarm will be annunciated if the panic bar is operated.

4) Operation of the panic bar hardware shall generate an intrusion alarm that reports to both the SMS and Intrusion Detection System. The use of a micro switch installed within the panic bar shall be utilized for this.

5) The panic bar shall a fully mechanical connection only and shall not depend upon electric power for operation.

6) The panic bar shall be compatible with mortise or rim mount door hardware and shall operate by retracting the bolt manually by either pressing the panic bar or with a key by-pass. Refer to Section 2.2.I.9 for key-bypass specifications.

b. Normal Exit:

1) Entry control portals shall include panic bar non-emergency exit hardware as designed.

2) Panic bar non-emergency exit hardware shall be monitored by and report to the SMS.

3) Operation of the panic bar hardware shall not generate a locally audible or an intrusion alarm within the IDS.

4) When exiting, the panic bar shall depend upon a mechanical connection only. The exterior, non-secure side of the door shall be provided with an electrified thumb latch or lever to provide access after the credential I.D. authentication by the SMS.

5) The panic bar shall be compatible with mortise or rim mount door hardware and shall operate by retracting the bolt manually by either pressing the panic bar or with a key by-pass. Refer to Section 2.2.I.9 for key-bypass specifications. The strikes/bolts shall include a micro switch to indicate to the system when the bolt is not engaged or the strike mechanism is unlocked. The


28 13 00 VARHS

signal switches shall report a forced entry to the system in the event the door is left open or accessed without the identification credentials.

8. Key Bypass:

a. Shall be utilized for all doors that have a mortise or rim mounted door hardware.

b. Each door shall be individually keyed with one master key per secured area.

c. Cylinders shall be six (6)-pin and made of brass or equivalent. Keys for the cylinders shall be constructed of solid material and produced and cut by the same distributor. Keys shall not be purchased, cut, and supplied by multiple dealers.

d. All keys shall have a serial number cut into the key. No two serial numbers shall be the same.

e. All keys and cylinders shall be stored in a secure area that is monitored by the Intrusion Detection System.

I. Door Status Indicators:

1. Shall monitor and report door status to the SMS.

2. Door Position Sensor:

a. Shall provide an open or closed indication for all doors operated on the PACS and report directly to the SMS.

b. Shall also provide alarm input to the Intrusion Detection System for all doors operated by the PACS and all other doors that require monitoring by the intrusion detection system.

c. Switches for doors operated by the PACS shall be double pole double throw (DPDT). One side of the switch shall monitor door position and the other side if the switch shall report to the intrusion detection system. For doors with electromagnetic locks a magnetic bonding sensor (MBS) can be used in place of one side of a DPDT switch, in turn allowing for the use of a single pole double throw (SPDT) switch in its place of a DPDT switch.

d. Switches for doors not operated by the PACS shall be SPDT and report directly to the IDS.

e. Shall be surface or flush mounted and wide gap with the ability to operate at a maximum distance of up to 2” (5 cm).

3. Request-to-Exit (RTE):

a. Shall be utilized to de-energize the locking hardware on a door to allow for exiting a secure area.

b. Shall be either an infrared sensor or a push button.

c. Infrared sensors shall meet the following minimum technical characteristics: Alarm Output 2 Form "C" relay contacts

Indicators 1 activation LED

Power Requirements 12 or 24 VAC, 12 or 24 VDC,

26 mA @ 12 VDC

Relay Latch Time Adjustable to 60 seconds


28 13 00 VARHS

J. Entry Control Devices:

1. Shall be hardwired to the PACS main control panel and operated by either a card reader or a biometric device via a relay on the main control panel.

2. Shall be fail-safe in the event of power failure to the PACS system.

3. Shall operate at 24 VCD, with the exception of turnstiles and be powered by a separate power supply dedicated to the door control system. Each power supply shall be rated to operate a minimum of two doors simultaneously without error to the system or overload the power supply unit.

4. Shall have a diode or metal-oxide veristor (MOV) to protect the controller and power supply from reverse current surges or back-check.

K. Power Supplies:

1. Shall be UL rated and able to adequately power two entry control devices on a continuous base without failure.

2. Shall meet the following minimum technical characteristics: INPUT POWER 110 VAC 60 HZ 2 amp

OUTPUT VOLTAGE 12 VDC Nominal (13.8 VDC)

24 VDC Nominal (27.6 VDC)

Filtered and Regulated

BATTERY Dependant on Output Voltage shall provide up to 14 Ah

OUTPUT CURRENT 10 amp max. @ 13.8 VDC

5 amp max. @ 27.6 VDC

PRIMARY FUSE SIZE 6.3 amp (non-removable)

BATTERY FUSE SIZE 12 amp, 3AG

CHARGING CIRCUIT Built-in standard

L. Wires and Cables

1. Shall meet or exceed the manufactures recommendations for power and signal.

2. Shall be carried in an enclosed conduit system, utilizing electromagnetic tubing (EMT) to include the equivalent in flexible metal, rigid galvanized steel (RGS) to include the equivalent of liquid tight, polyvinylchloride (PVC) schedule 40 or 80.

3. All conduits will be sized and installed per the NEC. All security system signal and power cables will be contained in either EMT or RGS conduit.

4. All conduit, pull boxes, and junction boxes shall be clearly marked every with colored permanent tape or paint that will allow it to be distinguished from all other conduit and infrastructure.

5. Conduit fills shall not exceed 50 percent unless otherwise documented.

6. A pull rope shall be pulled along with signal and power cables to assist in future work.


28 13 00 VARHS

7. At all locations where core drilling is conducted to allow for conduit to be installed, then fire stopping shall be applied to that area.

8. High power and signal cables shall not share the same conduit and shall be kept separate up to the point of connection. High power for the security system shall be defined as any cable or sets of cables carrying 30 VDC/VAC or higher.

9. Signal Cables:

a. Shall meet or exceed all specifications and requirements called out by the manufactures.

b. Shall be twisted pairs.

c. All cables and conductors, except fiber optic cables, that act as a control, communication, or signal lines shall include surge protection. Surge protection shall be furnished at the equipment end and additional triple electrode gas surge protectors rated for the application on each wire line circuit shall be installed within 3 feet, (1 meter) of the building cable entrance. The inputs and outputs shall be tested in both normal and common mode using the following wave forms:

1) A 10 microsecond rise time by 1000 microsecond pulse width waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts and peak current of 60 amperes.

2) An 8 microsecond rise time by 20 microsecond pulse width wave form with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and peak current of 500 amperes.

10. Power Cables:

a. Shall be rated for either 110 or 220 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz, and shall comply with VA Master Spec 26 05 21 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (600 Volts and Below).

b. Shall be sized according and comply with the NEC. High voltage power cables will be a minimum of three conductors, 14 AWG, stranded, and coated with a non-conductive polyvinylchloride (PVC) jacket.

c. Low Voltage Power Cables:

1) All cables shall be a minimum of 18 AWG, Stranded and have a polyvinylchloride outer jacket.

2) Specific cable size shall determined using a basic voltage over distance calculation and shall comply with the NEC’s requirements for low voltage cables.

d. All equipment connected to AC power shall be protected from surges. Equipment protection shall withstand surge test waveforms described in IEEE C62.41. Fuses shall not be used as a means of surge protection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. System installation shall be in accordance with UL 294, manufacturer and related documents and references, for each type of security subsystem designed, engineered and installed.

B. Components shall be configured with appropriate “service points” to pinpoint system trouble in less than 30 minutes.


28 13 00 VARHS

C. The Contractor shall install all system components including Government furnished equipment, and appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, documentation listed in Sections 1.4 and 1.5 of this document, and shall furnish all necessary connectors, terminators, interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a operable system.

D. The PACS will be designed, engineered, installed, and tested to ensure all components are fully compatible as a system and can be integrated with all associated security subsystems, whether the system is a stand alone or a network.

E. For integration purposes, the PACS shall be integrated where appropriate with the following associated security subsystems:

1. CCTV:

a. Provide 24 hour coverage of all entry points to the perimeter and agency buildings. As well as all emergency exits utilizing a fixed color camera.

b. Be able to monitor, control and record cameras on a 24 hours basis.

c. Be programmed automatically call up a camera when an access point is but into an alarm state.

d. For additional PACS system requirements as they relate to the CCTV, refer to Section 28 23 00, VIDEO SURVEILLANCE.

2. IDS:

a. Be able monitor door control sensors.

b. Be able to monitor and control the IDS on a 24 hours basis.

c. Be programmed to go into an alarm state when an IDS device is put into an alarm state, and notify the operator via an audible alarm.

3. Security Access Detection:

a. Be able to monitor all objects that have been screened with an x-ray machine and be able to monitor all data acquired by the bomb detection unit.

4. EPPS:

a. Be programmed to go into an alarm state when an emergency call box or duress alarm/panic device is activated, and notify the Access Control System and Database Management of an alarm event.

F. Integration with these security subsystems shall be achieved by computer programming or the direct hardwiring of the systems.

G. For programming purposes refer to the manufacturers requirements for correct system operations. Ensure computers being utilized for system integration meet or exceed the minimum system requirements outlined on the systems software packages.

H. The Contractor shall visit the site and verify that site conditions are in agreement with the design package. The Contractor shall report all changes to the site or conditions that will affect performance of the system. The Contractor shall not take any corrective action without written permission from the Government.


28 13 00 VARHS

I. The Contractor shall visit the site and verify that site conditions are in agreement/compliance with the design package. The Contractor shall report all changes to the site or conditions that will affect performance of the system to the Contracting Officer in the form of a report. The Contractor shall not take any corrective action without written permission received from the Contracting Officer.

J. Existing Equipment:

1. The Contractor shall connect to and utilize existing door equipment, control signal transmission lines, and devices as outlined in the design package. Door equipment and signal lines that are usable in their original configuration without modification may be reused with Contracting Officer approval.

2. The Contractor shall perform a field survey, including testing and inspection of all existing door equipment and signal lines intended to be incorporated into the PACS, and furnish a report to the Contracting Officer as part of the site survey report. For those items considered nonfunctioning, provide (with the report) specification sheets, or written functional requirements to support the findings and the estimated cost to correct the deficiency. As part of the report, the Contractor shall include a schedule for connection to all existing equipment.

3. The Contractor shall make written requests and obtain approval prior to disconnecting any signal lines and equipment, and creating equipment downtime. Such work shall proceed only after receiving Contracting Officer approval of these requests. If any device fails after the Contractor has commenced work on that device, signal or control line, the Contractor shall diagnose the failure and perform any necessary corrections to the equipment.

4. The Contractor shall be held responsible for repair costs due to Contractor negligence, abuse, or improper installation of equipment.

5. The Contracting Officer shall be provided a full list of all equipment that is to be removed or replaced by the Contractor, to include description and serial/manufacturer numbers where possible. The Contractor shall dispose of all equipment that has been removed or replaced based upon approval of the Contracting Officer after reviewing the equipment removal list. In all areas where equipment is removed or replaced the Contractor shall repair those areas to match the current existing conditions.

K. Enclosure Penetrations: All enclosure penetrations shall be from the bottom of the enclosure unless the system design requires penetrations from other directions. Penetrations of interior enclosures involving transitions of conduit from interior to exterior, and all penetrations on exterior enclosures shall be sealed with rubber silicone sealant to preclude the entry of water and will comply with VA Master Specification 07 84 00, Firestopping. The conduit riser shall terminate in a hot-dipped galvanized metal cable terminator. The terminator shall be filled with an approved sealant as recommended by the cable manufacturer and in such a manner that the cable is not damaged.

L. Cold Galvanizing: All field welds and brazing on factory galvanized boxes, enclosures, and conduits shall be coated with a cold galvanized paint containing at least 95 percent zinc by weight.

M. Control Panels:

1. Connect power and signal lines to the controller.

2. Program the panel as outlined by the design and per the manufacturer’s programming guidelines.

N. SMS:

1. Coordinate with the VA agency’s IT personnel to place the computer on the local LAN or Intranet and provide the security system protection levels required to insure only authorized VA personnel have access to the system.


28 13 00 VARHS

2. Program and set-up the SMS to ensure it is in full operation.

O. Card Readers:

1. Connect all signal inputs and outputs as shown and specified.

2. Terminate input signals as required.

3. Program and address the reader as per the design package.

4. Readers shall be surface or flushed mounted and all appropriate hardware shall be provided to ensure the unit is installed in an enclosed conduit system.

P. Portal Control Devices:

1. Install all signal input and output cables as well as all power cables.

2. Devices shall be surface or flush mounted as per the design package.

3. Program all devices and ensure they are working.

Q. Door Status Indicators:

1. Install all signal input and output cables as well as all power cables.

2. RTE’s shall be surface mounted and angled in a manner that they cannot be compromised from the non-secure side of a windowed door, or allow for easy release of the locking device from a distance no greater than 6 feet from the base of the door.

3. Door position sensors shall be surface or flush mounted and wide gap with the ability to operate at a maximum distance of up to 2” (5 cm).

R. Entry Control Devices:

1. Install all signal input and power cables.

2. Strikes and bolts shall be mounted within the door frame.

3. Mortise locks shall be mounted within the door and an electric transfer hinge shall be utilized to transfer the wire from within the door frame to the mortise lock inside the door.

4. Electromagnetic locks shall be installed with the mag-lock mounted to the door frame and the metal plate mounted to the door.

S. System Start-Up:

1. The Contractor shall not apply power to the PACS until the following items have been completed:

a. PACS equipment items and have been set up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

b. A visual inspection of the PACS has been conducted to ensure that defective equipment items have not been installed and that there are no loose connections.

c. System wiring has been tested and verified as correctly connected as indicated.


28 13 00 VARHS

d. All system grounding and transient protection systems have been verified as installed and connected as indicated.

e. Power supplies to be connected to the PACS have been verified as the correct voltage, phasing, and frequency as indicated.

2. Satisfaction of the above requirements shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for incorrect installation, defective equipment items, or collateral damage as a result of Contractor work efforts.

3. The Commissioning Agent will observe startup and contractor testing of selected equipment. Coordinate the startup and contractor testing schedules with the Resident Engineer and Commissioning Agent. Provide a minimum of 7 days prior notice.

T. Supplemental Contractor Quality Control:

1. The Contractor shall provide the services of technical representatives who are familiar with all components and installation procedures of the installed PACS; and are approved by the Contracting Officer.

2. The Contractor will be present on the job site during the preparatory and initial phases of quality control to provide technical assistance.

3. The Contractor shall also be available on an as needed basis to provide assistance with follow-up phases of quality control.

4. The Contractor shall participate in the testing and validation of the system and shall provide certification that the system installed is fully operational as all construction document requirements have been fulfilled.

3.2 SYSTEM SOFTWARE

A. Install, configure, and test software and databases for the complete and proper operation of systems involved. Assign software license to Owner.


A. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. LAN Cable procedures: Inspect for physical damage and test each conductor signal path for continuity and shorts. Use Class 2, bidirectional, Category 5 tester. Test for faulty connectors, splices, and terminations. Test according to TIA/EIA-568-1. “Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standards – Part 1 General Requirements.” Link performance for UTP cables must comply with minimum criteria in TIA/EIA-568-B.

2. Test each circuit and component of each system. Tests shall include, but are not limited to, measurements of power supply output under maximum load, signal loop resistance, and leakage to ground where applicable. System components with battery backup shall be operated on battery power for a period of not less than 10 percent of the calculated battery operating time. Provide special equipment and software if testing requires special or dedicated equipment.


28 13 00 VARHS

3. Operational Test: After installation of cables and connectors, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. Test each signal path for end-to-end performance from each end of all pairs installed. Remove temporary connections when test have been satisfactorily completed.

3.4 COMMISSIONING

A. Provide commissioning documentation in accordance with the requirements of Section 28 08 00 – COMMISIONING OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEMS for all inspection, start up, and contractor testing required above and required by the System Readiness Checklist provided by the Commissioning Agent.

B. Components provided under this section of the specification will be tested as part of a larger system. Refer to Section 28 08 00 – COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEMS and related sections for contractor responsibilities for system commissioning.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Provide services of manufacturer’s technical representative for four hours to instruct VA personnel in operation and maintenance of units.

B. Submit training plans and instructor qualifications in accordance with the requirements of Section 28 08 00 – COMMISIONING OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEMS.

C. Develop separate training modules for the following:

1. Computer system administration personnel to manage and repair the LAN and databases and to update and maintain software.

2. Operators who prepare and input credentials to man the control station and workstations and to enroll personnel.

3. Security personnel.

4. Hardware maintenance personnel.

5. Corporate management.

D. All testing and training shall be compliant with the VA General Requirements, Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

-----END----


SECTION 28 23 00

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide and install a complete Video Surveillance System, which is identified as the Closed Circuit Television System hereinafter referred to as the CCTV System as specified in this section.

1.2 RELATED WORK



C. Section 26 05 11 - REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS. Requirements for connection of high voltage.

D. Section 26 05 19 - LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW). Requirements for power cables.

E. Section 26 05 33 – RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. Requirements for infrastructure.

F. Section 26 56 00 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING. Requirements for perimeter lighting.

G. Section 28 05 13 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY. Requirements for conductors and cables.

H. Section 28 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY. Requirements for grounding of equipment.

I. Section 28 08 00 - COMMISIONING OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY. Requirements for commissioning, systems readiness checklists, and training.

J. Section 28 13 00 - PHYSICAL ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM. Requirements for physical access control system integration.


A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing, installing, and the operation of the CCTV System as shown. The Contractor shall also provide certification as required.

B. The security system shall be installed and tested to ensure all components are fully compatible as a system and can be integrated with all associated security subsystems, whether the security system is stand-alone or a part of a complete Information Technology (IT) computer network.

C. The Contractor or security sub-contractor shall be a licensed security Contractor as required within the state or jurisdiction of where the installation work is being conducted.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit below items in conjunction with Master Specification Sections 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, and Section 02 41 00, SELECTIVE DEMOLITION.


28 23 00 VARHS

B. Provide certificates of compliance with Section 1.4, Quality Assurance.

C. Provide a pre-installation and as-built design package in both electronic format and on paper, minimum size 1220 x 1220 millimeters (48 x 48 inches); drawing submittals shall be per the established project schedule.

D. Pre-installation design and as-built packages shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Index Sheet that shall:

a. Define each page of the design package to include facility name, building name, floor, and sheet number.

b. Provide a list of all security abbreviations and symbols.

c. Reference all general notes that are utilized within the design package.

d. Specification and scope of work pages for all security systems that are applicable to the design package that will:

1) Outline all general and job specific work required within the design package.

2) Provide a device identification table outlining device Identification (ID) and use for all security systems equipment utilized in the design package.

2. Drawing sheets that will be plotted on the individual floor plans or site plans shall:

a. Include a title block as defined above.

b. Define the drawings scale in both standard and metric measurements.

c. Provide device identification and location.

d. Address all signal and power conduit runs and sizes that are associated with the design of the electronic security system and other security elements (e.g., barriers, etc.).

e. Identify all pull box and conduit locations, sizes, and fill capacities.

f. Address all general and drawing specific notes for a particular drawing sheet.

3. A riser drawing for each applicable security subsystem shall:

a. Indicate the sequence of operation.

b. Relationship of integrated components on one diagram.

c. Include the number, size, identification, and maximum lengths of interconnecting wires.

d. Wire/cable types shall be defined by a wire and cable schedule. The schedule shall utilize a lettering system that will correspond to the wire/cable it represents (example: A = 18 AWG/1 Pair Twisted, Unshielded). This schedule shall also provide the manufacturer’s name and part number for the wire/cable being installed.

4. A system drawing for each applicable security system shall:

a. Identify how all equipment within the system, from main panel to device, shall be laid out and connected.


28 23 00 VARHS

b. Provide full detail of all system components wiring from point-to-point.

c. Identify wire types utilized for connection, interconnection with associate security subsystems.

d. Show device locations that correspond to the floor plans.

e. All general and drawing specific notes shall be included with the system drawings.

5. A schedule for all of the applicable security subsystems shall be included. All schedules shall provide the following information:

a. Device ID.

b. Device Location (e.g. site, building, floor, room number, location, and description).

c. Mounting type (e.g. flush, wall, surface, etc.).

d. Power supply or circuit breaker and power panel number.

e. In addition, for the CCTV Systems, provide the camera ID, camera type (e.g. fixed or pan/tilt/zoom (P/T/Z), lens type (e.g. for fixed cameras only) and housing model number.

6. Detail and elevation drawings for all devices that define how they were installed and mounted.

E. Pre-installation design packages shall be reviewed by the Contractor along with a VA representative to ensure all work has been clearly defined and completed. All reviews shall be conducted in accordance with the project schedule. There shall be four (4) stages to the review process:

1. 35 percent

2. 65 percent

3. 90 percent

4. 100 percent

F. Provide manufacturer security system product cut-sheets. Submit for approval at least 30 days prior to commencement of formal testing, a Security System Operational Test Plan. Include procedures for operational testing of each component and security subsystem, to include performance of an integrated system test.

G. Submit manufacture’s certification of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) listing as specified. Provide all maintenance and operating manuals per the VA General Requirements, Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

H. Submit completed System Readiness Checklists provided by the Commissioning Agent and completed by the contractor, signed by a qualified technician and dated on the date of completion, in accordance with the requirements of Section 28 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEMS.


A. The publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplement, and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA):


28 23 00 VARHS

330-09 .............................................Electrical Performance Standards for CCTV Cameras

375A-76 ...........................................Electrical Performance Standards for CCTV Monitors

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

C62.41-02 ........................................IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits

802.3af-08 .......................................Power over Ethernet Standard

D. Federal Communications Commision (FCC):

(47 CFR 15) Part 15 Limitations on the Use of Wireless Equipment/Systems

E. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA):

303-2005 .........................................Installing Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Systems

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

70-08 ...............................................Article 780-National Electrical Code

G. Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS):

140-2-02 ..........................................Security Requirements for Cryptographic Modules

H. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

983-06 .............................................Standard for Surveillance Camera Units

3044-01 ...........................................Standard for Surveillance Closed Circuit Television Equipment

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of video surveillance equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.

4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for video surveillance items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed.

1.7 WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION

A. Warrant CCTV System work subject to the Article “Warranty of Construction” of FAR clause 52.246-21.


28 23 00 VARHS

B. Demonstration and training shall be performed prior to system acceptance.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL

A. This project is an extension of the VA security system utilizing Schneider Andover Continuum, integral technologies and Pelco products. The video system must integrate with the existing security system. Integrator must be a certified Andover Continuum representative. No substitutions.

B. All equipment associated within the CCTV System shall be UL 3004 compliant and rated for continuous operation. Environmental conditions (i.e. temperature, humidity, wind, and seismic activity) shall be taken under consideration at each facility and site location prior to installation of the equipment.

C. All equipment shall operate on a 120 or 240 volts alternating current (VAC); 50 Hz or 60 Hz AC power system unless documented otherwise in subsequent sections listed within this specification. All equipment shall have a back-up source of power that will provide a minimum of 4 hours of run time in the event of a loss of primary power to the facility.

D. All CCTV System components located in designated “HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENT” areas where fire or explosion could occur due to the presence of natural gases or vapors, flammable liquids, combustible residue, or ignitable fibers or debris, shall be rated Class II, Division I, Group F, and installed in accordance with NFPA 70, Chapter 5.

E. All equipment and materials for the system will be compatible to ensure correct operation.

2.2 EQUIPMENT ITEMS

A. CCTV system shall meet following requirements:

B. All Cameras will be EIA 330 and UL 983 compliant as well as:

1. Will be charge coupled device (CCD) cameras and shall conform to National Television System Committee (NTSC) formatting.

2. Fixed cameras shall be color and the primary choice for monitoring following the activities described below. Pan/Tilt/Zoom (P/T/Z) cameras shall be color and are to be utilized to complement the fixed cameras.

3. Shall be powered by either 12 volts direct current (VDC) or 24 volts alternate current (VAC). Power supplies shall be Class 2 and UL compliant and have a back-up power source to ensure cameras are still operational in the event of loss of primary power to the CCTV System.

4. Shall be rated for continuous operation under the following environmental conditions:

a. Ambient temperatures of minus 10 degrees C (14 degrees F) to 55 degrees C (131 degrees F) utilizing equipment that will provide automatic heating and cooling.

b. Humidity, wind gusts, ice loading, and seismic conditions specified or encountered for locations where CCTV cameras will be utilized.

5. Will be home run to a monitoring and recording device via a controlling device and monitored on a 24 hour basis at a designated Access Control System and Database Management location.

6. Shall come with built-in video motion detection that shall automatically monitor and process information from each camera. The camera motion detection shall detect motion within the camera's


28 23 00 VARHS

field of view and provide automatic visual, remote alarms, and motion-artifacts as a result of detected motion as follows:

a. Motion-detection settings shall include adjustable object size and velocity, as well as a selectable detection area of 132 zones in a twelve (12) x eleven (11) grid.

b. Sensors shall accept video signals from CCTV cameras and when synchronizing is required, it shall be in composite synchronization.

c. Sensor processors shall detect motion by digitizing multiple pixels within each video scene and by comparing the gray scale of the pixels to a previously stored reference. The number of pixels digitized depends on the application. The designer of the system shall consider cost effectiveness as a factor since digitizing a large number of pixels could increase cost dramatically with little additional actual detection capability for a specific application.

d. An alarm shall be initiated when the comparison varies by six (6) percent or more.

7. Appropriate signage shall be designed, provided, and posted that notifies people that an area is under camera surveillance.

8. Dummy or fake cameras will not be utilized at any time.

9. Shall be programmed to digitally flip from color to black and white at dusk and vice versa at low light conditions.

10. Will be fitted with auto-iris lenses to ensure the image maintained in low light.

11. Lightning protection shall be IEEE C62.41 compliant and provided for all cameras. Either surge protectors or a lightning grid may be utilized. Ensure all lightning protection equipment is compliant with Article 780 of the National Electrical Code (NEC). The use of Fuses and Circuit Breakers as a means of lightning protection shall not be allowed.

12. If using the camera as part of a CCTV network a video encoder shall be used to convert the signal from National Television System(s) Committee (NTSC) to Moving Picture Experts Group (MPEG) format.

13. P/T/Z cameras shall be utilized in a manner that they compliment fixed cameras and shall not be used as a primary means of monitoring activity.

C. Indoor Fixed Mini Dome System

1. The indoor fixed mini dome system with camera and lens shall be quick and easy to install.

2. The indoor fixed mini dome system shall provide multiple methods of installation including: surface mounting onto ceiling or wall, recessed mounting in ceiling or wall, and pendant mounting with an optional parapet mount.

3. The indoor fixed mini dome system shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications.

4. Video Specifications

a. Imaging Device

1) DW/CW Models 1/3-inch pixel based imager

2) DN/CH/C Models 1/3-inch imager


28 23 00 VARHS

b. Signal System: NTSC or PAL

c. Video Output:

1) Composite: 1Vp-p, 75 ohms

2) UTP: 1Vp-p, 100 ohms

d. Picture Elements:

1) DW/CW Models NTSC: 720 (H) x 540 (V), PAL: 720 (H) x 540 (V)

2) DN/CH/C Models NTSC: 768 (H) x 494 (V), PAL: 752 (H) x 582 (V)

e. Dynamic Range: 102 dB/120dB maximum (CW/DW models)

f. Scanning System: 2:1 interlace (progress option for CW/DW)

g. Synchronization: Internal

h. Electronic Shutter Range:

1) DW/CW Models: Auto (1/15 to 1/22,000)

2) DN/CH/C Models: Auto (1/60 to 1/100,000)

i. Lens Type

1) DW/CW Models: Varifocal with auto iris

2) DN/CH Models: Varifocal with auto iris

3) C Models: Fixed focal without iris

j. Focal length

1) 3.0mm ~ 9.5mm (varifocal)


3) 3.0mm (fixed)

4) 3.6mm (fixed)

5) 6.0mm (fixed)

6) 8.0mm (fixed)

7) 12.0mm (fixed)

k. Operation

1) Iris Varifocal: Auto (DC-drive), Fixed: N/A

2) Focus Varifocal: Manual, Fixed: Manual

3) Zoom Varifocal: Manual, Fixed: N/A


28 23 00 VARHS

l. Model Numbers:

1) Camera shall be Pelco IM10 with surevision.

D. Outdoor Fixed Mini Dome System

1. The indoor/outdoor fixed mini dome camera system shall be quick and easy to install and is ideal for both indoor and outdoor applications. It shall have a versatile design allowing for multiple mounting options.

2. The indoor/outdoor fixed mini dome camera system’s back box shall have three conduit openings.

3. The indoor/outdoor fixed mini dome camera system shall offer a large selection of camera and lens options, including a clear or smoked bubble lower dome.

4. The indoor/outdoor fixed mini dome camera system shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications.

5. Video Specifications

a. Imaging Device

1) DW/CW Models 1/3-inch pixel based imager

2) DN/CH Models 1/3-inch imager

b. Signal System: NTSC or PAL

c. Video Output:

1) Composite: 1Vp-p, 75 ohms

2) UTP: 1Vp-p, 100 ohms

d. Picture Elements:

1) DW/CW Models NTSC: 720 (H) x 540 (V), PAL: 720 (H) x 540 (V)

2) DN/CH Models NTSC: 768 (H) x 494 (V), PAL: 752 (H) x 582 (V)

e. Dynamic Range: 102 dB/120dB maximum (CW/DW models)

f. Scanning System: 2:1 interlace (progress option for CW/DW)

g. Synchronization: Internal

h. Electronic Shutter Range:

1) DW/CW Models: Auto (1/15 to 1/22,000)

2) DN/CH Models: Auto (1/60 to 1/100,000)

i. Lens Type

1) DW/CW Models: Varifocal with auto iris

2) DN/CH Models: Varifocal with auto iris


28 23 00 VARHS

3) C Models: Fixed focal without iris

j. Focal length



3) 3.0mm (fixed)

4) 3.6mm (fixed)

5) 6.0mm (fixed)

6) 8.0mm (fixed)

7) 12.0mm (fixed)

k. Operation

1) Iris Varifocal: Auto (DC-drive), Fixed: N/A

2) Focus Varifocal: Manual, Fixed: Manual

3) Zoom Varifocal: Manual, Fixed: N/A

l. Model Numbers:

1) Camera shall be Pelco IM10E with surevision.

E. In-Door Mini-dome PTZ Camera System

1. The Spectra Mini incorporates many well-known features from Pelco’s full-size Spectra III dome system into a cost effective, small, 4.1-inch diameter dome bubble form factor. The easy-to-install dome system shall be mounted to the surface of ceilings or recessed into hard ceilings and suspended tile ceilings. A high resolution camera shall transmit video over coaxial cable or unshielded twisted pair (UTP) wires. Pan/tilt operation shall be performed with Pelco’s controllers that transmit D, P, or Coaxitron protocols. For non-Pelco controllers, a translator board shall be installed. On-screen programming shall allow easy setup of the miniature dome’s many features.

2. Variable speed capabilities shall range from a fast motion of 140 degrees per second to a smooth “creep” speed of 0.4 degrees per second. The system shall be capable of continuous 360 degrees rotation and shall have an auto flip feature that allows the dome to rotate 180 degrees and reposition itself for uninterrupted viewing of any subject that passes directly beneath the dome’s location.

3. Optional diagnostic/installation tools shall include a remote monitor kit (IPS-RMK) and a remote monitor cable. These accessories shall allow the installer to view video, control PTZ, and perform system setup and software upgrades at the installation site. The IPS-RMK is a stand-alone kit consisting of a 5.6-inch TFT LCD monitor, Palm OS-compatible handheld device and interface cable, carrying case, and the remote monitor cable.

4. The Spectra Mini CCTV camera dome system shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications.

5. MECHANICAL


28 23 00 VARHS

a. The miniature positioning system’s variable speed/high speed pan and tilt drive unit shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications:

1) Vertical Tilt: Unobstructed tilt of +2° to -92°

2) Manual Control Speed: Pan speed of 0.4° to 80° per second, and pan at 100° per second in turbo mode. Tilt operation shall range from 0.7° to 40° per second.

3) Automatic Preset Speed: Pan speed of 140° and a tilt speed of 80° per second.

4) Presets: 64 presets. Pan speed of 140° per second and tilt speed at 80° per second. For variable speed operation and appropriate controller is required.

5) Preset Accuracy: +/-0.5°

6) Proportional Pan/Tilt Speed: Continually decreases pan and tilt speeds in proportion to the depth of zoom

7) Automatic Power-Up: User-selectable to the mode of operation the dome will assume when power is cycled

8) Zones: Four zones with up to 20-character labeling for each, with ability to blank the video in the zone

9) Motor: Continuous duty, variable speed, operating at 18 to 30VAC, 24VAC nominal

10) Limit Stops: Programmable auto, random and frame scanning

11) Window Blanking: One programmable window blanking area

12) Patterns: One on-screen, programmable pattern including pan, tilt, zoom, and preset functions; pattern programming through control keyboard following instructions in the on-screen menu

13) Pattern Length: One pattern of user-defined length, based on dome memory

14) Autosensing: Automatically sense and respond to protocol utilized for controlling unit whether Coaxitron or RS-422P or D protocols; accept competitors’ control protocols with the use of optional translator cards

15) Menu System: Built-in setup of programmable functions; multilingual, including English, French, Italian, Portuguese, and German, and alternative languages in Russian, Turkish, Polish, and Czechoslovakian

16) Auto Flip: Rotates dome 180° at bottom of tilt travel

17) Password Protection: Programmable setting with optional password protection

18) Diagnostics: On-screen diagnostic system information

19) Display Setup: User-definable locations of all labels and displays; user-selectable time duration of each display

20) Azimuth/Elevation/Zoom: On-screen display of pan and tilt locations and zoom ratio

21) RJ45-10 Jack: Pigtail connector for UTP video, power, and data supplied


28 23 00 VARHS

22) BNC Connector: Female BNC connector for coaxial video

23) Remote Data Port Compatibility: Ability to control and setup unit and to upload new operating code and language file updates through optional remote data port that is located in area with easy access. Compatible with personal computers and PDAs such as Palm and iPAQ

24) UTP Compatibility: Unit shall have an unshielded twisted pair circuit for video transmission up to 750ft

25) Third-Party Control System: Ability to plug in optional board that converts control signals from selected third-party controllers

26) Power Consumption: 21VA (maximum)

27) Installation/Maintenance: The Spectra Mini’s compact design integrates the “dome drive” and “top-cap” into one comprehensive unit reducing the number of components to make installation and maintenance simple.

b. The miniature positioning system shall contain an integrated optics package (IOP) that shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications:

1) Single Format: NTSC/PAL

2) Scanning System: 2:1 interlace

3) Image Sensor: 1/4-inch interline CCD

4) Effective Pixels:

a) NTSC: 768 (H) x 494 (V)

b) PAL: 752 (H) x 582 (V)

5) Horizontal Resolution:

a) NTSC: >470 TVL

b) PAL: >460 TVL

6) Minimum Illumination: 3.0 lux

7) Synchronization System: AC line lock, phase adjustable via remote control, V-sync

8) White Balance: Automatic with manual override

9) Shutter Speed: Automatic (electronic iris)/manual – 1/60-1/30,000

10) Gain Control: Automatic with manual override

11) Video Output: 1.0 to 1.2 volt peak-to-peak, 75 ohms, adjustable

12) Video Signal-to-Noise: >50 dB

13) Lens: F1.8 (F=4.2-42 mm optical) 10X optical zoom, 8X digital zoom

14) Zoom Speed (optical range): 1.5/2.5/4.3 seconds (menu selectable)


28 23 00 VARHS

15) Horizontal Angle of View: 46.4° wide zoom

16) Focus: Automatic with manual override

17) Iris Control: Automatic with manual override

6. Model Numbers:

a. Cameras shall be Pelco Spectra Mini-Dome Series

F. Outdoor PTZ Dome Camera

1. The indoor/outdoor CCTV camera dome system shall be a discreet, miniature camera dome system consisting of a dome drive with a variable speed/high speed pan and tilt drive unit with continuous 360 rotation; 1/4-inch high resolution color, monochrome, or color/black-white CCD camera; motorized zoom lens with optical and digital zoom; auto focus; and an enclosure consisting of a back box, lower dome, and a quick-install mounting.

2. The indoor/outdoor CCTV camera dome system shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications.

3. Dome Drive:

a. The variable speed/high speed pan and tilt dome drive unit shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications.

1) Pan Speed: Variable between 400° per second continuous pan to 0.1° per second

2) Vertical Tilt: Unobstructed tilt of +2° to -92°

3) Manual Control Speed: Pan speed of 0.1° to 80° per second, and pan at 150° per second in turbo mode. Tilt operation shall range from 0.1° to 40° per second

4) Automatic Preset Speed: Pan speed of 400° and a tilt speed of 200° per second

5) Presets: 256 positions with a 20-character label available for each position; programmable camera settings, including selectable auto focus modes, iris level, LowLight limit, and backlight compensation for each preset; command to copy camera settings from one preset to another; and preset programming through control keyboard or through dome system on-screen menu

6) Preset Accuracy: +/-0.1°

7) Proportional Pan/Tilt Speed: Speed decreases in proportion to the increasing depth of zoom

8) Automatic Power-Up: User-selectable to the mode of operation. The dome will assume when power is cycled, including an automatic return to position or function before power outage

9) Zones: Eight zones with up to 20-character labeling for each, with the ability to blank the video in the zone

10) Motor Drive: Cogged belt with 0.9° stepper motor

11) Motor Operating Mode: Microstep to 0.015° steps

12) Motor: Continuous duty and variable speed, operating at 18 to 32 VAC, 24 VAC nominal


28 23 00 VARHS

13) Limit Stops: Programmable for manual panning, auto/random scanning, and frame scanning

14) Inner Liner: Rotating black ABS liner inside a sealed lower dome

15) Alarm Inputs: Ability to control seven alarm inputs located in the back box

16) Alarm Outputs: Ability to control one auxiliary Form C relay output and one open collector auxiliary output located in the back box

17) Alarm Output Programming: Auxiliary outputs can be alternately programmed to operate on alarm

18) Alarm Action: Individually programmed for three priority levels, initiating a stored pattern or going to a preassigned preset position

19) Resume after Alarm: After completion of alarm, dome returns to previously programmed state or its previous position

20) Window Blanking: Eight 4-sided, user-defined shapes, each side with different lengths; window blanking setting to turn off at user-defined zoom ratio; window blanking set to opaque gray or translucent smear; blank all video above user-defined tilt angle; blank all video below user-defined tilt angle

21) Patterns: Eight user-defined programmable patterns including pan, tilt, zoom, and preset functions; and pattern programming through control keyboard or through dome system on-screen menu

22) Pattern Length: Eight patterns of user-defined length based on dome memory

23) Internal Clock: Internal system clock, user programmable for 12 or 24 hour day format and mm/dd/yy or dd/mm/yy calendar format

24) Scheduler: Internal scheduling system for programming presets, patterns, window blanks, alarms, and auxiliary functions based on internal clock settings

25) Autosensing: Automatically sense and respond to protocol utilized for controlling the unit whether Coaxitron or RS-422 P or D protocols, and accept competitors’ control protocols with the use of optional translator cards

26) Menu System: Built-in setup of programmable functions and multiple languages including English, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, German, Russian, Turkish, Polish, and Czechoslovakian

27) Auto Flip: Rotates dome 180° at bottom of tilt travel

28) Password Protection: Programmable settings with optional password protection

29) Clear: Clear individual, grouped, or all programmed settings

30) Freeze Frame: Freeze current scene of video during preset movement

31) Display Setup: User-definable locations of all labels and displays and user-selectable time duration of each display

32) Azimuth/Elevation/Zoom: On-screen display of pan and tilt locations and zoom ratio

33) Compass Display: On-screen display of compass heading and user-definable compass setup


28 23 00 VARHS

34) Camera Title Overlay: 20 user-definable characters on the screen camera title display

35) Video Output Level: User-selectable for normal or high output levels to compensate for long video wire runs

36) Dome Drive Compatibility: All dome drives are compatible with all back box configurations

37) RJ-45 Jack: Contains a plug-in jack on the dome drive for control and setup of the unit, the uploading of new operating code and language file updates, and is compatible with personal computers and PDAs such as Palm and iPAQ

38) Remote Data Port Compatibility: Ability to set up and control unit, and upload new operating code and language file updates through the easily accessible optional remote data port. Remote data port is also compatible with personal computers and PDAs such as Palm and iPAQ

39) Power Consumption: 70 VA (maximum)

4. The high resolution CCD camera shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications.

a. Color/Black-White Optic System (23X)

1) Image Sensor: 1/4-inch interline CCD

2) Scanning System: 2:1 interlace

3) Effective Pixels:

a) NTSC: 724 (H) x 494 (V)

b) PAL: 724 (H) x 582 (V)

4) Horizontal Resolution:

a) NTSC: >470 TVL

b) PAL: >470 TVL

5) Lens: F1.6 (F=3.6-82.8 mm optical, 23X optical zoom, 12X digital zoom)

6) Programmable Zoom Speeds: 2.9, 4.2, or 5.8 seconds

7) Horizontal Angle of View: 54° at 3.6mm wide zoom, 2.5° at 82.8mm telephoto zoom

8) Focus: Automatic with manual override

9) Sensitivity at 35 IRE:

a) NTSC/EIA: 0.08 lux at 1/2 sec shutter speed (color)

0.3 lux at 1/60 sec shutter speed (B-W)


b) PAL/CCIR: 0.08 lux at 1/2 sec shutter speed (color)


28 23 00 VARHS



10) Synchronization System: Internal/AC line lock phase adjustable via remote control, V-sync

11) White Balance: Automatic with manual override

12) Shutter Speed:

a) NTSC: 1/2-1/30,000

b) PAL: 1/1.5-1/30,000

13) Iris Control: Automatic with manual override

14) Gain Control: Automatic/off

15) Video Output: 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms

16) Video Signal-to-Noise: >50dB

17) Type of Lighting: Menu selection of indoor or outdoor lighting for optimum camera performance

18) Wide Dynamic Range: 80X

19) Motion Detection: User-definable motion detection settings for each preset scene, can activate auxiliary outputs, and contains three sensitivity levels per zone

5. Back box and Lower Dome Drive Specs

a. The back box and lower dome shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications

b. Pendant, Environmental

1) Connection to Dome Drive: Quick, positive mechanical and electrical disconnect without the use of any tools

2) Trap Door: Easy access trap door that allows complete access to the installation wiring, and provides compete separation of the wiring from the dome drive mechanics when closed

3) Terminal Strips: Removable terminal strips with screw-type terminals for use with a wide range of wire gauge sizes

4) Auxiliary Connections: One Form-C relay output at <40 V, 2 A maximum and a second open collector output at 32 VDC maximum at 30 mA

5) Alarm Inputs: Seven alarm inputs

6) Integrated UTP Circuit: Integrated circuit that converts video output to passive, UTP transmission

7) Fiber Optic Compatibility: Ability to plug into back box an optional Pelco fiber optic module, or a third-party board that converts video output and control input for fiber optic transmission


28 23 00 VARHS

8) Third-Party Control System: Ability to plug in an optional TXB board that converts control signals from selected third-party controllers

9) Installation: Quick-mount wall, corner, pole, parapet, or ceiling adapter

10) Cable Entry: Through a 1.5-inch NPT fitting

11) Environmental Features: Factory-installed heaters, blowers, and sun shroud

12) Operating Temperatures: Maximum temperature range of -60 to 140F (-51.1° to 60°C) for two hours, and a continuous operating range of -50° to 122F (-51.1° to 50°C)

13) Memory: Built-in memory storage of camera and location- specific dome settings such as presets and patterns. If new dome drive is installed in back box, all settings will automatically download into new dome drive

14) Color: Gray, baked-on enamel powder coat

15) Construction: Aluminum

16) Lower Dome Material: Acrylic, optically clear, with no distortion in any portion of the dome up to +2 above the horizontal

17) Dome Color: Clear and smoked versions

18) Trim Ring Connection: Two captivated screws

6. Model Numbers:

a. Camera shall be Pelco Spectra IV Series – Part #: SD4CBW-PG-E1

G. Lenses: Shall be utilized in a manner that provides maximum coverage of the area being monitored by the camera. The lenses shall:

1. Be 1/3” to fit CCD fixed camera.

2. Be all glass with coated optics.

3. Have mounts that are compatible with the camera selected.

4. Be packaged and supplied with the camera.

5. Have a maximum f-stop of f/1.3 for fixed lenses, and a maximum f-stop of f/1.6 for variable focus lenses.

6. Be equipped with an auto-iris mechanism.

7. Have sufficient circle of illumination to cover the image sensor evenly.

8. Not be used on a camera with an image format larger than the lens is designed to cover.

9. Be provided with pre-set capability.

H. Two types of lenses shall be utilized for both interior and exterior fixed cameras:

1. Manual Variable Focus


28 23 00 VARHS

2. Auto Iris Fixed

I. Manual Variable Focus:

1. Shall be utilized in large areas that are being monitored by the camera. Examples of this are perimeter fence lines, vehicle entry points, parking areas, etc.

2. Shall allow for setting virtually any angle of field, which maximizes surveillance effects.

3. Technical Characteristics: Image format 1/3 inch Focal length 5–50mm Iris range F1.4 to close Focus range 1m (3.3 ft) Back focus distance 10.05 mm (0.4 in) Angle view Wide (1/3 in) 53.4 x 40.1 Angle view Tele (1/3 in) 5.3 x 4.1 Iris control manual Focus ctrl manual Zoom ctrl manual

J. Auto Iris Fixed:

1. Shall be utilized in areas where a small specific point of reference is to be monitored. Examples of this are doorways, elevators, cashier booths, etc.

2. To determine the exact size of the fixed lens required, complete a focal length calculation using either a focal length calculator or a focal length chart provided by the product manufacturer.

3. Technical Characteristics: Image format 1/3 inch 1/3 inch 1/3 inch Focal length 2.8 mm 4 mm 8 mm Iris range F1.2 – 200 F1.2 – 200 F1.2 - 200 Min. Object 0.3 m (1 ft) 0.3 m (1 ft) 0.3 m (1 ft) Lens mount CS-mount CS-mount CS-mount Angle of view 94 X 72 64 X 49 33 x 25 Focus control Manual Manual manual

K. Video Display Equipment

1. Will consist of color monitors and shall be EIA 375A compliant.

2. Shall be able to display analog, digital, and other images in either NTSC or MPEG format associated with the operation of the Security Management System (SMS).

3. Shall:

a. Have front panel controls that provide for power on/off, horizontal and vertical hold, brightness, and contrast.

b. Accept multiple inputs, either directly or indirectly.

c. Have the capabilities to observe and program the CCTV System.


28 23 00 VARHS

d. Be installed in a manner that they cannot be witnessed by the general public.

4. Color Video Monitors Technical Characteristics: Sync Format PAL/NTSC Display Tube 90° deflection angle Horizontal Resolution 250 TVL minimum, 300 TVL typical Video Input 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ohm Front Panel Controls Volume, Contrast, Brightness, Color Connectors BNC

5. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Flat Panel Display Monitor Technical Characteristics:

Sync Format PAL/NTSC LCD Panel TFT LCD Resolution 1280 x 1024 pixels; 500 TV Contrast Ratio (CR) 500:1 Viewing Angle 140° horizontal, 130° vertical Video Input (CVBS) 1.0 Vp-p (0.5–1.5 Vp-p), 75 Ohm Y/C (S-video) 0.7

Video 1 Composite video two (2) BNC (1 in, 1 out) Video 2 Composite video two (2) BNC (1 in, 1 out) Y/C (S-video) two (2) mini-dins, 4-pin (1 in, 1 out)

L. Camera Housings and Mounts:

1. This section pertains to all interior and exterior housings, domes, and applicable wall, ceiling, corner, pole, and rooftop mounts associated with the housing. Housings and mounts shall be specified in accordance to the type of cameras used.

2. All cameras and lenses shall be enclosed in a tamper resistant housing. Any additional mounting hardware required to install the camera housing at its specified location shall be provided along with the housing.

3. The camera and lens contained inside the housing shall be installed on a camera mount. All additional mounting hardware required to install the camera housing at its specified location shall be provided along with the housing.

4. Shall be manufactured in a manner that are capable of supporting a maximum of three (3) cameras with housings, and meet environmental requirements for the geographical area the camera support equipment is being installed on or within.

5. Environmentally Sealed

a. Shall:

1) Be designed in manner that it provides a condensation free environment for correct camera operation.

2) Operate in a 100 percent condensing humidity atmosphere.

3) Be constructed in a manner that:

a) Has a fill valve to allow for the introduction of nitrogen into the housing to eliminate existing atmospheric air and pressurize the housing to create moisture free conditions.


28 23 00 VARHS

b) Has an overpressure valve to prevent damage to the housing in the event of over pressurization.

c) Is equipped with a humidity indicator that is visible to the eye to ensure correct atmospheric conditions at all times.

d) The leak rate of the housing is not to be greater than 13.8kPa or 2 pounds per square inch at sea level within a 90 day period.

e) It shall contain camera mounts or supports as needed to allow for correct positioning of the camera and lens.

f) The housing and sunshield are to be white in color.

b. All electrical and signal cables required for correct operations shall be supplied in a hardened carrier system from the controller to the camera.

c. The mounting bracket shall be adjustable to allow for the housing weight of the camera and the housing unit it is placed in.

d. Accessibility to the camera and mounts shall be taken into consideration for maintenance and service purposes.

6. Indoor Mounts

a. Ceiling Mounts:

1) This enclosure and mount shall be installed in a finished or suspended ceiling.

2) The enclosure and mount shall be fastened to the finished ceiling, and shall not depend on the ceiling tile grid for complete support.

3) Suspended ceiling mounts shall be low profile, and shall be suitable for replacement of 2 foot by 2 foot (610mm x 610mm) ceiling tiles.

b. Wall Mounts:

1) The enclosure shall be installed in manner that it matches the existing décor and placed at a height that it will be unobtrusive, unable to cause personal harm, and prevents tampering and vandalism.

2) The mount shall contain a manual pan/tilt head that will provide 360 degrees of horizontal and vertical positioning from a horizontal position, and has a locking bar or screw to maintain its fixed position once it has been adjusted.

7. Interior Domes

a. The interior dome shall be a pendant mount, pole mount, ceiling mount, surface mount, or corner mounted equipment.

b. The lower portion of the dome that provides camera viewing shall be made of black opaque acrylic and shall have a light attenuation factor of no more that 1 f-stop.

c. The housing shall be equipped with integral pan/tilt capabilities complete with wiring, wiring harness, connectors, receiver/driver, pan/tilt control system, pre-position cards, or any other hardware and equipment as needed to fully provide a fully functional pan/tilt dome.


28 23 00 VARHS

d. The pan/tilt mechanism shall be:

1) Constructed of heavy duty bearings and hardened steel gears.

2) Permanently lubricated to ensure smooth and consistent movement of all parts throughout the life of the product.

3) Equipped with motors that are thermally or impedance protected against overload damage.

8. Exterior Domes

a. The exterior dome shall meet all requirements outlined in the interior dome paragraph above.

b. The housing shall be constructed to be dust and water tight, and fully operational in 100 percent condensing humidity.

9. Exterior Wall Mounts

a. Shall have an adjustable head for mounting the camera.

b. Shall be constructed of aluminum, stainless steel, or steel with a corrosion-resistant finish.

c. The head shall be adjustable for not less than plus and minus 90 degrees of pan, and not less than plus and minus 45 degrees of tilt. If the bracket is to be used in conjunction with a pan/tilt, the bracket shall be supplied without the adjustable mounting head, and shall have a bolt-hole pattern to match the pan/tilt base.

d. Shall be installed at a height that allows for maximum coverage of the area being monitored.

M. Digital Video Management System (DVR)

1. The new cameras will connect to the existing campus video recorders located in building 1 via the existing campus network.

2. The RealVue Xpress Digital Video Management System version 4.3, hereafter referred to as “the system” shall take analog and IP camera input streams, digitally record these video streams, and make them available for live monitoring and investigative review purposes. The system shall operate on a client/server platform, whereby any number of client workstations may connect to one or multiple recorders. The system shall simultaneously and seamlessly record both analog and IP video streams.

3. The system shall capture, digitize, compress to MPEG-4 format and store video onto internal hard drives or external storage devices. The recording software shall run as a service on a Windows XP Pro machine with a static IP address

4. The system shall accommodate analog inputs of 8, 16 or 32.

5. The system shall allow IP cameras to be enabled via optional per camera stream licenses up to 16 standard resolution cameras. IP cameras will be in addition to the base analog camera inputs. Licenses shall not expire or have any reoccurring cost.

6. The system shall record analog cameras at up to broadcast quality 30ips at D1 resolution on all inputs simultaneously.

7. The system shall record standard resolution IP steams at up to 15ips at 4CIF resolution

8. The system shall also record a limited number of individual IP video streams at up to 5 Megapixel resolution.


28 23 00 VARHS

9. The system shall allow for recording at lower frame rates and resolution selectable on a per camera basis and to automatically record at a higher frame rate and resolution on alarm or motion events.

10. An unlimited number of systems shall be connectible over a network. Each system shall contain two network interface cards: one for IP camera/encoder data, and one to connect to a network for client computer access.

11. The system shall be viewed, managed, and played back through a single user interface simultaneously with other Digital Sentry® digital video management systems through supplied DS ControlPoint client software.

12. The system shall support Pelco standard resolution IP cameras, Pelco Spectra IP, Sarix Mega-Pixel IP cameras and Pelco eight channel video encoders.

13. The system shall utilize internal server storage in quantities of 500GB, 1.5TB, 2TB and 4TB for storage of the operating system, video and audio data.

14. The system shall optionally utilize Pelco HDDI or third party SCSI attached JBOD or RAID5 storage.

15. System Administration

a. The system shall provide centralized user administration across many systems. All aspects of system use and setup shall have configurable permissions. Each aspect of system setup shall be independently selectable on a user-by-user basis. Any system user with user administration roles shall be able to create and assign custom permissions to an unlimited number of users. The system shall allow an administrator to create a new user based on an existing user, add or delete user accounts from multiple systems simultaneously, copy a user account from one system to other systems and change the password for a user account on multiple systems simultaneously.

b. The system shall provide for multiple system diagnostic reports, including the following:

1) Camera Usage Report: Displays recording activity per camera and per day in terms of the amount of disk space used for storage.

2) Client Log: Displays user activity by user name, type of activity, description, IP address, and date/time. Examples of logged activities are login/logout, request for recorded video, etc.

3) Administration Log: Displays administrator activity by user name, type of activity, description, IP address, and date/time. Examples of logged activities are changes to schedules, motion masks, video quality, image capture rate, etc.

4) Configuration Report: Displays all configuration changes for cameras, camera groups, zones, users, and other configuration parameters.

5) All reports shall be accessible from within the remote client interface to the system.

c. The system shall provide a utility to limit the amount of bandwidth used to transfer video data to a client computer. Specific IP addresses pre-configured on the system shall be exempted from these limits.

d. The system shall be configured to send email whenever a system message is created or an alarm event occurs. The email server shall be a valid SMTP server. Each recipient email address shall be configured to receive any combination of critical, warning, or informational messages or alarm notifications. When an alarm occurs, the email message includes the zone name, time of alarm, and a list of cameras in the zone that are configured to record upon alarm. The message shall also be able to include JPEG images captured at the time of alarm for each camera in the zone.


28 23 00 VARHS

16. The system shall allow archival of video data to computers or SAN storage devices over a network connection with the optional DS Archive Utility. The archival schedule shall be either automatic, at user-defined intervals or manual and shall be configurable per connected camera.

a. Software will be licensed based per archived recorder.

b. Software will require a single archive server for search, playback, clip management and maintenance.

c. Each archive software shall support up to five recorders.

d. Video shall only be copied for archive; existing video will remain on the source recorder until over-written.

17. The system shall support optional IntraVue network and health monitoring software to monitor bandwidth usage, ping response, drive speed, system temperature, and attached cameras; log all system configuration changes; and send email notifications when errors are detected.

a. Software will be licensed per Node/IP address quantities.

b. Software will require a separate PC and can be set-up as a permanent active monitor or a mobile monitor via laptop PC.

18. The system shall optionally support on board video analytics in quantities of two or four channels with Active Alert software and the DS DataPoint interface to provide video analytics monitoring including tracking and counting objects and people.

19. Digital Sentry ControlPoint Client

a. A client computer with system compatible software shall be the user interface for viewing one or more systems. Live and recorded video and current event video shall be displayed on any client computer using a proper login and password. The client computer shall be able to connect to an unlimited number of recorders simultaneously to display live and recorded video.

b. Client software shall be unlicensed and available to be installed on as many clients as required by the user.

c. Client software shall be compatible with Windows XP, XP 64-bit and Vista.

d. Client Software shall be compatible with multiple DVR and NVR platforms to include all Pelco Digital Sentry, Pelco DX8000/8100, DX45/4600, Integral Master Control and Integral legacy products.

e. Client Software shall be password controlled such that password functionality set at each connected system will be recognized at the client. Password shall limit the ability to access live or recorded video as well as the ability to export video.

f. Client Software shall allow multiple monitor support for up to 4 displays per client workstation, providing virtual matrix functionality.

g. Client Software shall allow for the serial connection of the Pelco KBD300A keyboard/joy stick controller to the Client PC.

h. Client Software shall allow video streams to be selectable from a system tree on an individual camera, individual system, client defined local group or from predefined recorder based groups.


28 23 00 VARHS

i. Client software shall be a tab based work environment with the ability to undock the tabs creating a virtual workspace on single or multiple monitor clients.

j. Client tabs shall include system management, live and search options. Tabs can be displayed simultaneously on the client.

k. Systems Tab shall display and sort available systems, connection status, system names, system IP addresses, custom categories. This tab shall additionally allow

1) Manual connect and disconnect of systems to the client

2) Virtual systems naming

3) Auto Connecting

4) Adding, Deleting and Editing available systems

l. Live video tab shall have the ability to be created up to 4 times on a single client workstation providing for video display combinations from 1 to 144 simultaneous video streams from as many different systems with consideration for maximum client bandwidth. Live video tab shall provide the following functionality

1) Quick Review which shall display recorded video from the last 1, 5, 15, 30, 60 or 90 minutes, providing near instantaneous review of recent events

2) Borderless display option

3) Screen layout selection

4) On the fly on-screen display changes including time, date, camera name, frame rate, frame size, alarm display and border indicators

5) Digital zoom

6) User selectable in-video PTZ control or dashboard style control

7) Drag and drop audio support associating any audio with any video

m. Search video tab shall allow for the search of 1 or multiple cameras from 1 or multiple systems simultaneously. Search tab shall provide the following functionality

1) Time and date search

2) Advanced data search with DataPoint interfaced software to include Active Alert Intelligent Video and POS.

3) Support drag and drop audio support to associate audio with any video

4) Video export to any system accessible media including locally to HDD, CD/DVD, SD, Flash USB device or to network storage

5) Video authentication of exported video via check sum verification

n. The Client shall incorporate virtual matrix functionality whereby camera sequences may be created on the monitoring workstation with the following functionalities:

1) Each sequence shall have a maximum of 500 cameras.


28 23 00 VARHS

2) Each camera in the sequence shall have its own individual dwell time, from 1 to 60 seconds.

3) Each entry in a sequence shall have the capacity to trigger PTZ camera presets, patterns, or auxiliaries.

4) The Client shall have the capability to display recorded video with full VCR controls. This feature shall display video from multiple cameras simultaneously. The user shall be able to play video as fast as possible (all images), in real time, or by skipping a selectable number of seconds.

5) The Client shall support simultaneous playback of up to sixteen cameras all synchronized with each other. Non-synchronous playback of multiple cameras shall not be acceptable.

20. Technical Specifications

a. System:

Operating System ............................ Windows XP Professional

User Interface .................................. Digital Sentry Client or DS ControlPoint

Internal Storage ............................... 500GB, 1.5TB, 2TB

Network .......................................... Dual Gigabit Ethernet Ports

Video Connections .......................... 8, 16 or 32

Audio Connections .......................... Up to 32 or 16 with external storage

Input/Output Connections ............... 15 Input, 1 form C output

Certifications ................................... UL, CE Class A, FCC Class A

b. Video

Video Standards .............................. NTSC/PAL

Video Encoding .............................. MPEG-4

Video Decoding .............................. iVEX, MPEG-4, MJPEG, wavelet, H.264

Video Resolution:

Analog Cameras

D1 ............................................ 720 x 480 (NTSC), 720 x 576 (PAL)

2CIF ......................................... 720 x 240 (NTSC), 720 x 288 (PAL)

CIF ........................................... 352 x 240 (NTSC), 352 x 288 (PAL)

IP Channels

HD............................................ Up to 5 mega-pixels (NTSC and PAL)

4CIF ......................................... 704 x 480 (NTSC), 704 x 576 (PAL)


28 23 00 VARHS

CIF ........................................... 352 x 240 (NTSC), 352 x 288 (PAL)

c. Audio

Audio Channels ............................... Up to 32

Codec .............................................. MPEG1 Layer 2

Bits per Second ............................... 32-192 Kbps

Sampling Frequency ....................... 32 kHz

d. Auxiliary Interface

PTZ Interface .................................. RS-232, RS-422, RS-485

21. Client Computer Minimum Requirements

Processor ......................................... Intel Dual Quad Core Intel Xenon Processors Eff04 2.0GHz, 4M L3, 4.8GT/s

Internal Memory ............................. 4GB RAM, DDR3 Memory, 1066MHz, ECC (4 DIMMS)

Operating System ............................ Windows XP Professional SP2 or Vista

Video System .................................. 512MB NVIDIA Quadro NVS 420 with DirectX 9.0c 4 Monitor Outputs

22. Model Numbers:

a. Digital Video Management System shall be Pelco Digital Sentry RealVue Series

N. Wires and Cables

1. Shall meet or exceed the manufactures recommendation for power and signal.

2. Will be carried in an enclosed conduit system or open plenum rated in cable trays, utilizing electromagnetic tubing (EMT) to include the equivalent in flexible metal, rigid galvanized steel (RGS) to include the equivalent of liquid tight, polyvinylchloride (PVC) schedule 40 or 80.

3. All conduits will be sized and installed per the NEC. All security system signal and power cables that traverse or originate in a high security office space will contained in either EMT or RGS conduit.

4. All conduit, pull boxes, and junction boxes shall be clearly marked with colored permanent tape or paint that will allow it to be distinguished from all other conduit and infrastructure.

5. Conduit fills shall not exceed 50 percent unless otherwise documented.

6. A pull string shall be pulled along and provided with signal and power cables to assist in future installations.

7. At all locations where there is a wall penetration or core drilling is conducted to allow for conduit to be installed, fire stopping materials shall be applied to that area

8. High voltage and signal cables shall not share the same conduit and shall be kept separate up to the point of connection. High voltage for the security system shall be defined as any cable or sets of cables carrying 30 VDC/VAC or higher.


28 23 00 VARHS

9. For all equipment that is carrying digital data between the Access Control System and Database Management or at a remote monitoring station, shall not be less that 20 AWG and stranded copper wire for each conductor. The cable or each individual conductor within the cable shall have a shield that provides 100% coverage. Cables with a single overall shield shall have a tinned copper shield drain wire.

10. All cables and conductors, except fiber optic cables, that act as a control, communication, or signal lines shall include surge protection. Surge protection shall be furnished at the equipment end and additional triple electrode gas surge protectors rated for the application on each wire line circuit shall be installed within three (3) ft. (one (1) m.) of the building cable entrance. The inputs and outputs shall be tested in both normal and common mode using the following wave forms:

a. A 10 microsecond rise time by 1000 microsecond pulse width waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 watts and peak current of 60 amperes.

b. An 8 microsecond rise time by 20 microsecond pulse width wave form with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and peak current of 500 amperes.

11. The surge suppression device shall not attenuate or reduce the video or sync signal under normal conditions. Fuses and relays shall not be used as a means of surge protection.

12. Coaxial Cables

a. All video signal cables for the CCTV System, with exception to the PoE cameras, shall be a coaxial cable and have a characteristic impedance of 75 ohms plus or minus 3 ohms.

b. For runs up to 750 feet use of an RG-59/U is required. The RG-59/U shall be shielded which provides a minimum of 95 percent coverage, with a stranded copper center conductor of a minimum 23 AWG, polyethylene insulation, and black non-conductive polyvinylchloride (PVC) jacket.

c. For runs between 750 feet and 1250 feet, RG-6/U is required. RG-6/U shall be shielded which provides a minimum of 95 percent coverage, with a stranded copper center conductor of a minimum 18 AWG, polyethylene insulation, and black non-conductive polyvinylchloride (PVC) jacket.

d. For runs of 1250 to 2750 feet, RG-11/U is required. RG-11/U shall be shielded which provides a minimum of 95 percent coverage, with a stranded copper center conductor of a minimum 14 AWG, polyethylene insulation, and black non-conductive polyvinylchloride (PVC) jacket.

e. All runs greater than 2750 feet will be substituted with a fiber optic cable. If using fiber optics as a signal carrier then the following equipment will be utilized:

1) Multimode fiber optic cable a minimum size of 62 microns

2) Video transmitter, installed at the camera that utilizes 12 VDC or 24 VAC for power.

3) Video receiver, installed at the switcher.

f. RG-59/U Technical Characteristics AWG 22 Stranding 7x29 Conductor Diameter .031 in. Conductor Material BCC Insulation Material Gas-injected FHDPE Insulation Diameter .145 in.


28 23 00 VARHS

Outer Shield Type Braid/Braid Outer Jacket Material PVC Overall Nominal Diameter .242 in. UL Temperature Rating 75°C Nom. Characteristic Impedance 75 Ohms Nom. Inductance 0.094 μH/ft Nom. Capacitance Conductor to Shield 17.0 pF/ft Nom. Velocity of Propagation 80 % Nom. Delay 1.3 ns/ft Nom. Conductor DC Resistance @ 20°C 12.2 Ohms/1000 ft Nom. Outer Shield DC Resistance @ 20°C 2.4 Ohms/1000 ft Max. Operating Voltage UL 300 V RMS

g. RG-6/U Technical Characteristics

AWG 18 Stranding 7x27 Conductor Diameter .040 in. Conductor Material BC Insulation Material Gas-injected FHDPE Insulation Diameter .180 in. Outer Shield Material Trade Name Duofoil Outer Shield Type Tape/Braid Outer Shield %Coverage 100 % Outer Jacket Material PVC Overall Nominal Diameter .274 in. Nom. Characteristic Impedance 75 Ohms Nom. Inductance 0.106 μH/ft Nom. Capacitance Conductor to Shield 16.2 pF/ft Nom. Velocity of Propagation 82 % Nom. Delay 1.24 ns/ft Nom. Conductor DC Resistance 6.4 Ohms/1000 ft Nominal Outer Shield DC Resistance @ 20°C 2.8 Ohms/1000 ft Max. Operating Voltage UL 300 V RMS

h. RG-11/U Technical Characteristics

AWG 5 Stranding 19x27 Conductor Diameter .064 in. Conductor Material BC Insulation Material Gas-injected FHDPE Insulation Diameter .312 in. Inner Shield Type Braid Inner Shield Material BC - Bare Copper Inner Shield %Coverage 95 % Inner Jacket Material PE – Polyethylene Inner Jacket Diameter .391 in.


28 23 00 VARHS

Outer Shield Type Braid Outer Shield Material BC - Bare Copper Outer Shield %Coverage 95 % Outer Jacket Material Trade Name Belflex Outer Jacket Material PVC Blend Overall Nominal Diameter .520 in. Operating Temperature Range -35°C To +75°C Non-UL Temperature Rating 75°C Nom. Characteristic Impedance 75 Ohms Nom. Inductance 0.097 μH/ft Nom. Capacitance Conductor to Shield 17.3 pF/ft Nom. Velocity of Propagation 78 % Nom. Delay 1.30 ns/ft Nom. Conductor DC Resistance 3.1 Ohms/1000 ft Nom. Inner Shield DC Resistance 1.8 Ohms/1000 ft Nom. Outer Shield DC Resistance 1.4 Ohms/1000 ft Max. Operating Voltage Non-UL 300 V RMS

13. Signal Cables:

a. Signal wiring for PoE cameras depends on the distance the camera is being installed from either a hub or the server.

b. If the camera is up to 300 ft from a hub or the server, then use a shielded UTP category 5 (CAT-V) cable a with standard RJ-45 connector at each end. The cable with comply with the Power over Ethernet, IEEE802.3af, Standard.

c. If the camera is over 300 ft from a hub or server then utilize a multimode fiber optic cable with a minimum size of 62 microns.

d. Provide a separate cable for power.

e. CAT-5 Technical Characteristics: Number of Pairs 4 Total Number of Conductors 8 AWG 24 Stranding Solid Conductor Material BC - Bare Copper Insulation Material PO – Polyolefin Overall Nominal Diameter .230 in. IEC Specification 11801 Category 5 TIA/EIA Specification 568-B.2 Category 5e Max. Capacitance Unbalance (pF/100 m) 150 pF/100 m Nom. Velocity of Propagation 70 % Max. Delay (ns/100 m) 538 @ 100MHz Max. Delay Skew (ns/100m) 45 ns/100 m Max. Conductor DC Resistance 9.38 Ohms/100 Max. DCR Unbalance@ 20°C 3 % Max. Operating Voltage UL 300 V RMS


28 23 00 VARHS

f. Fiber Optic Cables Technical Characteristics:

Fiber Type 62.5 Micron Number of Fibers 4 Core Diameter 6 2.5 +/- 2.5 microns Core Non-Circularity 5% Maximum Clad Diameter 125 +/- 2 microns Clad Non-Circularity 1% Maximum Core-clad Offset 1.5 Microns Maximum Primary Coating Material Acrylate Primary Coating Diameter 245 +/- 10 microns Secondary Coating Material Engineering Thermoplastic Secondary Coating Diameter 900 +/- 50 microns Strength Member Material Aramid Yarn Outer Jacket Material PVC Outer Jacket Color Orange Overall Diameter .200 in. Numerical Aperture .275 Maximum Gigabit Ethernet 300 meters Maximum Gigabit Ethernet 550 meters

14. Signal Cables:

a. Will be sized accordingly and shall comply with the NEC. High voltage power cables will be a minimum of three conductors, 14 AWG, stranded, and coated with a non-conductive polyvinylchloride (PVC) jacket. Low voltage cables will be a minimum of 18 AWG, stranded and non-conductive polyvinylchloride (PVC) jacket.

b. Will be utilized for all components of the CCTV System that require either a 110 VAC 60 Hz or 220 VAC 50 Hz input. Each feed will be connected to a dedicated circuit breaker at a power panel that is primarily for the security system.

c. All equipment connected to AC power shall be protected from surges. Equipment protection shall withstand surge test waveforms described in IEEE C62.41. Fuses shall not be used as a means of surge protection.

d. Shall be rated for either 110 or 220 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz, and shall comply with VA Master Spec 26 05 21 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (600 Volts and Below).

e. Low Voltage Power Cables

1) Shall be a minimum of 18 AWG, Stranded and have a polyvinylchloride outer jacket.

2) Cable size shall determined using a basic voltage over distance calculation and shall comply with the NEC’s requirements for low voltage cables.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

A. Installation: The Contractor shall install all system components including Owner furnished equipment and appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, ANSI C2 and as shown, and shall furnish all necessary connectors, terminators, interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and operable data transmission system.


28 23 00 VARHS

B. Identification and Labeling: The Contractor shall supply permanent identification labels for each cable at each end that will appear on the as-built drawings. The labeling format shall be identified and a complete record shall be provided to the Owner with the final documentation. Each cable shall be identified by type or signal being carried and termination points. The labels shall be printed on letter size label sheets that are self-laminated vinyl that can be printed from a computer data base or spread sheet. The labels shall be E-Z code WES12112 or equivalent.

1. The Contractor shall provide all personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform all testing.

C. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors (TVSS): The Contractor shall mount TVSS within 3 m (118 in) of equipment to be protected inside terminal cabinets or suitable NEMA 1 enclosures. Terminate off-premise conductors on input side of device. Connect the3 output side of the device to the equipment to be protected. Connect ground lug to a low impedance earth ground (less than 10 ohms) via Number 12 AWG insulated, stranded copper conductor.

D. Contractor’s Field Test: The Contractor shall verify the complete operation of the data transmission system during the Contractor’s Field Testing. Field test shall include a bit error rate test. The Contractor shall perform the test by sending a minimum of 1,000,000 bits of data on each DTM circuit a measuring the bit error rate. The bit error rate shall not be greater than one (1) bit out of each 100,000 bits sent for each dial-up DTM circuit, and one (1) bit out of 1,000,000 bits sent for each leased or private DTM circuit. The Contractor shall submit a report containing results of the field test.

E. Acceptance Test and Endurance Test: The wire line data transmission system shall be tested as part of the completed IDS and EECS during the Acceptance Test and Endurance Test as specified.

F. Identification and Labeling: The Contractor shall supply identification tags or labels for each cable. Cable shall be labeled at both end points and at intermediate hand holes, manholes, and junction boxes. The labeling format shall be identified and a complete record shall be provided to the Owner with the final documentation. Each cable shall be identified with type of signal being carried and termination points.

3.2. INSTALLATION

A. System installation shall be in accordance with NECA 303, manufacturer and related documents and references, for each type of security subsystem designed, engineered and installed.

B. Components shall be configured with appropriate “service points” to pinpoint system trouble in less than 30 minutes.

C. The Contractor shall install all system components including Government furnished equipment, and appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, documentation listed in Sections 1.4 and 1.5 of this document, and shall furnish all necessary connectors, terminators, interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and operable system.

D. The CCTV System will be designed, engineered, installed, and tested to ensure all components are fully compatible as a system and can be integrated with all associated security subsystems, whether the system is a stand alone or a complete network.

E. For integration purposes, the CCTV System shall be integrated where appropriate with the following associated security subsystems:

1. PACS:

a. Provide 24 hour coverage of all entry points to the perimeter and agency buildings. As well as all emergency exits utilizing a fixed color camera.

b. Record cameras motion on a 24 hours basis.


28 23 00 VARHS

c. Be programmed go into an alarm state when an emergency exit is opened, and notify the Access Control System and Database Management of an alarm event.

d. For additional CCTV System requirements as they relate to the PACS, refer to Section 28 13 00, PHYSICAL ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS.

2. IDS:

a. Provide a recorded alarm event via a color camera that is connected to the IDS system by either direct hardwire or a security system computer network.

b. Record cameras on a 24 hours basis.

c. Be programmed to go into an alarm state when an IDS device is put into an alarm state, and notify the.

3. Security Access Detection:

a. Provide full coverage of all vehicle and lobby entrance screening areas utilizing a fixed color camera.


c. The CCTV System should have facial recognition software to assist in identifying individuals for current and future purposes.

4. EPPS:

a. Provide a recorded alarm event via a color camera that is connected to the EPPS system by either direct hardwire or a security system computer network.


c. Be programmed to go into an alarm state when an emergency call box or duress alarm/panic device is activated, and notify the Access Control System and Database Management of an alarm event.

F. Integration with these security subsystems shall be achieved by computer programming or the direct hardwiring of the systems.

G. For programming purposes refer to the manufacturers requirements for correct system operations. Ensure computers being utilized for system integration meet or exceed the minimum system requirements outlined on the systems software packages.

H. A complete CCTV System shall be comprised of, but not limited to, the following components:

1. Cameras

2. Lenses

3. Video Display Equipment

4. Camera Housings and Mounts

5. Controlling Equipment

6. Recording Devices


28 23 00 VARHS

7. Wiring and Cables

I. The Contractor shall visit the site and verify that site conditions are in agreement/compliance with the design package. The Contractor shall report all changes to the site or conditions that will affect performance of the system to the Contracting Officer in the form of a report. The Contractor shall not take any corrective action without written permission received from the Contracting Officer.

J. Existing Equipment

1. The Contractor shall connect to and utilize existing video equipment, video and control signal transmission lines, and devices as outlined in the design package. Video equipment and signal lines that are usable in their original configuration without modification may be reused with Contracting Officer approval.

2. The Contractor shall perform a field survey, including testing and inspection of all existing video equipment and signal lines intended to be incorporated into the CCTV System, and furnish a report to the Contracting Officer as part of the site survey report. For those items considered nonfunctioning, provide (with the report) specification sheets, or written functional requirements to support the findings and the estimated cost to correct the deficiency. As part of the report, the Contractor shall include a schedule for connection to all existing equipment.

3. The Contractor shall make written requests and obtain approval prior to disconnecting any signal lines and equipment, and creating equipment downtime. Such work shall proceed only after receiving Contracting Officer approval of these requests. If any device fails after the Contractor has commenced work on that device, signal or control line, the Contractor shall diagnose the failure and perform any necessary corrections to the equipment.

4. The Contractor shall be held responsible for repair costs due to Contractor negligence, abuse, or incorrect installation of equipment.

5. The Contracting Officer shall be provided a full list of all equipment that is to be removed or replaced by the Contractor, to include description and serial/manufacturer numbers where possible. The Contractor shall dispose of all equipment that has been removed or replaced based upon approval of the Contracting Officer after reviewing the equipment removal list. In all areas where equipment is removed or replaced the Contractor shall repair those areas to match the current existing conditions.

K. Enclosure Penetrations: All enclosure penetrations shall be from the bottom of the enclosure unless the system design requires penetrations from other directions. Penetrations of interior enclosures involving transitions of conduit from interior to exterior, and all penetrations on exterior enclosures shall be sealed with rubber silicone sealant to preclude the entry of water and will comply with VA Master Specification 07 84 00, Firestopping. The conduit riser shall terminate in a hot-dipped galvanized metal cable terminator. The terminator shall be filled with an approved sealant as recommended by the cable manufacturer and in such a manner that the cable is not damaged.

L. Cold Galvanizing: All field welds and brazing on factory galvanized boxes, enclosures, and conduits shall be coated with a cold galvanized paint containing at least 95 percent zinc by weight.

M. Interconnection of Console Video Equipment: The Contractor shall connect signal paths between video equipment as specified by the OEM. Cables shall be as short as practicable for each signal path without causing strain at the connectors. Rack mounted equipment on slide mounts shall have cables of sufficient length to allow full extension of the slide rails from the rack.

N. Cameras:

1. Install the cameras with the focal length lens as indicated for each zone.

2. Connect power and signal lines to the camera.


28 23 00 VARHS

3. Set cameras with fixed iris lenses to the f-stop to give full video level.

4. Aim camera to give field of view as needed to cover the alarm zone.

5. Aim fixed mounted cameras installed outdoors facing the rising or setting sun sufficiently below the horizon to preclude the camera looking directly at the sun.

6. Focus the lens to give a sharp picture (to include checking for day and night focus and image quality) over the entire field of view; and synchronize all cameras so the picture does not roll on the monitor when cameras are selected. Dome cameras shall have all preset positions defined and installed.

O. Monitors:

1. Install the monitors as shown and specified in design and construction documents.

2. Connect all signal inputs and outputs as shown and specified.

3. Terminate video input signals as required.

4. Connect the monitor to AC power.

P. Switcher:

1. Install the switcher as shown in the design and construction documents, and according to the OEM.

2. Connect all subassemblies as specified by the manufacturer and as shown.

3. Connect video signal inputs and outputs as shown and specified; terminate video inputs as required.

4. Connect alarm signal inputs and outputs as shown and specified; connect control signal inputs and outputs for ancillary equipment or secondary control/monitoring sites as specified by the manufacturer and as shown.

5. Connect the switcher CPU and switcher subassemblies to AC power.

6. Load all software as specified and required for an operational CCTV System configured for the site and building requirements, including data bases, operational parameters, and system, command, and application programs.

7. Provide the original and 2 backup copies for all accepted software upon successful completion of the endurance test.

8. Program the video annotation for each camera.

Q. Video Recording Equipment:

1. Install the video recording equipment as shown in the design and construction documents, and as specified by the OEM.

2. Connect video signal inputs and outputs as shown and specified.

3. Connect alarm signal inputs and outputs as shown and specified.

4. Connect video recording equipment to AC power.

R. Video Signal Equipment:


28 23 00 VARHS

1. Install the video signal equipment as shown in the design and construction documents, and as specified by the OEM.

2. Connect video or signal inputs and outputs as shown and specified.

3. Terminate video inputs as required.

4. Connect alarm signal inputs and outputs as required.

5. Connect control signal inputs and outputs as required

6. Connect electrically powered equipment to AC power.

S. Camera Housings, Mounts, and Poles:

1. Install the camera housings and mounts as specified by the manufacturer and as shown, provide mounting hardware sized appropriately to secure each camera, housing and mount with maximum wind and ice loading encountered at the site.

2. Provide a foundation for each camera pole as specified and shown.

3. Provide a ground rod for each camera pole and connect the camera pole to the ground rod as specified in Division 26 of the VA Master Specification and the VA Electrical Manual 730.

4. Provide electrical and signal transmission cabling to the mount location via a hardened carrier system from the Access Control System and Database Management to the device.

5. Connect signal lines and AC power to the housing interfaces.

6. Connect pole wiring harness to camera.

3.3. SYSTEM START-UP

A. The Contractor shall not apply power to the CCTV System until the following items have been completed:

1. CCTV System equipment items and have been set up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. A visual inspection of the CCTV System has been conducted to ensure that defective equipment items have not been installed and that there are no loose connections.

3. System wiring has been tested and verified as correctly connected as indicated.

4. All system grounding and transient protection systems have been verified as installed and connected as indicated.

5. Power supplies to be connected to the CCTV System have been verified as the correct voltage, phasing, and frequency as indicated.

B. The Commissioning Agent will observe startup and contractor testing of selected equipment. Coordinate the startup and contractor testing schedules with the Resident Engineer and Commissioning Agent. Provide a minimum of 7 days prior notice.

C. Satisfaction of the above requirements shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for incorrect installation, defective equipment items, or collateral damage as a result of Contractor work efforts.


28 23 00 VARHS

3.4. SUPLEMENTAL CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall provide the services of technical representatives who are familiar with all components and installation procedures of the installed CCTV System; and are approved by the Contracting Officer.

B. The Contractor will be present on the job site during the preparatory and initial phases of quality control to provide technical assistance.

C. The Contractor shall also be available on an as needed basis to provide assistance with follow-up phases of quality control.

D. The Contractor shall participate in the testing and validation of the system and shall provide certification that the system installed is fully operational as all construction document requirements have been fulfilled.

3.5 COMMISSIONING

A. Provide commissioning documentation in accordance with the requirements of Section 28 08 00 – COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY for all inspection, start up, and contractor testing required above and required by the System Readiness Checklist provided by the Commissioning Agent.

B. Components provided under this section of the specification will be tested as part of a larger system. Refer to Section 28 08 00 – COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY and related sections for contractor responsibilities for system commissioning.

3.6 TESTING AND TRAINING

A. All testing and training shall be compliant with the VA General Requirements, Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

B. Provide services of manufacturer’s technical representative for four (4) hours to instruct VA personnel in operation and maintenance of units.

C. Submit training plans and instructor qualifications in accordance with the requirements of Section 28 08 00 – COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEMS.

-----END----


SECTION 28 23 29 DOOR INTERCOM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide a complete intercom system for full duplex voice communication at specific locations shown on Drawings.

B. System shall be interconnected and shall be custom designed to accomplish and comply with communications operation as called for on the drawings and herein.

C. The intercom system shall be complete with all required components, equipment, wiring, power supplies, software, programming, documentation, testing and miscellaneous items required for a complete and operational system.

D. The system shall be installed to facilitate voice communication and video identification between any door/entrance station and the master station and computer workstations located within control room 104.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data for each item of equipment used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Installation methods.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following:

1. Wiring Diagrams: indicate wiring for each item of equipment and interconnections between items of equipment.

2. Include manufacturer’s names, model numbers, ratings, power requirements, equipment layout, device arrangement, complete wiring point-to-point diagrams, and conduit layouts.

C. Installation and Operation Manuals:

1. Submit manufacturer’s installation and operation manual, including operation instructions and component wiring diagrams.

2. Provide detailed information required for Owner to properly operate equipment.

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three years experience.

B. Supplier: Company authorized by manufacturer and specializing in supplying products specified in this Section with minimum three years experience.


28 23 29 VARHS

1.4 SYSTEM OPERATION

A. Intercom system shall be interconnected to the access control system and the building automation system as required to facilitate the following operation:

1. Activation by any door intercom station will display the corresponding video image from the door station camera on both a workstation monitor and any other dedicated screen located in control room 104.

2. Personnel can observe an individual, communicate through the intercom, and have the option to remotely release the door lock from both a master station and a routine on workstation located in control room 104.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Aiphone.

B. No substitutions acceptable.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Master Station: Hands free wall or desk mountable master intercom unit with audible signal for incoming calls and LED indicators for each door/entrance station. Unit shall have selector switch for each door/entrance station and all call and volume control for listen volume level only.

B. Door/Entrance Station: Shall consist of a vandal resistant, momentary action, call button, color video camera, hands free intercom, and LED backlit locator mounted into a stainless steel flush housing. Station shall be weather resistant for outdoor installations.

C. Head-End Equipment: Shall support at a minimum 4 master stations, 8 door/entrance stations and capable of expanding up to 104 door/entrance stations. Equipment shall handle the calling and communication signals for the system and have the capability of providing selective door release outputs. Equipment shall be rack-mounted.

D. Video Multiplexer: Provide color video modulator to allow video from door station camera to be viewed on monitor.

E. Wiring: Master station and door/entrance stations shall be connected directly to head-end equipment via homerun, minimum (2) #18 AWG or CAT5e cabling with RJ-45 jacks as required.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive Work and notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use.

B. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. The installation shall be accomplished with quality materials in a neat and professional manner. Materials under this section or other sections of the specifications damaged during this installation shall be replaced with new materials at no additional cost to the Owner.


28 23 29 VARHS

B. Prior to beginning work, hold a coordination meeting to coordinate all interfaces between equipment, rough-in requirements, phasing issues, etc.

C. Verify location of head-end equipment with Owner.

D. Install intercom systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at locations indicated on the Drawings.

E. Remote electronics and junction boxes shall not be installed in inaccessible ceilings. They shall be located in the nearest accessible ceiling and all wiring routed to the security devices.

F. All wiring shall be concealed in raceway, regardless of location.

3.3 PROGRAMMING

Provide complete programming of all system components per Owners Instructions.

3.4 COMMISSIONING

A. Provide commissioning documentation in accordance with the requirements of Section 28 08 00 – COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEMS for all inspection, start up, and contractor testing required above and required by the System Readiness Checklist provided by the Commissioning Agent.

B. Components provided under this section of the specification will be tested as part of a larger system. Refer to Section 28 08 00 – COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEMS and related sections for contractor responsibilities for system commissioning.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Demonstration:

1. Demonstrate that intercom system functions properly.

2. Perform demonstration at final system inspection by qualified representative of manufacturer.

B. Instruction and Training:

1. Provide a minimum of 4 hours of on-site instruction and training of Owner’s personnel as required for operation of intercom system.

2. Provide hands-on demonstration of operation of system components and complete system, including user-level program changes and functions.

3. Provide instruction and training by qualified representative of manufacturer. At the end of training, provide a certification letter indicating the training was given and understood by the attendees.

---END---


SECTION 28 31 09 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section of the specifications includes the furnishing, installation, and connection of the fire alarm equipment to form a complete coordinated system ready for operation. It shall include, but not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, control units, fire safety control devices, annunciators, power supplies, and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified. The fire alarm system shall not be combined with other systems such as building automation, energy management, security, etc.

B. Fire alarm systems shall comply with requirements of the most recent VA FIRE PROTECTION DESIGN MANUAL and NFPA 72 unless variations to NFPA 72 are specifically identified within these contract documents by the following notation: "variation". The design, system layout, document submittal preparation, and supervision of installation and testing shall be provided by a technician that is certified NICET level III or a registered fire protection engineer. The NICET certified technician shall be on site for the supervision and testing of the system. Factory engineers from the equipment manufacturer, thoroughly familiar and knowledgeable with all equipment utilized, shall provide additional technical support at the site as required by the Resident Engineer or his authorized representative. Installers shall have a minimum of 2 years experience installing fire alarm systems.

C. Fire alarm signals:

1. The Building shall have a general evacuation fire alarm signal in accordance with ASA S3.41 to notify all occupants in the respective building to evacuate.

D. Alarm signals (by device), supervisory signals (by device) and system trouble signals (by device not reporting) shall be distinctly transmitted to the main fire alarm system control unit located in the boiler plant.

E. The main fire alarm control unit shall automatically transmit alarm signals to a listed central station using a digital alarm communicator transmitter in accordance with NFPA 72.

1.2 SCOPE

A. A fully addressable fire alarm system shall be designed and installed in accordance with the specifications and drawings. Device location and wiring runs shown on the drawings are for reference only unless specifically dimensioned. Actual locations shall be in accordance with NFPA 72 and this specification.

B. All existing fire alarm equipment, wiring, devices and sub-systems that are not shown to be reused shall be removed. All existing fire alarm conduit not reused shall be removed.

C. Basic Performance:

1. Alarm and trouble signals from each building fire alarm control panel shall be digitally encoded by UL listed electronic devices onto a multiplexed communication system.

2. Response time between alarm initiation (contact closure) and recording at the main fire alarm control unit (appearance on alphanumeric read out) shall not exceed 5 seconds.

3. The signaling line circuits (SLC) between building fire alarm control units shall be wired Style 7 in accordance with NFPA 72. Isolation shall be provided so that no more than one building can be lost due to a short circuit fault.


28 31 09 VARHS

4. Initiating device circuits (IDC) shall be wired Style C in accordance with NFPA 72.

5. Signaling line circuits (SLC) within buildings shall be wired Style 4 in accordance with NFPA 72. Individual signaling line circuits shall be limited to covering 22,500 square feet (2,090 square meters) of floor space or 3 floors whichever is less.

6. Notification appliance circuits (NAC) shall be wired Style Y in accordance with NFPA 72.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.

Requirements for procedures for submittals.

B. Section 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING. Requirements for fire proofing wall penetrations.

C. Section 21 13 13 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS. Requirements for sprinkler systems.

D. Section 28 05 11 – REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY INSTALLATIONS. Requirements for general requirements that are common to more than one section in Division 28.

E. Section 28 05 13 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY. Requirements for conductors and cables.

F. Section 28 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY. Requirements for grounding of equipment.

G. Section 27 05 33 – RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS. Requirements for conductors and cables.

H. Section 28 08 00, COMMISIONING OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY. Requirements for commissioning - systems readiness checklists, and training.

I. Section 28 13 00, PHYSICAL ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (PACS). Requirements for integration with physical access control system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit 5 copies in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, and Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.

B. Drawings:

1. Prepare drawings using AutoCAD Release 14 software and include all contractors information. Layering shall be by VA criteria as provided by the Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative (COTR). Bid drawing files on AutoCAD will be provided to the Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The contractor shall be responsible for verifying all critical dimensions shown on the drawings provided by VA.

2. Floor plans: Provide locations of all devices (with device number at each addressable device corresponding to control unit programming), appliances, panels, equipment, junction/terminal cabinets/boxes, risers, electrical power connections, individual circuits and raceway routing, system zoning; number, size, and type of raceways and conductors in each raceway; conduit fill calculations


28 31 09 VARHS

with cross section area percent fill for each type and size of conductor and raceway. Only those devices connected and incorporated into the final system shall be on these floor plans. Do not show any removed devices on the floor plans. Show all interfaces for all fire safety functions.

3. Riser diagrams: Provide, for the entire system, the number, size and type of riser raceways and conductors in each riser raceway and number of each type device per floor and zone. Show door holder interface, elevator control interface, HVAC shutdown interface, fire extinguishing system interface, and all other fire safety interfaces. Show wiring Styles on the riser diagram for all circuits. Provide diagrams both on a per building and campus wide basis.

4. Detailed wiring diagrams: Provide for control panels, modules, power supplies, electrical power connections, auxiliary relays and annunciators showing termination identifications, size and type conductors, circuit boards, LED lamps, indicators, adjustable controls, switches, ribbon connectors, wiring harnesses, terminal strips and connectors, spare zones/circuits. Diagrams shall be drawn to a scale sufficient to show spatial relationships between components, enclosures and equipment configuration.

5. Two weeks prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall deliver to the COTR 3 sets of as-built drawings and one set of the as-built drawing computer files. As-built drawings (floor plans) shall show all new and/or existing conduit used for the fire alarm system.

C. Manuals:

1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets for all items used in the system, power requirements, device wiring diagrams, dimensions, and information for ordering replacement parts.

a. Wiring diagrams shall have their terminals identified to facilitate installation, operation, expansion and maintenance.

b. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnections between the items of equipment.

c. Include complete listing of all software used and installation and operation instructions including the input/output matrix chart.

d. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the information required to properly operate, inspect, test and maintain the equipment and system. Provide all manufacturer's installation limitations including but not limited to circuit length limitations.

e. Complete listing of all digitized voice messages.

f. Provide standby battery calculations under normal operating and alarm modes. Battery calculations shall include the magnets for holding the doors open for one minute.

g. Include information indicating who will provide emergency service and perform post contract maintenance.

h. Provide a replacement parts list with current prices. Include a list of recommended spare parts, tools, and instruments for testing and maintenance purposes.

i. A computerized preventive maintenance schedule for all equipment. The schedule shall be provided on disk in a computer format acceptable to the VAMC and shall describe the protocol for preventive maintenance of all equipment. The schedule shall include the required times for systematic examination, adjustment and cleaning of all equipment. A print out of the schedule shall also be provided in the manual. Provide the disk in a pocket within the manual.


28 31 09 VARHS

j. Furnish manuals in 3 ring loose-leaf binder or manufacturer's standard binder.

k. A print out for all devices proposed on each signaling line circuit with spare capacity indicated.

2. Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver 4 copies of the final updated maintenance and operating manual to the COTR.

a. The manual shall be updated to include any information necessitated by the maintenance and operating manual approval.

b. Complete "As installed" wiring and schematic diagrams shall be included that shows all items of equipment and their interconnecting wiring. Show all final terminal identifications.

c. Complete listing of all programming information, including all control events per device including an updated input/output matrix.

d. Certificate of Installation as required by NFPA 72 for each building. The certificate shall identify any variations from the National Fire Alarm Code.

e. Certificate from equipment manufacturer assuring compliance with all manufacturers installation requirements and satisfactory system operation.

D. Certifications:

1. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit the technician's NICET level III fire alarm certification as well as certification from the control unit manufacturer that the proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized representative of the major equipment manufacturer. Include in the certification the names and addresses of the proposed supervisor of installation and the proposed performer of contract maintenance. Also include the name and title of the manufacturer’s representative who makes the certification.

2. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from either the control unit manufacturer or the manufacturer of each component (e.g., smoke detector) that the components being furnished are compatible with the control unit.

3. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major equipment manufacturer that the wiring and connection diagrams meet this specification, UL and NFPA 72 requirements.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall be free from defects and shall remain so for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the entire installation by the Contracting Officer.

1.6 GUARANTY PERIOD SERVICES

A. Complete inspection, testing, maintenance and repair service for the fire alarm system shall be provided by a factory trained authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment for a period of 5 years from the date of acceptance of the entire installation by the Contracting Officer.

B. Contractor shall provide all necessary test equipment, parts and labor to perform required inspection, testing, maintenance and repair.


28 31 09 VARHS

C. All inspection, testing, maintenance and permanent records required by NFPA 72, and recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be provided by the contractor. Work shall include operation of sprinkler system alarm and supervisory devices as well as all reused existing equipment connected to the fire alarm system. It shall include all interfaced equipment including but not limited to elevators, HVAC shutdown, and extinguishing systems.

D. Maintenance and testing shall be performed in accordance with NFPA 72. A computerized preventive maintenance schedule shall be provided and shall describe the protocol for preventive maintenance of equipment. The schedule shall include a systematic examination, adjustment and cleaning of all equipment.

E. Non-included Work: Repair service shall not include the performance of any work due to improper use, accidents, or negligence for which the contractor is not responsible.

F. Service and emergency personnel shall report to the Engineering Office or their authorized representative upon arrival at the hospital and again upon the completion of the required work. A copy of the work ticket containing a complete description of the work performed and parts replaced shall be provided to the VA Resident Engineer or his authorized representative.

G. Emergency Service:

1. Warranty Period Service: Service other than the preventative maintenance, inspection, and testing required by NFPA 72 shall be considered emergency call-back service and covered under the warranty of the installation during the first year of the warranty period, unless the required service is a result of abuse or misuse by the Government. Written notification shall not be required for emergency warranty period service and the contractor shall respond as outlined in the following sections on Normal and Overtime Emergency Call-Back Service. Warranty period service can be required during normal or overtime emergency call-back service time periods at the discretion of the Resident Engineer or his authorized representative.

2. Normal and overtime emergency call-back service shall consist of an on-site response within 2 hours of notification of a system trouble.

3. Normal emergency call-back service times are between the hours of 7:30 a.m. and 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, exclusive of federal holidays. Service performed during all other times shall be considered to be overtime emergency call-back service. The cost of all normal emergency call-back service for years 2 through 5 shall be included in the cost of this contract.

4. Overtime emergency call-back service shall be provided for the system when requested by the Government. The cost of the first 40 manhours per year of overtime call-back service during years 2 through 5 of this contract shall be provided under this contract. Payment for overtime emergency call-back service in excess of the 40 man hours per year requirement will be handled through separate purchase orders. The method of calculating overtime emergency call-back hours is based on actual time spent on site and does not include travel time.

H. The contractor shall maintain a log at each fire alarm control unit. The log shall list the date and time of all examinations and trouble calls, condition of the system, and name of the technician. Each trouble call shall be fully described, including the nature of the trouble, necessary correction performed, and parts replaced.


A. The publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in text by the basic designation only and the latest editions of these publications shall be applicable.


28 31 09 VARHS


NFPA 13 ................ .........................Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2010 edition

NFPA 14 ................ ........................Standard for the Installation of Standpipes and Hose Systems, 2010 edition

NFPA 20 ................ ......................... Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection, 2010 edition

NFPA 70 ..........................................National Electrical Code (NEC), 2010 edition

NFPA 72 ..........................................National Fire Alarm Code, 2010 edition

NFPA 90A .......................................Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, 2009 edition

NFPA 101 ........................................Life Safety Code, 2009 edition

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Fire Protection Equipment Directory

D. Factory Mutual Research Corp (FM): Approval Guide, 2007-2011

E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

S3.41................................................Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal, 1990 edition, reaffirmed 2008

F. International Code Council, International Building Code (IBC), 2009 edition

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. All equipment and components shall be new and the manufacturer's current model. All equipment shall be tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or Factory Mutual Research Corporation for use as part of a fire alarm system. The authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall certify that the installation complies with all manufacturers’ requirements and that satisfactory total system operation has been achieved.

2.2 CONDUIT, BOXES, AND WIRE

A. Conduit shall be in accordance with SECTION 27 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS and as follows:

1. All new conduits shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 70.

2. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area.

3. All new conduits shall be 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum.

B. Wire:

1. Wiring shall be in accordance with NEC article 760 and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. All wires shall be color coded. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG for initiating device circuits and 14 AWG for notification device circuits.


28 31 09 VARHS

2. Addressable circuits and wiring used for the multiplex communication loop shall be twisted and shielded unless specifically excepted by the fire alarm equipment manufacturer in writing.

3. Any fire alarm system wiring that extends outside of a building shall have additional power surge protection to protect equipment from physical damage and false signals due to lightning, voltage and current induced transients. Protection devices shall be shown on the submittal drawings and shall be UL listed or in accordance with written manufacturer's requirements.

4. All wire or cable used in underground conduits including those in concrete shall be listed for wet locations.

C. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes, and Cabinets:

1. Shall be galvanized steel in accordance with UL requirements.

2. All boxes shall be sized and installed in accordance with NFPA 70.

3. covers shall be repainted red in accordance with Section 09 91 00, PAINTING and shall be identified with white markings as "FA" for junction boxes and as "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM" for cabinets and terminal boxes. Lettering shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch (19 mm) high.

4. Terminal boxes and cabinets shall have a volume 50 percent greater than required by the NFPA 70. Minimum sized wire shall be considered as 14 AWG for calculation purposes.

5. Terminal boxes and cabinets shall have identified pressure type terminal strips and shall be located at the base of each riser. Terminal strips shall be labeled as specified or as approved by the COTR.

2.3 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. General:

1. Each building shall be provided with a fire alarm control unit and shall operate as a supervised zoned fire alarm system.

2. Each power source shall be supervised from the other source for loss of power.

3. All circuits shall be monitored for integrity.

4. Visually and audibly annunciate any trouble condition including, but not limited to main power failure, grounds and system wiring derangement.

5. Transmit digital alarm information to the main fire alarm control unit.

B. Enclosure:

1. The control unit shall be housed in a cabinet suitable for both recessed and surface mounting. Cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rust-resistant prime coat, and manufacturer's standard finish.

2. Cabinet shall contain all necessary relays, terminals, lamps, and legend plates to provide control for the system.

C. Operator terminal at main control unit:


28 31 09 VARHS

1. Operator terminal shall consist of the central processing unit, display screen, keyboard and printer.

2. Display screen shall have a minimum 15-inch (380 mm) diagonal non-glare screen capable of displaying 24 lines of 80 characters each.

3. Keyboard shall consist of 60 alpha numeric and 12 user/functional control keys.

4. Printer shall be the automatic type, printing the date, time and location for all alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions.

D. Power Supply:

1. The control unit shall derive its normal power from a 120 volt, 60 Hz dedicated supply connected to the emergency power system. Standby power shall be provided by a 24 volt DC battery as hereinafter specified. The normal power shall be transformed, rectified, coordinated, and interfaced with the standby battery and charger.

2. The door holder power shall be arranged so that momentary or sustained loss of main operating power shall not cause the release of any door.

3. Power supply for smoke detectors shall be taken from the fire alarm control unit.

4. Provide protectors to protect the fire alarm equipment from damage due to lightning or voltage and current transients.

5. Provide new separate and direct ground lines to the outside to protect the equipment from unwanted grounds.

E. Circuit Supervision: Each alarm initiating device circuit, signaling line circuit, and notification appliance circuit, shall be supervised against the occurrence of a break or ground fault condition in the field wiring. These conditions shall cause a trouble signal to sound in the control unit until manually silenced by an off switch.

F. Supervisory Devices: All sprinkler system valves, standpipe control valves, post indicator valves (PIV), and main gate valves shall be supervised for off-normal position. Closing a valve shall sound a supervisory signal at the control unit until silenced by an off switch. The specific location of all closed valves shall be identified at the control unit. Valve operation shall not cause an alarm signal. Low air pressure switches and duct detectors shall be monitored as supervisory signals. The power supply to the elevator shunt trip breaker shall be monitored by the fire alarm system as a supervisory signal.

G. Trouble signals:

1. Arrange the trouble signals for automatic reset (non-latching).

2. System trouble switch off and on lamps shall be visible through the control unit door.

H. Function Switches: Provide the following switches in addition to any other switches required for the system:

1. Remote Alarm Transmission By-pass Switch: Shall prevent transmission of all signals to the main fire alarm control unit when in the "off" position. A system trouble signal shall be energized when switch is in the off position.

2. Alarm Off Switch: Shall disconnect power to alarm notification circuits on the local building alarm system. A system trouble signal shall be activated when switch is in the off position.


28 31 09 VARHS

3. Trouble Silence Switch: Shall silence the trouble signal whenever the trouble silence switch is operated. This switch shall not reset the trouble signal.

4. Reset Switch: Shall reset the system after an alarm, provided the initiating device has been reset. The system shall lock in alarm until reset.

5. Lamp Test Switch: A test switch or other approved convenient means shall be provided to test the indicator lamps.

6. Drill Switch: Shall activate all notification devices without tripping the remote alarm transmitter. This switch is required only for general evacuation systems specified herein.

7. Door Holder By-Pass Switch: Shall prevent doors from releasing during fire alarm tests. A system trouble alarm shall be energized when switch is in the abnormal position.

8. Elevator recall By-Pass Switch: Shall prevent the elevators from recalling upon operation of any of the devices installed to perform that function. A system trouble alarm shall be energized when the switch is in the abnormal position.

9. HVAC/Smoke Damper By-Pass: Provide a means to disable HVAC fans from shutting down and/or smoke dampers from closing upon operation of an initiating device designed to interconnect with these devices.

I. Remote Transmissions:

1. Provide capability and equipment for transmission of alarm, supervisory and trouble signals to the main fire alarm control unit.

2. Transmitters shall be compatible with the systems and equipment they are connected to such as timing, operation and other required features.

J. Remote Control Capability: Each building fire alarm control unit shall be installed and programmed so that each must be reset locally after an alarm, before the main fire alarm control unit can be reset. After the local building fire alarm control unit has been reset, then the all system acknowledge, reset, silence or disabling functions can be operated by the main fire alarm control unit.

K. System Expansion: Design the control units and enclosures so that the system can be expanded in the future (to include the addition of 20 percent more alarm initiating, alarm notification and door holder circuits) without disruption or replacement of the existing control unit and secondary power supply.

2.4 STANDBY POWER SUPPLY

A. Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS):

1. The UPS system shall be comprised of a static inverter, a precision battery float charger, and sealed maintenance free batteries.

2. Under normal operating conditions, the load shall be filtered through a ferroresonant transformer.

3. When normal AC power fails, the inverter shall supply AC power to the transformer from the battery source. There shall be no break in output of the system during transfer of the system from normal to battery supply or back to normal.

4. Batteries shall be sealed, gel cell type.


28 31 09 VARHS

5. UPS system shall be sized to operate the central processor, CRT, printer, and all other directly connected equipment for 5 minutes upon a normal AC power failure.

B. Batteries:

1. Battery shall be of the sealed, maintenance free type, 24-volt nominal.

2. Battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less than 24 hours plus 5 minutes of alarm to an end voltage of 1.14 volts per cell, upon a normal AC power failure.

3. Battery racks shall be steel with an alkali-resistant finish. Batteries shall be secured in seismic areas 2B, 3, or 4 as defined by the Uniform Building Code.

C. Battery Charger:

1. Shall be completely automatic, with constant potential charger maintaining the battery fully charged under all service conditions. Charger shall operate from a 120-volt, 60 hertz emergency power source.

2. Shall be rated for fully charging a completely discharged battery within 48 hours while simultaneously supplying any loads connected to the battery.

3. Shall have protection to prevent discharge through the charger.

4. Shall have protection for overloads and short circuits on both AC and DC sides.

5. A trouble condition shall actuate the fire alarm trouble signal.

6. Charger shall have automatic AC line voltage regulation, automatic current-limiting features, and adjustable voltage controls.

2.5 ANNUNCIATION

A. Annunciator, Alphanumeric Type (System):

1. Shall be a supervised, LCD display containing a minimum of 2 lines of 40 characters for alarm annunciation in clear English text.

2. Message shall identify building number, floor, zone, etc on the first line and device description and status (pull station, smoke detector, waterflow alarm or trouble condition) on the second line.

3. The initial alarm received shall be indicated as such.

4. A selector switch shall be provided for viewing subsequent alarm messages.

5. The display shall be UL listed for fire alarm application.

6. Annunciators shall display information for all buildings connected to the system. Local building annunciators, for general evacuation system buildings, shall be permitted when shown on the drawings and approved by the COTR.

B. Printers:


28 31 09 VARHS

1. System printers shall be high reliability digital input devices, UL approved, for fire alarm applications. The printers shall operate at a minimum speed of 30 characters per second. The printer shall be continually supervised.

2. Printers shall be programmable to either alarm only or event logging output.

a. Alarm printers shall provide a permanent (printed) record of all alarm information that occurs within the fire alarm system. Alarm information shall include the date, time, building number, floor, zone, device type, device address, and condition.

b. Event logging printers shall provide a permanent (printed) record of every change of status that occurs within the fire alarm system. Status information shall include date, time, building number, floor, zone, device type, device address and change of status (alarm, trouble, supervisory, reset/return to normal).

3. System printers shall provide tractor drive feed pins for conventional fan fold 8-1/2" x 11" (213 mm x 275 mm) paper.

4. The printers shall provide a printing and non-printing self test feature.

5. Power supply for printers shall be taken from and coordinated with the building emergency service.

6. Each printer shall be provided with a stand for the printer and paper.

7. Spare paper and ribbons for printers shall be stocked and maintained as part of the one year guarantee period services in addition to the one installed after the approval of the final acceptance test.

2.6 ALARM INITIATING DEVICES

A. Bells:

1. Shall be electric, single-stroke or vibrating, heavy-duty, under-dome, solenoid type.

2. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, shall be 6 inches (150 mm) diameter and have a minimum nominal rating of 80 dBA at 10 feet (3,000 mm).

3. Mount on removable adapter plates on outlet boxes.

4. Bells located outdoors shall be weatherproof type with metal housing and protective grille.

5. Each bell circuit shall have a minimum of 20 percent spare capacity.

B. Strobes:

1. Xenon flash tube type minimum 15 candela in toilet rooms and 75 candela in all other areas with a flash rate of 1 HZ. Strobes shall be synchronized where required by the National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72).

2. Backplate shall be red with 1/2 inch (13 mm) permanent red letters. Lettering to read “FIRE”, be oriented on the wall or ceiling properly, and be visible from all viewing directions.

3. Each strobe circuit shall have a minimum of 20 percent spare capacity.

4. Strobes may be combined with the audible notification appliances specified herein.


28 31 09 VARHS

C. Fire Alarm Horns:

1. Shall be electric, utilizing solid state electronic technology operating on a nominal 24 VDC.

2. Shall be a minimum nominal rating of 80 dBA at 10 feet (3,000 mm).

3. Mount on removable adapter plates on conduit boxes.

4. Horns located outdoors shall be of weatherproof type with metal housing and protective grille.

5. Each horn circuit shall have a minimum of 20 percent spare capacity.

2.7 ALARM INITIATING DEVICES

A. Manual Fire Alarm Stations:

1. Shall be non-breakglass, address reporting type.

2. Station front shall be constructed of a durable material such as cast or extruded metal or high impact plastic. Stations shall be semi-flush type.

3. Stations shall be of single action pull down type with suitable operating instructions provided on front in raised or depressed letters, and clearly labeled "FIRE."

4. Operating handles shall be constructed of a durable material. On operation, the lever shall lock in alarm position and remain so until reset. A key shall be required to gain front access for resetting, or conducting tests and drills.

5. Unless otherwise specified, all exposed parts shall be red in color and have a smooth, hard, durable finish.

B. Smoke Detectors:

1. Smoke detectors shall be photoelectric type and UL listed for use with the fire alarm control unit being furnished.

2. Smoke detectors shall be addressable type complying with applicable UL Standards for system type detectors. Smoke detectors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 72.

3. Detectors shall have an indication lamp to denote an alarm condition. Provide remote indicator lamps and identification plates where detectors are concealed from view. Locate the remote indicator lamps and identification plates flush mounted on walls so they can be observed from a normal standing position.

4. All spot type and duct type detectors installed shall be of the photoelectric type.

5. Photoelectric detectors shall be factory calibrated and readily field adjustable. The sensitivity of any photoelectric detector shall be factory set at 3.0 plus or minus 0.25 percent obscuration per foot.

6. Detectors shall provide a visual trouble indication if they drift out of sensitivity range or fail internal diagnostics. Detectors shall also provide visual indication of sensitivity level upon testing. Detectors, along with the fire alarm control units shall be UL listed for testing the sensitivity of the detectors.

C. Heat Detectors:


28 31 09 VARHS

1. Heat detectors shall be of the addressable restorable rate compensated fixed-temperature spot type.

2. Detectors shall have a minimum smooth ceiling rating of 2,500 square feet (230 square meters).

3. Ordinary temperature (135 degrees F (57 degrees C)) heat detectors shall be utilized in elevator shafts and elevator mechanical rooms. Intermediate temperature rated (200 degrees F (93 degrees C)) heat detectors shall be utilized in all other areas.

4. Provide a remote indicator lamp, key test station and identification nameplate (e.g. “Heat Detector - Elevator P- ) for each elevator group. Locate key test station in plain view on elevator machine room wall.

2.8 SUPERVISORY DEVICES

A. Duct Smoke Detectors:

1. Duct smoke detectors shall be provided and connected by way of an address reporting interface device. Detectors shall be provided with an approved duct housing mounted exterior to the duct, and shall have perforated sampling tubes extending across the full width of the duct (wall to wall). Detector placement shall be such that there is uniform airflow in the cross section of the duct.

2. Interlocking with fans shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 90A and as specified hereinafter under Part 3.2, "TYPICAL OPERATION".

3. Provide remote indicator lamps, key test stations and identification nameplates (e.g. "DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR AHU-X") for all duct detectors. Locate key test stations in plain view on walls or ceilings so that they can be observed and operated from a normal standing position.

B. Sprinkler and Standpipe System Supervisory Switches:

1. Each sprinkler system water supply control valve, riser valve or zone control valve, and each standpipe system riser control valve shall be equipped with a supervisory switch. Standpipe hose valves, and test and drain valves shall not be equipped with supervisory switches.

2. PIV (post indicator valve) or main gate valve shall be equipped with a supervisory switch.

3. Valve supervisory switches shall be connected to the fire alarm system by way of address reporting interface device. See Section 21 13 13, WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS for new switches to be added. Connect tamper switches for all control valves shown on the approved shop drawings.

4. The mechanism shall be contained in a weatherproof die-cast aluminum housing that shall provide a 3/4 inch (19 mm) tapped conduit entrance and incorporate the necessary facilities for attachment to the valves.

5. The entire installed assembly shall be tamper-proof and arranged to cause a switch operation if the housing cover is removed or if the unit is removed from its mounting.

6. Where dry-pipe sprinkler systems are installed, high and low air pressure switches shall be provided and monitored by way of an address reporting interface devices.


28 31 09 VARHS

2.9 SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS

A. Provide spare and replacement parts as follows:

1. Manual pull stations – 2

2. Fire alarm strobes – 4

3. Fire alarm bells – 4

4. 2.5 oz containers aerosol smoke – 4

5. Printer paper - 1 box

B. Spare and replacement parts shall be in original packaging and submitted to the COTR.

C. Furnish and install a storage cabinet of sufficient size and suitable for storing spare equipment. Doors shall include a pad locking device. Padlock to be provided by the VA. Location of cabinet to be determined by the COTR.

D. Provide to the VA, all hardware, software, programming tools, license and documentation necessary to permanently modify the fire alarm system on site. The minimum level of modification includes addition and deletion of devices, circuits, zones and changes to system description, system operation, and digitized evacuation and instructional messages.

2.10 INSTRUCTION CHART

Provide typewritten instruction card mounted behind a Lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame with a backplate. Install the frame in a conspicuous location observable from each control unit where operations are performed. The card shall show those steps to be taken by an operator when a signal is received under all conditions, normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble. Provide an additional copy with the binder for the input output matrix for the sequence of operation. The instructions shall be approved by the COTR before being posted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 70, 72, 90A, and 101 as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer. Fire alarm wiring shall be installed in conduit. All conduit and wire shall be installed in accordance with, Section 28 05 13 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY, Section 28 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY, SECTION 27 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS and all penetrations of smoke and fire barriers shall be protected as required by Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

B. All conduits, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas.

C. All new and reused exposed conduits shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 91 00, PAINTING to match surrounding finished areas and red in unfinished areas.

D. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control units and remote annunciators shall be flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas. Exact locations are to be approved by the COTR.


28 31 09 VARHS

E. Speakers shall be ceiling mounted and fully recessed in areas with suspended ceilings. Speakers shall be wall mounted and recessed in finished areas without suspended ceilings. Speakers may be surface mounted in unfinished areas.

F. Strobes shall be flush wall mounted with the bottom of the unit located 80 inches (2,000 mm) above the floor or 6 inches (150 mm) below ceiling, whichever is lower. Locate and mount to maintain a minimum 36 inches (900 mm) clearance from side obstructions.

G. Manual pull stations shall be installed not less than 42 inches (1,050 mm) or more than 48 inches (1,200 mm) from finished floor to bottom of device and within 60 inches (1,500 mm) of a stairway or an exit door.

H. Where possible, locate water flow and pressure switches a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) from a fitting that changes the direction of the flow and a minimum of 36 inches (900 mm) from a valve.

I. Mount valve tamper switches so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve and adjust to operate within 2 revolutions toward the closed position of the valve control, or when the stem has moved no more than 1/5 of the distance from its normal position.

J. Connect flow and tamper switches installed under Section 21 13 13, WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS.

3.2 TYPICAL OPERATION

A. Activation of any manual pull station, water flow or pressure switch, heat detector, kitchen hood suppression system, gaseous suppression system, or smoke detector shall cause the following operations to occur:

1. Continuously sound a temporal pattern general alarm and flash all strobes in the building in alarm until reset at the local fire alarm control unit in Building.

2. Release only the magnetic door holders on the floor from which alarm was initiated.

3. Transmit a separate alarm signal, via the main fire alarm control unit to the fire department.

4. Unlock the electrically locked exit doors within the zone of alarm.

B. Heat detectors in elevator machine rooms shall, in addition to the above functions, disconnect all power to all elevators served by that machine room after a time delay. The time delay shall be programmed within the fire alarm system programming and be equal to the time it takes for the car to travel from the highest to the lowest level, plus 10 seconds.

C. Operation of any sprinkler or standpipe system valve supervisory switch, high/low air pressure switch, or fire pump alarm switch shall cause a system supervisory condition.

D. Alarm verification shall not be used for smoke detectors installed for the purpose of early warning.

3.3 TESTS

A. Provide the service of a NICET level III, competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. Make all adjustments and tests in the presence of the COTR.

B. When the systems have been completed and prior to the scheduling of the final inspection, furnish testing equipment and perform the following tests in the presence of the COTR. When any defects are detected, make repairs or install replacement components, and repeat the tests until such time that the complete fire


28 31 09 VARHS

alarm systems meets all contract requirements. After the system has passed the initial test and been approved by the COTR, the contractor may request a final inspection.

1. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation.

2. Test the insulation on all installed cable and wiring by standard methods as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

3. Run water through all flow switches. Check time delay on water flow switches. Submit a report listing all water flow switch operations and their retard time in seconds.

4. Open each alarm initiating and notification circuit to see if trouble signal actuates.

5. Ground each alarm initiation and notification circuit and verify response of trouble signals.

3.4 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Prior to final acceptance a minimum 30 day "burn-in" period shall be provided. The purpose shall be to allow equipment to stabilize and potential installation and software problems and equipment malfunctions to be identified and corrected. During this diagnostic period, all system operations and malfunctions shall be recorded. Final acceptance will be made upon successful completion of the "burn-in" period and where the last 14 days is without a system or equipment malfunction.

B. At the final inspection a factory trained representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall repeat the tests in Article 3.3 TESTS and those required by NFPA 72. In addition the representative shall demonstrate that the systems function properly in every respect. The demonstration shall be made in the presence of a VA representative.

3.5 INSTRUCTION

A. The manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide instruction and training to the VA as follows:

1. Six 1-hour sessions to engineering staff, security police and central attendant personnel for simple operation of the system. Two sessions at the start of installation, 2 sessions at the completion of installation and 2 sessions 3 months after the completion of installation.

2. Four 2-hour sessions to engineering staff for detailed operation of the system. Two sessions at the completion of installation and 2 sessions 3 months after the completion of installation.

3. Three 8-hour sessions to electrical technicians for maintaining, programming, modifying, and repairing the system at the completion of installation and one 8-hour refresher session 3 months after the completion of installation.

B. The Contractor and/or the Systems Manufacturer's representative shall provide a typewritten "Sequence of Operation" including a trouble shooting guide of the entire system for submittal to the VA. The sequence of operation will be shown for each input in the system in a matrix format and provided in a loose leaf binder. When reading the sequence of operation, the reader will be able to quickly and easily determine what output will occur upon activation of any input in the system. The INPUT/OUTPUT matrix format shall be as shown in Appendix A to NFPA 72.

C. Furnish the services of a competent instructor for instructing personnel in the programming requirements necessary for system expansion. Such programming shall include addition or deletion of devices, zones, indicating circuits and printer/display text.

- - END - -


SECTION 31 20 11 EARTHWORK (SHORT FORM)

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the requirements for furnishing all equipment, materials, labor and techniques for earthwork including but not limited to, the following:

1. Site preparation.

2. Excavation.

3. Underpinning.

4. Filling and backfilling.

5. Grading.

6. Soil Disposal.

7. Clean Up.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Unsuitable Materials:

1. Fills: Topsoil, frozen materials; construction materials and materials subject to decomposition; clods of clay and stones larger than 3 in. (75 mm); organic materials, including silts, which are unstable; and inorganic materials, including silts, too wet to be stable.

2. Existing Subgrade (except footings): Same materials as above paragraph that are not capable of direct support of slabs, pavement, and similar items, with the possible exception of improvement by compaction, proof rolling, or similar methods of improvement.

3. Existing Subgrade (footings only): Same as paragraph 1, but no fill or backfill. If materials differ from reference borings and design requirements, excavate to acceptable strata subject to Resident Engineer's approval.

B. Building Earthwork: Earthwork operations required in area enclosed by a line located 5 ft (1.5 m) outside of principal building perimeter. It also includes earthwork required for auxiliary structures and buildings.

C. Trench Earthwork: Trenchwork required for utility lines.

D. Site Earthwork: Earthwork operations required in area outside of a line located 5 ft (1.5 m) outside of principal building perimeter and within new construction area with exceptions noted above.

E. Degree of compaction: Degree of compaction is expressed as a percentage of maximum density obtained by laboratory test procedure. This percentage of maximum density is obtained through use of data provided from results of field test procedures presented in ASTM D1556, D2167, and D6938.

F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. In the Construction Documents, the term fill means fill or backfill as appropriate.

31 20 11 ‒ 1 SEISMICALLY UPGRADE BUILDING 7 OCTOBER 2014

31 20 11 VARHS

G. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.

H. Unauthorized excavation: Removal of materials beyond indicated sub-grade elevations or dimensions without written authorization by the Resident Engineer. No payment will be made for unauthorized excavation or remedial work required to correct unauthorized excavation.

I. Authorized additional excavation: Removal of additional material authorized by the Resident Engineer based on the determination by the Government's soils testing agency that unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required sub-grade elevations. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of Conditions of the Contract relative to changes in work.

J. Subgrade: The undisturbed earth or the compacted soil layer immediately below granular sub-base, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

K. Structure: Buildings, foundations, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

L. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

M. Drainage course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water.

N. Bedding course: Layer placed over the excavated sub-grade in a trench before laying pipe.

O. Sub-base Course: Layer placed between the sub-grade and base course for asphalt paving or layer placed between the sub-grade and a concrete pavement or walk.

P. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground services within buildings.

Q. Debris: Debris includes all materials located within the designated work area not covered in the other definitions and shall include but not be limited to items like vehicles, equipment, appliances, building materials or remains thereof, tires, any solid or liquid chemicals or products stored or found in containers or spilled on the ground.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Materials testing and inspection during construction: Section 01 45 29, TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES.

B. Safety Requirements: Section 00 72 00, GENERAL CONDITIONS, Article, ACCIDENT PREVENTION.

C. Protection of existing utilities, fire protection services, existing equipment, roads, and pavements: Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

D. Subsurface Investigation: Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, PHYSICAL DATA.

E. Erosion Control: Section 01 57 19, TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.

F. Paving Subgrade Requirements: Section 32 12 16, ASPHALT PAVING.

1.4 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATION

A. Unclassified Excavation: Removal and disposal of pavements and other man-made obstructions visible on surface; utilities, and other items including underground structures indicated to be demolished and


31 20 11 VARHS

removed; together with any type of materials regardless of character of material and obstructions encountered.

B. Rock Excavation:

1. Trenches and Pits: Removal and disposal of solid, homogenous, interlocking crystalline material with firmly cemented, laminated, or foliated masses or conglomerate deposits that cannot be excavated with a late-model, track-mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42 in. (1,050 mm) wide, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138 hp (103 kW) flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 28,090 lbf (125 kN) and stick-crowd force of not less than 19,000 lbf (84.5 kN); measured according to SAE J1179. Trenches in excess of 10 ft (3 m) wide and pits in excess of 30 ft (9 m) in either length or width are classified as open excavation.

2. Open Excavation: Removal and disposal of solid, homogenous, interlocking crystalline material firmly cemented, laminated, or foliated masses or conglomerate deposits that cannot be dislodged and excavated with a late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 210 hp (157 kW) flywheel power and developing a minimum of 48,510 lbf (216 kN) breakout force; measured according to SAE J732.

3. Other types of materials classified as rock are unstratified masses, conglomerated deposits and boulders of rock material exceeding 1 cubic yard (0.76 m³) for open excavation, or 3/4 cubic yard (0.57 m³) for footing and trench excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the above in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted.

4. Definitions of rock and guidelines for equipment are presented for general information purposes only.

5. The Contractor is expected to use the information presented in the Geotechnical Engineering Studies and Report to evaluate the extent and competency of the rock.

6. Competent rock exists at levels between 3 and 9 feet deep and will need to be removed to complete the project as indicated on the drawings.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Furnish to Resident Engineer, soil samples, suitable for laboratory tests, of proposed off site or on site fill material.

C. Contractor shall submit procedure and location for disposal of unused satisfactory material. Proposed source of borrow material.

D. Contractor shall submit procedures to remove know competent rock.

E. Qualifications of the commercial testing laboratory or Contractor's Testing facility shall be submitted.

1.6 QUALITY CONTROL

A. The Contractor is required to hire a Professional Geotechnical Engineer to provide inspection of excavations, soil conditions and groundwater conditions throughout construction. The Geotechnical Engineer shall be responsible for the following:


31 20 11 VARHS

1. Perform pre-construction and periodic site visits throughout construction to assess site conditions.

2. Assess conditions relative to the previous Geotechnical Studies

3. Update the excavation, sheeting and dewatering plans as construction progresses to reflect changing conditions and shall submit an updated plan if necessary.

4. A written report shall be submitted, at least monthly, informing the Contractor and Resident Engineer of the status of the plan and an accounting of the Contractor's adherence to the plan addressing any present or potential problems.

5. The Geotechnical Engineer shall be available to meet with the Resident Engineer at any time throughout the contract duration.


A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

B. American Nursery and Landscape Association (ANLA): American Standard for Nursery Stock, 2004.


T 99‒10 ................... Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 2.5 kg (5.5 lb) Rammer and a 305 mm (12 inch) Drop

T 180‒10 ................. Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg (10 lb) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 inch) Drop

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

C33‒03 .................... Concrete Aggregate

D698‒07e1 .............. Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort

D1140‒00 ................ Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the No. 200 (75-micrometer) Sieve

D1556‒07 ................ Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method

D1557‒09 ................ Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort

D2167‒08 ................ Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method

D2487‒11 ................ Standard Classification of Soil for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)

D6938‒10 ................ Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

E. Standard Specifications of Oregon State Department of Transportation, latest revision.


31 20 11 VARHS

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Fills: Material approved from on site or off site sources having a minimum dry density of 110 pcf (1,760 kg/m³), a maximum Plasticity Index of 6, and a maximum Liquid Limit of 30.

B. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940; with at least 90% passing a 1 ½ in. (37.5 mm) sieve and no more than 12% passing a 75 μm (No. 200) sieve.

C. Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940; except with 100% passing a 1 in. (25 mm) sieve and not more than 8% passing a 75 μm (No. 200) sieve.

D. Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100% passing a 1 ½ in. (37.5 mm) sieve and 0% to 5% passing a No. 8 (2.36 mm) sieve.

E. Granular Fill:

1. Under concrete slab, crushed stone or gravel graded from 1 in. (25 mm) to No. 4 (4.75 mm).

2. Bedding for sanitary and storm sewer pipe, crushed stone or gravel graded from 1/2 in. (13 mm) to No. 4 (4.75 mm).

F. Requirements for Offsite Soils: Offsite soils brought in for use as backfill shall be tested for TPH, BTEX and full TCLP including ignitability, corrosivity and reactivity. Backfill shall contain less than 100 parts per million (ppm) of total hydrocarbons (TPH) and less than 10 ppm of the sum of Benzene, Toleune, Ethyl Benzene, and Xylene (BTEX) and shall not fail the TCLP test. TPH concentrations shall be determined by using EPA 600/4-79/020 Method 418.1. BTEX concentrations shall be determined by using EPA SW-846.3-3a Method 5030/8020. TCLP shall be performed in accordance with EPA SW-846.3-3a Method 1311. Provide Borrow Site Testing for TPH, BTEX and TCLP from a composite sample of material from the borrow site, with at least one test from each borrow site.

G. Buried Warning and Identification Tape: Polyethylene plastic warning tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines. Provide tape on rolls, 3 in. (76 mm) minimum width, color coded as specific below for the intended utility with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously over the entire tape length. Warning and identification to read, "CAUTION, BURIED (intended service) LINE BELOW" or similar wording. Color and printing shall be permanent, Unaffected by moisture or soil. Warning tape color codes:

Red: Electric

Yellow: Gas, Oil, Dangerous Materials

Orange: Telephone and Other Communications

Blue: Water Systems

Green: Sewer Systems

White: Steam Systems

Gray: Compressed Air

H. Warning Tape for Metallic Piping: Acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above. Minimum thickness of tape shall be 0.003 in.


31 20 11 VARHS

(0.076 mm). Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1,500 psi (10.3 MPa) lengthwise, and 1,250 psi (8.6 MPa) crosswise, with a maximum 350% elongation.

I. Detectable Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Piping: Polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above. Minimum thickness of the tape shall be 0.004 in. (0.102 mm). Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1,500 psi (10.3 MPa) lengthwise and 1,250 psi (8.6 MPa) crosswise. Tape shall be manufactured with integral wires, foil backing, or other means of enabling detection by a metal detector when tape is buried up to 3 ft (0.9 m) deep. Encase metallic element of the tape in a protective jacket or provide with other means of corrosion protection.

J. Detection Wire For Non-Metallic Piping: Detection wire shall be Insulated single strand, solid copper with a minimum of 12 AWG.


3.1 SITE PREPARATION

A. Clearing: Clear within limits of earthwork operations as shown. Work includes removal of trees, shrubs, fences, foundations, incidental structures, paving, debris, trash, and other obstructions. Remove materials from Medical Center.

B. Grubbing: Remove stumps and roots 3 in. (75 mm) and larger diameter. Undisturbed sound stumps, roots up to 3 in. (75 mm) diameter, and nonperishable solid objects a minimum of 3 ft (0.9 m) below subgrade or finished embankment may be left.

C. Trees and Shrubs: Trees and shrubs, not shown for removal, may be removed from areas within 15 ft (4.5 m) of new construction and 7 ft 6 in. (2,250 mm) of utility lines when removal is approved in advance by Resident Engineer. Remove materials from Medical Center. Box, and otherwise protect from damage, existing trees and shrubs which are not shown to be removed in construction area. Immediately repair damage to existing trees and shrubs by trimming, cleaning and painting damaged areas, including roots, in accordance with standard industry horticultural practice for the geographic area and plant species. Do not store building materials closer to trees and shrubs that are to remain, than farthest extension of their limbs.

D. Stripping Topsoil: Strip topsoil from within limits of earthwork operations as specified. Topsoil shall be a fertile, friable, natural topsoil of loamy character and characteristic of locality. Topsoil shall be capable of growing healthy horticultural crops of grasses. Stockpile topsoil and protect as directed by Resident Engineer. Eliminate foreign materials, such as weeds, roots, stones, subsoil, frozen clods, and similar foreign materials larger than 1/2 ft³ (0.014 m³) in volume, from soil as it is stockpiled. Retain topsoil on station. Remove foreign materials larger than 2 in. (50 mm) in any dimension from topsoil used in final grading. Topsoil work, such as stripping, stockpiling, and similar topsoil work shall not, under any circumstances, be carried out when soil is wet so that tilth of soil will be destroyed.

E. Concrete Slabs and Paving: Score deeply or saw cut to insure a neat, straight cut, sections of existing concrete slabs and paving to be removed where excavation or trenching occurs. Extend pavement section to be removed a minimum of 12 in. (300 mm) on each side of widest part of trench excavation and insure final score lines are approximately parallel unless otherwise indicated. Remove material from Medical Center.

F. Lines and Grades: Registered Professional Land Surveyor or Registered Civil Engineer, specified in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, shall establish lines and grades.

1. Grades shall conform to elevations indicated on plans within the tolerances herein specified. Generally grades shall be established to provide a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Grading shall comply with compaction requirements and grade cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. Where spot grades are indicated the grade shall be established based on


31 20 11 VARHS

interpolation of the elevations between the spot grades while maintaining appropriate transition at structures and paving and uninterrupted drainage flow into inlets.

2. Locations of existing and proposed elevations indicated on plans are from a site survey that measured spot elevations and subsequently generated existing contours and spot elevations. Proposed spot elevations and contour lines have been developed utilizing the existing conditions survey and developed contour lines and may be approximate. Contractor is responsible to notify Resident Engineer of any differences between existing elevations shown on plans and those encountered on site by Surveyor/Engineer described above. Notify Resident Engineer of any differences between existing or constructed grades, as compared to those shown on the plans.

3. Subsequent to establishment of lines and grades, Contractor will be responsible for any additional cut and/or fill required to ensure that site is graded to conform to elevations indicated on plans.

4. Finish grading is specified in this section.

G. Disposal: All materials removed from the property shall be disposed of at a legally approved site, for the specific materials, and all removals shall be in accordance with all applicable Federal, State and local regulations. No burning of materials is permitted onsite.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Shoring, Sheeting and Bracing: Shore, brace, or slope, its angle of repose or to an angle considered acceptable by the Resident Engineer, banks of excavations to protect workmen, banks, adjacent paving, structures, and utilities.

1. Design of the temporary support of excavation system is the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit a Shoring and Sheeting plan for approval 15 days prior to starting work. Submit drawings and calculations, certified by a registered professional engineer, describing the methods for shoring and sheeting of excavations. Shoring, including sheet piling, shall be furnished and installed as necessary to protect workmen, banks, adjacent paving, structures, and utilities. Shoring, bracing, and sheeting shall be removed as excavations are backfilled, in a manner to prevent caving.

2. Construction of the support of excavation system shall not interfere with the permanent structure and may begin only after a review by the Resident Engineer.

3. Extend shoring and bracing to a minimum of 5 ft (1,500 mm) below the bottom of excavation. Shore excavations that are carried below elevations of adjacent existing foundations.

B. Excavation Drainage: Operate pumping equipment and/or provide other materials, means and equipment as required to keep excavation free of water and subgrade dry, firm, and undisturbed until approval of permanent work has been received from Resident Engineer. Approval by the Resident Engineer is also required before placement of the permanent work on all subgrades. Groundwater flowing toward or into excavations shall be controlled to prevent sloughing of excavation slopes and walls, boils, uplift and heave in the excavation and to eliminate interference with orderly progress of construction. French drains, sumps, ditches or trenches will not be permitted within 3 ft (0.9 m) of the foundation of any structure, except with specific written approval, and after specific contractual provisions for restoration of the foundation area have been made. Control measures shall be taken by the time the excavation reaches the water level in order to maintain the integrity of the in situ material. While the excavation is open, the water level shall be maintained continuously, at least 8 in. (200 mm) below the working level. Operate dewatering system continuously until construction work below existing water levels is complete. Submit performance records weekly. Relieve hydrostatic head in pervious zones below subgrade elevation in layered soils to prevent uplift.

C. Blasting: Blasting shall not be permitted.


31 20 11 VARHS

D. Proofrolling:

1. After rough grade has been established in cut areas and prior to placement of fill in fill areas under building and pavements, proof roll exposed subgrade with a fully loaded dump truck to check for pockets of soft material.

2. Proofrolling shall consist of at least two complete passes with one pass being in a direction perpendicular to preceding one. Remove any areas that deflect, rut, or pump excessively during proofrolling, or that fail to consolidate after successive passes to suitable soils and replaced with compacted fill. Maintain subgrade until succeeding operation has been accomplished.

E. Building Earthwork:

1. Excavation shall be accomplished as required by drawings and specifications.

2. Excavate foundation excavations to solid undisturbed subgrade.

3. Remove loose or soft materials to a solid bottom.

4. Remove sedimentary rock as required.

5. Fill excess cut under footings or foundations with 3,000 psi (25 MPa) concrete poured separately from the footings.

6. Do not tamp earth for backfilling in footing bottoms, except as specified.

7. Slope grades to direct water away from excavations and to prevent ponding.

8. Capillary water barrier (granular fill) under concrete floor and area-way slabs on grade shall be placed directly on the subgrade and shall be compacted with a minimum of two passes of a hand-operated plate-type vibratory compactor.

9. Ensure that footing subgrades have been inspected and approved by the Resident Engineer prior to concrete placement.

F. Trench Earthwork:

1. Utility trenches (except sanitary and storm sewer):

a. Excavate to a width as necessary for sheeting and bracing and proper performance of the work.

b. Grade bottom of trenches with bell-holes, scooped-out to provide a uniform bearing.

c. Support piping on undisturbed earth unless a mechanical support is shown.

d. The length of open trench in advance of piping laying shall not be greater than is authorized by Resident Engineer.

e. Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape. Bury tape 12 in. (300 mm) below finished grade; under pavements and slabs, bury tape 6 in. (150 mm) below top of subgrade.

f. Bury detection wire directly above non-metallic piping at a distance not to exceed 12 in. (300 mm) above the top of pipe. The wire shall extend continuously and unbroken, from manhole to manhole. The ends of the wire shall terminate inside the manholes at each end


31 20 11 VARHS

of the pipe, with a minimum of 3 ft (0.9 m) of wire, coiled, remaining accessible in each manhole. The wire shall remain insulated over its entire length. The wire shall enter manholes between the top of the corbel and the frame, and extend up through the chimney seal between the frame and the chimney seal. For force mains, the wire shall terminate in the valve pit at the pump station end of the pipe.

2. Sanitary and storm sewer trenches:

a. Trench width below a point 6 in. (150 mm) above top of pipe shall be 24 in. (600 mm) maximum for pipe up to and including 12 in. (300 mm) diameter, and 4/3 diameter of pipe plus 8 in. (200 mm) for pipe larger than 12 in. (300 mm). Width of trench above that level shall be as necessary for sheeting and bracing and proper performance of the work.

b. The bottom quadrant of the pipe shall be bedded on suitable undisturbed soil or granular fill. Unstable material removed from the bottom of the trench or excavation shall be replaced with select granular material placed in layers not exceeding 6 in. (150 mm) loose thickness.

1) Undisturbed: Bell holes shall be no larger than necessary for jointing. Backfill up to a point 12 in. (300 mm) above top of pipe shall be clean earth placed and tamped by hand.

2) Granular Fill: Depth of fill shall be a minimum of 3 in. (75 mm) plus 1/6 of pipe diameter below pipe to 12 in. (300 mm) above top of pipe. Place and tamp fill material by hand.

c. Place and compact as specified remainder of backfill using acceptable excavated materials. Do not use unsuitable materials.

d. Use granular fill for bedding where rock or rocky materials are excavated.

e. Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape. Bury tape 12 in. (300 mm) below finished grade; under pavements and slabs, bury tape 6 in. (150 mm) below top of subgrade.

f. Bury detection wire directly above non-metallic piping at a distance not to exceed 12 in. (300 mm) above the top of pipe. The wire shall extend continuously and unbroken, from manhole to manhole. The ends of the wire shall terminate inside the manholes at each end of the pipe, with a minimum of 3 ft (0.9 m) of wire, coiled, remaining accessible in each manhole. The wire shall remain insulated over its entire length. The wire shall enter manholes between the top of the corbel and the frame, and extend up through the chimney seal between the frame and the chimney seal. For force mains, the wire shall terminate in the valve pit at the pump station end of the pipe.

G. Site Earthwork: Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation. Excavation shall be accomplished as required by drawings and specifications. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 in. (25 mm). Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, complying with OSHA requirements, and for inspections. Remove subgrade materials that are determined by Resident Engineer as unsuitable, and replace with acceptable material. If there is a question as to whether material is unsuitable or not, the contractor shall obtain samples of the material, under the direction of the Resident Engineer, and the materials shall be examined by an independent testing laboratory for soil classification to determine whether it is unsuitable or not. Testing of the soil shall be performed by the VA Testing Laboratory. When unsuitable material is encountered and removed, contract price and time


31 20 11 VARHS

will be adjusted in accordance with Articles, DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS, CHANGES and CHANGES-SUPPLEMENT of the GENERAL CONDITIONS as applicable. Adjustments to be based on volume in cut section only.

1. Site Grading:

a. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.

b. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances.

c. Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponds from forming where not designed. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1) Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 in. (25 mm).

2) Walks: Plus or minus 1 in. (25 mm).

3) Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 in. (13 mm).

d. Grading Inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 in. (13 mm) when tested with a 10 ft (3,000 mm) straightedge.

3.3 FILLING AND BACKFILLING

A. General: Do not fill or backfill until all debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials have been removed from excavation. For fill and backfill use excavated material and burrow, meeting the criteria specified herein, as applicable. Borrow will be supplied at no additional cost to the Government. Do not use unsuitable excavated materials. Do not backfill until foundation walls have been completed above grade and adequately braced, waterproofing or dampproofing applied, foundation drainage, and pipes coming in contact with backfill have been installed and work inspected and approved by Resident Engineer.

B. Placing: Place materials in horizontal layers not exceeding 8 in. (200 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 in. (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers and then compacted. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. Do not place material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost.

C. Compaction: Use approved equipment (hand or mechanical) well suited to the type of material being compacted. Do not operate mechanized vibratory compaction equipment within 10 ft (3 m) of new or existing building walls without the prior approval of the Resident Engineer. Moisten or aerate material as necessary to provide the moisture content that will readily facilitate obtaining the specified compaction with equipment used. Compact each layer to not less than percentage listed below of the maximum density determined in accordance with the following test method ASTM D698 or D1557 Method A.

1. Fills, Embankments, and Backfill:

a. Under proposed structures, building slabs, steps, and paved areas, scarify and recompact top 12 in. (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material in accordance with ASTM D698; 95%.

b. Curbs, curbs and gutters, ASTM D698; 95%.


31 20 11 VARHS

c. Under Sidewalks, scarify and recompact top 6 in. (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material in accordance with ASTM D698; 95%.

d. Landscaped areas, top 16 in. (400 mm), ASTM D698; 85%.

e. Landscaped areas, below 16 in. (400 mm) of finished grade, ASTM D698; 90%.

2. Utility Trenching

a. Granular backfill shall be compacted to 95% within 3 ft (900 mm) of surface and 90% below 3 ft (900 mm) finish grade ASTM D1557.

3. Natural Ground (Cut or Existing):

a. Under building slabs, steps and paved areas, top 6 in. (150 mm), ASTM D698; 95%.

b. Curbs, curbs and gutters, top 6 in. (150 mm), ASTM D698; 95%.

c. Under sidewalks, top 6 in. (150 mm), ASTM D698; 95%.

3.4 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade the areas within the limits of this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth the finished surface within specified tolerance. Provide uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are indicated, or between such points and existing finished grades. Provide a smooth transition between abrupt changes in slope.

B. Cut rough or sloping rock to level beds for foundations. In pipe spaces or other unfinished areas, fill low spots and level off with coarse sand or fine gravel.

C. Slope backfill outside building away from building walls for a minimum distance of 6 ft (1.8 m).

D. Finish grade earth floors in pipe basements as shown to a level, uniform slope and leave clean.

E. Finished grade shall be at least 6 in. (150 mm) below bottom line of window or other building wall openings unless greater depth is shown.

F. Place crushed stone or gravel fill under concrete slabs on grade, tamped, and leveled. Thickness of fill shall be 6 in. (150 mm) unless otherwise shown.

G. Finish subgrade in a condition acceptable to Resident Engineer at least one day in advance of paving operations. Maintain finished subgrade in a smooth and compacted condition until succeeding operation has been accomplished. Scarify, compact, and grade subgrade prior to further construction when approved compacted subgrade is disturbed by Contractor's subsequent operations or adverse weather.

H. Grading for Paved Areas: Provide final grades for both subgrade and base course to ± 1/4 in. (6 mm) of indicated grades.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF UNSUITABLE AND EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIAL

A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Medical Center property.

B. Place excess excavated materials suitable for fill and/or backfill on site where directed.


31 20 11 VARHS

C. Remove from site and dispose of any excess excavated materials after all fill and backfill operations have been completed.

D. Segregate all excavated contaminated soil designated by the Resident Engineer from all other excavated soils, and stockpile on site on two 6-mil (0.15 mm) polyethylene sheets with a polyethylene cover. A designated area shall be selected for this purpose. Dispose of excavated contaminated material in accordance with State and Local requirements.

3.6 CLEAN-UP

A. Upon completion of earthwork operations, clean areas within contract limits, remove tools, and equipment. Provide site clear, clean, free of debris, and suitable for subsequent construction operations. Remove all debris, rubbish, and excess material from Medical Center.

— — — E N D — — —


APPENDIX A

GEOTECHNICAL STUDY AND REPORT STEAMLINE TUNNEL

Pinnacle Western, Inc. www.pinnaclewestern.com Email: [email protected]

3329 NE Stephens St. Roseburg, OR 97470

Phone (541) 440-4871 Fax (541) 672-0677

Page i of 18 Project # 21656.03

GEOTECHNICAL STUDY AND REPORT

STEAMLINE TUNNEL

ROSEBURG VA MEDICAL CENTER

913 NW GARDEN VALLEY BOULEVARD

ROSEBURG, OREGON

Expires 12/31/12



Phone (541) 440-4871 Fax (541) 672-0677

Page ii of 18 Project # 21656.03

INDEX Page

Cover ................................................................................................................................................ i i

Index ...................................................................................................................................... ii, iii, iv ii

A. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY .......................................................................................................... 1

B. INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................... 1

B.1. Purpose and Scope ............................................................................................................ 1

B.2. Site and Project Description ............................................................................................ 1

C. TOPOGRAPHIC MAPPING ....................................................................................................... 2

D. GEOLOGIC SITE CHARACTERIZATION ............................................................................. 2

D.1. Regional Geology .............................................................................................................. 2

D.2. Project Area Geology ........................................................................................................ 2

D.3. Seismicity and Seismotectonic Considerations ............................................................... 3

D.3.a. Area and Site Seismicity ...................................................................................... 3

D.3.b. Site Stability ......................................................................................................... 3

D.3.c. Site Classification ................................................................................................. 4

D.3.d. Seismic Refraction Survey .................................................................................. 4

E. FIELD STUDIES .................................................................................................................. 4

E.1. Surface Reconnaissance ................................................................................................... 4

E.2. Surface Hydrology ............................................................................................................ 4

E.3. Field Observations ..................................................................................................... 4

E.4. Site Exploration and Field Testing .................................................................................. 5

E.5. Geotechnical Characterization ........................................................................................ 5

E.6. Groundwater ..................................................................................................................... 6

E.7. Subsurface Soil Conditions .............................................................................................. 6

E.8. Soil Permeability ..................................................................................................... 6

F. LABORATORY TESTING .......................................................................................................... 6

F.1. Soil Classification .............................................................................................................. 6

F.2. Corrosiveness and Electro-Chemical Parameters ......................................................... 6

G. ENGINEERING STUDIES AND RECOMMENDATIONS ..................................................... 7

G.1. General ............................................................................................................................... 7

G.2. Site Preparations and Grading ........................................................................................ 7

G.2.a. Clearing, Grubbing and Stripping ..................................................................... 7

G.2.b. Density Testing and Subgrade Recompaction ................................................... 7

G.3. Structural Fill Placement and Compaction .................................................................... 8

G.3.a. Materials ............................................................................................................... 8

G.3.b. Structural Fill Placement .................................................................................... 8

G.3.c. Compaction .......................................................................................................... 8

G.3.c1. Fill Observation and Testing Methods .................................................. 8

G.3.d. Non-Structural Fill .............................................................................................. 9

G.5. Site Drainage and Erosion Control ................................................................................. 9

G.5.a. Erosion Control .................................................................................................... 9

G.6. Lateral Earth Pressures and Drainage ........................................................................... 9

G.6.a. Lateral Load Resistance ...................................................................................... 9

G.6.b. Lateral Earth Pressures .................................................................................... 10

G.7. Trench Settlement ................................................................................................... 10

G.8. Trenching and Piping ..................................................................................................... 10



Phone (541) 440-4871 Fax (541) 672-0677

Page iii of 18 Project # 21656.03

H. ADDITIONAL SERVICES AND LIMITATIONS OF REPORT .......................................... 11

H.1. Additional Services ......................................................................................................... 11

H.2. Limitations ....................................................................................................................... 11

FIGURES

Figure 1 .................................................................................................................................... Vicinity Map

Figure 2 ........................................................................................................................................... Site Map

Figure 3 ......................................................................................................................... Geologic Reference

Figure 4 ..................................................................................................................... Surface Geology Map

Figure 5 ........................................................................ Subsurface Profile Along Steam Line Alignment

Figure 6 ........................................................................................................ Utility Conflict Location Map

APPENDICES

Appendix A ....................................................................................................................... Laboratory Tests

Appendix B ....................................................................................................................... Test Boring Logs



Phone (541) 440-4871 Fax (541) 672-0677

Page 1 of 18 Project # 21656.03

GEOTECHNICAL STUDY AND REPORT

STEAMLINE TUNNEL ROSEBURG VA MEDICAL CENTER

913 NW GARDEN VALLEY BOULEVARD

ROSEBURG, OREGON A. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

It is our opinion, supported by field investigations, laboratory tests and geotechnical analysis, that the

soils and geological conditions within the proposed alignment of the new steam tunnel are suitable for the

proposed construction, provided the recommendations of our report are appropriately considered. Special

attention will be required;

During construction of the steam tunnel, miscellaneous structures and associated utility relocation

due to the presence of competent rock outcrops or contacts at shallow depths.

Local deposits of unsuitable soils may be encountered, requiring excavation and disposal.

Numerous conflicts with existing underground utilities exist.

Construction Materials Engineering and Testing (CoMET) services consisting of

observation of subgrade after excavation, compaction testing of prepared subgrade, trench

backfill and strength testing of concrete are recommended. If the stem tunnel is constructed

of reinforced concrete, Special Inspection of the reinforcing is recommended.

Review of design and alignment by the geotechnical engineer is recommended prior to

beginning construction.

The following sections of this report provide geotechnical recommendations for design and construction

of the planned project.

B. INTRODUCTION

B.1. Purpose and Scope

Roseburg Veterans’ Affairs Medical Center (VAMC) plans to replace an existing deteriorated

steam line with new construction. The new steam line structure is planned to be concrete encased

with access manholes at key locations. Pinnacle Western, Inc. (PWI) has been engaged to prepare

this report for use in design and construction.

Field investigations included a geologic reconnaissance of the site and immediate surrounding

area, and observation, sampling and testing of the underlying soils encountered in fifteen test

borings. Probable locations of utility conflicts were potholed. Office studies included review of

the preliminary alignment and geotechnical reports for nearby projects.

Soil samples were retrieved during site exploration for laboratory testing and other studies

necessary to develop recommendations for design and construction of the proposed steam line

structure, to evaluate potential complications that may occur during construction, to assess

probable long term performance of the structures and for use in monitoring soil compaction.

B.2. Site and Project Description

The proposed site will be developed within the Roseburg VA Medical Center Campus in the

alignment depicted in Figure 2.



Phone (541) 440-4871 Fax (541) 672-0677


C. TOPOGRAPHIC MAPPING

We were not provided a topographic map of the project area; however, the site is essentially level within

construction limits and topography is not deemed likely to impact project feasibility or cost.

D. GEOLOGIC SITE CHARACTERIZATION

Geologic and geotechnical terms used in this report are defined in Figure 3. Surface geologic mapping of

the site is presented as Figure 4.

D.1 Regional Geology

The project site is located approximately 100 miles east of the Cascadia Subduction Zone. The

Cascadia Subduction Zone reflects subduction of the Juan de Fuca plate beneath the western edge

of the North American continental shelf. 1

D.2 Project Area Geology

The site is located within the Oregon Coast Range Geological province in an early Eocene forearc

basin and submarine fan complex. Site soils consist of a thin layer of top soil overlying a thicker

layer of residual SILT and CLAY. A layered matrix of residual turbidite sandstone and layered

mudstone/sandstone matrix is intermixed and underlies the surface soils. The soil matrix overlies

Early Eocene and late Paleocene Submarine Basalt flows.

1 Geology of the Pacific Northwest, 1999, Orr, Elizabeth L, and William N., Kendall/Hunt Publishing Company.

Qf Fluvial deposits (Holocene) — Unconsolidated or poorly consolidated river deposits consisting of moderately sorted, sub-angular to well-rounded boulders, gravel, sand, and silt; locally may include older river deposits on poorly defined lower terraces.

Tsr Submarine basalt flows (early Eocene and late Paleocene) — Dominantly aphyric

to plagioclase phyric tholeiitic basalt; as closely packed pillow lava, columnar jointed sheet flows, and pillow breccia with flows up to tens of meters thick; basalt is in places amygdaloidal and tectonized, with vesicle and fracture fillings of greenish brown smectitic clay, calcite, quartz, and zeolite; commonly slickensided; flows locally massive and contacts poorly defined, except where interbedded with dark brown basaltic tuffaceous siltstone, turbidite sandstone, polymict conglomerate, and mud flow breccia. Flows are steeply dipping, tightly folded, and at least 6 km thick in Roseburg anticlinorium, with base not exposed; 8900' of basalt and basaltic breccia encountered in Sutherlin Mobil well; basalt is very vesicular, amygdaloidal, and oxidized (subaerial?) near bottom of well at TD of 13,177 feet. Upper part of unit interfingers with conglomerate of Bushnell Rock Formation; pillows locally surround and enclose well rounded clasts of Mesozoic rocks. Mudstone interbeds contain sparse late Paleocene (CP-8) to lower Eocene (CP10) foraminifers and coccoliths (D. Bukry, written communication, 1990-96; Ryu and others, 1992; Brouwers and others, 1995). Along the North Umpqua River near Glide (secs.17 and 18, T26 S., R.4 W.), a mudstone interbed near the top of the pillow basalts contains a foraminiferal assemblage of lowest Eocene age (Bulitian stage; or D stage of Almgren and others, 1988; McKeel, 1990, written commun.). Whole rock K-Ar dates for the Siletz River Volcanics from the Drain area and in the Coquille-Myrtle Point-Remote area just north and west of the Roseburg quadrangle range in age from 62.1 + 1.0 Ma to 59.2 + 2.8 Ma (Duncan, 1982). K-Ar dates of surface samples from these areas analyzed by Mobil Oil Corporation range from 47.2 Ma to 56.5 Ma (unpublished data, courtesy of Bill Seeley), with the youngest dates clustered in the Drain-Jack Creek-Dickinson Mountain area. 40Ar/39Ar analysis of a sample near the bottom of Mobil's



Phone (541) 440-4871 Fax (541) 672-0677


Geologic Map and Database of the Roseburg 30' x 60' Quadrangle, Douglas and Coos Counties, Oregon, 2000, R.E. Wells, A.S. Jayko, A.R.

Niem, G. Black, T. Wiley, E. Baldwin, K.M.Molenaar, C.B. DuRoss and R.W. Givler, U.S. G. .Open File Report 00-376, version 1.0

D.3. Seismicity and Seismotectonic Considerations

Local faults generally trend from northeast to southwest, and include both normal and thrust type

events. Inactive fault locations relative to the project site are depicted on Figure 4.

D.3.a. Area and Site Seismicity

Extensive seismotectonic studies continuing since 1990 have concluded that western

Oregon is subject to a much greater likelihood of both random and plate-subduction

seismic events of far greater magnitude and far more frequently than was formerly

believed.

Regionally, the Cascadia Subduction Zone is considered as a feasible source of

Magnitude 7.75, or greater, earthquakes.

Intraplate earthquakes, focused at a relatively great depth within the Juan de Fuca

plate subduction beneath western Oregon and Washington, are capable of

producing magnitude 7.0 earthquakes. Deep focus intraplate earthquakes are

theoretically possible, but considered rare in Oregon.

Relatively shallow crustal earthquakes are more likely, with an upper bound

considered to be on the order of Magnitude 5.75.

The 475 year return period peak horizontal lateral acceleration on rock expressed

as units of gravity is 0.132.2

D.3.b. Site Stability

2 Recommended Provisions for Seismic Regulations for New Buildings and Other Structures National Earthquake Hazard Reduction

Program, USGS, 2003.

Sutherlin well yielded an isochron age of 63.9 + 1.9 Ma (Duncan, 1982), close to K-Ar dates of

respectively (unpublished data, courtesy of Bill Seeley). Paleomagnetic data from 19sites in the Roseburg anticlinorium, Turkey Hill, and Coquille River area are all magnetically reversed (Wells and others, 1985 and this paper, Table X), suggesting eruption sometime during predominantly reversed Chrons 27 to 23 (62.5-51.8 Ma, timescale of Berggren and others, 1995).

Tmss Turbidite sandstone (early Eocene) — 45 to 150 m of well-indurated, medium- to thick-bedded, fine- to coarse-grained, graded, deep-marine turbidite lithic sandstone, rhythmically bedded, with subordinate thinner, dark gray, even-bedded mudstone; sandstone to mudstone ratio ranges from 2:1 to 5:1; some thinning- and fining-upward as well as thickening- and coarsening-upward sequences; includes a few very thick-bedded amalgamated, massive, medium-grained lithic sandstone with thin discontinuous mudstone. Burrows, load casts, grooves, and flutes on base of some beds; sandstone beds display Bouma abde, abe, and ae divisions and have sharp bottom contacts and gradational upper contacts; and contain mudstone ripups. Ridge-former; turbidite facies C and D of Mutti and Ricci Lucchi (1972) representing submarine mid-fan lobes and channels (Ryberg, 1984; Ryu and others, 1992). Unit is interbedded with and/or overlies units Tmm, Tmms, and Tmsm.



Phone (541) 440-4871 Fax (541) 672-0677


The soils underlying the project site are likely to be very stable during seismic events

having a reasonable probability of occurrence. There is no likelihood of liquefaction,

tsunami, seiche or seismically induced landslides.

D.3.c. Site Classification

Beneath an approximately 6 inch thick layer of humus, lies a layer of SILT or CLAY

ranging from 1 to 9 feet thick. Underlying soils are consistent with Site Class B, as

defined by the 2010 Oregon Structural Specialty Code (OSSC).

D.3.d. Seismic Refraction Survey

A seismic refraction survey was neither requested by our client nor conducted for this

investigation. Qualitatively;

The near surface layer of soft to medium stiff CLAY and SILT is projected to

transmit lateral accelerations representative of a lower velocity range of 1,500 to

2,000 ft/sec.

At shallow depth below the surface layer, the soil grades to fractured siltstone,

which can be expected to transmit lateral accelerations representative of a

medium velocity range of 4,000 to 6,000 ft/sec.

E. FIELD STUDIES

E.1. Surface Reconnaissance

Contemporaneous with the geotechnical site characterization, a surface reconnaissance was

conducted. The surface reconnaissance concluded that there were no observable site defects that

would compromise viability of the site for the planned use.

E.2. Surface Hydrology

Surface runoff discharges into an underground storm drainage system which ultimately

discharges into the south Umpqua River.

The surface layer of fill soil and near surface, soft to medium stiff fine grained soils are relatively

impermeable and, therefore, retard percolation of surface water. Although retarded, the surface

water typically penetrates through fractures in the rock, which results in retention of much of the

seepage close to the surface. The fractured, underlying sedimentary rock appears to transmit a

small to moderate amount of water year round, increasing during wet months.

E.3. Field Observations

Field observations included soil description, classification, subjective density classification,

measurements of thicknesses of the various soil horizons and depth to or presence of

groundwater.

E.4. Site Exploration and Field Testing

Field investigations were conducted between 17, 21 and 22 March 2011and included a geologic

reconnaissance of the alignment and immediately surrounding area, and observation, sampling

and testing of the underlying soils encountered in the test borings and exploratory test pits. Office

studies included review of the proposed alignment and geotechnical reports for nearby projects.



Phone (541) 440-4871 Fax (541) 672-0677


The test pits and test borings were excavated by use of a track mounted Hitachi 120 backhoe and

a Little Beaver truck mounted drill at the locations selected by the engineer and depicted on

Figure 2. The excavations were observed, logged and samples retrieved by a certified technician

representative of PWI.

In addition to basic field soil classification tests, in situ field density tests were conducted on

natural site soils.

E.5. Geotechnical Characterization

Soil descriptions and layer interfaces were interpreted from observations on site. While the layers

are shown as having distinct boundaries in field logs, in reality, the change is gradual. The near

surface soils are slightly acidic. At variable depth, the surface soils are underlain by non-intact

highly weathered SHALE. The underlying SHALE is characterized as being light brown in color,

nominally plastic, containing a significant component of silty CLAY fragments.

Test Boring 1 – An approximately 12 inch thick layer of asphaltic concrete and aggregate base

course overlies an approximately 4 feet thick layer of soft to stiff CLAY, then 4 feet of stiff SILT.

Beneath the SILT layer, rock is encountered, consisting of weathered SHALE.

Test Boring 2, 15 – An approximately 12 inch thick layer of asphaltic concrete and aggregate

base course overlies an approximately 4 feet thick layer of stiff SILT. Beneath the SILT layer,

rock is encountered, consisting of weathered SHALE.

Test Boring 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 14 – An approximately 6 inch thick layer of humus overlies an

approximately 5 feet thick layer of soft to medium stiff SILT. Beneath the SILT layer, rock is

encountered, consisting of weathered SHALE.

Test Boring 7 – An approximately 6 inch thick layer of humus overlies a thin layer of well

graded clayey SAND, then an approximately 6 feet thick layer of stiff SILT. Beneath the SILT

layer, rock is encountered, consisting of weathered SHALE

Test Boring 9 – An approximately 6 inch thick layer of humus overlies an approximately 3 feet

thick layer of loose silty SAND. Beneath the SAND layer, rock is encountered, consisting of

weathered SHALE.

Test Boring 10, 11 – An approximately 6 inch thick layer of humus overlies an approximately 2

feet thick layer of medium stiff SILT. Beneath the SILT layer, rock is encountered, consisting of

weathered SHALE.

Test Boring 12, 13 – An approximately 12 inch thick layer of asphaltic concrete and aggregate

base course overlies an approximately 1 to 3 feet thick layer of medium stiff SILT. Beneath the

SILT layer, rock is encountered, consisting of weathered SHALE.

Soils excavated from the steam trench can be compacted after removal of the vegetative

component and moisture conditioned and may be used as trench backfill in landscaped areas if

construction occurs during dry weather. The thin vegetative component is suitable only for use as

landscaping material or for sculpting wetlands mitigation areas.

E.6. Groundwater

Groundwater was not encountered during our site exploration.



Phone (541) 440-4871 Fax (541) 672-0677


E.7. Subsurface Soil Conditions

The near surface SILT and CLAY units may become soft and unstable during periods of high

moisture. Surface dewatering may help facilitate construction activity during these periods, but

will be only marginally effective.

E.8. Soil Permeability

Permeability tests were not performed for this study. Qualitatively, flow velocities within the

natural fine grained soil can be expected to range between 10-4

and 10-5

cm/sec and as high as 10-2

cm/sec at the bedrock interface where fine grained soils transition to weathered formational

material. Where sandy layers exist, their permeability will be on the order of 10-3

cm/sec.

F. LABORATORY TESTING

All of the samples recovered during the site exploration were visually reexamined at our Roseburg

laboratory to verify the field descriptions. To assist in soil classification and assessing long term stability

of the site soils, physical characteristics, including natural moisture/density relationship, plasticity indices

and sieve analyses were determined for the fine grained portion of all samples. Samples were then

classified in conformance with the Unified Soil Classification System.

F.1. Soil Classification

The Unified Soil Classification System identifies soil type by single letter prefix and subgroup by

single letter suffix as follows;

Soil Type Prefix Subgroup Suffix

Gravel G Well Graded W

Sand S Poorly Graded P

Silt M Silty M

Clay C Clayey C

Organic O wL < 50 per cent L

Peat Pt wH > 50 per cent H

F.2. Corrosiveness and Electro-Chemical Parameters

The scope of services assigned to PWI including testing of key soil samples to determine

corrosivity. To conserve financial resources, PWI staff first sorted the soil samples by index

properties and then conducted pH testing. Using the pH testing as an indicator, samples that

deviated significantly from the average were tested to determine resistivity, sulphate content,

chloride content and unit volume of solids.

Note that wide ranges of pH are thought to be due to soil amendments to the planter areas.

The test reports are included in Appendix A of this report, summarized as follows;



Phone (541) 440-4871 Fax (541) 672-0677


Location Depth pH Resistivity

Ohm-cm

Sulphate

%

Chloride

%

Solids

%

TB - 1 4 ft. 7.3

TB - 1 5 ft. 7.2 1100 0.027 0.00207 80

TB - 1 9 ft. 7.1

TB - 4 5 ft. 6.1

TB - 5 4 ft. 5.6 1600 0.00711 0.00348 74.7

TB - 6 3 ft. 5.6

TB - 7 3 ft. 6.0

TB - 7 5 ft. 6.0

TB - 8 3 ft. 5.5

TB - 9 2 ft. 6.5

TB - 10 2 ft. 6.4 2600 Non-detect Non-detect 83.2

TB - 14 2 ft. 5.7

We consider the corrosiveness test results for TB – 1 to be representative of the site.

G. ENGINEERING STUDIES AND RECOMMENDATIONS

G.1. General

The engineering studies and recommendations summarized in this section provide design

parameters for the proposed steam line and for associated construction.

All density criteria presented herein refer to ASTM D 1557 (Modified Proctor) at optimum to 2%

above optimum moisture, unless specifically noted otherwise.

Pertinent geotechnical factors that may influence design and construction include;

Competent rock occurs in several locations along the alignment at shallow depth, which

may affect steam line excavation and construction. Air tools may be required for deep

excavation.

Stability of all excavated slopes will be dependent on careful construction methodology

and monitoring by the contractor.

Control of both ground and surface water will be required during construction to maintain

trench stability.

G.2. Site Preparation and Grading

G.2.a. Clearing, Grubbing and Stripping

The proposed alignment should be cleared and grubbed of all trees, stumps, brush and

other debris and/or deleterious materials. The alignment should then be stripped and

cleared of all vegetation, sod and organic topsoil. The depth for stripping is likely to vary

between 3 and 6 inches, occasionally deeper, to accomplish removal of the pockets of

organic topsoil and root zone. The stripped material is suitable only for use in landscape

areas.

G.2.b Density Testing and Subgrade Recompaction



Phone (541) 440-4871 Fax (541) 672-0677


After stripping, the exposed subgrade should be tested to verify suitable subgrade density.

Where subgrade soils are unsuitable or if they pump when excavated, they should be

excavated, moisture conditioned and re-compacted or be replaced with imported

structural fill. Effective recompaction will require the fine grained soil be moisture

conditioned and compacted with a small pneumatic or small static sheepsfoot roller

designed for trenches. Moisture conditioning and recompaction should extend to a depth

of between 10 and 12 inches. The recompaction should achieve 90% of maximum

density.

In locations where the subgrade consists of soils that are firm and generally unyielding,

moisture conditioning and recompaction is not indicated. We should be contacted to

perform in situ strength tests of subgrade soils and to advise regarding moisture

conditioning and compaction.

G.3. Structural Fill Placement and Compaction

Structural fill is defined as any fill placed and compacted to specified densities and located under

roadways, structures, driveways, sidewalks and other load-bearing areas.

G.3.a. Materials

Structural fill should consist of a free-draining granular material with a maximum particle

size of 8 inches or 2/3 of the uncompacted lift thickness, whichever is lesser. The

material should be well graded with less than 5 percent non-plastic fines. During dry

weather, any organic-free, non-expansive, compactable granular material meeting the

maximum size criteria is typically acceptable for this use. Locally available crushed rock

and jaw run crushed shale have performed adequately for most applications of structural

fill.

G.3.b. Structural Fill Placement

Structural fill should be placed in horizontal lifts not exceeding 9 inches loose thickness,

or thinner if necessary to obtain specified density. Each lift should be compacted to 90%

of the maximum density. The lift thickness may be increased if specified density is

consistently being exceeded.

G.3.c. Compaction

To facilitate the earthwork and compaction process the contractor should place and

compact fill materials at 1% to 2% above their optimum moisture content. If fill source

soils are too wet to compact, they may be dried by continuous windrowing and aeration

to achieve optimum moisture. If soils become dry, moisture should be added to maintain

the moisture content at or near optimum during compaction operations.

If soil having swell potential is used for backfill, it should be moisture conditioned to 2%

to 4% over optimum and compacted to 88% of maximum density. Swell properties

should be determined by laboratory testing prior to acceptance of material proposed as

structural fill.

G.3.c1. Fill Observation and Testing Methods - Field density testing by

nuclear methods is appropriate for compaction of 2½ - inch to ¾ - inch minus

crushed base rock, fine grained soils, decomposed granite and other materials 2½



Phone (541) 440-4871 Fax (541) 672-0677


inches or smaller in size. Due to the effect of particle size on test methods, other

methods of compaction testing may be favored. Testing of only the upper lifts is

not adequate to verify density.

G.3.d. Non-Structural Fill

Stripped material should not be used as fill beneath permanent structures, roadway

embankments, or as retaining wall backfill. If used as landscape fill, it should be placed

and compacted to 88% density at 2% above optimum moisture and thoroughly worked to

create a homogeneous fill. It should be limited to non structural berms less than ten feet

in height and having slopes no steeper than 3½ H to 1 V. Surface shrinkage cracks and

long-term creep of even relatively flat slopes is probable on the surface of these clay fills.

G.4. Slopes

Cut slopes will be required for construction of the steam line. These should be designed as

described below.

G.4.a. Temporary Cut Slopes

The existing fill, SILT and CLAY soil may stand vertical to a depth of 4 feet for brief

periods. In deeper trenches, side walls are likely to slough. We recommend cut slope

angles no steeper than;

CLAY and SILT Soils Temporary Cuts 1 H to 1V

Intact SILTSTONE Temporary Cuts ¾ H to 1V

G.5. Site Drainage and Erosion Control

Final grading should accomplish rapid positive drainage away from the steam line alignment for a

horizontal distance of at least 10 feet at a minimum grade of 2%. This water should be channeled

to surface drains or swales for proper disposal.

G.5.a. Erosion Control

Site soils are moderately susceptible to erosion if unprotected. The site grades are such

that erosion and sediment transport during construction are unlikely to be significant;

however, site cuts and fills should be graded such that surface water is collected and

disposed without causing erosion or siltation. Sediment laden water should not be

allowed to flow directly into streams or off-site drainage systems.

Typical project landscaping should be adequate for long-term erosion control.

G.6. Lateral Earth Pressures and Drainage

G.6.a. Lateral Load Resistance

Lateral loads exerted upon the steam line structure can be resisted by passive pressure

acting on buried portions and by friction between the bottom of concrete elements and the

underlying soil.

We recommend the following values of passive equivalent fluid pressures for design of

portions of the structures and foundations embedded into the native soils.



Phone (541) 440-4871 Fax (541) 672-0677


Medium stiff, fine grained soil 250 #/ft3

Weathered soft rock 350 #/ft3

Properly compacted, crushed rock or siltstone structural fill 450 #/ft3

We also recommend that the first one foot below the ground surface be ignored when

computing the passive resistance for clay and soft rock.

A coefficient of friction of 0.45 is recommended for elements poured neat against

structural rock fill

A coefficient of friction of 0.30 is recommended for elements poured against

natural site soils.

The above values should be reduced to 0.2 for areas where bearing is over a non-

soil vapor barrier or other membrane, such as drainage geotextile.

G.6.b. Lateral Earth Pressures

Lateral earth pressures will be imposed on below-ground and backfilled structures or

walls. The following is recommended:

Walls which are free to rotate at the top when backfilled should be designed for

an equivalent fluid pressure of 45 #/ft3..

Walls that are fixed at the top should be designed for an equivalent fluid pressure

of 60 #/ft3.

A wet soil unit weight of 130 #/ft3 should be used for design.

Backfill should consist of non-expansive, free draining, soil material. The

backfill should be placed in lifts at near the optimum moisture content and

compacted to between 88 and 90 % of the maximum density.

To prevent damage, backfill and compaction against walls or embedded

structures should be accomplished with hand-operated equipment within a lateral

distance of 1/2 to 1/3 the unsupported height of wall. Beyond this zone, normal

compaction equipment may be used.

While proper compaction of wall backfill is critical to long-term performance,

care should be taken to avoid over compaction of the backfill materials, which

can result in lateral loads greater than the design pressures recommended above.

For design of retaining walls, a peak horizontal acceleration coefficient of 0.1g is

recommended for seismic loads.

If retaining walls are to be included in the project, we should be contacted for

additional recommendations.

G.7. Trench Settlement

Trench settlement will vary with thickness, compacted density and swell/consolidation potential

of the fill material. Assuming compliance with the recommendations for backfill materials and

density, trench settlement is estimated to be less than 1 inch.

G.8. Trenching, Piping and Steam Line Structure



Phone (541) 440-4871 Fax (541) 672-0677


Excavation can be accomplished by normal means above the approximate rock surface elevations

presented in the drill logs. Using a medium size track hoe with a narrow width trench bucket, it is

likely that an additional depth of approximately 5 feet may be excavated into the non-intact shale

by normal means.

Underground structures should be cradled in coarse aggregate compacted to 90% density,

having a minimum thickness equal to 1/4 pipe diameter, 6 inches minimum, below

bottom of pipe or steam tunnel and extending upward to the pipe spring line or mid

height of the tunnel.

The trench backfill should consist of clean excavated soil or other approved backfill

material, compacted to 90% density.

Beneath paved areas, full depth aggregate base course backfill is recommended as a

minimum, and use of lean cement slurry should be considered.

The top 12" of trench backfill should be compacted to a density of 92%. Loads on

underground structures will vary with depth of backfill and width of trench.

For design, an effective pressure of 130 #/ft3 per foot of depth is recommended.

Underground structures located beneath paved areas and having shallow cover should be

designed to withstand vehicular loads.

H. ADDITIONAL SERVICES AND LIMITATIONS OF REPORT

H.1. Additional Services

Additional services by the geotechnical engineer are recommended to help insure that design

recommendations are correctly interpreted during final project design and to help verify

compliance with project specifications during construction. Additional services could include, but

not be limited to:

Review of final construction plans and specifications for compliance with geotechnical

recommendations.

Attend project team meetings to respond to issues raised during the construction process.

Site observation and/or Construction Materials and Engineering Testing (CoMET)

services.

Special Inspection as desired by Owner or Engineer.

Periodic construction field reports, as requested by the Owner and Engineer.

H.2. Limitations

Where used herein, the terms ―Special Inspector, Inspector and Special Inspection‖ are

understood to be for services contemplated, prescribed and as defined by the International

Building Code and the Oregon Structural Specialty Code.

The analyses, conclusions and recommendations contained in this report are based on site

conditions and development plans as they existed at the time of the study, and assume that soils

and groundwater conditions encountered, observed or inferred during our exploration are

representative of soils and groundwater conditions throughout the site. If, during construction,

subsurface conditions are found to be different or design parameters change, we should be

advised at once so that we can review this report and reconsider our recommendations, as

appropriate. If there is a significant lapse of time between submission of this report and the start



Phone (541) 440-4871 Fax (541) 672-0677


of work at the site, if the project is changed, or if site conditions have changed, we recommend

that this report be reviewed to verify continued applicability.

This report was prepared for the use of the owner and design team for the subject project. It is

only suitable for this site and construction project. No third party beneficiaries are intended. It

should be made available to contractors for information and factual data only, such as test boring

or test pit logs, measured water levels, samples, sample classifications and laboratory test results.

The report is interpretive in nature and shall not be used for contractual purposes, such as

warranting that subsurface conditions will be consistent with, or as indicated by the formal boring

or test pit logs and subsurface profiles contained or inferred herein and/or discussions of

subsurface conditions. It is not to be used for extensions of this project or for other projects

without our express written consent. We should be contacted to review both plans and

specifications for compatibility with this report before finalization. CoMET services,

compaction testing and periodic observation during construction are recommended.

We have performed these services in conformance with generally accepted engineering and

geotechnical engineering practices in southern Oregon at the time the study was accomplished.

No other warranty is either expressed or implied.

Since test pits and borings represent only the conditions at those discrete locations, unanticipated

soil conditions may be and, in fact, are commonly encountered on projects of similar size.

Unanticipated conditions cannot be precluded by practical field studies. Since such unexpected

conditions frequently result in budget increases to attain a properly constructed project, we

recommend that a reasonable contingency account be established sufficient to fund possible extra

costs.



Phone (541) 440-4871 Fax (541) 672-0677


FIGURES

MILE122

1211

1413

ST.

CA

SE

YS

T.

BO

WD

EN

ST.

CHAPMAN

LILBURN

AVE.

AVE.

FINLAY AVE.BIR

CH CT.

SE

LMA

RC

T.

BE

LLO

WS

ST .

DR

.

UM

PQ

UA

HA

RR

ISO

N

MA

PLE

EL I

ZAB

ETH

ST .ST .ST . ST .

NEILL

ESPERANZACT.

PRINCETON

AVE.

HO

ME

WO

OD

L N.

ST E

WA

RT

CHESTNUT

WEST

COLLEGE

AVE.

AVE.

AVE.WARD

CHESTONCT.

WA

LNU

T

WIL

LOW

CE

DA

R

CO

L LEG

E

ST.

ST.

ST.

ST.A

VE

.

ALD

ER

STE

PH

ENS

GARDEN

TH

OM

AS

WIL

LIA

MS

FA

IRM

OU

NT

BE

AC

ON

ED

EN

ST.

ST.

ST. S

T.

WIL

LOW

DE

E

OAKLAND

CHANNON

MADISONSTEWART

ST.

RU

TTE

R

MU

LHO

L LA

ND

CECIL

MELOY

LN.

DR

.

OT

IE.

ST.

ST.

AVE.

MT

. VI E

W

DO

GW

OO

DS

T .

BLACK PL.

ES

TE

LLEP

AT

RI C

IA

CR

OU

CH

GO

ETZ

ST.

ST .

HILL

ST .

ST.

GAR

DEN

VALLEY

BLVD.

VALLEYVIEW

DR.

PL.

ULRICH

MORITZCT.

VETERANS

HOSPITAL

VETERANSU.S.

FACILITY

FIR GROVESCH.VETERANS

CEM.

STEWART PARK

FIR GROVE SECT.

DOUGLASCOMMUNITY

HOSPITAL

DOUGLASCOUNTYHOME

ROSEBURGHIGH SCH.

LAURELWOODPARK

ROSEBURG

GARDENS

GADDIS

PARK

MUNICIPAL

GOLF

COURSE

NORTHROSEBURGSEWAGEDISPOSAL

Park

Lake

L EM

AN

SS

T .

EXPERIMENT

STATION

BLME

L LA

N

HIC

KS

PA

RKST .

ST.

ST.

AVE.

HIG

HLA

ND

ST.

RD

.

PARK

ST.

AVE.

YALEAVE.

BETHEL

AVE.

MU

NS

ON

LN.

STE

WA

RT

PA

RK

DR

.

CT.

U.S.D.A.

STEWART DR.

PARK

RIVER

FRONT

Cre

ek

SCHOOL

OFFICEDISTRICT

STEWART

PARK

MILE121

1110

15 14

1415

22 23

DELRIDGE

AVE.AVE.

TR

OO

ST

WA

TTE

RS

AV

OY

CT. LU

TH

MO

TAH

MOORE AVE.

LINDELLAVE.

CR

ES

TC

T.

RANDALLCT.

LYN

NW

OO

D

ST.

BEAUMONTAVE.

ALMOND AVE.

EVANS AVE.

AP

AC

HE

DR.

WA

NE

L LS

T.

KL I

NE

VALE CT.

LAMONTAVE.

SE

LLWO

OD

CALKINS

OERDING AVE.

HOLLY AVE.

CHERRY

DR.

CH

ER

RY

DR

.

WHIPPLE

ST.

RIVERVIEW

DR.

GA

RD

EN

ST.

JEF

FER

SO

N

ST.

DO

MI N

EC

O

YOUNGWOOD CT.

PRIMROSE LN.

SPRAYCT.

LIT

TLE

WO

OD

CT.

ET

HE

LC

T.

HARVEY

EL D

OR

AD

OC

T .

LES

TER

ST.

MARTIN AVE.

RACHEL

FLORA

AVE.AVE.

AL M

IRA

ST .

ELL

ISS

T.K

EA

SE

YS

T.S

T .

R.

CA

LKIN

SR

D.

GILBERTAVE.

ORIOLE

DR

.

SHARP

AVE.

AVE.

AVE.

CE

NTE

R

ST.

SU

SA

NS

T.ST.

BO

DIE

CA

RD

INAL

KIL

LDEE

R

DR

.

BR

AD

FOR

D

ST. ST.

ST.

ST.

DR

.

TAN

AG

ER

GARY

BRADFORD DR.

CA

RR

OL L

CT.

FILBERT

ELM

ST.

AVE.

HARVARD

CO

CH

RA

NE

BR

OC

CO

LI

L N.

ALAMOSA

SALIDA

CT.

CT.

SH

AN

EN

DO

AH

ST .

FA

IRS

T.

ALP

HA

ST.

AG

EE

ST.

MY

RT L

EW

OO

DC

T.

FOOTHILL DR.

PILG

ER

FR

AN

CIS

Newton

HUCRESTELEM.

ROSEBURGJUNIOR

ACADEMY

FULLERTONSCHOOL

ST.

ST .

EL L

IOT

ST .

KE

AS

EY

RIVERFRONT DR.

AVE.

QUINTUS

PARKIV

CARLAVE.

ST.

RD.

BLVD.

G. CO.TAIN SCH.

NHS

138

NHS

CE

NT

RA

L

UMPQUA

RIVERRIVERSIDE

CHATHAM

LAN

AI

ST.

MEMORIAL

D.M.V.

ST.

PO

ST

(ROSEBURGNATIONAL

CEM.)

ELEM.

SR.

ELEM.

SCHOOL

DR.

CT.JENNIFER

AVE.LANAI

DR.BASC0 ST.

KR

ING

DR.

SOUTH

WATER

BA

LLF

FIR

ST.

ST.

WA

LNU

T

PO

ST

ST.

PK

WY

.

OA

KLA

ND

-

HO

PP

ER

ST.

PKWY.

MILE122

1211

1413

ST.

CA

SE

YS

T.

BO

WD

EN

ST.

CHAPMAN

LILBURN

AVE.

AVE.

FINLAY AVE.BIR

CH CT.

SE

LMA

RC

T.

BE

LLO

WS

ST .

DR

.

UM

PQ

UA

HA

RR

ISO

N

MA

PLE

EL I

ZAB

ETH

ST .ST .ST . ST .

NEILL

ESPERANZACT.

PRINCETON

AVE.

HO

ME

WO

OD

L N.

ST E

WA

RT

CHESTNUT

WEST

COLLEGE

AVE.

AVE.

AVE.WARD

CHESTONCT.

WA

LNU

T

WIL

LOW

CE

DA

R

CO

L LEG

E

ST.

ST.

ST.

ST.A

VE

.

ALD

ER

STE

PH

ENS

GARDEN

TH

OM

AS

WIL

LIA

MS

FA

IRM

OU

NT

BE

AC

ON

ED

EN

ST.

ST.

ST. S

T.

WIL

LOW

DE

E

OAKLAND

CHANNON

MADISONSTEWART

ST.

RU

TTE

R

MU

LHO

L LA

ND

CECIL

MELOY

LN.

DR

.

OT

IE.

ST.

ST.

AVE.

MT

. VI E

W

DO

GW

OO

DS

T .

BLACK PL.

ES

TE

LLEP

AT

RI C

IA

CR

OU

CH

GO

ETZ

ST.

ST .

HILL

ST .

ST.

GAR

DEN

VALLEY

BLVD.

VALLEYVIEW

DR.

PL.

ULRICH

MORITZCT.

VETERANS

HOSPITAL

VETERANSU.S.

FACILITY

FIR GROVESCH.VETERANS

CEM.

STEWART PARK

FIR GROVE SECT.

DOUGLASCOMMUNITY

HOSPITAL

DOUGLASCOUNTYHOME

ROSEBURGHIGH SCH.

LAURELWOODPARK

ROSEBURG

GARDENS

GADDIS

PARK

MUNICIPAL

GOLF

COURSE

NORTHROSEBURGSEWAGEDISPOSAL

Park

Lake

L EM

AN

SS

T .

EXPERIMENT

STATION

BLME

L LA

N

HIC

KS

PA

RKST .

ST.

ST.

AVE.

HIG

HLA

ND

ST.

RD

.

PARK

ST.

AVE.

YALEAVE.

BETHEL

AVE.

MU

NS

ON

LN.

STE

WA

RT

PA

RK

DR

.

CT.

U.S.D.A.

STEWART DR.

PARK

RIVER

FRONT

Cre

ek

SCHOOL

OFFICEDISTRICT

STEWART

PARK

MILE121

1110

15 14

1415

22 23

DELRIDGE

AVE.AVE.

TR

OO

ST

WA

TTE

RS

AV

OY

CT. LU

TH

MO

TAH

MOORE AVE.

LINDELLAVE.

CR

ES

TC

T.

RANDALLCT.

LYN

NW

OO

D

ST.

BEAUMONTAVE.

ALMOND AVE.

EVANS AVE.

AP

AC

HE

DR.

WA

NE

L LS

T.

KL I

NE

VALE CT.

LAMONTAVE.

SE

LLWO

OD

CALKINS

OERDING AVE.

HOLLY AVE.

CHERRY

DR.

CH

ER

RY

DR

.

WHIPPLE

ST.

RIVERVIEW

DR.

GA

RD

EN

ST.

JEF

FER

SO

N

ST.

DO

MI N

EC

O

YOUNGWOOD CT.

PRIMROSE LN.

SPRAYCT.

LIT

TLE

WO

OD

CT.

ET

HE

LC

T.

HARVEY

EL D

OR

AD

OC

T .

LES

TER

ST.

MARTIN AVE.

RACHEL

FLORA

AVE.AVE.

AL M

IRA

ST .

ELL

ISS

T.K

EA

SE

YS

T.S

T .

R.

CA

LKIN

SR

D.

GILBERTAVE.

ORIOLE

DR

.

SHARP

AVE.

AVE.

AVE.

CE

NTE

R

ST.

SU

SA

NS

T.ST.

BO

DIE

CA

RD

INAL

KIL

LDEE

R

DR

.

BR

AD

FOR

D

ST. ST.

ST.

ST.

DR

.

TAN

AG

ER

GARY

BRADFORD DR.

CA

RR

OL L

CT.

FILBERT

ELM

ST.

AVE.

HARVARD

CO

CH

RA

NE

BR

OC

CO

LI

L N.

ALAMOSA

SALIDA

CT.

CT.

SH

AN

EN

DO

AH

ST .

FA

IRS

T.

ALP

HA

ST.

AG

EE

ST.

MY

RT L

EW

OO

DC

T.

FOOTHILL DR.

PILG

ER

FR

AN

CIS

Newton

HUCRESTELEM.

ROSEBURGJUNIOR

ACADEMY

FULLERTONSCHOOL

ST.

ST .

EL L

IOT

ST .

KE

AS

EY

RIVERFRONT DR.

AVE.

QUINTUS

PARKIV

CARLAVE.

ST.

RD.

BLVD.

G. CO.TAIN SCH.

NHS

138

NHS

CE

NT

RA

L

UMPQUA

RIVERRIVERSIDE

CHATHAM

LAN

AI

ST.

MEMORIAL

D.M.V.

ST.

PO

ST

(ROSEBURGNATIONAL

CEM.)

ELEM.

SR.

ELEM.

SCHOOL

DR.

CT.JENNIFER

AVE.LANAI

DR.BASC0 ST.

KR

ING

DR.

SOUTH

WATER

BA

LLF

FIR

ST.

ST.

WA

LNU

T

PO

ST

ST.

PK

WY

.

OA

KLA

ND

-

HO

PP

ER

ST.

PKWY.

NOT TO SCALE

GLENDALE

SCOTTSBURG

REEDSPORT

GLIDE

RIDDLE

WINSTON

MYRTLE CREEK

ROSEBURG

CANYONVILLE

MELROSE

OAKLAND

SUTHERLIN

DOUGLAS COUNTY

TILLER

STEAMBOAT

DRAIN

YONCALLA

ELKTON

LAKE

DIAMOND

EUGENETO

GRANTS PASSTO

COOS BAYTO

WILBER

PROJECT LOCATION

PROJECT LOCATION

N.T.S.

CLIENT:

PROJECT:

VICINITY MAP

Roseburg VA Medical Center

SUBSURFACE SOILS INVESTIGATION

21656.03 Steamline TunnelFIG. 1

CLIENT:

PROJECT:

SITE MAP




SOIL TYPES (Ref. 1)

Boulders: Particles of rock that will not pass a 12 inch screen.Cobbles: Particles of rock that will pass a 12 inch screen, but not a 3 inch sieve.Gravel: Particles of rock that will pass a 3 inch sieve, but a #4 sieve.Sand: Particles of rock that will pass a #4 sieve, but not a #200 sieve.Silt: Soil that will pass a #200 sieve, that is non-plastic or very slightly plastic, and exhibits little or no strength when dry.Clay: Soil that will pass a #200 sieve, that can be made to exhibit plasticity within a range of water contents, and that

exhibits considerable strength when dry.

MOISTURE AND DENSITY

Moisture condition: An observational term; moist, wet.Moisture content: The weight of water in a sample divided by the weight of dry soil in the sample, expressed as a

percentage.Dry Density: The pounds of dry soil in a cubic foot of soil

DESCRIPTORS OF CONSISTENCY (Ref. 3)

Liquid Limit: The water content at which a - #200 soil is on the boundary between exhibiting liquid and plasticcharacteristics. The consistency feels like soft butter.

Plastic Limits: The water content at which a - #200 soil is on the boundary between exhibiting plastic and semi-solidcharacteristics. The consistency feels like stiff putty.

Plasticity Index: The difference between the liquid limit and the plastic limit, i.e. the range in water contents over which thesoil is in a plastic state.

MEASURES OF CONSISTENCY OF COHESIVE SOILS (CLAYS) (Ref's 2&3)

Very soft N=0-1* C=0-250 psf Squeezes between fingersSoft N=2-4 C=250-500 psf Easily molded by finger pressureMedium stiff N=5-8 C=500-1000 psf Molded by strong finger pressureStiff N=9-15 C=1000-2000 psf Dented by strong finger pressureVery stiff N=16-30 C=2000-4000 psf Dented slightly by finger pressureHard N>30 C>4000 psf Dented slightly by pencil point

*N= Blows per foot in the Standard Penetration Test. In cohesive soils, with the 3 inch diameter sampler. 140-pound weight, divide theblow count by 1.2 to get N (Ref. 4).

MEASURES OF RELATIVE DENSITY OF GRANULAR SOILS (GRAVELS, SANDS, SILTS) (Ref's 2 & 3)

Very Loose N=0-4** RD=0-30 Easily push a ½ inch reinforcing rod by handLoose N=5-10 RD=30-50 Push a ½ inch reinforcing rod by handMedium Dense N=11-30 RD=50-70 Easily drive a ½ inch reinforcing rodDense N=31-50 RD=70-90 Drive a ½ inch reinforcing rod 1 footVery Dense N>50 RD=90-100 Drive a ½ inch reinforcing rod a few inches

**N= Blows per foot in the Standard Penetration Test. In granular soils, with the 3 inch diameter sampler, 140 pound weight, divide theblow count by 2 to get N (Ref 4). RD = Relative Density.

Quc - Calculated Q u from static cone penetrometer values.

Ref. 1: ASTM Designation: D 2487-93, Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes(Unified Soil Classification system).Ref.2: Terzaghi, Karl, and Peck, Ralph B., Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice , John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2nd Ed., 967,pp. 30, 341, 347.Ref.3: Sowers, George F., Introductory Soil Mechanics and Foundations: Geotechnical Engineering , Macmillan Publishing Company,New York, 4th Ed., 1979, pp. 80,81, and 312.Ref.4: Lowe, John III, and Zaccheo, Phillip F., Subsurface Explorations and Sampling Chapter 1 in Foundation Engineering Handbook ,Hsai-Yang Fang, Editor , Van Nostrand Reinhold Company, New, 2nd Ed, 1991, p.39/

CLIENT:

PROJECT:

GEOLOGIC REFERENCE




N.T.S.

PROJECT LOCATION

CLIENT:

PROJECT:

SURFACE GEOLOGICAL MAP




APPENDIX B

LETTER FROM PINNACLE WESTERN, INC. DATED FEBRUARY 21, 2013

APPENDIX B

LETTER FROM PINNACLE WESTERN, INC. DATED FEBRUARY 21, 2013

SECTION 31 23 33 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Work of this section is bound by the Contract Conditions and Division 1, bound herewith, in addition to this specification and accompanying drawings.

B. Section includes: Excavation and fills, including compaction of onsite private storm drain, sanitary sewer, manholes, water distribution, natural gas, and other utility systems.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Phasing of Work: Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

B. Earthwork, excavation and backfill and compaction requirements: Section 31 20 00, EARTHWORK (SHORT FORM).

1.3 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS

A. ODOT Standard Specifications (current edition).

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Rock: Material that cannot be removed by one yard shovel, by backhoe with 9,500 lb. digging force, by pick and shovel, or by 200 HP Crawler fitted with normal excavating equipment. Ripper attachment as might be hooked into seam is not considered "normal" excavating equipment.

B. Unstable Soil: Soft, loose, wet, or disturbed ground that is incapable of supporting material, equipment, personnel, or structure.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including performance, construction, and manufacturing information.

C. Field Quality Control submittals as specified in Part 3 of this Section.

1. Field Tests.

2. Special Inspections for Code Compliance.

D. Traffic control plan shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Resident Engineer for approval prior to start of construction. Contractor shall maintain and/or update plan as required throughout construction period. Plan shall include approach for maintaining clear and accessible pedestrian travel throughout the construction period.


A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.


31 23 33 VARHS


D698–07 ............. Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft lbf/ft³ (600 kN m/m³))

D4832–10 ........... Standard Test Method for Preparation and Testing of Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) Test Cylinders

D6023–07 ........... Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, Cement Content, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM)

D6103–04 ........... Standard Test Method for Flow Consistency of Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM)

1.7 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Not less than 5 years experience in the actual production of specified products.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with not less than 5 years experience in installation of systems similar in complexity to those required for this project.

C. Product/Material Qualifications:

1. Design Data: Compaction testing shall be in accordance with this section.

2. Test reports: Provide imported material gradation test reports. Provide material compaction test reports.


A. Deliver and handle all products and equipment required, in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protect from damage due to weather, excessive temperatures, and construction operations.

1.9 ADVANCE NOTICES

A. Notify Resident Engineer at least 48 hours before starting work of this section.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 CRUSHED ROCK

A. Imported, clean, 3/4" – 0 crushed rock or crushed gravel, free from foreign material and meeting the requirements of ODOT Standard Specifications (current edition) or other suitable rock.

B. To be used for Pipe Base Material, Pipe Zone Material, and Trench Backfill, for all utilities except Steam Piping, which requires Blend Sand, described below. Crushed Rock may be used as trench backfill over the Steam Piping, starting from a depth of no less than 300 mm (12 in.) above the Steam Pipe.


31 23 33 VARHS

2.2 PEA GRAVEL

A. Imported, clean 6 mm to 13 mm (1/4 in. to 1/2 in.) uncrushed, nearly round aggregate free from foreign material. Gradation shall be such that all of the material will pass the 19 mm (3/4 in.) sieve and not more than 5 percent will pass the 6 mm (1/4 in.) sieve.

2.3 NATIVE MATERIAL

A. Excavated on-site soil, native to project site, free of organics, solids larger than 3 inch diameter, weeds and other deleterious materials and approved by the Geotechnical Engineer for use as on-site backfill only during dry weather conditions.

2.4 CONTROLLED DENSITY FILL

A. Controlled Density Fill (CDF) shall be a mixture of cement, fly ash, aggregates, water and admixtures proportioned to provide a non-segregating, self-consolidating, free-flowing and excavatable material which will result in a hardened, dense, non-settling fill.

B. Mix Design: Mix design shall conform to the following. The weights shown are only an estimate of the amount to be used per cubic yard of CDF. The actual amounts may vary from those shown if approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit additional data to be approved by the Resident Engineer.

Proportions per Cubic Yard

Maximum Compressive Strength 100 – 250 psi

Maximum Mixing Water 30 –50 gallons

Cement 30 – 50 pounds

Fly Ash 200 – 350 pounds

Dry Aggregate 2700 – 3200 pounds

C. CDF used to fill abandoned pipe. The Contractor shall submit certified engineering data, for the proposed mixture to be used, for the following:

1. 30 and 90 day unconfined compressive strength (C') tests as described in ASTM D4832 with the following exception: cylinders will not be capped.

2. Yield and dry unit weight additional (ASTM D6103).

3. Flowability (ASTM D6023).

4. Removability (Removability Modules RE = < 1.0).

5. Mixture's components and sources (company and location). Previous test results, on the same mixtures using the same components, will satisfy this requirement.

2.5 TRACER WIRE

A. Refer to separate pipe material specification sections.


31 23 33 VARHS


3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Prior to starting work of this section, verify that existing grades and field conditions agree with drawings. Notify Resident Engineer of deviations.

B. Do not proceed with work of this Section until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Commencing work implies acceptance of existing conditions.

C. If field measurements differ slightly from drawing dimensions, modify work as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify Resident Engineer prior to starting work of this section.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Monuments: Carefully maintain bench marks, monuments, and other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, replace as directed.

B. Existing Utilities: Existing utilities shall be field located. Protect active utility lines encountered. Repair or replace utility lines damaged by work of this section.

C. Pavement Cleaning: Maintain pavements and walkways clean at all times, sweep pavements adjacent to construction areas a minimum of once per week.

D. Dust Control: Protect persons and property against damage and discomfort caused by dust; water as necessary and when directed.

E. Other Work and Adjacent Property: Protect against damage caused by work of this section.


A. Contractor shall do all trenching and excavating necessary or required for proper construction of the work and placement or installation of materials. Tunneling or jacking shall not be used unless approved in writing by the Resident Engineer.

B. Cutting Pavements: Cut vertical, straight-line joints using power saw designed for cutting pavements. Cut minimum one foot beyond each side of trench.

C. Obstructions: Remove all obstructions encountered within the trench area or adjacent thereto. If requested by Contractor, Resident Engineer may make minor changes in trench alignment to avoid major obstructions, provided such alignment changes can be made without adversely affecting the intended function of the facility. Contractor shall pay any additional costs resulting from such alignment changes.

D. Trenching: Minimum trench width to be 600 mm (24 in.) greater than outside diameter of pipe and/or structures. Maximum trench width at top of trench shall not be limited except where excess width of excavation would cause damage or create damage to adjacent structures or facilities.

E. Line and Grade: Excavate trench to lines and grades shown on the drawings or as established by the Engineer with proper allowances for pipe/structure wall thickness and special bedding when required.

F. Shoring: Shore trench when necessary to prevent caving during excavation, or to protect adjacent structures, property, workers, and the public or as required by local, state, or federal agencies. Shoring shall be removed, as the backfilling is done, in a manner that will not damage pipe or permit voids in the backfill. It shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to see that safety requirements are met, and that the pipe has not been displaced from design line and grade.


31 23 33 VARHS

1. Contractor shall supply Resident Engineer with an Excavation Plan with proposed means and methods, for approval prior to construction.

2. Contractor is responsible for verifying the backfilled and compacted pipe cover meets the compaction requirements stated herein.

3. Conduit and/or pipe testing to be complete per the specifications to confirm design slopes and pipe conditions meet the specified requirements.

G. Temporary Stockpiling of Excavated Material: Locate at least 600 mm (24 in.) from trench edges. Place excavated material only within approved areas. Do not obstruct roadways, bikeways, or pedestrian walkways. Conform to all federal, state and local codes governing the safe loading of excavated materials adjacent to trenches.

H. Excess Excavation: Where excavation, through Contractor's error, is carried to levels lower than those shown on drawings, backfill with specified bedding material to proper levels at Contractor's expense.

I. Drainage: At all times keep trenches dry. Provide and operate pumping equipment necessary to keep excavations free from standing water. Dispose of water in manner to prevent damage to adjacent property and as required by governing jurisdiction.

J. If rock or unstable soils are encountered, notify Resident Engineer.

3.4 EXCAVATION

A. Excavate trenches to the line and grades shown on the drawings.

3.5 BACKFILL

A. Backfilling shall not commence until after pipe, conduit, structures, and other equipment and appurtenances placed in trench or similar excavations have been properly constructed or installed, as applicable, and inspected. Backfill shall be placed in such a manner as not to disturb, damage, or subject such facilities to unbalanced loads or forces. Make fills as soon as feasible after Resident Engineer's review and acceptance.

B. Pipe Base: Place 6 inch minimum thickness of Pipe Base Material over full width of trench. Provide uniform bearing under entire length of each pipe.

C. Pipe Zone: Place required thickness of Pipe Zone Material over full width of trench. Compact pipe zone material as noted below in maximum 150 mm (6 in.) lifts to a depth of no less than 12 inches above the pipe.

D. Above Pipe Zone: Backfill full width of trench to paving subgrade elevation or to within depth of native material to be used in landscaped areas with Crushed Rock Fill.

E. Compaction: Trench backfill shall be compacted in maximum 300 mm (12 in.) lifts to:

1. 95 percent compaction under pavement areas per ASTM D698 at an optimum moisture content of ± 2 percent.

2. Water settling of trench backfill will not be considered an acceptable compaction procedure.

3.6 MAINTENANCE OF TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Contractor shall maintain all backfilled trench surfaces until all work has been completed and accepted. Such maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, addition of appropriate backfill material above the


31 23 33 VARHS

pipe zone to keep backfilled trench surface smooth, free from ruts and potholes, and suitable for traffic flow.

3.7 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND EXCESS EXCAVATION

A. Remove from site excess material and that unsuitable for backfilling.

3.8 SETTLEMENT

A. Any settlement in trench backfill which occurs during the warranty period and is attributable to construction procedures, such as improper removal of shoring or insufficient compaction, shall be corrected by the contractor at his own expense. Any piping or facilities damaged by such settlement shall be restored to their original condition at the Contractor's expense.


A. Refer to Division 1 for responsibilities for arranging, supervising, and payment of field quality control requirements.

B. Field Tests:

1. Material compaction testing:

a. Trench Compaction: One test at maximum 30 m (100 ft) intervals per 300 mm (1 ft) of vertical lift and at changes in required density, but in no case fewer than two tests per section per section per lift.

2. Imported material gradation testing.

C. Field Inspections: Notify Resident Engineer prior to work of this section.

D. Special Inspections for Code Compliance: Obtain building inspector approvals.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of the work of this section promptly remove from the working area all scraps, debris, and surplus material.

3.11 PROTECTION

A. Protect all work installed under this section.

B. Replace, at no additional cost to Owner, any damaged work of this section.

— — — E N D — — —


SECTION 31 25 00 EROSION CONTROL

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


B. Section includes:

1. Prevention of erosion due to construction activities.

2. Prevention of sedimentation of waterways, open drainage ways, and storm and sanitary sewers due to construction activities.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Safety requirements: Section 00 72 00, GENERAL CONDITIONS, Article, ACCIDENT PREVENTION.

B. Protection of Existing Utilities, fire protection services, existing equipment, roads, and pavements: Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

C. Excavation Shoring and Backfill: Section 21 20 11, EARTHWORK.

D. Paving Subgrade Requirements: Section 32 12 16, ASPHALT PAVING.

E. Erosion Control: Section 01 57 19, TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS, and Section 32 90 00, PLANTING.


A. ASTM International (ASTM):

D6459–11 ......................... Standard Test Method for Determination of Rolled Erosion Control Product (RECP) Performance in Protecting Hillslopes from Rainfall-Induced Erosion

B. ODOT Standard Specifications (current edition).

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including performance, construction, and manufacturing information.

1. Submit for: Inlet protection products, protective fencing and dust control measures.

C. Closeout Requirements: Comply with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.


31 25 00 VARHS

1.5 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

A. All measures indicated in this specification may not be required. Contractor responsible for implementing erosion and sediment controls adequate to comply with permit requirements.

B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Not less than 5 years experience in the actual production of specified products.

C. Installers Qualifications: Firm with not less than 5 years experience in installation of systems similar in complexity to those required for this project.

D. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Do not begin clearing, grading, or other work involving disturbance of ground surface cover until applicable permits have been obtained.

2. An erosion control permit is not required for this project, reference the construction drawings for erosion prevention requirements.

3. Resident Engineer will withhold payment to Contractor equivalent to all fines resulting from noncompliance with applicable regulations.

E. Stormwater Runoff: Control increased stormwater runoff due to disturbance of surface cover due to construction activities for this project.

1. Prevent runoff into storm sewer systems, including open drainage channels, in excess of actual capacity or amount allowed by authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is less.

2. Anticipate runoff volume due to the most extreme short term and 24-hour rainfall events that might occur in 25 years.

F. Erosion On Site: Minimize wind, water, and vehicular erosion of soil on project site due to construction activities for this project.

1. Control movement of sediment and soil from temporary stockpiles of soil.

2. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no cost to Owner.

G. Erosion Off Site: Prevent erosion of soil and deposition of sediment on other properties caused by water leaving the project site due to construction activities for this project.

1. Prevent windblown soil from leaving the project site.

2. Prevent tracking of mud onto public roads outside site.

3. Contractor shall sweep streets daily unless otherwise directed by the Resident Engineer.

4. Prevent mud and sediment from flowing onto sidewalks and pavements.

5. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no cost to Owner.

H. Sedimentation of Waterways On Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways on the project site, including storm sewers. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to


31 25 00 VARHS

Owner; remove deposited sediments and relocate on site; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

I. Sedimentation of Waterways Off Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways off the project site, including rivers, and storm sewers. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to Owner; remove deposited sediments and relocate on site; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

J. Open Water: Prevent standing water that could become stagnant.

K. Monitoring and Inspection: Contractor shall be responsible for monitoring the construction erosion control measures and shall make adjustments to measures, in accordance with the drawings, to accommodate changes in earthwork operations and weather conditions.


A. Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Protect from damage by the elements and construction procedures.

1.7 ADVANCE NOTICES

A. Notify Resident Engineer at least 48 hours before starting work of this section.

1.8 COORDINATION


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 BARK/MULCH BIO BERM

A. The compost filter berm material consists of compost or a blend of compost and mulch materials according to the specifications as follows.

B. The filter berm material shall meet particle sizing specifications that when used in a filter berm system are tested in conformance with the outlined methods and scope of ASTM D6459, Standard Test Method for Determination of Rolled Erosion Control Product (RECP) Performance in Protecting Hillslopes from Rainfall-Induced Erosion.

C. The compost portion of the filter berm shall be derived from well-decomposed organic matter source produced by controlled aerobic (biological) decomposition that has been sanitized through the generation of heat and stabilized to the point that it is appropriate for this particular application. Compost material shall be processed through proper thermophilic composting, meeting the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's definition for a 'process to further reduce pathogens' (PFRP). The compost portion shall meet the chemical, physical and biological properties outlined below.

1. The pH shall be between 5.0 and 8.5 for berms to receive vegetation.

2. Nitrogen Content: 0.5‒2%.

3. Soluble Salts: Maximum 5 mmhos/cm.

4. Compost shall be weed and pesticide free, with manmade materials comprising less than 1%.


31 25 00 VARHS

2.2 BIO-FILTER BAGS

A. Provide minimum size 18 in. × 6 in. × 30 in. (457 mm × 152 mm × 762 mm) plastic mesh bags with 1/2 in (13 mm) openings filled with approximately 45 lb (20 kg) of clean, 100% recycled wood-product waste.

2.3 SAND BAGS

A. Provide 24 in. × 12 in. × 6 in. (610 mm × 304 mm × 152 mm) durable, weather-resistant, tightly woven bags sufficient to prevent leakage of filler material. Fill bags with at least 75 lb (34 kg) of firmly packed file pcc aggregate 3/8"‒0" or round 3/8"‒3/16" pea gravel.

2.4 CATCH BASIN INSERT BAG / CURB INLET SEDIMENT DAM

A. Provide prefabricated filter inserts manufactured specifically for collecting sediment in drainage inlets. Include handles and/or fasteners sufficient to keep the insert from falling into the inlet during maintenance and removal of the insert from the inlet. Insert bags shall be included on the Oregon Qualified Products List (QPL) for Type 3 Inlet Protection, or approved. Curb Inlet Sediment Dams shall be included on the Oregon QPL for Type 6 Inlet Protection, or approved.

2.5 GRASS SEED FOR TEMPORARY COVER

A. Select a species appropriate to climate, planting season, and intended purpose. If same area will later be planted with permanent vegetation, do not use species known to be excessively competitive or prone to volunteer in subsequent seasons.

B. Seeds shall be of blue tag stock and from the current or latest season's crop and shall be in containers labeled in accordance with Oregon State and U.S. Department of Agriculture Rules and Regulations under the Federal Seed Act.

2.6 SEDIMENT FENCE

A. Sediment Fence Fabric: Polypropylene geotextile resistant to common soil chemicals, mildew, and insects; non-biodegradable; in longest lengths possible; fabric including seams with the following minimum average roll lengths.

B. Apparent Opening Size: 30 U.S. Std. Sieve, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4751 (latest revision).

C. Permittivity: 0.05 sec-1, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4491 (latest revision).

D. Ultraviolet Resistance: Retaining at least 70% of tensile strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4355 (latest revision) after 500 hours exposure.

E. Grab Tensile Strength-Supported: 100 lb-f, minimum, in cross-machine direction; 120 lb-f, minimum, in machine direction; when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632 (latest revision).

F. Grab Tensile Strength-Unsupported: 90 lb-f, minimum, in cross-machine direction; 100 lb-f, minimum, in machine direction; when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632 (latest revision).

G. Color: Manufacturer's standard, with embedment and fastener lines preprinted.

H. Manufacturers:

1. BP Amoco, Amoco Fabrics and Fibers; www.geotextile.com.


31 25 00 VARHS

2. TC Mirafi; www.tcmirafi.com.

3. Synthetic Industries; www.fixsoil.com.



A. Examine site and identify existing features that contribute to erosion resistance; maintain such existing features to greatest extent possible.

B. Do not start work of this section until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencing work implies acceptance of existing conditions.


3.2 INSTALLATION OF EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES

A. Install as shown on drawings, or as directed by Resident Engineer or Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. All measures included in this specification or details shown on Drawings may not be necessary. Contractor to utilize measures, as needed, to meet the requirements of erosion control permit(s) and the intent of this specification.

B. Resident Engineer will direct the Contractor as to where to locate the stockpile/spoils area will be sited on the VA campus. This area will be used for waste material and material lay down.

3.3 TEMPORARY SEEDING

A. When hydraulic seeder is used, seedbed preparation is not required.

B. When surface soil has been sealed by rainfall or consists of smooth, undisturbed cut slopes and conventional or manual seeding is to be used, prepare seedbed by scarifying sufficiently to allow seed to lodge and germinate.

C. If temporary mulching was used on planting area but not removed, apply nitrogen fertilizer at 1 lb/1,000 ft².

D. On soils of very low fertility, apply 10-10-10 fertilizer at rate of 12 lb to 16 lb/1000 ft².

E. Incorporate fertilizer into soil before seeding.

F. Apply seed uniformly; if using drill or cultipacker seeder, place seed 1/2 in. to 1 in. (13 mm to 25 mm) deep.

G. Irrigate as required to thoroughly wet soil to depth that will ensure germination without causing runoff or erosion.

H. Repeat irrigation as required until grass is established.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Monuments: Carefully maintain bench marks, monuments, and other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, replace as directed.


31 25 00 VARHS

B. Existing Utilities: Existing utilities shall be field located. Protect active utility lines encountered. Repair or replace utility lines damaged by work of this section.

C. Pavement Cleaning: Maintain pavements and walkways clean at all times, sweep streets and sidewalks a minimum of once per week, unless otherwise directed by Resident Engineer.

D. Dust Control: Protect persons and property against damage and discomfort caused by dust; water as necessary and when directed.

E. Other Work and Adjacent Property: Protect against damage caused by work of this section.


A. Special Inspections for Code Compliance:

1. Obtain building approvals from Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.

2. Provide periodic inspection reports as noted on the drawings.

3.6 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain temporary measures until permanent measures have been established.

B. Repair deficiencies immediately.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary measures after permanent measures have been installed, unless permitted to remain by Resident Engineer.

B. Clean out temporary sediment control structures that are to remain as permanent measures.

C. Where removal of temporary measures would leave exposed soil, shape surface to an acceptable grade and finish to match adjacent ground surfaces.

3.8 PROTECTION


B. Replace at no additional cost to Owner, any damaged work of this section.

— — — E N D — — —


SECTION 32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This work shall cover the composition, mixing, construction upon the prepared subgrade, and the protection of hot asphalt concrete pavement. The hot asphalt concrete pavement shall consist of an aggregate or asphalt base course and asphalt surface course constructed in conformity with the lines, grades, thickness, and cross sections as shown. Each course shall be constructed to the depth, section, or elevation required by the drawings and shall be rolled, finished, and approved before the placement of the next course.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Laboratory and field testing requirements: Section 01 45 29, TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES.

B. Subgrade Preparation: Paragraph 3.3 and Section 31 20 11, EARTHWORK (SHORT FORM).

1.3 INSPECTION OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

A. The Resident Engineer shall have access at all times to all parts of the material producing plants for checking the mixing operations and materials and the adequacy of the equipment in use.

1.4 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE CONTROL

A. The Contractor's Registered Professional Land Surveyor specified in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, shall establish and control the pavement (aggregate or asphalt base course and asphalt surface course), alignments, grades, elevations, and cross sections as shown on the Drawings.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Data and Test Reports:

1. Aggregate Base Course: Sources, gradation, liquid limit, plasticity index, percentage of wear, and other tests required by State Highway Department.

2. Asphalt Base/Surface Course: Aggregate source, gradation, soundness loss, percentage of wear, and other tests required by State Highway Department.

3. Job-mix formula.

C. Certifications:

1. Asphalt prime and tack coat material certificate of conformance to State Highway Department requirements.

2. Asphalt cement certificate of conformance to State Highway Department requirements.

3. Job-mix certification: Submit plant mix certification that mix equals or exceeds the State Highway Specification. Conform to the requirement of ODOT's publication, "Standard Specifications for Asphalt Material 0073".


32 12 16 VARHS

D. One copy of State Highway Department Specifications.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Aggregate base and asphalt concrete materials shall conform to the requirements of the following and other appropriate sections of the latest version of the State Highway Material Specifications, including amendments, addenda and errata. Where the term "Engineer" or "Commission" is referenced in the State Highway Specifications, it shall mean the VA Resident Engineer or VA Contracting Officer.

2.2 AGGREGATES

A. Provide aggregates consisting of crushed stone, gravel, sand, or other sound, durable mineral materials processed and blended, and naturally combined.

B. Subbase aggregate (where required) maximum size: 1 ½ in. (38 mm).

C. Base aggregate maximum size:

1. Base course over 6 in. (152 mm) thick: 1 ½ in. (38 mm).

2. Other base courses: 3/4 in. (19 mm).

D. Asphaltic base course:

1. Maximum particle size not to exceed 1 in. (25 mm).

2. Where conflicts arise between this specification and the requirements in the latest version of the State Highway Specifications, the State Specifications shall control.

E. Aggregates for asphaltic concrete paving: Provide a mixture of sand, mineral aggregate, and liquid asphalt mixed in such proportions that the percentage by weight will be within:

Sieve Sizes Percentage Passing

19 mm (3/4") 100

9.5 mm (3/8") 67 to 85

6.4 mm (1/4") 50 to 65

2.4 mm (No. 8 mesh) 37 to 50

600 µm (No. 30 mesh) 15 to 25

75 µm (No. 200 mesh) 3 to 8

Plus 50/60 penetration liquid asphalt at 5% to 6 ½% of the combined dry aggregates.

2.3 ASPHALTS

A. Comply with provisions of Asphalt Institute Specification SS2:

1. Asphalt cement: Penetration grade 50/60.

2. Prime coat: Cut-back type, grade MC‒250.


32 12 16 VARHS

3. Track coat: Uniformly emulsified, grade SS‒1H.

2.4 SEALER

A. Provide a sealer consisting of suitable fibrated chemical type asphalt base binders and fillers having a container consistency suitable for troweling after thorough stirring, and containing no clay or other deleterious substance.

B. Where conflicts arise between this specification and the requirements in the latest version of the State Highway Specifications, the State Specifications shall control.


3.1 GENERAL

A. The Asphalt Concrete Paving equipment, weather limitations, job-mix formula, mixing, construction methods, compaction, finishing, tolerance, and protection shall conform to the requirements of the appropriate sections of the State Highway Specifications for the type of material specified.

3.2 MIXING ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Provide hot plant-mixed asphaltic concrete paving materials.

1. Temperature leaving the plant: 290 °F (143 °C) minimum, 320 °F (160 °C) maximum.

2. Temperature at time of placing: 280 °F (138 °C) minimum.

B. 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) dense Level II H.M.A.C. unless noted otherwise.

3.3 SUBGRADE

A. Shape to line and grade and compact with self-propelled rollers.

B. All depressions that develop under rolling shall be filled with acceptable material and the area re-rolled.

C. Soft areas shall be removed and filled with acceptable materials and the area re-rolled.

D. Should the subgrade become rutted or displaced prior to the placing of the subbase, it shall be reworked to bring to line and grade.

3.4 BASE COURSES

A. Subbase (When Required):

1. Spread and compact to the thickness shown on the drawings.

2. Rolling shall begin at the sides and continue toward the center and shall continue until there is no movement ahead of the roller.

3. After completion of the subbase rolling there shall be no hauling over the subbase other than the delivery of material for the top course.

B. Base:

1. Spread and compact to the thickness shown on the drawings.


32 12 16 VARHS

2. Rolling shall begin at the sides and continue toward the center and shall continue until there is no movement ahead of the roller.

3. After completion of the base rolling there shall be no hauling over the base other than the delivery of material for the top course.

C. Thickness tolerance: Provide the compacted thicknesses within a tolerance of minus 0.0 in. (0.0 mm) to plus 0.5 in. (12.7 mm).

1. Provide 3 in. (76 mm) thick unless noted otherwise.

D. Smoothness tolerance: Provide the lines and grades shown on the Drawings within a tolerance of 3/16 in. in 10 ft (5 mm in 3 m).

E. Moisture content: Use only the amount of moisture needed to achieve the specified compaction.

3.5 PLACEMENT OF ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING

A. Remove all loose materials from the compacted base.

B. Apply the specified prime coat, and tack coat where required, and allow to dry in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Engineer.

C. Receipt of asphaltic concrete materials:

1. Do not accept material unless it is covered with a tarpaulin until unloaded, and unless the material has a temperature of not less than 280 °F (130 °C).

2. Do not commence placement of asphaltic concrete materials when the atmospheric temperature is below 50 °F (10 °C), not during fog, rain, or other unsuitable conditions.

D. Spreading:

1. Spread material in a manner which requires the least handling.

2. Where thickness of finished paving will be 3 in. (76 mm) or less, spread in one layer.

E. Rolling:

1. After the material has been spread to the proper depth, roll until the surface is hard, smooth, unyielding, and true to the thickness and elevations shown own the drawings.

2. Roll in at least two directions until no roller marks are visible.

3. Finished paving smoothness tolerance:

a. No depressions which will retain standing water.

b. No deviation greater than 1/8 in. in 6 ft (3 mm in 1.8 m).

3.6 APPLICATION OF SEAL COAT

A. Prepare the surfaces, mix the steal coat material, and apply in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Architect.

B. Apply one coat of the specified sealer.


32 12 16 VARHS

C. Achieve a finished surface seal which, when dry and thoroughly set, is smooth, tough, resilient, of uniform black color, and free from coarse textured areas, lap marks, ridges, and other surface irregularities.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect the asphaltic concrete paved areas from traffic until the sealer is set and cured and does not pick up under foot or wheeled traffic.

3.8 FINAL CLEAN-UP

A. Remove all debris, rubbish, and excess material from the work area.

— — — E N D — — —


SECTION 32 16 00 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND WALKS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. On-site private curb, gutter, and walk improvements.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Phasing of Work: Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

B. Concrete Work: Section 03 30 00, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

C. Excavation, Shoring, and Backfill: Section 31 20 11, EARTHWORK (SHORT FORM).

1.4 DESIGN AND ENGINEERING

A. Formwork design and engineering, as well as construction, are the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 01 33 23, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Closeout Requirements: Comply with Division 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

1. Provide record documents.

1.6 WEATHER PRECAUTIONS

A. Provide cold weather and/or hot weather protection as recommended in ACI 306 and ACI 305.

B. Unless adequate protection is provided, concrete shall not be placed during rain, sleet, or snow. Protect concrete from rain water, maintain concrete water ratio and protect concrete surface.

C. All concrete shall be adequately protected after pouring to prevent damage from freezing, by the use of suitable cover. Frozen and damaged concrete must be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. Do not place concrete on frozen earth.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Not less than 5 years experience in the actual production of specified products.

B. Installers Qualifications: Firm with not less than 5 years experience in installation of systems similar in complexity to those required for this project.

C. Product/Material Qualifications:

1. Design data: Compaction testing shall be in accordance with Section 31 20 11, EARTHWORK (SHORT FORM).

2. Test reports: Provide job mix test reports.


32 16 00 VARHS


A. Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Protect from damage by the elements and construction procedures.

1.9 ADVANCE NOTICES

A. Notify Resident Engineer at least 48 hours before intended concrete placement.

B. Place no concrete until formwork and reinforcement have been inspected.

1.10 COORDINATION


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 CRUSHED ROCK PAVEMENT BASE

A. Imported, clean, 3/4 in. (19 mm) Crushed Rock Pavement Base as specified in Section 31 20 11, EARTHWORK (SHORT FORM).

2.2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

A. Concrete shall be ready-mixed conforming to Section 03 30 00, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE, and shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days.

2.3 CURING COMPOUND

A. Curing compound for all other concrete shall conform to AASHTO M171, White Polyethylene Film for curing concrete or AASHTO M148, Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.

2.4 TACTILE WARNINGS

A. Shall be per VA standards.



A. Prior to starting work of this section verify that existing grades and field conditions agree with drawings. Notify Resident Engineer of deviations.

B. Do not start work of this section until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencing work implies acceptance of existing conditions.


3.2 EXCAVATION

A. All excavation shall be in accordance with Section 31 20 11, EARTHWORK (SHORT FORM).

3.3 CRUSHED ROCK BASE

A. After the subgrade is compacted and at the proper grade, spread required thickness of 3/4-inch minus crushed rock. Compact by rolling or other approved method. Surface of the compacted base shall be at the proper level to receive the concrete. Manholes, catch basins, inlets, and other such structures shall be


32 16 00 VARHS

completed, adjusted, cured, and otherwise prepared, as applicable, and made clean and ready to have concrete placed in contact with them.

3.4 FORMWORK

A. Conform to the requirements of Section 03 30 00, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. Construct forms to the shape, lines, grades, and dimensions called for on the Drawings. Stake wood or steel forms securely in place, true to line and grade. Brace forms to prevent change of shape of movement in any direction resulting from the weight of the concrete during placement.

B. Allowable Tolerances: Tops of forms shall not depart from grade line more than 1/8 in. (3 mm) when checked with 10 ft (3 m) straightedge. Alignment of straight sections shall not vary more than 1/8 in. (3 mm) in 10 ft (3 m).

3.5 FINISHING

A. After the pavement has been struck off and consolidated, it shall be scraped with a straightedge equipped with a handle to permit operation from the edge of the pavement. Any excess water shall be removed from the surface of the pavement. Irregularities shall be corrected by adding or removing concrete. All disturbed places shall be again straight edged.

B. After the concrete has been given a preliminary finish, the surface of the pavement shall be checked by the contractor with a straightedge device. Each successive check with the straightedge device shall lap the previous check path by at least half the length of the straightedge. Surface deviations exceeding 0.01 ft (3 mm) shall be corrected. Upon completion of the surface floating, but before any required edge tooling or joint tooling, and before initial set of the surface pavement, the pavement shall be given a textured finish perpendicular to match the existing. The textured finish shall be accomplished by a steel tine tool that will mark the finished pavement to a depth of 1/8 in. (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 in. (5 mm). Match finish of existing pavement where new pavement is adjacent. The surface of the pavement shall not vary from a true surface, when tested with a 12 ft (3,657 mm) testing straightedge, more than 1/8 in. (3 mm) in 12 ft (3,657 mm).

C. Finish shall be a light broom finish for slip resistant surface. Broom pattern to be parallel to slope.

D. Accessible Ramps: Steel trowel finish. Apply tactile warning finish.

3.6 JOINTS

A. Construction joints, expansion joints, transverse contraction joints, and all longitudinal contraction joints shall be placed as indicated in the drawings.

B. Contraction Joints:

1. Longitudinal contraction joints shall consist of planes of weakness created by forming grooves in the surface of the pavement.

2. Maximum joint spacing shall be 5 ft (1,524 mm) for sidewalks, and as shown on drawings for other work.

C. Construction Joints: Construction joints shall be placed whenever the placing of concrete is suspended for more than 45 minutes. A butt joint with dowels or a thickened-edge joint shall be used if the joint occurs at the location of a contraction joint.

3.7 SEALING JOINTS

A. Joints to be sealed shall be filled with joint-sealing material before the pavement is opened to traffic and as soon after completion of the curing period as is feasible.


32 16 00 VARHS

B. Each joint shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material, including membrane curing compound, and joint faces shall be clean and surface-dry when seal is applied.

3.8 WALK EDGING

A. Before final finishing is completed and before final concrete set has occurred, finish concrete edges with edging tool shaped with 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) radius.

1. Take particular care to maintain surface on both sides of joint in same plane.

2. Do not use kneeling planks on concrete surface.

3.9 CURING

A. Minimum Curing Period: 3 days.

B. Uniformly apply compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, after final concrete finishing is complete, and after all free water has disappeared from pavement surface.

C. Apply to concrete edges immediately after formwork removal.

D. Do not use membrane compound method if pavement will be exposed to de-icing chemicals within 30 days following curing period completion.


A. Refer to Division 1 for responsibilities for arranging, supervising, and payment of field quality control requirements.

B. Field Tests:

1. Observance and approval of subgrade and base rock compaction.

2. Concrete cylinder strength tests. Concrete flexural strength tests.

3. Slump and air tests.

C. Field Inspections: Notify Resident Engineer prior to work of this section.

D. Special Inspections for Code Compliance: Obtain building inspector approvals.

3.11 DEFECTIVE WORK

A. Remove and replace any surfaces which show excessive cracks, pavements that do not drain properly, and other defective concrete.

B. Minimum Surface Evenness: 1/8 in. (3 mm) per 10 ft (3,000 m).

3.12 CLEANING

A. Including work of other trades, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.

B. Upon completion of the work of this section, promptly remove from the working area all scraps, debris, and surplus material.

3.13 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK



32 16 00 VARHS

B. Replace, at no additional cost to Owner, any damaged work of this section.

— — — E N D — — —


SECTION 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This work consists of all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for furnishing and installing chain link fence, gates and accessories in conformance with the lines, grades, and details as shown.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Grounding: Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

B. Temporary Construction Fence: Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

C. Rough Grading: Section 31 20 11, EARTHWORK (SHORT FORM).

D. Finish Grading: Section 32 90 00, PLANTING.

1.3 MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS

A. Fence, gates, and accessories shall be products of manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacturing items of type specified.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES, furnish the following:

1. Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Chain link fencing, gates and all accessories.

2. Manufacturer's Certificates: Zinc-coating complies with complies with specifications.


A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.


A121‒13 ........................... Metallic-Coated Carbon Steel Barbed Wire

A392‒11a ......................... Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric

A491‒11 ........................... Aluminum-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric

A817‒12 ........................... Metallic-Coated Steel Wire for Chain-Link Fence Fabric and Marcelled Tension Wire

C94/C94M‒14 .................. Ready-Mixed Concrete

F567‒14 ........................... Installation of Chain-Link Fence

F626‒14 ........................... Fence Fittings


32 31 13 VARHS

F668‒11 ........................... Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), Polyolefin and Other Polymer-Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric

F900‒11 ........................... Industrial and Commercial Steel Swing Gates

F1043‒13 ......................... Strength and Protective Coatings on Steel Industrial Fence Framework

F1083‒13 ......................... Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures

F1184‒05(2010) ............... Industrial and Commercial Horizontal Slide Gates

F1664‒08(2013) ............... Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Other Conforming Organic Polymer-Coated Steel Tension Wire Used with Chain-Link Fence

F1665‒08(2013) ............... Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Other Conforming Organic Polymer-Coated Steel Barbed Wire Used With Chain-Link Fence

F2200‒13e1 ...................... Automated Vehicular Gate Construction


FF-P-110J ......................... Padlock, Changeable Combination (Resistant to Opening by Manipulation and Surreptitious Attack)

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Materials shall conform to ASTM F1083 and ASTM A392 for ferrous metals, zinc-coated; and detailed specifications forming the various parts thereto; and other requirements specified herein. Zinc-coat metal members (including fabric, gates, posts, rails, hardware and other ferrous metal items) after fabrication shall be reasonably free of excessive roughness, blisters and sal-ammoniac spots.

2.2 CHAIN-LINK FABRIC

A. ASTM A392, 9 gauge wire woven in a 2 in. (50 mm) mesh. Top and bottom selvage shall have twisted and barbed finish. Zinc-coating weight shall be 1.2 oz/ft² (366 g/m²).

2.3 POST, FOR GATES AND FENCING

A. ASTM F1083, Grade SK-40A, round, zinc-coated steel. Dimensions and weights of posts shall conform to the tables in the ASTM Specification. Provide post braces and truss rods for each gate, corner, pull or end post. Provide truss rods with turnbuckles or other equivalent provisions for adjustment.

2.4 TOP RAIL AND BOTTOM RAIL

A. ASTM F1083, Grade SK-40A, round, zinc-coated steel. Dimensions and weights of posts shall conform to the tables in the ASTM Specification; fitted with suitable expansion sleeves and means for securing rail to each gate, corner, and end posts.

2.5 TOP AND BOTTOM TENSION WIRE

A. ASTM A817 and ASTM F626, zinc-coated, having minimum coating the same as the fence fabric.


32 31 13 VARHS

2.6 VINYL SLAT

A. Vinyl slats to fit the chain link fence system, color as selected. Install vertically to provide 85% privacy.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Accessories as necessary caps, rail and brace ends, wire ties or clips, braces and tension bands, tension bars, truss rods, and miscellaneous not shown.

2.8 GATES

A. ASTM F900, type as shown. Gate framing, bracing, latches, and other hardware zinc-coating weight shall be the same as the FABRIC. Gate leaves more than 8 ft (2,440 mm) wide shall have both intermediate members and diagonal truss rods, or shall have tubular members as necessary to provide rigid construction, free from sag or twist. Gates less than 8 ft (2,440 mm) wide shall have truss rods or intermediate braces. Attach gate fabric to the gate frame by method standard with the manufacturer, except that welding will not be permitted. Arrange latches for padlocking so that padlock will be accessible from both sides of the gate regardless of the latching arrangement. When required, extend each end member of gate frame sufficiently above the top member or provide three strands of barbed wire in horizontal alignment with barbed wire strands on the fence.

B. Gate Hardeware:

1. Manufacturer's standard products, installed complete. The type of hinges shall allow gates to swing through 180 degrees, from closed to open position. Hang and secure gates in such a manner that, when locked, they cannot be lifted off hinges.

2. Provide stops and keepers for all double gates. Latches shall have a plunger-bar arranged to engage the center stop. Arrange latches for locking. Center stops shall consist of a device arranged to be set in concrete and to engage a plunger bar. Keepers shall consist of a mechanical device for securing the free end of the gate when in full open position.

2.9 CONCRETE

A. ASTM C94/C94M, using 3/4 in. (19 mm) maximum-size aggregate, shall have a 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 psi (25.8 MPa). Non-shrinking grout shall consist of one part Portland cement to three parts clean, well-graded sand, non-shrinking grout additive and the minimum amount of water to produce a workable mix.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install fence by properly trained crew, on previously prepared surfaces, to line and grade as shown. Install fence in accordance with ASTM F567 and with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions, except as modified herein or as shown. Maintain all equipment, tools, and machinery while on the project in sufficient quantities and capacities for proper installation of posts, chain links and accessories.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Excavation for concrete-embedded items shall be of the dimensions shown, except in bedrock. If bedrock is encountered before reaching the required depth, continue the excavation to the depth shown or 18 in. (450 mm) into the bedrock, whichever is less, and provide a minimum of 2 in. (50 mm) larger diameter than the outside diameter of the post. Clear loose material from post holes. Grade area around finished concrete footings as shown and dispose of excess earth as directed by the Resident Engineer.


32 31 13 VARHS

3.3 FRAMEWORK INSTALLATION

A. Post Setting: Install posts plumb and in alignment. Set post in concrete footings of dimensions as shown, except in bedrock. Thoroughly compact concrete so as it to be free of voids and finished in a slope or dome to divert water running down the post away from the footing. Straight runs between braced posts shall not exceed 500 ft (150 m). Install posts in bedrock with a minimum of 1 in. (25 mm) of non-shrinking grout around each post. Thoroughly work non-shrinking grout into the hole so as to be free of voids and finished in a slope or dome. Cure concrete and grout a minimum of 72 hours before any further work is done on the posts.

B. Post Caps: Fit all exposed ends of post with caps. Provide caps that fit snugly and are weathertight. Where top rail is used, provide caps to accommodate the top rail. Install post caps as recommended by the manufacturer and as shown.

C. Supporting Arm: Design supporting arms, when required, to be weathertight. Where top rail is used, provide arms to accommodate the top rail. Install supporting arms as recommended by the manufacturer and as shown.

D. Top Rails and Bottom Rails: Install rails before installing chain link fabric. Provide suitable means for securing rail ends to terminal and intermediate post. The rails shall have expansion couplings (rail sleeves) spaced as recommended by the manufacturer. Where fence is located on top of a wall, install expansion couplings over expansion joints in wall.

E. Top and Bottom Tension Wire: Install and pull taut tension wire before installing the chain-link fabric.

F. Supply accessories (posts braces, tension bands, tension bars, truss rods, and miscellaneous accessories), as required and recommended by the manufacturer, to accommodate the installation of a complete fence, with fabric that is taut and attached properly to posts, rails, and tension wire.

3.4 CHAIN LINK FABRIC INSTALLATION

A. Chain link fabric to be stretched taut free of sag. Fabric to be secured with tie wire or clips to the top rail and tension wire close to both sides of each post at intervals no greater than 24 in. (600 mm) on center. Secure fabric to posts using stretcher bars and ties or clips.

3.5 GATE INSTALLATION

A. Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Set keepers, stops and other accessories into concrete as required by the manufacturer and as shown. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.

3.6 REPAIR OF GALVANIZED SURFACES

A. Use galvanized repair compound, stick form, or other method, where galvanized surfaces need field or shop repair. Repair surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's printed directions.

3.7 CLEAN-UP

A. The area of the fence line shall be left neat and free of any debris caused by the installation of the fence. Remove all debris, rubbish and excess material.

— — — E N D — — —


32 84 00 – 1VA BLDG. 7 OCTOBER 2014

SECTION 32 84 00 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Work of this section consists of providing a complete fully automatic landscape irrigation system as shown

on the drawings and specified herein.

B. Work includes, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Piping.

2. Valves.

3. Electrical Control Wiring.

4. Sprinkler Heads.

5. Sensors.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Excavation, Trench Widths, Pipe Bedding, Backfill, Shoring, Sheeting, Bracing: Section 31 20 11, EARTHWORK (SHORT FORM).

B. Plant materials: Section 32 90 00, PLANTING.


A. Proprietary item shown on the drawings and specified herein are shown to establish standards of quality,

utility, design and function. Equivalent units by other manufacturers (substitutions) will be considered provided they are similar in these characteristics. They shall only be substituted if approved by Owner's Representative.

1.4 REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION SUBMITTALS

A. Provision for substitutions: Throughout the specifications, types of materials may be specified by

manufacturer's name and catalogue number in order to establish standards of quality and performance and not for the purpose of limiting competition. Alternate methods and/or materials may be submitted to the Owner's Representative, as per specifications herein, for consideration. Those judged to be equal to that specified will receive written approval.

B. Request for substitutions: Submit proposed substituted manufacturer's descriptive literature, product data,

and installation instructions for each item under request for substitution in accordance with or as directed in Submittals Specification Section.

1. Edit product data to reflect project requirements.

2. Product data for substitutions must be accompanied by product data for the item as indicated in the

contract documents. Clearly mark to show similarities and differences of proposed substitute item compared to that indicated.

3. All substituted components shall be approved in writing by the Owner's representative prior to

installation in the field.

32 84 00 – 2VA BLDG. 7 OCTOBER 2014

32 84 00 VARHS

C. Record drawings: A record (or "as-built") drawing is required of the irrigation system, noting changes, deviations, piping route changes, wire sleeves, component location revisions, etc., from the original plan. Main lines and buried remote control electric and drain valves must be positively located by dimension from fixed reference points. Note main line sizes clearly and accurately for maintenance reference. Submit three prints and one reproducible (sepia) of record drawings to Owner's Representative, in accordance with Submittal Section of specifications.

D. Operation and maintenance manual: Submit three copies of manual in 3-ring binder. Manual shall describe

the following:

1. Manufacturer's literature for all specified or approved components installed in the system.

2. Startup procedure.

3. Winterizing procedure.

4. Maintenance and repair instructions.

5. Parts list.

6. Trouble-shooting guide.

E. Record drawing and Operations and Maintenance manual submittals are required to prior to issuance of written project approval and commencement of warranty and maintenance time frames.

1.5 PROTECTION OF THE PUBLIC AND PROPERTY

A. Protect all areas of designated work areas defined on the drawings and any existing on-site vegetation,

structures, etc. Any damage shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of barricades, any safety guards, and any other structures or improvements necessary for the complete protection of the public.

B. Verify non-potable water sources and install labeled components as required by state and federal laws.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERIES, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store PVC pipe and fittings out of direct sunlight and protect from physical damage.

B. Store and protect from weather conditions all components until manufacturer's specified installation has

occurred. Storage and protection of materials shall be the direct responsibility of the Contractor.

C. Handle all components as directed by manufacturer for handling and installation instructions for components. Damage from transportation of materials shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

D. All product delivery, storage and handling of warranty material shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

1.7 PROTECTION OF UNFINISHED WORK

A. Provide protection at all times to keep rock, dirt, gravel, debris, and all other foreign materials from

entering piping, valves and other irrigation equipment.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Solvent weld PVC pipe only during non-freezing weather. Solvent weld PVC pipe only under cover in rainy weather. Do not allow flooding of welded piping until specified cure time has elapsed.

32 84 00 – 3VA BLDG. 7 OCTOBER 2014

32 84 00 VARHS

B. Air temperature of PVC mating surfaces for plastic pipe and fittings shall be between 40 °F and 100 °F.

1.9 UTILITIES

A. Protect utilities encountered.

B. Contractor is responsible to locate, protect, and for repair cost of any damaged or affected existing or proposed utilities.

1.10 INSPECTION

A. Cover or enclose work only after it has been inspected, tested, and approved.

1.11 ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS

A. All local, municipal and state laws and rules and regulations governing or relating to any portion of this

work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications and their provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor. Any specification herein contained, shall not be construed to conflict with the above rules, regulations or requirements of same.


A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are

referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

B. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):

A-A-60005 .............................Frames, Covers, Gratings, Steps, Sump and Catch Basin, Manhole

C. American National Standard Institute (ANSI):

ANSI/ASME B40.100-05 ......Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments

D. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE):

1013-2005 ..............................Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers

E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

ASTM B61-08........................Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings

ASTM B62-02........................Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings

ASTM D1785-06....................Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,

Schedules 40, 80, and 120

ASTM D2241-05....................Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)

ASTM D2287-96(2001) .........Standard Specification for Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer

Molding and Extrusion Compounds

ASTM D2464-06....................Standard Specification for Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

32 84 00 – 4VA BLDG. 7 OCTOBER 2014

32 84 00 VARHS

ASTM D2466-06....................Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40

ASTM D2564-04e1 ................Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Plastic Piping Systems

ASTM D2855-96(2002) .........Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings

ASTM F477-08 ......................Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic

Pipe

F. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

C110/A21.10-08 .....................American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water

C111/A21.11-07 .....................American National Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron

Pressure Pipe and Fittings

C115/A21.15-05 .....................AWWA Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray- Iron Threaded Flanges

C151/A21.51-02 .....................American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for

Water

C153/A21.53-06 .....................American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service

C500-02 ..................................AWWA Standard for Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service

C504-06 ..................................AWWA Standard for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves

C600-05 ..................................AWWA Standard for Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their

Appurtenances

G. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS):

SP-70-2006.............................Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

H. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

250-2003 ................................Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

1.13 COORDINATION


B. Verify sleeving conduits are installed where required, and at sizes and types specified. Coordinate installation with other trades where necessary.

1.14 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor guarantees that the irrigation system installed under this section of the specifications shall

be free from defects in materials, design and workmanship for a period of one year from the Date of Written Approval.

32 84 00 – 5VA BLDG. 7 OCTOBER 2014

32 84 00 VARHS

B. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure on any part of this equipment during the guarantee period, new replacement parts shall be furnished and installed promptly by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Damages resulting from failure or malfunction of specified components shall be repaired promptly, at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. The contractor shall not be responsible for damage due to extreme weather conditions, vandalism, or

Owner's neglect or improper operation after written approved acceptance, and throughout specified warranty period.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for grade settlement, and/or erosion activity of soil surfaces resulting

from irrigation construction throughout specified warranty period.

1.15 PROTECTION OF EXISTING IRRIGATION SYSTEM

A. Remove or abandon existing irrigation system for Building 7 landscape areas and replace with new irrigation as shown on Irrigation Plan.

B. Protect existing zones connected to Building 7 controller that provide irrigation to areas outside of the

scope of this project. Reconnect existing zones to new controller as directed by Owner’s representative.

C. Make arrangements for irrigation shutoff during construction with Owner's representative. Provide complete temporary irrigation to landscape areas, during normal watering seasons, affected by shut-off during construction. Notify Owner 24 hours prior to water shutoff.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Materials and equipment shall be new, delivered to site in original factory condition, and as specified in this

section.

2.2 PLASTIC PIPE

A. All plastic pipe shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) continuously bearing the seal of the National Sanitation Foundation, with the exception of polyethylene pipe specified as follows:

B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe:

1. Lateral Lines: PVC Class 200, Type 1, white, NSF approved, solvent weld pipe meeting the requirements of ASTM D2241. Size as indicated on irrigation drawings.

2. Main Lines: PVC Class 200, Type 1, white, NSF approved, solvent weld pipe meeting the requirements

of ASTM D2241. Size as indicated on the irrigation drawings.

3. Sleeves:

a. Sleeves installed beneath asphalt paving: PVC Schedule 40 pipe meeting the requirements of ASTM D2241.

b. Sleeves installed beneath walls and walkways: PVC Class 200 pipe meeting the requirements of

ASTM D2241.

4. Risers and Nipples: PVC, Type 1, Schedule 80 one piece gray, standard weight with molded threads, both ends, ASTM D1784, D2464.

32 84 00 – 6VA BLDG. 7 OCTOBER 2014

32 84 00 VARHS

5. Electrical Conduit: PVC Schedule 40 electrical gray conduit, standard weight. 1-1/2 inch sized unless otherwise required.

C. Polyethylene Pipe and fittings: ½” Rainbird XFCV Drip Tubing

2.3 GALVANIZED PIPE

A. Galvanized pipe shall be threaded and hot dip galvanized standard steel pipe Schedule 40 standard weight.

2.4 PLASTIC FITTINGS

A. For Polyethylene Pipe: As specified by manufacturer of polyethylene pipe.

B. For PVC Class 200 Pipe: PVC, Type 1, and white Schedule 40 meeting the requirements of ASTM D2466.

C. For PVC Schedule 80 Pipe: Type 1, gray, Schedule 80 meeting the requirements of ASTM D2464 PVC standard weight.

2.5 GALVANIZED FITTINGS

A. Galvanized fittings shall be threaded and hot-dip galvanized standard steel Schedule 40 standard weight.

2.6 PIPE JOINING COMPOUNDS

A. Cement and Primer for Solvent Weld Joints: As recommended by manufacturer of PVC pipe.

B. Teflon Tape for Threaded Joints (PVC or galvanized): DuPont or approved equal.

2.7 ELECTRIC CONTROL WIRE AND CONNECTORS

A. Wire: Single strand copper, UL approved for direct burial. Sized in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. Control (hot) wires shall be red and common (ground) wire shall be white. Spare wire shall be black.

B. Wire Connectors and Sealant: UL approved for direct burial.

2.8 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER

A. Automatic controllers, suitable for outdoor application, or as shown on drawing with specified number of

stations, for mounting as specified.

B. Weather Sensor as shown on drawing

2.9 VALVES

A. Manual Isolation Valves: Brass globe valve.

B. Remote Control Valve: Manufacturer and model number as shown on plans.

C. Manual Drain Valve: 19 mm (3/4-inch) size bronze angle valve with rising stem and cross-type handle. Hammond, Buckner, or approved equal.

D. Pressure Reducing Valve (if required): Brass, with adjustable pressure from 25-75 psi.

E. Air Relief Valve: Drip irrigation compatible as noted on plans.

32 84 00 – 7VA BLDG. 7 OCTOBER 2014

32 84 00 VARHS

2.10 VALVE BOX

A. Plastic valve box with locking lid, sized to facilitate access to valve(s) for maintenance, repair or removal. Ametek, Carson, or approved equal.

2.11 BACKFLOW PREVENTER

A. Backflow prevention device shall be as approved by local authorities.

2.12 VAULT/BOX FOR BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE

A. Size and type to conform to state and local codes.

2.13 SPRINKLERS

A. Sprinkler heads shall be as indicated on plans, or as approved in written form by the Owner's representative.

B. To control zone drainage, at the bottom of slope areas, install low head drainage bodies on lowest heads in zone.

C. Install pop-up riser heights as specified on irrigation plan, or in accordance with the following:

1. New and Existing Lawn areas: Minimum 4" pop-up.

2.14 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Gravel: 3/4-inch minus, washed, crushed rock.

B. Valve Marker: Locking type, Rain Bird, Weathermatic, Buckner or approved equal.

C. Manual Drain Valve Key: Minimum length 762 mm (30 inches).

D. Pipe backfill: Clean, dry, friable topsoil void of stones larger than 25 mm (1 inch) in diameter and other material deleterious to specified pipe. Soil shall be suitable for compaction to eliminate settlement conditions of specified finish grades.

E. All other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper irrigation system

installation, shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds and subject to approval by Owner's Representative.

2.15 TRACER WIRES

A. Tracer Wires shall be No. 14 direct burial Wire, color coded – blue.


3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work and verify that all such work is

complete to the point where specified installation may properly commence.

B. Verify that irrigation system may be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the accepted design, the referenced standards, and the manufacturer's specifications.

32 84 00 – 8VA BLDG. 7 OCTOBER 2014

32 84 00 VARHS

3.2 CONNECTION TO WATER SOURCES

A. Notify Owner 24 hours prior to shut off of water system to facilitate irrigation connection.

3.3 TRENCHING

A. Trench depths shall provide minimum covers of:

1. 305 mm (12 inch) for all lateral lines.

2. 457 mm (18 inch) for main line.

3. 457 mm (18 inch) for sleeving beneath walkways.

4. 610 mm (24 inch) (or as specified by jurisdiction) for sleeving beneath vehicular traffic.

B. Depth of trenching shall avoid interference with waterlines and other utilities, and shall allow utility clearance as specified by jurisdiction.

C. Trench bottoms shall have uniform slopes with one percent minimum slope towards drain valves. Trench

bottom shall be free of rocks or sharp-edged objects.

D. Trench shall be of sufficient width to allow for proper tamping and a four-inch horizontal separation between irrigation piping.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPE IN TRENCH

A. Install and test piping before backfill is placed. Piping shall be substantially supported at all points.

B. Provide for expansions of PVC pipe during hot weather, by snaking pipe in ditch, or running line on open

discharge until it contracts to operating length.

C. Set all piping in trench so as to exhibit manufacturer's designated seal upward and visible for inspection, prior to backfill.

3.5 PIPE PULLING

A. Installation of pipe and wires by means of vibratory plow/pipe puller may be used as an alternate to

standard trenching methods if site allows, and as approved by the Owner's representative.

B. Vibratory pipe pulling shall only be allowed on 19 mm (3/4-inch) and 25 mm (1 inch) diameter piping only.

C. Solvent weld joints shall be thoroughly cured prior to pipe pulling.

D. Contractor shall ensure, by means of an open pit or trench at the beginning, middle, and the end of pull, that pipe and wire is installed at the specified burial depths throughout the entire length of the pull. Burial depths shall be the same as specified for trenching.

E. Allow a minimum of five chain links between plow blade and pulling grip/bullet.

F. Pulling grip/bullet shall be a minimum of 50 mm (2 inch) in diameter greater than the combined diameters

of pipe joints and wire to be pulled.

G. Wire pulling shall only occur with proper wire blade feed attachment.

32 84 00 – 9VA BLDG. 7 OCTOBER 2014

32 84 00 VARHS

3.6 PIPE CONNECTIONS

A. Do not use solvent cement on threaded joints. Wrap threads with minimum of three wraps of Teflon tape in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.

B. Follow manufacturer's instructions for solvent welding of PVC pipe and fittings to achieve tight and

inseparable joints.

C. Cementing plastic pipe:

1. Cut all ends squarely with approved pipe cutting tool. Bevel ends with a deburring tool.

2. Clean all pipe ends prior to assembly.

3. Clear all pipe lengths of dirt and debris. Protect from contamination.

4. Do not use excess primer and solvent when joining pipe ends.

5. Insert pipe ends to full depth of fitting, hold tightly as necessary to insure full depth bonding.

6. Allow 15 minutes curing time following joint assembly prior to moving or handling jointed pipe.

3.7 BACKFILLING

A. Completely fill trench with specified topsoil material approved by Owner's representative only after main and lateral line inspection, testing, and approval. Clear trenches of stones larger than 25 mm (1 inch) in diameter and of non-backfill material. Fill all voids and tamp thoroughly in compacted layers of 152 mm (6 inches) at a time. Place and compact soil to eliminate settling of final trench grades.

3.8 DRAIN VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install one manual drain valve at discharge side of each remote control valve and at all low points in main

line pipe to allow for complete drainage of all main lines.

B. Sump: Allow minimum of 102 mm (4 inch) clearance between bottom of valve top of sump material.

3.9 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install plumb, in valve box, in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.

3.10 BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with state and local codes. Conceal in planting beds where possible.

3.11 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION

A. Install controller in accordance with manufacturer's specifications, and respective State and Local codes. B.

Attach valve schedule to controller. Install at location as instructed by Owner's representative at 120 VAC source. Notify Owner's Representative prior to installation, of conflicts or complications with specified controller locations.

C. Install weather sensor device at location on outside of building in an open area that is exposed to rain and

wind, and away from tree branches that may interfere with sensor function. Location to be approved by Owner’s representative prior to installation.

32 84 00 VARHS

32 84 00 – 10VA BLDG. 7 APRIL 2014

3.12 ELECTRICAL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Run all 24 volt direct burial service wires for remote valves in electrical conduit from the bottom of the controller to the outside of the structure, as per State and Local codes.

B. At 4 m (15 foot) minimum intervals, bundle together all 24 VAC wiring using standard electrical wire ties,

i.e., TYTON #T-50-R Nylon, one-piece molded, self-locking tie, 6 mm (1/4-inch) (nominal width) by 197 mm (7–3/4 inches) long. It is not required to secure wiring to the main line. Lay "bundled" wiring close to and alongside the PVC main line (or lateral) to remove the damage hazards from backfill and maintenance operations.

C. A spare (black) wire shall be run from the controller past farthest remote control valve(s) in the field, but

not connected at inside of valve box. At controller and at each farthest remote control valve, provide as a minimum an 457 mm (18 inch) loop in the spare wire, and label "Spare Wire".

D. Tracer wire or tape shall be installed along the top of all main lines and specified pipes of nonmetallic

composition. Tape to piping at 3 m (10 foot) intervals with standard black 19 mm (3/4-inch) electrical tape.

E. Install all wire in accordance with manufacturer's specifications with a minimum of 18 inch looped inside valve box at each remote control valve and at the controller.

F. All wire splicing shall occur only within valve or junction boxes. Splices shall be made waterproof by

following manufacturer's instructions for wire connectors and sealant.

3.13 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.

B. Install all sprinklers on flexible risers, using flexible polyethylene pipe or PVC swing joints.

C. Sprinklers located on slopes which are less than three percent shall be installed plumb. Those, which are located on slopes, which are greater than three percent, shall be installed at an angle midway between plumb and perpendicular to the slope.

3.14 SYSTEM FLUSHING

A. After piping, risers, and valves are installed, but prior to installing sprinkler heads, thoroughly flush piping

system under full water head.

B. Maintain flushing for five minutes or until water flows clearly.

C. Cap risers immediately after flushing.

3.15 PRESSURE TESTING

A. Conduct test in presence of Owner's representative.

B. Test shall be conducted with all control valves and manual drains in place and prior to backfilling.

C. Piping must not lose more than 4 psi after 60 minutes at 125 psi.

D. Correct defects and retest until Owner's representative approves.

E. Laterals will be visually inspected for proper solvent welds and leaks prior to backfilling but no pressure test will be required.

32 84 00 VARHS

32 84 00 – 11VA BLDG. 7 APRIL 2014

3.16 DRIP IRRIGATION

A. Drip irrigation to be installed prior to application of bark mulch, see Landscape Plan.

B. Flush mainline pipe before installing Control Zone Kit assembly.

C. Install Control Zone Kit in valve box in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Install drip emitter tubing in a grid pattern with PVC headers as shown on plan. Secure Polyethylene tubing with approved stakes at five foot intervals.

E. Install Air Relief Valve in valve box at high point of each zone as shown on the irrigation plan in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions..

F. Install Flush Point in valve box at low point of each zone as shown on the irrigation plan in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

G. Flush drip irrigation immediately after installation.

H. Test drip irrigation system and make adjustments as needed for optimum water delivery to root zones.

I. Approval of drip irrigation by Owner’s representative required prior to application of bark mulch.

3.17 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING

A. Calculate three irrigation programs: Spring/Early Summer, Summer, Late Summer/Fall. System operation requirements shall be based on annual precipitation rates, plant material maturation requirements, solar exposure, and topography and soil conditions.

B. Submit seasonal controller operation program with as-built record drawings and include laminated copy of

program at controller location. Include total application quantities in inches per week for all zones, for establishment period and continual system operation.

3.18 FINAL INSPECTION

A. Thoroughly clean, adjust and balance the installed irrigation system. Adjust spray pattern of nozzles to

reduce throw of water onto buildings, structures, vehicles, and paved surfaces. Monitor and re-adjust system operation until components operate continually as specified.

B. Upon 48 hours prior notice, demonstrate irrigation system performance to the Owner's representative, for

inspection and written approval. Demonstration shall prove that all valves are functioning properly and that the installed system is workable, clean and efficient.

C. Demonstrate operation of the system, including controller operating program, and all valves keys to

Owner's designated operating personnel.

D. Demonstrate start-up and winterizing procedures.

— — — E N D — — —

SECTION 32 90 00 PLANTING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The work in this section consists of furnishing and installing all planting materials required for landscaping as specified in locations shown.

1.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Maintain all equipment, tools and machinery while on the project in sufficient quantities and capacity for proper execution of the work.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Topsoil Testing: Section 01 45 29, TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES.

B. Section 01 57 19, TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.

C. Stripping Topsoil, Stock Piling and Topsoil Materials: Section 31 20 11, EARTHWORK (SHORT FORM).

D. Section 32 84 00, LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Notify the Resident Engineer of the delivery schedule in advance so the plant material may be inspected upon arrival at the job site. Remove unacceptable plant and landscape materials from the job site immediately.

B. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling.

C. Protect plants during delivery to prevent damage to root balls or desiccation of leaves. Protect trees during transport by tying in the branches and covering all exposed branches.

D. Deliver fertilizer to the site in the original, unopened containers bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed chemical analysis, name, trade name or trademark, and in conformance to state and federal law. In lieu of containers, fertilizer may be furnished in bulk and a certificate indicating the above information shall accompany each delivery.

E. The use of equipment such as "tree spades" is permitted provided the plant balls are sized in accordance with ANSI Z60.1 and tops are protected from damage.

F. During delivery: Protect seed from contamination.

G. Storage:

1. Keep seed, lime, and fertilizer in dry storage away from contaminants.

2. Store plants not installed on the day of arrival at the site as follows:


32 90 00 VARHS

a. Shade and protect plants from the wind when stored outside.

b. Heel-in bare-root plants.

c. Protect plants stored on the project from drying out at all times by covering the balls or roots with moist sawdust, wood chips, shredded bark, peat moss, or other similar mulching material.

d. Keep plants, including those in containers, in a moist condition until planted, by watering with fine mist spray.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of plants.

1. Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association with 5 years experience in landscape installation.

B. A qualified Arborist shall be licensed and required to submit one copy of license to the Resident Engineer.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples: Submit the following samples for approval before work is started:

1. Inert Mulch: 5 lb (2.5 kg) of each type to be used.

2. Organic Mulch: 5 lb (2.5 kg) of each type to be used.

3. Pre-Emergent Herbicide: 5 lb (2.5 kg) of each type to be used.

B. Certificates of Conformance or Compliance: Before delivery, notarized certificates attesting that the following materials meet the requirements specified shall be submitted to the Resident Engineer for approval:

1. Plant Materials (Department of Agriculture certification by State Nursery Inspector declaring material to be free from insects and disease).

2. Fertilizers/Herbicide.

3. Seed.

C. Licenses: Licenses of Arborist shall be submitted (1 copy) to the Resident Engineer.

D. List of Plants and Materials:

1. Provide for approval prior to installation a complete list of plant materials including new and relocated.

2. Provide method for seeded areas including seed mix.

1.7 PLANTING AND TURF INSTALLATION SEASONS AND CONDITIONS

A. No work shall be done when the ground is frozen, snow covered, too wet or in an otherwise unsuitable condition for planting. Special conditions may exist that warrants a variance in the specified planting


32 90 00 VARHS

dates or conditions. Submit a written request to the Resident Engineer stating the special conditions and proposal variance.

B. At Water Quality Facility, grading, soil preparation, and seeding shall be performed during optimal weather conditions and at low flow levels to minimize sediment impacts. Site disturbance shall be minimized and desirable vegetation retained, where possible.

1.8 PLANT AND TURF ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD

A. The Establishment Period for plants and turf shall begin immediately after installation, with the approval of the Resident Engineer, and continue until the date that the Government performs a final inspection. During the Plant and Turf Establishment Period the Contractor shall maintain the plants and turf as required in Part 3 and the following:

1. Water all plants and turf to maintain an adequate supply of moisture within the root zone. An adequate supply of moisture is the equivalent of 1/4 in. (6 mm) of absorbed water per week either through natural rainfall or augmented by periodic watering. Apply water at a moderate rate so as not to displace the mulch or flood the plants and turf.

2. Prune plants and replace mulch as required.

3. Replace and restore stakes, guy wires, and eroded plant saucers as required.

4. In plant beds, remove grass and weeds, including the root growth, before they reach a height of 3 in. (75 mm).

5. Spray with approved insecticides and fungicides to control pests and ensure plant survival in a healthy growing condition, as directed by the Resident Engineer.

6. Provide the following turf establishment:

a. Eradicate all weeds. Water, overseed, and perform any other operation necessary to promote the growth of grass.

b. Replant areas void of turf 1 ft² (0.1 m²) and larger in area.

7. Remove plants that die during this period and replace each plant with one of the same size and species.

1.9 PLANT AND TURF WARRANTY

A. All work shall be in accordance with the terms of the Paragraph, "Warranty" of FAR clause 52.246‒21, including the following supplements:

1. Beginning of the Plant and Turf Guarantee Period: A One Year Plant and Turf Guarantee Period will begin on the date that the Government performs a final inspection. The Contractor shall have completed, located, and installed all planting and turf work according to the plans and specifications. All plants and turf are expected to be living and in a healthy condition at the time of final inspection. After the final inspection, the Contractor will replace any dead plant material and any areas void of turf immediately. A one year guarantee for the plant material and turf that was replaced will begin on the day the work is completed.

2. Replacement of relocated plants, that the Contractor did not supply, is not required unless they die from improper handling and care during transplanting. Loss through Contractor negligence requires replacement in kind and size.


32 90 00 VARHS

3. Termination of the Plant and Turf Guaranty Period: The Government will reinspect all plants and turf at the end of the One Year Guaranty Period. The Guaranty Period will end on the date of this inspection provided the Contractor has complied with the work required by this specification. The Contractor shall also comply with the following requirements:

a. Replace any dead, missing, or defective plant material and turf that was not replaced after the final inspection.

b. Mulch and weed plant beds and plant saucers. Just prior to this inspection, treat these areas to a second application of approved pre-emergent herbicide.

c. Remove stakes, guy wires, and any required tree wrappings from plants that have been installed for one year.

d. Complete remedial measures directed by the Resident Engineer to ensure plant and turf survival.

e. Repair damage caused while making plant or turf replacements.


A. The publications listed below, form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.


Z60.1–04 ..................... Nursery Stock

C. Association of Official Seed Analysts (AOSA): Rules for Testing Seed.

D. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM):

B221–08 ..................... Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

C33/C33M–11 ............ Concrete Aggregates

C136–06 ..................... Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

C516–08 ..................... Vermiculite Loose Fill Thermal Insulation

C549–06 ..................... Perlite Loose Fill Insulation

C602–07 ..................... Agricultural Liming Materials

D977–05 ..................... Emulsified Asphalt (AASTHO M140)

D5268–07 ................... Topsoil Used for Landscaping Purposes

E. Hortus Third: A Concise Dictionary of Plants Cultivated in the United States and Canada.

F. Turfgrass Producers International (TPI): Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding.

G. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA): Handbook No. 60 Diagnosis and Improvement of Saline and Alkali Soils; Federal Seed Act Regulations.


32 90 00 VARHS

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All plant and turf material will conform to the varieties specified or shown in the plant list and be true to botanical name as listed in Hortus Third.

2.2 PLANTS

A. Plants shall be in accordance with ANSI Z60.1, except as otherwise stated in the specifications or shown on the plans. Where the drawings or specifications are in conflict with ANSI Z60.1, the drawings and specification shall prevail.

B. Provide well-branched and formed planting stock, sound, vigorous, and free from disease, sunscald, windburn, abrasion, harmful insects or insect eggs with healthy, normal, and unbroken root systems. Provide trees, deciduous and evergreen, that are single trunked with a single leader, unless otherwise indicated, display no weak crotches. Provide symmetrically developed deciduous trees and shrubs of uniform habit of growth, with straight boles or stems and free from objectionable disfigurements, and evergreen trees and shrubs with well developed symmetrical tops with typical spread of branches for each particular species or variety. Provide ground cover and vine plants with the number and length of runners for the size specified, and the proper age for the grade of plants specified. Provide vines and ground cover plants well established in removable containers, integral containers, or formed homogeneous soil sections. Plants shall have been grown under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of the project. Spray all plants budding into leaf or having soft growth with an anti-desiccant at the nursery before digging.

C. The minimum acceptable sizes of all plants, measured before pruning with branches in normal position, shall conform to the measurements designated. Plants larger in size than specified may be used with the approval of the Resident Engineer, with no change in the contract price. When larger plants are used, increase the ball of earth or spread of roots in accordance with ANSI Z60.1.

D. Provide nursery grown plant material conforming to the requirements and recommendations of ANSI Z60.1. Dig and prepare plants for shipment in a manner that will not cause damage to branches, shape, and future development after planting.

E. Balled and burlapped (B&B) plant ball sizes and ratios will conform to ANSI Z60.1, consisting of firm, natural balls of soil wrapped firmly with burlap or strong cloth and tied.

F. Container grown plants shall have sufficient root growth to hold the earth intact when removed from containers, but shall not be root bound.

G. Make substitutions only when a plant (or its alternates as specified) is not obtainable and the Resident Engineer authorizes a change order providing for use of the nearest equivalent obtainable size or variety of plant having the same essential characteristics with an equitable adjustment of the contract price.

H. When existing plants are to be relocated, ball sizes shall conform to requirements for collected plants in ANSI Z60.1, and plants shall be dug, handled, and replanted in accordance with applicable sections of these specifications.

I. Each plant failing to meet the specified requirements shall be rejected and removed immediately from the premises by the Contractor and at his expense and replaced with satisfactory plants or trees conforming to the specified requirements.


32 90 00 VARHS

2.3 LABELS

A. Each plant, or group and bundles or containers of the same species, variety, and size of plant, shall be legibly tagged with a durable, waterproof and weather-resistant label indicating the correct plant name and size specified in the plant list. Labels shall be securely attached and not be removed.

2.4 TOPSOIL

A. Topsoil shall be a well-graded soil of good uniform quality. It shall be a natural, friable soil representative of productive soils in the vicinity. Topsoil shall be free of admixture of subsoil, foreign matter, objects larger than 1 in. (25 mm) in any dimension, toxic substances, weeds and any material or substances that may be harmful to plant growth and shall have a pH value of not less than 5.0 nor more than 7.5.

B. Obtain material from stockpiles established under Section 31 20 11, EARTHWORK (SHORT FORM), subparagraph, Stripping Topsoil that meet the general requirements as stated above. Amend topsoil not meeting the pH range specified by the addition of pH Adjusters.

C. Landscape contractor is to verify with the General Contractor if the on site topsoil is or is not conducive to proper plant growth. Landscape contractor is to supply 12 in. (300 mm) of topsoil in planting areas and 6 in. (150 mm) in lawn areas. If sufficient topsoil is not available on the site to meet the depth as specified herein, the Contractor shall furnish additional topsoil. At least 10 days prior to topsoil delivery, notify the Resident Engineer of the source(s) from which topsoil is to be furnished. Obtain topsoil from well drained areas. Additional topsoil shall meet the general requirements as stated above and comply with the requirements specified in Section 01 45 29, TESTING LABORATORY SAMPLES. Amend topsoil not meeting the pH range specified by the addition of pH adjusters.

2.5 PLANTING SOIL MIXTURE

A. The planting soil mixture shall be composed of 2 parts topsoil, and 1 part approved compost.

2.6 PLANT FERTILIZER

A. For plants and trees, use Commercial Fertilizer "A" Inorganic (5–4–3) with micronutrients and 50% slow-releasing nitrogen.

B. Do not apply fertilizer to Water Quality Facility.

2.7 MULCH

A. Use dark, medium ground, fir or hemlock bark (aged at least 6 months).

2.8 EROSION CONTROL

A. Erosion control blankets: Cellulose fiber blanket, or approved equal. Install where slopes have grades of 2:1 or greater, if required.

B. At water quality facility, erosion control methods such as jute matting, or approved equal shall be used as needed to support the soil on side slopes.

2.9 GUYING AND STAKING MATERIALS

A. Provide stakes for tree support of Douglas-Fir, free from knots, rot, cross grain, or other defects that would impair the strength. Stakes shall be a minimum of 2 in. × 2 in. (50 mm × 50 mm), or 2 ½ in. (64 mm) in diameter × 8 ft (2 m) long and pointed at one end.


32 90 00 VARHS

B. Tree ties for deciduous trees shall be "Chainlock" (or better). For evergreen trees, use "Gro-Strait" tree ties (or a reinforced rubber hose and guy wires).

C. Guying wire shall be 12 gauge (2.7 mm) annealed galvanized steel.

D. Hose chafing guards shall be new or used 2-ply reinforced rubber or plastic hose of all the same color on the project.

2.10 WATER

A. Water shall not contain elements toxic to plant life. Water to be obtained as specified in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, at no cost to the Contractor.

2.11 SEED

A. Seed shall be state-certified seed of the latest season's crop and shall be delivered in original sealed packages bearing the producer's guaranteed analysis for percentages of mixtures, purity, germination, weed seed content, and inert material. Seed shall be labeled in conformance with U.S. Department of Agriculture rules and regulations under the Federal Seed Act and applicable state seed laws. Wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged seed will not be acceptable.

B. Use Hobbs & Hopkins ProTime 400 Native Grass Mix, or approved equal. Onsite seed mixing shall be done only in the presence of the Resident Engineer.

1. Seed mixtures shall be proportioned by weight as follows: NAME OF GRASS (Common) Percent by Weight Blue Wild Barley 60% Meadow Barley 30% Native California Brome 10%

2.12 HERBICIDES

A. All herbicides shall be properly labeled and registered with the U.S. Department of Agriculture. Keep all herbicides in the original labeled containers indicating the analysis and method of use.


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance.

B. Planting and Turf Installation Season and Conditions:

1. Perform operations within the following dates: From March to June for spring and from September to November for fall but not before irrigation system installed, tested, and approved.

2. No work shall be done when the ground is frozen, snow covered, too wet or in an otherwise unsuitable condition for planting.

3. Special conditions may exist that warrant a variance in the specified planting dates or conditions. Submit a written request to the Contracting Officer's Representative stating the special conditions and proposal variance.


32 90 00 VARHS

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain approval by the Contracting Officer's Representative of layout before excavating or planting. The Contracting Officer's Representative may approve adjustments to plant material locations to meet field conditions.

3.3 EXCAVATION FOR PLANTING

A. Prior to excavating for plant pits and bed, verify the location of any underground utilities. Damage to utility lines will be repaired at the Contractor's expense. Where lawns have been established prior to planting operation, cover the surrounding turf before excavations are made in a manner that will protect turf areas. Barricade existing trees, shrubbery, and beds that are to be preserved in a manner that will effectively protect them during the project construction. Protect existing roads, sidewalks, curbs, landscaping and other features remaining as final work.

B. Prior to excavation, all areas showing any undesirable weed or grass growth shall be treated with Round-up in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

C. Till new ground cover and plant beds to a depth of 8 in. (200 mm). In groundcover areas, add 2 in. (50 mm) of compost and till in to the depth of 6 in. (150 mm).

D. Remove rocks, garbage and other underground obstructions to a depth necessary to permit proper planting according to plans and specifications. Where underground utilities, construction, or solid rock ledges are encountered, the Resident Engineer may select other locations for plant material.

E. Plant beds shall be brought to a smooth and even surface conforming to established grades.

F. Dig plant pits by any approved method so that they have vertical sides and flat bottoms. Dig holes 2 ½ times the width of root ball or root system.

G. Check drainage of planting hole with water and adjust any areas showing drainage problems.

3.4 SETTING PLANTS

A. Handle balled/burlapped and container-grown plants only by the ball or container. Set plants plumb and hold in position until sufficient soil has been firmly placed around the roots or ball. Set plants in relation to surrounding grade so that they are even with the depth at which they were grown in the nursery, collecting field, or container. Backfill planting pit with Planting Soil Mixture as specified. Plant ground cover plants after the mulch is in place. Avoid contaminating the mulch with the planting soil. Add slow release fertilizer as each plant is installed at the following rates:

1. Small Shrubs – 1/8 lb per plant.

2. Medium Shrubs – 1/3 lb to 1/2 lb per plant.

3. Large Shrubs – 1/3 lb to 1 lb per plant.

B. Backfill balled/burlapped stock with planting soil mixture as specified to approximately one-half the depth of the ball; then tamp and water. Carefully remove excess burlap and tying materials and fold back. Where plastic wrap or treated burlap is used in lieu of burlap, completely remove these materials before backfilling. Tamp and water remainder of backfill Planting Soil Mixture; then form earth saucers or water basins around isolated plants with topsoil.


32 90 00 VARHS

3.5 MULCHING PLANTS

A. Placing Material: Spread mulch to a uniform minimum thickness of 2 in. (50 mm) in groundcover areas and 2 ½ in. (64 mm) in shrub beds.

B. Keep mulch out of the crowns of shrubs and off buildings, sidewalks, light standards, and other structures.

C. Water thoroughly, then hose down planting area with a fine spray to wash leaves of plants.

3.6 STAKING AND GUYING

A. Stake and guy plants as shown on the drawings and as specified.

B. Drive stakes vertically into the ground to a depth of 18 in. (450 mm) in such a manner as not to injure the ball or roots, unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

3.7 PRUNING

A. Prune new plant material and indicated existing plant material in the following manner: Remove dead, broken and crossing branches. Prune deciduous trees and shrubs to reduce total amount of anticipated foliage by 1/4 to 1/3 while retaining typical growth habit of individual plants with as much height and spread as is practicable. Make cuts with sharp instruments as close as possible to the branch collar. Do not make flush cuts. Do not make "Headback" cuts at right angles to line of growth. Do not pole trees or remove the leader. Remove trimmings from the site.

B. Paint cuts 1/2 in. (13 mm) in diameter and larger with the specified tree wound dressing.

3.8 RESTORATION AND CLEAN-UP

A. Remove excess and waste material daily. In areas where planting and turf work have been completed, clear the area of all debris, spoil piles, and containers. Where existing or new turf areas have been damaged or scarred during planting and construction operations, restore disturbed area to their original condition. Keep at least one paved pedestrian access route and one paved vehicular access route to each building clean at all time. Clear all other paved area when work in adjacent areas is completed.

3.9 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance operations shall begin immediately after each plant is planted and continue as required. Keep plants in a healthy, growing condition by watering, pruning, spraying, weeding, and any other necessary operation of maintenance. Keep plant saucers and beds free of weeds, grass, and other undesired vegetation. Inspect plants once per week during the installation period and perform needed maintenance promptly.

3.10 TILLAGE

A. After the areas required to be turf have been brought to the grades as specified, if the areas are less than a 3:1 slope ratio, thoroughly till to a depth of at least 4 in. (100 mm) by scarifying, disking, harrowing, or other approved methods. Remove all debris and stones larger than one inch remaining on the surface after tillage.

3.11 FINISH GRADING

A. Spread the topsoil evenly to a minimum depth of 6 in. (150 mm). Do not spread topsoil when frozen or excessively wet or dry. Correct irregularities in finished surfaces to eliminate depressions. Protect


32 90 00 VARHS

finished topsoil areas from damage by vehicular or pedestrian traffic. Complete seeded area work only after areas are brought to finished grade.

3.12 MECHANICAL SEEDING

A. Broadcast seed by approved sowing equipment at the rate of 5 lb/1,000 ft² (2.3 kg/92.9 m²).

B. Immediately after seeding, lightly rake the lawn area to provide seed coverage.

3.13 TURF MAINTENANCE

A. Apply water to the turf areas immediately following installation at a rate sufficient to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 in. (100 mm).

1. Supervise watering operation to prevent run-off.

2. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch.

3. Supply all pumps, hoses, pipelines, and sprinkling equipment.

4. Repair all areas damaged by water operations.

3.14 PROTECTION OF TURF AREAS

A. Immediately after installation of the turf areas, protect against traffic or other use by erecting barricades, as required, and placing approved signs at appropriate intervals until final acceptance.

3.15 FINAL CLEAN-UP

A. Remove all debris, rubbish and excess material.

— — — E N D — — —


SECTION 33 10 00 WATER UTILITIES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies materials and procedures for underground water distribution system that is complete and ready for operation. This includes connections to both new building service lines and to existing water supply.

1.2 RELATED WORK


B. Concrete: Section 03 30 00, CAST IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

C. Fire Protection System connection: Section 21 12 00, FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES.

D. General plumbing: Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING.

E. Submittals: Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES.

F. Metering: Section 25 10 10, ADVANCED UTILITY METERING SYSTEM.

G. Erosion and Sediment Control: Section 01 57 19, TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Water Distribution: Pipelines and appurtenances which are part of the distribution system. The distribution system comprises the network of piping located throughout building areas and other areas of water use, including hydrants, valves, and other appurtenances used to supply water for domestic and fire-fighting/fire protection purposes.

B. Water Service Line: Pipe line connecting building piping to water distribution lines.

1.4 ABBREVIATION

A. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

B. DI: Ductile iron pipe.

C. WOG: Water, Oil and Gas.


A. Products Criteria:

1. Multiple Units: When two or more units of the same type or class of materials or equipment are required, these units shall be product of one manufacturer.

2. Nameplate: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment or name or trademark cast integrally with equipment, stamped, or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment.


33 10 00 VARHS

B. Comply with the rules and regulations of the Public Utility having jurisdiction over the connection to Public Water lines and the extension, and/or modifications to Public Utility systems.

C. Comply with all rules and regulations of Federal, State, and the 2012 Uniform Plumbing Code having jurisdiction over the design, construction, and operation of potable water systems.

D. All material surfaces in contact with potable water shall comply with NSF 61.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturers' Literature and Data (Submit all items as one package): (Ductile Iron Pipe and Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) shall be in accordance with AWWA C600 and C605 respectively; and shall be provided to Resident Engineer for approval.)

1. Piping.

2. Gaskets.

3. Valves.

4. Fire hydrants.

5. Street washer.

6. Meter.

7. Vaults, frames and covers.

8. Steps.

9. Post indicator.

10. Valve boxes.

11. Corporation and curb stops.

12. Curb stop boxes.

13. Joint restraint.

14. Disinfection products.

15. Link/sleeve seals.

C. Testing Certifications:

1. Certification of Backflow Devices.

2. Hydrostatic Testing.

3. Certification of Disinfection, including free chlorine residuals, and bacteriological examinations.


33 10 00 VARHS

1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:


B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

B16.1‒2010 ................ Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Classes 25, 125, and 250

B16.18‒2012 .............. Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

B31.3‒2012 ................ ASME Code for Pressure Piping

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

A148/A148M‒08 ........ Steel Castings, High Strength, for Structural Purposes

A242/A242M‒13 ........ High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel

A536‒84(2009) .......... Ductile Iron Castings

B61‒08(2013) ............. Steam or Valve Bronze Castings

B62‒09 ....................... Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings

B88‒09 ....................... Seamless Copper Water Tube

C139‒11 ..................... Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes

D1784‒11 ................... Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds

D1785‒12 ................... Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120

D2464‒13 ................... Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

D2467‒13a ................. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

F437‒09 ...................... Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

F439‒13 ...................... Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

F441/F441M‒13e1 ..... Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80

F477‒10 ...................... Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe

D. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

B300‒10 ..................... Hypochlorites

B301‒10 ..................... Liquid Chlorine

C104/A21.4‒13 .......... Cement—Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings

C105/A21.5‒10 .......... Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems


33 10 00 VARHS

C110/A21.10‒12 ........ Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings

C111/A21.11‒12 ........ Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

C115/A21.15‒11 ........ Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges

C150/A21.50‒08 ........ Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe

C151/A21.51‒09 ........ Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast

C153/A21.53‒11 ........ Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings

C213‒07 ..................... Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines

C500‒09 ..................... Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service

C502‒05 ..................... Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants

C503‒05 ..................... Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants

C508‒09 ..................... Swing Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 in. (50 mm) Through 24 in. (600 mm) NPS

C509‒09 ..................... Resilient-Seated Gate Valve for Water-Supply Service

C510‒07 ..................... Double Check Valve Backflow Prevention Assembly

C511‒07 ..................... Reduced-Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention Assembly

C550‒13 ..................... Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants

C600‒10 ..................... Installation of Ductile-Iron Mains and Their Appurtenances

C605‒13 ..................... Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and Molecularly Oriented Polyvinyl Chloride (PVCO) Pressure Pipe and Fittings

C651–92 ..................... Disinfecting Water Mains

C800‒12 ..................... Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings

C900‒07 ..................... Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4 in. through 12 in. (100 mm through 300 mm), for Water Transmission and Distribution

C905‒10 ..................... Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4 in. through 48 in. (350 mm through 1,200 mm)


14‒2013 ...................... Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems

24‒2013 ...................... Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances

F. NSF International (NSF):

14‒2013 ...................... Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials


33 10 00 VARHS

61‒2012 ...................... Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects

372‒2011 .................... Drinking Water System Components – Lead Content

G. American Welding Society (AWS):

A5.8/A5.8M:2011 ....... Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding

H. Manual of Cross-Connection Control (10th ed.). (2012). University of Southern California: Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research.

I. The Copper Tube Handbook (2010). Copper Development Association Inc.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Ductile iron pipe, direct buried:

1. Provide ductile iron pipe conforming to the requirements of AWWA C151, Pressure Class 350 for Pipe 4 in. through 12 in. (100 mm through 300 mm) in diameter and 250, minimum for pipe larger than 300 mm (12 inches) in diameter, with standard thickness cement mortar lining interior, and interior asphaltic seal coat and exterior asphaltic coating, in accordance with AWWA and ANSI Standards.

2. Below Grade: Supply pipe in lengths not in excess of a nominal 20 ft (6 m) with rubber ring type push-on joints, mechanical joint or approved restrained joint. Provide flange joint pipe where shown on the drawings. Provide mechanical and restrained joint pipe with sufficient quantities of accessories as required for each joint.

3. When a polyethylene encasement over pipe, fittings, and valves is a requirement as indicated on the drawings, the material, installation and workmanship shall conform to applicable sections of AWWA C105. Make provisions to keep the polyethylene from direct exposure to sunlight prior to installation. Backfill following installation without delay to avoid exposure to sunlight.

B. All Pipe Fittings: Ductile iron with a minimum pressure rating of 350 psi (2,400 kPa). Fittings shall meet the requirements of ANSI and AWWA specifications as applicable. Rubber gasket joints shall conform to AWWA C111 for mechanical and push-on type joints. Ball joints shall conform to AWWA C151 with a separately cast ductile iron bell conforming to ASTM A148. Flanged fittings shall conform to AWWA C115 and be furnished flat faced and drilled to 125 psi (850 kPa) or 250 psi (1,725 kPa) template in accordance with ANSI B16.1 with full faced gaskets.

C. Provide cement mortar lining and bituminous seal coat on the inside of the pipe and fittings in accordance with AWWA C104. Provide standard asphaltic coating on the exterior.

D. Provide a factory hydrostatic test of not less than 500 psi (3.5 MPa), for all pipe in accordance with AWWA C151.

E. Provide non-detectable adhesive backed identification tape on top and sides of all buried ductile iron pipe, extended from joint to joint along the length of the pipe and have black lettering identifying the pipe service at no more than 300 mm (12 inch) intervals. According to service, the tape background color shall be as follows: potable water-blue.

2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Class-Rated Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe:


33 10 00 VARHS

1. PVC pipe and accessories 4 in. t0 14 in. (100 mm to 356 mm) in diameter, AWWA C900 PVC Pressure Pipe, Class 200, DR 14, cast iron outside diameters, unless otherwise shown or specified.

2. PVC pipe and accessories 16 in. (400 mm) or larger, AWWA C905, PVC Water Transmission Pipe, Class 235, DR 18, cast iron outside diameters unless otherwise shown or specified. Pipe and accessories shall bear the NSF mark indicating pipe size, manufacturer's name, AWWA and/or ASTM Specification number, working pressure and production code. Pipe and couplings shall be made in accordance with ASTM D1784.

3. PVC Pipe and Accessories Smaller than 4 in. (100 mm): Schedule 80, meeting the requirements of ASTM D1785, Type 1, Grade 1. All exposed piping shall be CPVC meeting requirements of ASTM F441/F441M.

B. Joints:

1. Pipe 3 in. (75 mm) and Greater in Diameter: Push-on type with factory installed solid cross section elastomeric ring meeting the requirements of ASTM F477.

2. Pipe Less Than 3 in. (75 mm) in Diameter: Threaded (ASTM D2464) or solvent welded (ASTM D2467). Use Teflon tape or liquid Teflon thread lubricant approved for use on plastic on all threaded joints.

C. Fittings:

1. Class-Rated Pipe 3 in. (75 mm) in Diameter and Greater: Ductile iron with mechanical joints conforming to the requirements of AWWA C153.

2. For Schedule 80 Pipe less than 3 in. (75 mm) in Diameter: Threaded or solvent weld. Threaded PVC fittings shall conform to ASTM D2464. CPVC fittings shall conform to ASTM F437 for threaded fittings and ASTM F439 for solvent weld fittings.

2.3 COPPER PIPE AND TUBING

A. Copper Piping: ASTM B88, Type K, or Type L with flared fittings in accordance with AWWA C800, with sweat cast brass fittings per ANSI B16.18. Use brazing alloy, AWS A5.8, Classification BCuP.

2.4 VALVES

A. Asbestos packing is not allowed.

B. Gate:

1. 3 in. (75 mm) and Larger: Resilient seated, ductile iron body, bronze mounted, inclined seats, non-rising stem type turning counter-clockwise to open, 200 lb (1,375 kPa) WOG. AWWA C509. The resilient seat shall be fastened to the gate with stainless steel fasteners or vulcanizing methods. The interior and exterior shall be coated with thermo-setting or fusion epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C550.

2. Operator:

a. Underground: Except for use with post indicators, furnish valves with 2 in. (50 mm) nut for socket wrench operation. Post indicator shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 24 and shall be fully compatible with the valve provided.

b. Above Ground and in Pits: Hand wheels.


33 10 00 VARHS

3. Joints: Ends of valves shall accommodate, or be adapted to, pipe installed.

C. Check: Swing.

1. Smaller than 4 in. (100 mm): Bronze body and bonnet, ASTM B61 or ASTM B62, 200 lb (1,375 kPa) WOG.

2. 4 in. (100 mm) and Larger: Iron body, bronze trim, swing type, vertical or horizontal installation, flange connection, 200 lb (1,375 kPa) WOG. Check valves for fire lines shall conform to AWWA C508 and shall be epoxy coated and lined per AWWA C550.

D. Corporation stops and saddles shall conform to AWWA C800.

E. Curb Stop: Smaller than 3 in. (75 mm). Waterworks standard for Type "K" copper, single piece cast bronze body with tee top operated plug sealed with O-ring gaskets, 200 lb (1,375 kPa) WOG per AWWA C800.

2.5 CURB STOP BOX

A. Cast iron extension box with screw or slide type adjustment and flared base. Box shall be adapted, without full extension, to depth of cover required over pipe at stop location. Cast the word "WATER" in cover and set cover flush with finished grade. Curb stop shut-off rod shall extend 2 ft (600 mm) above top of deepest stop box.

2.6 VALVE BOX

A. Cast iron extension box with screw or slide-type adjustment and flared base. Minimum thickness of metal shall be 3/16 in. (5 mm). Box shall be adapted, without full extension, to depth of cover required over pipe at valve location. Cast the word "WATER" in cover. Provide two "T" handle socket wrenches of 5/8 in. (16 mm) round stock long enough to extend 2 ft (600 mm) above top of deepest valve box.

2.7 POST INDICATOR VALVE

A. Valve: Valve shall conform to the specifications listed in Section 2.4 for gate valves. The Post Indicator shall conform to NFPA 24, and shall be fully compatible with the valve and all the supervisory switches.

2.8 FIRE HYDRANTS

A. Size of main valve opening of each hydrant shall be 5 in. (125 mm), minimum. Hose thread, size of fire apparatus connection, and shape, size and direction of rotation of operating head of hydrant shall be identical with present local fire department and/or water department standards.

B. Hydrant shall be type AWWA C502, heavy construction, of proper length to connect pipe without extra fittings, and shall be the traffic type with safety flange on barrel and safety couplings on the valve stem with the following features:

1. Interior removable without digging up hydrant; can be packed under pressure; 6 in. (150 mm) bell connection; one steamer nozzle and two hose nozzles with nozzle caps securely chained to barrel; suitable drainage device; single rubber or leather-faced valve in base; nozzles, stuffing boxes, wedge nuts, seat rings, clamp plates, etc. Threaded joints or spindles shall be bronze. Upper and lower barrels shall be of equal diameters. Upper barrel shall be of sufficient length to permit setting hydrant with barrel flange not more than 2 in. (50 mm) above finished grade. All fire hydrants shall have 6 in. (150 mm) bottom connection.

2. Provide fire hydrants with finish paint identical to the existing fire hydrants.


33 10 00 VARHS

C. Provide two wrenches with handles not less than 14 in. (350 mm) long.

2.9 PIPE SLEEVES

A. Ductile iron or zinc coated steel.

2.10 BACKFLOW PREVENTER

A. Potable Water and Irrigation Water Service: Reduced Pressure Principle Type AWWA C511, except pressure drop at rated flow shall not exceed 15 psi (100 kPa). Gate valves installed on the assembly shall be resilient seated valve conforming to AWWA C509.

B. Fire Service: Double detector check valve. AWWA C510 and NFPA 14.

C. In cold climate areas, backflow assemblies and devices shall be protected from freezing by a method acceptable to local jurisdiction.

D. Backflow preventers shall be approved by the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research per the Manual of Cross-Connection Control (

E. Backflow preventer shall not be located in any area containing fumes that are toxic, poisonous or corrosive.

F. Direct connections between potable water piping and sewer connected wastes shall not exist under any condition with or without backflow protection.

G. Backflow preventer shall be accessed and have clearance for the required testing, maintenance and repair. Access and clearance shall require a minimum of 1 ft (305 mm) between the lowest portion of the assembly and grade, floor or platform. Installations elevated more than 5 ft (1,524 mm) above the floor or grade shall be provided with a permanent platform capable of supporting a tester or maintenance person.

2.11 WATER METER

A. Furnish and install meter approved by VA. Forward approval.

2.12 VAULTS (BACKFLOW PREVENTER OR METER)

A. Top and base shall be reinforced concrete.

B. Walls shall be reinforced concrete, precast concrete or segmental block (ASTM C139).

2.13 CAST IRON FRAME AND COVER, STEPS, ETC.

A. Cast iron frame and cover, steps, etc. shall comply with State Department of Transportation standard details. Identify cover as "WATER".

2.14 FLEXIBLE EXPANSION JOINTS: (PROVIDE FOR DOMESTIC AND FIRE SERVICE)

A. Ductile iron with ball joints rated for 250 psi (1,725 kPa) working pressure conforming to AWWA C153/A21.53, capable of deflecting a minimum of 30 degrees and expanding simultaneously to the amount shown on the drawings. Flexible expansion joint shall have the expansion capability designed as an integral part of the ductile iron ball castings. Pressure containing parts shall be lined with a minimum of 15 mils (375 µm) of fusion bonded epoxy conforming to the applicable requirements of AWWA C213 and shall be factory holiday tested with a 1,500 V spark test. Flexible expansion joint


33 10 00 VARHS

shall have flanged connections conforming to AWWA C110/A21.10. Bolts and nuts high strength steel with synthetic gaskets that comply with AWWA C111/A21.11.

2.15 POTABLE WATER

A. Water used for filling, flushing, and disinfection of water mains and appurtenances shall conform to Safe Drinking Water Act.

2.16 DISINFECTION CHLORINE

A. Liquid chlorine shall conform to AWWA B301 and AWWA C651.

B. Sodium hypochlorite shall conform to AWWA B300 with 5% to 15% available chlorine.

C. Calcium hypochlorite shall conform to AWWA B300 supplied in granular form or 5 g tablets, and shall contain 65% chlorine by weight.

2.17 WARNING TAPE

A. Standard, 4-mil polyethylene 3 in. (76 mm) wide tape, detectable type, blue with black letters, and imprinted with "CAUTION BURIED WATER LINE BELOW".


3.1 BUILDING SERVICE LINES

A. Install water service lines to point of connection within approximately 5 ft (1,500 mm) outside of buildings to which such service is to be connected and make connections thereto. If building services have not been installed provide temporary caps.

3.2 REGRADING

A. Raise or lower existing valve and curb stop boxes and fire hydrants to finish grade in areas being graded.

3.3 PIPE LAYING, GENERAL

A. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting, and unloading to prevent injury to the pipe or coatings. Pipe or fittings shall not be dropped. All pipe or fittings shall be examined before laying, and no piece shall be installed which is found to be defective. Any damage to the pipe coatings shall be repaired as directed by the Resident Engineer.

B. All pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a careful inspection just prior to being laid or installed. If any defective piping is discovered after it has been laid, it shall be removed and replaced with a sound pipe in a satisfactory manner at no additional expense to the Government. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before laying, shall be kept clean until they are used in the work, and when installed or laid, shall conform to the lines and grades required.

C. All buried piping shall be installed to the lines and grades as shown on the drawings. All underground piping shall slope uniformly between joints where elevations are shown.

D. Contractor shall exercise extreme care when installing piping to shore up and protect from damage all existing underground water line and power lines, and all existing structures.

E. Do not lay pipe on unstable material, in wet trench, or when trench or weather conditions are unsuitable.


33 10 00 VARHS

F. Do not lay pipe in same trench with other pipes or utilities unless shown otherwise on drawings.

G. Hold pipe securely in place while joint is being made.

H. Do not walk on pipes in trenches until covered by layers of earth well tamped in place to a depth of 12 in. (300 mm) over pipe.

I. Full length of each section of pipe shall rest solidly upon pipe bed with recesses excavated to accommodate bells or joints. Do not lay pipes on wood blocking.

J. Tees, plugs, caps, bends and hydrants on pipe installed underground shall be anchored. See Article, PIPE SUPPORTS.

K. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. Tightly cover and protect equipment against dirt, water and chemical, or mechanical injury. At completion of all work, thoroughly clean exposed materials and equipment.

L. Good alignment shall be preserved in laying. The deflection at joints shall not exceed that recommended by the manufacturer.

M. Warning tape shall be continuously placed 12 in. (300 mm) above buried water pipes.

3.4 DUCTILE IRON PIPE

A. Installing Pipe: Lay pipe in accordance with AWWA C600 with polyethylene encasement if required in accordance with AWWA C105/A21.5. Provide a firm even bearing throughout the length of the pipe by tamping selected material at the sides of the pipe up to the spring line.

B. All pipe shall be sound and clean before laying. When laying is not in progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed by watertight plug or other approved means.

C. When cutting pipe is required, the cutting shall be done by machine, leaving a smooth cut at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Bevel cut ends of pipe to be used with push-on bell to conform to the manufactured spigot end. Cement lining shall be undamaged.

D. Jointing Ductile-Iron Pipe:

1. Push-on joints shall be made in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instruction. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends looking ahead. A rubber gasket shall be inserted in the groove of the bell end of the pipe, and the joint surfaces cleaned and lubricated. The plain end of the pipe is to be aligned with the bell of the pipe to which it is joined, and pushed home with approved means.

2. Mechanical Joints at Valves, Fittings: Install in strict accordance with AWWA C111/A21.11. To assemble the joints in the field, thoroughly clean the joint surfaces and rubber gaskets with soapy water before tightening the bolts. Bolts shall be tightened to the specified torque.

3. Ball Joints: Install in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Where ball joint assemblies occur at the face of structures, the socket end shall be at the structure and ball end assembled to the socket.

4. Flanged joints shall be in accordance with AWWA C115/A21.15. Flanged joints shall be fitted so that the contact faces bear uniformly on the gasket and then are made up with relatively uniform bolt stress.


33 10 00 VARHS

3.5 PVC PIPE

A. PVC piping shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and AWWA 605. Place selected material and thoroughly compacted to one foot above the top of the pipe and thereafter back filled as specified in Section 31 20 11, EARTHWORK (SHORT FORM)

B. Copper Tracer Wire: Copper tracer wire consisting of No. 14 AWG solid, single conductor, insulated copper wire shall be installed in the trench with all piping to permit location of the pipe with electronic detectors. The wire shall not be spiraled around the pipe nor taped to the pipe. Wire connections are to be made by stripping the insulation from the wire and soldering with rosin core solder. Solder joints shall be wrapped with rubber tape and electrical tape. At least every 1,000 ft (300 m), provide a 5 lb (2.3 kg) magnesium anode attached to the main tracer wire by solder. The solder joint shall be wrapped with rubber tape and with electrical tape. An anode shall be attached at the end of each line.

C. Magnetic markers may be used in lieu of copper tracer wire to aid in future pipe locating. Generally, install markers on 20 ft (6 m) centers. If pipe is in a congested piping area, install on 10 ft (3 m) centers. Prepare as-built drawing indicating exact location of magnetic markers.

3.6 COPPER PIPE

A. Copper piping shall be installed in accordance with the Copper Development Association's Copper Tube Handbook and manufacturer's recommendations. Copper piping shall be bedded in 6 in. (150 mm) of sand and then back filled as specified in Section 31 20 11, EARTHWORK (SHORT FORM).

3.7 RESTRAINED JOINTS

A. Sections of piping requiring restrained joints shall be constructed using pipe and fittings with restrained "locked-type" joints and the joints shall be capable of holding against withdrawal for line pressures 50% above the normal working pressure but not less than 200 psi (1,375 kPa). The pipe and fittings shall be restrained push-on joints or restrained mechanical joints.

B. The minimum number of restrained joints required for resisting force at fittings and changes in direction of pipe shall be determined from the length of retained pipe on each side of fittings and changes in direction necessary to develop adequate resisting friction with the soil. Restrained pipe length shall be as shown on the drawings.

C. Restrained joint assemblies with ductile iron mechanical joint pipe shall be "Flex-Ring", "Lok-Ring", or mechanical joint coupled as manufactured by American Cast Iron Pipe Company, "Mega-Lug" or approved equal.

D. Ductile iron pipe bell and spigot joints shall be restrained with EBBA Iron Sales, Inc. Series 800 Coverall or approved equal.

E. Ductile iron mechanical joint fittings shall be restrained with EBBA Iron Sales, Inc. Series 1200 Restrainer. The restraining device shall be designed to fit standard mechanical joint bells with standard T head bolts conforming to AWWA C111/A21.11 and AWWA C153/A21.53. Glands shall be manufactured of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536. Set screws shall be hardened ductile iron and require the same torque in all sizes. Steel set screws not permitted. These devices shall have the stated pressure rating with a minimum safety factor of 2:1. Glands shall be listed with Underwriters Laboratories and/or approved by Factory Mutual.

F. Thrust blocks shall not be permitted.

G. Where ductile iron pipe manufactured with restrained joints is utilized, all restrained joints shall be fully extended and engaged prior to back filling the trench and pressurizing the pipe.


33 10 00 VARHS

H. PVC pipe bell and spigot joints shall be restrained with the Uni-Flange Corp. Series 1350 Restrainer or approved equal. The restraining device and Tee head bolts shall be manufactured of high strength ductile iron meeting ASTM A536. Clamping bolts and nuts shall be manufactured of corrosion resistant high strength, low alloy steel meeting the requirements of ASTM A242.

I. Ductile iron mechanical joint fittings used with PVC pipe shall be restrained with UNI-Flange Corp. Series 1300 Restrainer, EBBA Iron, Inc, Series 2000PV Mechanical Joint Restrainer Gland, or approved equal. The restraining device and Tee head bolts shall be manufactured of high strength ductile iron meeting ASTM A536. Clamping bolts and nuts shall be manufactured of corrosion resistant high strength, low alloy steel meeting the requirements of ASTM A242.

3.8 PIPE SEPARATION

A. Horizontal Separation-Water Mains and Sewers:

1. Water mains shall be located at least 10 ft (3 m) horizontally from any proposed drain, storm sewer, sanitary or sewer service connection.

2. Water mains may be located closer than 10 ft (3 m) to a sewer line when:

a. Local conditions prevent a lateral separation of 10 ft (3 m); and

b. The water main invert is at least 18 in. (450 mm) above the crown of the sewer; and

c. The water main is either in a separate trench or in the same trench on an undisturbed earth shelf located one side of the sewer.

3. When it is impossible to meet (1) or (2) above, both the water main and drain or sewer shall be constructed of mechanical joint ductile iron pipe. Ductile iron pipe shall comply with the requirements listed in this specification section. The drain or sewer shall be pressure tested to the maximum expected surcharge head before back filling.

B. Vertical Separation-Water Mains and Sewers:

1. A water main shall be separated from a sewer so that its invert is a minimum of 18 in. (450 mm) above the crown of the drain or sewer whenever water mains cross storm sewers, sanitary sewers or sewer service connections. The vertical separation shall be maintained for that portion of the wear main located within 10 ft (3 m) horizontally of any sewer or drain crossed. A length of water main pipe shall be centered over the sewer to be crossed with joints equidistant from the sewer or drain.

2. Both the water main and sewer shall be constructed of slip-on or mechanical joint ductile iron pipe or PVC pipe equivalent to water main standards of construction when:

a. It is impossible to obtain the proper vertical separations described in (1) above; or

b. The water main passes under a sewer or drain.

3. A vertical separation of 18 in. (450 mm) between the invert of the sewer or drain and the crown of the water main shall be maintained where a water main crosses under a sewer. Support the sewer or drain lines to prevent settling and breaking the water main.

4. Construction shall extend on each side of the crossing until the perpendicular distance from the water main to the sewer or drain line is at least 10 ft (3 m).


33 10 00 VARHS

3.9 SETTING OF VALVES AND BOXES

A. Provide a surface concrete pad 18 in. × 18 in. × 6 in. (450 mm × 450 mm × 150 mm) to protect valve box when valve is not located below pavement.

B. Clean valve and curb stops interior before installation.

C. Set valve and curb stop box cover flush with finished grade.

D. Valves shall be installed plumb and level and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.10 SETTING OF FIRE HYDRANTS

A. Set center of each hydrant not less than 2 ft (600 mm) nor more than 6 ft (1,800 mm) back of edge of road or face of curb. Fire apparatus connection shall face road with center of nozzle 18 in. (450 mm) above finished grade. Set barrel flange not more than 2 in. (50 mm) above finished grade.

B. Set each hydrant on a slab of stone or concrete not less than 4 in. (100 mm) thick and 15 in. (375 mm ) square. The service line to the hydrant, between the tee and the shoe of the hydrant, shall be fully restrained.

C. Set bases in not less than 1/2 yd³ (0.4 m³) of crushed rock or gravel placed entirely below hydrant drainage device.

D. Clean interiors of hydrants of all foreign matter before installation.

3.11 PIPE SLEEVES

A. Install where water lines pass through retaining walls, building foundations and floors. Seal with modular mechanical type link seal. Install piping so that no joint occurs within a sleeve. Split sleeves may be installed where existing lines pass through new construction.

3.12 FLUSHING AND DISINFECTING

A. Flush and disinfect new water lines in accordance with AWWA C651.

B. Initial flushing shall obtain a minimum velocity in the main of 2.5 ft/sec (0.75 m/sec) at 40 psi residual pressure in water main. The duration of the flushing shall be adequate to remove all particles from the line.

Pipe Diameter Flow Required to Produce

2.5 ft/sec (approx.) Velocity in Main

Number of Hydrant Outlets Size of Tap. in. (mm)

1 (25) 1 ½ (38) 2 (51) 2 ½ (64)

In (mm) gpm (L/sec) Number of taps on pipe

4 (100) 100 (6.3) 1 -- -- 1

6 (150) 200 (12.6) -- 1 -- 1

8 (200) 400 (25.2) -- 2 1 1

10 (250) 600 (37.9) -- 3 2 1

12 (300) 900 (56.8) -- -- 3 2

16 (400) 1,600 (100.9) -- -- 4 2


33 10 00 VARHS

The backflow preventers shall not be in place during the flushing.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible to provide the water source for filling, flushing, and disinfecting the lines. Only potable water shall be used, and the Contractor shall provide all required temporary pumps, storage facilities required to complete the specified flushing, and disinfection operations.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the disposal of all water used to flush and disinfect the system in accordance with all governing rules and regulations. The discharge water shall not be allowed to create a nuisance for activities occurring on or adjacent to the site.

E. The bacteriological test specified in AWWA C651 shall be performed by a laboratory approved by the Health Department of the State. The cost of sampling, transportation, and testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

F. Re-disinfection and bacteriological testing of failed sections of the system shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

G. Before backflow preventers are installed, all upstream piping shall be thoroughly flushed.

3.13 HYDROSTATIC TESTING

A. Hydrostatic testing of the system shall occur prior to disinfecting the system.

B. After new system is installed, except for connections to existing system and building, backfill at least 12 in. (300 mm) above pipe barrel, leaving joints exposed. The depth of the backfill shall be adequate to prevent the horizontal and vertical movement of the pipe during testing.

C. Prior to pressurizing the line, all joint restraints shall be completely installed and inspected.

D. If the system is tested in sections, and at the temporary caps at connections to the existing system and buildings, the Contractor shall provide and install all required temporary thrust restraints required to safely conduct the test.

E. The Contractor shall install corporation stops in the line as required to purge the air out of the system. At the completion of the test, all corporation stops shall be capped.

F. The Contractor shall perform pressure and leakage tests for the new system for 2 hours to 200 psi (1,375 kPa). Leakage shall not exceed the following requirements.

1. Copper Tubing: No leaks.

2. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C600.Provide to Resident Engineer office.

3. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) AWWA C605.Provide to Resident Engineer office.

3.14 BACKFLOW PREVENTER TESTING

A. All backflow preventers shall be tested and certified for proper operation prior to being placed in operation.

B. Original copies of the certification shall be submitted to the Resident Engineer.

— — — E N D — — —


SECTION 33 16 13 CORRUGATED GALVANIZED STEEL TANKS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section specifies above ground, riveted corrugated galvanized steel tanks for water storage.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Product-Storage Requirements for Corrugated Galvanize Steel Above Ground Tank:

1. Tank shall be vented to atmospheric pressure. The tank need not be designed as a pressure vessel.

2. Tank nominal capacity shall be 29,000 gallons.

3. Net usable capacity shall be determined subtracting freeboard allowance from overflow elevation and suction vortex plate height or as required by code.

B. Loading Conditions: Tank shall meet the following design criteria:

1. Static Load: Tank shall withstand Specific Gravity Loading of 1.0

2. Joint Design per AISC with 2:1 safety factor.

3. Deck Loads: 15 psf unless otherwise specified by Engineer.

4. Seismic Design: Tank shall be designed to withstand seismic and wind forces in accordance with AWWA in conformance with ASCE/SEI 7–10 of installation site.

5. Tank shall support accessory equipment-such as piping and ladders-as shown on tank drawings and when installed according to tank manufacturer's recommendations.

6. Soil bearing load shall be assumed at 1,500 psf. A soils report shall be required for foundation design if anchoring is required.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)/Structural Engineering Institute (SEI):

7–10 ............................ Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

B. ASTM International (ASTM):

A36/A36M–08 ............ Carbon Structural Steel

A307–07b ................... Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60000 psi Tensile Strength

A384/A384M–07 ........ Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies

A385/A385M–09 ........ Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip)

A653/A653M–09a ...... Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process


33 16 13 VARHS

C. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

C652–02 ..................... Disinfection of Water-Storage Facilities

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer shall submit to Engineer three copies of shop drawings and engineering calculations with a Professional Engineer wet stamp for each tank and three copies each of coating literature.


A. Manufacturing Standards:

1. Manufacturer shall be able to provide documentation that the tank shell has been built to the applicable requirements of California Building Code and applicable sections of American Water Works Association Standards

2. Tank manufacturer shall be in the business of manufacturing tanks to Underwriters Laboratories and other National Standards.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall provide 10 year conditional warranty on materials and workmanship.

B. Manufacturer shall provide a 1 year guarantee on all OEM products provided.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers/Suppliers: BH Tank, Pioneer Tank, and American Tank.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel: G-90 prime mill galvanized steel per ASTM A653/A653M with 2.66 in. pitch × 0.66 in. depth nominal corrugations.

B. Fasteners: Huck Bolt C6L per ASTM A307, Grade C.

C. Bolts: ASTM A307 galvanized per ASTM A384A384M or ASTM A385/A385M.

D. Sealant: Manus Bond 75-AM NSF approved elastomeric adhesive/sealant or comparable products

E. Coatings: Per manufacturer's specifications.

2.3 SIZE

A. Capacity: 29,000 gal.

B. Diameter: 15 ft 5 in.

C. Height: 18 ft 9 in.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchor Stirrups:


33 16 13 VARHS

1. Stirrups shall be fabricated of ASTM A36/A36M carbon steel as supplied by tank manufacturer and bolted to tank shell.

2. Number and location of stirrups shall be as required by seismic design or as indicated on tank drawings.

3. Anchor bolts shall be furnished and installed by foundation contractor upon completion of tank installation as specified on tank drawings.

B. Manways:

1. All tanks shall be equipped with a minimum 12 in. (300 mm) diameter deck manway.

2. Provide one shell manway. Manway to be flanged and 24 in. (600 mm) i.d., complete with gaskets, bolts and covers. Location(s) shall be shown on tank drawings.

C. Venting:

1. Venting shall be 12 in. (300 mm) minimum and no less than 150% of largest outlet size.

2. Vent shall be provided with screen and cover to prevent insects or run-off from entering tank.

3. Vent location(s) shall be shown on tank drawings.

D. Level Gauges:

1. Liquid level indicators to be installed adjacent to deck manway opening shall be 6 in. (152 mm) wide with an 8 in. (203 mm) target.

E. Ladders:

1. Ladders shall be the standard ladder as supplied by tank manufacturer.

2. External ladder material shall be "Duragal" (galvanized steel).

3. Ladders over 96 in. (2,438 mm) in height shall be equipped with OSHA approved cage or fall-arrest device as shown on tank drawing.

4. Internal ladder materials shall be coated in conformance with tank interior.

F. Internal Overflow Weirs:

1. Overflow weir shall be conical, pipe trough, or box type as indicated on tank drawings.

G. Fittings:

1. All standard threaded fittings shall be constructed of carbon steel.

2. All standard threaded fittings shall be full or half-couplings, and of standard NPT sizes (-1/2 in. through 4 in.) diameter. Reducers are to be used for smaller sizes where shown and provided by Contractor.

3. All flanged nozzles shall be 150# RFSO single flanged nozzles unless otherwise indicated on tank drawings or specifications.


33 16 13 VARHS

4. All flanged nozzles shall be furnished with a minimum 1/4 in. (6 mm) carbon steel internal back-up plate.

5. Flange gaskets shall be 1/8 in. (3 mm) neoprene.

6. All fittings shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's procedures.

7. All fittings shall be oriented per tank drawings prior to shipment or installed on site if tank is field assembled.

2.5 COATINGS

A. Exterior Finish: Mill Galvanized.

B. Interior Coating: Fusion Bonded Powder Epoxy. Description: A NSF approved interior tank coating that is electro-statically applied and baked on forming an impervious membrane

1. Steel grit blast prior to 4-stage iron phosphate pretreatment.

2. Interior color shall be Alesta® Tank Tan that is made by DuPont; average 5.0 mils DFT.

3. Apply and cure as directed by coating manufacturer (DuPont).

4. Touch-up using matching color urethane polymer.


3.1 FOUNDATION

A. Tank foundation shall be installed on firm and compacted soil. Tank foundation shall be level.

3.2 ACCESS

A. Tank shall be accessible by two-wheel drive 20 ft (6 m) flatbed truck and trailer unless otherwise indicated on tank plans. Tank supplier shall be notified in advance of bid proposal if pad requires other equipment for access.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Tank shall be erected by factory authorized and trained personnel only. Work days or hours shall not be limited unless otherwise specified herein.

B. Tank shall not be filled with water for a minimum of 7 days of completion.

C. Tank shall be hydro-tested for leakage by filling tank to overflow level.

D. Tank shall be disinfected in accordance with tank manufacturer's recommendations per AWWA C652 procedures.

— — — E N D — — —


SECTION 33 30 00 SANITARY SEWER UTILITIES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Outside, underground sanitary sewer system, complete, ready for operation, including all gravity flow lines, manholes, cleanouts, frames, covers, structures, appurtenances, and connections to new building and structure, service lines, existing sanitary sewer lines, and existing sanitary structures, and all other incidentals.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Maintenance of Existing Utilities: Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

B. Excavation, Trench Widths, Pipe Bedding, Backfill, Shoring, Sheeting, Bracing: Section 31 20 11, EARTHWORK (SHORT FORM).

C. Concrete Work Reinforcing, Placement and Finishing: Section 03 30 00, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

D. Fabrication of Steel Ladders: Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS.

E. Protection of Materials and Equipment: Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING.



1. Multiple Units: When two or more units of the same type or class of materials or equipment are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer.

2. Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name, or identifiable trademark, securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast integrally with equipment, stamped, or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment.

B. Comply with the rules and regulations of the Public Utility having jurisdiction over the connection to Public Sanitary Sewer lines and the extension, and/or modifications to Public Utility Systems.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturers' Literature and Data: Submit the following as one package:

1. Pipe, Fittings, and, Appurtenances.

2. Jointing Material.

3. Manhole and Structure Material.

4. Frames and Covers.


33 30 00 VARHS

5. Steps and Ladders.




A48/A48M‒03 ............ Gray Iron Castings

A536‒84(2004) .......... Ductile Iron Castings

A615/A615M‒08a ...... Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

A625/A625M‒08 ........ Tin Mill Products, Black Plate, Single-Reduced

A746‒03 ..................... Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe

C12‒07 ....................... Installing Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines

C76‒08a ...................... Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe

C139‒05 ..................... Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes

C150‒07 ..................... Portland Cement

C425‒04 ..................... Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings

C478‒08 ..................... Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections

C700‒07a .................... Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated

C828‒06 ..................... Low-Pressure Air Test of Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines

C857‒07 ..................... Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures

D698‒07e1 ................. Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12400 ft-lbf/ft³ [600 kN-m/m³])

D2321‒05 ................... Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications

D2412‒02(2008) ........ Determination of External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading

D2992‒06 ................... Obtaining Hydrostatic or Pressure Design Basis for "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Fittings

D3034‒08 ................... Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings

D3212‒07 ................... Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals

D3261‒03 ................... Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing


33 30 00 VARHS

D3350‒08 ................... Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials

D4101‒08 ................... Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials

F477‒08 ...................... Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe

F679‒08 ...................... Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings

F714‒08 ...................... Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter

F794‒03 ...................... Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter

F894‒07 ...................... Polyethylene (PE) Large Diameter Profile Wall Sewer and Drain Pipe

F949‒06a .................... Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe With a Smooth Interior and Fittings

C. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

C105/A21.5‒05 .......... Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems

C110/A21.10‒08 ........ Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water

C111/A21.11‒07 ........ Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

C115/A21.15‒05 ........ Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges

C116/A21.16‒03 ........ Protective Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coatings for the Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water Supply Service

C151/A21.51‒02 ........ Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water

C153/A21.53‒06 ........ Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service

C508‒01 ..................... Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 inch through 24 inch (50 mm through 600 mm) NPS

C509‒01 ..................... Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service

C515‒01 ..................... Reduced-Wall, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service

C512‒07 ..................... Air-Release, Air/Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves for Waterworks Service

C550‒05 ..................... Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants

C600‒05 ..................... Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances

C605‒05 ..................... Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water

C900‒07 ..................... Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4 inch through 12 inch (100 mm through 300 mm), for Water Transmission and Distribution


33 30 00 VARHS

C905‒08 ..................... Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 14 Inch Through 48 Inch (350 mm Through 1200 mm), for Water Transmission and Distribution

C906‒07 ..................... Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Fittings, 4 inch (100 mm) through 63 inch (1600 mm), for Water Distribution and Transmission

D. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

M198‒05 .................... Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants

E. Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association:

Uni-B-6‒98 ................. Recommended Practice for Low-Pressure Air Testing of Installed Sewer Pipe

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING

A. Gravity Flow Lines (Pipe and Fittings):

1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC):

a. Pipe and Fittings, 4 in. to 15 in. (100 mm to 375 mm) in diameter, shall conform to ASTM D3034; Type PSM, SDR 35. Pipe and fittings shall have elastomeric gasket joints providing a watertight seal when tested in accordance with ASTM D3212. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM F477. Solvent welded joints shall not be permitted.

b. Pipe and fittings, 18 in. to 36 in. (450 mm to 900 mm) in diameter, shall be solid wall or have a corrugated or ribbed exterior profile and a smooth interior. Pipe shall conform to the following:

1) Pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM F949 corrugated sewer pipe with a smooth interior. The corrugated outer wall shall be fused to the smooth inter-wall at the corrugation valley. Pipe and fitting shall have a smooth bell, elastomeric joints conforming to ASTM D3212, and shall have a minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi (350 kPa) at 5% deflection, when tested in accordance with ASTM D2412. Corrugation shall be perpendicular to the axis of the pipe to allow gaskets to be installed on field cut sections of pipe without the requirement for special fittings.

2) Ribbed wall PVC pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM F794 ribbed sewer pipe with smooth interior pipe and fittings shall have a smooth bell, elastomeric joints conforming to ASTM D3212, and shall have a minimum pipe stiffness of 46 psi (320 kPa) when tested in accordance with ASTM D2412, at 5% vertical deflection. Joints shall not leak at 25 ft (7.6 m) of head under 5% deflection.

3) Solid wall pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM F679; SDR 35 pipe and fittings shall gaskets conforming to ASTM F477, and shall be able to withstand a hydrostatic pressure of 50 psi (345 kPa).

2. Ductile Iron Pipe (DIP) for Sanitary Sewer: Shall conform to ASTM A746; thickness Class 51 unless otherwise shown or specified. Joints on pipe and fittings shall be push-on style and conform to AWWA C110 and AWWA C111, rated for 150 psi (1.03 MPa). Exterior coating shall be approximately 1-mil (0.025 mm) asphaltic coating as specified in ASTM A746. Interior lining shall be a catalyzed coal tar epoxy, having a minimum thickness of 24-mil (0.60 mm), a


33 30 00 VARHS

permeability rating of 0.13 perms, direct impact rating of 100 in/lb (11.3 Nm), an abrasion resistance of 20 L of sand per mil, and dielectric strength of 250 V per millimeter. Pipe and fittings shall be polyethylene encased with 8-mil (0.20 mm) polyethylene sheeting per AWWA C105. Color of polyethylene encasement shall be green.

3. High density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe and fittings 18 in. to 36 in. (450 mm to 900 mm) shall conform to ASTM F894. Pipe and fittings shall have a smooth interwall and profile exterior, and be Class as noted on the drawings. Joints shall be water tight elastomer gaskets in accordance with ASTM D3212, or thermal welded joints.

2.2 JOINTING MATERIAL

A. Gravity Flow Lines:

1. Ductile Iron Pipe: Push-on or mechanical joints, AWWA C111, AWWA C110. Flange joints shall comply with AWWA C115. Flange joints shall only be used in vaults or above-grade.

2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe (Gravity Use): Joints, ASTM D3212. Elastomeric gasket, ASTM F477.

3. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe and fitting joints, ASTM E3212, elastomeric gaskets, ASTM F477.

2.3 MANHOLES AND VAULTS

A. Manholes and vaults shall be constructed of precast concrete segmental blocks, precast reinforced concrete rings, precast reinforced sections, or cast-in-place concrete. The manholes and vaults shall be in accordance with State Department of Transportation or State Roads Commission standard details, and the following:

1. Precast Concrete Segmental Blocks: Blocks shall conform to ASTM C139 and shall not be less than 6 in. (150 mm) thick for manholes to a depth of 12 ft (3.6 m); not less than 8 in. (200 mm) thick for manholes deeper than 12 ft (3.6 m) deep. Blocks shall be not less than 8 in. (200 mm) in length. Blocks shall be shaped so that joints seal and bond effectively with cement mortar. Parge structure interior and exterior with 1/2 in. (15 mm) of cement mortar applied with a trowel and finished to an even glazed surface.

2. Precast Reinforced Concrete Rings: Rings or sections shall have an inside diameter as indicated on the drawings, and shall be not less than 48 in. (1,200 mm) in diameter. Wall thickness shall conform to requirements of ASTM C76, except that lengths of the sections may be shorter as conditions require. Tops shall conform to ASTM C478. Top section shall be eccentric cone type. Steps on inside wall shall be in the same plane from bottom of structure to manhole cover.

3. Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Risers and Tops: Design, material and installation shall conform to requirements of ASTM C478. Top sections shall be eccentric. Steps on inside wall shall be in the same plane from bottom of structure to manhole cover.

4. Flat top manhole tops shall be reinforced concrete as detailed on the drawings.

5. Vaults: Reinforced concrete, as indicated on the plans, or precast reinforced concrete. Concrete for precast sections shall have a minimum compressive strength of 5,000 psi (35 MPa) at 28 days, ASTM A615, Grade 60 reinforcing steel, rated for AASHTO HS20‒44 loading with 30% impact, and conform to ASTM C857.

6. Mortar:


33 30 00 VARHS

a. Precast Concrete Segmental Block Structures: By volume, 1 part of Portland cement, 1/4 part lime hydrate, and 3 parts sand.

b. Precast Reinforced Concrete Ring and Riser Structures: By volume, 1 part of Portland cement and 2 parts sand. Water in mixture shall produce a stiff, workable mortar, but shall not exceed 5 ½ gal (21 L) per sack of cement.

7. Flexible sealing compound shall be packaged in extruded preformed shape, sized to completely fill the joint between precast sections, and form permanently flexible watertight seal. The sealing compound shall be non-shrink and meet AASHTO M198.

8. Frames and covers shall be gray cast iron conforming to ASTM A48. The frame and cover shall be rated for HS20‒44 loading, have a studded pattern on the cover, and the words "sanitary sewer". The studs and the lettering shall be raised 5/16 in. (8 mm). The cover shall be a minimum of 24 in. (600 mm) in diameter and shall have four 3/4 in. (19 mm) vent holes and two lifting slots. The bearing surface of the frame and cover shall be machine finished. The cover shall fit firmly on the frame without movement when subject to traffic.

9. Manhole steps shall be polypropylene plastic coated on a No. 4 deformed rebar conforming to ASTM C478, Polypropylene shall conform to ASTM D4101. Steps shall be a minimum of 16 in. (406 mm) wide and project a minimum of 7 in. (178 mm) away from the wall. The top surface of the step shall have a studded non-slip surface. Steps shall be placed at 12 in. (300 mm) centers.

10. Ladders, brackets and hardware shall be constructed of welded aluminum, rails shall be 3/8 in. × 2 ½ in. (10 mm × 63 mm) spaced a minimum of 16 in. (400 mm) apart. Rungs shall be 1 ⅜ in. (35 mm) in diameter and have a non-slip surface. Standoffs shall offset the ladder 7 in. (180 mm) from the wall. The ladder assembly shall be rated for a minimum of 500 lb (2,200 N).

2.4 CONCRETE

A. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi (20 MPa) at 28 days. The cement shall be Type III conforming to ASTM C150. Concrete shall conform to provisions of Division 3 of these specifications.

2.5 REINFORCING STEEL

A. Reinforcing steel shall be deformed bars, ASTM A615, Grade 40 unless otherwise noted.

2.6 CLEANOUT FRAMES AND COVERS

A. Frames and covers shall be gray iron casting conforming to ASTM C48. The frame and cover shall be rated for HS20‒44 wheel loading, have a studded pattern on its cover, vent holes, and lifting slots. The cover shall fit firmly on the frame without movement when subject to vehicular traffic. The word "SEWER" shall be cast on the cover.

2.7 WARNING TAPE

A. Standard, 4-mil polyethylene 3 in. (76 mm) wide tape detectable type, green with black letters and imprinted with "CAUTION BURIED SEWER LINE BELOW".


33 30 00 VARHS


3.1 BUILDING SERVICE LINES

A. Install sanitary sewer service lines to point of connection within approximately 5 ft (1.5 m) outside of buildings where service is required and make connections. Coordinate the invert and location of the service line with the Contractor installing the building lines.

B. Connections of service line to building piping shall be made after the new sanitary sewer system has been constructed, tested, and accepted for operation by the Resident Engineer. The Contractor shall install all temporary caps or plugs required for testing.

C. When building services have not been installed at the time when the sanitary sewer system is complete, provide temporary plugs or caps at the ends of all service lines. Mark the location and depth of the service lines with continuous warning tape placed 12 in. (300 mm) above service lines.

3.2 ABANDONED MANHOLES STRUCTURES AND PIPING

A. Manholes and Structures Outside of Building Areas: Remove frame and cover, cut and remove the top of an elevation of 24 in. (600 mm) below finished grade. Fill the remaining portion with compacted gravel or crushed rock or concrete.

B. Manholes and Structures with Building Areas: Remove frame and cover and remove the entire structure and the base.

C. Piping under and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of building areas shall be completely removed.

D. Piping outside of building areas shall have all ends of the piping at the limit of the abandonment and within structures and manholes, plugged with concrete and abandoned in-place.

E. The Contractor shall comply with all OSHA confined space requirements while working within existing manholes and structures.

F. When the limit of the abandonment terminates in an existing manhole to remain, the flow line in the bench of the manhole to the abandoned line shall be filled with concrete and shaped to maintain the flowline of the lines to remain.

3.3 REGRADING

A. Raise or lower existing manholes and structures frames and covers, cleanout frames and covers and valve boxes in re-graded areas to finish grade. Carefully remove, clean and salvage cast iron frames and covers. Adjust the elevation of the top of the manhole or structure as detailed on the drawings. Adjust the elevation of the cleanout pipe riser, and reinstall the cap or plug. Reset cast iron frame and cover, grouting below and around the frame. Install concrete collar around reset frame and cover as specified for new construction.

B. During periods when work is progressing on adjusting manholes or structures cover elevations, the Contractor shall install a temporary cover above the bench of the structure or manhole. The temporary cover shall be installed above the high flow elevation within the structure, and shall prevent debris from entering the wastewater stream.

C. The Contractor shall comply with all OSHA confined space requirements when working within existing structures.


33 30 00 VARHS

3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING VA OWNED MANHOLES

A. During construction of new connections to existing manholes, it shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to maintain continued sanitary sewer service to all buildings and users upstream. The contractor shall provide, install, and maintain all pumping, conveyance system, dams, weirs, etc. required to maintain the continuous flow of sewage. All temporary measures required to meet this requirement shall be subject to the review of the Resident Engineer.

B. Core existing structure, install pipe at the design invert. Install an elastomeric gasket around the pipe, and grout the interstitial space between the pipe and the core.

C. The bench of the manhole shall be cleaned and reshaped to provide a smooth flowline for all pipes connected to the manhole.

D. Connections and alterations to existing manholes shall be constructed so that finished work conforms as nearly as practicable to the applicable requirements specified for new manholes, including concrete and masonry work, cutting and shaping.

3.5 PIPE SEPARATION

A. Horizontal Separation – Water Mains and Sewers:

1. Existing and proposed water mains shall be at least 10 ft (3 m) horizontally from any proposed gravity flow and pressure (force main) sanitary sewer or sewer service connection.

2. Gravity flow mains and pressure (force) mains may be located closer than 10 ft (3 m) but not closer than 6 ft (1.8 m) to a water main when:

a. Local conditions prevent a lateral separation of 10 ft (3 m);

b. The water main invert is at least 18 in. (450 mm) above the crown of the gravity sewer or 24 in. (600 mm) above the crown of the pressure (force) main; and

c. The water main is in a separate trench separated by undisturbed earth.

3. When it is impossible to meet (1) or (2) above, both the water main and sanitary sewer main shall be constructed of push-on or mechanical joint ductile iron pipe. The pipe for the sanitary sewer main shall comply with the specifications for pressure (force) mains, and the water main material shall comply with Section 02713, WATER SYSTEM. The sewer shall be pressure tested as specified for pressure (force) mains before backfilling.

B. Vertical Separation – Water Mains and Sewers at Crossings:

1. Water mains shall be separated from sewer mains so that the invert of the water main is a minimum of 24 in. (600 mm) above the crown of gravity flow sewer or 48 in. (1,200 mm) above the crown of pressure (force) mains. The vertical separation shall be maintained within 10 ft (3 m) horizontally of the sewer and water crossing. When these vertical separations are met, no additional protection is required.

2. In no case shall pressure (force) sanitary main cross above, or within 24 in. (600 mm) of water lines.

3. When it is impossible to meet (1) above, the gravity flow sewer may be installed 18 in. (450 mm) above or 12 in. (300 mm) below the water main, provided that both the water main and sewer shall be constructed of push-on or mechanical ductile pipe. Pressure (Force) sewers may be installed 24 in. (600 mm) below the water line provided both the water line and sewer line are


33 30 00 VARHS

constructed of ductile iron pipe. The pipe for the sewer shall conform to the requirements for pressure sewers specified herein. Piping for the water main shall conform to Section 22 11 00, FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION.

4. The required vertical separation between the sewer and the water main shall extend on each side of the crossing until the perpendicular distance from the water main to the sewer line is at least 10 ft (3 m).

3.6 GENERAL PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Lay pipes true to line and grade. Gravity flow sewer shall be laid with bells facing upgrade. Pressure (force) mains shall have the bells facing the direction of flow.

B. Do not lay pipe on unstable material, in wet trench or when trench and weather conditions are unsuitable for the work.

C. Support pipe on compacted bedding material. Excavate bell holes only large enough to properly make the joint.

D. Inspect pipes and fittings, for defects before installation. Defective materials shall be plainly marked and removed from the site. Cut pipe shall have smooth regular ends at right angles to axis of pipe.

E. Clean interior of all pipe thoroughly before installation. When work is not in progress, open ends of pipe shall be closed securely to prevent entrance of storm water, dirt or other substances.

F. Lower pipe into trench carefully and bring to proper line, grade, and joint. After jointing, interior of each pipe shall be thoroughly wiped or swabbed to remove any dirt, trash or excess jointing materials.

G. Do not lay sewer pipe in same trench with another pipe or other utility. Sanitary sewers shall cross at least 24 in. (600 mm) below water lines.

H. Do not walk on pipe in trenches until covered by layers of shading to a depth of 12 in. (300 mm) over the crown of the pipe.

I. Warning tape shall be continuously placed 12 in. (300 mm) above sewer pipe

J. Install gravity sewer line in accordance with the provisions of these specifications and the following standards:

1. Ductile Iron Piping: AWWA C111 and C600.

2. Vitrified Clay Piping: ASTM C12.

3. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping: ASTM D2321.

4. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Piping: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations with gasketed joints and with fused joints.

3.7 MANHOLES AND VAULTS

A. General:

1. Circular Structures:

a. Precast concrete segmental blocks shall lay true and plumb. All horizontal and vertical joints shall be completely filled with mortar. Parge interior and exterior of structure with


33 30 00 VARHS

1/2 in. (15 mm) or cement mortar applied with a trowel and finished to an even glazed surface.

b. Precast reinforced concrete rings shall be installed true and plumb. The joints between rings and between rings and the base and top, shall be sealed with a preform flexible gasket material specifically manufactured for this type of application. Adjust the length of the rings so that the eccentric conical top section will be at the required elevation. Cutting the conical top section is not acceptable.

c. Precast reinforced concrete manhole risers and tops. Install as specified for precast reinforced concrete rings.

2. Rectangular Structures:

a. Reinforced concrete structures shall be installed in accordance with Division 03, CONCRETE.

b. Precast concrete structures shall be placed on an 8 in. (200 mm) reinforced concrete pad, or be provided with a precast concrete base section. Structures provided with a base section shall be set on 8 in. (200 mm) thick aggregate base course compacted to a minimum of 95% of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D698. Set precast section true and plumb. Seal all joints with preform flexible gasket material.

3. Do not build structures when air temperature is 32 °F (0 °C), or below.

4. Invert channels shall be smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Make changes in direction of flow with a smooth curve of as large a radius as size of structure will permit. Make changes in size and grade of channels gradually and evenly. Construct invert channels by one of the listed methods:

a. Forming directly in concrete base of structure.

b. Building up with brick and mortar.

5. Floor of structure outside the channels shall be smooth and slope toward channels not less than 1:12 (1 in/ft) nor more than 1:6 (2 in/ft). Bottom slab and benches shall be concrete.

6. The wall that supports access rungs or ladder shall be 90 degrees vertical from the floor of structure to manhole cover.

7. Install steps and ladders per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Steps and ladders shall not move or flex when used. All loose steps and ladders shall be replaced by the Contractor.

8. Install manhole frames and covers on a mortar bed, and flush with the finish pavement. Frames and covers shall not move when subject to vehicular traffic. Install a concrete collar around the frame to protect the frame from moving until the adjacent pavement is placed. In unpaved areas, the rim elevation shall be 2 in. (50 mm) above the adjacent finish grade. Install an 8 in. (200 mm) thick, by 12 in. (300 mm) concrete collar around the perimeter of the frame. Slope the top of the collar away from the frame.

3.8 SEWER AND MANHOLE SUPPORTS, CONCRETE CRADLES

A. Reinforced concrete as detailed on the drawings. The concrete shall not restrict access for future maintenance of the joints within the piping system.


33 30 00 VARHS

3.9 CLEANOUTS

A. 6 in. (150 mm) in diameter and consisting of a ductile iron 45 degree fitting on end of run, or combination Y fitting and l/8 bend in the run with ductile iron pipe extension, water tight plug or cap and cast frame and cover flush with finished grade. Center-set cleanouts located in unpaved areas, in a 12 in. × 12 in. × 6 in. (300 mm × 300 mm × 150 mm) thick concrete slab set flush with adjacent finished grade. Where cleanout is in force main, provide a blind flange top connection. The center of the flange shall be equipped with a 2 in. (50 mm) base valve to allow the pressure in the line to be relieved prior to removal of the blind flange. Frames and covers for pressure (force) mains shall be 24 in. (600 mm) in diameter.

B. The top of the cleanout assembly shall be 2 in. (50 mm) below the bottom of the cover to prevent loads being transferred from the frame and cover to the piping.

3.10 INSPECTION OF SEWERS

A. Inspect and obtain the Resident Engineer's approval. Thoroughly flush out before inspection. Lamp test between structures and show full bore indicating sewer is true to line and grade. Lip at joints on the inside of gravity sewer lines is not acceptable.

3.11 TESTING OF SANITARY SEWERS

A. Gravity Sewers and Manholes (Select one of the following):

1. Air Test: Vitrified Clay Pipe ASTM C828. PVC Pipe, Uni-Bell B-6. The line shall be pressurized to 4 psi and allowed to stabilize. After pressure stabilization, the pressure shall be dropped to 3.5 psi greater than the average back-pressure of any groundwater above the sewer. The minimum test time shall be as specified in Uni-Bell B-6.

2. Exfiltration Test:

a. Subject pipe to hydrostatic pressure produced by head of water at depth of 3 ft (10 m) above invert of sewer at upper manhole under test. In areas where ground water exists, head of water shall be 3 ft (10 m) above existing water table. Maintain head of water for one hour for full absorption by pipe body before testing. During one hour test period, measured maximum allowable rate of exfiltration for any section of sewer shall be 3 gal (11 L) per hour per 100 ft (30 m).

b. If measurements indicate exfiltration is greater than maximum allowable leakage, take additional measurements until leaks are located. Repair and retest.

3. Infiltration Test: If ground water level is greater than 3 ft (10 m) above invert of the upper manhole, infiltration tests are acceptable. Allowable leakage for this test will be the same as for the exfiltration test.

— — — E N D — — —


SECTION 33 40 00 STORM SEWER UTILITIES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies materials and procedures for construction of outside, underground storm sewer systems that are complete and ready for operation. This includes piping, structures and all other incidentals.

1.2 RELATED WORK


B. Concrete Work, Reinforcing, Placement and Finishing: Section 03 30 00, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

C. General plumbing, protection of Materials and Equipment, and quality assurance: Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING.

D. Materials and Testing Report Submittals: Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES.

E. Erosion and Sediment Control: Section 01 57 19, TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Aluminum, Concrete, Steel and Polyethylene – The basic material of the pipe.

B. Concrete Block – Encasements, thrust blocks, anchor blocks, plugs and cutoff diaphragms.

C. Culvert – Concrete, corrugated metal, ductile iron or polyethylene pipe.

D. Flexible Pipe – Pipes constructed of corrugated or spiral rib metal, PVC, and polyethylene. For the purposes of these Specifications, all potable water pipes are considered to be flexible pipes.

E. HDPE – High Density polyethylene.

F. Irrigation Pipe – Gravity or low-pressure transmission pipe.

G. Joint – The place where the ends of sections or modified sections of pipe contact one another.

H. Metal – Aluminum and steel.

I. Pipe – All pipe, regardless of kind, size, shape or use.

J. Plain – Unreinforced concrete.

K. PVC – Polyvinyl Chloride.

L. Rigid Pipe – Pipes, other than potable water pipes, constructed of concrete and ductile iron.

M. SDR (Standard Dimensional Ratio) – The pipe's minimum outside diameter divided by its wall thickness.


33 40 00 VARHS

N. Section – The individual pieces in which the furnished pipe is manufactured.

O. Siphon, Storm Sewer and Irrigation Pipe – Concrete, PVC, HDPE, ductile iron or metal pipe.

P. Steel – The base metal for galvanized sheets and aluminum coated sheets.


A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.

B. Handle manholes, catch basins and stormwater inlets according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate connection to storm sewer main with the Public Agency providing storm sewer off-site drainage.

B. Coordinate exterior utility lines and connections to building services up to the actual extent of building wall.



1. When two or more units of the same type or class of materials or equipment are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer.

2. A nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or trademark, including model number, shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment. In addition, the model number shall be either cast integrally with equipment, stamped, or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's literature and data shall be submitted, as one package, for pipes, fittings and appurtenances, including jointing materials, hydrants, valves and other miscellaneous items.




A185/A185M–07 ................... Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete

A242/A242M–04(2009) ........ High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel

A536–84(2009) ..................... Ductile Iron Castings

A615/A615M–09b ................. Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

A760/A760M–10 ................... Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic-Coated for Sewers and Drains


33 40 00 VARHS

A798/A798M–07 ................... Installing Factory-Made Corrugated Steel Pipe for Sewers and Other Applications

A849–10 ................................ Post-Applied Coatings, Paving, and Linings for Corrugated Steel Sewer and Drainage Pipe

A929/A929M–01(2007) ........ Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process for Corrugated Steel Pipe

B745/B745M–97(2005) ........ Corrugated Aluminum Pipe for Sewers and Drains

B788/B788M–09 ................... Installing Factory-Made Corrugated Aluminum Culverts and Storm Sewer Pipe

C14–07 .................................. Non-reinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe

C33/C33M–08 ....................... Concrete Aggregates

C76–11 .................................. Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe

C139–10 ................................ Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes

C150/C150M–11 ................... Portland Cement

C443–10 ................................ Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets

C478–09 ................................ Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections

C506–10b .............................. Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe

C507–10b .............................. Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe

C655–09 ................................ Reinforced Concrete D-Load Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe

C857–07 ................................ Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures

C891–09 ................................ Installation of Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures

C913–08 ................................ Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater Structures

C923–08 ................................ Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes, and Laterals

C924–02(2009) ...................... Testing Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines by Low-Pressure Air Test Method

C990–09 ................................ Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants

C1103–03(2009) .................... Joint Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines

C1173–08 .............................. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Piping Systems

C1433–10 .............................. Precast Reinforced Concrete Monolithic Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers


33 40 00 VARHS

C1479–10 .............................. Installation of Precast Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe Using Standard Installations

D448–08 ................................ Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction

D698–07e1 ............................ Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft³ (600 kN-m/m³))

D1056–07 .............................. Flexible Cellular Materials—Sponge or Expanded Rubber

D1785–06 .............................. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120

D2321–11 .............................. Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications

D2751–05 .............................. Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings

D2774-08 ............................... Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure Piping

D3034-08 ............................... Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings

D3350-10 ............................... Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials

D3753–05e1 .......................... Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Manholes and Wetwells

D4101–11 .............................. Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials

D5926–09 .............................. Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Gaskets for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV), Sewer, Sanitary, and Storm Plumbing Systems

F477–10 ................................. Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe

F679–08 ................................. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings

F714–10 ................................. Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter

F794–03(2009) ...................... Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter

F891–10 ................................. Coextruded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe With a Cellular Core

F894–07 ................................. Polyethylene (PE) Large Diameter Profile Wall Sewer and Drain Pipe

F949–10 ................................. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe With a Smooth Interior and Fittings

F1417–11 ............................... Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low-Pressure Air

F1668–08 ............................... Construction Procedures for Buried Plastic Pipe


M190–04 ............................... Bituminous-Coated Corrugated Metal Culvert Pipe and Pipe Arches


33 40 00 VARHS

M198–10 ............................... Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants

M252–09 ............................... Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe

M294–10 ............................... Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 12 to 60 In. (300 to 1500 mm) Diameter

D. American Water Works Association(AWWA):

C105/A21.5–10 ..................... Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems

C110–12 ................................ Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings

C219–11 ................................ Bolted, Sleeve Type Couplings for Plain End Pipe

C600–10 ................................ Installation of Ductile Iron Mains and Their Appurtenances

C900–07 ................................ Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4 in. Through 12 in. (100 mm Through 300 mm), for Water Transmission and Distribution

M23 ....................................... PVC Pipe—Design and Installation, Second Edition

E. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

A112.6.3–2001 ...................... Floor and Trench Drains

A112.14.1–2003 .................... Backwater Valves

A112.36.2M–1991 ................. Cleanouts

F. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

318–05 ................................... Structural Commentary and Commentary

350/350M–06 ........................ Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary

G. National Stone, Sand and Gravel Association (NSSGA): Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control

1.9 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall remedy any defect due to faulty material or workmanship and pay for any damage to other work resulting there from within a period of 1 year from final acceptance. Further, the Contractor will furnish all manufacturers' and suppliers' written guarantees and warranties covering materials and equipment furnished under this Contract.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 FACTORY-ASSEMBLED PRODUCTS

A. Standardization of components shall be maximized to reduce spare part requirements. The Contractor shall guarantee performance of assemblies of components, and shall repair or replace elements of the assemblies as required to deliver specified performance of the complete assembly.


33 40 00 VARHS

2.2 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. ABS Sewer Pipe and Fittings: Pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D2751, with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints.

1. NPS 3 to NPS 6 (DN 80 to DN 150): SDR 35.

2. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): SDR 42.

B. Gaskets: ASTM F477, elastomeric seals.

2.3 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Corrugated PE drainage pipe and fittings, NPS 3 to NPS 10 (DN 80 to DN 250); ASTM F714, SDR-21 with smooth waterway for coupling joints.

1. Silt-tight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material that mates with tube and fittings.

B. Corrugated PE pipe and fittings, NPS 12 to NPS 60 (DN 300 to DN 1500); ASTM F714, SDR-21 for pipes 3 in. to 24 in. (300 mm to 600 mm) with smooth waterway for coupling joints. Pipe shall be produced from PE certified by the resin producer as meeting the requirements of ASTM D3350, minimum cell class 335434C.

1. Water tight joints shall be made using a PVC or PE coupling and rubber gaskets as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Rubber gaskets shall conform to ASTM F477. Soil tight joints shall conform to requirements in AASHTO HB-17, Division II, for soil tightness and shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Profile Wall PE Pipe: Pipe shall comply with ASTM F894, Class 160.

1. Profile Wall PE Plastic Pipe Joints: Joints shall be as per ASTM F894, gasket weld type with integral bell.

D. PVC Pipe And Fittings:

1. PVC Cellular-Core Pipe And Fittings: ASTM F891, Sewer and Drain Series, PS 50 minimum stiffness, PVC cellular-core pipe with plain ends for solvent-cemented joints.

2. Fittings: ASTM D3034, SDR-35, PVC socket-type fittings.

E. PVC Corrugated Sewer Piping:

1. Pipe: ASTM F949, PVC, corrugated pipe with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints.

2. Fittings: ASTM F949, PVC molded or fabricated, socket type.

3. Gaskets: ASTM F477, elastomeric seals.

F. PVC Profile Sewer Piping:

1. Pipe: ASTM F794, PVC profile, gravity sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot ends.

2. Fittings: ASTM D3034, PVC with bell ends.



33 40 00 VARHS

G. PVC Type PSM Sewer Piping:

1. Pipe: ASTM D3034, SDR-35, PVC Type PSM sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot ends.

2. Fittings: ASTM D3034, PVC with bell ends.


H. PVC Gravity Sewer Piping:

1. Pipe and fittings shall be ASTM F679, T-1 wall thickness, PVC gravity sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot ends.

2. Gaskets: ASTM F477, elastomeric seals for gasketed joints.

2.4 NONPRESSURE TRANSITION COUPLINGS

A. Comply with ASTM C1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground non-pressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

B. Sleeve Materials

1. For concrete pipes: ASTM C443, rubber.

2. For plastic pipes: ASTM F477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D5926, PVC.

3. For dissimilar pipes: ASTM D5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined.

C. Unshielded, Flexible Couplings: Couplings shall be an elastomeric sleeve with corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

D. Shielded, flexible couplings shall be elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

E. Ring-Type, flexible couplings shall be elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring.

2.5 EXPANSION JOINTS AND DEFLECTION FITTINGS

A. Ductile iron flexible expansion joints: Compound fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical-joint ends complying with AWWA C110. Include two gasketed ball-joint sections and one or more gasketed sleeve sections, rated for 250 psi (1,725 kPa) minimum working pressure and for offset and expansion indicated.

2.6 CLEANOUTS

A. Cast-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug.

1. Top-Loading Classification(s): Extra-Heavy Duty

2. Pipe fitting and riser to cleanout shall be same material as main pipe line.


33 40 00 VARHS

B. Plastic Cleanouts shall have PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Pipe fitting and riser to cleanout shall be of same material as main line pipe.

2.7 DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Area Drains: ASME A112.6.3, gray-iron round body with anchor flange and round grate. Include bottom outlet with inside calk or spigot connection, of sizes indicated.

1. Top-Loading Classification(s): Heavy and Extra-Heavy Duty

B. Cast-Iron Trench Drains: ASME A112.6.3, 6 in. (150 mm) wide top surface, rectangular body with anchor flange or other anchoring device, and rectangular grate. Include units of total length indicated and quantity of bottom outlets with inside calk or spigot connections, of sizes indicated.

1. Top-Loading Classification(s): Heavy and Extra-Heavy Duty

C. Grate openings shall be 3/8 in. × 3 in. (9.5 mm × 76 mm) slots or as indicated.

D. Polyethylene Exterior Trench Drain: 6-5/8-inch wide trench drain system with ductile iron frame and catch basin section at outflow.

1. Material: Molded, gray, structural-foam polyethylene with UV inhibitor.

2. Built-In Slope: 0.7 percent.

3. Inside Diameter: 4 inches.

4. Bottom Radius: 2 inches.

5. Each Modular Channel Section: 4-feet long. Molded bottom outlet.

6. Pre-Installed Pro Fit Locking System: Locks grate to integral frame.

7. Integral Rebar Supports: Located at 24-inch intervals along each side of channel contain internal protruding knob to grip No.4 rebar to provide channel height adjustment during installation.

8. Tongue-and-Groove Ends: Connect to allow for precise fit and straight channel runs.

9. Grate: ADA compliant ductile iron with “deco” decorative pattern

a. Grate Opening: ¼ in.

b. Open Surface: 33.5 sq. in./lin. ft.

c. Inflow Capacity: 43.0 GPM (linear flow per foot)

2.8 MANHOLES AND CATCH BASINS

A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes:

1. Description: ASTM C478/C478M, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints.

2. Diameter: 48 in. (1,200 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated.


33 40 00 VARHS

3. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section as required to prevent flotation.

4. Base Section: 6 in. (150 mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4 inch (102 mm) minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and separate base slab or base section with integral floor.

5. Riser Sections: 4 in. (102 mm) minimum thickness and lengths to provide depth indicated.

6. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated, and top of cone of size that matches grade rings.

7. Joint Sealant: ASTM C990/C990M, bitumen or butyl rubber.

8. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C923/C923M, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe connection.

9. Adjusting Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6 in. to 9 in. (150 mm to 225 mm) total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover, and height as required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope.

B. Manhole Frames and Covers:

1. Description: Ferrous; 24 in. (610 mm) ID by 7 in. to 9 in. (175 mm to 225 mm) riser with 4 in. (102 mm) minimum width flange and 26 in. (600 mm) diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "STORM SEWER".

2. Material: ASTM A48/A48M, Class 35 gray iron unless otherwise indicated.

2.9 CONCRETE FOR MANHOLES AND CATCH BASINS

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350/350R, and the following:

1. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II.

2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33, sand.

3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33, crushed gravel.

4. Water: Potable.

B. Concrete Design Mix: 4,000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, compressive strength in 28 days.

1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.

2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.

C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Channels shall be the main line pipe material. Include benches in all manholes and catch basins.

1. Channels: Main line pipe material or concrete invert. Height of vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope. Invert Slope: Same slope as the main line pipe. Bench to be concrete, sloped to drain into channel. Minimum of 6 inch slope from main line pipe to wall sides.


33 40 00 VARHS

2.10 PIPE OUTLETS

A. Head walls: Cast in-place reinforced concrete, with apron and tapered sides.

B. Riprap basins: Broken, irregularly sized and shaped, graded stone according to NSSGA's "Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control."

1. Average Size: NSSGA No. R-4, screen opening 3 in. (76 mm).

C. Energy Dissipaters: To be as per NSSGA's "Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control," No. A-1, 3 ton (2,721 kg) average weight armor stone, unless otherwise indicated.

2.11 HEADWALLS

A. Headwalls: Cast in-place concrete with a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi (20 MPa) at 28 days.

2.12 FLARED END SECTIONS

A. Flared End Sections: Sections shall be of standard design fabricated from zinc-coated steel sheets conforming to requirements of ASTM A929.

2.13 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX CULVERT

A. Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Culvert: Designed for highway loadings with 2 ft (600 mm) of cover or more subjected to dead load only, conforming to ASTM C1433. For less than 2 ft (600 mm) of cover, subjected to highway loading, conform to ASTM C1433.

2.14 RESILIENT CONNECTORS AND DOWNSPOUT BOOTS FOR BUILDING ROOF DRAINS

A. Resilient connectors and downspout boots: Flexible, watertight connectors used for connecting pipe to manholes and inlets, and shall conform to ASTM C923.

2.15 WARNING TAPE

A. Standard, 4-mil polyethylene 3 in. (76 mm) wide tape detectable type, purple with black letters, and imprinted with "CAUTION BURIED STORM SEWER BELOW".


3.1 PIPE BEDDING

A. The bedding surface of the pipe shall provide a firm foundation of uniform density throughout the entire length of pipe. Concrete pipe requirements are such that when no bedding class is specified, concrete pipe shall be bedded in a soil foundation accurately shaped and rounded to conform to the lowest one-fourth of the outside portion of circular pipe. When necessary, the bedding shall be tamped. Bell holes and depressions for joints shall not be more than the length, depth, and width required for properly making the particular type of joint. Plastic pipe bedding requirements shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2321. Bedding, haunching and initial backfill shall be either Class IB or Class II material. Corrugated metal pipe bedding requirements shall conform to ASTM A798.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.


33 40 00 VARHS

B. Install piping with 24 in. (915 mm) minimum cover or as shown on the Drawings.

C. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

1. Do not lay pipe on unstable material, in wet trench or when trench and weather conditions are unsuitable for the work.

2. Support pipe on compacted bedding material. Excavate bell holes only large enough to properly make the joint.

3. Inspect pipes and fittings, for defects before installation. Defective materials shall be plainly marked and removed from the site. Cut pipe shall have smooth regular ends at right angles to axis of pipe.

4. Clean interior of all pipe thoroughly before installation. When work is not in progress, open ends of pipe shall be closed securely to prevent entrance of storm water, dirt or other substances.

5. Lower pipe into trench carefully and bring to proper line, grade, and joint. After jointing, interior of each pipe shall be thoroughly wiped or swabbed to remove any dirt, trash or excess jointing materials.

6. Do not walk on pipe in trenches until covered by layers of shading to a depth of 12 in. (300 mm) over the crown of the pipe.

7. Warning tape shall be continuously placed 12 in. (300 mm) above storm sewer piping.

D. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

E. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

F. When installing pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, use pipe-jacking process of microtunneling.

G. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow.

2. Install piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at changes in direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fittings; or cast in-place concrete supports or anchors.

3. Install hub-and-spigot cast iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook."

4. Install ductile iron piping and special fittings according to AWWA C600.

5. Install corrugated steel piping according to ASTM A798.

6. Install corrugated aluminum piping according to ASTM B788.

7. Install ABS sewer piping according to ASTM D2321 and ASTM F1668.


33 40 00 VARHS

8. Install PE corrugated sewer piping according to ASTM D2321 with gasketed joints.

9. Install PVC cellular-core piping, PVC sewer piping, and PVC profile gravity sewer piping, according to ASTM D2321 and ASTM F1668.

3.3 REGRADING

A. Raise or lower existing manholes and structures frames and covers in regraded areas to finish grade. Carefully remove, clean and salvage cast iron frames and covers. Adjust the elevation of the top of the manhole or structure as detailed on the drawings. Reset cast iron frame and cover, grouting below and around the frame. Install concrete collar around reset frame and cover as specified for new construction.

B. During periods when work is progressing on adjusting manholes or structures cover elevations, the Contractor shall install a temporary cover above the bench of the structure or manhole. The temporary cover shall be installed above the high flow elevation within the structure, and shall prevent debris from entering the wastewater stream.

3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING VA-OWNED MANHOLES

A. Make pipe connections and alterations to existing manholes so that finished work will conform as nearly as practicable to the applicable requirements specified for new manholes, including concrete and masonry work, cutting, and shaping.

3.5 DRAIN INSTALLATION

A. Install type of drains in locations indicated.

1. Use Light-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot-traffic areas.

2. Use Medium-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in paved foot-traffic areas.

3. Use Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in vehicle-traffic service areas.

4. Use Extra-Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in roads.

B. Embed drains in 4 in. (102 mm) minimum concrete around bottom and sides.

C. Set drain frames and covers with tops flush with pavement surface.

D. Assemble trench sections with flanged joints and embed trench sections in 4 in. (102 mm) minimum concrete around bottom and sides.

3.6 MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C891.

B. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 3 inches (76 mm) above finished surface elsewhere unless otherwise indicated.

C. Circular Structures:

1. Precast concrete segmental blocks shall lay true and plumb. All horizontal and vertical joints shall be completely filled with mortar. Parge interior and exterior of structure with 1/2 in. (15 mm) or cement mortar applied with a trowel and finished to an even glazed surface.


33 40 00 VARHS

2. Precast reinforced concrete rings shall be installed true and plumb. The joints between rings and between rings and the base and top shall be sealed with a preform flexible gasket material specifically manufactured for this type of application. Adjust the length of the rings so that the eccentric conical top section will be at the required elevation. Cutting the conical top section is not acceptable.

3. Precast reinforced concrete manhole risers and tops. Install as specified for precast reinforced concrete rings.

3.7 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION

A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated.

B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.

3.8 STORMWATER INLET AND OUTLET INSTALLATION

A. Construct inlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete.

B. Construct riprap of broken stone.

C. Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete.

D. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe.

E. Construct energy dissipaters at outlets.

3.9 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping in building's storm building drains specified in Division 22, Section FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING.

B. Encase entire connection fitting, plus 6 in. (150 mm) overlap, with not less than 6 in. (150 mm) of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 psi (20.7 MPa).

C. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes.

1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping.

2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20 (DN 100 to DN 500). Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping.

3. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 (DN 525) or larger, or to underground manholes and structures by cutting into existing unit and creating an opening large enough to allow 3 in. (76 mm) of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe, manhole, or structure wall, use epoxy-bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and piping materials.

4. Protect existing piping, manholes, and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.

D. Pipe couplings, expansion joints, and deflection fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.


33 40 00 VARHS

1. Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure sewer piping unless otherwise indicated.

a. Unshielded flexible couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes.

b. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different OD.

c. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.

2. Use pressure-type pipe couplings for force-main joints.

3.10 CLOSING ABANDONED STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below:

1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8 in. (203 mm) thick, brick masonry bulkheads.

2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs.

B. Abandoned Manholes and Structures: Excavate around manholes and structures as required and use one procedure below:

1. Remove manhole or structure and close open ends of remaining piping.

2. Remove top of manhole or structure down to at least 36 in. (915 mm) below final grade. Fill to within 12 in. (300 mm) of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. Fill to top with concrete.

C. Backfill to grade according to Section 31 20 11, EARTHWORK (SHORT FORM).

3.11 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground structures.


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Prior to final acceptance, provide a video record of all piping from the building to the municipal connection to show the lines are free from obstructions, properly sloped and joined.

1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection.

2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.

b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5% of piping diameter.

c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.

d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.


33 40 00 VARHS

e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

3.13 TESTING OF STORM SEWERS:

A. Submit separate report for each test.

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.

2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours advance notice.

4. Submit separate report for each test.

5. Air test gravity sewers. Concrete Pipes conform to ASTM C924, Plastic Pipes conform to ASTM F1417, all other pipe material conform to ASTM C828 or ASTM C924, after consulting with pipe manufacturer. Testing of individual joints shall conform to ASTM C1103.

6. Test force-main storm drainage piping. Perform hydrostatic test after thrust blocks, supports, and anchors have hardened. Test at pressure not less than 1½ times the maximum system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psi (1,035 kPa).

a. Ductile Iron Piping: Test according to AWWA C600, "Hydraulic Testing" Section.

b. PVC Piping: Test according to AWWA M23, "Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.

3.14 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous materials. Flush with water.

— — — E N D — — —


33 63 00 VARHS


SECTION 33 63 00 STEAM ENERGY DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION AND SCOPE OF WORK

A. Steam distribution and condensate return piping system, including:

1. Underground steam and condensate piping system. Type of system shall be a pre-engineered direct buried DrainableDryableTestable (DDT) system including penetrations into Buildings.

2. Steam and condensate return piping in manholes.

B. Certification that the material and installer meet the Quality Assurance criteria as indicated in Paragraph 1.4 B.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. System: A complete underground steam and condensate distribution system including all components such as carrier piping, pipe supports, insulation, protective enclosures, anchors, corrosion protection and accessories.

B. Pre-engineered Direct-Buried System: System that is designed and factory fabricated by a company specializing in these systems. The system includes prefabricated protective enclosures and does not require a concrete trench. The pre-engineered system shall include all piping and components to a point at least 150 mm (6 inches) inside the building and manhole walls.

C. Drainable Dryable Testable (DDT) Pre-engineered Direct-Buried System: A factory fabricated system including an airtight and watertight outer protective conduit, an insulated carrier pipe and an air space between the insulated carrier pipe and the conduit, conduit coating, conduit insulation and outer protective jacket. Drains and vents are provided in the ends of the system (in manholes, inside building mechanical space). The drains allow draining of ground water or condensate that may leak into the air space if there is a failure in the conduit or the carrier pipe. The vents allow water vapor to escape and provide an indication of leakage.

D. Carrier or Service Pipe: Pipe carrying the steam or condensate.

E. Conduit (Also referred to as a "Casing"): Outer protective pipe on pre-engineered systems. Carrier pipe and insulation are within the conduit with outer insulation and jacket over conduit.

F. Abbreviations:

1. HPS High Pressure Steam (110 psig).

2. HPR High Pressure Condensate Return.

3. VR Vacuum Condensate Return.

G. Condensate or Condensate Return: Refers to both High Pressure Condensate and Vacuum Condensate Return.

H. Project Drawings: The project drawings accompanying this specification provide information on:

33 63 00 VARHS


1. The size of carrier pipes, approximate length, and approximate site location of the system.

2. The obstacles located within approximately 25 m (8 feet) of the centerline of the system, including crossing utilities that must be avoided, relocated, protected during construction, abandoned and to be removed.

3. Approximate location of piping anchors.

4. Operating pressure and temperature of systems.

5. Details applicable to type of system specified.

6. Other pertinent general information.

I. Pressures: Pressures listed in this section are gage pressure unless otherwise noted.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Phasing of work: Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

B. Excavation: Section 31 20 11, EARTHWORK.

C. Trenching and Backfill: Section 31 23 33, TRENCHING AND BACKFILL

D. Concrete work: Section 03 30 00, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

E. Painting exposed steel and other surfaces: Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.

F. Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS.


A. Certification for pre-engineered direct-buried systems. Submit the following:

1. Written certification that the manufacturers regularly and currently manufacture the product.

2. Written certification that the installer has installed a minimum of five (5) direct buried hydronic systems in the past five (5) years with a minimum of one (1) systems being DDT steam distribution systems. Provide a list of past projects including owner’s contact information.

3. Provide a letter from the pipe manufacturer itemizing the following details: carrier pipe material/schedule, primary insulation type/thickness, conduit diameter/type/gauge, epoxy coating type/thickness and outer jacket outside diameter/type/thickness. The letter will serve as a record that the specified piping components will be provided with the shop drawing submittals.

4. There is a permanent service organization trained by the manufacturer that will provide the required field supervision of the installation of the system or equipment. Submit name and address of the service organization.

B. The manufacturer of pre-engineered direct-buried distribution system shall design the system to comply with the requirements of these specifications and the accompanying drawings, and is responsible for the complete product to be supplied, fabrication, witnessing installation and testing of the system. The complete design of the system shall be prepared, signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer employed by the system manufacturer.

C. Products Experience Record:

33 63 00 VARHS


1. Pre-engineered Direct-Buried Systems: Shall be manufactured by a company which specializes in these systems and which has been in this business for five (5) or more years.

2. All Other Products: The designs shall be of current production and have been in satisfactory operation on at least three (3) installations for five years.

D. Provide a complete installation with all necessary specialties, materials and equipment fully and properly connected and coordinated. Installation shall be fully operational upon completion of work defined and as phased.

E. Apply and install systems, materials, equipment and specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Printed instructions shall be available at the site prior to and during construction.

F. Materials, design, installation and workmanship shall conform to applicable local codes, and to national codes and standards as referenced in this specification.

G. Manufactured Products:

1. When two or more items serve the same function, they shall be products of one manufacturer.

2. Manufacturers of assemblies of products, which include components made by others, shall assume complete responsibility for final assembled unit.

a. All components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer.

b. Constituent parts that are alike shall be products of a single manufacturer.

c. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for intended service.

3. All systems and equipment shall be free from defects that would adversely affect the performance, maintainability, or appearance of individual components or overall assembly.

4. Each product shall be designed for the service conditions specified for that product. If no conditions are specified, request service conditions from the Engineer.

H. Manufacturer’s Identification: Components of equipment shall bear manufacturer’s name or trademark and model number on a name plate securely affixed in a conspicuous place, or cast integral with, stamped or otherwise permanently marked upon the components of the equipment. Refer to Part 2 for requirements for pre-engineered direct-buried systems.

I. Radiographic Testing of Welds: Weld examination methods and procedures and the interpretation of examining films shall conform to ASME B31.1. The testing firm shall utilize the proper film exposure, techniques, and penetrameter to produce density and geometric sharpness required for first quality film, and all radiographs shall be reviewed and interpreted and reading reports signed by not less than an American Society for NonDestructive Testing (ASNT) Certified Level III Radiographer.

J. Welder Qualifications: Welder shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Section VIII, Pressure Vessels; ASME Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications; and AWS B3.0, Qualification Procedure. Welder shall be thoroughly familiar with ANSI B31.1 and Z49.1.

K. Conduit Factory Tests: Prefabricated conduit sections and fittings shall be factory tested to ensure weld tightness of factory welded piping, and air tightness of conduits as described in Paragraph 3.16,

33 63 00 VARHS


Tests.

L. Preinsulated pipe manufacturer shall provide testing on the polyurethane foam as indicated within these specifications.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit information and materials under this section separate from information and materials submitted under other sections and mark "SUBMITTED UNDER Section 33 63 00, STEAM ENERGY DISTRIBUTION."

C. Submit all items listed under each group simultaneously (except for items that can only be submitted

during construction and upon completion of construction). 1. Group Pre-Engineered Direct Buried Systems:

a. Certification that system manufacturer regularly and currently manufactures direct buried systems, and that the designs of the system and equipment to be provided for this project conform to specification requirements. This certification shall be an original signed by a principal officer of the manufacturer.

b. Complete descriptions and drawings of design of system and materials of construction including component parts, assembly, carrier pipes, conduit, anchors, pipe guides, pipe supports, expansion loops, manhole and building wall penetrations, end seals, leak plates, field installation instructions.

c. A detailed design layout of the system showing the size, type, and location of each component, the design of anchors and manhole and building wall penetrations, the design of the transition points to aboveground or other type systems.

d. Manufacturer’s quality assurance plan for fabrication, delivery, storage, installation and testing of system.

e. Certificate of Qualification from system manufacturer that the manufacturer’s field representative regularly performs the specified duties of monitoring the installation of the system and is technically qualified and experienced in the installation of the system and is authorized by the supplier to make and sign the daily reports specified herein.

f. Manufacturer’s data sheets and thickness of carrier pipe insulation. g. Calculations approved and stamped by Professional Engineer demonstrating that allowable

stress of piping will not be exceeded due to thermal expansion and that anchor forces and moments are not excessive. Calculations shall be performed by a finite element, three dimensional analysis computer program. Final report shall show node stresses, forces, moments and displacements.

h. All drawings and calculations shall have Professional Engineer's stamp. i. A proposed schedule of activities indicating when various items of work and tests are to be

carried out and when quality control inspectors of the supplier will be present at the job site. j. A written report from the manufacturer’s representative during periods he is on site. k. Proposed changes in design due to unforeseen conflicts or interferences along the route of the

system. l. Upon completion of the work: 1) Certificate of Compliance signed by principal officers of the manufacturer and the

contractor certifying that the system has been installed in accordance with contract requirements.

2) Operation and maintenance manual.

33 63 00 VARHS


3) As built layout of system including all final elevations (hard copies and AutoCAD Version 12 on CD).

2. Group II, Piping in Manholes.

a. Pipe, valves, strainers and fittings.

b. Steam traps including orifice sizes, capacities.

c. Pipe hangers, brackets, supports, racks, anchors, guides.

d. Pipe hanger calculations.

e. Pipe insulation, jackets, adhesives and cements. Submit samples and technical information.

f. Layout drawings showing all piping, maintenance and operation access and sumps to scale.

D. Independent Weld Testing Firm for Carrier Piping in Pre Engineered Direct Buried:

1. Certificate of Qualification of testing firm.

2. Certificate of Acceptability of actual welds.

E. Proposed test procedures and samples of test data sheets for each required test, 30 days prior to the test date. Provide calibration data on all test instruments. Tests shall not begin until procedures have been approved.

F. Test reports resulting from testing of installed systems, in booklet form showing all field tests performed to prove compliance with specified performance criteria.

1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Equipment and material placed on the job shall remain in the custody of the Contractor until final acceptance whether or not the Government has reimbursed the Contractor for the equipment and material.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting materials delivered to site for damage.

C. The Contractor is solely responsible for the protection of the equipment and material against damage from any source. Materials shall be stored on site in enclosures or under protective coverings. Materials shall not be stored directly on ground. Protect piping systems against entry of water and mud and all foreign substances by installing watertight protection on open ends at all times. Protect direct buried system coatings from ultraviolet light (sunlight). Existing equipment worked on by the Contractor or in the Contractor's working area shall be under the custody and responsibility of the Contractor.

D. All insulated piping systems exposed to water must be replaced with new systems.

E. Place all damaged items in first class new operating condition or replace damaged items as determined and directed by the Resident Engineer (RE)/Contracting Officers Technical Representative (COTR), at no additional cost to the Government.

F. Pipe, conduit sections, fittings, valves and other accessories shall be handled in such a manner as to ensure delivery to the trench in sound, undamaged condition.

33 63 00 VARHS


G. Special care shall be taken to avoid injury to coatings and linings on pipe and fittings. Damaged coatings and linings shall be repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Resident Engineer (RE)/Contracting Officers Technical Representative (COTR).

1.7 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Phasing of project shall be in accordance with the provisions of Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, and shown on steam distribution drawings.

B. Interruption of Existing Service: Arrange, phase and perform work and provide temporary facilities, materials, equipment, and connections to utilities, to assure adequate steam and condensate return service for existing installations at all times. Only such absolutely necessary interruptions as may be required for making connections will be permitted, and only at such times when approval is obtained from RE/COTR. Interruptions to steam and condensate service shall be only with prior approval, and be the minimum possible duration.

1. All interruptions shall be as scheduled under Article "Phasing" of Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS as approved by the RE/COTR.


A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.

B. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):

AA60005 NOT 1 ..........Frames, Covers, Grating, Steps, Sump and Catch Basin, Manhole

LP535E..........................Plastic Sheet (Sheeting): Plastic Strip: Poly (Vinyl Chloride) and Poly (Vinyl ChlorideVinyl Acetate)

LS125B..........................Screening, Insect, Nonmetallic

C. Military Specifications (Mil. Spec.):

MILS901D .................... Shock Tests. H.I. (High Impact) Shipboard Machinery, Equipment and Systems

D. ASTM International (ASTM):

A36/A36M05.................. Structural Steel

A47/A47M99(2004)....... Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings

A53/A53M06a................ Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless A105/A105M05.............. Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications

A106/A106M06a............ Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High Temperature Service

A12604 ........................... Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings

A13496(2005) ................ Pipe, Steel, Electric Fusion (Arc) Welded (Sizes NPS 16 and over)

A135/A135M06.............. Electric Resistance Welded Steel Pipe

A139/A139M04.............. Electric Fusion (Arc) Welded Steel Pipe (NPS 4 and over)

33 63 00 VARHS


A16799(2004) ................ Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip

A193/A193M07.............. Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature Service

A194/A194M07a............ Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-pressure or High

Temperature Service or Both

A197/A197M00(2006)... Cupola Malleable Iron

A216/A216M07.............. Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High Temperature

Service

A234/A234M07.............. Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service

A240/A240M07e1.......... Chromium and Chromium Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications

A395/A395M99(2004)... Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures

A53684(2004) ................ Ductile Iron Castings

B6102 ............................. Steam or Valve Bronze Castings.

B20906 ........................... Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate

C41105 ........................... Hot Surface Performance of High Temperature Thermal Insulation

C449/C449M-00 .............Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement

C533-07 ...........................Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation

C547-06 ...........................Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation

C552-03 ...........................Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation

C59107............................ Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation

C65504e1........................Reinforced Concrete DLoad Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe

C92005............................Elastomeric Joint Sealants

C112604..........................Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation

C113606..........................Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation

D178406a........................Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC) Compounds

D231006..........................MachineMade “Fiberglass” (Glass Fiber Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe

33 63 00 VARHS


D248706..........................Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Classification System) D299601(2007)e1 ...........Filament Wound Fiberglass (Glass Fiber Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe

E. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

B16.32006.......................Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings

B16.52003.......................Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS ½ 24

B16.92003.......................Factory-made Wrought Butt-welding Fittings

B16.112005.....................Forged Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded

B31.12004.......................Code for Pressure Piping, Power Piping, with Amendments

B31.92004.......................Code for Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping, with Amendments B40.1002005...................Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII: 2007 Edition, with Amendments

F. American Welding Society (AWS):

AWS B2.100...................Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification

G. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry (MSS): SP4503............................Bypass and Drain Connection Standard

SP5802 ........................... Pipe Hangers and Supports Materials, Design and Manufacturer

SP6903 ........................... Pipe Hangers and Supports Selection and Application SP8003 ........................... Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves

H. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):

ASHRAE Handbook........ 2004 HVAC Systems and Equipment

I. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

31805.............................. Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete

J. NACE International (Corrosion Engineers) (NACE):

RP016902 ....................... Standard Recommended Practice, Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems

K. Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association (EJMA):

8th Edition2003 .............. Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association

L. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

M30003 .......................... Inorganic Zinc Rich Primer

M. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): SP10/NACE No. 22004 Near White Blast Cleaning

33 63 00 VARHS


N. Unified Facilities Guide Specifications (UFGS):

UFGS 33 63 13 ................ Exterior Underground Steam Distribution System (April 2006 or later)

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 PREENGINEERED, FACTORY FABRICATED, DIRECT-BURIED, DRAINABLE DRYABLE-TESTABLE (DDT) SYSTEMS

A. Complete steam and condensate piping system with carrier pipes, carrier pipe insulation, air space, steel conduit, epoxy coating on conduit, conduit insulation and accessories. Do not locate condensate pipes in conduits (conduits) that contain steam pipes.

B. Design Pressure and Temperature: All components of system shall be designed for carrier pipe pressures and temperatures as follows:

1. Steam System: 1000 kPa (150 psi); 185 °C (366 °F).

2. Condensate Systems: 345 kPa (50 psi); 154 °C (310 °F).

C. Description of System Design: Refer to Part 1, “DEFINITIONS”.

D. Acceptable Manufacturer and System: Basis of design PermaPipe MT500 Gold, Rovanco, or approved by RE/COTR.

E. Minimum Burial and Traffic Loading: Piping system shall be certified to withstand a H20 traffic loading with 24" burial depth to the top of the outer conduit jacket subject to the installation being executed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.

F. Steam Piping: Refer to Paragraph, “STEAM CARRIER PIPING”. Additional requirements:

1. Piping shall be manufactured in the United States of America.

2. No piping joints allowed in factory fabricated straight sections of pre-engineered direct-buried systems.

3. Factory fabricated direct-buried piping sections that are a portion of an expansion loop or bend shall have all welded joints 100% radiograph inspected.

G. Condensate Piping: Refer to Paragraph, “STEAM CONDENSATE CARRIER PIPING”. Additional requirements:

1. Piping shall be manufactured in the United States of America.

2. No piping joints allowed in factory fabricated straight sections of pre-engineered direct-buried systems.

3. Factory fabricated direct buried piping sections that are a portion of an expansion loop or bend shall have all welded joints 100% radiograph inspected.

H. Carrier Pipe (Primary) Insulation: Carrier pipe insulation shall be Mineral Wool. Split insulation shall be held in place by stainless steel bands installed not more than 18 inches apart. The insulation shall have passed the boiling test requirements specified in the Federal Agency Guidelines. No foam insulations of any type shall be allowed as the primary insulation. To maintain a suitable interface temperature between the Conduit and the Secondary Insulation the thicknesses shown in Table 2 hereafter shall be used.

33 63 00 VARHS


I. Conduit:

1. The steel conduit shall be smooth wall, welded steel conduit. Conduit sizes 6” – 26” in gauge. Changes in conduit size, as required at oversized conduit to allow for carrier pipe expansion, shall be accomplished by eccentric and/or concentric fittings and shall provide for continuous drainage. Conduit closures shall be furnished with the conduit at a ratio of one closure for each fabricated item or length. Closures shall consist of 10 gauge steel and in cylindrical form with a single horizontal split and shall be field welded over adjacent units. All materials and insulation required for complete field closure shall be furnished with the conduit.

2. The exterior of the conduit surface shall be abrasive blast cleaned to a minimum of a near white surface, SSPCSP1063T. Profile must be a minimum of 1.5 mil peak to valley range. Any areas of rust bloom or oil shall be wiped and reblasted. After blasting, the steel service pipe shall be coated with Epoxy. The epoxy coating shall be a two part coating consisting of a base material and curing agent spray applied or Fusion Bonded Epoxy, to a minimum thickness of 812 mil. The coated pipe and fittings shall be factory holiday tested at 1,000 volts to ensure a void free coating. Areas of the conduit not passing the holiday test shall be patch coated and retested. Certified test reports shall be submitted to the owner and or engineer by the manufacturer upon completion of testing. The epoxy coating shall be applied to all conduit components including straights, changes in direction and closure sleeves.

J. Outer Conduit (Secondary) Insulation:

1. Conduit insulation shall be polyurethane foam, having a nominal 2 lb./ft³ density for all straight lengths and fittings. No polyisocyanurate foams will be allowed. The insulation thickness shall be one (1.0) inch maximum. Quality assurance procedures for the insulation shall include either a visual check prior to jacketing, an infrared inspection or an x-ray inspection of the entire length to insure there are no insulation voids. The urethane foam shall have minimum characteristics of

0.16 Kfactor, density of 2 lb. /ft³, closed cell content of 90 – 95% and compressive strength of 40 psi. Alternate systems submitted for substitution where the secondary urethane insulation exceeds one (1.0) inch shall require the primary insulation to be increased by 50%.

2. The polyurethane foam insulation shall be tested by the manufacturer for mechanical and thermal properties to assure compliance with the above values. All test samples will be taken from production material, identified, tagged and tested in accordance with the Table 1 below. Test reports showing results will be furnished to the engineer for approval. Data supplied by the polyurethane foam chemical supplier is not acceptable.

K. The outer protective jacket shall be either fiberglass (FRP) filament wound directly onto the urethane foam insulation or Fiberglass pipe with a minimum wall thickness of .085" with poured or injected urethane insulation systems. Thermoplastic conduit material PVC or Polyethylene shall not be allowed for direct buried piping. All straight pipe and fittings shall be factory preinsulated and jacketed. Jackets over fittings and anchors shall be either chopped spray up FRP or joined with fiberglass hand layups with thicknesses equal to the thickness of the FRP jacket on the straight lengths. No taping, gluing or shrink wraps shall be allowed on fitt6ing fabrication. A hand lay up of FRP of equal thickness to the jacket will be applied at the field joint prior to the application of the shrink sleeve.

TABLE 1:

Attribute ASTM STD

Sample Frequency Requirement

Insulation Density D 1622 Once per Batch > 2.0 lb/ft³ Insulation Compression Strength

D 1621 Once per Batch > 40 PSI

Insulation Closed Cell Content D 2856 Once per Batch > 90%

33 63 00 VARHS


Insulation Thermal Conductivity C 518 Once per Batch < 0.16 BTUinch/hr/ft²/ºF

L. Insulation Thicknesses and Nominal Outer Jacket Conduit Size. Manufacturers shall provide the insulation thickness and outer conduit size as shown in the following Table 2:

TABLE 2 PIPING SCHEDULE (Polyurethane

Insulation On Conduit)

System Nominal Pipe

Diameter (inches)

Primary Insulation MPT (inches min.) *

Minimum Conduit Size (inches)

Secondary Insulation

Polyurethane Foam (inches

max.)

Nominal Outer Jacket

Size (inches)

HPS 4 2 10.75 1 12.75

HPR 2 1.5 8.65 1 10.625

VCR 2 1 6.625 1 8.625

* Schedule based on MPT insulation thickness. Other insulations types must provide a 1” minimum air gap.

M. Pipe Support Guides: Piping shall be suitably spaced and supported at not more ten foot intervals. These supports shall be designed to allow for continuous airflow and drainage of the conduit in place. The straight supports shall be designed to occupy not more than 10% of the annular air space. All supports shall be of the type where insulation thermally isolates the carrier pipe from the outer conduit. The surface of the insulation shall be protected at the support by a sleeve not less than 12 inches long, fitted with traverse and, where required, rotational arresters.

N. Expansion Loops, Elbows and Tees:

1. Refer to manufacturer’s installation drawings for dimensions of expansion loop at each location.

2. Prefabricated elbows, loops and tees shall be furnished and installed where shown on plans and shall consist of pipe, insulation, and conduit conforming to the same specification as hereinbefore specified for straight runs. Expansion loops shall be of proper design in accordance with stress limits indicated by ANSI B 31.1 Code for pressure piping. Loop piping shall be installed in conduit suitably sized to handle indicated pipe movement.

O. End Seals and Glands:

1. Terminal ends of conduits inside manholes, pits, or building wall shall be equipped with end seals consisting of a steel bulk head plate welded to the pipe and conduit. No Gland seals will be allowed. End seals shall be equipped with drain and vent openings located diametrically opposite on the vertical center line of the mounting plate and shall be shipped to the job site with plugs in place. Terminate all conduits 6" beyond the inside face of manhole or building walls to protect any exposed piping insulation from damp wall condensation.

2. Where end seals are used, the first 24” of secondary insulation shall be the same as the primary insulation with a 10 gauge steel jacket. Refer to the typical details in the contract drawings.

33 63 00 VARHS


P. Concrete Anchors: Prefabricated plate anchors shall be furnished and installed where required and shall consist of a steel plate welded to pipe and conduit. The steel plate shall be 3/8" thick for 65/8" to 103/4" conduit, 1/2" thick for 12" to 22" conduit. Exposed steel anchor plates shall be protected, by the system manufacturer, from corrosion by encasing it with the same outer jacket and thickness as used on the straight sections. Either chopped sprayed or hand layups. A concrete block shall be cast over the plate and conduit and shall be large enough for firm anchorage into undisturbed trench sidewalls and/or bottom. The concrete block to be at least 30" in length and extend a minimum of 9" beyond the top and bottom. Refer to manufacturer’s installation drawings instructions for size of concrete anchors required for each location.

Q. Field Connection of Conduit Sections: Steel section conforming to conduit specification, welded to conduit sections, coated on all surfaces with system manufacturer’s coating field repair compound, and covered with a 1.3 mm (0.05 inch) minimum thickness polyethylene shrink sleeve designed for a service temperature exceeding 80 °C (176 °F).

R. Manhole and Building Wall Penetrations: Provide steel leak plates welded to wall sleeves or to conduit. Where wall sleeve is utilized, allow sufficient annular space between the sleeve and the conduit and install a watertight EPDM LinkSeal similar to Thunderline Corp or equal, rated for 121 °C (250 °F) minimum. Manhole and building walls shall not be used as anchor points.

S. Manufacturer’s Identification: Provide embossed brass or stainless steel tag hung by a brass or stainless steel chain at each end of each conduit or insulated piping in the manholes and buildings. The tag shall identify system manufacturer’s name, date of installation, government contract, and manufacturer’s project number.

T. Branch Piping Connections: All branch piping connections shall be located in manholes.

2.2 STEAM CARRIER PIPING

A. Carbon Steel, ASTM A53 Grade B or ASTM A106 Grade B, seamless or electric resistance welded (ERW), Standard Weight /Schedule 40 with welded ends and Extra Heavy Weight/ Schedule 80 for piping with threaded ends. Fittings shall be standard weight, carbon steel, butt weld, ASTM A234, Class 300 with butt welded joints per AWS D1.1.

B. Joints:

1. In, direct-buried systems: Butt-weld except socketweld for pipe sizes two inches and below. No joints allowed in factory fabricated straight sections of pre-engineered direct-buried systems.

2. All welded joints 100% radiograph inspected. All radiographs shall be reviewed and interpreted by an American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT) Certified Level III radiographer, employed by the testing firm, who shall sign the reading report. Dye penetrant testing may be utilized for pipe sizes 50 mm (2 inches) and below.

3. In manholes: Butt-weld pipe sizes 65 mm (21/2 inches) and above; thread or socket weld pipe sized 50 mm (two inches) and below.

C. Fittings:

1. Welded joints: Steel, ASTM A234, Grade B, ASME B16.9, same schedule as adjoining pipe, all elbows long radius. All elbows shall be long radius unless otherwise indicated. Tees shall be full size or reducing as required, having interior surfaces smoothly contoured.

2. Threaded joints: Forged steel, ASME B16.ll, 13,790 kPa (2000 psi class; or malleable iron, ASTM A47 or A197, ASME B16.3, 2050 kPa (300 psi) class.

33 63 00 VARHS


3. Socket welded joints: Forged steel, ASME B16.11, 13,790 kPa (2000 psi) class.

D. Unions on Threaded Piping: Forged steel, 13,800 kPa (2000 psi) class or 20,680 kPa (3000 psi) class; or malleable iron, 2050 kPa (300 psi) on piping 50 mm (2 inches) and under.

E. Flanges and Bolts: Forged steel weld neck, ASME B16.5, ASTM A105, 1025 kPa (150 psi) pressure class, except 2050 kPa (300 psi) class required adjacent to 1725 kPa (250 psi) and 2050 kPa (300 psi) class valves. Bolts shall be high strength steel ASTM A193, Class 2, Grade B8. Nuts shall be ASTM A194.

2.3 STEAM CONDENSATE CARRIER PIPING

A. Steam Condensate (HPR and VR) Carrier Pipe: Carbon Steel, ASTM A53 Grade B or ASTM A106 Grade B, seamless or electric resistance welded (ERW), Extra Heavy Weight/ Schedule 80.

B. Joints:

1. In direct- buried systems: Butt-weld except socket weld is required for pipe sizes 50 mm (two inches) and below. No joints allowed in factory fabricated straight sections of pre-engineered direct buried systems.

2. All welded joints shall be 100% radiograph inspected. All radiographs shall be reviewed and interpreted by an ASNT Certified Level III radiographer, employed by the testing firm, who shall sign the reading report. Dye penetrant testing may be utilized for pipe sizes 50 mm (2 inches) and below.

3. Manholes: Butt-weld pipe sizes 65 mm (21/2 inches) and above; thread or socket weld for pipe sizes 50 mm (two inches) and below.

C. Fittings:

1. Welded Joints: Steel, ASTM A234, Grade B, ASME B16.9, same schedule as adjoining pipe.

2. Threaded Joints: Malleable iron, ASTM A47 or A197, ASME B16.3, 2050 kPa (300 psi) class.

3. Socket Welded Joints: Forged steel, ASME B16.11, 13,800 kPa (2000 psi) class.

D. Unions (Except in Trenches): On piping 50 mm (two inches) and under, 2050 kPa (300 psi) malleable iron or steel.

E. Flanges: Weld neck ASME B16.5, forged steel, ASTM A105, 1025 kPa (150 psi).

2.4 EXPANSION LOOPS AND BENDS

A. Stresses shall be less than the maximum allowable stress in the Power Piping Code (ASME B31.1). Submit shop drawings and stress and anchor force calculations for all loops and bends. Show locations of all anchors, guides and supports. Base calculations on 1000 kPa (150 psi) and 185 °C (366 ° F) for steam line loops and bends and 345 kPa (50 psi) and 154 °C (310 °F) for condensate return line loops and bends.

2.5 VALVES

A. Valves for particular services are generally specified as Type Numbers. The Type Numbers are defined below. All valves of the same type shall be the products of a single manufacturer and shall comply with MSS SP45, MSS SP80 and ASME B31.1. Design valves for the service fluids and conditions. Pressure temperature ratings listed are minimum requirements. Packing and gaskets must be asbestos free.

33 63 00 VARHS


B. Valve Type Designations:

1. Gate Valves:

a. Type 101: Cast steel body ASTM A216 WCB, rated 1025 kPa (150 psi) at 260 °C (500 °F), 111/2 to 13 percent chromium stainless steel flexible wedge and hard faced (stellite) or nickel copper alloy seats, 1025 kPa (150 psi) ASME flanged ends, OS&Y, rising stem, bolted bonnet.

1) Provide factory installed globe valved bypass on all steam valves larger than 80 mm (3 inches). Conform to MSS SP45.

2) Drill and tap bosses for connection of drains where shown. Conform to MSS SP45.

b. Type 102: Not used.

c. Type 103: Cast iron body ASTM A126 Class B, rated for 850 kPa (125 psi) saturated steam, 1375 kPa (200 psi) WOG, bronze or bronze faced wedge and seats, 850 kPa (125 psi) ASME flanged ends, OS&Y, rising stem, bolted bonnet, renewable seat rings.

d. Type 104: Bronze body ASTM B61, rated for 1375 kPa (200 psi) saturated steam, 2750 kPa (400 psi) WOG, bronze wedges and Monel or stainless steel seats, threaded ends, rising stem, union bonnet.

e. Type 105: Not used.

f. Type 106: Forged steel body ASTM A105, rated for 2050 kPa (300 psi) at 216 °C (420 °F) minimum (Class 4130 kPa (600 psi) or Class 5500 kPa (800 psi)), hardened stainless steel or stellite wedge and seats, threaded ends, OS&Y, rising stem, bolted bonnet.

2. Check valves:

a. Type 401: Cast steel body ASTM A216, swing type, rated for 1025 kPa (150 psi) at 260 °C (500 °F), stainless steel or stainless steel faced disc and seat, 1025 kPa (150 psi) ASME flanged ends, bolted cover, renewable disc.

b. Type 402: Not used.

c. Type 403: Cast iron body ASTM A126 Class B, swing type, rated for 850 kPa (125 psi) saturated steam, 1375 kPa (200 psi) WOG, bronze or bronze faced disc and seat, 850 kPa (125 psi) ASME flanged ends, bolted cover, renewable disc and seat.

d. Type 404: Bronze body ASTM B61, swing type, rated for 1375 kPa (200 psi) saturated steam, 2750 kPa (400 psi) WOG, bronze disc, threaded ends, regrinding disc.

C. Valve Applications (Steam Lines):

1. Gate valves, 50 mm (two inches) and under: Type 106.

2. Gate valves, 65 mm (21/2 inches) and above: Type 101.

3. Check valves, 50 mm (two inches) and under: Type 404.

33 63 00 VARHS


D. Valve Applications (Condensate Lines):

1. Gate valves, 50 mm (two inches) and under: Type 104.

2. Check valves, 50 mm (two inches) and under: Type 404.

2.6 STEAM TRAPS

A. Apply at all steam line drip points.

B. Inverted bucket type with thermostatic vent in bucket. Each type furnished by a single manufacturer. Select the traps for pressures and capacities as shown or required. Fixed orifice or venturi type traps are not permitted.

C. Cast iron or stainless steel bodies. Construction shall permit ease of removal and servicing working parts without disturbing connecting piping.

D. Stainless steel internal components. Hardened chrome steel valves. Stainless steel mechanisms. Bimetallic air vent on inverted bucket traps.

E. Provision for Future Trap Performance Monitoring System: All traps shall include ports for future installation of monitoring devices. Ports shall be plugged. To facilitate future removal of the plugs, remove plugs, install them with Teflon tape on the threads, and reinstall plugs.

F. Identification: Label each trap at the factory with an identification number keyed to the contract drawings. Label shall be a metal tag permanently attached to the trap.

2.7 STRAINERS, Y TYPE

A. Provide as shown on steam and condensate piping systems.

B. Type: Opened removable cylindrical screen; threaded blow off connection.

C. Construction:

1. Steam Service to 1025 kPa (150 psi) and at Drip Traps: Rated for minimum 1025 kPa (150 psi) saturated steam. Rated for 1025 kPa (150 psi) ASME flanged ends, cast steel, for pipe sizes above 50 mm (two inches). Cast iron or bronze, rated for 1725 kPa (250 psi) saturated steam, threaded ends, for pipe sizes 50 mm (two inches) and under.

2. Condensate Service: Rated for 850 kPa (125 psi) saturated steam, 1200 kPa (175 psi) WOG. Provide 850 kPa (125 psi) ASME flanged ends, cast iron. Provide cast iron or bronze, threaded ends, for pipe sizes 50 mm (two inches) and under.

D. Screen: Monel or stainless steel, free area not less than 21/2 times flow area of pipe. Diameter of openings shall be 1.3 mm (0.05 inch) or less on steam service and 1.5 mm (0.06 inch) or less on water service.

E. Accessories: Gate type valve and quick couple hose connection on all blows off connections.

2.8 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Provide pressure gage immediately downstream of each steam line isolation valve serving a building.

B. Construction:

33 63 00 VARHS


1. Case: Solid armored front between measuring element and dial, blowout back, bottom connection, phenol turret type.

2. Dial: Noncorrosive, 110 mm (41/2 inch) diameter face with black markings on white background.

3. Measuring Element: Bourdon tube designed for service. Provide bellows for pressure ranges under 100 kPa (15 psi).

4. Movement: Stainless steel, rotary.

5. Pointer: Micrometer adjustable, black color.

6. Window: Plastic.

7. Liquid Filled Gages: Provide at outlet of all pumps.

C. Accuracy: ANSI B40.100, Grade 2A, 1/2 percent, on all gages; except Grade A, one percent permitted on diaphragm actuated gages, liquid filled gages, and compound gages.

D. Accessories:

1. Red set hands on gages located at automatic pressure regulator valve outlets.

2. Needle valve or gage cock rated for the service.

3. Syphon on all steam gages.

4. Overload stop on all pressure gages.

E. Ranges: Except where otherwise shown on the drawings, pressure ranges shall be as follows:

2.9 PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS: PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, SEISMIC BRACING AND EXPANSION FOR PIPING NOT INSTALLED IN FACTORY-FABRICATED DIRECT-BURIED PIPE SYSTEM

A. Application: Applies to all piping not in factory fabricated direct-buried DDT system.

B. Provide an engineered piping support system with all hangers, supports, anchors and expansion loops designed, seismically braced and located by experienced technical pipe support specialists, utilizing piping system design and analysis software. The system design must be completely documented and submitted for review.

C. All pipe hangers and supports, and selection and installation shall comply with MSS SP58, SP69, SP89, SP90, SP127.

D. All pipe hanger and support devices must be in compliance with specified MSS SP58 type numbers, have published load ratings, and be products of engineered pipe support manufacturers.

SERVICE RANGE Steam above 59 psi 0 to 200 psi Condensate Pump Discharge 0 to 100 psi Vacuum Return 30 inches HG 0 to 15 psi

33 63 00 VARHS


E. All pipe stresses and forces and moments on connecting equipment and structures shall be within the allowances of the ASME B31.1 code, applicable building codes, and equipment manufacturer’s design limits, and Seismic bracing requirements.

F. Piping that expands and contracts horizontally including steam, steam condensate, condensate transfer, shall be supported by roller or sliding type hangers and supports except when long vertical hanger rods permit sufficient horizontal movement with the vertical angles of the rods less than 4 degrees.

G. Piping that expands and contracts vertically including steam, steam condensate, condensate transfer, shall be supported by engineered variable spring and spring cushion hangers. Utilize MSS SP69 selection requirements and guidelines. Vibration isolator hanger types are not permitted.

H. Seismic braces and shock absorbers shall be provided. Comply with MSS SP127 design requirements and guidelines and Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS.

I. Piping shall remain fully connected and supported under the design seismic events. Piping and connected equipment shall not be overstressed beyond code limits during seismic events.

J. Piping system anchors and expansion loops shall be engineered and located to control movement of piping that is subject to thermal expansion.

K. Prior to construction, submit complete engineering calculation methods and results, descriptions of all devices with MSS numbers, sizes, load capabilities and locations. Submit calculations on all moments and forces at anchors and guides, all hanger loads, all pipe stresses that are within 20% of the code allowable or exceed the ASME B31.1 code allowable, all pipe movements at supports.

L. Detailed Design Requirements:

1. Piping system design and analysis software shall be current state of the art that performs B31.1 Code analyses, and shall be utilized to analyze pipe movement and deflection, pipe stresses, pipe support forces and moments, and for selection of pipe support types and sizes. Seismic restraint calculations shall utilize the applicable shock spectra for the type of building structure, type of supported system, and the locality. Comply with MSS SP127.

2. Each support for piping 60 mm (21/2 inches) and above shall be completely engineered to include location, type and size, hot and cold loads and movement. Submit layout drawings showing precise support locations and submit individual drawings for each support assembly showing all components, sizes, loadings.

3. Supports for piping 50 mm (2 inches) and below shall be engineered in general terms with approximate locations, typical support types and sizes, approximate movements. Submit layout drawings showing general locations and support types and sizes.

4. The project drawings shall show locations and types of resilient supports including rollers and springs, and also show special supports including anchors, guides and braces. Comply with the drawing requirements unless it is determined that piping may be overstressed or supports overloaded. Refer conflicts to the RE/COTR.

5. Variable spring hangers conforming the MSS SP58, Type 51, shall support all piping that expands vertically from thermal effects. Spring rates must be selected to avoid excessive load transfer to the connected equipment as the piping expands vertically. Vibration type spring isolators are not acceptable. Light duty spring hangers, MSS SP58, Type 48, may be utilized on loads of 90 kg (200 lb.) or less, and vertical movement of 3 mm (0.125 inches) or less. Spring cushion hangers, MSS SP58, Type 49, may be utilized for vertical movement of 3 mm (0.125 inches) or less.

6. Locate supports to permit removal of valves and strainers from pipelines without disturbing

33 63 00 VARHS


supports.

7. If equipment and piping arrangement differs from that shown on the drawings, support locations and types shall be revised at no cost to the Government.

M. Hangers, Supports -Products:

1. Factory built products of a manufacturer specializing in engineered pipe supports. All components must have published load ratings. All spring type supports shall have published spring rates and movement limits. All support assemblies shall include threaded connections that permit vertical position adjustment. Supports shall comply with MSS SP58 Type Numbers as listed below.

2. Upper Attachments to Building Structure: Types 18, 20, 21, 22, 23, 29, and 30.

3. Roller Supports: Types 41, 43, and 46. Provide vertical adjustment for Type 41 with threaded studs and nuts adjacent to the roller.

4. Variable Spring Hanger Assembly:

a. Type 51 variable spring, with Type 3 pipe clamp or Type 1 clevis. Type 53 variable spring trapeze may also be used. Locate Type 51 variable spring within 300 mm (1 foot) above pipe attachment. Attach rod to top of variable spring with Type 14 clevis.

b. Typical features of variable spring hangers include spring rates under 150 lb./in, enclosed spring, load and travel indicator, sizes available with load capabilities ranging from 50 lb. to multiples of 10,000 lb.

5. Spring Cushion Hanger Assembly: Double Rod: Type 41 and 49.

6. Light Duty Spring Hanger Assembly: Type 48 light duty spring, with Type 3 pipe clamp or Type 1 clevis. Locate Type 48 light duty spring within 300 mm (1 foot) above pipe attachment.

8. Clevis Hangers: Type 1.

9. Wall Brackets: Type 31, 32, and 33.

10. Pipe Stands: Type 38.

11. Riser Clamps: Type 42.

12. Roller Supports:

a. Suspended From Above Pipe: MSS SP58, Type 43 with hanger length adjusted for vertical adjustment or Type 41 with vertical adjustment at roller. Construct guides to restrain movement perpendicular to the long axis of the piping. All members shall be welded steel.

b. Support From Below Pipe In Concrete Shallow Trenches: MSS SP58 Type 46 with vertical adjustment in base. Construct guides to restrain movement perpendicular to the long axis of the piping. All members shall be welded steel.

13. Trapeze Supports: May be used where pipes are close together and parallel. Construct with structural steel channels or angles. Bolt roller supports to steel to support piping subject to horizontal thermal expansion. Attach other piping with Ubolts.

14. Pipe Covering Protection Saddles: Type 39. Provide at all support points on insulated pipe except where Type 3 pipe clamp is provided. Insulation shields are not permitted. Refer to Section 23 07 11, HVAC AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION.

33 63 00 VARHS


15. Sliding Supports: Type 35. Welded steel attachments to pipe and building structure with Teflon or graphite sliding surfaces bonded to the attachments. Provide steel guides, except at expansion bends, to prevent lateral movement of the pipe.

16. Seismic Restraints:

a. Bracing: Provide as required by Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS.

b. Comply with MSS SP127.

c. Bracing: Provide as determined by engineering calculations.

d. Shock Absorbers: Type 50. Mechanical or hydraulic type rated for shock loads. Pipe attachments shall be Type 3.

N. Expansion Loops: Expansion loops shall be of proper size and design in accordance with stress limits indicated by ANSI B 31.1 Code for pressure piping.

O. Pipe Anchors: Provide engineered designs to accommodate the calculated loads. Provide where shown on drawings and required for anchoring. Construct with all welded steel, ASTM A36.

2.10 INSULATION MATERIALS (IN MANHOLES)

A. Calcium Silicate Insulation:

1. Preformed Piping Insulation: ASTM C533, Type I.

2. Blocks: ASTM C533, Type I.

3. Fitting Insulation: ASTM C533, with polyvinyl chloride, Fed. Spec. LP535, Type II Grade GU, and Type III, premolded fitted covering 0.5 mm (0.020 inches) thick.

B. Fiberglass Insulation:

1. Preformed Piping Insulation: ASTM C547, 230 °C (450 °F).

2. Fitting Insulation: ASTM C547, 230 °C (450 °F), with polyvinyl chloride, Fed. Spec. LP535, Type II Grade GU, and Type III, premolded fitted covering 0.5 mm (0.020 inches) thick.

C. Cellular Glass Insulation: Preformed Piping Insulation: ASTM C552.

D. Insulating and Finishing Cements: Best grade recommended by printed instructions of manufacturer for the type of insulation system and service conditions. Conform to ASTM C449.

E. Insulation Bands: Minimum 12 mm (1/2 inch) wide by 0.4 mm (0.015 inch) thick ASTM A167 stainless steel.

F. Aluminum Jackets: Minimum 0.4 mm (0.016 inch) thick aluminum, ASTM B209, 3003 alloy, H14 temper, with locking longitudinal joints. Jackets for elbows, tees and other fittings shall be factory fabricated to match material and construction of the straight run jackets. Factory fabricated stainless steel bands shall be furnished and installed on all circumferential joints. Bands shall be 20 mm (0.75 inch) wide on 450 mm (18 inch) centers. Bands shall be applied with manufacturers recommended sealant. Entire system shall be watertight.

G. All Service Jackets: White kraft bonded to 0.025 mm ((0.001 inch) thick aluminum foil, fiberglass reinforced, pressure sensitive adhesive closure. Beach puncture 50 units, suitable for painting without

33 63 00 VARHS


sizing. Comply with ASTM C1136. Jackets shall have minimum 40 mm (11/2 inch) lap on longitudinal joints and not less than 100 mm (4 inch) butt strips on end joints. Butt strip material shall be same as the jacket. Lap and butt strips may be self-sealing type with factory applied pressure sensitive adhesive.

H. Glass Cloth Jacket: Minimum 0.24 kg per square meter (7.8 ounces per square yard), 2000 kPa (300 psi) bursting strength, weather tight for outside service. Beach puncture 50 units.

I. Pipe Covering Protection Saddles: MSS SP58, Type 39 at all hanger points except where Type 3 pipe clamps are provided.

J. Fire and Smoke Ratings: Assembled insulation systems shall meet flame spread (25) and smoke developed (50) ratings as developed under ASTM C411 and NFPA 255 standards and specifications.

2.11 PIPE AND VALVE FLANGE GASKETS

A. Nonasbestos, designed for the service conditions. On steam service utilize “Flexitallic” spiral wound, “Lamons Grafoil Grade GHR”, “Lamons Spirawound”, “Garlock ST706”, or equal.

2.12 BURIED UTILITY WARNING TAPE

A. Tape shall be 0.1 mm (0.004 inch) thick, 150 mm (6 inches) wide, yellow polyethylene with a ferrous metallic core, acid and alkali¬resistant and shall have a minimum strength of 12,000 kPa (1750 psi) lengthwise and 10,300 kPa (1500 psi) crosswise with an elongation factor of 350 percent. Provide bold black letters on the tape identifying the type of system. Tape color and lettering shall be unaffected by moisture and other substances contained in the backfill material.


3.1 GENERAL

A. Connecting to Existing Work: Connect new work to existing work in a neat and workmanlike manner. Where an existing structure must be cut or existing utilities interfere, such obstruction shall be bypassed, removed, replaced or relocated, patched and repaired. Work disturbed or damaged shall be replaced to its prior condition, as required by Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. Piping connections shall be made only in manholes, or buildings.

B. Coordination: Coordinate the location of all items of equipment and work of all trades. Maintain operability and maintainability of the equipment and systems. The contractor at his cost shall perform any relocation of equipment or systems to comply with the requirement of operability and maintainability.

C. Excavation, trenching, shoring, sheathing, bracing, and backfilling shall conform to Section 31 20 11, EARTHWORK and SECTION 31 23 33 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL. Comply with Direct--Buried Pipe Manufacturer's requirements for bedding and backfill.

D. Grading:

1. Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, the required downward grading of steam and condensate piping shown on the drawings is 114.3 mm in 12 meters (four and one half inches in 40 feet) or approximately 1% slope in the direction of flow. The exception is the steam service to Building 11 which requires a counterflow steam and condensate condition: Provide a minimum grade not less than 241 mm in 12 meters (nine and one half inches in 40 feet or approximately 2 % slope).

2. Under special conditions where field conditions prevent the above grades, steam and condensate lines may be graded downward less than the above grade, subject to the RE/COTR and Design

33 63 00 VARHS


Engineer's approval but not less than 63.5 mm in 12 meters (two and one half inches in 40 feet or approximately 1/2 % slope).

3. Provide eccentric reducing fittings on steam mains and branches, (except on vertical piping). Install said fittings to maintain continuity of grade in bottom of pipeline.

4. Provide risers with drip pockets and steam traps on steam lines where space restrictions prevent continuous grading. All steam traps must be located in manholes.

3.2 DEMOLITION

A. Perform work in accordance with requirements for phasing.

B. Completely remove all pipe, valves, fittings, insulation, and all hangers including the connection to the structure and any fastenings.

C. Seal all openings in manhole or building walls after removal of piping.

D. All material and equipment removed shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from Government property within one week and shall not be stored in operating areas.

E. All flame cutting shall be performed with adequate fire protection facilities available as required by safety codes and Resident Engineer.

3.3 PIPING JOINTS AND FITTINGS

A. Welded Joints:

1. Branch connections shall be made with either welding tees or welding outlet fittings. Welding outlet fittings shall be forged, integrally reinforced to provide 100 percent pipe strength, beveled for full penetration welding and funneled at inlet for full fluid flow.

2. Clean pipe and fittings before welding and installation in system.

B. Threaded Joints:

1. Pipe threads shall be cut to give proper engagement in threaded fittings. Threaded pipe shall have clean¬cut threads; dull or damaged pipe dies shall not be used.

2. Clean pipe and fittings before installation and ream pipe after cutting threads. Joints shall be made with oil and graphite pipe joint compound applied to male threads only.

C. Fittings: All pipe intersections and all changes in direction shall be made with factory¬built¬reinforced fittings. Field¬fabricated fittings and miters are not permitted.

D. Flanged Joints: Gaskets and bolting shall be applied in accordance with the recommendations of the gasket manufacturer and bolting standards of ASME B31.1. Strains shall be evenly applied without overstress of bolts. Gaskets shall cover entire area of mating faces of flanges.

3.4 CLEANING OF PIPING

A. Clean pipe and fittings inside and outside before and after assembly. Remove all dirt, scale, and other foreign matter from inside the piping by use of a pipe swab or pipe “pig” before connecting pipe sections, valves, equipment or fittings.

33 63 00 VARHS


3.5 WELDING

A. The Contractor is entirely responsible for the quality of the welding and shall:

1. Conduct tests of the welding procedures used by his organization, determine the suitability of the procedures used, determine that the welds made will meet the required tests, and also determine that the welding operators have the ability to make sound welds under standard conditions.

2. Comply with ASME B31.1 and AWS B2.1.

3. Perform all welding operations required for construction and installation of the heat distribution system.

B. Qualification of Welders: Rules of procedure for qualification of all welders and general requirements for fusion welding shall conform with the applicable portions of ASME B31.1 and AWS B2.1, and also as outlined below.

C. Examining Welder: Examine each welder at job site, in the presence of the Resident Engineer (RE)/Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative (COTR), to determine the ability of the welder to meet the qualifications required. Test welders for piping for all positions, including welds with the axis horizontal (not rolled) and with the axis vertical. Each welder shall be:

1. Allowed to weld only in the position in which he has qualified.

2. Required to identify his welds with his specific code marking signifying his name and number assigned.

D. Examination Results: Provide the RE/COTR with a list of names and corresponding code markings. Retest welders that fail to meet the prescribed welding qualifications. Disqualify welders, who fail the second test, for work on the project.

E. Beveling: Field bevels and shop bevels shall be done by mechanical means or by flame cutting. Where beveling is done by flame cutting, surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of scale and oxidation just prior to welding. Conform to specified standards.

F. Alignment: Utilize split welding rings or approved alternate method for field joints on all carrier pipes above 50 mm (two inches) to assure proper alignment, complete weld penetration, and prevention of weld spatter reaching the interior of the pipe. Make field joints 50 mm (two inches) and smaller with welding sockets.

G. Erection: Piping shall not be split, bent, flattened, or otherwise damaged either before, during, or after installation. Where the pipe temperature falls to 0 °C (32 °F) or lower, the pipe shall be heated to approximately 38 °C (100 °F) for a distance of 300 mm (one foot) on each side of the weld before welding, and the weld shall be finished before the pipe cools to 0 °C (32 °F).

H. Defective Welds: Replace and reinspect defective welds. Repairing defective welds by adding weld material over the defect or by peening will not be permitted. Welders responsible for defective welds must be requalified.

I. Electrodes: Electrodes shall be stored in a dry heated area, and be kept free of moisture and dampness during fabrication operations. Discard electrodes that have lost part of their coating.

J. Radiographic Testing: An approved independent testing firm regularly engaged in radiographic testing shall perform radiographic examination of all field welds in the carrier piping of direct-buried systems, concrete trench systems and in manholes, in accordance with ASME B31.1. Furnish a set of films showing each weld inspected, a reading report evaluating the quality of each weld, and a location plan

33 63 00 VARHS


showing the physical location where each weld is to be found in the completed project, prior to installing conduit field joints, trench covers, backfilling and hydrostatic testing. All radiographs shall be reviewed and interpreted by an ASNT Certified Level III radiographer, employed by the testing firm, who shall sign the reading report. The RE/COTR reserves the right to review all inspection records, and if any welds inspected are found unacceptable they shall be removed, rewelded, and radiographically reexamined at no cost to the Government.

3.6 DRAIN VALVES AND VENT VALVES

A. Provide 40 mm (1¬1/2”) minimum pipe size drain valves on condensate return carrier pipes at all low points in manholes. Provide 25 mm (1”) minimum air vent valves in manholes at all high points in condensate return carrier piping.

3.7 PIPE SUPPORT INSTALLATION (MANHOLES)

A. Coordinate support locations with structure prior to erection of piping. Arrangement of supports shall facilitate operating, servicing and removal of valves, strainers, and piping specialties. Hanger parts must be marked at the factory with a numbering system keyed to hanger layout drawings. Layout drawings must be available at the site during construction.

B. Upper Attachments to Structure:

1. New Reinforced Concrete Construction: Concrete inserts.

2. Existing Reinforced Concrete Construction: Upper attachment welded or clamped to steel clip angles (or other construction shown on the drawings) that are expansion bolted to the concrete. Expansion bolting shall be located so that loads place bolts in shear.

3. Steel Deck and Structural Framing: Upper attachments welded or clamped to structural steel members.

C. Expansion Fasteners and Power Set Fasteners: In existing concrete construction, expansion fasteners may be used for hanger loads up to one third the manufacturer's rated strength of the expansion fastener. Power set fasteners may be used for loads up to one fourth of rated load. When greater hanger loads are encountered, additional fasteners may be used and interconnected with steel members combining to support the hanger.

D. Special Supports:

1. Secure horizontal pipes where necessary to prevent vibration or excess sway.

2. Where hangers cannot be adequately secured as specified, make special provisions for hanging and supporting pipe as directed by the RE/COTR.

3. Do not attach pipe supports, hangers, clamps or anchors to equipment unless specified for that equipment or unless the RE/COTR gives written permission.

E. Spring Hangers: Locate spring units within 300 mm (one foot) of the pipe attachment, except in locations where spring assemblies interfere with pipe insulation.

F. Seismic Braces and Restraints: Do not insulate piping within 300 mm (one foot) of device until device has been inspected by RE/COTR.

3.8 DIRECT BURIED SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. The Piping System Manufacturer's Representative shall oversee the delivery, storage, installation and testing of the system. All work shall be in strict accordance with the requirements specified herein and

33 63 00 VARHS


with the printed instructions of the manufacturer. Printed instructions must be available at the site prior to delivery of system components. Any changes required to the design and layout of the system due to site conditions must be approved in writing by the system designer and the RE/COTR. All branch piping connections, valves and drip traps must be located within manholes.

B. Representative of System Manufacturer: This shall be a person who regularly performs the duties listed below, is certified in writing by the system manufacturer to be technically qualified and experienced in personally installing these systems, and shall be authorized by the manufacturer to make and sign the daily reports specified herein. Sales Representatives of the piping system product shall not be considered as qualified for these responsibilities.

C. The RE/COTR, or authorized representative of the owner, shall conduct field inspections and witness all field tests specified in this Section. Contractor shall provide a minimum of 5 days’ notice when field test will be conducted.

D. The Contractor shall perform field tests and provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing. The Contractor shall produce evidence that any item of work has been constructed properly in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications.

E. Representatives Time: Four (4) days of Representatives time shall be provided. A log of date and time spent at the jobsite shall be furnished to the RE/COTR on a weekly basis.

F. The Representative shall observe critical periods of the installation including the following:

1. Inspection and unloading of material delivered to site.

2. Inspection of trench prior to commencing installation of system.

3. Inspection of concrete anchors and thrust blocks.

4. Cold springing.

5. Hydrostatic test of all service lines.

6. Field joint closure work.

7. Air test of conduit.

8. Repair of any coatings.

9. Oversee drying out procedures of conduit system.

10. Holiday test of conduit coating.

11. Initial backfill up to 250 mm (10 inches) above the top of the conduit.

12. The slope of the system. Elevation readings shall be witnessed and recorded.

13. Operational tests.

14. Any field modification to the piping system

15. Initial backfill of piping in trench

G. Provide a report consisting of the installation log indicating actual installed conditions and test certification signed by the manufacturer’s representative above, the contractor, and the RE/COTR. Include a letter of certification by the manufacturer’s representative that the installation is in

33 63 00 VARHS


conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

H. Reports to Contracting Officer:

1. Obtain a written report prepared daily and signed by the representative of the system manufacturer. Present the original report to the RE/COTR on the same day it is prepared, and forward one copy to the manufacturer's main office.

2. Provide a report consisting of the installation log indicating actual installed conditions and test certification signed by the manufacturer’s representative above, the contractor, and the RE/COTR. Include a letter of certification by the manufacturer’s representative that the installation is in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. The report shall state whether or not the condition and quality of the materials used and the delivery, storage; installation and testing of the system are in accordance with the plans, specifications, and manufacturer’s printed instructions and is satisfactory in all respects. When any work connected with the installation is unsatisfactory, the report shall state what corrective action has been taken or shall contain the system manufacturer's recommendations for corrective action. The report shall identify any conditions that could result in an unsatisfactory installation, including such items as open conduit ends left in the trench overnight and improper manhole entries. The daily reports are to be reviewed, signed and sealed by the Professional Engineer responsible for the system design. Signed and sealed copies of the daily report shall be submitted with the payment requests. All work must stop if daily reports are not furnished and requests for payments shall be denied if the daily reports are not furnished as specified.

4. Upon completion of the work and before final acceptance, deliver to the RE/COTR a notarized Certificate of Compliance signed by principal officers of both the manufacturing and the contracting firm, stating that the installation is satisfactory and in accordance with plans, specifications, and manufacturer’s instructions.

5. The manufacturer shall retain copies of all the daily reports and the Certificate of Compliance for 5 years after final acceptance of the system by the Government.

I. Excavation, Trenching, and Backfilling: Perform all excavation, trenching, and backfilling as required by Section 31 20 11, EARTHWORK and SECTION 31 23 33 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL including the system manufacturer’s installation requirements.

J. Beach sand or any sand with large amounts of chlorides is not permitted. Foundation for system must be firm and stable. Foundation and backfill must be free from rocks or substances that could damage the system coating. Concrete anchor and thrust blocks must be installed in undisturbed earth. Backfilling must not commence until elevations have been surveyed and accepted and system has been satisfactorily pressure tested including hydrostatic testing of carrier pipes and air testing of conduits.

K. Protect conduit coating from damage during rigging, storage and installation. Protect conduit and carrier pipe ends from water intrusion during rigging and installation. Protect conduit coatings from ultraviolet light (sunlight).

L. Materials and equipment shall be protected from the weather during construction.

M. Defective Material: The Representative shall take prompt action to return to the factory all damaged or defective material and shall order prompt replacement of such material.

N. Slope of Carrier Pipes: Maintain constant slope as shown or specified. Prior to backfilling over the top of the conduit, but after removal of temporary supports, Contractor shall measure and record elevations of top of conduit in the trench. Elevations shall be taken at every field joint, 1/3 points along each pipe section, and at tops of elbows. These measurements shall be checked against contract drawings and shall confirm that the conduit system has been installed to the elevations shown on the contract drawings. Slope shall be

33 63 00 VARHS


uniform within 0.1 percent. These measurements shall be recorded by the Contractor, included in the direct buried system manufacturer representative’s daily report, and given to the RE/COTR prior to covering the top of the conduit with backfill.

O. Cleaning of Piping:

1. Remove all dirt, scale, and other foreign matter from inside the piping by use of a pipe swab or pipe “pig” before connecting pipe sections, valves, or fittings.

2. Each section of pipe, fittings, and valves shall be thoroughly cleaned free of all foreign matter before erection. Interior of piping shall be washed out thoroughly with water before final connections are made. Open ends of mains shall be plugged or capped during shutdown periods. Lines shall not be left open at any place where foreign matter might accidentally enter pipe.

P. Field Tests: Refer to Article, TESTS.

Q. Wet Insulation:

1. Sections of system that have been fully or partially submerged in water must be replaced. Moisture content of insulation during installation shall not exceed five percent by weight.

R. Vents and Drains on Ends of DDT Systems: At each conduit termination (end plate) in buildings and manholes, plug the conduit drain openings with brass plugs and extend one inch pipe size ASTM A53 galvanized vent pipes from the conduit vents through the tops of the manholes or one foot above the conduit in buildings. Terminate the outside vents in 180degree bends.

S. Drying of Conduit System:

1. Test moisture content of conduit system. Conduit system shall be dried out if moisture content is above that recommended by the manufacturer's representative.

2. Comply with DDT pipe manufacturer's drying out procedures using dew point measurement and compressed gas method to evacuate moisture from the conduit system.

T. Piping and pipe systems shall be fabricated, assembled, welded, and installed in accordance with ANSI B31.1.

U. Piping shall be cut accurately to field measurements and worked into place without springing or forcing, except where cold springing is specified. Piping shall not be buried, concealed, or insulated until it has been inspected, tested, and approved. In accordance with Paragraph 3.16, Tests.

V. Flanged and threaded joints shall be used only where necessary for normal maintenance and where required to match valves and equipment. Flanged and threaded joints shall not be buried.

W. Gaskets, packing, and thread compounds shall be suitable for the service. Joint compound or thread tape shall be applied on male threads only.

X. Arrangement of all piping shall be shown on the drawings. During installation, care shall be taken to avoid interference with other piping, conduit, and equipment. Lines shall be trapped only where shown on the Drawings.

Y. Reducing fittings shall be used for changes in pipe sizes. Bushings shall not be used.

Z. In horizontal lines 21/2 inches and larger, reducing fittings of the eccentric type shall be used to maintain the continuous bottoms of the lines in the same plane to facilitate drainage without pockets.

AA. Pipe shall be adequately supported and anchored so that strain from weight and thermal movement of

33 63 00 VARHS


piping is not imposed on equipment.

BB. Pipe Expansion: Expansion of pipes shall be accommodated by expansion loops or LBends in buried locations. Coldspringing of piping shall be executed during field assembly in accordance with the calculated maximum operational expansion as indicated on the drawings.

CC. Anchor Blocks: Concrete anchor blocks shall be provided for pipe anchorage not less than 5 feet from building or manhole walls (except where metal harness is specified or shown on the Drawings). Size and position of anchor blocks shall be as shown on the Drawings. Anchor blocks shall be cast against undisturbed earth using concrete that conforms to ASTM C94 and has a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi at 28 days.

DD. Wall Penetrations: Galvanized steel sleeves shall be provided for penetrations in concrete wall 6 inches or less in thickness, and masonry walls. Existing concrete walls thicker than 6 inches shall be core drilled or equipped with galvanized steel sleeves. Elastomeric link type seals shall be acceptable for use in all locations.

EE. Buried Conduit Installation:

1. Conduit Field Joints:

a. Conduit sections shall be joined after leak testing of carrier pipe. Conduit joining materials provided or specified by the system manufacturer shall be used.

b. Conduit Air Test: All field welds at conduit closures shall be tested for leaks before applying secondary insulation and Polyethylene Shrink Wrap. During test, all field welds shall be checked with soap suds, and rewelded if necessary until air tight at 15 pounds pressure.

c. The 10 Ga. Steel closure sleeves shall be factory coated with epoxy per the conduit specifications within this section. The epoxy coating on the outer circumferences edges of the closure sleeves will be held back to allow for welding. The uncoated edges will be factory cleaned per the conduit specifications and protected with a durable tape material prior to shipment. After testing of the conduit the closure sleeve welds will be field coated with epoxy to the thickness specified in the conduit coating section. After the coating is allowed to cure the conduit insulation will be applied by the use of a metal removable form placed over the field joint area. A two (2)part urethane foam as specified in this section will be poured into place and allowed to cure. The form will then be removed and the foamed area visually inspected for voids. A record of the inspection will be documented and dated and submitted to the ER/COTR. Any voids will be filled prior to the application of a shrink sleeve.

d. Furnish all necessary equipment and labor to perform the air test, including air compressor, gauges, conduit caps, temporary pipe and connections, etc., and complete the test to the satisfaction of the Architect.

e. Pipe shall be insulated and conduit joined to provide field joint equal to factory fabricated section of conduit systems.

3.9 INSTALLATION PRESSURE GAGES

A. Locate at main stop valves (gate and butterfly valves) on steam distribution lines. Orient gages so that dials are upright and visible from nearest operating point of main stream stop valves. Provide gage cock. Provide syphon on steam service.

3.10 INSTALLATION VALVES

A. Do not locate valve stems below the horizontal centerline of the pipe.

33 63 00 VARHS


B. Locate valves to permit access for operation, maintenance, and replacement.

C. Provide 19 mm (3/4 inch) globevalved warm-up bypasses at all steam gate valves 80 mm (3 inch) pipe size and larger.

D. Provide 19 mm (3/4 inch) gate or ballvalved drains at each side of steam gate valves where condensate could collect, due to the slope of the pipeline, when the main valve is shut.

3.11 THERMAL INSULATION (NOT IN DIRECT-BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS)

A. For piping in preengineered direct-buried systems refer to Part 2 of this specification.

B. Steam, condensate and drip return piping, other than in preengineered direct buried systems, shall be insulated as follows:

1. Piping in manholes shall be insulated with calcium silicate or cellular glass pipe insulation with aluminum jacket.

2. Minimum Insulation Thickness: Insulation thicknesses given in Table 5 and 6 are manufacturer’s nominal thickness.

TABLE 5 Minimum Pipe Insulation Thickness mm (inches) For Steam 110 to 1724 kPa (16 to 250 psi) gage

Nominal Pipe Diameter mm

(inches)

MPT-PC MPT-PF

Delta Thermo-12

Super Caltemp

Foamglas

25 (1) 50 (2) 63 (2 1/2) 100 (4) 110 (4 1/2) 40 (1 1/2) 50 (2) 63 (2 1/2) 100 (4) 110 (4 1/2)

50 (2) 63 (2 1/2)

85 (3 1/2) 110 (4 1/2)

125 (5)

65 (2 1/2) 63 (2 1/2)

85 (3 1/2) 110 (4 1/2)

125 (5)

80 (3) 75 (3) 100 (4) 125 (5) 150 (6) 100 (4) 75 (3) 100 (4) 125 (5) 150 (6) 125 (5) 75 (3) 100 (4) 125 (5) 150 (6)

150 (6) 85 (3 1/2)

110 (4 1/2) 135 (5 1/2)

150 (6)

200 (8) 85 (3 1/2)

110 (4 1/2) 135 (5 1/2)

150 (6)

250 (10) 100 (4) 125 (5) 150 (6) 165 (6 1/2) 300 (12) 100 (4) 125 (5) 150 (6) 165 (6 1/2) 350 (14) 100 (4) 125 (5) 150 (6) 165 (6 1/2) 400 (16) 100 (4) 125 (5) 150 (6) 165 (6 1/2) 450 (18) 100 (4) 125 (5) 150 (6) 165 (6 1/2)

33 63 00 VARHS


Insulation listed has passed a boiling test. Delta is available from Rockwool Manufacturing Co., Leeds, AL. Foamglass is available from Pittsburgh Corning Corp., Pittsburgh, PA. MPT is available from Mineral Products of Texas, Houston, TX. Thermo12 and Super Caltemp are available from JohnsManville, Denver, CO. Insulphen is available from Resolco International Div. www.resolco.com

3. Parts Not Insulated:

a. Threaded valves

b. Steam traps

c. Check valves

d. Unions

e. Threaded strainers

f. Strainer basket removal cover and bolting

g. Dielectric flanges and unions

h. Expansion joints

i. Flexible connectors

4. Installation:

a. Complete all pressure tests before installing insulation.

b. All insulation material shall be new, clean, dry and stored in a clean dry environment; jacketing materials shall be clean and unmarred; store adhesives in original containers. Materials shall not have exceeded the predicted shelf life as set by manufacturer.

TABLE 6

Minimum Pipe Insulation Thickness mm, (inches) For Steam less than 110 kPa (16 psi) gage, Condensate Return

Nominal Pipe Diameter mm

(inches) MPTPC MPTPF

Delta Foamglas Thermo-12 Super Caltemp

Insulphen

25 (1) and under 35 (1 1/2) 50 (2) 75 (3) 25 (1) 40 (1 1/2) 35 (1 1/2) 50 (2) 75 (3) 25 (1)

50 (2) 35 (1 1/2) 50 (2) 75 (3) 25 (1) 65 (2 1/2) 35 (1 1/2) 50 (2) 75 (3) 25 (1)

80 (3) 50 (2) 63 (2 1/2) 85 (3 1/2) 25 (1) 100 (4) 50 (2) 63 (2 1/2) 85 (3 1/2) 38 (1 1/2) 125 (5) 50 (2) 63 (2 1/2) 85 (3 1/2) 38 (1 1/2) 150 (6) 63 (2 1/2) 76 (3) 110 (4 1/2) 38 (1 1/2) 200 (8) 63 (2 1/2) 76 (3) 110 (4 1/2) 38 (1 1/2)

33 63 00 VARHS


c. Identify all materials incorporated in the job on manufacturers container by name, type and description.

d. Apply materials on clean, dry surfaces from which all dirt, loose scale, construction debris has been removed by wire brushing.

e. The installation shall be neat, thermally and structurally tight without sag, neatly finished at all hanger or other penetrations and shall provide a smooth finished surface primed as required to receive specified painting.

f. Do not use scrap insulation. Repair any work damaged by welding, burning, compressing due to concentrated construction loads.

g. Apply pipe covering protection saddles (MSS SP58, Type 39) at all hanger points. Fill space between saddle and piping with high density insulation, thoroughly packed. Terminate jacket clear of saddle bearing area.

h. Insulation and jacket shall terminate hard and tight at all anchor points.

i. Insulation termination at piping facilities not to be insulated shall stop short, and be finished with 45 degree chamfered section of insulating and finishing cement, and covered with jacket.

j. Flanged fittings and valves shall be insulated with sections of pipe insulation cut, fitted and arranged neatly, and firmly wired in place. Insulating cement shall fill all cracks, voids and outer surface for covering with glass cloth. Insulation of valve bonnet shall terminate on valve side of bonnet flange to permit valve repair.

k. On calcium silicate insulated piping systems, fittings shall be insulated with field or factory-shaped sections of insulation, finished with specified insulating and finishing cements and covered with jacket or PVC premolded cover. On sizes 50 mm (two inches) and smaller it is permissible to apply insulating and finishing cements, and cover with jacket or PVC premolded cover.

l. Fiberglass insulated piping systems fittings over 50 mm (two inch) size shall be insulated with specified molded pipe fitting insulation or compressed blanket, finished with specified insulating and finishing cements and covered with specified PVC fitting jacket. On sizes 50 mm (two inches) and under apply insulating and finishing cements and cover with PVC fitting jacket.

m. Apply glass cloth jacket using an approved adhesive. Glass cloth shall be smooth, tight and neatly finished at all edges; prime cloth to receive paint specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.

3.12 BURIED UTILITY WARNING TAPE

A. Bury directly above direct-buried system approximately 300 mm (12 inches) below grade.

3.13 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

A. Valve Identification: Provide laminated plastic signs, with engraved lettering not less than 5 mm (3/16 inch) high, on all isolating valves on steam and condensate return system, identifying building or area served. Attach to the valves with corrosionresistant chains.

B. Pipe Identification: Label service of all pipes in manholes. Refer to Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.

33 63 00 VARHS


3.14 TESTS

A. Application: All steam and condensate piping including in DDT systems, in manholes, in concrete shallow trenches, crawl spaces and areaways.

B. Demonstrate leaktightness of all piping systems by performing hydrostatic and operational tests. All labor, material and test instruments must be furnished by the Contractor. All instruments must be approved by the RE/COTR.

C. Pressure test direct-buried systems in conformance with requirements stated in this specification and in printed instructions for the system supplied. Tests must include carrier piping and conduit.

D. Holiday testing of direct-buried system steel conduit: Test entire surface of conduits for faults in coating after installation in trench prior to backfilling. Use test method and voltage recommended by coating manufacturer. Repair any holidays found and retest. System shall not be backfilled until all holidays are eliminated.

E. Radiographic testing of carrier pipe welds: Refer to Article, WELDING, in Part 3 of this specification.

F. Before conducting steam system operating test, remove steam trap elements or use bypass connections around traps; then flush lines with high pressure water until discharge shows no foreign matter to the satisfaction of RE/COTR.

G. Flushing: Just prior to pressure and hydrostatic testing, the pipe system shall be flushed with fresh water until piping is free of dirt and foreign matter.

H. Initial Piping Leak Tests: Before insulation is applied at field joints, piping shall be pressurized to 25 psig air pressure and tested for leaks with soap solution. Leaks shall be repaired and test repeated.

I. Hydrostatic and Operational Tests of All Carrier Piping:

1. Where concrete thrust blocks have been provided, testing shall not begin on any section of pipeline until at least 5 days after placing of the concrete.

2. Test pressure gauges for a specific test shall have dials indicating not less than 11/2 times or more than 2 times the test pressure.

3. After installation of insulation, conduit, or jackets, anchor blocks, backfill, and flushing, hydrostatic pressure shall be applied to 200 psig and allowed to stabilize to ground temperature while maintaining 200 psig, plus or minus 10 psi. After stabilization, pressure source shall be removed. Piping must hold 200 psig, plus or minus 10 psi, for at least 4 hours. Leaks shall be repaired and test repeated.

4. Test piping located in concrete shallow trenches prior to installing trench covers. Test direct--buried systems prior to backfilling.

5. Remove or isolate any elements of the system such as expansion joints, which are not designed for the test pressure.

6. Prior to acceptance of installation, Contractor shall subject system to operating tests as may be required by RE/COTR to demonstrate satisfactory functional and operating efficiency. These operating tests shall cover a period of not less than six hours for each portion of system tested. Conduct tests at times as the RE/COTR may direct.

7. Provide calibrated instruments, equipment, facilities and labor, at no additional cost to the Government. Test gage shall read in increments not exceeding 1 kPa (0.1 psi).

33 63 00 VARHS


8. Repeat tests when failures occur.

9. After completion of satisfactory test, replace all elements that have been removed prior to testing.

J. Pneumatic Testing of DDT System Conduits:

1. Conduit Leak Tests: After insulation and conduit joints are installed, and before anchor blocks are installed, conduit shall be pressurized to 15 psig air pressure and tested for leaks with soap solution. Leaks shall be repaired and the test repeated.

2. Conduit Pressure Tests: After leak testing and before backfilling, conduit shall be pressurized to 100 kPa (15 psi) air pressure and allowed to stabilize. After stabilization the pressure source shall be removed. Conduit must hold 15 psig air pressure, plus or minus 2 psi, for at least 4 hours. Pressure test shall be repeated after backfilling. Leaks shall be repaired and the test repeated.

3. Perform test on all sections of the system before field-coating the field joints and before backfilling.

4. Pressure shall be measured with a gage with reading increments of 1 kPa (0.1 psi).

5. Each conduit field joint shall be tested for leaks by means of soap solution or equivalent.

K. Operational Tests: After completion of the system, or a testable portion thereof, the system shall be operated for not less than 6 hours at operational temperatures and pressures to demonstrate satisfactory function.

L. Defiencies discovered shall be corrected at the Contractor’s expense, to satisfaction of the RE/COTR. Major deficiencies or failure to correct deficiencies, to the satisfaction of the RE/COTR, may be considered cause for rejecting the entire installation.

— — — E N D — — —